(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Graduate catalog"

EST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY 

Graduate 
Catalog 




^fillimCkiiMiSSion 

'Teaching ■ < Research • "Public Service 




West Virginia University Bulletin (USPS 676-980) (ISSN 0362-3009) 

Series 89, No. 10-1, April, 1990 

Issued Monthly in January, February, April, and October; 

four times in March; and twelve times in June. 

Second-class postage paid at Morgantown, WV 26505 

and at additional mailing offices. 

POSTMASTER: Send Form 3579 to 
West Virginia University, Morgantown, WV 26506. 



WEST VIRGINIA 
UNIVERSITY 

1990-92 
Graduate Catalog 



West Virginia University does not discriminate on the 
grounds of race, color, national origin, sex, age, veteran 
status or handicap in the administration of any of its 
educational programs, activities, or with respect to 
admission and employment. Inquiries may be directed 
to the Section 504, Title IX Coordinator, Office of the 
President, (304) 293-4160. 

This two year bulletin represents the planned schedules 
and offerings for 1990 through 1992. 

The 1990-92 West Virginia University Graduate Cata- 
log, published by Publications Services, is a general 
source of information about course offerings, academic 
programs and requirements, expenses, rules, and poli- 
cies. The courses, requirements, and regulations con- 
tained herein are subject to continuing review and 
change by the University of West Virginia Board of 
Trustees, University administrators, and the faculties 
of the schools and colleges to best meet the goals and 
objectives of the University. The University, therefore, 
reserves the right to change, delete, supplement, or 
otherwise amend at any time the information, course 
offerings, requirements, rules, and policies contained 
herein without prior notice. 



UNIVERSITY CALENDAR, 1990-91 
Summer Sessions, 1990 

May 21, Monday Registration, First Summer Session 

May 21, Monday First Classes 

May 28, Monday Memorial Day Recess 

June 29, Friday Final Exam for First Six-Week Session 

July 2, Monday Registration, Second Summer Session 

July 2, Monday First Classes 

July 4, Wednesday Independence Day Recess 

August 10, Friday Final Exam for Second Six-Week Session 

First Semester, 1990 

August 16, 17, Thursday and Friday New Student Orientation 

August 17, Friday General Registration 

August 20, Monday First Classes 

August 20, Monday Late Registration Fee in Effect for All Students 

August 24, Friday Last Day to Register, Add New Courses, 

Make Section Changes, Change Pass/Fail and Audit 

September 3, Monday Labor Day Recess 

September 10, Monday Faculty Assembly 

September 20, Thursday Rosh Hashannah— Day of Special Concern 

September 29, Saturday Yom Kippur — Day of Special Concern 

October 5, Friday Mid-Semester 

October 9, Tuesday Mid-Semester Reports Due 

October 26, Friday Last Day to Drop a Class 

November 6, Tuesday Election Day Recess 

November 17, Saturday, 

to November 25, Sunday, inclusive Thanksgiving Recess 

December 6, Thursday Last Day to Withdraw From University 

December 7, Friday Last Day of Classes 

December 10, Monday, 

to December 15, Saturday, inclusive Final Examinations 

December 16, Sunday, 

to January 3, Thursday, inclusive Christmas Recess 

Second Semester, 1991 

January 4, Friday General Registration 

January 7, Monday First Classes 

January 7, Monday Late Registration Fee in Effect for All Students 

January 11, Friday Last Day to Register, Add New Courses, 

Make Section Changes, Change Pass/Fail and Audit 

January 21, Monday Martin Luther King, Jr. Birthday Recess 

February 7, Wednesday (Not a Holiday) West Virginia University Day 

February 22, Friday Mid-Semester 

February 26, Tuesday Mid-Semester Reports Due 

March 9, Saturday, to March 17, Sunday, inclusive Spring Recess 

March 22, Friday Last Day to Drop a Class 

March 29, Friday Friday Before Easter Recess 

March 30, Saturday Passover — Day of Special Concern 

April 25, Thursday Last Day to Withdraw From University 

April 26, Friday Last Day of Classes 

April 29, Monday, to May 4, Saturday, inclusive Final Examinations 

May 6, Monday Grade Reports for All Graduates Due in Dean's Office 

May 6, Monday Dean's Reports for All Graduates Due in 

Office of Admissions and Records 

May 11, Saturday Alumni Day 

May 12, Sunday Commencement 

The WVU academic year is divided into two semesters of about seventeen weeks 
each and two summer sessions of six weeks each. 



CONTENTS 

University Calendars, 1990-91, 1991-92 2, 4 

Part 1— Government and Organization of WVU 5 

University of West Virginia Board of Trustees 6 

West Virginia University Board of Advisors 6 

President's Cabinet, Deans 7 

Directors, Distinguished Professors 8 

Administration of Colleges and Schools 9 

Part 2— Graduate Education at WVU 23 

Organization of Graduate Education 24 

Degree Programs Offered by WVU 27 

Application for Graduate Study 31 

Admission to Graduate Study 34 

Special Additional Requirements and Information 36 

College of Agriculture and Forestry 36 

College of Business and Economics 36 

College of Creative Arts 36 

School of Dentistry 37 

College of Engineering 37 

College of Human Resources and Education 39 

Enrollment and Registration 45 

Degree Completion 53 

Part 3— Fees and Other Information 61 

Part 4— Graduate Programs and Courses 73 

Part 5— Other Graduate Courses and Facilities 403 

Part 6— Graduate Faculty 416 

Index 446 



CORRESPONDENCE 



Admissions, Catalogs, Records 

Office of Admissions and Records 

West Virginia University 

P.O. Box 6009 

Morgantown, WV 26506-6009 

Graduate Programs 

Assistant Vice President 

for Curriculum and Instruction 
West Virginia University 
P.O. Box 6001 
Morgantown, WV 26506-6001 



Scholarships and Work-Study 

Student Financial Aid Office 
West Virginia University 
P.O. Box 6004 
Morgantown, WV 26506-6004 

Veterans Educational Assistance 

Student Financial Aid Office 
West Virginia University 
P.O. Box 6004 
Morgantown, WV 26506-6004 



TENTATIVE UNIVERSITY CALENDAR, 1991-92 
Summer Sessions, 1991 

May 20, Monday Registration, First Summer Session 

May 20, Monday First Classes 

May 27, Monday Memorial Day Recess 

June 28, Friday . . ., Final Exam for First Six-Week Session 

July 1, Monday Registration, Second Summer Session 

July 1, Monday First Classes 

July 4, Thursday Independence Day Recess 

August 9, Friday Final Exam for Second Six-Week Session 

First Semester, 1991 

August 22, 23, Thursday and Friday New Student Orientation 

August 23, Friday General Registration 

August 26, Monday First Classes 

August 26, Monday Late Registration Fee in Effect for All Students 

August 30, Friday Last Day to Register, Add New Courses, 

Make Section Changes, Change Pass/Fail and Audit 

September 2, Monday Labor Day Recess 

September 9, Monday Faculty Assembly 

September 9, Monday Rosh Hashannah— Day of Special Concern 

September 18, Wednesday Yom Kippur — Day of Special Concern 

October 11, Friday Mid-Semester 

October 15, Tuesday Mid-Semester Reports Due 

November 1, Friday Last Day to Drop a Class 

November 23, Saturday, 

to December 1, Sunday, inclusive Thanksgiving Recess 

December 12, Thursday Last Day to Withdraw From University 

December 13, Friday Last Day of Classes 

December 16, Monday, 

to December 21, Saturday, inclusive Final Examinations 

December 22, Sunday, 

to January 9, Thursday, inclusive Christmas Recess 

Second Semester, 1992 

January 10, Friday General Registration 

January 13, Monday First Classes 

January 13, Monday Late Registration Fee in Effect for All Students 

January 17, Friday Last Day to Register, Add New Courses, 

Make Section Changes, Change Pass/Fail and Audit 

January 20, Monday Martin Luther King, Jr. Birthday Recess 

February 7, Friday (Not a Holiday) West Virginia University Day 

February 28, Friday Mid-Semester 

March 3, Tuesday Mid-Semester Reports Due 

March 14, Saturday, to March 22, Sunday, inclusive Spring Recess 

March 27, Friday Last Day to Drop a Class 

April 17, Friday Friday Before Easter Recess 

April 18, Saturday Passover— Day of Special Concern 

April 30, Thursday Last Day to Withdraw From University 

May 1, Friday Last Day of Classes 

May 4, Monday, to May 9, Saturday, inclusive Final Examinations 

May 11, Monday Grade Reports for All Graduates Due in Dean's Office 

May 11, Monday Dean's Reports for All Graduates Due in 

Office of Admissions and Records 

May 16, Saturday Alumni Day 

May 17, Sunday Commencement 

The WVU academic year is divided into two semesters of about seventeen weeks 
each and two summer sessions of six weeks each. 



Parti 

Government and Organization of WVU 

The University of West Virginia Board of Trustees is vested by law with 
the authority for the control and management of the University and certain 
other state institutions of higher education. Serving on the Board are eleven 
members appointed by the Governor, with advice and consent of the Senate, 
and five ex-officio members including a faculty member chosen by the 
Trustees' Advisory Council of Faculty, a staff member representing the 
Trustees' Advisory Council of Classified Staff, and a student named by the 
Trustees' Advisory Council of Students and the State Superintendent of 
Schools. 

The president, appointed by the Board of Trustees, is the chief executive 
officer of the University. 

The University's 1 1-member Board of Advisors reviews all WVU proposals 
involving its mission, academic programs, budget, capital facilities, institu- 
tion-wide personnel policies, and other matters requested by the president. 
The Board of Advisors also serves as the search and screening committee for 
new university presidents under guidelines established by the Board of 
Trustees (in this role, the Board of Advisors appoints three additional WVU 
faculty and the Board of Trustees appoints three additional members to 
comprise a 17-member committee). 

The Faculty Senate is the vehicle for faculty participation in the 
governance of the University. It has original jurisdiction over all matters of 
academic interest and educational policy that concern the entire University or 
affect more than one college or school. The senate's decisions are subject to 
review and approval by the president and the Board of Trustees. Senators are 
elected by members of the University faculty to represent their colleges and 
other constituencies. Each constituency is entitled to one senator for twenty 
members of the University faculty. The senate normally meets the second 
Monday of each month. 

The senate elects a faculty chair each year to preside over the meetings of 
the senate and the executive committee. Three faculty members also serve on 
the Vice Presidents' Advisory Committee for Promotion and Tenure. 

The president meets regularly with the cabinet and monthly with the 
Faculty Senate Executive Committee, the staff council, and student adminis- 
tration. 

The University Faculty Assembly includes the president as presiding 
officer, vice presidents, academic deans, associate deans, professors, associate 
professors, assistant professors, and instructors holding appointments on a 
full-time basis. The assembly meets once a year in September. 

West Virginia University also has a tradition of strong student adminis- 
tration that touches all aspects of student life and represents student opinion 
to the administration and faculty. Student administration has three main 
units: the executive branch, the 11-member board of governors, and the 
judicial board. Students also serve on University-wide committees and on the 
Mountainlair Advisory Council. 

Non-teaching employees belong to the staff council, which consists of 
twelve members elected by their fellow employees in six occupational groups, 
or to Laborers' International Union Local 814, AFL-CIO, which represents 
many employees. 



Stephen Haid, Secretary; Department of Education and the Arts 

University of West Virginia Board of Trustees 

950 Kanawha Boulevard East, Charleston, WV 25301 

David C. Hardesty, Jr., Ripley, Chair 

A. Michael Perry, Huntington, Vice Chair 

Lucia James, Charleston, Secretary 

Richard Adams, Parkersburg 

Thomas L. Craig, Jr., Huntington 

Kay Goodwin, Ripley 

John Hoblitzell, Charleston 

Robert McMillan, Martinsburg 

Joseph Powell, Charleston 

R. W. Wilkinson, Bluefield 

Maestro Rachael Worby, Wheeling 

Linda L. DeMoss, Washington, Student Representative 

Joseph Simoni, Morgantown, Faculty Representative 

Martin Smelik, Keyser, Classified Staff Representative 

James W. Rowley, Ravenswood, Interim Chancellor 

M. Douglas Call, Charleston, ex officio 

Henry Marockie, Charleston, ex officio 

West Virginia University Board of Advisors 

Office of the President, Morgantown, WV 26506 

Willie D. Akers, Jr., West Logan 

Ancella Bickley, Cross Lanes 

Sue Seibert Farnsworth, Wheeling 

Richard Douglas, Martinsburg 

Lawson Hamilton, Jr., Lewisburg 

Hayward Helmick, Morgantown, Staff Representative 

Boyd Holtan, Morgantown, Faculty Representative 

Margaret Lucas, Administrative Appointee 

Thomas E. Potter, Charleston 

Sam Sutton, Philadelphia, Student Representative 

Daniel B. Wharton, Parkersburg 

President's Cabinet 

Neil S. Bucklew, Ph.D., President 

Frank A. Franz, Ph.D., Provost and Vice President for Academic Affairs 

and Research 
Edwin Flowers, J.D., Vice President for Institutional Advancement 
John E. Jones, M.D., Vice President for Health Sciences 
Herman Mertins, Jr., Ph.D., Vice President for Administration and Finance 
Dianne Brown, Ph.D., Special Assistant to the President for Social Justice 
Mary Jane Hitt, M.A., Special Assistant to the President 
Jon A. Reed, J.D., Executive Officer and General Counsel 
Marion F. Dearnley, J.D., Associate Provost for Student Affairs 
James K. Hackett, M.B.A., Associate Vice President for Finance and 

Administration, Health Sciences 
John Signorelli, M.B.A., Associate Vice President for Finance 
Rachel B. Tompkins, Ed.D., Associate Provost for Extension and Economic 

Development 

6 



William E. Vehse, Ph.D., Associate Provost for Academic Affairs 

Boyd Holtan, Ed.D., Faculty Representative 

Marti Shamberger, Staff Council President 

Sam Sutton, Student Body President 

James Robinson, M. A., President, WVU Foundation (ex officio) 

Deans 

College of Agriculture and Forestry/Agricultural and Forestry 
Experiment Station, Robert H. Maxwell, Ph.D., Dean/Director 

College of Arts and Sciences, Gerald E. Lang, Ph.D. 

College of Business and Economics, Cyril M. Logar, Ph.D. 

College of Creative Arts, Margaret O. Lucas, Ed.D. 

School of Dentistry, W. Robert Biddington, D.D.S. 

College of Engineering/Engineering Experiment Station, 
Curtis J. Tompkins, Ph.D., Dean/Director 

College of Human Resources and Education, Diane L. Reinhard, Ph.D. 

Perley Isaac Reed School of Journalism, Emery L. Sasser, Ph.D. 

College of Law, Donald G. Gifford, J.D. 

Library Services, Ruth M. Jackson, Ph.D. 

School of Medicine, Robert M. D'Alessandri, M.D. 

College of Mineral and Energy Resources, John L. Schroder, Jr., M.S.E.M. 

School of Nursing, Lorita D. Jenab, Ed.D. 

School of Pharmacy, Sidney A. Rosenbluth, Ph.D. 

School of Physical Education, J. William Douglas, Ph.D. 

School of Social Work, Michael A. Patchner, Ph.D. 

Student Life, Herman L. Moses, M.A. 

University Extension and Continuing Education, R. Rudy Filek, Ph.D. 

Directors 

Academic Advising, Marian C. Jensen, Ed.D. 

Admissions and Records, Glenn G. Carter, Ed.D. 

Air Force Aerospace Studies (ROTC), Col. Michael D. Edwards, M.P.A. 

Alumni Activities, Steven Douglas, M.S. 

Book Stores, John J. Porter, M.B.A. 

Budget Planning, Narvel G. Weese, Jr., M.S. 

Bureau of Business Research, Tom S. Witt, Ph.D. 

Career Services Center, Robert L. Kent, M.A. 

Center for Black Culture, Charles C. Blue, Jr., M.A. (Interim) 

Center for Women's Studies, Judith G. Stitzel, Ph.D. 

Computing Services, William J. Logar, B.S. 

Controller, William A. McCune, M.B.A. 

Counseling Service, Philip E. Comer, Ph.D. 

Energy and Water Research Center, Richard A. Bajura, Ph.D. 

Environmental Health and Safety, Roger L.Pugh 

Facilities Planning and Management, Glenda A. Bixler, (Interim), B.A. 

Gerontology Center, Rick A. Briggs, M.A., (Interim) 

Housing and Residence Life, Stephen S. Showers, M.Ed. 

Human Resources, S. Thomas Serpento, M.A. 

Institutional Analysis and Planning, Kathleen K. Bissonnette, Ph.D. 

Intercollegiate Athletics, Edward M. Pastilong, M.S. 

Internal Auditing, William R. Quigley, B.S., C.P.A. 



International Programs, Edna L. McBreen, Ph.D. 

Military Science (Army ROTC), Lt. Col. Jerald W. Fisher, M.A. 

Mountainlair, Daniel N. Adams, Ed.D. 

News and Information Services, Robert L. Verbosky, M.B.A. 

Off-Campus Credit, John R. Diebolt, Ph.D. 

Parking, Transportation and Mail Service, Robert J. Bates, B.S.M.E. 

Physical Plant, Dorsey D. Jacobs 

Printing Services, Paul H. Stevenson, B.S. 

Publications Services, John Luchok, B.S.J. 

Public Safety, Robert E. Roberts, B.A. 

Purchasing, Philip A. Ondo, B.S. 

Radio and Television Services, C. Gregory Van Camp, M.S.J. 

Regional Research Institute, Andrew M. Isserman, Ph.D. 

Sponsored Programs, William W. Reeves, M.P.A. 

Student Activities and Educational Programs, David H. Taylor (Interim) 

Student Financial Aid, Neil Bolyard, M.A. 

Summer Sessions, R. Rudy Filek, Ph.D. 

Telecommunications, Floyd R. Crosby, Jr., M.B.A. 

University Honors Program, William E. Collins, Ph.D. 

Distinguished Professors 

Thomas D. Barton, Roscoe P. & Hale J. Posten Professor of Law. 

Franklin D. Cleckley, Arthur B. Hodges Professor of Law. 

Bernard R. Cooper, Claude Worthington Bendeum Professor of Physics. 

Charles R. DiSalvo, Woodrow A. Potesta Professor of Law. 

William W. Fleming, Mylan Chair of Pharmacology. 

Gabor B. Fodor, Centennial Professor of Chemistry, Emeritus. 

Ruel E. Foster, Claude Worthington Benedum Professor of English, Emeritus. 

Frank Gagliano, Claude Worthington Benedum Professor of Theatre. 

George A. Hedge, Edward J. Van Liere Professor of Physiology. 

Robert Hoeldtke, Charles E. Compton Chair of Nutrition. 

Judith Koffler, William J. Maier, Jr. Visiting Chair of Law. 

Wm. H. Miernyk, Claude Worthington Benedum Professor of Mineral 

Resources Emeritus. 
Patrick O'Donnell, Eberly Professor of American Literature. 
Hayne W. Reese, Centennial Professor of Psychology. 
Martin W. Schein, Centennial Professor of Biology, Emeritus. 
Kenneth Showalter, Eberly Professor of Chemistry. 
George W. Weinstein, Jane McDermott Shott Chair of Ophthalmology. 



College of Agriculture and Forestry 

Robert H. Maxwell, Ph.D., Dean; Director of Agricultural and Forestry Experiment 

Station 
Kenneth D. Mcintosh, Ph.D., Associate Dean, Academic Affairs 
Alfred L. Barr, Ph.D., Associate Director, Agricultural and Forestry Experiment Station 

The College of Agriculture and Forestry is divided into six divisions of 
study: animal and veterinary sciences, family resources, forestry, plant and 
soil sciences, resource management, and international agriculture and forestry. 
The college's faculty and staff are located in three major buildings on the 
Evansdale campus, on four farms owned by the College of Agriculture and 
Forestry in the Morgantown area, and in nearby Cooper's Rock State Forest. 

The college and its curricula stress applied ecology, man-made structures, 
and relationships among humans as they live and work in various environ- 
ments. The student of agriculture and forestry studies many different 
subjects concerned with human behavior, plants, animals, and microbes that 
interrelate with and affect our environment. The study of ecology is 
interwoven throughout the courses offered in the college to give the student a 
comprehensive understanding of the basic elements at work in our environ- 
ment. 

The college, too, is the site of the state's Agricultural and Forestry 
Experiment Station, so the University maintains extensive land for research 
purposes. This land is divided into areas devoted to dairy, livestock, poultry, 
forestry, wildlife, horticulture, agronomy, and soils. Students and professors 
use these areas regularly for instruction and research, and information 
generated at these holdings is used to update subject matterin the classroom. 

The College of Agriculture and Forestry offers two doctoral programs, 
one in agricultural sciences and one in forest resource sciences. Currently, the 
agricultural sciences program allows students to choose among the following 
areas for doctorate study: agricultural biochemistry, agricultural microbiol- 
ogy, agronomy, animal nutrition, and plant pathology. In the forest resource 
sciences program, students can choose an area of emphasis among the 
following: forest resource management, wildlife and fisheries management, 
and wood science. 

In addition to the Ph.D. programs in agricultural sciences and forest 
resource sciences, the College of Agriculture and Forestry participates in two 
interdisciplinary doctoral programs: genetics and developmental biology and 
reproductive physiology. 

The College of Agriculture and Forestry offers thirteen programs leading 
to a master of science degree. Students can choose among the following areas 
for a master's degree: agricultural biochemistry, agricultural economics, 
agricultural education, agricultural microbiology, agronomy, animal and 
veterinary sciences, entomology, family resources, forestry, horticulture, 
plant pathology, recreation and parks management, and wildlife and fisheries 
management. In addition, students can choose to study under the master of 
agriculture program or elect to pursue a master's degree in the interdisciplinary 
areas of reproductive physiology or genetics and developmental biology. 

For additional information concerning any of the graduate programs in 
Agriculture and Forestry contact: Associate Dean, Coordinator of Graduate 
Studies, College of Agriculture and Forestry, West Virginia University, 
Morgantown, WV 26506; telephone (304) 293-2691 



College of Arts and Sciences 

Gerald E. Lang, Ph.D., Dean 
Shirley Dowdy, Ph.D., Associate Dean 
John F. Schnabel, Ph.D., Associate Dean 
Frank J. Calzonetti, Ph.D., Assistant Dean 
Nicholas G. Evans, Ph.D., Assistant Dean 

The College of Arts and Sciences is West Virginia University's largest 
college with more than 300 faculty in 17 academic departments in literature 
and the humanities, social and behavioral sciences, and mathematics and 
natural sciences. The college supports ten doctoral programs and 16 master's 
programs; its departments occupy 12 buildings in the downtown campus area 
of Morgantown. The faculty of the college are actively involved in scholarship 
and research and are at the frontiers of their respective fields of knowledge 
and exploration. Several faculty members have received nationally-recognized 
awards for their teaching and research efforts. These awards not only 
acknowledge extreme dedication but also accentuate the relationship between 
the faculty and the students. Graduate students often collaborate with faculty 
on specialized research projects which lead to publications in national and 
international journals. In 1988, the faculty published over 25 books and more 
than 300 articles, delivered 390 professional presentations, and received 83 
grants, 67 academic honors, and 72 professional association citations. 
Sponsored research activity has increased yearly for the past five years and 
now exceeds $2 million annually. 

The College of Arts and Sciences offers doctoral programs in biology, 
chemistry, computer science, English, geology, history, mathematics, physics, 
political science, and psychology. Available research or teaching concentra- 
tions are as follows: 

• Biology — cellular and molecular. 

• Chemistry — analytical, inorganic, organic, physical, and theoretical 
chemistry. 

• Computer science — artificial intelligence. 

• English — literature in preparation for teaching. 

• Geology — sedimentary basin analysis and the Appalachian province. 

• History — historiography, research methods, and interpretation. 

• Mathematics — discrete and applied mathematics. 

• Physics — condensed matter, applied physics, plasma physics, astro- 
physics, nuclear models, and elementary particle physics. 

• Political science — teaching or public service management and policy 
analysis. 

• Psychology — behavior analysis, developmental psychology, and clinical 
psychology. 

Graduate programs leading to a master's degree are available in biology, 
chemistry, communication studies, computer science, English, foreign lan- 
guages, geography, geology, history, liberal arts, mathematics, physics, 
psychology, public administration, sociology and anthropology, and statistics. 
Each program prepares students for further study or for productive roles in 
professional environments. 

Information concerning graduate programs in the College of Arts and 
Sciences may be obtained by contacting: Assistant Dean for Research and 
Graduate Studies, College of Arts and Sciences, 201 Woodburn Hall, West 
Virginia University, Morgantown, WV 26505; telephone (304) 293-4611. 



10 



College of Business and Economics 

Cyril M. Logar, D.B.A., Dean 

Gail A. Shaw, C.P.A., Ph.D., Associate Dean 

Richard M. Gardner, MB. A., Assistant Dean 

Jay H. Coats, Ph.D., Director of Graduate Programs 

In the 1990-91 academic year, business and economics classes for the first 
time will be held in a new building designed particularly to meet the needs of 
the College of Business and Economics. Our facility houses modern classrooms, 
two auditoriums, state-of-the-art computer laboratories, and space for our 
research and service centers. The College offers quality professional programs 
for graduate students. The College does so by developing and maintaining 
up-to-date programs, recruiting outstanding students, serving their course 
needs, and meeting or exceeding standards of excellence set by the American 
Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business (AACSB). 

The College offers the only business programs in West Virginia that are 
accredited by AACSB, which assures students and prospective employers 
that our programs adhere to the highest standards of excellence for business 
programs. The College has maintained full membership accreditation in the 
AACSB since 1954. 

Because students are our most valuable resource and our most valuable 
product, our mission centers around preparing them for professional careers 
in business, industry, government, and education. The College administration 
and faculty work with the WVU Career Services Center and private 
employers to place our graduates in rewarding professional positions. 

The master of arts and doctor of philosophy degrees in economics prepare 
students for careers in business, government, and higher education. Students 
receive in-depth training in the concepts and methods of economic analysis 
and also study business analysis, public policy, mathematical economics, 
labor economics, environmental economics, public finance, and econometrics. 
These programs are well-suited to students with undergraduate degrees in 
economics, finance, mathematics, statistics, public policy, history, and other 
humanities majors. The MBA program is especially attractive for the student 
with a non-business undergraduate major since no business courses are 
prerequisite for admission. Coursework includes an even exposure to all of 
the functional areas of management and provides a broad, general management 
orientation. The master of science in industrial and labor relations program 
provides a flexible, interdisciplinary education for the student desiring a 
career in human resources management (industrial and labor relations). All 
undergraduate majors are acceptable. Areas of study may include the 
functional areas of business, counseling, law, safety, sociology, and others. 
The MPA program is available to students with undergraduate degrees in 
accounting. The program follows the AICPA's recommendations for a five- 
year accounting education and meets the requirements of all states with 
150-hour requirements for CPA certification. Each of the master's programs 
can be completed by a full-time student in one to one and a half years. The 
MBA program is also available on a weekend basis at four locations in West 
Virginia. 

Specific information about graduate programs in the College of Business 
and Economics may be obtained from the Graduate Program Office, Room 333 
Business and Economics Building, P.O. Box 6025, West Virginia University, 
Morgantown, WV 26506-6025. The phone number is (304) 293-5408. 



11 



College of Creative Arts 

Margaret O. Lucas, Ed.D., Dean 

Richard W. Phalunas, Jr., Ed.D., Special Assistant to the Dean 

The College of Creative Arts, composed of the Divisions of Art, Music, 
and Theatre, serves an academic and cultural function which provides an 
educational and interdisciplinary enviornment for the exploration, advance- 
ment, and understanding of the visual and performing arts. A distinguished 
faculty of actors, artists, composers, conductors, directors, instrumentalists, 
vocalists, and writers bring to the College a commitment to a creative process 
of artistic growth which is shared with each student. Through teaching, 
research, and service, the faculty of the college provide students the 
professional preparation to enable achievement of the highest level of 
performance, scholarly research, and creative activity. Graduate programs in 
art, music, and theatre are characterized by quality and diversity of faculty, 
students, and curricular opportunity. Each division is an accredited member 
of the nationally recognized accrediting agency for professional instruction in 
the discipline: art programs are accredited by the National Association of 
Schools for Art and Design; music programs are accredited by the National 
Association of Schools of Music; and theatre is accredited by the National 
Association of Schools of Theatre. 

The College of Creative Arts is also committed to providing the highest 
levels of creative, intellectual, and cultural experiences in art, music, and 
theatre to the University, the state, and the region. In an environment rich 
with art exhibitions, concerts, and plays, students gain the knowledge, skills, 
experience, and inspiration necessary for professional success. Students, 
faculty, and visiting artists present a full calendar of performances and 
exhibitions open to the public. The Creative Arts Center, which houses the 
college, is a modern, multi-million dollar instructional and performance 
facility with three theatres, two recital halls/recording studios; scenery, 
painting, drawing, design, costume, printmaking, sculpture, ceramic, and 
instrumental studios; additional art studios; and two art galleries. 

The Ph.D. curriculum in music prepares students for careers as teachers 
in higher education; the D.M.A. curricula in performance and literature 
(piano, organ, voice) or composition prepare students who seek advanced 
training while also aspiring to teaching careers in higher education. The 
master of fine arts is a terminal degree in art and in theatre which prepares 
students for careers in ceramics, graphic design, painting, printmaking, 
sculpture, acting, or theatre design/technology. 

The master of music enhances undergraduate programs in performance, 
music education, theory, music history, and composition. The master of arts 
has concentrations in art education, art history, and studio art. 

For further information, please contact: Graduate adviser, Division of Art 
at (304) 293-2140 

Director of graduate studies in music, Division of Music at (304) 293-5511 

Chair, Division of Theatre at (304) 293-2020 

Our mailing address is Creative Arts Center, West Virginia University, 
Morgantown, WV 26506-6111. 



12 



School of Dentistry 

Dr. W. Robert Biddington, D.D.S., Dean 
Dr. Henry J. Bianco, D.D.S., Associate Dean 
Dr. William L. Graham, D.D.S., Associate Dean 
Dr. William R. McCutcheon, D.D.S., Associate Dean 
Dr. James E. Overberger, D.D.S., Associate Dean 
Dr. Frank H. Stevens, D.D.S., Assistant Dean 

The School of Dentistry was established by an act of the West Virginia 
Legislature on March 9, 1951 and offers baccalaureate, professional, and 
advanced degrees. The school is located on the first floor of the Health 
Sciences Center North. Modern clinical facilities include over 140 treatment 
areas, and a new state-of-the-art preclinical simulation teaching laboratory. 

The majority of the faculty are full-time and have had advanced 
education in all of the recognized specialty areas. All programs are fully 
accredited by the Commission on Accreditation of the American Dental 
Association. The School will be expanding its specialty and research areas as 
additional space and funds become available. 

The School of Dentistry offers several advanced education programs 
beyond the D.D.S. and B.S. degrees. 

The Department of Endodontics offers a program of advanced study and 
clinical training leading to the master of science. The program requires a 
minimum of 24 months (two academic years and two summer sessions) of 
full-time residency in the School of Dentistry. It is designed to qualify 
dentists for careers in endodontic clinical practice, teaching, and research. 

The Department of Orthodontics offers a program of advanced study and 
clinical training leading to the degree of master of science. The program 
requires a minimum of 34 months (three academic years and two summers) of 
full-time residency in the School of Dentistry. It is designed to qualify 
dentists for careers in orthodontic clinical practice, teaching, and research. 

The Department of Dental Hygiene offers a program of advanced study 
and specialized training leading to the degree of master of science. The 
program requires the completion of a minimum of 36 semester hours through 
full-time or part-time enrollment in the School of Dentistry. It is designed to 
qualify dental hygienists for careers in teaching, administration, research and 
management. 

The Department of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery offers one four-year 
residency. Seven one-year general practice residencies also are offered by the 
School of Dentistry. Continuing education courses are offered throughout the 
year. Information concerning admission requirements and courses of study in 
the M.S. program may be obtained from the Office of the Associate Dean for 
Research and Graduate Affairs, WVU School of Dentistry, Morgantown, WV 
26506; telephone (304) 293-4719. 



13 



College of Engineering 

Curtis }. Tompkins, Ph.D., Dean 

John T. Jurewicz, Ph.D., Associate Dean for Academic Affairs and Research 

The College of Engineering programs are administered through the 
Departments of Chemical Engineering, Civil Engineering, Electrical and 
Computer Engineering, Industrial Engineering, and Mechanical and Aerospace 
Engineering. 

Graduate programs, dedicated to the development of engineering practice, 
science, and research, emphasize numerous creative specialities. These pro- 
grams, on which knowledge is explored through study and research, provide an 
environment in which all programs are updated constantly to give students the 
professional education needed in a technological-scientific society. 

The Engineering Sciences Building, on the Evansdale Campus, is adjacent 
to the Engineering Research Building, which became operational in 1990 and 
which provides approximately 45,000 additional square feet of space for 
research. The facility is available for use by all disciplines. 

The Ph.D. degree is awarded upon completion of a program of advanced 
study that includes a minimum of two semesters of continuous on-campus 
residence, submission of an acceptable dissertation, and the successful 
completion of comprehensive and final oral examinations. 

Designated master's degrees are offered in aerospace, chemical, civil, 
electrical, industrial, and mechanical engineering. In addition, a master of 
science in engineering degree is offered to qualified students whose baccalau- 
reate work was done in a field other than engineering, and a master of science 
degree is offered in occupational health and safety engineering under the 
auspices of the industrial engineering department. A certificate in manufac- 
turing systems engineering is offered for candidates working on MSEE, 
MSIE, and MSME degrees. 

The Accreditation Board for Engineering and Technology is recognized 
by the U.S. Department of Education and the Council on Postsecondary 
Accreditation as the sole agency responsible for accreditation of educational 
programs leading to degrees in engineering. ABET accomplishes 
its accreditation mission through the Engineering Accreditation Commission. 

ABET, through its participating bodies (American Academy of Environ- 
mental Engineers, American Congress on Surveying and Mapping, American 
Institute of Aeronautics and Astronautics, Inc., American Institute of 
Chemical Engineers, American Institute of Industrial Engineers, Inc., American 
Institute of Mining, Metallurgical and Petroleum Engineers, American Nuclear 
Society, American Society of Agricultural Engineers, American Society of 
Civil Engineers, American Society for Engineering Education, American 
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc., The 
American Society of Mechanical Engineers, The Institute of Electrical and 
Electronics Engineers, Inc., National Council of Engineering Examiners, 
National Institute of Ceramic Engineers, National Society of Professional 
Engineers, Society of Automotive Engineers, Society of Manufacturing 
Engineers, and Society of Naval Architects and Marine Engineers) is 
concerned with the enhancement of the status of the engineer and the 
engineering profession, and the establishment of criteria and standards for 
accreditation of engineering programs at colleges and universities. 

For specific information about a particular program, students should 
contact the graduate program coordinator in the area of interest or the 
Associate Dean for Academic Affairs and Research at (304) 293-4821. 

14 



College of Human Resources and Education 

Diane L. Reinhard, Ph.D., Dean 

Perry D. Phillips, Ed.D., Associate Dean for Professional Preparation 

Ernest R. Goeres, Ph.D., Associate Dean for Administration and Finance 

Katherine C. Lovell, Ph.D., Assistant to the Dean 

John O. Andes, Ed.D., Coordinator, Off-Campus Programs and Graduate Services 

The College of Human Resources and Education is located in Allen Hall 
on the Evansdale Campus. The College is organized into three divisions. The 
Division of Clinical and Counseling Studies includes the program areas of 
counseling, counseling psychology, rehabilitation counseling, special educa- 
tion, and speech pathology and audiology. The Division of Education includes 
the program areas of curriculum and instruction, education administration, 
elementary education, reading, and secondary education, the Division of 
Foundations includes the program areas of education foundations, educational 
psychology, and technology education. 

The College brings together several disciplines devoted to the study and 
maximum development of human talent and resources, whether in the context 
of the school, the family, or the community. Programs of instruction, research, 
and extended service are carried out in close cooperation with other related 
departments and divisions of WVU. The provision of quality programs for 
professional preparation and professional development in education and 
human resource fields is a high priority of the College. 

The degree of doctor of education (Ed.D.) is a competency-based program. 
Doctoral students in the College of Human Resources and Education may elect 
an area of emphasis in counseling psychology, curriculum and instruction, 
education administration, educational psychology, reading, special education, 
or technology education. Further information about the specific design of the 
doctoral program in the above areas is listed in the program description area 
of the catalog. 

For those who desire professional preparation beyond the master's degree 
but who do not seek the doctoral degree, the College offers programs leading 
to the certificate of advanced study (CAS). Individuals pursuing the CAS may 
choose among the following for their area(s) of concentration: administration 
and supervision, curriculum and instruction, counseling and guidance, 
educational psychology, reading, or special education. 

The College offers master's programs in the areas of counseling, rehabili- 
tation counseling, speech pathology and audiology, education administration, 
educational psychology, elementary education, reading, secondary education, 
special education, and technology education. 

If you would like additional information about the graduate programs in 
the College of Human Resources and Education, contact the director of the 
division most relevant to your program interests. 

Division Director, Division of Education, 602 Allen Hall, WVU, Morgan- 
town, WV 26506; telephone (304) 293-3442 

Division Director, Division of Foundations, 608 Allen Hall, WVU, 
Morgantown, WV 26506; telephone (304) 293-2515 

Division Director, Division of Clinical and Counseling Studies, 502 Allen 
Hall, WVU, Morgantown, WV 26506; telephone (304) 293-2807 



15 



Perley Isaac Reed 
School of Journalism 

Emery L. Sasser, Ph.D., Dean 

Charles F. Cremer, Ph.D., Associate Dean 

John H. Boyer, Ph.D., Director of Graduate Studies 

The Master of Science in Journalism (M.S.J.) is a program of the School of 
Journalism, located on the downtown campus in Martin Hall, WVU's oldest 
building (constructed in 1870). Martin Hall was renovated, refurnished and 
equipped in 1976-77. 

Today, the school has modern broadcast news facilities and state-of-the- 
art electronic reporting and editing systems. 

The faculty, through their educational and professional backgrounds in 
mass communications studies and media-related experiences, are highly 
qualified to teach mass communications at both the undergraduate and 
graduate levels. More than one-half, 57 percent, hold doctorate degrees. 

The master program has granted more than 160 degrees since its first, in 
1962. The School of Journalism, established in 1939 and one of the oldest in the 
United States, is one of 90 such programs accredited by the Accrediting 
Council on Education in Journalism and Mass Communications. The school 
has a total of more than 3,000 graduates, the majority of whom have careers in 
newspaper journalism, broadcasting, advertising, public relations or related 
fields. 

The master program offers students the choice of two tracks — the 
teaching-research track for persons who wish to go on for a doctoral degree 
and the professional track for those who wish to enhance their professional 
opportunities in some area of mass communications. 

The program, designed to help each student reach full potential as a 
practitioner, teacher, or scholar in mass communications, prepares a graduate 
not only for a first job — those who obtain the master's degree should excel in 
the skills of the profession — but also for long-term productive career 
development through the study of mass communications and related fields. 

The school is in the process of developing more specialized curricula for 
persons who aspire to become news or public relations specialists in such 
fields as business, energy and the environment, science, social relations, 
education, government, international affairs and sports. 

Assistantships available in and through the school each year pay 
stipends and usually provide tuition remission. Graduate assistants teach 
laboratories and assist professors with courses. Some also work in media- 
related positions in other programs at WVU. 

Those interested in learning about and applying to the master program 
should contact the Dean, Associate Dean or Graduate Director, School of 
Journalism, 112 Martin Hall, West Virginia University, Morgantown, WV 
26506. Telephone: (304) 293-3505. 

For specific admission standards, curricula, or course descriptions, 
graduation requirements and other detailed information, please refer to the 
School of Journalism Master Program section of this catalog. 



16 



School of Medicine 

Robert M. D'Alessandri, M.D., Dean 

John W. Traubert, M.D., Associate Dean, Student Affairs 

Anthony DiBartolomeo, M.D., Associate Dean, Clinical Affairs 

Fred Butcher, Ph.D., Associate Dean, Research and Graduate Education 

James Stevenson, M.D., Associate Dean, Continuing Medical Education/Public Relations 

James Shumway, Ph.D., Assistant Dean, Curricular Affairs 

The West Virginia University School of Medicine shares excellent 
facilities in the Health Sciences Center with the other health-related profes- 
sional schools of the University. The Ruby Memorial Hospital offers sophisti- 
cated medical technology, including magnetic resonance imagery, lithotripsy, 
laser surgery, and the necessary support technology. The Chestnut Ridge 
Psychiatric Hospital and the Mary Babb Randolph Regional Cancer Center 
provide facilities totally dedicated to the diagnosis and treatment to their 
fields of specialization. Laboratories and teaching areas allow scientists to 
work toward their goals. Research areas of anatomy, biochemistry, cellular 
biology, medical technology, microbiology and immunology, pathology, 
pharmacology and toxicology, physiology, and the biomedical sciences* 
support study toward masters of science and doctors of philosophy degrees. 

A combined M.D.-Ph.D. program is available to those students who show 
exceptional interest and scholarly promise. All of the admission requirements 
of the School of Medicine and the specific graduate program apply. Students 
should apply for the combined degree program after acceptance to Medical 
School. 

All basic science graduate programs require the submission of scores 
from the Graduate Record Examination and some may require scores from the 
applicable advanced test, but in no program are test scores the sole criteria for 
admission. Prospective graduate students are urged to initiate application for 
admission as early as possible. The first step is an inquiry to the department 
offering the program desired; the reply to such an inquiry will include 
instructions for applying to the particular program. 

Initial application must be made for admission to graduate study on 
standard forms provided by the WVU Office of Admissions and Records. To 
transfer from one University school or department to another, students may 
initiate a transfer request by contacting the Health Sciences Center Graduate 
Programs Office or their advisers. The adviser must contact the Health 
Sciences Center Graduate Programs Office to complete transfer. 

The West Virginia University School of Medicine is accredited by the 
Liaison Committee on Medical Education of the American Medical Association. 

The Ph.D. in biomedical sciences is offered in conjunction with Marshall 
University. Please consult the West Virginia University Health Sciences Center 
Catalog for additional information. 



17 



College of Mineral and Energy Resources 

John L Schroder, |r., M.S.E.M., Dean 

Royce | Watts, M.S.. Associate Dean, Administration/Academic Affairs 

(). Douglas Elliott, Acting Associate Director, Mining Extension Service 

The College of Mineral and Energy Resources has moved to the Evansdale 
Campus and has occupied a new, state-of-the-art building designed for 
mineral engineering. Sited at the western end of the Evansdale Campus and in 
close proximity to the Personal Rapid Transit System Engineering Station, 
the Creative Arts Center, the existing Engineering Sciences building, and the 
new Engineering Research Building, the COMER building will provide 
classroom and auditorium facilities for the College and the Evansdale area, 
offices and research areas for the Mining Extension Service, offices and 
teaching and research laboratories for the faculty and academic programs, 
and the necessary space for personnel and services provided by the adminis- 
trative group. 

The College offers two doctoral programs: mineral engineering and 
mineral and energy resources. 

The principal objective of the Ph.D. program in mineral engineering is the 
education and training of men and women so that they are capable of attaining 
the highest levels of the mineral engineering profession and performing the 
professional roles of developing or improving the efficient extraction of solid 
mineral resources. The two areas of specialization are mine systems and rock 
mechanics and ground control. 

The primary objective of the Ph.D. program in mineral and energy 
resources offered by the Department of Mineral Resource Economics is to 
educate men and women so that they are fully capable of meeting the demands 
of the highest levels of their professions. 

Faculty in mineral resource economics cooperate with faculty in agricul- 
tural economics to offer coursework appropriate for students in both 
programs. Faculty also conduct joint research projects. Graduate students 
may select faculty in either program to serve on their thesis committee. Such 
cooperation strengthens the teaching and research of both programs and 
offers graduate students a wider range of selection in course work and thesis 
research issues. This also offers opportunities for interactions among graduate 
students in the two programs and provides for broadened peer experience in 
study groups and in research discussions and seminars. 

The ( lollege offers three master of science degree programs. They are the 
designated M.S. in Engineering of Mines and M.S. in Petroleum Engineering, 
and the M.S. in mineral and energy resources. The M.S. in Mineral and Energy 
Resources offers options in mineral processing engineering and in mineral 
resource economics. The primary objective of each program is to prepare 
Students tO fulfill higher levels of responsibilit y in the mineral industries. 

Addition, il information on the various graduate programs may be 
obtained by contacting the Associate Dean for Academic Affairs or the 

Program Chairperson by telephone at [304] 293-5895 or by writing to the 

College ol Miner, il and l\ner<:\ Resources, West Virginia I 'niversit y. P.O. Box 

B070, Morgantown, WV 28506 8070. 



School of Nursing 

Lorita D. Jenab, Ed.D., Dean 

Jacqueline Riley, M.S.N. , Assistant Dean 

The School of Nursing, one of the four professional schools housed at the 
Health Sciences Center, is accredited by the National League for Nursing. The 
School of Nursing offers undergraduate and graduate programs of study 
leading to the B.S.N, and M.S.N, degrees in Morgantown, and via satellite 
television to selected extension sites. The B.S.N, degree program is also 
available through a consortium with Glenville State College wherein students 
complete the lower division portion of the program on the GSC campus and 
the upper division credit hours are earned on the Charleston campus. 

The School of Nursing offers graduates of diploma and associate degree 
nursing programs the opportunity to complete requirements for the baccalau- 
reate degree in nursing at the Morgantown and Charleston campuses and by 
extension at Parkersburg and Beckley. 

Graduate education in nursing prepares clinicians capable of leadership 
in developing and expanding nursing knowledge, skills, and practice compe- 
tencies in light of societal needs. Preparation at the master's level provides the 
opportunity for the student to demonstrate self-direction and effective 
interactions with other health professionals in improving nursing practice 
and the health care delivery system. The master's graduate is able to provide 
quality health care in a variety of settings while clarifying and redefining 
nursing roles. 

The West Virginia University School of Nursing offers a master's 
program to prepare professional nurses for the role of nurse clinician in the 
advanced practice of nursing in primary healthcare. The Master of Science in 
Nursing degree is granted by West Virginia University to those who complete 
the 42 credit hour program. 

The M.S.N, program has as its purpose the preparation of professional 
nurses to assume advanced roles in the delivery of health care; contribute to 
nursing science; and build a foundation for post-master's study. Upon 
completion of the program the graduate is expected to: 

• Practice nursing based on the conceptual model of the health of human 
systems dynamically interacting with the environment. 

• Synthesize theory, practice, and research in developing the professional 
role of advanced nurse clinician. 

• Demonstrate accountability for health maintenance and promotion to 
self, the discipline and society. 

• Utilize systematic inquiry to guide decision-making related to critical 
issues impacting clients, the profession, and society. 

This non-traditional, integrated graduate program offers a curriculum 
which allows students to enroll on a part-time or full-time basis. Throughout 
the curriculum, students are guided in the processes of self-development 
aimed at pursuing excellence in scholarly and professional endeavors. The 
program allows flexibility within the basic curricular structure through the 
individualization of learning experiences, electives, master's paper, thesis, 
and the opportunity to investigate an area of interest in advanced study. 

For further information write: Chairperson, Graduate Academic Unit, 
West Virginia School of Nursing, Health Sciences Center, Morgantown, WV 
26506. 

19 



School of Pharmacy 

Sidney Rosenbluth, Ph.D., Dean 

Frank D. O'Connell, Ph.D., Associate Dean 

David Lalka, Ph.D., Assistant Dean for Graduate Research and Programs 

James K. Lim, Ph.D., Chairperson, Graduate Admissions/Affairs Committee 

The WVU School of Pharmacy offers graduate programs in the pharma- 
ceutical sciences for both the M.S. and Ph.D. It is advantageously located in 
the Health Sciences Center complex which also houses all departments of the 
Schools of Medicine, Nursing, and Dentistry, as well as a comprehensive 
medical library, audiovisual learning center, photo-illustration service, 
computer facilities, and laboratory animal quarters. The School of Pharmacy 
maintains its own research laboratories and equipment on three levels within 
a section of the medical center complex. 

Graduate programs in the pharmaceutical sciences are designed to 
educate competent researchers and teachers. The programs provide flexible, 
research-oriented curricula designed to develop the interests, capabilities, 
and potential of the individual student. 

Applicants for the Ph.D. may choose among several specialty areas which 
include medicinal chemistry, pharmaceutics/biopharmaceutics/pharmaco- 
kinetics, and behavioral/administrative pharmacy. The pharmaceutical 
sciences uniquely encompass a wide variety of interrelated areas of science 
and technology. For example, students in medicinal chemistry are trained to 
combine knowledge in analytical/synthetic chemistry, biochemistry, pharma- 
cology, pharmacokinetics, and toxicology in the design and synthesis of new 
drugs, while those specializing in behavioral/administrative pharmacy may 
integrate sociology, economics, civil law, administration, business manage- 
ment, etc., for developing optimal methods in the delivery of pharmaceutical 
health care. 

Students for the M.S. may specialize in pharmacy administration, 
pharmacology and toxicology, pharmacognosy, pharmaceutical/medicinal 
chemistry, industrial pharmacy, and pharmaceutics/biopharmaceutics/phar- 
macokinetics. As for the Ph.D., students must possess a baccalaureate from a 
suitable area of study with an overall grade-point average of at least 2.75, and 
an aptitude and interest for graduate work in the pharmaceutical sciences. 
Furthermore, GRE scores in the verbal, quantitative, and analytical sections 
are required. To qualify for the advanced degrees, a cumulative GPA of no less 
than 3.0 in all graduate courses must be obtained, and with no grade less than 
a "C" for fulfilling credit hour requirements. Also, a minimum of 30 graduate 
credit hours, including six hours for research and thesis, must be completed. 

The School of Pharmacy is accredited by the American Council on 
Pharmaceutical Education. The council is composed of members from the 
American Pharmaceutical Association, National Association of Boards of 
Pharmacy, American Association of Colleges of Pharmacy, and American 
Council on Education. 

The School of Pharmacy holds membership in the American Association 
of Colleges of Pharmacy, whose objective is to promote the interests of 
pharmaceutical education. All of the AACP member institutions must 
maintain certain requirements for entrance and graduation. 

To obtain specific information related to the school's graduate programs, 
graduate faculty research interests, and availability of graduate assistantships 
or fellowships, applicants may write directly to: Assistant Dean, Graduate 
Research and Programs, WVU School of Pharmacy, Health Sciences Center, 
North, Morgantown, WV 26506; telephone: (304) 293-5101. 

20 



School of Physical Education 

J. William Douglas, Ph.D., Dean 

Dana D. Brooks, Ed.D., Associate Dean 

Andrew Sorine, Ed.D., Coordinator of Graduate Studies 

The School of Physical Education houses three departments which offer 
graduate programs leading to the doctor of education and the master of 
science degrees and to the certificate of advanced studies. 

The Department of Health, Physical Education and Athletic Training 
offers a master's degree in community health with three options: clinical, 
thesis, or school health. Teacher certification, grades K-12, can also be 
obtained at the graduate level. A master's degree in professional physical 
education is offered in the area of motor development/pedogogy, athletic 
training, and athletic coaching. The doctoral degree in professional physical 
education is offered in the areas of motor development/pedagogy and in the 
administration of sport and physical education. Emphasis in all graduate 
programs focuses on the application of scholarship to "real world" practice. 

Graduate studies in the Department of Sport and Exercise Studies 
include programs leading to the M.S. and Ed.D. degrees. Programs allow 
students to pursue degrees relative to the study of sport and physical activity 
in the areas of sport behavior, the concentrated study of the psycho/social 
dimensions of sport; sport management, the study of effective management 
related to sport as a business enterprise; and sport physiology, the assessment, 
evaluation, and prescription of fitness parameters of all age groups partici- 
pating in physical activity. 

The Department of Safety Studies offers the certificate of advanced study 
and the master's degree in safety management, which is aimed at preparing 
individuals to serve as safety directors, coordinators, or managers in 
business, education, government, or industry. The course work is concentrated 
upon establishing and directing programs designed to facilitate optimal 
reduction of losses and costs due to a variety of safety-related problems. The 
certificate of advanced study is aimed at preparing individuals with emphasis 
in safety management training beyond the master's degree. 

The School's state-of-the-art facilities include a swimming complex; 
laboratories for athletic training, computers, exercise physiology, safety and 
sport skill analysis; a rifle range and weight training room, as well as 
excellent classrooms, seminar rooms, studios, and courts. 

For additional information, please contact the Graduate Coordinator, 
School of Physical Education, 278 Coliseum; telephone (304) 293-5045. 



21 



School of Social Work 

Michael A. Patchner, Ph.D., Dean 
Barry L. Locke, Ph.D., Assistant Dean 
Patty Gibbs, Ph.D., BSW Program Director 

The School of Social Work began as a department in the College of Arts 
and Sciences in the early 1930s. In 1971, we became an independent school, 
located in Allen Hall on the Evansdale Campus. Our programs are accredited 
by the Council on Social Work Education, and our graduates meet the criteria 
for licensure in most states. 

The graduate program in social work offers advanced study and training 
in preparing social workers for leadership roles in small towns and rural 
areas. The School of Social Work is nationally recognized in the area of rural 
social work practice, and the faculty regularly contribute to this field through 
presentations, papers, conferences, seminars, and research. Students have 
the opportunity to focus their practice interests by selecting an area of 
concentration within our MSW program. Currently, the School supports 
practice concentrations in the areas of aging and long term care, family, and 
community health and mental health. Students have the opportunity to do 
their field internships with agencies throughout West Virginia and the Mid- 
Atlantic region. A dual degree option is also offered in conjunction with the 
Department of Public Administration of the College of Arts and Sciences. 
Additionally, the School attracts a number of international students and 
maintains active relationships with social welfare departments in universities 
in Korea and Japan. 

The School of Social Work supports both full-time and part-time study at 
the University. Students who have graduated from a baccalaureate program 
in social work accredited by the Council on Social Work Education may 
request a review for advanced standing in the MSW program when they apply 
for admission. Students admitted to the MSW program are not permitted to 
enroll in 200 level courses to meet graduate degree requirements. 

Students interested in applying to the School or wishing additional 
information should address inquiries to: Assistant to the Dean, School of 
Social Work, 707 Allen Hall, West Virginia University, Morgantown, WV 
26506; telephone: (304) 293-3501. 



22 



Part 2 

GRADUATE EDUCATION 

AT WEST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY 

Graduate education has a long and honored history. It can be traced to the 
medieval universities of Europe, and the goal for graduate study has remained 
unchanged over the intervening centuries. A student undertakes such study in order to 
gain a deeper knowledge in a particular academic discipline, and to become able to 
demonstrate to the faculty and practitioners in the field the attained mastery of 
knowledge. Consequently, graduate study cannot be defined primarily in terms of 
semester hours of course work beyond the baccalaureate, even though minimum 
course work requirements are commonly specified for graduate degrees. Minimum 
requirements set the lower limit for an integrated plan of study which will provide a 
student with opportunity for the desired knowledge. 

Graduate students are expected to become participating members of the University 
community. Even when not in class, graduate students traditionally have access to the 
informal academic activities of their discipline. They are encouraged to attend the 
talks presented by visiting scholars, to listen to academic discussions of their faculty, 
to serve on departmental committees, and to study with their fellow graduate 
students. The purpose of residency requirements is to promote such participation in 
the academic affairs of the University. 

Graduate students enrolled in a graduate program within West Virginia University 
are expected to participate in a seminar course throughout their graduate career. 
Depending on the objectives set by a particular graduate program, seminars may: 

• Provide an opportunity for the student to be exposed to a variety of topics; 

• Give the students insight into the methods by which to communicate the 
significance of their research; 

• Allow the student to hear outside speakers; or 

• Engender discussion with faculty concerning research and the development of 
research methodology. 

At WVU the minimum standards for admission to graduate study are set by the 
University Graduate Council. Beyond this point, however, faculty members in a given 
graduate program have complete control over who is to be admitted to undertake 
graduate study under their supervision; and ultimately it is they who certify which 
students have demonstrated sufficient mastery of the discipline to qualify for a 
graduate degree. While a student may be admitted for the purpose of enrolling in 
advanced course work, only the program faculty may grant permission for the pursuit 
of a degree. Likewise, a student will not be recommended for a degree until the 
graduate faculty of a program has indicated in writing that the student has gained the 
desired knowledge. 

Graduate education is an integral part of WVU. The graduate catalog reflects the 
University's commitment and sets forth the policies and rules for graduate education 
as they have been determined by the appropriate bodies. It is essential that all students 
beginning study at the graduate level become familiar with regulations for graduate 
study in general, as well as with the requirements of their own programs — both of 
which are detailed in this catalog. Each student should request a graduate catalog 
when beginning graduate study and become conversant with its contents. 

West Virginia University, which is both the comprehensive and land-grant 
university in the West Virginia system of higher education, offers graduate work 
leading to 78 master's degrees, 28 doctoral degrees, and one certificate of advanced 

23 



study. The graduate programs are administered by 15 schools and colleges of the 
University and by some interunit committees drawn from two or more of the schools 
and colleges. 



Organization 

Assistant 
Vice President 
for Curriculum 
and Instruction 



Graduate 
Council 



Schools 
and Colleges 

Graduate 
Faculty 



Regular 
Membership 



The assistant vice president oversees the policies governing 
graduate education and monitors the quality of graduate programs. 
The assistant vice president for curriculum and instruction reports to 
the provost and vice president for academic affairs and research and 
works closely with the vice president for health sciences. 

The University Graduate Council consists of twelve elected 
representatives from the schools and colleges offering graduate 
programs and four ex-officio non-voting members representing the 
provost, the vice president for health sciences, the senate executive 
committee, and the graduate and professional student association. 
The council derives its authority from the faculty and from the 
provost and vice president for academic affairs and research. This 
body formulates, reviews, and recommends University-wide graduate 
education policies. The council reviews proposals for new graduate 
programs, makes major revisions in graduate curricula, coordinates 
periodic program reviews, establishes the University criteria for 
graduate faculty membership, and considers such other matters 
affecting graduate education as are brought to the council by an 
administrative officer of the University, a graduate faculty member, 
or a graduate student. The duties of the graduate council include 
responsibility for programs both on- and off-campus. 

Schools and colleges manage most of the day-to-day operation of 
graduate education. They determine the level of participation by 
individual faculty members, they specify requirements for programs 
under their jurisdiction, and they certify students for graduation. 

Faculty continue to play the most important role in graduate 
education. They are responsible for program content, they serve on 
graduate student committees, and they assure the quality of prepara- 
tion of the University's graduates. 

Regular members may chair student's committees or direct 
master's and doctoral research, theses, and dissertations. 

• Regular members must hold appointments in tenure track 
positions. 

• Regular members must hold either a terminal degree or have 
demonstrated equivalent scholarly or creative achievement as defined 
by their school or college. The definition of equivalent credentials 
must include, as a minimum, the attainment of the rank of associate 
professor. 

• Regular members must present evidence of continuing schol- 
arly, research, or creative activity. 

Schools and colleges set and publish quantitative and qualita- 
tive criteria regarding scholarly activity. These criteria are to be 
applied for the appointment as well as continuation of graduate 
faculty membership. These initial criteria and any subsequent 
amendments or changes are subject to approval of the University 
Graduate Council and should include the following: publication in 
major peer review journals, publication of books and book chapters, 



24 ORGANIZATION OF GRADUATE EDUCATION 



invited and/or competitively selected presentations of scholarly 
work at national and international meetings, and/or presentations 
and performance of artistic work at professionally recognized affairs. 

Associate members may perform the same function as regular Associate 

members with the exception of chairing students' committees or Membership 
directing master's theses and doctoral dissertations (or equivalent). 
Associate membership may be used by schools and colleges when the 
nature of their activities require diverse membership criteria. Because 
it may not be applicable to all units, it is the prerogative of the schools 
and colleges to establish and publish their own criteria. These initial 
criteria and any subsequent amendments or changes are subject to 
approval of the University Graduate Council and should include one 
or more of the following requirements: research activity, scholarly 
publications, artistic performances orpresentations, teaching experi- 
ence, and service on previous committees. 

The following individuals must meet the same criteria as other Exceptions 

faculty members for review, approval, and continuation as graduate 
faculty: 

• Visiting professors may be appointed as members of the 
graduate faculty for the term of their appointments. 

• Faculty holding non-tenure track appointments may be con- 
sidered as graduate faculty. 

• Emeritus faculty members may remain on thegraduate faculty, 
subject to review. 

• Off-campus professionals willing to participate in graduate 
education may be acceptable as graduate faculty but may not serve as 
chairperson (exceptions may be approved by the Graduate Council). 

• Individuals holding faculty appointments in institutions par- 
ticipating in cooperative doctoral programs may be considered 
graduate faculty, subject to school or college review. 

Normally, no candidate for a degree at WVU may be a regular or 
associate member of the graduate faculty. Individuals seeking 
exceptions to this policy must submit a petition to the University 
Graduate Council. 

Individuals interested in appointment to the graduate faculty 
must request that they be evaluated for initial membership. Associate 
members interested in reclassification as regular members must 
initiate a request for evaluation. 

Faculty members seeking graduate faculty status must first be 
evaluated by the school or college in which they hold their primary 
faculty appointment. If the faculty member holds a secondary 
appointment in another school or college or for some reason wishes to 
have graduate faculty status in a second school or college, this is 
permissible; however, faculty may not be designated a regular 
graduate faculty member in any school or college if such a status is 
not held in the primary school or college. 

Schools and colleges should establish an appropriate time Time Schedule 
schedule for evaluating faculty for initial appointment to the graduate 
faculty and for upgrading graduate faculty status. All graduate 
faculty must be reviewed annually. The annual review is intended to 
assist graduate faculty members in gauging their continued progress 
in scholarship, research, or creative activity. The review process for 
graduate faculty membership should coincide with the annual 



Degree 
Candidates 



Evaluation 



ORGANIZATION OF GRADUATE STUDY 25 



Continuance 



Appeals 



Faculty 
Pursuing 
Advanced 
Degrees 



Nature of 
Graduate Study 



GRE and 

Other 

Examinations 



review process of all faculty. Schools and colleges will determine the 
appropriate mechanisms by which faculty will be reviewed (School 
or College Graduate Council, Promotion and Tenure Committee, etc.). 
The written outcome of this evaluation should be placed in the 
individual's personnel file. 

Once every three years, the graduate faculty review of individuals 
must be accompanied by a decision to continue or discontinue their 
current level of membership. A faculty member whose graduate 
faculty membership is discontinued or changed from regular to 
associate status will be permitted to complete current responsibilities 
but may only assume additional responsibilities which are consistent 
with the new status. 

Appeals regarding graduate faculty membership classification 
are handled through procedures identified in Policy Bulletin 36. 
Exception to any of the above must be approved by the University 
Graduate Council. 

No faculty member holding instructor or professorial rank in a 
program unit may be admitted to a graduate degree program offered 
by that unit. Only those ranked teaching fellow, lecturer, etc. can 
simultaneously pursue a degree in their own unit. A faculty member 
holding instructor or professorial rank may be admitted to a graduate 
degree program in another unit. 

Graduate study at WVU can be compared to a series of contractual 
arrangements between the student and the graduate faculty. The stu- 
dent's rights, privileges, obligations, and responsibilities are con- 
tained in the graduate catalog, the plan of study, and, if research is one 
of the degree requirements, the prospectus. Although not contracts in 
the formal legal sense, they are agreements between the University 
and a student for the accomplishment of planned educational goals. 

The WVU Graduate Catalog in effect when a student begins 
work toward an advanced degree constitutes the agreement between 
the student and West Virginia University. If there are major changes 
in the catalog during a student's studies, a student, with the approval 
of the adviser, may agree to meet the conditions of the graduate 
catalog of a later year. An agreement to change to a later catalog is an 
agreement to meet all the conditions of the later edition. 

Students must abide by catalog changes if the changes were 
promulgated by the Board of Trustees or local, state, or federal law. 

Many programs at WVU require graduate record examination 
(GRE or GMAT) scores from all applicants, but in no program is an 
examination the sole criterion for admission. Some programs require 
both the general and the advanced tests before considering an 
applicant for admission. Other programs require tests such as the 
Miller's Analogy. Specific admission requirements are found in the 
program sections of this catalog. 

Students should take the tests required before enrollment in 
graduate studies. The applicant should request the Educational 
Testing Service to forward scores to the WVU Office of Admissions 
and Records. 

Applications to take the GRE or GMAT must be mailed to the 
Educational Testing Service, Princeton, NJ 08540, at least one month 
before the examination date . The fee for each examination (aptitude 
and advanced) is $35 for 1989-90. 



26 GRADUATE STUDY 



Information about the Miller's Analogy Test may be obtained 
from the psychology department or the counseling service of the 
applicant's undergraduate institution or the WVU Student Counseling 
Service (293-4431). 

Degree Programs 

College of Agriculture and Forestry 

Degree Program Bachelor Master Doctorate/ 

Professional 

Agricultural Biochemistry M.S. 

Agricultural Economics M.S. 

Agricultural Education B.S.Agr M.S. 

Agricultural Microbiology M.S. 

Agricultural Sciences Ph.D. 

Agriculture M. Agr. 

Agronomy M.S. 

Animal and Veterinary Sciences B.S., B.S.Agr. . . M.S. 

Entomology M.S. 

Family Resources B.S.Fam.Res M.S. 

Forest Resources Management B.S.F. 

Forest Resources Science Ph.D. 

Forestry M.S.F. 

Horticulture M.S. 

Landscape Architecture B.S.L.A. 

Plant Pathology M.S. 

Plant and Soil Sciences B.S.Agr. 

Recreation and Parks Management B.S.R M.S. 

Resource Management B.S., B.S.Agr. 

Wildlife Management M.S. 

Wildlife Resources B.S. 

Wood Industries B.S.F. 

College of Arts and Sciences 

Biology B.A M.S Ph.D. 

Chemistry B.A., B.S M.S Ph.D. 

Communication Studies B.A M.A. 

Computer Science B.S M.S Ph.D. 

Economics B.A. 

English B.A M.A Ph.D. 

Foreign Languages B.A M.A. 

Geography B.A M.A. 

Geology B.A., B.S M.S Ph.D. 

History B.A M.A Ph.D. 

Interdepartmental Studies B.A. 

Mathematics B.A M.S Ph.D. 

Philosophy B.A. 

Physics B.A., B.S M.S Ph.D. 

Political Science B.A M.A Ph.D. 

Psychology B.A M.A Ph.D. 

Public Administration M.P. A. 

Sociology and Anthropology B.A M.A. 

Statistics B.S M.S. 

DEGREE PROGRAMS 27 



Degree Program Bachelor Master Doctorate/ 

Professional 

Board of Regents Bachelor of Arts Degree 

Board of Regents B.A. 

(Intended for older students who wish to resume and complete their college studies. Detailed 
information available from the Coordinator, Board of Regents B.A. Degree Program, Student 
Services Center, West Virginia University, Morgantown, WV 26506.) 

College of Business and Economics 

Accounting B.S.B.Ad. 

Business Administration B.S.B.Ad M.B.A. 

Business Management B.S.B.Ad. 

Economics B.S M.A Ph.D. 

Finance B.S.B.Ad. 

Industrial Relations M.S. 

Marketing B.S.B.Ad. 

Professional Accountancy M.P.A. 

College of Creative Arts 

Art B.A M.A. 

Music B.M M.M D.M.A., 

Ph.D. 

Theatre B.F.A M.F.A. 

Visual Art B.F.A M.F.A. 

School of Dentistry 

Dental Hygiene B.S M.S. 

Dentistry D.D.S. 

Endodontics M.S. 

Orthodontics M.S. 

College of Engineering 

Engineering M.S.E Ph.D. 

Aerospace Engineering B.S.A.E M.S.A.E. 

Chemical Engineering B.S.Ch.E M.S.Ch.E. 

Civil Engineering B.S.C.E M.S.C.E. 

Computer Engineering B.S.Cp.E. 

Electrical Engineering B.S.E.E M.S.E.E. 

Industrial Engineering B.S.I.E M.S.I.E. 

Mechanical Engineering B.S.M.E M.S.M.E. 

Occupational Health and 
Safety Engineering M.S. 



28 DEGREE PROGRAMS 



Degree Program Bachelor Master Doctorate/ 

Professional 

College of Human Resources and Education 

Education Ed.D., 

C.A.S. 

Counseling M.A. 

Education Administration M.A. 

Educational Psychology M.A. 

Elementary Education B. S.E.Ed M.A. 

Reading M.A. 

Rehabilitation Counseling M.S. 

Secondary Education B. S.S.Ed M.A. 

Special Education M.A. 

Speech Pathology and Audiology B.S M.S. 

Technology Education M.A. 

Interdisciplinary Programs 

Genetics and Developmental Biology M.S Ph.D. 

Liberal Studies M. A.L.S. 

Reproductive Physiology M.S Ph.D. 

Perley Isaac Reed School of Journalism 

Journalism B.S.J M.S.J. 

College of Law 

Law J.D. 

School of Medicine 

Anatomy M.S Ph.D. 

Biochemistry (Medical) M.S Ph.D. 

Biomedical Sciences Ph.D.* 

Medical Technology B.S M.S. 

Medicine M.D. 

Microbiology (Medical) M.S Ph.D. 

Pharmacology and Toxicology M.S Ph.D. 

Physical Therapy B.S. 

Physiology (Medical) M.S Ph.D. 

*Awarded under the auspices of the degree-granting authority of WVU, but in cooperation with the Basic 
Sciences Departments of Marshall University School of Medicine. 

College of Mineral and Energy Resources 

Engineering of Mines B.S.E.M M.S.E.M. 

Mineral and Energy Resources M.S Ph.D. 

Mineral Engineering Ph.D. 

Mineral Processing Engineering B.S. 

Petroleum Engineering B.S.Pet.E M.S.Pet.E. 



DEGREE PROGRAMS 29 



Degree Program Bachelor Master Doctorate/ 

Professional 

School of Nursing 

Nursing B.S.N M.S.N. 

School of Pharmacy 

Pharmaceutical Sciences M.S Ph.D. 

Pharmacy B.S.Pharm. 

School of Physical Education 

Education Ed.D., 

C.A.S. 

Community Health Education M.S. 

Physical Education B.S.P.Ed M.S. 

Sport and Exercise Studies B.S.P.Ed. 

Safety Studies M.S. 

School of Social Work 

Social Work B.S.W M.S.W. 

Academic Common Market 

West Virginia provides its residents the opportunity, through the Academic 
Common Market (ACM) and through contract programs, to pursue academic programs 
not available within the state. Both programs permit West Virginians to enter out-of- 
state institutions at reduced tuition rates. 

Contract programs have been established for study in optometry, podiatry, and 
veterinary medicine. The ACM provides access to numerous graduate and undergrad- 
uate programs. The programs are restricted to West Virginia residents who have been 
accepted for admission to one of the specific programs at designated out-of-state 
institutions. 

Through reciprocal agreement, WVU allows residents of states within the ACM to 
enroll in graduate and undergraduate programs on a resident tuition basis. 

Further information may be obtained through the Assistant Vice President 
for Academic Affairs and Research, Stewart Hall, West Virginia University, P.O. Box 
6001, Morgantown, WV 26506-6001. Application must be made through the higher 
education authority of the state of residence. For West Virginia residents, this 
authority is the University of West Virginia Board of Trustees, 950 Kanawha 
Boulevard, East, Charleston, WV 25301. 



30 DEGREE PROGRAMS 



Application 

Prospective graduate students are urged to apply for admission 
as early as possible. The first inquiry from a person interested in a 
degree program should request information from the department, 
division, school, or college offering the program. The reply to such an 
inquiry will include instructions for applying to the particular 
program. 

In all cases, application for admission to graduate study must be 
made on standard forms provided by the Office of Admissions and 
Records. 

The completed form is returned to the Office of Admissions and 
Records and must be accompanied by payment of a nonrefundable 
special service fee. Applicants must at the same time arrange for an 
official transcript to be sent by the registrar or records office of the 
college of their baccalaureate degree directly to the Office of 
Admissions and Records. If other institutions have been attended in 
the course of undergraduate or graduate study, transcripts should be 
requested from them as well. No one is admitted to graduate study 
who does not hold a baccalaureate degree. 

If an applicant meets the minimum admission requirements of 
WVU, a copy of the application is forwarded to the faculty of the 
program of interest. Any graduate degree program is permitted to set 
admission requirements beyond the minimum admission standards 
of the University. No one can pursue an advanced degree at WVU 
unless admitted to the appropriate degree program. A student who 
wishes to take additional courses after completing a degree must 
submit a new application and pay the nonrefundable service fee. 

Students not wishing to pursue an advanced degree may apply 
for admission as non-degree graduate students. Applicants must 
complete the standard application form, pay the nonrefundable 
special service fee, state the area of intended study, and present 
evidence of a baccalaureate degree. 

Finally, any applicant who is refused admission may have his or 
her application reviewed again instead of submitting a new applica- 
tion form and fee. Any applicant who fails to enroll within a year 
after acceptance must reapply in the regular manner for consideration 
for a subsequent year. 

When students graduate or complete the program for which they 
applied, they must reapply and be readmitted before taking further 
course work at WVU. This policy assures that the University is 
informed of students' objectives and assigns them an appropriate 
adviser. Students are assessed the application fee for each new 
application. 

Degree students, whether master's or doctoral, are permitted to 
continue in a program for a maximum of eight years under their 
original applications. Students who have not been active students for 
this period of time must reapply and be readmitted. The application 
fee is assessed. 

West Virginia University is authorized under federal law to 
enroll nonimmigrant foreign nationals as students. International 
students wishing to enroll for graduate work at WVU must comply 
with the stated academic requirements for admission and with 
certain additional academic and nonacademic requirements. 



Initial 



Fee 



Non-degree 
Applicants 



Second Review 



Reapplication 



Time 



International 
Students 



APPLICATION 31 



International applicants should forward a letter of inquiry one 
year before they intend to begin study in the United States. The 
University receives a large number of applications from international 
students. For this reason and because of the time required for the 
student to make visa and financial arrangements, April 1 has been 
established as a deadline after which applications cannot be processed. 

International students should make all arrangements for their 
financial obligations to WVU for their entire stay in the United States 
before leaving their country. 
English All international applicants whose native language is not English 

Proficiency must submit Test of English As a Foreign Language (TOEFL) scores. 

A minimum score of 550 is required for admission. TOEFL information 
and registration forms are available from the Educational Testing 
Service, Princeton, NJ 08540 USA. Tests are normally given six times 
each year and require six weeks to score, with scores reported to the 
individual. Registration for the TOEFL examination closes five 
weeks before the testing date. 

NOTE: In certain programs, provisional admission is possible 
for students with scores lower than 550 on the TOEFL. In such cases, 
students are admitted provisionally on the basis of their academic 
record, contingent upon submission of satisfactory TOEFL scores or 
satisfactory completion of the WVU Intensive English Program. For 
information about the Intensive English Program, contact the WVU 
Intensive English Program, Centennial House, Stewart Street, 
Morgantown, WV 26506. 
Credentials Complete and original official records of all studies undertaken 

by an applicant at any institution attended (secondary school, 
college, university, technical school, professional school, etc.), must 
be provided at the time of application for admission to WVU. Copies 
of original records of studies completed outside of the United States 
are acceptable if they are officially stamped. 

Such records must include: 

• Complete dates of attendance; 

• Identification of individual subjects; 

• Total number of hours in each class per week; 

• Total number of weeks each class meets in session; 

• Final grade in each subject, for each session; 

• Actual credits earned for each subject; 

• Class, division, or rank achieved; 

• Biographical information; 

• Explanation of each institution's grading system; and 

• Certification and date of degree or awards achieved. 

If any of this information cannot be supplied, an official 
explanatory statement from the school should be submitted. All 
documents must be accompanied by certified English translations. 

All documents must be forwarded directly from the registrar or 
other authorized official of the school to the WVU Office of Admis- 
sions and Records, P.O. Box 6009, Morgantown, WV 26506-6009 
USA. 

If an applicant is currently enrolled in a school, tentative 
admission may be granted on the basis of an incomplete record which 
indicates the applicant will unquestionably meet the admission 



32 APPLICATION 



standards of WVU. Final admission, however, cannot be approved 
until the complete record has been received and evaluated. 

International students applying to transfer from schools within 
the United States are not permitted to register at WVU until they 
have complied with all transfer procedures as required by the United 
States Immigration and Naturalization Service (INS). 

Upon arrival on the campus, the student must be prepared to 
present the 1-20 or IAP 66 to the international student adviser for 
formal processing. 

No student should move to Morgantown without having received 
an assurance of admission and immigration documents from WVU. 

A student wishing to transfer to WVU from another institution 
should follow the same application procedures as those outlined for 
other new students. 

A student wishing to apply credit earned at another institution of 
higher education to a master's degree at WVU must obtain a transfer 
of graduate credit form from the Office of Admissions and Records. 
This form requires the signature of the student's unit chairperson or 
designee. The student must also have an official transcript from the 
other institution sent to the Office of Admissions and Records. Only 
credit earned at institutions accredited at the graduate level may be 
transferred. Non-degree graduate students are not permitted to 
transfer credit to WVU from another institution. 

A maximum of 12 semester hours from otherinstitutions may be 
transferred for credit at WVU in master's degree programs requiring 
30 to 41 semester hours. Eighteen semester hours can be accepted for 
master's degree programs requiring 42 or more semester hours. 
Individual graduate programs may accept fewer credit hours. 

Permission forms to apply for transfer credit must be obtained 
from and returned to the Office of Admissions and Records. Only 
credit earned at institutions accredited at the graduate level may be 
transferred. It is strongly recommended that students have transfer 
credit approved prior to enrolling in course work. 

University policy permits students to obtain more than one 
master's degree. In these cases, a separate application is required for 
each program. Each application must be accompanied by payment of 
a nonrefundable special service fee. 

If a student seeks more than two master's degrees, the student 
must petition the Office of the Assistant Vice President forCurriculum 
and Instruction for permission to apply. The petition must state the 
student's objectives for obtaining another master's degree and must 
be in writing. The purpose of the petition is to assure that the student 
receives appropriate academic counseling. 

A student desiring to obtain more than one master's degree must 
successfully complete sufficient additional credit hours to constitute 
75 percent of the credit hours required by the additional master's 
degree program. An individual graduate unit may require a higher 
percentage of credit to be earned under its direction. 

Inactive students who wish to become active should report to the 
Office of Admissions and Records and complete the required forms to 
update their University records and pay the program reactivation 
fee. Degree students who have been inactive for eight or more years 
are not eligible to reactivate, but must reapply for admission. 



International 

Students 

Transferring 

Within the U.S. 



Transfer 

From Another 

Institution 

to WVU 



Credit 

From Another 

Institution 



Concurrent or 

Additional 

Master's Degree 



Reactivation 
Application 



APPLICATION 33 



Admission to Graduate Study 

Classification- 
Regular 



Provisional 



Non-Degree 



Classification 
Based on 
Prior Graduate 
Study 



Reclassification- 
Provisional 
to Regular 



Regular graduate students are degree-seeking students who 
meet all the criteria for regular admission to a program of their 
choice. The student must possess a baccalaureate degree from a 
college or university, must have at least a grade-point average of 2.5 
(on a 4.0 scale), have met all the criteria established by the degree 
program, and be under no requirements to make up deficiencies. 

A student may be admitted as provisional by any unit when the 
student possesses a baccalaureate degree but clearly does not meet 
the criteria for regular admission. The student may have incomplete 
credentials, deficiencies to make up, or may have an undergraduate 
scholastic record which shows promise, but less than the 2.5 grade- 
point average required for regular admission. 

A non-degree student is a student not admitted to a program. 
Admission as a non-degree student does not guarantee admission to 
any course or program. The reasons for non-admission may be late 
application, incomplete credentials, scholarship deficiencies, or lack 
of a degree objective. Even though a non-degree student has not been 
admitted to a graduate program, a unit may allow a non-degree 
student to enroll in its courses. To be admitted as a non-degree 
student, a student must only present evidence of a baccalaureate 
degree, but the student must obtain a 2.25 grade-point average on the 
first 12 credit hours of course work and maintain this average as long 
as enrolled. To be eligible to enter a degree program, the student must 
maintain a minimum of a 2.75 grade-point average on all course work 
taken since admission as a graduate student. 

The standards cited are the minimum standards established by 
the University. Individual academic units or graduate programs may 
establish higher standards. 

The same three admission classifications apply to those who 
have undertaken previous graduate study. In general, the cumulative 
grade-point average regulations apply to any transfer student who 
has not completed a graduate degree. However, an applicant having 
received a master's degree from an accredited college or university 
may be admitted to whatever category is deemed most appropriate 
by the faculty of the program of interest. 

The provisions of a student's provisional status must be specified 
in the letter of admission. To be reclassified as a regular student, a 
student must meet the provisions stated in the letter of admission and 
achieve a minimum grade-point average of 2.75 on all course work 
taken during the provisional period. Individual degree programs may 
set higher grade-point average requirements. 

No later than the completion of the 18th credit hour, a unit must 
review the student's record and make a final decision on the student's 
admission. A student who has met the provisions of admission and 
achieved the required grade-point average will be reclassified as a 
regular student. A student who fails to meet the provisions of 
admission or who fails to achieve the required grade-point average 
will be suspended, but may be reinstated in order to transfer to 
another program or to non-degree status. The academic unit must 



34 ADMISSION TO GRADUATE STUDY 



notify the student and the Office of Admissions and Records of its 
decision. 

Upon notification by the appropriate academic unit, the Office of 
Admissions and Records will prohibit the registration of all provi- 
sional graduate students who have reached the maximum of 18 credit 
hours. Registration will not be permitted until the student is 
reclassified as a regular student, an exception is granted by an 
academic dean, or the student is transferred. 

A student may be admitted as a provisional graduate student 
more than one time, but not by the same graduate program. 

All credit hours taken since admission as a provisional graduate 
student or to be applied to a degree count in the 18 credit-hour limit, 
i.e., undergraduate or graduate credit, P/F, S/U, graded courses, 
credit by senior petition, and transfer credit. 

Regular and provisional students may become non-degree stu- 
dents by choice. This includes students who fail to meet admission or 
academic standards or who withdraw voluntarily. To change a 
student to non-degree status, the adviser must process a Graduate 
Studies Transfer/Status form through the school or college dean's 
office. 

Non-degree students who later wish to become degree students 
must transfer and present all the credentials required by the degree 
program. This requires the processing of a Graduate Studies Trans- 
fer/Status form by the student's adviser through the Office of 
Admissions and Records. 

For admission to a degree program, a non-degree student must 
have achieved a minimum grade-point average of 2.75 on all course 
work taken since admission as a graduate student. 



Regular or 

Provisional 

to Non-Degree 



Non-degree 

to Regular 

or Provisional 



Transfer Procedures 

A student may initiate a transfer by contacting the dean's office Intra-University 
of the school or college where enrolled. Following the student's Transfers 

request, the dean's office will send the student's record to the school 
or college that the student wishes to enter. 

The school or college receiving the record is required to acknowl- 
edge receipt of the record and notify the Office of Admissions and 
Records of the status of the student's application within 30 days. If a 
student is accepted by the new school or college, the school or college 
retains the student's record and notifies the student of acceptance. If 
a student is rejected, he or she is notified of such action, and the 
student's record is returned to the original school or college. 

The Office of Admissions and Records is responsible for updating 
students' records to reflect new majors and new advisers. 

When a student transfers from one unit or program to another Intra-University 
unit or program within the University, the faculty of the new unit Transfer Credit 
determines if any credit earned under the guidance of the prior unit 
may be applied to a degree, certificate, or other educational offering 
of the new unit. 

Programs may establish admission requirements in addition to Special 

those set by the University Graduate Council, such as a higher grade- Admission 

point average, the submission of scores on standardized tests, and Requirements 
the receipt of letters of recommendation. 



TRANSFER PROCEDURES 35 



Special Additional Requirements and Information 

College of Agriculture and Forestry 

Graduate Admission Classification (Minimum Requirements) 

Regular: A regular graduate student is a degree-seeking student who meets all the 
criteria for regular admission to a program of his/her choice. The student must possess 
a baccalaureate degree from a college or university, must have at least a grade-point 
average of 2.75 on a 4.0 scale (or an average of 3.0 or higher for the last 60 credit hours), 
have met all the criteria established by the degree program, and be under no 
requirements to make up deficiencies. 

The student must: 

1. Have an adequate academic aptitude at the graduate level as measured by the 
Graduate Record Examination (GRE), or the New Medical College Admissions Test 
(NewMCAT). 

2. Provide three letters of reference from persons acquainted with the applicant's 
professional work, experience, or academic background. 

3. Submit a written statement of 500 words or more indicating the applicant's 
goals and objectives relative to receiving a graduate degree. 

4. International students have the additional requirement to submit a minimum 
score of 550 on the TOEFL examination if their native language is not English. 

See specific graduate programs in the College of Agriculture and Forestry for 
additional requirements. 

Provisional: A student may be admitted as provisional when the student 
possesses a baccalaureate degree but clearly does not meet the criteria for regular 
admission. The student may have incomplete credentials, deficiencies to make up, or 
may have a promising undergraduate scholastic record that is less than the 2.75 
grade-point average or an average of 3.0 or higher in the last 60 credit hours required 
for regular admission. 

Non-Degree: A non-degree student is a student not admitted to a program. 
Admission as a non-degree student does not guarantee admission to any course or 
program. The reasons for non-admission may be late application, incomplete creden- 
tials, scholarship deficiencies, or lack of a degree objective. Even though a non-degree 
student has not been admitted to a graduate program, an academic unit may allow a 
non-degree student admission. A student must present evidence of a baccalaureate 
degree and obtain a 2.5 grade-point average on the first 12 credit hours of course work 
and maintain this average as long as enrolled. A maximum of 12 credit hours of work as 
a non-degree student may be applied to a graduate degree if the student is later 
accepted into a graduate program. To be eligible to enter a degree program, the student 
must maintain a minimum of a 3.0 grade-point average on all course work taken since 
admission as a graduate student. 

College of Business and Economics 

Admission requirements for the MBA, MPA, and MSILR programs include a 
grade-point average of 3.0 (either overall or in the last 60 credit-hours) and a GMAT 
score of at least 500. In the industrial relations (M.S.) program, only an acceptable GRE 
score may be substituted for the GMAT. Admission to the M.A. in economics requires 
a prior grade-point average of at least 2.75 and a GRE score of 1500. 

College of Creative Arts 

The College of Creative Arts offers graduate programs leading to terminal degrees 
in art, music, and theatre. All students apply for admission through the University's 
Office of Admissions and Records. All candidates for graduate degrees must conform 
to University regulations for graduate study. Requirements for admission to specific 

36 SPECIAL ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 



programs are included in the program descriptions. Most programs require an audition 
or a portfolio review as a part of the admission process. 

Graduate Assistantships 

Full graduate assistants receive a stipend and are eligible to apply for remission of 
fees. Approximately 11 graduate assistantships in art, 14 in theatre, and 24 in music 
are available each year. Application for these assistantships should be made to each 
division, the application deadline for art is April 1, for music March 1, and for theatre 
April 1. 

School of Dentistry 

The School of Dentistry offers several advanced education programs. The 
Departments of Dental Hygiene, Endodontics, and Orthodontics offer programs of 
advanced study leading to the degree of master of science. Detailed information 
concerning the M.S. programs in dental hygiene, endodontics, and orthodontics is 
found in the individual program listings. 

The Department of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery offers one four-year residency. 
Seven one-year general practice residencies also are offered by the School of Dentistry. 
Continuing education courses are offered throughout the year. Information concerning 
admission requirements and courses of study in the M.S. programs may be obtained 
from the Office of the Associate Dean for Postdoctoral Programs, WVU School of 
Dentistry, Morgantown, WV 26506. 

College of Engineering 

A student desiring to take courses for graduate credit in the College of Engineering 
must comply with the appropriate University regulations for graduate study. To 
become enrolled in a College of Engineering graduate program, a student must apply 
for admission through the Office of Admissions and Records to the major department 
of the student's choice. Acceptance by the major department will depend upon review 
of the student's academic background and available facilities in the department. 

An applicant with a baccalaureate degree, or its equivalent, from an institution 
accredited by the Accreditation Board for Engineering and Technology (ABET) or from 
an internationally recognized program in engineering will be admitted on the same 
basis as engineering graduates of WVU. Lacking these qualifications, an applicant 
must first fulfill any special requirements of the department in which the student is 
seeking an advanced degree. 

No credits which are reported with a grade lower than C are acceptable toward an 
advanced degree. 

To qualify for an advanced degree, the graduate student must have a grade-point 
average of at least 3.0 based on all courses acceptable for graduate credit for which the 
student has received a grade from WVU. 

A graduate student in the College of Engineering must comply with the regulations 
of the major department. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

Each department in the College of Engineering offers designated M.S. degrees and 
the College of Engineering has an undesignated degree, Master of Science in 
Engineering (M.S.E.), as well as a Master of Science (M.S.) in occupational and safety 
engineering administered by the Department of Industrial Engineering. For all M.S. 
degree students, an advisory and examining committee consisting of at least three 
faculty members will be appointed. Each candidate will, with the approval of the 
candidate's advisory and examining committee, follow a planned program which must 
contain a minimum of 30 semester credit hours, not more than nine of which can be at 

SPECIAL ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 37 



the 200 level. If a thesis or a problem report is part of the candidate's program, not more 
than six semester credit hours of research leading to an acceptable thesis nor more 
than three semester credit hours of work for an acceptable problem report may be 
applied toward the semester credit hour requirement. 

Individual departments may establish minimum requirements greater than those 
adopted for the College of Engineering as a whole. These departmental requirements 
are contained in the program section of the graduate catalog. 

A student wishing to apply graduate credit earned at another institution to a 
master's degree at WVU must complete an "Application for Transfer of Graduate 
Credit to WVU" form and have an official transcript submitted to the WVU Office of 
Admissions and Records from the external institution. A maximum of 12 semester 
hours from other institutions will be acceptable for credit at WVU in master's degree 
programs requiring 30 to 41 semester hours. Eighteen semester hours will be accepted 
for master's degree programs requiring 42 or more semester hours. Departmental 
programs may choose to accept fewer transfer credit hours. 

The Master of Science in Engineering program is designed for students with a 
baccalaureate degree in a technical area who desire to pursue work in areas other than 
that of their baccalaureate degree in engineering or science. Graduate students who 
wish to become candidates for the degree should register with the department in which 
the major portion of the work is to be done. 

A plan of study must be jointly prepared and approved by the student and all 
members of the student's Advisory and Examining Committee, the department chair, 
and the dean or dean's designate, either at the end of the second semester of the 
student's attendance or at the completion of the twelfth course hour, whichever is 
later. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

The academic units within the College of Engineering that are approved for 
participation in the Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) program are: Chemical Engineering, 
Civil Engineering, Electrical and Computer Engineering, Industrial Engineering, and 
Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering. 

Admission. Admission as a graduate student is required of all applicants for 
admission to a program of study and research leading to the Ph.D. degree. Applicants 
for admission must hold or expect to receive a bachelor's degree in engineering from an 
accredited or an internationally recognized program in engineering. An applicant who 
holds a B.S. or M.S. in one of the physical sciences or mathematics may be considered 
for admission. Although a bachelor's degree is the minimum requirement, a master's 
degree in engineering is recommended for applicants. Admission to graduate study 
does not necessarily assure entrance into the College of Engineering doctoral program. 

Transfer Credits. A student wishing to apply credit earned at another institution 
to a doctoral degree program at WVU must submit the Application For Transfer of 
Graduate Credit to WVU form and have an official transcript from the institution 
forwarded to the WVU Office of Admissions and Records. The approval of transfer 
credit is at the discretion of the student's advisory and examining committee. 

Advisory and Examining Committee. The student, research adviser, academic 
adviser, and department chairperson appoint the student's advisory and examining 
committee. For the Ph.D. program, each committee contains at least five members. 
Three members must be from the student's major department and two from other 
disciplines related to the student's area of interest. 

Plan of Study. At the end of the second semester of a student's attendance or at the 
completion of the twelfth hour or when master's degree requirements are completed, 
whichever is later, the student, with the advice and consent of the student's academic 
adviser, research director, and members of the student's advisory and examining 

38 SPECIAL ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 



committee, will submit a plan of study, initiated in the student's department, to the 
dean or dean's designee. Some departments may require that a preliminary dissertation 
research proposal be submitted at this time. 

Candidacy. After admission to the program and after a period of residence, the 
applicant takes a candidacy examination in which the student must demonstrate: (a) a 
grasp of the important phases and problems of the field of study and an appreciation of 
their relation to other fields of human knowledge and accomplishments; and (b) the 
ability to employ rationally the instruments of research developed in the student's area 
of interest. When an applicant has passed the comprehensive examination, the student 
will be formally admitted to candidacy for the doctoral degree. One opportunity for 
reexamination is available. 

Curriculum. The Doctor of Philosophy degree is not awarded by the mere 
accumulation of course credits nor for the completion of a definite residence 
requirement. The amount and nature of the course work undertaken will be established 
for each individual student with the objective of insuring a rational and coherent 
progression of academic development beyond the baccalaureate degree. 

Residency. Two semesters of full-time attendance at the WVU Morgantown 
campus are required, consisting of a minimum of nine credit hours each. A full summer 
schedule, consisting of registration in both sessions and completion of a minimum of 
nine total hours, is considered equivalent to a one-semester residence. 

Dissertation. The candidate must submit a dissertation on a topic within the area 
of his/her major interest. The doctoral dissertation must represent the results of 
independent research, show a high degree of originality and creativity on the part of 
the student, and must constitute an original contribution to the field of engineering 
science and/or design. The dissertation must have good literary form and style and 
must present a thorough review and survey of prior study and work in the area of 
research, with acceptable standards of documentation. It is anticipated that the work 
leading to the completion of the dissertation will require a minimum of 24 hours of 
research credits, or satisfactory evidence of equivalent time devoted to research and 
preparation of the dissertation. 

Completion Time. Requirements for this degree must be completed within five 
years after admission to candidacy. 

Final Examination. Upon completion and approval of the dissertation and 
fulfillment of all other requirements, the candidate must pass a final oral examination 
conducted by the Advisory and Examining Committee. The examination will be 
primarily a defense of the dissertation, although other questions necessary to 
determine the candidate's logic, critical ability, and reasoning power in the general 
field of study related to the research may be asked in order to establish the 
qualifications of the candidate for the degree. 

College of Human Resources and Education 

The College of Human Resources and Education offers graduate programs in the 
areas of counseling, counseling psychology, education administration, elementary 
education, educational psychology, reading, secondary education, rehabilitation 
counseling, special education, speech pathology and audiology, and technology 
education. The college brings together several disciplines devoted to the study and 
maximum development of human talent and resources, whether in the context of the 
school, the family, or the community. Programs of instruction, research, and extended 
service are carried out in close cooperation with other related departments and 
divisions of WVU. 

SPECIAL ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 39 



Admission and Curricula 



The College of Human Resources and Education and the West Virginia Department 
of Education are in the process of reviewing and revising all certification programs. 
Students are warned that programs printed in the catalog may not be in effect at the 
time of their registration and are advised to see their adviser upon arrival on campus. 



All students apply for admission to graduate study through the Office of 
Admissions and Records. All candidates for degrees must conform to the general 
University graduate study regulations, specific requirements of the College of Human 
Resources and Education, and specific requirements of the program area in which they 
are pursuing graduate studies. Details regarding admission to specific graduate 
programs of the College of Human Resources and Education are provided within the 
program section of this catalog. Students may obtain additional information about a 
particular graduate program by writing to the coordinator of that program or by 
writing the Dean, College of Human Resources and Education, West Virginia 
University, P.O. Box 6122, Morgantown, WV 26506-6122. 

Certification Requirements 

The curriculum and degree requirements of the various degree programs of the 
College of Human Resources and Education are provided in each program section in 
this catalog. It is the responsibility of the student to take steps to insure that he or she 
is properly informed of the degree requirements and/or the certification standards 
being sought. Since certification requirements are changed from time by the state, the 
fulfillment of certification requirements as presented in this catalog can not guarantee 
compliance with current requirements. Students are therefore encouraged to seek the 
counsel of members of the faculty, their advisers, and the college certification officer 
on matters pertaining to degree and certification requirements. 

Doctor of Education (Ed.D.) 

The program for the degree of doctor of education (Ed.D.) is competency-based 
and requires that the candidate demonstrate an ability to conduct research. The 
student's committee chair, the student's committee, and the student consult to 
determine the competencies the student must attain and how the student is to be 
evaluated in accordance with program, college, and University requirements. Faculty 
expertise and College of Human Resources and Education support services are 
available for students desiring to elect an area of emphasis in any of the following: 
counseling psychology and rehabilitation, curriculum and instruction (including 
reading), education administration, educational psychology, special education, and 
technology education. Further information about the specific design of a doctoral 
program in the above emphasis areas may be listed in the program section of the 
catalog and is available from the department chair. 

Admission. Individuals who wish to pursue a program leading to the doctor of 
education degree must be admitted to the specific doctoral program at West Virginia 
University as doctoral students. All applicants for admission to the doctoral program 
in the College of Human Resources and Education must submit their scores on the 
aptitude test of the Graduate Record Examination and/or the Miller Analogy Test, 
three letters of recommendation, a current vita, a statement of long-range and short- 
range goals, and their reasons for selecting WVU as the institution for matriculation. 
Applicants to HRE must comply with the general University graduate study 
regulations. Personal interviews are required by several programs. Additional 

40 SPECIAL ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 



information may be required by the faculty of a division and/or a specific area of 
emphasis prior to program admission. 

Doctoral Committee. After admission to a specific program, the student, in 
consultation with the adviser, selects a chairperson and four committee members to 
serve as his or her doctoral committee. This committee must be approved by the 
department chair, the division director, and the dean of the college. The doctoral 
committee must meet the following minimum standards: 

1. The doctoral committee must be composed of a minimum of five members, at 
least three of whom must be regular members of the graduate faculty. 

2. The student's major adviser must be from the student's majorprogram area and 
must be a regular member of the graduate faculty. No more than two other members of 
the doctoral committee may be from the student's major program area of study. 

3. At least two members of the doctoral committee must be from the student's 
major program area of study. 

4. At least one member of the doctoral committee must be from the student's minor 
program area of study. 

5. The doctoral committee must include at least one member from outside the 
student's program area, and that individual must have knowledge and insights 
relevant to the student's program of study. 

6. No more than one member of the doctoral committee may be a non-member of 
the graduate faculty. 

7. At least three members of the doctoral committee must be members of the 
graduate faculty of the College of Human Resources and Education. 

Curriculum. The final determination of the program of course work and research is 
the responsibility of the student's doctoral committee. The doctor of education degree 
is not awarded on the basis of the completion of any set number of credits, but is 
awarded on the basis of demonstrated academic achievement and scholarly competence. 
Seventy-two semester hours of relevant graduate work, excluding dissertation credit 
but including credits of relevant graduate work completed at the master's degree level, 
constitutes the minimum course work acceptable. The doctoral program must include 
course work in three areas: major, minor, and foundations, and the division and 
program requirements in each area must be met. 

Admission to Candidacy Examination. The purposes of the admission to candidacy 
examination are to assess the quality of the student's academic achievement, to review 
the student's program of course work, to approve a proposed outline of dissertation 
research, and to admit the student to formal candidacy for the doctoral degree. 

The student and the committee at the time of program planning will identify 
competencies to be developed and the method of their assessment. These will be stated 
in the student's individual program. The doctoral student and his or her permanent 
committee will determine when the student is ready for assessment of competencies. 

The examination will be prepared and assessed by the student's doctoral 
committee and will address all work in the written doctoral program of the student. 
The chairperson will notify the student and the student records office, who will notify 
all appropriate University and college offices of the outcome. Upon successful 
completion of the admission to candidacy examination, and the acceptance by the 
committee of the dissertation prospectus, the student will be admitted to formal 
candidacy for the doctoral degree. 

Dissertation. The candidate must submit and justify a propectus for a doctoral 
dissertation as a portion of the admission to candidacy examination. The doctoral 
committee must review and approve, approve with change, or reject the outline or 
prospectus. The student must consult with all members of the doctoral committee and 
with other appropriate members of the University faculty during the dissertation 
phase of the program. 

SPECIAL ADDITION AL REQUIREMENTS 41 



Final Oral Examination. The student will be admitted to final oral examination 
upon completion of the dissertation and after fulfilling all other requirements set by 
the committee. The examination will be conducted by the student's doctoral committee 
and the publicized meeting will be open to all members of the University faculty. If the 
student receives more than one unfavorable vote from the doctoral committee, the 
candidate will not be recommended for the doctoral degree. 

Time Limitation. If the student should fail to complete an approved dissertation 
within five years after being admitted to candidacy, he or she must repeat the 
admission to candidacy examination and any other requirements specified by the 
student's doctoral committee. 

Residency. A student must satisfactorily complete a minimum of nine semester 
hours of approved graduate credit in each of two consecutive terms. 

Certificate of Advanced Study (C.A.S.) 

The certificate of advanced study program is designed for school and related 
personnel who seek professional training beyond the master's degree. Candidates for 
the certificate of advanced study in education may choose from among the following 
areas of study for their area(s) of concentration: 

• Counseling pyschology and rehabilitation; 

• Education administration; 

• Elementary education; 

• Reading; 

• Secondary education; 

• Special education; 

• Technology education. 

Persons interested in the certificate should consult with the coordinator of the 
appropriate program or the Dean of the College of Human Resources and Education. 

Admission. Individuals who wish to pursue a program leading to the certificate 
must be admitted as WVU graduate students. All applicants for admission to the 
program in the College of Human Resources and Education must submit scores on the 
aptitude test of the Graduate Record Examination and/or the Miller Analogy Test and 
three letters of recommendation. In addition, they must comply with the general 
University graduate study regulations. Acceptance for study toward the certificate in 
a specific area of concentration will be made by the faculty of the specific program and 
division. 

Requirements for Admission to Candidacy. Evidence through examination and 
personal interview of general proficiency and acceptable standards of oral and written 
communication is required. 

Program. An approved program consists of a minimum of 30 semester hours 
earned above the master's degree including 24 hours of course work in the College of 
Human Resources and Education, or in closely related fields, and six hours of research. 

At least 24 semester hours of the work credited for this certificate must be done in 
residence at WVU. This includes the six hours of research, which may be conducted 
apart from the physical limits of the University but which must be done under the 
direction and supervision of the chairperson of the student's graduate committee. A 
maximum of six semester hours earned in residence at another approved graduate 
institution may, if approved by the student's adviser, be allowed toward credit for the 
certificate. The minimum period of full-time graduate study in residence at WVU is one 
semester or one full summer session. 

Final Examination fsj. Upon satisfactory completion of all requirements, including 
the research report, the candidate will be admitted to a final oral examination by the 
student's graduate committee. 



42 SPECIAL ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 



Time Limitation. All requirements must be completed within the eight years 
immediately preceding the awarding of the certificate. 

Master of Arts (M.A.); Master of Science (M.S.) 

The master of arts degree is offered in those areas which lend themselves to a 
broader based education; generally a wider choice of electives is offered. Programs 
leading to the master of arts degree are offered in counseling, education administra- 
tion, educational psychology, elementary education, reading, secondary education, 
special education, and technology education. 

The master of science degree is offered in those areas which are more specialized 
and in which areas of electives are specified. Programs leading to the master of science 
degree are offered in rehabilitation counseling and speech pathology and audiology. 

Various areas of emphasis are available under several of the degree programs 
listed above, and students should contact the specific program for information. 

Admission Requirements 

Applicants should apply to the WVU Office of Admissions and Records for 
admission to graduate study. (P.O. Box 6009, Morgantown, WV 26506-6009.) All 
applicants must comply with the general admission requirements for University 
graduate study, the requirements of the College of Human Resources and Education, 
and the requirements of the specific program of interest. 

All graduate students are admitted in one of the three University classifications 
and are responsible for making a formal request for change of status. 

Regular A regular graduate student is a degree-seeking student who meets all the 
criteria for regular admission to a program of his/her choice. The student must possess 
a baccalaureate degree from a college or university, must have at least a grade-point 
average of 2.5 (on a 4.0 scale), have met all the criteria established by the degree 
program, and be under no requirements to make up deficiencies. 

Provisional A student may be admitted as provisional by any unit when the 
student possesses a baccalaureate degree but clearly does not meet the criteria for 
regular admission. The student may have incomplete credentials, deficiencies to make 
up, or an undergraduate scholastic record which shows promise but less than the 2.5 
grade-point average required for regular admission. The student is responsible for 
formally requesting a change of status when the requirements are met. 

Non-Degree A non-degree student is one who is not admitted to a program. 
Admission as a non-degree student does not guarantee admission to any course or 
program. The reasons for non-admission may be any of those described in earlier 
catalogs for special students, such as late application, incomplete credentials, 
scholarship deficiencies, or lack of a degree objective. Even though a non-degree 
student has not been admitted to a graduate program, a unit may allow a non-degree 
student to enroll in its courses. The student is responsible to request a change of degree 
status through the adviser. 

Optional Routes 

Three options are generally available in HR&E programs; the student should refer 
to the specific program to determine which option applies. 

A. At least 30 semester hours of course work, including six semester hours of 
research. 

B. At least 30 semester hours of course work, including three semester hours of 
research, selected in conference with the candidate's committee, directed by the 
adviser, with final approval by the committee, and 27 semester hours of course work. 

C. At least 36 semester hours of approved course work. 



SPECIAL ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 43 



Program Requirements 

1. Guidelines— The student must comply with specific graduate requirements of 
the University, the College of Human Resources and Education, and the program. 

2. Advising— All students will be assigned an adviser. Two additional faculty 
members will be assigned to serve as the remainder of the three-member master's 
committee. 

3. Grade-Point Average— No student may be awarded a master's degree unless 
the student has a minimum grade-point average of 3.0 on all work taken for the 
graduate degree. (A grade of less than C does not carry credit toward a graduate 
degree, but counts in determining the grade-point average.) 

4. Course Repeats— No student will be permitted to repeat a required graduate 
course more than once. 

5. Transfer Credit — A maximum of 12 graduate credit hours may be used as 
transfer credit for a program with 30-41 hours. Credit for transfer must be of graduate 
level from an accredited college or university offering a graduate degree. Only credit of 
B or higher will be transferred. 

6. Comprehensive Examination— Many programs require the comprehensive 
examination in options A, B, and C above. The candidate's committee will determine 
whether the examination will be oral, written, or both. Within the first two weeks of 
the semester in which the student intends to take the final master's degree examination, 
he or she must submit to the appropriate department chair an application to take the 
examination. A student must have completed a minimum of 27 semester hours of 
approved course work before taking the comprehensive examination. In addition, a 
student must have achieved a 3.0 grade-point average of all work taken for graduate 
credit before applying to take the comprehensive examination. 

A candidate who fails the final master's degree examination may, upon written 
consent of the student's advisory committee, be given a second examination not earlier 
than the following session or semester. A candidate who fails the second examination 
and desires a third opportunity to complete program requirements may meet with the 
committee, at the committee's discretion, to determine remediation recommendation 
before the third and final attempt at the examination. The third examination may be 
given no earlier than one calendar year from the second examination. If the student 
fails the third comprehensive examination, the student will be removed from the 
degree program. 

7. Time Limitation— All requirements must be completed within eight years 
immediately preceding the awarding of the degree. 

8. Program Termination— Students who fail to meet the specific requirements of 
the sections dealing with admission, grade-point average, course repeats, transfer 
credits, comprehensive examinations, or special written requirements specified by the 
program will not be admitted to or will be terminated from the degree program. 
Students not admitted to or terminated from a degree program may apply in writing for 
classification as a non-degree graduate student to the appropriate department chair or 
the Office of Student Advising and Records of the College of Human Resources and 
Education, P.O. Box 6122, Morgantown, WV 26506-6122. This would allow the student 
to take course work for certificate renewal, certification, or personal interest, but 
which is not applicable for a degree in the program. 



44 SPECIAL ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 



Enrollment and Registration 

Credit toward a graduate degree may be obtained only for Credit 

courses listed in the graduate catalog and numbered 200-499. No Limitations 

more than 40 percent of course credits counted toward meeting 
requirements of any graduate degree may be at the 200 level. No 
residence credit is allowed for special field assignments or other 
work taken off the WVU campus without prior approval. 

Graduate credit is obtained only for courses in which the grade 
earned is A, B, C, or S. No course in which the grade earned is D, P, F, 
or U can be counted toward a graduate degree. 

Graduate students are required by their advisers to limit their Employment 
credit loads in proportion to the outside service rendered and the time 
available for graduate study. In general, persons in full-time service 
to the University or other employer are advised to enroll for no more 
than six hours of work in any one semester; those in half-time service 
are advised to enroll for no more than 12 hours. Recommended credit 
loads may be less for employed graduate students in some academic 
colleges, schools, and departments. 

It is recommended that a student enroll for no more than 15 hours Credit 

of graduate courses in any one semester and no more than 12 hours in Overloads 

the total of the two summerenrollment periods. Credit overloads may 
be approved for students by their advisers. Some dean's offices may 
choose to monitor overloads in their academic units. 

All requirements for a master's degree must be completed within Time Limits 

eight years preceding the student's graduation. In exceptional cir- 
cumstances, provisions for revalidation of courses taken more than 
eight years prior to graduation may be made by the dean of the college 
in which the courses were taken. Individual programs may set 
shorter time limits for completion of degree requirements. Students 
who have not been active for this period of time are deleted from 
active status and must reactivate their records and pay the reactiva- 
tion fee. Once inactive, students may not register for classes until this 
fee is paid. Degree students, either master's or doctoral, are permitted 
to continue in a program for a maximum of eight years under their 
original application. Students who have not been active for this 
period of time must reapply and be readmitted. The application fee is 
assessed. 

The University must have current information (name, address, Active/Inactive 
telephone number, major, and adviser) about students enrolling for Status 

classes in order to communicate with students and maintain perma- 
nent records. In addition, when individuals do not enroll in classes 
for substantial periods of time, it is costly and time consuming to 
continue to maintain their records on active status. For these reasons, 
the Office of Admissions and Records periodically deletes degree and 
non-degree student records from active status. Students who return 
after this deletion must reactivate their records and pay the program 
reactivation fee. 

The doctorate is a research or performance degree and does not Doctoral 

depend on the accumulation of credit hours. The three requirements Degrees 

of the degree are admission to candidacy, residency, and completion 
and defense of a dissertation. The degree signifies that the holder has 
the competence to function independently at the highest level of 
endeavor in the chosen profession. Hence, the number of years 



ENROLLMENT 45 



involved in attaining or retaining competency cannot be readily 
specified. Rather, it is important that the doctoral student's compe- 
tency be assessed and verified in a reasonable period of time prior to 
conferral of the degree. 
Candidacy The qualifying or candidacy examination assesses whether the 

Examination student has attained sufficient knowledge of the discipline and 

supporting fields in order to undertake independent research or 
practice. The examination generally occurs after all course work has 
been completed and language or other requirements are satisfied, and 
it consists of a series of examinations covering all areas specified in 
the plan of study. After the component parts of the qualifying 
examination have been successfully passed, the student is admitted 
to candidacy for the degree. No one can be called a doctoral candidate 
until this first requirement for the degree has been met. 

Because the qualifying examination attests to the academic 
competence of the student who is about to become an independent 
researcher or practitioner, the examination can not precede the 
degree by too long a period of time. Consequently, doctoral candidates 
are allowed no more than five years in which to complete remaining 
degree requirements. In the event a student fails to complete the 
doctorate within five years after admission to candidacy, an extension 
of time can be obtained only by repeating the qualifying examination, 
and meeting any other requirements specified by the student's 
committee. 
Advising Each academic unit through which graduate degree programs are 

administered has one or more graduate advisers, and every graduate 
student is assigned an adviser at the time of admission or shortly 
thereafter. The adviser and student should meet before the first 
enrollment to begin formulation of a plan of study. 
Plan of Study Shortly after entrance into a degree program and usually before 

nine to twelve hours of graduate course work have been completed, a 
meeting is held among student, adviser, and committee (if appointed) 
to draw up a plan of study. Depending on the degree sought and the 
field of study, the plan may also contain an outline of the research 
problem to be undertaken. Some graduate programs have the student 
and committee meet at a later date to delineate the research project 
more formally as a prospectus for the report, thesis, or dissertation. 
The plan of study is subject to approval and is made a part of the 
student's record. It then becomes a formal agreement between 
student and program faculty as to the conditions which must be met 
for completion of the degree requirements. Any subsequent changes 
in the plan of study (or prospectus) can be made only through mutual 
agreement. 

When the binding nature of these documents is fully understood, 
there is less likelihood that later misunderstanding will arise. Thus 
anyone who contemplates application for graduate work at WVU is 
urged to read the graduate catalog carefully and request clarification 
where needed. A student must be very aware of the right to express 
personal views in the drafting of the plan of study and/or research 
prospectus. Should disagreement arise at any time, the responsibility 
for arbitration rests with the dean of the school or college. 
Schedule Before the opening of semesters and summer sessions, a printed 

of Courses Schedule of Courses announces the course offerings by the colleges 



46 CANDIDACY 



and schools of WVU. Copies are available from the Office of 
Admissions and Records. 

Deans' offices maintain all records for monitoring student 
progress and for certifying students for graduation. Among these 
records are plans of study (subject to the school or college dean's 
approval), graduate committees (subject to the school or college 
dean's approval), grades, grade modifications, etc. 

If a graduate student is using University libraries or research 
facilities or consulting with graduate committee members, it is 
necessary for the student to enroll for at least one hour of graduate 
credit. In no other way can the University receive credit for its 
contribution to graduate study, attest to student status, and guarantee 
the protection to which the student is entitled. Students who take 
courses intermittently may be excused from such continuous enroll- 
ment if they are not using University facilities or consulting with 
faculty while they are not enrolled. However, students formally 
admitted to candidacy for graduate degrees are required to register 
for at least one credit hour each semester as a condition of their 
continued candidacy. By pursuing a degree at this institution, such 
persons by definition are utilizing University services, facilities, and 
other resources, including faculty expertise; this situation continues 
in cases where students have completed all required course work and 
are working on a thesis or dissertation. Candidates for graduate 
degrees who fail to maintain continuity of enrollment can be dropped 
from candidacy. 

West Virginia University operates five graduate centers located 
at Jackson's Mill, Parkersburg, Keyser, Shepherdstown, and West 
Liberty. Approximately 200 graduate courses are offered each 
semester at these centers. 

Students wishing to take off-campus courses for graduate credit 
must first be admitted as graduate students through the same 
procedure as for on-campus study. It is the responsibility of students 
to ascertain from the appropriate college, school, and department the 
specific requirements for degree candidacy. 

Selected master's programs are offered at all five of the centers, 
including education administration, elementary education, secondary 
education, special education, and communication studies. Other 
master's degrees are offered at one or more graduate centers, 
including business administration and counseling. Courses in these 
and other fields meet public education certification requirements as 
well as personal and professional development goals. A Master of 
Science in Nursing is available in Charleston and Wheeling. A 
doctorate with emphasis in education administration is available in 
the Kanawha Valley in cooperation with Marshall University and the 
West Virginia College of Graduate Studies. A Ph.D. in biomedical 
sciences is offered in cooperation with the School of Medicine at 
Marshall University. Special courses may be offered at other locations 
in the state to meet specific needs. 

Information about off-campus courses is available from the pro- 
gram unit offering the courses, the graduate centers, and the Office of 
the Director for Off-Campus Credit, West Everly Street. Graduate 
courses offered are approved by the appropriate department chair- 
persons, academic deans, director for off-campus credit, and by the 



Records 



University 
Facilities 



Off-Campus 
Study 



OFF-CAMPUS STUDY 47 



Assistant Vice President for Curriculum and Instruction. Advising 
and scholarship standards are the same for on-campus and off- 
campus study. 
Non-Degree Non-degree students may enroll in any course in the University 

Graduate for which they have the prerequisites and permission from the 

Students academic unit. Some departments that cannot accommodate non- 

degree students may restrict enrollments to majors only or require 
permits. These students are normally adults taking classes for 
enrichment purposes, public school teachers taking classes for 
certification renewal, or students taking classes as prerequisites for 
admission to degree programs. Since these students have not made a 
commitment to a degree program, are not subject to time limits, and 
may enroll on an irregular basis, the University policies concerning 
active/inactive status are more liberal than those for degree students. 
Non-degree students are considered active for five years or 20 terms. 
Once inactive, students may not register for classes until they 
reapply, reactivate their records, and pay the required fee. 
Credit Limits A non-degree graduate student may accumulate unlimited grad- 

uate credit hours, but if the student is later admitted to a degree 
program, the faculty of that program will decide whether or not any 
credit earned as a non-degree student may be applied to the degree. 
Under no circumstances may a non-degree student apply more than 
12 hours of previously earned credit toward a degree. 
Advising Each dean establishes a mechanism to advise non-degree graduate 

students who intend to take the majority of their course work in the 
dean's school or college. The mechanism may be the designation of a 
faculty member to advise non-degree students or the assignment of 
non-degree students to an advising office or center. 

Non-degree students who express an interest in programs in two 
colleges may be assigned to either by the Office of Admissions and 
Records. It is expected that the assigned adviser will consult the 
other unit for information when it is needed to assist the student. 

Students who are truly undecided on a major or who plan to take 

courses in several schools or colleges for enrichment may be assigned 

to the Office of the Assistant Vice President for Curriculum and 

Instruction. The number of students assigned in this manner will be 

quite small, and a program adviser will be assigned when a student 

designates a specific interest. 

Evaluation Fee Only students who are enrolled in classes for the semester in 

which they expect to graduate but do not use University facilities pay 

a non-enrolled graduate student evaluation fee. Students may register 

for this fee after completing their course work but at least two weeks 

before graduation. Students who are not enrolled in regular course 

work but who do use University facilities must sign up for one hour 

of research each semester. Instructions for registering for this fee are 

available at the Office of Admissions and Records. This special fee 

can be assessed only once. 

Full-Time A student is classified as full-time or part-time for any given 

and Part-Time enrollment period. A graduate student is classified as full-time if 

Classification enrolled for nine hours in a semester or six hours altogether in the 

summer. 



48 NON-DEGREE STUDENTS 



Academic 

Rights and 

Responsibilities 



Scholarship 



Students may enroll in courses without working for a grade or Auditing 

for credit by registering as auditors. Change in status from audit to Courses 

credit or from credit to audit may be made during the registration 
period. Attendance requirements for auditors are determined by the 
instructor of the course being audited. It is the prerogative of the 
instructor to strike the name of any auditor from grade report forms 
and to instruct the Office of Admissions and Records to withdraw the 
auditor from the class, if attendance requirements are not met. 
Auditors are required to follow the same admission procedures as 
students taking the course for credit. 

Students' academic rights and responsibilities are governed by 
Board of Trustees' policies and corresponding policies, rules, and 
regulations developed by each of the institutions in the University of 
West Virginia system of education. The rights and responsibilities of 
students at West Virginia University are published each year in the 
WVU Student Handbook. Copies of the WVU Student Handbook may 
be obtained from the Office of Student Life in Moore Hall. 

Because of their familiarity to most students, letter grades are 
assigned in many graduate courses. However, better than "average" 
performance is expected of graduate students. They are enrolled for 
fewer credit hours than they were as undergraduates (9 to 12 hours 
being the norm for a full-time graduate student) and are expected to 
spend more time on each course and achieve better than average 
mastery of the material. A few grades of C can be tolerated in 
graduate programs provided there are higher grades in other courses 
to compensate for them. However, a grade of C is considered average 
performance for an undergraduate student and not for one who is 
studying for an advanced degree. 

A— excellent (given only to students of superior ability and Grading System 

attainment) 

B— good (given only to students who are well above average, but not 
in the highest group) 

C— fair (average for undergraduate students, but substandard for 

C— graduate students) 

D— poor but passing (cannot be counted for graduate degree credit) 

F — failure 

I — incomplete 

W — withdrawal from a course before the date specified in the 

University Calendar. Students may not withdraw from a course 
after the specified date unless they withdraw from the University 
WU — withdrawal from the University doing unsatisfactory work 

P— pass (cannot be counted forgraduate degree credit— see below) 

X— auditor (no grade and no credit) 

S— satisfactory 

U— unsatisfactory (equivalent to D or F) 
Pass/Fail grading is not applicable to the course work for a 
graduate degree. A graduate student may register for any course 
(1-499) on a Pass/Fail basis only if the course involved is not 
included in the student's plan of study and does not count toward a 
graduate degree. The selection of a course for Pass/Fail grading must 
be made at registration and may not be changed after the close of the 
registration period. A student who, having taken a course on a 
Pass/Fail basis, later decides to include the course as part of a degree 



GRADING SYSTEM 49 



Grade-Point 
Average 



Incompletes 



Transcripts 



Forfeited 
Transcripts 

Academic 
Standards and 
Classifications 
Regular 



program must re-register for the course on a graded (A, B, C, D, or F) 
basis. 

Courses graded S/U are approved by the Assistant Vice President 
for Curriculum and Instruction. Approved requests are forwarded to 
the Office of Admissions and Records for entry into the WVU Master 
Course Directory. 

The grade-point average is computed on all work for which the 
student has registered while a graduate student except for courses 
with grades of I, S, W, WU, P, and X, and is based on the following 
grade-point values: 

A B C D F U 

4 3 2 10 

When a student receives a grade of I and later removes the 
incomplete grade, the grade-point average is recalculated on the 
basis of the new grade. The grade of I is given when the instructor 
believes that the course work is unavoidably incomplete or that a 
supplementary examination is justifiable. Before any graduate degree 
can be awarded, the grade of I must be removed either by removal of 
the incomplete sometime before program completion or by having it 
recorded as a permanent incomplete. Only the instructor who 
recorded the I, or, if the instructor is no longer at WVU, the 
chairperson of the unit in which the course was given, may initiate 
either of these actions. 

In the case of withdrawal from the University, a student with a 
grade of I should discuss that grade with the appropriate instructor. 
If other provisions are not made, an I grade eventually convertes to F. 

Grade changes other than I to a letter grade must be accompanied 
by an explanatory memo. 

A transcript costs $3.00 in cash or money order. Two or three 
weeks may be required to process an application for a transcript at 
the close of a semester or summer term. At other times the service 
requires approximately 48 hours from receipt of the request. 

An application for a transcript of credit earned must furnish the 
date of last attendance at WVU and student identification number. A 
married woman should give both her maiden and married name. 

All requests for transcripts must be sent, in writing, directly to 
the Office of Admissions and Records; no phone requests are 
accepted. 

Students who default in the payment of any University financial 
obligation forfeit their right to claim a transcript until such time that 
the obligation has been satisfied. 

The minimum academic standards for the different classifications 
are: 

To be in good standing, regular students must obtain a 2.75 
grade-point average in the first 12 hours of graduate study and 
maintain this average throughout the time they are enrolled in 
graduate work. A student failing to achieve this standard will be 
placed on probation and must achieve a cumulative grade-point 
average of 2.75 by the end of the next enrollment at West Virginia 
University. In the case of a part-time graduate student, a 2.75 
cumulative grade-point average must be obtained in the next nine 



50 GRADE-POINT AVERAGE 



hours of graduate study. A student who cannot attain the required 
average will be suspended. 

A provisional student has been admitted to the University with 
one or more deficiencies. Consequently, by completion of the 18th 
credit hour, the student must meet the provisions stated in the letter 
of admission and attain a minimum grade-point average of 2.75. A 
student who fails to meet the provisions of admission or who fails to 
achieve the required grade-point average will be suspended. Students 
who meet the provisions of admission and the required grade-point 
average will be reclassified as regular students, and the regulations 
governing good standing for regular students will apply. 

To be in good standing, a non-degree student must obtain a 2.25 
grade-point average in the first 12 hours of graduate study and 
maintain this average throughout the time enrolled in graduate work. 
A student failing to achieve this standard will be placed on probation 
and must achieve a cumulative grade-point average of 2.25 by the end 
of the next enrollment (or nine credit hours for part-time students) at 
West Virginia University. Students who cannot attain the required 
average will be suspended. A non-degree student who later wishes to 
apply for admission to a degree program must have achieved a 
minimum grade-point average of 2.75 on all course work taken since 
admission as a graduate student in order to be considered. 

Only grades in courses numbered 200 and above are computed in 
a graduate student's grade-point average; however, if any student 
receives grades lower than C for one-half or more of any course work 
attempted during one enrollment period, the student will be sus- 
pended. Credit hours for courses in which the grade is lower than C 
will not be counted toward satisfying graduate degree requirements. 

These standards are the minimum standards for the University. 
A graduate program may set higher standards which the student 
must meet, but these must be presented in writing to all students 
upon admission or published in the catalog. 

There are two types of withdrawals: withdrawal from some part 
of the work for which a student has registered, and a complete 
withdrawal from the University. Unless the formal withdrawal 
procedures are completed, failing grades are recorded. Withdrawals 
from some part of the work must have the initial approval of the 
student's adviser. It is the student's responsibility to see that all 
forms are properly executed and delivered to the appropriate author- 
ities for recording. 

Until the Friday of the tenth week of class (or Friday of the fourth 
week in a six-week summer session, or Friday of the second week of a 
three-week summer session), students may withdraw from individual 
courses. Deadlines are published in the WVU Schedule of Courses 
each semester. 

Students must obtain their adviser's signature on the University 
course adjustment form and submit the completed form to the Office 
of Admissions and Records. Before withdrawing from classes, 
students, with the help of their academic advisers, are responsible for 
determining: 

• If their course load would be reduced below the minimum 
requirement set by their program; 



Provisional 



Non-Degree 



All Students 



Withdrawals 



From Classes 
Deadlines 



Procedures 



WITHDRAWAL 51 



• If their course load would be reduced below the minimum 
number of hours required to qualify for financial aid or international 
full-time student status; 

• If the course to be dropped is a corequisite to another course 
the student is taking or a prerequisite to a course required the 
following semester. If so, the student may be required to drop the 
corequisite course or asked to take a substitute course the following 
semester. 

Students who withdraw from courses before the published 
deadline and who follow all of the established University procedures 
receive a W on their transcript for the appropriate course(s). The 
grade-point average is not affected in any way by this mark. 

From the Students who decide to leave WVU should withdraw from all 

University classes and must do so in accordance with established University 

policy in order that the official transcript may reflect this action. 

Students are responsible for all financial obligations and for 
following established procedures, including the completion of forms 
and delivery of the completed forms to appropriate officials. Students 
not fulfilling these requirements may have difficulty withdrawing 
from the University. The withdrawal becomes official only after the 
forms have been recorded by Admissions and Records. Students 
receive copies and are urged to keep them. 

Deadlines Any student (full- or part-time) may withdraw from all classes 

for which he/she is registered in the University any time before the 
last day on which regular classes are scheduled to meet as established 
by the University calendar and published in the Schedule of Courses. 

Procedures Students who desire to withdraw from all remaining classes 

should report in person to the Office of Student Life at the main lobby 
information desk of Moore Hall. Withdrawal procedures will be 
explained at that time. Identification (ID) and PRT cards must be 
presented. Students who are unable to withdraw in person because of 
illness, accident, or other valid reasons still must notify the Office of 
Student Life of their intention to withdraw. The notice should be 
verified in writing and the student ID and PRT cards enclosed. 

Students are responsible with the help of their academic advisers 
for determining how withdrawal from the University may affect 
their future status at the University including such aspects as 
suspension for failure to make progress toward a degree or a 
violation of established academic probation and eligibility for 
scholarship, fellowship, or financial aid. 

Absences Students and faculty have together formulated the University's 

policy on absences from classes, which spells out the responsibilities 
of student and instructor as follows: 

The student who is absent from class for any reason is responsible 
for work missed. Students should understand that absences may 
jeopardize their grades or continuance in the course. Instructors who 
use absence records in the determination of grades must announce 
this fact to students (in writing) within the first five class meetings. 
It is the responsibility of the instructor to keep an accurate record of 
all students enrolled. Instructors may report excessive absences to 
the student's dean or adviser. Students who have been absent 
because of illness, authorized University activities, or for other valid 



52 ABSENCES 



reasons are to have the opportunity to make up regularly scheduled 
examinations. 

As a matter of good manners, a student should inform an 
instructor in advance if obliged to be absent from a class meeting. 

Undergraduate students wishing to obtain graduate credit by Graduate Credit 



senior petition must obtain the standardized permission form from 
the Office of Admissions and Records. This form requires the 
signature of the student's undergraduate adviser and the head of the 
unit offering the graduate course. 

The policies regulating an undergraduate's enrollment in a 
graduate-level course for graduate credit are: 

• Enrollment is only permitted in courses numbered 300-399. 

• Undergraduates must be within 12 credit hours of their 
baccalaureate degrees with a grade-point average of 3.0 on a 4.0 scale. 

• The maximum amount of graduate credit permitted by senior 
petition is 12 credit hours. 

• The senior petition must be approved prior to or at the time of 
enrollment. 

Approved senior petitions are returned to the Office of Admis- 
sions and Records so that a notation of graduate credit may be placed 
on the student's transcript. 

Any exceptions to the regulations must be approved by the dean 
of the school or college in which the student seeks graduate credit. 

Note: Students receiving graduate credit for a course do not 
receive credit toward their undergraduate degree with the same 
course. 

Degree Completion 

Admission to candidacy for any graduate degree is an additional 
requirement over and above admission as a graduate student and 
admission to a graduate program in a particular department, school, 
or college. A candidate for a graduate degree is a student who has 
satisfactorily completed a suitable period of graduate work in 
residence as a regular graduate student and who has demonstrated 
the ability to do work of graduate caliber to the satisfaction of his/her 
adviser and graduate committee. 

Any graduate student who conducts research involving experi- 
ments that utilize animals must have a protocol approved by the 
Animal Care and Use Committee before starting the research. 
Information about procedures and protocol forms may be obtained 
from the Office of Sponsored Programs. 

Any graduate student who conducts research involving the use 
of human subjects must have the approval of the Institutional 
Review Board for the Protection of Human Subjects before starting 
the research. Information about procedures and approval forms may 
be obtained from the Office of Sponsored Programs. 

Theses and dissertations should be presented to the student's 
graduate adviser or committee chairperson at least one month before 
the end of the enrollment period in which completion of all require- 
ments is expected. The form prescribed in the "Regulations Governing 
the Preparation of Dissertations and Theses" must be followed with 



Via Senior 
Petition 



Candidacy 



Use of 

Experimental 

Animal Subjects 

in Research 

Use of 

Human Subjects 

in Research 



Theses and 
Dissertations 



DEGREE COMPLETION 53 



the guidance of the student's graduate adviser or the chairperson of 
the student's committee. For the manuscript to be approved, there 
must be no more than one unfavorable vote among members of the 
student's committee. Two copies with original signatures in approved 
typewritten form (master's theses in bound form and doctoral 
dissertations unbound) must be delivered to the Charles C. Wise, Jr. 
Library at least one week before the close of the period in which the 
degree is expected to be completed (one week before the end of the 
second summer session, by the last day of the final examination 
period at the end of the first semester, or one week before Commence- 
ment Day at the end of the second semester). 
Problem Problem reports are deposited with the major department in the 

Reports form and by the dates the department requires. 

Students' Doctoral dissertation committees consist of no fewer than five 

Committees members, the majority of which must be regular graduate faculty 

including the chairperson. No more than one person may be a non- 
member of the graduate faculty. Master's committees of programs 
requiring a thesis consist of no fewer than three members, the 
majority of which must be regular graduate faculty including the 
chairperson. No more than one person may be a non-member. 

Master's committees of programs not requiring a thesis consist 
of no fewer than three members, one of which must be a regular 
graduate faculty member. No more than one person may be a non- 
member, and the non-member cannot chair or advise. 

Students are not to be affected by the re-evaluation of faculty 
members. Once a graduate committee has been established for a 
student, it will not be necessary to alter it because of a change in 
graduate faculty status for one of the faculty members on the 
committee. 

No family member can serve on the graduate committee of 
his/her relative. 

At least one member of every doctoral committee must be from a 
department other than the one in which the student is seeking a 
degree. It is recommended, but not required, that this standard also 
be applied to master's degree committees. A majority of the members 
of all graduate committees must be graduate faculty members. 
Doctoral committees and master's degree committees of programs 
requiring a thesis must have a majority of regular graduate faculty 
members. 
Committee All graduate committees are subject to the approval of the school 

Approval or college dean or the dean's designee. 

Request for At the time of registration for the enrollment period in which all 

Degree degree requirements are expected to be met, or at the latest within 

two weeks after such registration, each candidate is to submit a 

formal request for the conferring of the degree. This is done on an 

"Application for Graduation and Diploma" form obtainable from the 

school or college dean's office. The candidate must complete all 

requirements at least one week before the end of that enrollment 

period. If the degree is not actually earned during that term, the 

student must submit a new "Application for Graduation and Diploma" 

when registering for the term in which completion is again anticipated. 

Commencement, Colleges and schools are responsible for seeing that master's and 

Diplomas doctoral students meet the minimum requirements of the University 



Changes in 
Graduate 
Faculty Status 



Other 
Requirements 



54 DEGREE COMPLETION 



as well as any additional college or school requirements. Deans' 
offices are responsible for maintaining all student records necessary 
to certify students for graduation. Attendance at the spring Com- 
mencement is voluntary. Anyone not planning to attend should leave 
a complete mailing address with the Office of Admissions and 
Records so that the diploma can be mailed. 

Summary of Requirements 

Regulations governing admission, registration, scholarship, etc., 
described in the preceding sections must be followed. 

At least 30 hours of graduate work planned with the student's 
graduate adviser must be satisfactorily completed within the period 
of eight years immediately preceding the conferring of the degree. 
Each student, through consultation with a graduate adviser, must 
meet the special requirements of the faculty of the field of major 
study. The program must be formulated in writing at the earliest 
possible date and a copy filed with the appropriate office so as to 
result in a cohesive, unified, and continuous plan of study. Most 
plans of study consist of certain amounts of work in major andminor 
fields. These are described in the departmental programs in Part 2 of 
this catalog. In degree programs requiring a thesis or problem report, 
appropriate course credits may be taken to cover the research and 
writing, but no more than six hours of credit earned for research or 
thesis may be counted in meeting course requirements for the degree. 

The final examination is not to be given until the semester or 
summer session in which all other requirements for the degree are to 
be met. The student's committee chairperson must indicate in 
advance the time, place, and recommended examining committee 
members and receive clearance from the office of the school orcollege 
dean before the examination can be given. 

The student cannot be considered as having satisfactorily 
passed the final examination if there is more than one unfavorable 
vote among members of the examining committee. Results of each 
examination must be reported to the school or college dean within 24 
hours. Re-examination may not be scheduled without approval of the 
request by the school or college dean. All committee members are to 
be present for the final examination. If an examination cannot be 
scheduled at a time convenient to all committee members, the dean or 
his/her designee may permit another faculty member to substitute 
for the original committee member, provided that the original 
committee member was not the chair. There can be no substitute for 
the chair. Only one substitute is allowed, and the request for a 
substitute must be made in writing prior to the examination. The 
request for a substitute should be signed by the committee chair, the 
student, and both the original faculty member and the substitute 
faculty member. A substitute faculty member must have the same or 
higher graduate faculty status as the original faculty member and 
represent the same academic discipline or specialization. 

If the requirements for the master's degree include a thesis, the 
thesis must bear the original signatures of at least all but one of the 
committee members. If more than one member of the committee, 
whatever the size of the committee, dissents from approving the 
thesis, the degree cannot be recommended. If a substitute faculty 



Master's 
Degrees 



Final 
Examination 



SUMMARY OF REQUIREMENTS 55 



member attends the final examination, the substitute signs the 

shuttle sheet; however the original committee member is to sign the 

thesis. 

Theses must be presented to the University at least one week 

before the degree is expected to be granted. 
Procedures for 1. Letter of inquiry from prospective student to department 

Master's chairperson (program inquiries) or to Office of Admissions and 

Degrees Records (general information inquiries). 

2. Mailing of graduate application form to student from the 
Office of Admissions and Records. 

3. Receipt of application materials and required fee by the Office 
of Admissions and Records. 

4. Referral of application materials to appropriate program by 
the Office of Admissions and Records. 

5. The department in question notifies the Office of Admissions 
and Records of the admission action. 

6. The student arrives, reports to the program department, is 
assigned an adviser, and registers for course work. 

7. Shortly after admission to the program (usually within the 
first 9-12 semester hours of course work), an advisory committee is 
formed and produces the student's plan of study. 

8. Student completes requisite course work and other program 
requirements. 

9. Student confers with adviser and, if applicable, chairperson 
of thesis committee to see if all requirements can be met by the end of 
the semester in which he/she plans to graduate. This should be done 
no later than the beginning of the final semester. 

10. Student registers for either a course or for the Non-Enrolled 
Graduate Student Evaluation Fee ($50). No one may graduate who is 
not registered as a student during the semester of graduation. 

11. Student checks with the University to insure that there is 
correspondence between departmental and University records and 
that there are no remaining deficiencies. 

12. Student completes an "Application for Graduation and 
Diploma." This should be done no iater than two weeks after 
registration. 

13. After getting a fee slip from the Office of Admissions and 
Records, the student pays the $20 Graduation Fee at the Cashier's 
window in the Mountainlair. 

14. (If applicable) The student presents a typed draft of the 
thesis to each committee member. 

15. The student should remind the committee chairperson to 
request clearance from the school or college dean's office at least two 
weeks before the date of the final examination (or thesis defense). 

16. Results of the final examination (or thesis defense) must be 
reported to the dean's office by the graduate adviser or the committee 
chairperson not later than one week before the end of the semester or 
summer session in which the degree is expected to be granted. 

17. Two bound and originally signed copies of the thesis (the 
original and first copy or two electrostatically-reproduced copies) 
must be submitted to the Charles C. Wise, Jr. Library no later than one 
week before the degree is expected to be granted. 



56 SUMMARY OF REQUIREMENTS 



Regulations governing admission, registration, scholarship, etc., 
described in the preceding sections must be followed. In addition, the 
student must satisfy the requirements specified by the faculty 
responsible for the major field. Students applying for admission to a 
doctoral program, after having received a master's degree at WVU, 
must file a new application for graduate work with the Office of 
Admissions and Records. 

All of the requirements for any graduate degree must be 
completed within the time limits described earlier. 

The program of doctoral study is planned with the student's 
graduate adviser and committee to combine any or all of the 
following: graduate courses of instruction, special seminars, indepen- 
dent study, supervised research, and supervised training designed to 
promote a broad and systematic knowledge of the major field and to 
prepare the student for the comprehensive qualifying and final 
examinations and writing of the dissertation. 

Graduate education, especially at the doctoral level, involves 
many learning experiences which take place outside the formal 
classroom setting. These involve observing and participating in 
activities conducted by the graduate faculty, using departmental and 
University libraries, attending lectures presented by visiting scholars, 
informal debates with fellow students, and similar activities. 

To insure that graduate students experience these kinds of 
informal learning, WVU requires at least one year in residence in 
full-time graduate study at the doctoral level. Some WVU doctoral 
programs require a longer residency. 

Admission to graduate study and enrollment in graduate courses 
does not of itself imply acceptance of the student as a candidate fora 
doctoral degree. This is only accomplished by satisfactorily passing 
a comprehensive or qualifying examination (either oral, or written, 
or both) and by meeting specified language and/or other requirements. 

A student will be given a comprehensive examination to demon- 
strate knowledge of the important phases and problems of the field of 
major study, their relation to other fields, and the ability to employ 
the instruments of research. The examination is intended to determine 
whether the student has the academic competence to undertake 
independent research in the discipline, and to insure that the student 
possesses a thorough grasp of the fields outlined on the plan of study. 

The examination, which consists of a series of tests covering all 
areas specified in the plan of study, is to be administered after most 
formal studies have been completed. Scheduling and results of the 
examination must be reported to the school or college dean. 

It must be the consensus of the doctoral committee that the 
student has passed the examination, although the committee may 
permit one dissenting vote. A single portion of the examination may 
be repeated at the discretion of the committee, but if two or more 
members are dissatisfied, the entire qualifying examination must be 
repeated. The student must petition through the doctoral committee 



Doctoral 
Degrees 



Program 



Residence 



Candidacy 
Requirements 



Qualifying 
Examination 



SUMMARY OF REQUIREMENTS 57 



in order to be permitted to repeat a qualifying examination, and it is 

anticipated that a waiting period will be specified by the committee 

during which the student will have opportunity to correct deficiencies. 

Academic tradition does not allow for a qualifying examination to be 

administered more than three times. 

Foreign Competence in one or more foreign languages is a common 

Language requirement in graduate degree programs. The faculty in the graduate 

Examinations degree program specify the language or languages and the level of 

competence to be demonstrated. 

Language examinations are arranged by the foreign language 
examiner, who can be contacted through the Department of Foreign 
Languages, and under whose direction language examinations are 
administered. 

When only reading competence is required, the foreign language 
examiner may waive examination in cases where the student's 
transcript shows, at a date that proves to fall no earlier than seven 
years before promotion to candidacy for the doctorate, either comple- 
tion of 12 semester hours or equivalent of course work in an approved 
foreign language, at WVU or at any other institution of recognized 
standing, with a grade of B or better in the last three hours, or 
completion of French 306, German 306, or Russian 306 at WVU with a 
grade of B or better. 

Candidacy for the doctoral degree is granted when a student is 
certified as having successfully completed the qualifying examina- 
tion, satisfied the language requirements, and met any additional 
requirements specified by the academic unit. 
Dissertation The candidate must submit a dissertation pursued under the 

direction of the faculty of the University on some topic in the field of 
the major subject. The dissertation must present the results of the 
candidate's individual investigation and must embody a definite 
contribution to knowledge. While conducting research or writing a 
dissertation, the student must register at the beginning of each 
semester or summer during which credit is being earned. No 
residence credit will be allowed for special field assignments or other 
work taken off the University campus without prior approval by the 
Assistant Vice President for Curriculum and Instruction. 
Final The final examination is not given until the semester or summer j 

Examination session in which all other requirements for the degree are to be met. 

After the candidate's dissertation has been tentatively approved, the 
final oral examination on the dissertation can be scheduled. At the 
option of the faculty responsible for the degree program, a compre- 
hensive final written examination also may be required. The student's 
committee chairperson must indicate in advance the time, place, and 
recommended examining committee members and receive clearance 
from the office of the school or college dean before the examination 
can be given. Such notifications of doctoral examinations must be 
received at least three weeks before the examination date. All 
doctoral final oral examinations are open examinations and the lead 
time is required for public notice to the University community. 

The student cannot be considered as having satisfactorily 
passed the final examination if there is more than one unfavorable 
vote among members of the examining committee. Results of each 
examination must be reported to the school or college dean within 24 



58 SUMMARY OF REQUIREMENTS 



hours. Re-examination may not be scheduled without approval of the 
request by the school or college dean. All committee members are to 
be present for the final examination. If an examination cannot be 
scheduled at a time convenient to all committee members, the dean or 
his/her designee may permit another faculty member to substitute 
for the original committee member, provided that the original 
committee member was not the chair. There can be no substitute for 
the chair. Only one substitute is allowed, and the request for a 
substitute must be made in writing prior to the examination. The 
request for a substitute should be signed by the committee chair, the 
student, and both the original faculty member and the substitute 
faculty member. A substitute faculty member must have the same or 
higher graduate faculty status as the original faculty member and 
represent the same academic discipline or specialization. 

The requirements for a doctorate include acceptance of the Acceptance of 
dissertation. The dissertation must bear the original signatures of at Dissertation 

least all but one of the committee members. If more than one member 
of the committee, whatever the size of the committee, dissents from 
approving the dissertation, the degree cannot be recommended. If a 
substitute faculty member attends the final examination, the substi- 
tute signs the shuttle sheet; however, the original committee member 
is to sign the dissertation. The dissertation must be presented to the 
University not later than one week before the end of the semester or 
summer session in which the degree is expected to be granted (one 
week before the end of the summer, by the last day of the final 
examination period at the end of the first semester, or one week 
before Commencement Day at the end of the second semester). 

All doctoral dissertations and their abstracts will be microfilmed Publication 

through University Microfilms, Ann Arbor, Michigan. This require- 
ment will not be satisfied by any other publication but does not 
preclude publication elsewhere, which is both permitted and encour- 
aged. 

Candidates are to follow "Regulations Governing the Preparation 
of Dissertations and Theses" regarding format and organization of 
the dissertation, which is on file at the department offices, offices of 
all graduate advisers, and the University libraries. The candidate is 
required to maintain close contact with the supervisor or chairperson 
of the graduate committee on these matters in developing a disserta- 
tion so as to incorporate the special requirements of the subject 
discipline. 

One week before the close of the semester or summer in which the Summary 

degree is expected to be conferred the candidate must meet the 
following requirements: 

1. Submit in a form satisfactory for microfilming, the typewrit- 
ten, unbound original and first carbon copy of the dissertation. Two 
excellent machine-reproduced copies may be acceptable. Both copies 
must have original signatures of the candidate's committee. 

2. Submit one extra abstract using no more than 350 words. This 
separate abstract must have at the top of the first page the centered 
exact title of the dissertation, followed on the next line by the full 
name of the candidate, and on the next line by the word ABSTRACT. 
The extra abstract is on unnumbered pages. 



SUMMARY OF REQUIREMENTS 59 



3. Submit a microfilm contract completed and signed by the 
candidate. 

4. Pay a fee of $45.00 to cover the cost of microfilming the 
dissertation and publication of the abstract in Dissertation Abstracts, 
a bi-monthly journal which receives wide distribution. This fee is 
payable by certified check or money order made out to "West Virginia 
University." If desired, copyright service can be provided through 
WVU upon receipt, along with the dissertation, of a certified check or 
money order for $20.00 made payable to "University Microfilms." 

5. Complete the questionnaire entitled "Survey of Earned Doc- 
torates." 

Procedures lor 1. Letter of inquiry from prospective student to department 

the Doctoral chairperson (program inquiries) or to the Office of Admissions and 

Degree Records (general information inquiries). 

2. Mailing of graduate study application form to student from 
the Office of Admissions and Records. 

3. Receipt of application materials and required fee by the Office 
of Admissions and Records. 

4. Referral of application materials to the appropriate program 
by the Office of Admissions and Records. 

5. The program in question notifies the Office of Admissions and 
Records of the admission action. 

6. The student arrives, reports to the program department, is 
assigned an adviser, and registers for course work. 

7. Shortly after admission to the program (usually within the 
first 9-12 semester hours of course work), an advisory committee is 
formed and produces the student's plan of study. 

8. Student completes requisite course work and other program 
requirements, satisfying also the stipulated residency requirement. 

9. Student takes the language examination (if applicable). 

10. Student takes written and/or oral comprehensive (qualifying) 
examination for admission to candidacy. The results are communi- 
cated to the appropriate office by the student's graduate program 
adviser. 

11. Student undertakes a doctoral dissertation under the guid- 
ance of a dissertation committee. The dissertation phase begins with 
approval of a dissertation prospectus by the dissertation committee, 
the department chairperson, and the school or college dean. 

12. A copy of the preliminary draft of the dissertation is given to 
each committee member at least one month prior to the final oral 
examination. 

13. The dissertation adviser (committee chairperson) requests a 
clearance for the final examination from the school or college dean's 
office no later than three weeks before the scheduled date. 

14. The time and place of the examination is announced. 

15. The student defends the dissertation in an oral defense. 

16. The student delivers two copies of the approved dissertation, 
appropriate questionnaires, and fees to the Charles C. Wise, Jr. 
Library. 



60 SUMMARY OF REQUIREMENTS 



Part 3 

FEES AND OTHER INFORMATION 

All West Virginia University fees are subject to change without Fee 

notice. Regulations 

A nonrefundable special service fee of $25 must accompany the 
application for admission to graduate studies. All fees are due and 
payable to the controller on the days of registration. Completion of 
arrangements with the controller's office for payment from officially 
accepted scholarships, loan funds, grants, or contracts shall be 
considered sufficient for acceptance of registration. Fees paid after 
regular registration must be paid to the University cashier. 

Any student failing to complete registration on regular registra- 
tion days is subject to a late registration fee. 

Students registering pay the fees shown in the fees charts, plus 
special fees and deposits as required. 

No degree is conferred upon any candidate and no transcripts are 
issued to any student before payment is made of all tuition, fees, and 
other indebtedness to any unit of the University. 

It is the policy of West Virginia University to place on restriction 
students who have outstanding debts to a unit or units of the 
University. The restriction may include, but is not limited to, the 
withholding of a student's registration, a student's diploma, or a 
student's transcript. 

Persons who are neither registered as University students nor 
are members of its administrative or teaching staffs shall not be 
admitted to regular attendance in University classes. 

Fees for credit hours for off-campus students are the same as Off-Campus 

those charged students enrolled in on-campus courses. Off-campus Fees 

students do not pay the faculty improvement fee, Daily Athenaeum 
fee, the radio station fee, or the Mountainlair construction fee. 
However, all students except students taking courses offered by the 
College of Business and Economics (who pay an $80 course fee) must 
pay a $40 course fee for each off-campus course taken. 

Consult specific departmental sections of this catalog concerning Lab Fees 

nonrefundable deposits and microscope rentals. 

All music majors must pay a fee of $10.00 per semester, which Music 

entitles them to assigned practice space one hour per day. Additional 
space may be available at the rate of $4.00 per hour. 

Band and orchestra instruments may be rented by the semester Instruments 

for $10.00. 

Students may enroll in courses without working for grade or for Auditors 

credit by registering as auditors and by paying full fees. 

According to legislation passed by the West Virginia Legislature Tuition and 

in 1983, WVU is limited in the number of graduate and professional Fee Waivers 

waivers that can be awarded each school year. 

According to Board of Regents Policy Bulletin No. 49, WVU must 
give priority consideration in awarding these waivers to students 
who are West Virginia residents and also to faculty and staff of West 
Virginia public and private colleges and universities. 

61 



Special Fees 

Application for admission (Dentistry and Medicine) 30.00 

Application for admission (College of Law or Graduate Studies) 25.00 

Certificate of Advanced Study in Education 2.00 

Diploma replacement 20.00 

Graduation 20.00 

(Payable by all students at the beginning of the semester or session in 
which they expect to receive their degrees.) 

Late registration (nonrefundable) 20.00 

(Not charged to students who complete registration during the regular 
registration days set forth in the University Calendar.) 

Non-enrolled graduate student evaluation fee 50.00 

(For graduate students not otherwise enrolled at time of final exam.) 

Professional engineering degree (includes $20.00 graduation fee) 35.00 

Program reactivation fee (graduate students) 20.00 

Reinstatement of student dropped from the rolls 10.00 

Student identification card replacement 10.00 

Student's record fee 3.00 

Official transcript 3.00 

Official letter (statement of degree/grade-point average) 3.00 

Course descriptions 5.00 

Priority service on above 5.00 



Summer Tuition and Fees 

Tuition Resident Nonresident 

Graduate tuition per credit hour 70.00 217.00 

Dentistry tuition per credit hour 129.00 320.00 

Medicine tuition per credit hour 102.00 263.00 

Daily Athenaeum Fee* 1.00 1.00 

Radio Station Fee* 1.00 1.00 

Health, Counseling, and 

Program Services Fee 33.00 33.00 

Mountainlair Construction Fee, 

per six week summer session 

or any portion thereof* 19.00 19.00 

Student Affairs Fee 10.00 10.00 

Transportation Fee 17.00 17.00 

*Fee required of all students. Nonrefundable unless student withdraws officially before the 
close of general registration. 



62 FINANCIAL INFORMATION 















£-c 












E ~ 


o o 




o o 




o o 


^H 


o o 




o o 




o o 


o t^ 




Of 05 




CM 00 




t^ rn 




CM CM 




O CD 


t- u 










r* CM 


a. £ 


^ ee 




«e «e 




«» se 


a. 













"o 

o 

u 



-C O 

11 



.y o 



a> o 

a; 
U 5P 



— u £ 



en Q£ 



5 c 
3 J 

CD to 
a; .22 
!5 6 

'5 



-a a, 

03 y 



$ s 

I*- g .2 

.22 3 3 43 

-55 2. ^£ 



H s 



V ts 



t: 



0) 



-J 


o o 




o o 




o o 


< 


o o 




q q 




o o 


E- 


t-h r-5 




d d 




d r^ 


O 


CT> rn 




t>. CO 




tv co 


0C «H 




in ^r 




«r ^ 


CM* 




r-" CO 




CM* t" 




m 




ee 




^ 














c 














o o 




o o 




o o 


q q 




q q 




q q 


3 « 

a 2 


lo iri 




in in 




in in 


co o 




CO o 




CO O 












*■ D. 


«e 




ee 




ee 






































t- 








"S c 












-2 o 












C -3 


o o 




o o 




o o 


•~ CJ 

a 3 


o o 




o o 




o o 


d d 




d d 




d d 


c ** 


m m 




m m 




m m 


3 c 

o o 


«e 




V* 




W 












£u 




















a 




>N 




1) 




•2 ~ 


o o 




o o 


# c 


O O 


o o 


.<£ 


q q 


]w 


q q 


II 


d d 


C 
01 

Q 


d d 


V 


d d 


o o 


o o 


o o 


M < 


CM CM 


CM CM 


2 


CM CM 


c 
























c 








o 




































a « 

§ 8 


d o 




O O 




§§ 


q q 




o o 




"a 3 

W o 

« CO 


in" iri 




d d 






m cd 

CO 03 




m en 

tN CD 




CO 43 














«e 




«e «e 




€e 














X 












c 








o 














o o 




o o 




o o 


a 


o o 




o o 




o o 




d d 




d d 




d d 




m m 




m m 




m m 




CM 




CM 




CM 


00 
CD 

a: 


ce 




Vb 




ee 












B 


o o 


o o 


o o 


O 


q q 




q q 




q o 


'3 


in in 




in in 




d d 




05 co 




CO CO 




o o 


E-« 


r* CO 




co co 




CO CO 


ee 




ee 




ce 
















c 




c 




c 




03 




CO 




CO 




*- -a 




•- -a 




*- -a 




c '33 




c "53 
•S2 




c '£, 




■S £ 






■s 1 


03 


'S3 5 

CD O 




"53 5 

CO O 




'33 c 

co O 


£ 


GC2 




act2 




a: 2: 



-3 .2 "U 3 

t. co a? "3 

a; co 3 CO 

3. a> o *- 

co co u rj 

£ 03 OJ . 
03 3 CO 3 

C 3 co 

Z" -^ •*- "- 

C oj c/3 3 

^ i 03 ■£ 
03 .2 « T3 

> CO CJ QJ 
03 03 3j a 

*- C '*-' 
t- O .3 O 

c2 00 CO «- 

"3.S ^^ 

03 t- CO c 

£- 3 03 C 

.2 «> * 5 

Si s° 

03 c 5 

-C — 3 ° 

> **> v 'Z 

> W m ^ 

c 03 c a 

CO X CO Q, 

«1 - s 

« £ u £ 

3 £ O T3 

■^ , -*- c 

co t- ^_ .3 

" I ^"^ • 

"3 > r 03 CO 

co a; 03 3; _ 

3 ^3 t- a £ 

-a u u — -o 

00 «- §"« s 

03 O fc CJ o 
P - l 03 

1 S3 o oo £ 
• i5 03 co 3q 

co o -3 o z: 

« So^i 

co T3 '^ *° CO 

03 CO "3 3 3 

co u 03 g na 

3 *0 33 rv CD 

t- nj fc. cB 00 

|J-S 2 



03 - 1 OT 

x 5 c 



^E 



a cd 

° c 



>» -J go 



S £ 



sis. ^ 



3 Q 



'3 .« 

n tu ■« 



>i o -^ "- 

f- . *- u 

O CD CD 

"3 CM *- QJ 

-. * W t, 

co "J3 6* c 

o ^ rr co 

3- c ^ u 

Q"^J 03* o 

CB^ CJ 5 *" 

-2^-3 

03 C oj 

= •2=5 



03 >j 

TD CD 

3 Q. 

03 C 



3 2L O « i 

3 ^^ O, CO CJh rv 



O CO ' 



oH 5 § 



^ O 3 

Rr £3 u 

co •- QJ T3 . 

CD t "3 « w 

3 CO t-i 03 

£^ 3 o co 

c3 t- T3 03 O 

u 03 co C Q- 

° "S3 r*") *C 3 



CO "3 
J 3 



CO cu 
Dh Q 



f CO £ 

<g? 

D CO - *- 

03 03 £- 

- -q 03 CD 

2 3 PCh Q 

73 co ^_ 



30S| 



a-313: S 



^j CO ^03 



CO *- 



-" 03 



FINANCIAL INFORMATION 63 



Refund of Fees 



Summer Sessions 
and 

Non-Traditional 
Periods 



Service Charge 
on Returned 
Checks 



Non-Sufficient 
Funds 
Check Policy 



Academic deans, directors, and vice presidents of other Univer- 
sity of West Virginia Board of Trustees institutions are charged with 
responsiblity of awarding tuition waivers. Students should contact 
the appropriate person in their department, school, or college for 
information regarding applications and priorities. 

A student who officially withdraws from University courses 
may arrange for a refund of fees by submitting to the University 
controller evidence of eligibility for a refund during the semester. 

To withdraw officially, a student must apply to the Division of 
Student Affairs for permission. Semester fees will be returned in 
accordance with the following schedule: 
Academic Year (Semester) Refund 

During the first and second weeks 90% 

During the third and fourth weeks 70% 

During the fifth and sixth weeks 50% 

Beginning with the seventh week No Refund 

To receive a refund of tuition, a student must apply for it at the Office 
of Admissions and Records. However, students cannot expect a 
refund if they drop a course or withdraw from the University after 
the last day for a tuition refund. 

Refunds for summer sessions and non-traditional periods are 
established based upon the refund rate for the academic year. (For 
specific information concerning summer session refunds, see the 
appropriate Summer Schedule of Courses.) Should the percentage 
calculation identify a partial day, the entire day will be included in 
the higher refund period. 

No part of the activity fee is refundable unless the student 
withdraws from the University. 

University policy provides that students called to the armed 
services of the United States may be granted full refund of refundable 
fees, but no credit, if the call comes before the end of the first three- 
fourths of the semester, and that full credit of courses be granted to 
persons called to the armed services of the United States if the call 
comes thereafter; provided, however, that credit as described above 
will be granted only in those courses in which the student is 
maintaining a passing mark at the time of departure for military 
service. In the recording of final grades, for three-fourths of a ] 
semester or more, both passing and failing grades are to be shown on 
the student's permanent record. 

A service charge of $10 will be collected on each check returned 
unpaid by the bank upon which it is drawn. 

If the check returned by the bank was in payment of University 
and registration fees, the controller's office shall declare the fees 
unpaid and registration cancelled if the check has not been redeemed 
within three days from date of written notice. In such a case the 
student may be reinstated upon redemption of the check, payment of 
the $10 service charge, the reinstatement fee of $10, and the late 
payment fee of $20. 

Payments of tuition, fees, and other charges by check are subject 
to WVU's non-sufficient funds check policy. A copy of the policy is 
available in the bursar's office. 



64 FINANCIAL INFORMATION 



The Student Financial Aid Office estimates that the total cost of 
attending WVU for a nine-month academic year is $8,100 for single 
West Virginia residents living on or off-campus and $5,000 for those 
living at home; $10,500 for single nonresidents living on or off- 
campus and $7,750 for those living at home. 

These typical estimated student budgets include tuition and fees, 
books and supplies, room, board, transportation, and personal 
expenses that provide for a modest but adequate life-style. 

The Veterans Administration (VA) administers two basic educa- 
tional programs for veterans. For eligible persons with service 
between February 1, 1955, and December 31, 1976, such assistance is 
available under the G.I. Bill. Eligible persons who initially entered 
the military on or after January 1, 1977, may receive educational 
assistance under a contributory plan. 

Information regarding these educational opportunities at WVU 
may be obtained by contacting the Financial Aid Office, in the 
Mountainlair, P.O. Box 6004, Morgantown, WV 26506-6004. 

West Virginia University annually awards over 800 graduate 
assistantships supported from state appropriations, federal funds, 
private grants, and contracts; and about 200 fellowships and trainee- 
ships derived from federal agencies and from industries and private 
foundations. 

Fellowships are awarded on the basis of academic merit and 
require no service in return. Graduate fellows are expected to spend 
full time in pursuit of their studies, but may teach to the extent that 
the particular degree program requires. Most traineeships, provided 
through institutional grants, are also for full-time study without 
scheduled duties. Stipends for graduate assistantships are generally 
stated in terms of nine- and twelve-month appointments and require 
service to the institution. There are five kinds of graduate assistant- 
ships. 

A person who holds a graduate assistantship is obligated to the 
extent of teaching two three-hour courses per semester, or for the 
equivalent in laboratory classes, or for other forms of departmental 
assistance, except research assistance, amounting to a minimum of 
12 clock hours per week. 

A research assistant is one whose duties consist of assisting in 
the research of a faculty member with an obligation of not less than 
15 nor more than 20 clock hours per week in any semester. 

A student employed as a graduate administrative assistant 
works part time in one of the administrative offices of WVU. The 
individual is primarily a student and secondarily an employee and is 
required to be a full-time graduate student. Assistantships obligate 
the student to no less than 12 nor more than 20 hours of work per 
week in any semester. 

A teaching fellow is an advanced graduate student, usually in a 
doctoral program, who would qualify for a junior faculty position if 
that person were not a graduate student at WVU. A teaching fellow 
may be given major responsibility for the design and/or operation of 
a course, whereas such responsibility is not placed on a graduate 
teaching assistant. 



Cost of an 

Academic Year's 

Work 



Veterans 

Educational 

Assistance 



Assistantships, 

Fellowships, 

and 

Traineeships 



Graduate 
Teaching 
Assistant 



Graduate 
Research 
Assistant 
Graduate 
Administrative 
Assistant 



Teaching 
Fellow 



FINANCIAL INFORMATION 65 



Graduate Residence hall graduate assistants' duties and responsibilities 

Residence Hall obligate them to not less than 20 clock hours of work per week. Their 
Assistant job responsibilities entail the planning and implementation of devel- 

opmental educational programming in the residence halls. 

All graduate assistants, fellows, and trainees are required to be 
full-time graduate students. Tuition and registration fees generally 
are remitted upon application. 

Awards are made by degree programs or by the non-academic 
unit where service is to be rendered. Applications should be made to 
the dean or director concerned or to the chairperson of the program in 
which the graduate work will be pursued. Early application is 
strongly recommended. 

Students may hold only one appointment as a graduate assistant 
per term. 

Students appointed as graduate assistants are eligible to apply 
for remission of tuition and certain fees. Tuition and some fees are 
generally remitted or paid for fellows and trainees. All students must 
pay the Mountainlair construction, radio station, and Daily Athe- 
naeum fees, but graduate assistants, fellows, and trainees are 
granted the same option as part-time students with regard to the 
remainder of the institution activity fee. 

Arlen G. and Louise Stone Swiger have been special benefactors 
to WVU in their establishment of this fellowship program through 
the West Virginia University Foundation, Inc. Both were WVU 
graduates. Arlen G. Swiger, a successful New York attorney, 
bequeathed to the University half of his estate which became 
available to the WVU Foundation upon the death of his widow, 
Louise Stone Swiger. These fellowships are open to doctoral students. 
Selection is competitive on the basis of academic merit. Application 
should be made early in the year preceding the year of anticipated 
enrollment in a doctoral program. Inquiries should be directed to the 
office of the assistant vice president for curriculum and instruction. 

Dr. William Edward Burghardt DuBois was born in 1868. He was 
educated at Fisk University and received his Ph.D. from Harvard 
University in 1896. Dr. DuBois was one of the founders of the 
National Association for the Advancement of Colored People and the 
Pan-African Congress Movement. Author of many historical and; 
analytical studies of American and African society, his example 
provides a standard of excellence for scholarship in any discipline 
and an especially inspiring model for black scholars. Because of the 
achievements of Dr. DuBois, West Virginia University has named 
this fellowship program in his honor. 

The fellowships are open to black graduate and professional 
students who are native or naturalized U.S. citizens. Selection is 
competitive on the basis of academic merit and potential for success 
in graduate or professional study. Inquiries should be directed to the 
graduate or professional program of choice or to the assistant vice 
president for curriculum and instruction. 
University Assistantships are available through the University Advising 

Advising Center Center for students who have been admitted to a graduate program. 
Those who are accepted will provide academic advising services to 
freshman and sophomore students. A stipend is paid and tuition and 



Remission 
of Fees 



Arlen G. 
and Louise 
Stone Swiger 
Doctoral 
Fellowships 



W. E. B. DuBois 
Fellowships 
For Black 
Graduate and 
Professional 
Students 



66 FINANCIAL INFORMATION 



registration fees are also waived. Contact the Office of the Directorin 
the Student Services Center for information and applications. 

Approximately 100 positions are available for single graduate Resident 

and undergraduate students to serve as resident assistants in the Assistantships 
University residence halls. Selection is based on the applicant's 
academic record, previous background and experience, and interper- 
sonal relationship skills. 

Resident assistants serve as members of the staff of Student 
Affairs advising approximately 50 freshman students on floors in 
University residence halls. Staff without prior residence hall experi- 
ence receive room and half-board. Experienced staff receive room 
and full board. Graduate staff members receive a waiver of tuition 
and optional fees. Applications are available in December and nine- 
month appointments are made in April for the following academic 
year. For further information and an application, write to the 
Assistant Director of Residence Life, G-106 Towers, West Virginia 
University, Morgantown, WV 26506. 

Information and guidance on loans for graduate students are 
available in the Student Financial Aid Office, Mountainlair. On- 
campus employment opportunities can be investigated at the Student 
Financial Aid Office in Mountainlair and the Human Resources 
Office in Knapp Hall. A summer and part-time job service is operated 
by the WVU Career Services Center in Mountainlair. Its purpose is to 
place students in part-time or temporary jobs in Morgantown and the 
surrounding area. 

Students are encouraged to submit applications to outside 
agencies that support graduate-level study and research. Among the 
opportunities available are programs sponsored by the Fulbright- 
Hays Training Grants, the National Science Foundation, the Marshall 
Scholarship Program, the National Institutes of Health, the Oak 
Ridge Associated Universities, and the Rhodes Scholarships. Students 
should contact the Office of Sponsored Programs for assistance in 
applying for these programs. In most cases, this office will refer the 
student to a faculty adviser who can provide detailed assistance. 
Several national agencies publish information about fellowships and 
financial aid opportunities for graduate students. Individuals inter- 
ested in reviewing this information should consult the personnel at 
the reference desk of the Charles C. Wise, Jr. Library. 

Residency Policy for Admission and Fee Purposes 

1.1 Students enrolling in a West Virginia public institution of Classification 
higher education shall be assigned a residency status for admission, Section 1. 

tuition, and fee purposes by the institutional officer designated by 
the President. In determining residency classification, the issue is 
essentially one of domicile. In general, the domicile of a person is that 
person's true, fixed, permanent home and place of habitation. The 
decision shall be based upon information furnished by the student 
and all other relevant information. The designated officer is autho- 
rized to require such written documents, affidavits, verifications, or 
other evidence as is deemed necessary to establish the domicile of a 
student. The burden of establishing domicile for admission, tuition, 
and fee purposes is upon the student. 



Financial Aid: 

Loans, 

Employment 



Fellowship 

Opportunities 

for Study 

In the 

United States 

or Abroad 



FINANCIAL INFORMATION 67 



1.2 If there is a question as to domicile, the matter must be 
brought to the attention of the designated officer at least two weeks 
prior to the deadline for the payment of tuition and fees. Any student 
found to have made a false or misleading statement concerning 
domicile shall be subject to institutional disciplinary action and will 
be charged the nonresident fees for each academic term theretofore 
attended. 

1.3 The previous determination of a student's domiciliary status 
by one institution is not conclusive or binding when subsequently 
considered by another institution; however, assuming no change of 
facts, the prior judgment should be given strong consideration in the 
interest of consistency. Out-of-state students being assessed resident 
tuition and fees as a result of a reciprocity agreement may not 
transfer said reciprocity status to another public institution in West 
Virginia. 

Residence 2.1 Domicile within the state means adoption of the state as the 

Determined by fixed permanent home and involves personal presence within the 
Domicile state with no intent on the part of the applicant or, in the case of a 

Section 2. dependent student, the applicant's parent(s) to return to another 

state or country. Residing with relatives (other than parent(s)/ 
guardian) does not, in and of itself, cause the student to attain 
domicile in this state for admission or fee payment purposes. West 
Virginia domicile may be established upon the completion of at least 
twelve months of continued presence within the state prior to the 
date of registration, provided that such twelve months' presence is 
not primarily for the purpose of attendance at any institution of 
higher education in West Virginia. Establishment of West Virginia 
domicile with less than twelve months' presence prior to the date of 
registration must be supported by evidence of positive and unequiv- 
ocal action. In determining domicile, institutional officials should 
give consideration to such factors as the ownership or lease of a 
permanently occupied home in West Virginia, full-time employment 
within the state, paying West Virginia property tax, filing West 
Virginia income tax returns, registering of motor vehicles in West 
Virginia, possessing a valid West Virginia driver's license, and 
marriage to a person already domiciled in West Virginia. Proof of a 
number of these actions shall be considered only as evidence which; 
may be used in determining whether or not a domicile has been 
established. Factors militating against the establishment of West 
Virginia domicile might include such considerations as the student 
not being self-supporting, being claimed as a dependent on federal or 
state income tax returns or the parents' health insurance policy if the 
parents reside out of state, receiving financial assistance from state 
student aid programs in other states, and leaving the state when 
school is not in session. 
Dependency 3.1 A dependent student is one who is listed as a dependent on 

Status the federal or state income tax return of his/her parent(s) or legal 

Section 3. guardian or who receives major financial support from that person. 

Such a student maintains the same domicile as that of the parent(s) or 
legal guardian. In the event the parents are divorced or legally 
separated, the dependent student takes the domicile of the parent 
with whom he/she lives or to whom he/she has been assigned by 
court order. However, a dependent student who enrolls and is 



68 FINANCIAL INFORMATION 



properly classified as an in-state student maintains that classification 
as long as the enrollment is continuous and that student does not 
attain independence and establish domicile in another state. 

3.2 A nonresident student who becomes independent while a 
student at an institution of higher education in West Virginia does 
not, by reason of such independence alone, attain domicile in this 
state for admission or fee payment purposes. 

4.1 A person who has been classified as an out-of-state student Change of 

and who seeks resident status in West Virginia must assume the Residence 

burden of providing conclusive evidence that he/she has established Section 4. 

domicile in West Virginia with the intention of making the permanent 
home in this state. The intent to remain indefinitely in West Virginia 
is evidence not only by a person's statements, but also by that 
person's actions. In making a determination regarding a request for 
change in residency status, the designated institutional officer shall 
consider those actions referenced in Section 2 above. The change in 
classification, if deemed to be warranted, shall be effective for the 
academic term or semester next following the date of the application 
for reclassification. 

5.1 An individual who is on full-time active military service in Military 
another state or foreign country or an employee of the federal Section 5. 
government shall be classified as an in-state student for the purpose 

of payment of tuition and fees, provided that the person established a 
domicile in West Virginia prior to entrance into federal service, 
entered the federal service from West Virginia, and has at no time 
while in federal service claimed or established a domicile in another 
state. Sworn statements attesting to these conditions may be required. 
The spouse and dependent children of such individuals shall also be 
classified as in-state students for tuition and fee purposes. 

5.2 Persons assigned to full-time active military service in West 
Virginia and residing in the state shall be classified as in-state 
students for tuition and fee purposes. The spouse and dependent 
children of such individuals shall also be classified as in-state 
students for tuition and fee purposes. 

6.1 An alien who is in the United States on a resident visa or who Aliens 

has filed a petition for naturalization in the naturalization court, and Section 6. 

who has established a bona fide domicile in West Virginia as defined 
in Section 2 may be eligible for in-state residency classification, 
provided that person is in the state for purposes other than to attempt 
to qualify for residency status as a student. Political refugees 
admitted into the United States for an indefinite period of time and 
without restriction on the maintenance of a foreign domicile may be 
eligible for an in-state classification as defined in Section 2. Any 
person holding a student or other temporary visa cannot be classified 
as an in-state student. 

7.1 A person who was formerly domiciled in the state of West Former 

Virginia and who would have been eligible for an in-state residency Domicile 

classification at the time of his/her departure from the state may be Section 7. 

immediately eligible for classification as a West Virginia resident 
provided such person returns to West Virginia within a one year 
period of time and satisfies the conditions of Section 2 regarding 
proof of domicile and intent to remain permanently in West Virginia. 



FINANCIAL INFORMATION 69 



Appeal Process 8.1 The decisions of the designated institutional officer charged 

Section 8. with the determination of residency classification may be appealed 

to the President of the institution. The President may establish such 
committees and procedures as are determined to be appropriate for 
the processing of appeals. The decision of the President of the 
institution may be appealed in writing with supporting documenta- 
tion to the University of West Virginia Board of Trustees in accord 
with such procedures as may be prescribed from time to time by the 
Board. 

University Environment and Facilities 

Morgantown Located on the east bank of the Monongahela River, which flows 

Area north to nearby Pittsburgh, Morgantown is situated on rugged 

terrain in the Appalachian highlands. The altitude of the city varies 
from 800 to 1,150 feet above sea level, and the surrounding hills rise 
eastward to Chestnut Ridge and reach an altitude of 2,600 feet just 
ten miles from the city. 

A north-south interstate highway, 1-79, is one mile west of 
Morgantown. U.S. 19 and U.S. 119 pass through Morgantown in the 
north-south direction. U.S. 48, a four-lane east-west highway, links 
1-79 at Morgantown to 1-81 in the Cumberland-Hagerstown, Mary- 
land, region. 

Morgantown epitomizes small-town America, with two important 
differences: it is home to a major modern university, and some of the 
panoramic views of the West Virginia mountains are awe-inspiring. 
A few of the city streets are incredibly steep and crooked as they 
wind over and around the hills, but it's also incredibly difficult to 
find a real traffic jam. The city's central shopping area offers the 
diversity usually found only in a metropolitan shopping mall; 
Morgantown's mall contains the standard national chains and 
franchises. 

Morgantown's heritage draws on both the industrial north and 
the more leisurely south. The push of the work ethic is modified and 
gentled by the knowledge that there is ample time to be friendly and 
polite. Since the city sits in the middle of some of the world's finest 
coal deposits, that too is a part of the heritage. Today, the University 
is the area's largest employer, and its intellectual and cultural 
atmosphere has generally permeated that of the town. 

Geographically, Morgantown is a secluded crossroads. Washing- 
ton, D.C., is a four hour drive to the east; Pittsburgh, PA is an hour 
and a half to the north. To the west lie the cities along the Ohio River. 
And to the south is all of wild, wonderful West Virginia, from the 
Greenbrier at White Sulphur Springs and the National Radio Astron- 
omy Laboratory at Greenbank to the ski resorts and national and 
state forests. The interstate highway system, a commuter airline 
connecting with national carriers, and the ubiquitous computer 
terminal combine to let individuals choose how much or how little of 
the rest of the world will intrude on theirs. 

Because of WVU's intellectual resources, the Morgantown area is 
a major research center in the Appalachian region. Four federal 
agencies have research facilities in the area— Department of Health 
and Human Services (Appalachian Laboratory for Occupational 
Safety and Health), Forest Service (Forestry Sciences Laboratory), 

70 UNIVERSITY ENVIRONMENT AND FACILITIES 



Morgantown Energy Technology Center of the U.S. Department of 
Energy, and Soil Conservation Service (West Virginia headquarters). 

West Virginia University has two campuses, primarily because 
it has outgrown the space available in the city. The in-town campus 
has a Victorian look, with ived walls and shady walks. The 
Evansdale campus, where the Health Sciences Center and the College 
of Agriculture and Foresty, the College of Creative Arts, the College 
of Engineering, the College of Human Resources and Education, the 
Law School, the College of Mineral and Energy Resources, the School 
of Physical Education, and the School of Social Work are located, has 
no buildings over 25 years old. The gap between the campuses is 
bridged by the rapid transit system, referred to always as the PRT. 
University residence halls and apartments are adjacent to the PRT, 
and privately owned apartment complexes allow students to live in 
quarters that stylistically range from generic modern to Victorian 
rococo. 

Of the nearly 20,000 students enrolled on the Morgantown 
campuses, most undergraduates are housed in the University-owned 
residence halls, and many married students and single graduate 
students live in University apartments. Approximately 3,000 students 
live in privately owned residence halls and fraternity and sorority 
houses; many commute from their parents' homes, and the rest live in 
apartments, mobile homes, and private rooms. 

The University Housing and Residence Life Office, G-18 Towers 
(phone 304-293-2811), provides information concerning University- 
owned housing. The student life office in Moore Hall provides 
information concerning privately owned, off-campus housing (phone 
304-293-5611). 

Listings for privately owned rentals change daily so students 
should visit the Office of Student Life to see what is available and 
make their own arrangements with landlords. Good housing is 
plentiful, both in residence halls and private apartments. Because of 
the hilly terrain, parking is limited on the WVU campuses and in the 
city. 

The West Virginia University Libraries contain over 1.5 million 
volumes and 1.4 million microforms. Some 30,000 volumes are added 
each year, and 9,000 periodical titles are received. 

The collections are especially strong in the biological sciences, 
chemistry, engineering, economics, Africana, the southern Appa- 
lachians, and West Virginia history. Facilties for research in West 
Virginia and regional history are centered in the West Virginia 
Collection, on the second floor of Colson Hall. In addition to an 
extensive collection of books, periodicals, and maps, the West 
Virginia Collection contains over three million manuscripts. These, 
together with court records from many counties, are invaluable 
sources for the study of all aspects of West Virginia history. 

The rare book room contains an unusually fine collection of first 
and limited editions, including four Shakespeare folios and first 
editions of many of the works of Dickens, Scott, and Clemens. 

The Evansdale Library houses the collections needed to support 
the schools and colleges on the Evansdale Campus: Agriculture, 
Engineering, Human Resources and Education, Social Work, Physical 
Education, and Creative Arts. 



Housing and 
Residence Life 



Library 
Services 



LIBRARY SERVICES 71 



The Health Sciences Center library on the second floor of the 
Basic Sciences Building contains over 150,000 volumes with a 
complete public catalog. Author cards for titles in the health sciences 
center library appear in the main library catalog. 

The law library, with a collection of over 130,000 volumes, is in 
the Law Center on the Evansdale Campus. 

The mathematics library in Eiesland Hall contains approximately 
16,000 volumes. 

The music library in room 424-A, Creative Arts Center, contains 
some 23,000 items, including microcards, microfilms, recordings, 
books, and scores. 

Audiovisual departments are in Colson Hall and the Health 
Sciences Center library. A catalog of all audiovisual holdings is 
available at both locations and at the various libraries. 
Computing The University community is served by two computer organiza- 

Services tions: West Virginia University Computing Services and West 

Virginia Network for Educational Telecomputing (WVNET). WVNET 
provides hardware and software for all colleges and schools in the 
state. WVU Computing Services coordinates these resources and 
provides additional services on the WVU campuses. 

WVNET hardware includes an IBM 3081KX with 48 megabytes 
of real memory, an IBM 3081D with 16 megabytes of real memory, 
and a Digital Equipment VAX 8650 (48 megabytes), a VAX 8550 (48 
megabytes), and an 11/780 (16 megabytes) in a VAX cluster for a total 
of five gigabytes of on-line disk space. Direct access for the IBM 
systems are from a dual density 3380E disk drive and from twelve 
STC 8380s. The disk drives for the Digital Equipment units are 
RA81s. Tape drives are STC 3420 model 6; WVNET supports 6250 
and 1600BPI recording densities. Printers include three STC IMPACT 
1500s, an IBM 3820 laser, a Zeta 3600X plotter, and an assortment of 
microfilm/fiche processors and duplicators. 

A wide range of software is available for both the IBM and DEC 
hardware. Programming languages include COBOL, FORTRAN, 
PL/1, Ada, BASIC, C, and Pascal. Software for specific academic 
disciplines include the International Mathematical and Statistics 
Library, the North Carolina State Statistical Analysis System, the 
UCLA Biomedical Package, the University of Chicago's Statistical 
Package for the Social Sciences, the Standford Public Information 
Retrieval System, and forms of special purpose engineering software. 

The University maintains access sites for WVNET at a number of 
places on campus. Batch processing/remote job entry and time 
sharing sites are open every day except Sunday. Exact hours and 
documentation libraries are available at each site. User consultants 
are at the Evansdale Library and Colson Hall sites to answer 
questions and help with problems. 

WVU Computing Services publishes Output, a newsletter, and 
Computing at WVU, a user's guide. 



72 COMPUTING SERVICES 



Part 4 

GRADUATE PROGRAMS 

AND COURSES 

Plan for Numbering Courses 

For convenience, each course is designated by an acronym for the 

department in which it is given and by a number particular to that course. The 

plan for numbering is as follows: 

Courses 200 to 299— Courses for advanced undergraduate students and selected 
graduate students. No more than 40 percent of the credits counted for meeting 
requirements for a graduate degree can be at the 200 level. 

Courses 300-399— Courses for graduate students; students in professional programs 
leading to the doctorate; and selected, advanced undergraduates. Undergraduates in 
any class carrying a 300-level course number must have a 3.0 cumulative grade-point 
average and have written approval on special forms from their instructors and 
advisers. Seniors within 12 semester hours of graduation may, with prior approval of 
their advisers, enroll in 300-level graduate courses for graduate credit. (In summary, 
200-level courses are intended primarily to serve undergraduate students; 300-level 
courses are intended primarily to serve introductory graduate and master's degree 
course needs.) 

Courses 391 (Advanced Topics) and 397 (Master's Degree Research or Thesis) — 
Courses are approved for University-wide use by any academic unit. These courses 
may be graded S or U. 

Courses 400 to 499— Courses for graduate students only. All doctoral degree dissertation 
hours shall be awarded at the 400-level— specifically under course number 497. 
Courses numbered 497 may be graded S or U. 

Courses 492 to 495— Courses are approved by the Assistant Vice President for 
Curriculum and Instruction. Approved requests are forwarded to the Office of 
Admissions and Records for entry into the WVU Schedule of Courses. 
Graduate degree credit-hour requirements must include at least 60 

percent at the 300 and 400 level. 

Abbreviations Used in Course Listings 

I — a course given in the first semester 
II — a course given in the second semester 
I, II — a course given in each semester 
I and II — a course given throughout the year 

Yr. — a course continued through two semesters 
S. — a course given in the summer 
hr. — credit hours per course 
lee. — lecture period 
rec. — recitation period 
lab. — laboratory period 
Cone. — concurrent registration required 

PR — prerequisite 
Coreq. — corequisite 
Consent — consent of instructor required 
CR — credit, but no grade 

Schedule of Courses 

Before the opening of semesters and summer sessions, a Schedule of 
Courses is printed to announce the courses that will be offered by the colleges 
and schools of WVU. Courses in this catalog are subject to change without 
notice. 

73 



ACCOUNTANCY, PROFESSIONAL 

Jay H. Coats, Director of Graduate Programs 

333 Business and Economics Building 

College of Business and Economics, West Virginia University, P.O. Box 6025, 

Morgantown, WV 26506-6025 
Telephone: (304) 293-5408 

Degree Offered: Master of Professional Accountancy 
Graduate Faculty: Members G. Smith and Coats. Associate Members Maust, Neider- 

meyer, Pariser, Pushkin, Shastri, Shaw, and Titard. 

The objective of the Master of Professional Accountancy (M.P. A.) degree 
is to provide the student with professional competence in accounting and 
executive level business education, including a broad understanding of the 
managerial process. The American Institute of Certified Public Accountants 
(AICPA) has stated that a C.P.A. candidate should have 150 semester hours of 
formal education in order to be prepared to cope with the increasingly 
complex nature of accounting practice. In addition, a five-year accounting 
education will become a requirement for membership in the AICPA beginning 
in 2000. Many states have passed, or are considering passing, legislation 
requiring C.P.A. candidates to have completed a fifth year of education before 
receiving permission to sit for the examination. The additional accounting 
education also aids a student in successfully preparing for any of the 
professional accounting examinations (C.P.A., C.M.A., C.I. A.), and students 
are encouraged to take these examinations while in the M.P. A. program. 

The majority of the M.P. A. graduates have accepted employment in 
public accounting; the remainder have entered doctoral programs in ac- 
counting, industrial accounting, governmental accounting, or college teaching. 
A large number of employers visit the campus and offer access to the national 
job market. 

Financial aid in the form of graduate assistantships and tuition scholar- 
ships is available to qualified students on a competitive basis. Most graduate 
assistants will have the opportunity to teach accounting principles. Graduate 
students are also eligible for the following awards: 

The Harmon/Witschey Award: To honor an accounting graduate student 
in memory of Robert E. Witschey. 

The Deloitte Haskins &■ Sells Award: To honor a graduate student in 
accounting who has demonstrated outstanding academic performance. 

The M.P. A. program at WVU follows the 150-hour recommendation of the 
AICPA, as published in its report entitled Education Requirements for Entry 
into the Accounting Profession. The College of Business and Economics is 
fully accredited by the American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business. 

The graduate courses leading to the M.P. A. degree are intended to be 
completed in one calendar year of full-time studies. The program requires that 
the student have an undergraduate degree with a minimum of 24 hours in 
accounting. Work experience is not a requirement for admission. Students 
may enter the program on either a full-time or part-time basis in any semester, 
but fall is the preferred starting date. Careful selection of degree candidates 
limits the size of classes, leads to high quality efforts in the program, and 
permits frequent and direct contact between students and faculty. 

To obtain approval for entry into the M.P. A. program an applicant must 
have a baccalaureate degree from an accredited college or university and an 
undergraduate grade-point average of at least 3.0 overall or in the last 60 
credit hours taken. The student must also have an accounting grade-point 
average of at least 3.0. In addition, the applicant must submit a score of 500 or 

74 ACCOUNTANCY, PROFESSIONAL 



above on the Graduate Management Admission Test (GMAT). Applicants 
with a GPA below 3.0 (or GMAT scores below 500) must show correspondingly 
higher GMAT (or GPA) achievement. 

To assure that all students in the program have the same foundation in 
business, the following prerequisite courses, or their equivalent, must be 
completed before enrolling in M.P.A. graduate courses: principles of accounting 
(6 hours), intermediate accounting (6 hours), advanced accounting, cost 
accounting, tax accounting, auditing, principles of economics (6 hours), 
principles of marketing, principles of management, principles of finance, 
production management, statistics, business law, business policy, and 
management information systems. 

A student without the necessary prerequisite courses may be approved to 
enter the M.P.A. program as a provisional graduate student. All applications 
for approval to enter the M.P.A. program must be received in the WVU Office 
of Admissions and Records as early as possible and no later than one month 
before the date for which enrollment is requested. 

Master of Professional Accountancy (M.P.A.) 

The candidate's program will be planned with the assistance and 
approval of the Director of Graduate Programs. The M.P.A. degree requires 39 
hours of graduate credit and is normally completed in one calendar year. The 
program of study is as follows: 
Fall Semester 
Accounting 325 Accounting Information Systems 
Accounting 330 Financial Accounting Theory and Practice 
Accounting 333 Income Taxes and Business Decisions 
Management 303 Introduction to Management Science 
Speech Pathology and Audiology 280 Oral/Written Skills for Profes- 
sionals 
Spring Semester 
Accounting 335 Computer Systems Auditing 
Accounting 338 Controllership 
Economics 318 Economic Policy 
Finance 321 Corporate Financial Administration 
Elective Course 
Summer J 

Accounting 332 Governmental and Nonprofit Accounting 
Accounting 340 Reporting Practices and Problems 
Accounting 345 Auditing and Professional Accounting Standards 
Elective Course 
No thesis is required in the program, but communication skills are 
emphasized in all courses. Extensive use is made of microcomputers in 
accounting applications. 

The M.P.A. program requires that the student maintain a grade-point 
average of at least 3.0 on all work taken as a graduate student while enrolled 
in the College of Business and Economics, including prescribed work taken to 
remove undergraduate deficiencies. A student whose cumulative grade-point 
average falls below 2.75 will be placed on probation. If the average is not 
brought up to 2.75 by the end of the following semester, the student will be 
suspended from the program. A grade below C in any course taken while 
enrolled as a graduate student will result in suspension from the graduate 
program. 



ACCOUNTANCY, PROFESSIONAL 75 



Complete information about the M.P.A. program may be obtained by 
contacting the Director of Graduate Programs. 

Accounting (Acctg.) 

200. Special Topics. S. 1-4 hr. PR: Acctg. Ill or consent. Special topics relevant to 
accounting. (Maximum of nine semester hours in any or all courses numbered 200 
offered by. the College may be applied toward bachelor's and master's degrees.) 

211. Accounting Systems. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 5, Acctg. 112 or consent. Analysis of data- 
processing fundamentals and information systems analysis, design, and imple- 
mentation, including necessary computer hardware and software components 
with particular reference to accounting information systems and the controls 
necessary therein. 

213. Income Tax Accounting. 3 hr. Cone: Acctg. Ill or 116 or consent. Overview and 
survey of Federal income tax principles for individuals and simple corporations 
with emphasis on gross income, exemptions, deductions, capital gains and losses, 
and tax credits. 

214. Income Tax Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 213 or consent. The study of Federal 
income tax treatment of partnerships, corporations and estates, and the treatment 
of those property transfers subject to the Federal Gift Tax, together with an 
introduction to tax research and tax procedure. 

217. Auditing Theory. 3 hr. PR or Cone: Acctg. 210 or consent. Auditing fundamentals; 
objectives, ethics, statistical samplings, standards and procedures. Emphasis on 
FASB and SAS disclosures. 

325. Accounting Information Systems. 2 hr. PR: Consent. The design and use of 
computerized accounting information systems to support the transaction pro- 
cessing, reporting and decision-making systems of most organizations, including 
the use and critical analysis of currently available accounting packages. 

330. Financial Accounting Theory and Practice. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 112. Comprehensive 
examination of financial accounting theory as established by the opinions, 
statements and interpretations of professional organizations with special emphasis 
on their application and problem solving. 

332. Governmental and Nonprofit Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 112. Fund accounting 
and control in governmental and nonprofit entities; identification and control of 
cost centers; cost analysis and cost centers; cost analysis and cost finding, and 
planning and control of operations and resources. 

333. Income Taxes and Business Decisions. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 213. Advanced federal 
income-tax problems with emphasis on tax planning for business decisions and 
tax research methodology. 

335. Computer Systems Auditing. 2 hr. PR: Acctg. 325. The analysis and design of 
control systems in a computerized accounting environment. Special emphasis on 
evaluating evidence to determine whether a computing system safeguards assets 
and maintains data integrity. 

338. ControIIership. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 304. Examination of the role of the controller in 
large entities in planning, measuring, evaluating, and controlling performance 
and in reporting to stockholders and governmental agencies. 

340. Reporting Practices and Problems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Evaluation of financial 
reporting practices and trends, including an examination of the reporting 
requirements of the SEC and other regulatory agencies. Practitioners will be used 
extensively for class discussion and presentations. 

76 ACCOUNTANCY, PROFESSIONAL 



345. Auditing and Professional Accounting Standards. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 217. Professional 
objectives, principles, and standards of auditing; audit reports and related 
communications; and cash studies of audit sampling, professional ethics, legal 
liability and reporting. 

349. Seminar. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. 

AGRICULTURAL BIOCHEMISTRY 

William G. Martin, Program Chairperson 

1022 Agricultural Sciences Building 

Degree Offered: Master of Science 

Graduate Faculty: Members Brooks, Hoover, Ingle, Martin, Reid, and Stelzig. Associate 

Members Kaczmarczyk and Ulrich. 

The interdivisional program of agricultural biochemistry of the College of 
Agriculture and Forestry offers graduate studies leading to the degree of 
master of science. Each student selects and conducts research in the broad 
areas of biochemical genetics, nutritional biochemistry, orplant biochemistry. 
The research project selected by the student represents the base upon which 
the graduate program is built. 

The objective of the agricultural biochemistry graduate program is to 
prepare the student for a career in biochemistry in agricultural, biological, 
food and veterinary medical sciences. Each student, in concert with the 
adviser and graduate committee, will design the student's research program 
at the beginning of the first semester. The student and adviser then prepare 
the research proposal which, when approved by the graduate committee, will 
become the distinguishing feature of the program and, when completed, will 
provide the data for the thesis or dissertation. 

In addition to meeting the admission requirements, students must have 
an overall grade-point average of at least 2.5 in general, and analytical, 
organic, and physical chemistry. Deficiencies in these courses may be 
removed during the first year of graduate enrollment if prior consent is 
obtained from the agricultural biochemistry faculty. Courses in biology and 
physiology are beneficial, though not required, for admission. 

Master of Science 

The master of science (M.S.) degree in agricultural biochemistry combines 
the academic and research programs of the student, yielding a biochemist 
prepared for a career in agricultural, biological, food, or veterinary 
medical sciences. The academic program is composed of graduate courses and 
selected supporting courses in genetics, physiology, nutrition, or plant 
sciences. The student will be advised by a committee of three or more faculty. 
Thirty hours of graduate credit is required for the degree, of which no more 
than six hours may be for research. The research program terminates with a 
thesis which is presented to the graduate committee and defended in a 
comprehensive examination. Students interested in study leading to the Ph.D. 
degree should apply for acceptance into the Ph.D. program in Agricultural 
Sciences. 

Agricultural Biochemistry (Ag. Bi.) 

210. Introductory Biochemistry. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 8 hr. General chemistry, Chem. 131 or 
equiv. Introduction to the chemistry of cellular constituents (proteins, amino 
acids, carbohydrates, lipids, nucleic acids, enzymes and coenzymes) and their 
metabolism in animals and plants. 

AGRICULTURAL BIOCHEMISTRY 77 



211. Introductory Biochemistry Laboratory. I. 1 hr. Cone: Ag. Bi. 210. Experiments to 
demonstrate certain principles and properties of animal and plant biochemicals. 

212. Nutritional Biochemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 210 or consent. Nutritional 
biochemistry of domestic animals. 

213. Nutritional Biochemistry Laboratory. II. 1 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 210, 211; Cone: Ag. Bi. 
212. Experiments to determine the nutritional constituents in animal and plant 
tissues. 

310. General Biochemistry. I. 4 hr. PR: 8 hr. organic chemistry. The first half of a 
general course of biochemistry designed for graduate students of biological 
sciences. The course emphasizes the chemical properties of cellular constituents. 

311. Laboratory Experiments in Biochemistry. I. 2 hr. PR or Cone: Ag. Bi. 310. 
Experiments designed to demonstrate some of the basic tools and procedures of 
biochemical research. 

312. General Biochemistry. II. 4 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 310 or consent. The second half of a 
general course of biochemistry designed for graduate students of biological 
sciences. The course emphasizes reactions and control of intermediary metabolism. 

414. Enzymes. II. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 312 or consent. A survey of enzymology covering 
general principles as well as current concepts and methods. 

415. Advanced Biochemistry Laboratory. II. 2 hr. PR or Cone: Ag. Bi. 312. Experiments 
in the areas of intermediary metabolism and enzymology. 

416. Vitamin and Coenzyme Biochemistry. II. 2 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 312, or Bioch. 231, or 
consent. Chemical and physical properties, analysis, biosynthesis, metabolism, 
pathobiology, pharmacology, and toxicology of vitamins, vitamin-like compounds, 
and coenzymes. (Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

422. Plant Biochemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 312 or consent. Advanced treatment of the 
composition and metabolism of plants. Topics include cell wall structure, sulfur 
and nitrogen metabolism, and photosynthesis. (Offered in Fall of odd years.) 

424. Advanced Nutritional Biochemistry. I. 4 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 310, 311, 312 or consent. 
Advanced treatment of the biochemistry and metabolism of amino acids, carbo- 
hydrates and lipids in the diets of ruminants and nonruminants. (Offered in Fall of 
even years.) 

428. Biomembranes and Muscie Biochemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 312, or Bioch. 231, or 
consent. Chemical, organization, and physiological aspects of membranes and 
muscles; molecular and cellular interactions and integrative mechanisms. 3 hr. 
lee (Offered in Spring of even years.) 

450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigations of biochemistry in 
animal and plant systems. Study may be independent, with staff approval, or 
through specially scheduled lectures. 

496. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. Presentation and discussion of current topics in 
agricultural biochemistry, membrane biophysics, and biochemical genetics. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Research in biochemical genetics, nutritional biochem- 
istry, or plant biochemistry under staff supervision for agricultural biochemistry 
majors. 

NOTE: See other courses listed under "Biochemistry." 
78 AGRICULTURAL BIOCHEMISTRY 



AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS 

Virgil J. Norton, Chairperson of Division of Resource Management 
2018 Agricultural Sciences Building 
Degree Offered: Master of Science 

Graduate Faculty: Members Collins, Colyer, D'Souza, Fletcher, Jack, Phipps, and 
Smith. Associate Members Barr, Ferrise, Mcintosh, and Yoder. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

The Master of Science in agricultural economics provides advanced 
training in the areas of agricultural, resource, and rural development 
economics. The degree prepares students for further graduate study and a 
wide variety of careers in business and government. 

Faculty in agricultural economics cooperate with faculty in the Department 
of Mineral and Energy Economics in the College of Mineral and Energy 
Resources to offer course work and joint research projects appropriate for 
students in both programs. Graduate students may select faculty from both 
programs to serve on their thesis committee. Such cooperation strengthens 
the teaching and research of both programs and offers graduate students a 
wider range of selection of course work and thesis issues as well as opportuni- 
ties for interaction among graduate students in the two programs. 

Requirements for Admission 

Students seeking a Master of Science with emphasis in agricultural 
economics may be accepted for graduate study on a regular or provisional 
basis. The Admissions Committee reviews and evaluates all applications. 

In addition to meeting general requirements, students must have: 

1. Twelve or more semester credits in economics, agricultural economics, 
statistics, or appropriate social science courses (should include principles of 
economics). 

2. Three or more semester hours of credit in calculus. (May be made up 
after admission but not for graduate credit.) 

3. A grade-point average of 2.75 for all credit in economics and agricultural 
economics. 

Options and Plan of Study 

A thesis or course work option may be selected. Students should select 
the option by the time 12 hours of course work are completed and after 
consulting with their graduate committees. Candidates with graduate research 
assistantships should select the thesis option. 

Thesis Option. A minimum of 30 credit hours of approved work to include 
not more than six hours of credit for the thesis, and enough courses to provide 
proficiency in economics and agricultural economics. Courses in closely 
related social sciences may be included. The student's graduate committee 
must approve the student's course of study and thesis topic. 

Course Work Option. A minimum of 36 credit hours of approved course 
work to provide proficiency in economics and agricultural economics. 
Courses in closely related social sciences may be included if approved by the 
student's graduate committee. 

Plan of Study. Candidate's plans of study are developed by students in 
consultation with their major professors and graduate committees. Normally, 
the plan of study will include graduate-level courses in economic theory, 
statistics, and agricultural economics. The plan of study should be developed 
during the first full term of study. 

AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS 79 



Standards of Achievement 

A minimum grade-point average of 3.0 is required for all graduate credit 
courses taken as part of the approved program for the degree. This includes 
graduate credit transferred and graduate credit accumulated while pursuing a 
degree in agricultural economics. Persons requesting transfers of graduate 
credit must obtain approval of their graduate committee for such transfers. 

Examinations 

Thesis Option— Satisfactory completion of an oral examination and, at 
the discretion of the student's graduate committee, a written examination. 

Course Work Option— Satisfactory completion of a written and an oral 
examination. 

Agricultural Economics (Ag. Ec.) 

200. Land Economics. II. 3 hr. Classification, development, tenure, use, conservation, 
valuation, and taxation of rural, urban, mineral, forest, water, and recreational 
land resources. Private and public rights in land and the effect of population on the 
demand for land. 

206. Farm Planning. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Ec. 104 or consent. Planning use of labor, soil, 
crops, livestock, buildings and equipment; principal factors influencing returns 
on farms. (Farm visits required.] 

211. Rural Economic Development. I or II. 3 hr. Resource utilization, economic behavior 
and economic systems and subsystems, trade, public revenue and its allocation, 
distribution of income, manpower problems, development policies, and regionaliza- 
tion in rural areas. 

220. Agricultural Cooperatives. II. 3 hr. History, principles, organization, manage- 
ment, taxation and legal aspects of agricultural marketing, supply, and service 
cooperatives in the U.S. economic system. 

231. Marketing Agricultural Products. I or II. 3 hr. Market organization, policies, 
practices, and factors affecting the marketing of agricultural products. (Tour of 
market agencies and facilities required.) 

235. Marketing Dairy Products. II. 2 hr. Milk-marketing policies and practices, 
including milk-market orders. 

240. Agricultural Prices. I. 3 hr. Analysis of price-making forces which operate in the 
market places for the major agricultural commodities. 

261. Agribusiness Finance. II. 3 hr. Credit needs for agricultural businesses, financing 
farm and market-agency firms, and organization and operation of credit agencies 
which finance agricultural business firms. 

271. Agricultural Policy. I or II. 3 hr. Examination of economic aspects of governmental 
price programs, production and marketing controls, subsidies, parity, export and 
import policies, and other programs affecting agriculture. 

342. International Agricultural Economic Development. I. 3 hr. Current problems, 
theories, policies, and strategies in planning for agricultural and rural development 
for increased food production and to improve the well-being of rural people in the 
developing countries of the world. 

343. Agricultural Project Analysis and Evaluation. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Design, 
analysis, and evaluation of development projects; economic and financial aspects 
of project analysis; identification and measures of comparing projects costs and 
benefits; preparation of feasibility reports. 

80 AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS 



355. Resource Analysis. I. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing. Construction of models consistent 
with economic reality for allocating the factors of production available on farms, 
in forests, and in nonfarm agricultural businesses to produce profit maximizing 
plans through use of linear and dynamic programming and electronic equipment. 

431. Advanced Agricultural Marketing. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Structure of 
agricultural marketing; economic theory as applied to agricultural marketing with 
emphasis on theoretical and practical applications. 

440. Advanced Farm Management. I. 3 hr. 

441. Production Economics. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Economic principles of 
production with special application to agriculture. 

Resource Management (Res. M.) 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I, II, S. 1 hr. PR: Consent. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

AGRICULTURAL EDUCATION 

Virgil J. Norton, Chairperson of Division of Resource Management 

2018 Agricultural Sciences Building 

Degree Offered: Master of Science 

Graduate Faculty: Members Gartin, Lawrence, and Odell. Associate Member Maxwell. 

The agricultural education faculty offers master's programs for persons 
desiring advanced study in teaching vocational agriculture or in agricultural 
extension education. Candidates for the Master of Science degree in agricul- 
tural education may be admitted on a regular or provisional basis. A student 
who does not have a B.S. in Agriculture with a majorin agricultural education 
may be required to complete undergraduate courses in agriculture and 
professional education which are prerequisites to essential graduate courses. 

Students shall combine graduate courses in agriculture and professional 
education by taking 16 to 20 hours in agriculture and 10 to 14 hours in 
education. Programs are planned to ensure that candidates develop an 
understanding of: 

— The teaching/learning process. 

— The design and operation of instructional programs in agriculture. 

— Research and evaluation processes. 

— The philosophy and purposes of public agricultural education. 

All graduate courses offered toward the degree must be approved by the 
student's adviser. A thesis is required as a part of the 30-hour graduation 
requirement. 

Agricultural Education (Ag. Ed.) 

260. Principles of Cooperative Extension. I. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Background, philosophy, 
and history of cooperative extension. Activities of county cooperative extension 
agents and cooperative extension programs in West Virginia. 

261. Methods and Materials in Extension Education. II. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Organization 
and preparation for extension teaching and the processes of communication. 
(Offered in Spring of odd years.} 



AGRICULTURAL EDUCATION 81 



263. Teaching Young, Adult Farmer, and Off-Farm Agricultural Occupations Classes. 
I. 2 hr. PR: Ed. P. 105, 106 or consent. Participation in conducting young farmer, 
adult farmer, and off-farm agricultural occupations classes; organization, course 
of study, method in teaching, and supervision of classes, young farmers' 
associations, adult farmers' organizations and off-farm agricultural occupations 
organizations. (Also listed as C&I 263.) 

264. Cooperative Vocational Education. II. 4 hr. PR: Consent. Preparation for planning, 
organizing, and conducting high school programs of cooperative vocational 
education, and familiarization with business organization and operation. (Aiso 
listed as C&I 264.) 

362. Program Building in Cooperative Extension. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Organization in 
relation to program building. Leadership and group action. Overall working and 
educational objectives, principles, method, and goals in developing county 
extension programs. (Offered in Spring of even years.) 

364. Organizing and Directing Supervised Farming and Supervised Occupational 
Experience Programs. S. 2 hr. PR: Ag. Ed. 160 or consent. Planning programs of 
supervised farming and supervised occupational experience; supervising and 
evaluating such programs for day students, young farmer, adult farmer, and 
off-farm agricultural occupations classes and groups. (Also listed as C&I 364.) 

460. Planning Programs and Courses for Vocational Agriculture Departments. S. 2 hr. 
PR: Ag. Ed. 160, 188. Gathering data, studying farming and off-farm agricultural 
occupations problems of day students, young farmers, adult farmers, and off-farm 
agricultural occupational groups and formulating total programs for school 
communities. (Also listed as C&I 460.) 

492. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. Overview and analysis of problems, literature, and 
research in agricultural education. 

Resource Management 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I, II, S. 1 hr. PR: Consent. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

AGRICULTURAL MICROBIOLOGY 

Alan J. Sexstone, In Charge of Graduate Program in Agricultural Microbiology 
401 Brooks Hall 

Degree Offered: Master of Science 

Graduate Faculty: Members Bissonnette, Hindal, Morton, and Sexstone. Associate 
Member Anderson. 

The graduate curriculum in agricultural microbiology in the College of 
Agriculture and Forestry places emphasis on the interrelationships of 
microorganisms and their environments. Study leading to the M.S. degree is 
designed to prepare students with specialization in microbiology as applied to 
soil, water, wastewater, agriculture, and food. 

The teaching and research faculty have special interests in the areas of 
environmental microbiology, biotransformation of environmental pollutants, 
pollution abatement, public health and sanitary aspects of aquatic, terrestrial, 
and food environments, and the general microbial ecology of such environ- 
ments. 

Graduate training is designed to offer qualified students a broad 
background in the environmental sciences through cooperation with other 
disciplines in the College of Agriculture and Forestry, College of Arts and 
Sciences, College of Engineering, and School of Medicine. A thesis is required. 

82 AGRICULTURAL MICROBIOLOGY 



Students interested in the doctoral degree should apply for acceptance into 
the program leading to the Ph.D. in Agricultural Sciences. 

Agricultural Microbiology (Ag. Micro.) 

201. Environmental Microbiology. II. 4 hr. PR: Ag. Micro. 141 or consent. Microbiology 
as applied to soil, water, wastewater, sewage, air, and the general environment. 
Occurrence, distribution, ecology, and detection of microorganisms in these 
environments. 

347. Food Microbiology. I. 4 hr. PR: Ag. Micro. 141 and Ag. Bi. 210, or consent. Ecology 
and physiology of microorganisms important in the manufacture and deterioration 
of foods. Techniques for the microbiological examination of foods. (Offered in Fall 
of odd years. J 

348. Sanitary Microbiology. I. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Micro. 141 or consent. Microbiology and 
health hazards associated with food handling, water treatment, and sanitary 
waste disposal. (Offered in Fall of even years.) 

Plant Science (PI. Sc.) 

420. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Special study in agricultural microbiology, crop 
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 

450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. Graduate seminar in agricultural microbiology, crop science, 
horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Graduate research in agricultural microbiology, crop 
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 

AGRICULTURAL SCIENCES 

Robert H. Maxwell, Dean of the College of Agriculture and Forestry 

1170 Agricultural Sciences Building 

Degree Offered: Doctor of Philosophy 

Graduate Faculty: Members Amrine, Baker, Balasko, Baugher, G. K. Biggs, Bissonnette, 
Brooks, Bryan, Butler, Colyer, Dailey, Diener, D'Souza, Elliott, Gartin, Hindal, 
Hogmire, Hoover, Ingle, Inskeep, Jack, Keefer, Klandorf, Kotcon, Kvashny, Lawrence, 
Lerner, Lewis, MacDonald, Martin, McCurley, Morton, Nath, Odell, Oscar, Peterson, 
Popenoe, Prigge, Reid, Russell, Sencindiver, Sexstone, Singh, Singha, Skousen, D. K. 
Smith, Stelzig, Weaver, and R. J. Young. Associate Members Anderson, D. R. 
Armstrong, Baniecki, Barr, Bearce, Collier, Collins, Dozsa, Ferrise, Horvath, Jencks, 
Jordan, Kaczmarczyk, Karther, Koes, Longenecker, Maxwell, McBride, Mcintosh, 
Osborne, Peterson, P. M. Smith, Sperow, Ulrich, Wagner, van Eck, Yoder, Yuill, and 
Zimmerman. 

Doctor of Philosophy in Agricultural Sciences 

The College of Agriculture and Forestry offers graduate studies leading to 
the degree of doctor of philosophy. This doctoral program offers two options: 
Animal and Food Sciences, and Plant and Soil Sciences. Students entering 
this program may select research and classes to emphasize agricultural 
microbiology, agronomy, animal nutrition, entomology, horticulture or plant 
pathology. The objective of the degree program is to provide doctoral students 
an opportunity to study and conduct research with faculty in areas of 
excellence within the college. Research and training in the various disciplines 
are under four major areas of emphasis in the college: forage-livestock 
production; improvement and protection of soil, plants, and water; food and 
nutritional sciences; and resource development. 

Prospective graduate students initiate application for admission on 
forms available from the university Office of Admissions and Records. The 
completed forms should be returned to the Office of Admissions and Records, 

AGRICULTURAL SCIENCES 83 



accompanied by payment of the non-refundable special service fee. An 
official transcript from all colleges attended in the course of an applicants' 
masters and undergaduate degree must be part of the application for 
admission. A student must hold a master's degree or equivalent to be eligible 
for admission into this program. 

The following admission and performance standards are normally 
required in the doctor of philosophy in agriculture sciences program: 

a. An applicant must possess a master's degree and hold a grade-point 
average (GPA) of 3.0 or above (on a 4.0 scale) in postgraduate courses. 

b. The Graduate Record Examination is required. For regular admission 
a minimum score of 1100 is expected. 

c. A student whose native language is not English must have obtained a 
minimum score of 550 on the TOEFL examination. 

d. An applicant must provide three letters of reference. 

e. A one to two page letter of intent from the student describing his/her 
research and professional aspirations is required. 

Students who do not meet the requirements, but have special qualifications 
or circumstances, may be admitted as provisional graduate students if 
approved by the Graduate Faculty Committee, Division Director and Doctoral 
Program Coordinator. 

All students in the program must adhere to the following course 
requirements: 

a. Core Courses — Doctoral students must satisfactorily complete a set of 
core courses before they will be admitted to candidacy for the Ph.D. degree. 
All core courses will be at the 300 or 400 level, except where indicated below. 
Certain course requirements may be waived if the student has received 
equivalent training in prior course work. Additional course work pertaining 
to the student's area of specialization will be determined by the student's 
major professor and graduate committee. Core courses are in the following 
areas: 
Biological and Earth Sciences 

A minimum of six credit hours of coursework must be completed in the 
biological or earth sciences (excluding courses within a student's major field 
of study). 

Agriculture (Ag.) 

200. Agricultural Travel Course. S. 1-6 hr. Tour and study of production methods in 
major livestock and crop regions of the United States and other countries. 
Influence of population, climate, soil, topography, markets, labor, and other 
factors on agricultural production. 

360. Problem Report for the Degree of Master of Agriculture. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. 

Animal and Veterinary Science (A&VS) 

420. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. (1 hr. credit in special cases only). Advanced study 
in particular phases of such animal science topics as animal production, nutrition, 
physiology, breeding and genetics, veterinary science, and food. (For the Master's 
Degree, Special Topics ordinarily may count 2 to 4 hr.; max. credit, 6 hr.). 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Research in animal nutrition, physiology, breeding and 
production, and veterinary science. 



84 AGRICULTURAL SCIENCES 



Animal Nutrition (An. Nu.) 

430. Rumen Metabolism and Physiology. I. 3 hr. PR: Course in biochemistry. The 
anatomy and physiology of the forestomachs of ruminants and the rumen 
microbial population. Emphasis on the microbial metabolism as it pertains to the 
utilization of feeds by ruminants. {Offered in Fall of odd years.) 

432. Forage Chemistry and Quality. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 301 and Agron. 254, or consent. 
Advanced course in chemistry and biochemistry of pastures and forages, 
emphasizing factors affecting their quality and principles governing their utiliza- 
tion by herbivorous animals. (Also listed as Agron. 432.) [Offered in Spring of 
even years.) 

434. Mineral Nutrition of Animals. II. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 301 or consent. Mineral 
nutrition of livestock and man; soil-plant-animal interactions. Detailed treatment 
of function of individual elements and their involvement in deficiency and toxicity 
conditions on an international basis. (Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (Repeat registration permitted for maximum of 6 
credit hours per year.) Topics in advanced nutrition. Subject will be selected by 
staff for formal presentation. 

Animal Physiology and Breeding (An. Ph.) 

425. Endocrinology of Reproduction. II. 4 hr. (2 labs.). PR: An. Ph. 225 or Biol. 268 or 
equiv. Discussion of and laboratory experience in classical and current concepts 
of hormonal and neurohormonal regulations of reproductive phenomena with 
emphasis on species differences and similarities. [Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

426. Advanced Animal Selection. II. 3 hr. PR: Course in statistics and course in genetics 
or equiv. An advanced course dealing with the basic concepts of experimental and 
statistical approaches in the analysis of quantitative inheritance with special 
reference to the magnitude and nature of genotypic and nongenotypic variability. 
[Offered in Spring of even years.) 

450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. 

Animal Production (An. Pr.) 

422. Advanced Milk Production. II. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 101 orconsent. Advanced study of 
the feeding, breeding, and management of dairy cattle. 

AGRICULTURE 

Robert H. Maxwell, Dean of the College of Agriculture and Forestry 

1170 Agricultural Sciences Building 

Degree Offered: Master of Agriculture 

Graduate Faculty: Members Amrine, Baker, Balasko, Baugher, G. K. Biggs, Bissonnette, 
Brooks, Bryan, Butler, Colyer, Dailey, Diener, D'Souza, Elliott, Gartin, Hindal, 
Hogmire, Hoover, Ingle, Inskeep, Jack, Keefer, Klandorf, Kotcon, Kvashny, Lawrence, 
Lerner, Lewis, MacDonald, Martin, McCurley, Morton, Nath, Odell, Oscar, Peterson, 
Popenoe, Prigge, Reid, Russell, Sencindiver, Sexstone, Singh, Singha, Skousen, D. K. 
Smith, Stelzig, Weaver, and R. J. Young. Associate Members Anderson, D. R. 
Armstrong, Baniecki, Barr, Bearce, Collier, Collins, Dozsa, Ferrise, Horvath, Jencks, 
Jordan, Kaczmarczyk, Karther, Koes, Longenecker, Maxwell, McBride, Mcintosh, 
Osborne, Peterson, P. M. Smith, Sperow, Ulrich, Wagner, van Eck, Yoder, Yuill, and 
Zimmerman. 

M. Agr. 

Students desiring this degree must obtain approval from the master of 
agriculture committee and meet the minimum admission requirements. The 

AGRICULTURE 85 



committee charged with administering the degree program is appointed by 
the Dean of the College of Agriculture and Forestry. The student's baccalaure- 
ate degree should be in a field sufficiently related to the course of study 
contemplated to provide the necessary background. A student whose bacca- 
laureate degree is in a field considered not sufficiently related to the study 
contemplated may be admitted as a regular or provisional student until 
specific requirements are met or the student may be admitted on the basis of 
evidence of satisfactory professional experience. 

Requirements. Satisfactory completion of 36 hours of course work is 
required for this degree. The student will select a minimum of 27 hours from 
the course offerings of the three divisions in the College of Agriculture 
(Divisions of Animal and Veterinary Sciences, Plant and Soil Sciences, and 
Resource Management). A minimum of nine hours will be selected from the 
offerings of each division. No more than three hours of special topics or 
advanced study from each division may be counted towards the degree. A 
three-hour problem report may be included at the option of the student and the 
program committee. 

The student may choose the additional courses from within the College of 
Agriculture and Forestry or from offerings of other colleges and schools of 
WVU. An overall grade-point average of 3.0 is required for graduate courses 
included as part of the approved program for the degree. Upon completion of 
the course work, each candidate must undergo a written and oral examination 
by the candidate's graduate committee. 

The graduate committee of each candidate shall have one member of the 
administering committee as a member. This member shall not be the 
chairperson or student adviser. 

AGRONOMY 

Robert F. Keefer, In Charge of Graduate Program in Agronomy 
1108 Agricultural Sciences Building 
Degree Offered: Master of Science 

Graduate Faculty: Members Baker, Balasko, Bryan, Keefer, Sencindiver, and Singh. 
Associate Members Jencks, Sperow, and van Eck. 

Agronomy is customarily divided into crop sciences and soil sciences and 
deals with the problems in plant development and crop production and the 
properties and uses of soils. 

Thesis problems in crop sciences are selected in forage production, forage 
quality, forage/livestock systems, grazing management, and brush and weed 
control in forage crops. In soil sciences, the problems are selected in the areas 
of pre-mining overburden analyses and minesoils properties, characteristics 
and utilization of sewage sludge, flyash and other soil amendments, and 
mineral nutrition of crops or other soils problems. Research problems change 
in response to needs of the state and region. Cooperative research with other 
units of WVU, and with research units in other states and overseas, are 
undertaken as the need and opportunity occurs. 

Facilities for graduate research include several farms, greenhouses, 
growth chambers, modern laboratories, and specialized equipment. 

The student must have a bachelor's degree from any approved college and 
an adequate background in the physical and biological sciences. Admission 
requirements are those of the College of Agriculture and Forestry. Additional 

86 AGRONOMY 



undergraduate work may be required according to the needs of the field of 
specialization of the student. The courses required for graduate study will 
vary depending on the crops and soils emphasis. They are developed in 
consultation with the student's adviser and advisory committee. Students 
interested in study leading to the Ph.D. degree should apply for acceptance 
into the Ph.D. program in Agricultural Sciences. 

Agronomy (Crop Science) (Agron.) 

251. Weed Control. I. 3 hr. PR: PI. Sc. 52, Agron. 2, or consent. Fundamental principles 
of weed control. Recommended control measures for and identification of common 
weeds. 2 lee, 1 lab. (Offered in Fall of odd years.) 

252. Grain and Special Crops. II. 3 hr. PR: PI. Sc. 52, Agron. 2, or consent. Advanced 
study of methods in the production of grain and special crops. Varieties, 
improvement, tillage, harvesting, storage, and uses of crops grown for seed or 
special purposes. (Offered in Spring of even years.) 

254. Pasture and Forage Crops. I. 4 hr. PI. Sc. 52, Agron. 2, or consent. All phases of 
pasture and forage crop production, including identification, seeding, management, 
use, seed production, and storage of forage crops. (3 lee, 1 lab.) 

325. Forage Harvesting and Storage. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 254, or consent. Advanced study 
of processes associated with harvesting and storage of forages. 3 hr. lee. (Offered 
in Fall of odd years.) 

354. Pasture Managment and Utilization. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 254 and An. Nu. 101, or 
consent. Advanced study of pastures and their management and utilization with 
emphasis on temperate species. 3 hr. lee. (Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

374. Tropical Grasslands. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 254 and An. Nu. 101, or consent. Advanced 
study of tropical grasslands and their management and utilization in animal 
production. (Offered in Fall of even years.) 

432. Forage Chemistry and Quality. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 301 and Agron. 254, or consent. 
Advanced course in chemistry and biochemistry of pastures and forages, 
emphasizing factors affecting their quality and principles governing their utiliza- 
tion by herbivorous animals. (Also listed as An. Nu. 432.) (Offered in Spring of 
even years.) (3 hr. lee.) 

Agronomy (Soil Science) (Agron.) 

210. Soil Fertility. I. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 2 or 10. Soil properties in relation to fertility and 
productivity of soils; scrutiny of essential plant nutrients; use of fertilizers and 
lime; evaluation of soil fertility. 

212. Soil Conservation and Management. I. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 2 or 10. Using soil 
technology to solve soil management problems relating to cropping systems. Field 
diagnosis of soil problems stressed. (2 lee, 1 lab.) 

230. Soil Physics. II. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 2 or 10. Physical properties of soils, water and air 
relationships and their influence on soil productivity. (2 lee, 1 lab.) (Offered in 
Spring of even years.) 

255. Reclamation of Disturbed Soils. 3 hr. PR: Junior standing or above and consent. 
Pedologic definitions and principles will be applied to advance planning and 
analysis, handling and placement, reclamation and revegetation practices, and 
continuing use of disturbed soils resulting from mining and urbanization 
activities. (Field trip required.) 

AGRONOMY 87 



315. Soil Genesis and Classification. I. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 2 or 10. Origin and formation of 
soils. Study of soil profiles and soil-forming processes in field and laboratory. 
Principles of classification and techniques of soil mapping. 2 lee, 1 lab. (Saturday 
field trips required.) (Offered in Fall of even years.) 

410. Advanced Soil Fertility. II. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 210, Biol. 169 or consent. Influence of 
soil chemical and physical properties on availability of plant nutrients; intensive 
study of individual plant nutrients and interactions of nutrients in soils and crops. 
(Offered in Spring of even years.) 

416. Soil Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Chemistry of soil development; chemical and 
mineralogical composition of soils; nature and properties of organic and inorganic 
soil colloids; cation and anion exchange phenomena; soil chemistry of macro- and 
micro-nutrients. (Offered in Fall of odd years.) 

418. Chemistry of Soil Organic Matter. II. 3 hr. PR: Organic chemistry or consent. 
Chemical composition of soil organic matter studied in relation to its physico- 
chemical properties and humus formation. Methods involving extraction, frac- 
tionation, and purification of soil organic components examined. 2 lee, 1 lab. 
(Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

421. Identification of Clay Minerals in Soil. II. 3 hr. PR: Physical chemistry or consent. 
Characterization of clay minerals is an important aspect in soils, geology, civil 
engineering, and related fields. Study of methods used in qualitative and 
quantitative identification of these secondary minerals in soils and rocks. 1 lee, 2 
lab. (Offered in Spring of even years.) 

451. Seminar in Micropedology. I. 2 or 3 hr. PR: Second-year graduate and consent. 
Principles of optical mineralogy and of the polarizing microscope as applied to the 
study of soil minerals and soil fabrics. (Offered in Fall of even years.) 

Plant Science (PI. So) 

420. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Special study in agricultural microbiology, crop 
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 

450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. Graduate seminar in agricultural microbiology, crop science, 
horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Graduate research in agricultural microbiology, crop 
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 

ANATOMY 

Richard C. Wiggins, Chairperson of the Department 

4052 Health Sciences Center North 

Degrees Offered: Master of Science, Doctor of Philosophy 

Graduate Faculty: Members Blaha, Cilento, Culberson, Dey, Hilloowala, Kirk, Konat, 

Overman, Pinkstaff, Reilly, Reyer, Walker, and Wiggins. Associate Members 

Beresford, Friedman, Sorg, Sorrell, Labosky, and Pope. 

The Department of Anatomy in the School of Medicine offers graduate 
programs which are committed to the training of competent researchers and 
capable teachers. This is accomplished by the completion of a carefully 
designed plan of study tailored to the individual student's interests. The 
program includes instruction in basic morphological, developmental, and 
functional aspects of human anatomy. Selected courses strengthen the area of 
interest of the student. The student conducts an original research project 
which culminates in a dissertation (Ph.D.) or a thesis (M.S.). 

Admission Requirements 

In addition to the admission procedure of the University, the Department 
of Anatomy requires that each applicant complete a departmental application 

88 ANATOMY 



form obtained from the department. After an application is favorably 
reviewed by the departmental graduate studies committee, applicants are 
invited for a personal interview whenever practical. The applicant is 
admitted by a majority vote of the departmental graduate faculty. 

It is recommended that the following courses be completed before 
entering the graduate program: algebra, trigonometry, general physics, 
inorganic and organic chemistry, general biology or zoology, comparative 
anatomy, embryology, genetics, cell biology or general physiology, and two 
years of French, German, or Russian. At the discretion of the department, a 
student may be allowed to complete a limited number of prerequisites after 
enrolling in the program. A grade-point average above 3.0 is desirable. The 
aptitude portion and an advanced section of the Graduate Record Examination 
are generally required. Also, three letters of recommendation from persons 
who can best evaluate the applicant's potential for graduate study should 
either accompany the application or be mailed to the Department of Anatomy 
separately. Applicants desiring consideration for financial aid should complete 
the application process as early as possible. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

The first year of study usually consists of course work within the 
Department of Anatomy. These courses include gross anatomy, microanatomy, 
neurobiology, introduction to research, and seminar in anatomy. Courses in 
other basic medical sciences, such as biochemistry and physiology, are 
usually taken in the second year. Students are in good standing while a 
minimum 3.0 overall grade-point average is maintained. 

To be admitted to candidacy for the Ph.D. degree, the student must pass 
the preliminary examination, and prepare a plan for a research project to be 
undertaken for the dissertation. To be recommended for the Ph.D. degree, each 
student must complete a dissertation based on original research and defend 
the dissertation at an oral examination. 

This program allows flexibility for each student. The precise plan of 
study is designed by the student and an advisory committee composed of 
faculty members selected by the student. 

The student often culminates the training period with presentations at 
regional and/or national scientific meetings. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

The master's program in anatomy is offered as a terminal degree 
primarily for students in certain specialized fields, such as physical therapy, 
or in a conjoint program in dentistry or medicine. It is not necessary for the 
student to complete the M.S. degree in order to qualify for admission into the 
Ph.D. program, although the student may elect to complete the requirements 
for this degree in progress toward the Ph.D. 

Applicants who show a special need for the M.S. degree must generally be 
as well qualified as applicants to the doctoral program. The M.S. student must 
complete courses in gross anatomy and microanatomy and six to nine hours of 
required and elective courses. A 2.75 grade-point average must be maintained. 
In addition to course work, the student must complete a thesis based on 
original research and defend the thesis at an oral comprehensive examination. 

Research and Instruction 

Molecular and Developmental anatomy: experimental and descriptive 
embryology, cellular differentiation, and dedifferentiation, regeneration and 
the effects of drugs and other environmental agents on development; 

Microscopic anatomy: studies of cells, tissues and organs, under normal 
and experimental conditions with in vivo microscopic, histochemical, electron 
microscopic, autoradiographic, and fluorescent techniques; 

ANATOMY 89 



Gross anatomy: anatomical variations and anomalies, and electromyo- 
graphic studies of specific muscle groups; 

Neuroanatomy: experimental, comparative, and embryological studies of 
specific nerve cell groups and nerve pathways in the spinal cord, brain stem, 
cerebellum, and cerebrum. 

Anatomy (Anat.) 

301. Gross and Developmental Anatomy: Trunk. (For medical and a limited number of 
regular full-time graduate students in the medical basic sciences.) I. 5 hr. PR: 
Medical student standing or consent of chairperson. Gross anatomical study of 
the back, thorax, abdomen, pelvis, and perineum emphasizing clinically-related 
concepts. 

302. Gross and Developmental Anatomy: Head-Neck. (For medical and a limited 
number of regular full-time graduate students in the medical basic sciences.) I. 3 
hr. PR: Medical student standing or consent of chairperson. Gross anatomical 
study of the head and neck emphasizing clinically-related concepts. 

304. Gross and Developmental Anatomy: Extremities. (For medical students and a 
limited number of regular full-time graduate students in the medical basic 
sciences.) I. 2 hr. PR: Medical student standing or consent of chairperson. Gross 
anatomical and developmental study of the upper and lower limbs emphasizing 
clinically-related concepts. 

305. Microanatomy. (For medical students and a limited number of regular full-time 
graduate students in the medical basic sciences.) II. 5 hr. PR: Medical student 
standing or consent of chairperson. Cells, tissues, and organs. 

308. Neuroanatomy. (For students in physical therapy and a limited number of regular 
full-time graduate students in the medical basic sciences, and students in other 
health sciences.) II. 2 hr. PR: Consent of instructor or chairperson. Gross and 
microscopic structure of the central nervous system. 

309. Microanatomy and Organology. (For dental students and a limited number of 
regular full-time graduate students in the medical basic sciences.) I. 5 hr. PR: 
Dental student standing or consent of chairperson. Cells, tissues, and organs. 

312. Special Topics in Anatomy. 2-4 hr. per. sem. PR: Anat. 301 or 324; and Anat. 305 or 
309; consent of chairperson. Different topics of current interest in anatomy that 
are not included in the regular graduate courses. 

314. Applied Anatomy. I, II. 2-6 hr. per sem. PR: Consent of instructor or chairperson. 
Detailed study of anatomy adapted to the needs of the individual student. 

316. Craniofacial Growth and Maturation. I. 1 hr. PR: Consent of instructor. The 
current concepts of craniofacial growth and maturation are presented and 
integrated for application to clinical problems. 

318. Oral Histology and Embryology. (For dental students and a limited number of 
regular full-time graduate students in the medical basic sciences.) II. 2 hr. PR: 
Dental student standing or consent of instructor or chairperson. Structure, 
function, and development of oral tissues. 

319. Advanced Head and Neck Anatomy. II. 1 hr. PR: Dental, medical, or graduate 
student, or consent. Advanced head and neck craniofacial embryology and related 
functions as they apply to specialties in dental or medical practice. 

324. Human Gross Anatomy. (For dental students and a limited number of regular, 
full-time graduate students in the medical basic sciences.) 7 hr. PR: Dental student 
standing or consent of chairperson. Human anatomy including cadaver dissection 
for dental students. 4 hr. lee, 3 hr. lab. 

90 ANATOMY 



401. Advanced Gross Anatomy. 2-6 hr. per sem. PR: Anat. 301, 302, 304, and consent; or 
Anat. 324 and consnet. Morphological and functional analysis of a selected region, 
with dissection. 

402. Advanced Developmental Anatomy. II. 2-4 per sem. PR: Anat. 301, 302, 304, and 
consent of instructor or chairperson. Detailed developmental anatomy of the fetal 
period and infancy. With dissections and analysis of variations and malformations. 

403. Seminar. I, II. 1-6 hr. (1 hr. per sem.) (Course may be repeated.) PR: Consent of 
Graduate Committee. Special topics of current or historical interest. 

405. Experimental Embryology. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Embryology and 
cellular physiology and biochemistry and consent of instructor or chairperson. 
Development, differentiation, and regeneration. 

406. Advanced Neuroanatomy. I. 2-4 hr. per sem. (Course may be repeated.) PR: CC MD 
375 and consent of instructor or chairperson. Detailed study of selected areas of 
the nervous system. 

408. Histochemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Anat. 305 or 309, biochemistry, and consent of 
instructor or chairperson. Histochemical theory and techniques. (Offered in odd 
numbered years.} 

451. Advanced Microanatomy. I, II, or S. 2-4 hr. PR: Anat. 305 or 309, or Biol. 263 and 
consent of instructor or chairperson. An extension of the major topics included in 
Anat. 305 or 309. Special emphasis on recent contributions. 

490. Teaching Practicum I and II. 1-3 hr. Consent of chairperson. Supervised practice 
in college teaching of anatomy. Graded a S or U. 

491. Advanced Anatomy. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent of chairperson. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent of Graduate Committee. (May be repeated 
as needed with consent of Graduate Studies Committee.) 

ANIMAL AND VETERINARY SCIENCES 

Paul E. Lewis, Chairperson of Division of Animal and Veterinary Sciences 

G-038 Agricultural Sciences Building 

Degree Offered: Master of Science 

Graduate Faculty: Members Dailey, Hoover, Inskeep, Klandorf, Lerner, Lewis, Martin, 

McCurley, Oscar, Peterson, Prigge, Reid, and Russell. Associate Members Collins, 

Dozsa, Horvath, Jordan, Osborne, Smith, and Wagner. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

The Master of Science in animal and veterinary sciences in the College of 
Agriculture and Forestry allows maximum flexibility in courses and research 
problems. Students may emphasize physiology, production, breeding, nutri- 
tion, food, or veterinary sciences. They may work with beef and dairy cattle, 
sheep, swine, poultry, or laboratory animals. Research problems in farm 
animals form the basis for many studies, but a comparative approach is 
emphasized. 

Admission requirements are those of the College of Agriculture and 
Forestry. Additional requirements are similar to those in other biological 
sciences. The student should have completed basic courses in the physical 
and biological sciences, including genetics, nutrition, and physiology. Defi- 
ciencies may prolong the time needed to complete degree programs. 

A composite Graduate Record Examination score of 1,000 or better will be 
considered as a basis of admission. The fact that an applicant meets the above 
requirements shall not guarantee admission since each professor will accept 

ANIMAL AND VETERINARY SCIENCES 91 



only the number of advisees which can be supervised adequately with 
available facilities, time, and funds. 

A minimum of 24 approved hours of course work and a thesis are required 
for all master of science degrees. Students interested in study leading to the 
Ph.D. degree should apply for acceptance into the Ph.D. program in Agricul- 
tural Sciences. 

Animal and Veterinary Science (A&VS) 

420. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. (1 hr. credit in special cases only). Advanced study 
in particular phases of such animal science topics as animal production, nutrition, 
physiology, breeding and genetics, veterinary science, and food. (For the Master's 
Degree, Special Topics ordinarily may count 2 to 4 hr.; max. credit, 6 hr.). 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Research in animal nutrition, physiology, breeding and 
production, and veterinary science. 

Animal Nutrition (An. Nu.) 

301. Principles of Nutrition and Metabolism. I. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 210 or consent. A basic 
course in principles of nutrition with emphasis on the major classes of dietary 
nutrients and their digestion and utilization. 

302. Nutrition and Physiological Function. II. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 301 or consent. 
Sequence to An. Nu. 301. Techniques used in nutritional studies and the 
relationship of nutrient requirements to physiological function in species of 
laboratory and domestic animals and man. 

430. Rumen Metaboiism and Physiology. I. 3 hr. PR: Course in biochemistry. The 
anatomy and physiology of the forestomachs of ruminants and the rumen 
microbial population. Emphasis on the microbial metabolism as it pertains to the 
utilization of feeds by ruminants. [Offered in Fall of odd years.) 

432. Forage Chemistry and Quality. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 301 and Agron. 254, or consent. 
Advanced course in chemistry and biochemistry of pastures and forages, 
emphasizing factors affecting their quality and principles governing their utiliza- 
tion by herbivorous animals. (Also listed as Agron. 432.) [Offered in Spring of 
even years.) 

434. Mineral Nutrition of Animals. II. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 301 or consent. Mineral 
nutrition of livestock and man; soil-plant-animal interactions. Detailed treatment 
of function of individual elements and their involvement in deficiency and toxicity 
conditions on an international basis. [Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (Repeat registration permitted for maximum of 6 
credit hours per year.) Topics in advanced nutrition. Subject will be selected by 
staff for formal presentation. 

Animal Physiology and Breeding (An. Ph.) 

200. Animal Growth and Lactation Physiology. 3 hr. PR: An. Ph. 100, or consent. 
Animal life cycles; nature of growth and lactation; effects of biological, environ- 
mental, and social-psychological variants; physiological regulation and control. 

204. Animal Physiology Laboratory. I. 2 hr. PR: An. Ph. 100 or consent. Laboratory 
study of the physiological systems of animals and the influences of environment 
on these systems. 

225. Physiology of Reproduction. II. 3 hr. PR: Course in biology. Comparative 
physiology of reproduction in higher animals; endocrine functions involved in 
reproduction; genetic and environmental variations in fertility mechanisms. 

92 ANIMAL AND VETERINARY SCIENCES 



226. Breeding of Farm Animals. I. 3 hr. PR: Course in genetics or consent. Application of 
principles of quantitative genetics to the improvement of farm animals. 

280. Behavioral Patterns of Domestic Animals. II. 3 hr. Examination of the bases for 
exhibition and control of behavioral patterns of domestic animals. 1 lab. 

425. Endocrinology of Reproduction. II. 4 hr. (2 labs.). PR: An. Ph. 225 or Biol. 268 or 
equiv. Discussion of and laboratory experience in classical and current concepts 
of hormonal and neurohormonal regulations of reproductive phenomena with 
emphasis on species differences and similarities. (Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

426. Advanced Animal Selection. II. 3 hr. PR: Course in statistics and course in genetics 
or equiv. An advanced course dealing with the basic concepts of experimental and 
statistical approaches in the analysis of quantitative inheritance with special 
reference to the magnitude and nature of genotypic and nongenotypic variability. 
(Offered in Spring of even years.) 

450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. 

Animal Production (An. Pr.) 

250. Current Literature in Animal Science. I. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 101. Evaluation of 
current research in animal science and its application to production and manage- 
ment. 

422. Advanced Milk Production. II. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 101 or consent. Advanced study of 
the feeding, breeding, and management of dairy cattle. 

Food Science (Fd. Sc.) 

267. Advanced Meat Science. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Fd. Sc. 167. Theoretical and experimental 
aspects of meat science, meat product/process systems, and the quantitative 
biology of muscle systems used for food. 

Veterinary Science (Vet. s.) 

205. Parasitology. II. 3 hr. PR: Course in biology or consent. Common parasites of farm 
animals, their life cycles, effects on the host, diagnosis, control, and public health 
importance. 3 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab. 

210. Principles of Laboratory Animal Science. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent for undergraduates. 
The management, genetics, physiology, nutrition, disease, and germ-free quar- 
tering of common laboratory animals. 1 lab. 



ART 

Carmon Colangelo, Graduate Adviser, Division of Art 
Creative Arts Center 

Degrees Offered: Master of Arts, Master of Fine Arts 

Graduate Faculty: Members Anderson, Colangelo, Couch, Harvey, Rajam, Schultz, and 
Thomas. Associate Members Faulkes, Fergus, Helm, Krainak, and Lucas. 

The graduate programs in art lead to a master of arts with emphasis in art 
(one to two years or 30 credit hours) and to a master of fine arts with emphasis 
in visual art (two to three years or 60 hours). Both of these programs are 
highly selective and closely integrated parts of the professional education in 
art offered by the Division of Art. All applicants are expected to have artistic 
maturity and the motivation to achieve excellence in their areas of concen- 
tration. 

ART 93 



The Division of Art is an accredited institutional member of the National 
Association of Schools of Art and Design, the only nationally recognized 
accrediting agency for professional art instruction. Applicants to programs in 
art must comply with the standards for admission set by West Virginia 
University, the College of Creative Arts, and the Division of Art. 

All students enter the graduate programs in art as probationary candi- 
dates. Students in the M.F.A. program are reviewed for advancement at the 
end of their first year of study or upon the completion of 28-30 credit hours. 
Students in the M. A. program are reviewed at the end of their first semester of 
study or upon the completion of 12-15 credit hours. A satisfactory review 
allows students to have degree candidate status. Candidacy status must be 
approved by the student's graduate committee. All students in degree 
programs, either M.F.A. or M.A., must prepare a written problem report. A 
graduate exhibition may be required of a student on the recommendation of 
his/her graduate committee. 

General Requirements 

Deficiencies: Before students are admitted, they must meet any deficiencies 
in their undergraduate preparation. Credits taken to erase deficiencies do not 
count toward a graduate degree. 

Academic Standards: The Division of Art has high expectations for its 
graduate students. Because of this, certain standards of achievement exceed 
the minimum standards set by the University for all graduate students. The 
Division of Art reserves the right to impose stricter limitations on all art 
graduate students. Credit hours in courses with an earned grade of "C" do not 
automatically count toward graduate degree requirements. The graduate 
committee and the division chairperson have the right to declare such credit 
hours unacceptable. 

Materials and Equipment: All graduate art majors are required to 
purchase most of their personal equipment and expendable supplies. Some 
studio areas purchase bulk supplies for student use in their courses. The 
average cost to students sharing the cost of bulk purchases ranges from $100 
to $150 per semester. 

Problem Report: All candidates for a graduate degree in art must prepare 
a written problem report related to their work and activity as a graduate 
student. The chairperson of the student's graduate committee supervises the 
preparation of the problem report, which must be completed at least one 
month before the anticipated graduation date. The problem report must be 
prepared according to the form prescribed in the WVU regulations governing 
the preparation of dissertations and theses unless an exception is authorized 
in advance by the student's graduate committee and the division chairperson. 

Change of Graduate Program: A probationary candidate in a graduate art 
program is not guaranteed acceptance into another graduate art program. A 
change from the M.F.A. program to the M.A. program (or the reverse) must be 
approved by the graduate faculty of the Division of Art. Under normal 
conditions, such a change is not considered until the student has established 
credibility by successfully completing 12-15 approved credit hours of study 
at WVU. A change to a program outside the Division of Art must be approved 
by the receiving unit. To make an application for a double degree program or 
special interdepartmental programs at the graduate level, students must have 
written prior approval of the division chairperson. 

94 ART 



Application Procedures 

Requests for application forms for admission to graduate degree programs 
in art must be addressed to the Office of Admissions and Records, West 
Virginia University, P.O. Box 6009, Morgantown, WV 26506-6009. Applicants 
must specify the degree and subject area of their choice and return the 
application and transcripts from each college or university previously 
attended to the above address with a $20 non-refundable processing fee. 

All applicants, for both the M.F. A. and the M.A., must present a portfolio 
for admission to the Division of Art. Applicants should take care to select 
slides of recent and representative work for inclusion in the portfolio. The 
portfolio must contain a statement of purpose, and three letters of recommen 
dation from college faculty or persons knowledgeable of the applicant s 
interests and abilities, and twenty 35mm slides as they come from the 
processing laboratory, (neither remounted nor retaped). Each slide should be 
labeled with name, date of completion, size of work, and type of medium and 
arranged in an 8" by 11" transparent plastic slide holder for mailing. The 
complete portfolio, with the purpose statement, three letters, and 20 slides, 
should be submitted to: 

Graduate Adviser 

Division of Art 

College of Creative Arts 

West Virginia University 

P.O. Box 6111 

Morgantown, WV 26506-6111 
Provide a stamped, self-addressed envelope to assure prompt, safe return of 
the slides. 

Master of Fine Arts in Visual Arts 

The M.F. A., a professionally oriented terminal degree in the studio arts, 
requires a baccalaureate degree in art or its equivalent for admission. 
Preparation should include 12 hours of art history, 70 hours of studio art 
related to professional needs, and 36 hours of general education. 

Requirements: The suggested distribution of studies for the 60 credit hour 
program is: 

Art Studio Major Area 36 hours 

Art Studio Elective 6 hours 

Teaching practicum or Professional Practice 6 hours 

Art History 6 hours 

Graduate Exhibition and Problem Report 6 hours 

To earn the M.F. A., a student must complete a combined (undergraduate and 
graduate) total of 118 hours in studio, 18 hours in art history, and the 
appropriate number of credit hours in general education courses. 

All students in the M.F. A. program are required to submit a statement of 
intention after completion of 12 credit hours, to indicate the direction and 
implementation of their studio involvement, with an outline of their problem 
report. 

Transfer M.F.A. Credit: In addition to the application materials listed, 
transfer students must ask to transfer graduate work completed elsewhere. 
Transcripts must accompany the written request. Transfer credit is not 
automatic. The art faculty review committee, the graduate adviser, and the 
division chairperson will determine how much, if any, previous graduate- 



ART 95 



level work may be transferred. At least 60 percent of the work for the M.F.A. 
must be completed at WVU in the studio arts. 

M.F.A. Curriculum: The M.F.A. student must complete the stated require- 
ments in order to graduate, usually in a two-year period. Most students take 
15 hours per semester. All students accepted into the M.F.A. program are 
required to spend four full-time semesters (excluding summer sessions) in 
residence. A waiver of this requirement may be requested from the graduate 
adviser of the Division of Art, based on accepted transfer credit or previously 
completed requirements. Concentrations for the M.F.A. include ceramics, 
graphic design, painting, printmaking, and sculpture. 

The following is the recommended distribution of required M.F.A. 
courses: 

First Year— Probationary Candidate Hr. 

Art Studio Major Area 18 

Art Studio Elective 3 

Teaching Practicum or Professional Practice* 6 

Art History** 3 

30 

*Professional practice courses will be practical, including business studies for students 
intending to maintain studios as a private enterprise; administrative studies for those intending to 
work in art centers, museums, or school administration; teaching practicum for those who expect to 
teach at the college or university level. Graduate Assistants expecting to teach during their second 
year should complete 6 hours of teaching practicum during the first year. Students with teaching 
experience may be exempt from this restriction. 

**Graduate credits in art history must be at the 300-level (graduate) and are in addition to 
courses taken or required at the undergraduate level. 

Second Year— M.F.A. Candidate Hr. 

Art Studio Major Area 18 

Art Studio Elective 3 

Art History* 3 

Graduate Exhibition and Problem Report** 6 

30 

*Graduate credits in art history must be at the 300-level (graduate) and are in addition to 
courses taken or required at the undergraduate level. 

**Graduate exhibition and problem report (Art 400) will include organized graduate seminars, 
problem report review periods, committee meetings, and exhibition preparation discussions. 

Master of Art in Art 

Art Education Concentration 
(30 credit hours) 

Art education is a popular option for graduate study in art. Specialization 
in art education requires the completion of 30 credit hours program. The exact 
course of study is determined through consultation with a student's adviser. 
The art education concentration may be completed in one year of full time 
study. The general distribution of graduate credits is as follows: 

Hr. 

Art studio major area 9 

Art studio elective 6 

Art education or approved studies 15 

Art 400 (Problem report) <JL 3 

30 



96 ART 



Every graduate student is required to prepare a written problem report. The 
graduate art faculty recommend those students who may be required to hold a 
graduate exhibition. 

Art History Concentration 
(30 credit hours) 

The art history concentration is accredited by the National Association of 
Schools of Art and Design. For information about this option, please contact 
the coordinator of art history or the graduate adviser in the Division of Art. 
The general distribution of graduate credits for a concentration in art history 
is as follows: 

Hr. 

Art history 21 

Cognate courses 6 

Art 400 (Problem report) ^_3 

30 
Studio Art Concentration 
(30 credit hours) 

The studio art concentration allows students to specialize in ceramics, 
graphic design, painting, printmaking, or sculpture. 

Admission Requirements: Applicants desiring to begin a course of study 
leading to the Master of Arts in art and concentration in the studio arts must 
have a baccalaureate degree in art or the equivalent. Undergraduate study 
should include 12 hours of art history, 45 hours of studio art related to 
professional needs, and 36 hours of general education courses. 
The concentration in studio art requires: 

Hr. 

Art Studio Major Area 18 

Art Studio Elective or Professional Practice* 3 

Art History** 6 

Art 400 (Problem report) ^_3 

30 

*In lieu of art studio elective instruction, students may take professional practice courses which 
are practical in nature. Exact courses of study are determined in consultation with the graduate 
adviser. 

**Graduate credits in art history must be at the 300-level (graduate) and are in addition to 
courses taken or required at the undergraduate level. 

The student must complete the stated degree requirements in order to 
graduate. These credits can be earned in one year. After consultation with the 
graduate adviser, students specializing in studio arts are required to prepare a 
study list of course to be taken to satisfy Division of Art requirements. 
Changes in this list must be requested in writing and approved by the 
chairperson of the division. 

Financial Aid and Graduate Assistantships: Financial aid information is 
available through the Student Financial Aid Office, West Virginia University, 
P.O. Box 6004, Morgantown WV 26506-6004. Graduate assistantships in art 
are awarded to students of exceptional promise by the faculty of the Division 
of Art. Application forms must be requested from the graduate adviser, 
Division of Art, College of Creative Arts, West Virginia University, P.O. Box 
6111, Morgantown, WV 26506-6111, and submitted with the portfolio. 



ART 97 



Art (Art) 

200. Directed Art Studies. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Consent. 
Studies in painting, sculpture, printmaking, graphic design, ceramics, drawing, 
art education, art history; includes independent study. 

211. Figure Drawing. I, II, S. 3 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Art 12, 121orequiv. 
A course in compositional structure from the figure. 

212. Advanced Drawing. I, II, S. 3 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Art 211 or equiv. 
Advance tutorial drawing course. 

300. Graduate Art Studies. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Consent. 
Studies in painting, sculpture, printmaking, graphic design, ceramics, drawing, 
art education, art history; includes independent study. 

400. Graduate Exhibition and Problem Report. I, II. 3-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college 
teaching of studio art. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. It is anticipated that each graduate 
student will present at least one seminar to the assembled faculty and graduate 
student body. 

BIOCHEMISTRY 

Diana S. Beattie, Chair 

3124 Health Sciences North 

Degrees Offered: Master of Science, Doctor of Philosophy 

Graduate Faculty: Members Beattie, Blair, Butcher, Canady, Durham, Evans, Harris, 

Jagannathan, Miller, Rafter, Tryfiates, Vrana, Wimmer, and Wirtz. Associate member 

Spearman. 

Graduate programs in the Department of Biochemistry are designed to 
assist students in the development of their own capabilities for independent 
thought and research. All students are provided with a strong biochemistry 
background; however, the program has sufficient flexibility to allow individual 
students to select advanced specialty courses in biochemistry which are of 
particular importance to their career goals. Faculty research problems are of 
current interest and are diverse, reflecting the broad spectrum of areas 
encompassing biochemistry. 

Admission Requirements 

A prospective graduate student should hold a bachelor's degree with a 
science major and should have successfully completed courses in qualitative- 
quantitative chemical analysis, organic chemistry, calculus, physics, and 
physical chemistry. In some cases, a deficiency in the above may be made up 
after admission into the program. 

Application is made by submission of the following items to the 
Department of Biochemistry: (a) the completed departmental application 
form (sent on request); (b) three letters of recommendation from professors 
who can evaluate the student's present abilities and potential; (c) official 
transcript of the applicant's college grades; and (d) official copy of Graduate 
Record Examination scores. Due to the sequence of courses, entrance in the 
fall is preferred, but exceptions may be made as necessary. Application 
material and program details may be obtained by writing: The Graduate 
Coordinator, Department of Biochemistry, School of Medicine, West Virginia 

98 BIOCHEMISTRY 



University, Morgantown, WV 26506. The deadline for receipt of applications 
and supporting documents by the department is June 1; to be considered for 
financial support, applications should be submitted by February 1. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

To assure that all students become familiar with the basic principles of 
biochemistry, the first year of the Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) program is 
devoted primarily to course work. In addition to formal courses during the 
first semester, students participate in a laboratory program which involves 
all faculty members. This laboratory experience is designed to illustrate the 
basic research skills involved in biochemistry. During the second semester, 
students will undertake research in at least two laboratories of their choice. 

Upon successful completion of the first year, students will choose a 
dissertation research adviser, at which time emphasis will be placed on 
research. During the second year, specialized courses in biochemistry will be 
offered as the students continue their research programs. During subsequent 
years, the students emphasize independent thesis research, and a few formal 
courses are taken. 

An essential component of the Ph.D. program is participation in depart- 
mental journal clubs and seminars. Both students and faculty participate, 
thus students learn to effectively organize and present research material to a 
large group of people. 

Completion of the Ph.D. program is realized when the student successfully 
presents the research results to both the Department of Biochemistry and a 
graduate advisory committee. Typically, four years are required to realize 
this goal. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

The Department of Biochemistry offers the thesis master's degree. This 
program involves completion of a master's research project in addition to 
formal course work. Two to three years are generally required to complete the 
M.S. program. 

Research and Instruction 

Research Areas— Hormonal regulation of metabolism. Structure and 
function of nucleic acids. Chemistry of enzymes and serum proteins. Nutri- 
tional oncology. Secretory mechanisms. Biogenesis of membranes. Regulation 
of gene expression. 

Biochemistry (Bioch.) 

231. Genera] Biochemistry. I. 7 hr. PR: General chemistry, organic chemistry. (For 
medical students; others by consent.) Consists of seven main lectures, one clinical 
correlation lecture, and one problem session per week. 

239. Clinical Chemical Techniques. II. 4 hr. PR: Bioch. 139, 231 or equiv. (Primarily for 
medical technology students; open to other qualified students by consent.) 

305. General Biochemistry. II. 4 hr. PR: Inorganic chemistry, organic chemistry, and 
consent. (For dental and graduate students.) Lecture, conference, and demonstra- 
tion. 

399. Special Topics. I, II. 1-2 hr. PR: Consent. Journal Club, Teaching and Laboratory 
Rotations. 



BIOCHEMISTRY 99 



490. Teaching Practicum I and 11. 1-3 hr. Consent of chairperson. Supervised practice 
in college teaching of biochemistry. Graded as S or U. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Physical techniques in biochemistry; 
nucleic acids and protein biosynthesis; enzymology and protein chemistry; 
metabolic regulation (each topic — one semester; offered alternate years). Designed 
primarily to provide a background for students who will do research in 
biochemistry and molecular biology. (Nucleic Acids— Fall, 1991; Cell Biology- 
Spring, 1990; Metabolic Regulation— Fall 1990; Enzymology— Spring, 1991.) 

496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Presentation and discussion of special 
topics. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. 

BIOLOGY 

Leah A. Williams, Chairperson of the Department 

Dennis C. Quinian, Associate Chairperson 

200 Brooks Hall 

Degrees Offered: Master of Science, Doctor of Philosophy 

Graduate Faculty: Members Blaydes, Clarkson, DeCosta, Gallagher, Garbutt, Katula, 

Keller, Kotarski, Lang, Leonard, McGraw, Marshall, Quinian, Sutter, and Williams. 

Associate member Guthrie. 

The Department of Biology offers graduate studies leading to the degrees 
of doctor of philosophy and master of science. The Ph.D. degree is offered in 
the area of cellular and molecular biology with research concentration in the 
areas of gene regulation and transcriptional control during development; 
repair to DNA damaged by radiation and chemicals; positional effect on gene 
expression in drosophila; cellular and molecular bases of regulation of cell 
proliferation; pheromonal communication; and regulation of cholesterol 
metabolism in mammalian cells. The master of science provides specialization 
in population genetics, plant ecology, environmental plant systematics, 
plankton ecology, environmental ecology, and animal behavior as well as in 
cellular and molecular biology. Each degree requires completion of an original 
research project which represents the principal theme about which the 
graduate program is constructed. Students may work toward an advanced 
degree only with the approval of the department. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

Applicants for the master of science program in biology must show at the 
minimum the equivalent of a bachelor's degree from an accredited institution, 
an undergraduate grade-point average of 3.0, a 50th percentile ranking for the 
verbal and 50th percentile ranking for the quantitative sections of the 
Graduate Record Examination; an adequate science background, which 
normally includes one year of physics and two years of chemistry; and a 
sufficient knowledge in biology as reflected in scores normally greater than 
the 50th percentile on all three sections of the advanced Biology Test of the 
GRE. Applicants are requested to submit an essay describing past research 
experience and expectations for career goals. Three letters of recommendation 
from individuals familiar with the applicant's academic performance are 
required as well as an official transcript from all colleges or universities 
attended as an undergraduate. The Department of Biology's Graduate 
Committee reviews the applicant's records and makes the decision to admit or 
reject the applicant. 

100 BIOLOGY 



The WVU general requirements for the master of science are outlined 
elsewhere in the graduate catalog. Students in the biology M.S. program may 
apply up to six hours of research credit toward the 30-hour requirement; the 
remaining 24 hours of credit must be earned in graduate courses which reflect 
a diversified exposure to biology. The establishment of an advisory committee 
and the generation of a program of study are explained in detail in the 
department's Graduate Student Handbook. A final oral examination is 
administered by the advisory committee after the program of study has been 
completed and the thesis has been submitted. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

The program for the degree of doctor of philosophy concentrating in 
cellular and molecular biology reflects a flexible, research-oriented approach 
geared to develop the interests, capabilities, and potentials of mature 
students. Applicants must have met all the entrance requirements listed 
above for the master of science program. Acceptance into the Ph.D. program is 
by vote of the Graduate Committee of the Department of Biology. This 
committee insures that all entrance requirements are met or that provisions 
have been made to remedy the deficiencies, and that facilities and personnel 
are adequate to support the program to a successful conclusion. 

Each student admitted to the Ph.D. program works under the close 
supervision of a faculty research adviser and an advisory committee, both of 
which must be approved by the Graduate Committee of the Department of 
Biology; details on the composition and establishment of an advisory 
committee are available in the Graduate Student Handbook. Students must 
have a program of study formulated and approved within 12 months of 
entering the Ph.D. program; all deficiencies must have been removed earlier. 
Significant deviations from an established program of study require approval 
from the advisory committee and the graduate committee. 

The advisory committee is responsible for overseeing the progress of the 
student and for administering and judging performance in the several 
required examinations; it insures that all Department of Biology, College of 
Arts and Sciences, and University requirements are met during the course of 
the student's study program. The program of study outlines the research to be 
conducted and specifies the courses to be taken in support of the proposed 
research. 

Students must successfully complete a series of three written and oral 
intermediate examinations in order to be promoted to candidacy. The first, a 
dissertation proposal examination, consists of a written dissertation research 
proposal. Thereafter, the proposed research is presented orally in the form of 
a departmental seminar. The next is a series of written qualifying examina- 
tions. The written qualifying examination is followed by an oral examination 
designed to determine the student's ability to deal with a specific area of 
research not directly related to his/her own research proposal; the student 
must present a public seminar on the topic and be prepared to answer 
questions on any matter related to the topic. 

The three intermediate examinations are usually taken during the third, 
fourth, and fifth semesters of the program. Successful passage of the three 
intermediate examinations leads to promotion to candidacy, wherein the 
student may concentrate fully upon the dissertation research and prepare for 
the final examination. The final examination consists of the submission of a 
completed and acceptable written dissertation, an oral dissertation defense, 



BIOLOGY 101 



and the presentation of a formal departmental seminar covering the disserta- 
tion research. 

Biology (Biol.) 

201. History of Biology. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4 or equiv. History of development of 
biological knowledge, with philosophical and social backgrounds. 

209. Topics and Problems in Biology. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. (May be repeated for max. of 6 hr. j 
PR: Permit required. Topics and problems in contemporary biology. All topics or 
problems must be selected in consultation with the instructor. 

211. Advanced Cellular/Molecular Biology. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 19 or consent. Advanced 
study of fundamental cellular activities and their underlying molecular processes. 

212. Advanced Cellular/Molecular Biology— Laboratory. II. 1 hr. PR or Cone: Biol. 211 
or consent. Experimental approaches to the study of cellular systems. 1 hr. lab. 

214. Molecular Basis of Cellular Growth. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 19 or consent. Study of the 
integration of molecular events as they regulate the growth and division of cells. 
Topics include: hormones as cell effectors, control of gene expression, and the 
cancer cell as a model system. 

216. Cell and Molecular Biology Methods. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 19 or consent. Introduction to 
the theory and application of basic analytical tools used in molecular biology. 
Selected topics included are: hydrodynamic methods, chromatography, electro- 
phoresis, and general laboratory methods. (Offered in Fall of even years.) 

219. Introduction to Recombinant DNA Technology. I. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 19 or consent. An 
introductory course covering the basic principles and techniques of recombinant 
DNA technology. Includes molecular cloning, isolation of plasmid DNA, agarose/ 
acrylamide gel electrophoresis, restriction enzyme mapping, nucleic acid hybridi- 
zation, and DNA sequencing. 

231. Animal Behavior. I. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4 or 15, Psych. 1, or consent. 
Introduction to animal behavior (ethology) emphasizing the biological bases and 
evolution of individual and social behaviors; laboratory includes independent 
investigation of behavioral phenomena. 

232. Physiological Psychology. I. 3 hr. PR: 9 hr. psychology, behavior, physiology, or 
graduate standing. Introduction to physiological mechanisms and the neural basis 
of behavior. (Also listed as Psych. 232.] 

233. Behavioral Ecology. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 21 or consent. Consideration of the influences 
of environmental factors on the short- and long-term regulation, control, and 
evolution of the behaviors of animals. (Offered in Fall of even years.) 

234. Physiology of Animal Behavior. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 231 or consent. Explores the way 
behavior is controlled in a wide variety of animals so that commonalities and 
varieties of neural and endocrine mechanisms may be better understood. (Offered 
in Spring of even years.) 

235. Primate Behavior. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4 or 15 or consent. Primates as they 
exist in their natural habitats, as they suggest clues to human behavior and the 
evolution of behavior. Case studies and comparative primate behavior of 
prosimians to monkeys, to apes, to human hunters and gatherers. (Also listed as 
Soc. & A. 257.) 

240. Methods in Ecology and Biogeochemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 21. or consent. 
Introduction to the theory and application of basic analytical tools used in ecology 
and biogeochemistry. Topics include sampling of terrestrial and aquatic organisms 
and their environment, and chemical analyses of biological materials. (Offered in 
Spring of odd years.) 

102 BIOLOGY 



242. Acid Precipitation on Aquatic Ecosystems. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or Biol. 
15. or equiv. Acid precipitation and its effects on freshwater ecosystems including 
all biological communities as well as overall effects on system functions and 
studies to assess the recovery from whole lake treatments. 

243. Plant Ecology. I. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 21, or consent. Environmental and 
ecological relationships of plants. 

246. Limnology. I. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 21, or consent. Physical, chemical, and 
biological characteristics of inland waters with an introduction to the principles 
of biological productivity. 

247. Aquacult ure. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 15, or consent. An introduction to the 
farming and husbandry of freshwater and marine organisms. (Overnight field 
trips are voluntary. J (Offered in Fall of odd years.) 

250. Aquatic Seed Plants. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2,4, or 21, or consent. Classification, 
ecology, and economic importance of aquatic seed plants. 

251. Principles of Evolution. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 15, 17, 19, or 21, or consent. 
Introduction to the study of evolution. 

252. Flora of West Virginia. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or consent. Consideration of 
the native plant life of the state. 

253. Structure of Vascular Plants. II. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 21, or PI. Sc. 52, or 
consent. Development and evolution of vegetative and reproductive structures of 
vascular plants. 

254. Plant Geography. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 15, or consent. Study of plant 
groupings and worldwide distribution of plants. 

255. Invertebrate Zoology. II. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 21. Advanced study of 
animals without backbones. 

257. Ichthyology. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 21, or consent. Internal and external 
structure of fishes, their systematic and ecological relationships, and their 
distribution in time and space. (Dissection kit required.) 

259. General Parasitology. II. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 21, or consent. Introduction 
to the biology of parasites. (Dissection kit required.) (Also listed as M. Bio. 224.) 

260. Plant Development. I. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 15, 17, 19, and 21, and organic chemistry or 
biochemistry, or consent. Experimental studies of plant growth and development. 

261. Comparative Anatomy. I.4hr. PR: Biol. 15, 17, 19, and 21, or consent. Afunctional 
and evolutionary study of vertebrate structure. (Dissection kit required.] 

262. Vertebrate Embryology. II. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 15, 17, 19, and 21, or consent. An 
experimental and descriptive analysis of vertebrate development. 

263. Vertebrate Microanatomy. II. 5 hr. PR: Biol. 15, 17, 19, and 21, or consent. 
Structural and functional approach to the study of tissues and organs of 
vertebrates. 

268. Physiology of the Endocrines. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 15, 17, 19 and 21 or consent. 
Regulation of the organs of internal secretions, and mechanisms of action of the 
hormones produced. 

269. Physiology of the Endocrines— Laboratory. I. 1 hr. PR or Cone: Biol 268. 
Experimental techniques used in study of the endocrine system. 

BIOLOGY 103 



270. Genera] Animal Physiology. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 15, 17, 19, and 21, or consent. 
In-depth, current treatment of physiological principles which operate at various 
levels of biological organization in animals of diverse taxonomic relationships. 
Understanding is developed from background lectures and student analysis in 
discussion sessions of research literature. 

271. Generai Anima] Physiology— Laboratory. I. 1 hr. PR or Cone: Biol. 270. After 
learning basic techniques, students are provided the opportunity to design, 
execute, and report on an independent research project in physiology. 

309. Topics and ProWems in Biology. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Consent. Topics and problems 
in contemporary biology, to be selected in consultation with instructor. 

311. Biology Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. Discussions and presentations of general interest to 
biologists. 

314. Mo]ecu]ar Ce]] Biology.ll. 3 hr. PR: Consent. An advanced course presenting 
contemporary methodologies and their application to the study of problems in 
cellular organization, molecular genetics, and developmental biology. Introduction 
to the research literature is stressed. 

315. Mo]ecu]ar Basis of Virology. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 19 or equiv., or consent. Lectures on 
bacterial, animal, and plant viruses; their structure, replication, and interaction 
with host cells. Discussion of the contributions virology has made to the 
understanding of molecular mechanisms in biology. 

320. Mo]ecu]ar Biology of the Gene. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 19 or consent. Comprehensive 
survey of basic principles, theories, and techniques of molecular biology, 
including structure/function of nucleic acids, DNA replication, transcription, 
translation, recombination, gene regulation, and function. 3 hr. lee. 

340. Ecosystem Dynamics. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 15, 17, 19, and 21 or equiv. Studies of 
modern approaches to ecosystem analysis. Emphasis will be on energy and 
material transfers. Approach will be holistic. 

345. Fisheries Science. II. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 257 or equiv., or consent. Population dynamics 
in relation to principles and techniques of fish management. (Offered in Spring of 
even years.) 

355. Advanced Plant Systematics 1. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 151 or equiv. Taxonomy of 
pteridophytes, gymnosperms, and monocotyledons. 

356. Advanced Plant Systematics 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 151 or equiv. Taxonomy of 
dicotyledons. 

362. Deve]opmenta] Bio]ogy. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 262 or equiv., organic chemistry or 
biochemistry, or consent. The molecular and cellular basis of differentiation and 
morphogenesis. (Offered in Fall of odd years.) 

364. Advanced Plant Physiology. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 169 or equiv., organic chemistry, 
general physics, and consent. Advanced studies of plant processes including 
recent advances in the field. I. Second Semester, odd-numbered years— Water 
relations and mineral nutrition and translocation. 11. First Semester, odd- 
numbered years— Plant growth and deve]opment. III. Second Semester, even- 
numbered years— Environmenta] physio]ogy. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 



104 BIOLOGY 



BIOMEDICAL SCIENCES— MARSHALL UNIVERSITY 

Gary O. Rankin, Coordinator of the Program 

Marshall University Medical Education Building, 1542 Spring Valley Dr., 

Huntington, WV 25704 
Degree Offered: Doctor of Philosophy 
Graduate Faculty: Members Aulick, Berk, Brown, Chertow, DeMesquita, Fenger, Fish, 

Gruetter, Johnson, Larsen, Lotspeich, McCumbee, Moore, Mufson, Rankin, Simmons, 

Szarek, Valentovic, Waldron, Wang, and Zill. Associate Members fix, Guyer, Moat, 

Primerano, and Reichenbecher. 

The Basic Science Departments of Marshall University School of Medicine 
offer a program of study conjointly with West Virginia University which 
leads to the degree of doctor of philosophy in the biomedical sciences. The 
work for this degree is done on the Marshall University campus in Huntington, 
West Virginia, with the degree awarded by West Virginia University. 

The primary aim of the program is to graduate doctoral students who are 
broadly based in the biomedical sciences, but who have definite interests and 
special training in anatomy, biochemistry, microbiology, pharmacology, or 
physiology. The program is designed to be flexible and research oriented in 
order to prepare a student for a career in one of the areas of academic or 
industrial biomedical science. 

Admission 

Students who wish to enroll in the doctor of philosophy program must 
apply for admission through the Marshall University Graduate School. They 
must meet the admission requirements of West Virginia University, the 
Marshall University Graduate School, and the Graduate Studies Committee 
of the Marshall University School of Medicine. Interested persons should 
contact the Biomedical Program Coordinator, Department of Pharmacology, 
Marshall University School of Medicine, Huntington, WV 25744-9310. 

Applicants to the doctor of philosophy in biomedical sciences program 
must possess a baccalaureate degree with undergraduate-level course work 
including: one year of general biology, one year of general physics, one year of 
introductory chemistry, and one year of organic chemistry, all with associated 
laboratories. Although not required for admission, undergraduate course 
work in calculus and physical chemistry is desirable as it may be prerequisite 
for advanced course work in certain areas of specialization. 

Applicants should submit to the Biomedical Program Coordinator three 
letters of recommendation and Graduate Record Examination scores (aptitude 
and advanced). In addition, transcripts and an admission application must be 
sent to the Marshall University Office of Admissions. Huntington, WV 25701. 

Applicants who already possess a master of science in biomedical 
sciences, or equivalent experience, are eligible to apply for full admission 
directly into the doctor of philosophy program in biomedical sciences. The 
requirements for full admission into the program are essentially the same as 
those required for award of the master of science in biomedical sciences with 
the exception that a requirement for a master's thesis may be waived. 

Applicants who do not possess a master of science in biomedical science, 
or equivalent experience, but who do meet all of the other requirements listed 
above can be provisionally accepted into the doctoral program. Provisional 
acceptance requires the student to successfully complete the master's course 
work prior to full acceptance. 

BIOMEDICAL SCIENCES— MARSHALL UNIVERSITY 105 



Program Requirements 

Every student must take courses in cellular and molecular biology, 
statistics, and seminar. In addition, each student, with approval of his/her 
advisory committee, must successfully complete at least one basic course 
(minimum four credit hours) in a minimum of three basic biomedical science 
departments. Elective courses, chosen with concurrence of the student's 
advisory committee, will provide the remainder of the required credit hours (a 
minimum of 18). 

Upon admission to the doctoral program, the student's doctoral advisory 
committee will be formed. The doctoral advisory committee consisting of six 
members will periodically review the student's progress as well as act as the 
examination committee. One member, the student's research adviser, will 
serve as the committee chairperson. One other member from the student's 
major department and two from other departments (one each from the 
student's two minor departments) will be recommended to the Marshall 
Graduate School dean for appointment to the committee by the student's 
research adviser. The two remaining members of the advisory committee will 
be appointed from faculty in appropriate departments at West Virginia 
University. 

The doctoral student's plan of study and research will be guided by the 
student's advisory committee. Course work will consist of seminar each 
semester and electives as directed by the student's advisory committee. After 
satisfactory completion of all general and specialty course work requirements, 
the student must successfully complete a preliminary qualifying examination 
to be admitted to candidacy for the doctor of philosophy degree. 

The preliminary qualifying examination, the most rigorous and compre- 
hensive examination that the student must take, will be given at the discretion 
of the student's advisory committee and must be completed by the end of the 
second year or 48 credit hours after full admission into the doctoral degree 
program. This examination will consist of both written and oral portions. 

After admission to candidacy and completion of course work and 
research, the student must prepare and successfully defend in a final 
examination a dissertation of his/her research. Satisfactory performance on 
the examination requires approval by five members of the student's advisory 
committee, which then recommends award of the doctor of philosophy degree. 

To receive a degree, all students in the biomedical sciences graduate 
program must have a scholastic grade-point average of not less than 3.0 (B) in 
all graduate work completed in the program. All grades of C or less are 
counted in computing averages, but no more than 6 credit hours of C, and no 
credit hours below C, may be applied toward degree requirements. Credit/No 
Credit hours may be included toward degree requirements, but they will not 
affect the quality grade-point computation. 

Residence 

The doctoral program will normally require two and a half to three years 
of full-time graduate work beyond the M.S. degree. This must include a 
minimum of two semesters of residence in full-time graduate study at 
Marshall University. In addition, all doctoral students in this program, 



106 BIOMEDICAL SCIENCES— MARSHALL UNIVERSITY 



regardless of receipt of financial assistance, must participate in the teaching 
and research programs as an integral part of their advanced training. 

Research 

Experimental neurobiology, neuroanatomy and neurophysiology of sen- 
sory/motor pathways, cellular neurophysiology, molecular biology, lipid 
metabolism, cancer biochemistry, estrogen receptors in human breast cancer, 
diabetes, molecular virology, molecular genetics, pathogenic microbiology, 
microbial physiology, immunoregulation, toxicology, biochemical pharma- 
cology, cardiovascular and pulmonary physiology and pharmacology, sleep 
physiology, endocrinology, temperature regulation and postburn metabolism, 
sensory transduction and ion channel regulation. 

Courses of Instruction 

For courses of instruction, see the Marshall University Graduate School 
Catalog; contact the Office of Admissions, Marshall University, Huntington, 
WV 25701. 

BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

Jay H. Coats, Director of Graduate Programs 

333 Business and Economics Building 

College of Business and Economics, West Virginia University, P.O. Box 6025, 
Morgantown, WV 26506-6025 

Telephone: (304) 293-5408 

Degree Offered: Master of Business Administration 

Graduate Faculty: Members Adams, Brewer, Coats, Cook, Cushing, Elkin, Fuller, Lane, 
Mann, Mansour, Mitchell, Ponzurick, Riley, Rose, Schaupp, Scherr, G. Smith, 
Speaker, and Wilson. Associate Members Abbott, Blakely, Blaskovics, Bone, Britt, 
Chow, Corey, Decker, Denning, Harpell, Lin, Logar, McClung, Martinec, Maust, 
Neidermeyer, Pariser, Pushkin, Rupert, Shastri, Shaw, Speaker, Sypolt, Titard, and 
Wolfe. 

The Master of Business Administration (M.B.A.) program is accredited 
by the American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business (AACSB) and is 
the only M.B.A. program in West Virginia so accredited. It is offered as a 
full-time, day-class program in Morgantown and as a part-time, weekend- 
class program in Morgantown, Shepherdstown, Wheeling, and Parkersburg. 
The standards of excellence that support accreditation by the AACSB are 
maintained at all instructional sites. 

The M.B.A. degree program recognizes the need for a manager of the 
future to be able to anticipate and recognize change and then manage 
resources advantageously in that environment. Thus, the curriculum empha- 
sizes a general, broad-based approach to graduate education in management 
which provides the student with the qualitative and quantitative skills 
necessary for a manager to succeed in such an environment. The program 
develops a managerial perspective that is primarily line as opposed to staff 
oriented and is relevant to those in both private and public organizations. 

The plan of study requires a total of 48 semester hours of graduate credit. 
The program is designed for individuals with varying educational and 
professional backgrounds. No prior course work in business administration 
is required as a condition of admission to the program. No master's thesis is 
required for completion of the degree. 

BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 107 



The M.B. A. degree program is completed in 13V2 months of full-time study 
on the Morgantown campus. A full-time student can enter the program only 
on July 1 of each year and graduates in mid-August of the following year. 
Students may enter the part-time M.B. A. program in any semester. A 
minimum of two to three years is required for the part-time student to 
complete the program. 

To gain admission into the Master of Business Administration (M.B. A.) 
program, an applicant must have a bachelor's degree in any field from an 
accredited institution and a grade-point average (GPA) of at least 3.0 either 
overall or in the last 60 hours of academic work completed. In addition, the 
applicant must have a minimum score on the Graduate Management Admission 
Test (GMAT) of at least 500. Applicants with a GPA below 3.0 (or GMAT 
scores below 500) must show correspondingly higher GMAT (or GPA) 
achievement. Depending on the number of qualified applicants, preference is 
given to those with GMAT scores above 540. Significant experience at 
increasing levels of responsibility and evidence of leadership potential (such 
as class officer) is given consideration. Such information should be summa- 
rized and attached to the application for admission. No action is taken on an 
application for admission until a GMAT score is submitted. Since GMAT is 
given only in January, March, June, and October, an applicant should take the 
test no later than March for July admission. 

In addition to the above requirements, international student applicants 
are required to submit a "Test of English As a Foreign Language" (TOEFL) 
score in the range of 570-600 or above. International students may be required 
to take up to six hours of prerequisite course work in English as a foreign 
language, such as EFL 53, 54, or 55. 

Applications for admission to the M.B. A. program and official transcripts 
of all prior academic work should be submitted to the WVU Office of 
Admissions and Records as early as possible. Applicants who have attended 
institutions other than WVU must request the registrar or records office of 
those institutions to forward a complete official transcript directly to the 
WVU Office of Admissions and Records. The deadline for receipt of applica- 
tions and transcripts in the college's Office of Graduate Programs is one 
month prior to the starting date requested. Admission to the program is 
competitive and subject to space being available. 

Financial Aid 

A limited number of graduate assistantships and tuition scholarships are 
available on a competitive basis. Major selection criteria include the applicant's 
grade-point average in prior academic work and GMAT score. Graduate 
assistants are paid a cash stipend during the regular semesters that is 
competitive in amount with that offered by other universities; graduate 
assistants are assigned to faculty members to assist in research, teaching, and 
other academic endeavors. Additional scholarships are available on a 
competitive basis to minority students. Additional information and application 
forms can be obtained from the director of graduate programs. 

Master of Business Administration (M.B.A.) 

The M.B. A. degree program requires 48 hours of graduate credit, 
including the following courses: 

Accounting 311 — Financial Accounting for Decision Making 

Accounting 321— Managerial Control 

Business Law 311— Legal and Regulatory Environment 

108 BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 



Economics 317 — Economic Decision Making 

Economics 318— Economic Policy 

Economics 319— Applied Business and Economics Statistics 

Finance 311— Managerial Finance 

Finance 321— Corporate Financial Administration 

Management 301— Organizational Behavior and Ethics 

Management 303— Introduction to Management Science 

Management 311— Management Information Systems 

Management 321— Operations Management/Applied Quantitative 
Analysis 

Management 325— Seminar in Organizational Processes 

Management 351— Policy and Strategy 

Marketing 311— Marketing Management 

Marketing 321— Marketing Strategy 

Seminar 

Seminar 

Selected graduate courses may be waived depending on an individual's 
undergraduate degree and the recency of the degree; however, other graduate 
courses must be substituted for waived courses. 

The M.B. A. requires that the candidate achieve a cumulative grade-point 
average of at least 3.0 on all work counting toward the graduate degree. A 
Regular Graduate Student whose cumulative grade-point average falls below 
2.75 will be placed on probation. If the average is not brought up to 2.75 by the 
end of the following semester, the student will be suspended from the 
program. A grade below C in any course taken while enrolled as a graduate 
student will result in suspension from the program. In addition, the student 
must maintain a 3.0 average in all work counting toward the graduate degree. 

Students in the part-time program are subject to the same requirements 
and restrictions as students enrolled in the full-time program. Classes in the 
part-time program are taught by the same graduate faculty members as teach 
in the full-time program. The M.B. A. program is offered in its entirety at 
off-campus locations in Morgantown, Parkersburg, Shepherdstown, and 
Wheeling. There is no requirement that an off-campus student travel to 
Morgantown; however, weekend classes in Morgantown increase the number 
of courses available to off-campus students in any semester. Off-campus 
classes normally meet on Friday evenings (7:00 to 10:00) and Saturdays (9:00 
a.m. to 2:00 p.m. or 9:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m.). A three semester-hour course 
normally meets for five weekends and a two semester-hour course for three 
weekends. Part-time classes in Morgantown meet on Saturdays (9:00 a.m. to 
4:30 p.m.) for six weekends (three semester-hour course) or four weekends 
(two semester-hour course). Part-time classes may have examinations sched- 
uled on weekday evenings. 

Complete information about the M.B. A. program may be obtained by 
contacting the Director of Graduate Programs. 

Accounting (Acctg.) 

210. Advanced Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 112. Accounting for partnerships, 
consolidations, foreign exchanges, and governmental (nonprofit) entities. 

211. Accounting Systems. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 5, Acctg. 112 or consent. Analysis of data- 
processing fundamentals and information systems analysis, design, and imple- 
mentation, including necessary computer hardware and software components 
with particular reference to accounting information systems and the controls 
necessary therein. 

BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 109 



213. Income Tax Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. Ill or 115 or 116 or consent. Tax laws and 
the investment and business decisions they affect. Taxes are presented in 
meaningful relationships in order to form a general pattern of knowledge that is 
easier understood. 

214. Income Tax Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 213 or consent. The study of federal 
income tax treatment of partnerships, corporations and estates, and the treatment 
of those property transfers subject to the Federal Gift Tax, together with an 
introduction of tax research and tax procedure. 

217. Auditing Theory. 3 hr. PR or Cone: Acctg. 210. Auditing fundamentals; objectives, 
ethics, statistical samplings, standards and procedures. Emphasis on FASB and 
SAS disclosures. 

230. Advanced Accounting Theory. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 112, 115, and consent. Critical 
analysis of accounting concepts and standards with emphasis on their origin, 
development, and significance. 

311. Financial Accounting for Decision Making. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Basic accounting 
assumptions and standards underlying financial statements, the significance of 
financial statement measurements, and the relevance of such data for planning 
and control. Emphasis on financial statement and cash-flow analysis. 

321. Managerial Control. 2 hr. PR: Acctg. 311 or consent. Managerial accounting 
concepts and techniques used for planning and control. Interpretation and use of 
internal accounting reports. The use of accounting information in decision 
making. Emphasis on development of an effective management control system. 

325. Accounting Information Systems. 2 hr. PR: Consent. The design and use of 
computerized accounting information systems to support the transaction pro- 
cessing, reporting and decision-making systems of most organizations, including 
the use and critical analysis of currently available accounting packages. 

330. Financial Accounting Theory and Practice. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 112. Comprehensive 
examination of financial accounting theory as established by the opinions, 
statements and interpretations of professional organizations with special emphasis 
on their application and problem solving. 

332. Governmental and Nonprofit Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 112. Fund accounting 
and control in governmental and nonprofit entities; identification and control of 
cost centers; cost analysis and cost centers; cost analysis and cost finding, and 
planning and control of operations and resources. 

333. Income Taxes and Business Decisions. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 213. Advanced federal 
income-tax problems with emphasis on tax planning for business decisions and 
tax research methodology. 

335. Computer Systems Auditing. 2 hr. PR: Acctg. 325. The analysis and design of 
control systems in a computerized accounting environment. Special emphasis on 
evaluating evidence to determine whether a computing system safeguards assets 
and maintains data integrity. 

338. ControIIership. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 304. Examination of the role of the controller in 
large entities in planning, measuring, evaluating, and controlling performance 
and in reporting to stockholders and governmental agencies. 

340. Reporting Practices and Problems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Evaluation of financial 
reporting practices and trends, including an examination of the reporting 
requirements of the SEC and other regulatory agencies. Practitioners will be used 
extensively for class discussion and presentations. 

345. Auditing and Professional Accounting Standards. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 217. Professional 
objectives, principles, and standards of auditing; audit reports and related 
communications; and case studies of audit sampling, professional ethics, legal 
liability and reporting. 

110 BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 



349. Seminar in Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. 

Business Law (B. Law) 

200. Special Topics. 1-4 hr. PR: B. Law 112 or consent. Special topics relevant to 
business law. (Maximum of 9 semester hours in any or all courses numbered 200 
offered by the College of Business and Economics may be applied toward 
bachelor's and master's degrees.] 

211. Personnel Relations and the Law. 3 hr. The legal principles guiding employer- 
employee relations, including agency law and the law regulating employee health, 
safety, compensation and benefits, job opportunity, and labor organizing. 

311. Legal and Regulatory Environment. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Examination of the legal 
environment in which business decisions are made and the response of the legal 
environment to change. Familiarization with the role of administrative agencies in 
the regulatory process. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. 

Economics (Econ.) 

317. Economic Decision Making. 2 hr. PR: Econ. 54 or consent. [Primarily for M.B.A. 
students.) Analysis of the firm as an optimizing unit operating in the market place. 
Examination of product demand, production and costs, pricing theory and 
practices, risk, and capital budgeting. 

318. Economic Policy. 2 hr. PR: Econ. 317 or consent. (Primarily for M.B.A. and M.P.A. 
students.] Microeconomic analysis of macroeconomic phenomena is considered 
with particular attention paid to the reaction by firms to price and interest rate 
effects of fiscal and monetary policy. 

319. Applied Business and Economics Statistics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Primary statistical 
methods used in business and economics research including hypothesis testing, 
estimation, linear regression, time series, and business forecasting. Statistical 
computer software is an integral part of the course. 

Finance (Fin.) 

212. Working Capital Management. 3 hr. PR: Fin. Ill or 311, Fin. 112, Econ. 125. 
Management of current assets and liabilities. Topics include management of cash, 
marketable securities, accounts receivable, inventories, trade accounts payable, 
and short-term bank borrowings. Decision models are used extensively. 

216. Risk Management. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 115 or consent; PR or Coreq.: Fin. 112. 
Transferable risks with which the entrepreneur must deal. Emphasis on the 
process by which decisions are made for handling these risks, including an 
examination of contributions and limitations of insurance system. 

217. Employee Benefit Plans. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 115 or consent. Use, design, and regulation 
of group life insurance, health care and pensions, including their federal tax 
consequences. Study of the available contracts in each area and financing 
alternatives and practices. 

218. Life insurance and Estate Planning. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 115. Principles of life and health 
insurance protection; applicationof life insurance to individual, family, business, 
and societal needs; study of trusts, wills, and estates, integrating of income into 
estate management. 

BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 111 



219. Property and Liability Insurance. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 115. Study of the use and 
production of property and liability insurance, including evaluation of insurance 
contracts and current insurance practices; legal and regulatory environment 
affecting use and production of insurance. 

220. Social Insurance. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 115 or consent. Our social and political efforts to 
provide economic security for the general public. An examination of the parallel 
developments of private insurance. 

250. Security Analysis and Portfolio Management. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 150 or consent; PR or 
Coreq.: Fin. 112. The systematic selection, assessment, and ranking of corporate 
securities in a portfolio framework through a synthesis of fundamental analysis, 
technical analysis, and random walk. 

252. Bank Management. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 251 or consent. An advanced course in 
commercial banking involving problems of management of the money position, 
loan and investment portfolio, and capital adequacy. The student simulates actual 
bank operation, conducts case studies, and analyzes bank performance. 

261. Rea] Estate Appraising. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 161. The appraisal problem, plan the 
approach, acquire, classify, analyze and interpret data into an estimate of value by 
the cost or replacement approach, income approach and market approach. 

262. Reai Estate Finance. 3 hr. PR: Fin. Ill or Fin. 311, Fin. 161, or consent. How 
financing, the tax system, and supply and demand interact to create values which, 
when coupled with investment decision, leads to choosing an investment strategy 
in real estate. 

263. Real Estate Investments/Land Development. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 161 or consent. 
Designed to investigate various types of real estate investments including 
apartments, office buildings, shopping centers, and residential land developments 
with emphasis on financial analysis, profitability analysis, and rates of return. 

311. Managerial Finance. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of the standard financial 
activities of the firm including: financial planning, structure of financing, and 
asset selection. Introduction to microcomputer problem solution. 

321. Corporate Financial Administration. 3 hr. PR: Fin. Ill, or Fin. 311, or consent. A 
study of theoretical concepts of corporate financial administration and the 
application of these concepts to real world case studies. 

331. Bank Management. 3 hr. PR or Coreq.: Fin. 311 or consent. (May not be taken for 
both undergraduate and graduate credit.) Management of bank funds. Principles 
of organization lending and investment. Policy relationships to bank productivity, 
organization, and profitability; preparation of financial reports; management of a 
simulated bank in a changing environment. (Same as Fin. 251 with the addition of 
a research paper.) 

349. Seminar in Finance. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 321. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. 

Industrial and Labor Relations (ILR) 

262. Collective Bargaining and Labor Relations. 3 hr. Examination of the theory and 
practice of collective bargaining. Topics include economics and historical environ- 
ment, labor law, unionization, contract negotiation, patterns in contract content, 
conflict resolution, grievance handling, and an introduction to arbitration. 

301. Industriai Relations Analytical Techniques 1. 3 hr. PR: Admission to the ILR 
graduate program and C.S. 5 or equiv. Introduction to the software and hardware 
appropriate for use in human resource applications, emphasizing efficient and 
effective use of previously developed software. Introduction to quantitative 
analytical decision-making techniques. 

112 BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 



302. Industrial Relations Analytical Techniques 2. 3 hr. PR: Admission o the ILR 
graduate program. Further development of the quantitative analytical techniques 
and of business information systems used in the human resources field. Emphasis 
on quantitative decision-making and information systems in an industrial 
relations setting. 

311. Management Information Systems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Examines computer 
technology, applications, information systems, and performance. Computer 
system planning, selection and implementation. Computer impact upon manage- 
ment, organization and society from a managerial viewpoint. 

310. Human Resources Economics. 3 hr. PR: Admission to the ILR graduate program. 
Consideration of the conditions of employment and unemployment at both macro 
and micro levels under varying degrees of competition, including the process of 
labor force preparation, labor market data and policy. 

312. Organizational Theory, Behavior, and Communication. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Emphasis 
on the communication processes involved in problem resolution including 
organizational decision making. Problems include organizational evaluation 
methods, training and leadership development, staffing, evaluation of proficiency 
of individuals, systems, and procedures. 

314. Industrial Relations Strategy and Policy. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Explores the 
integrative dimensions of organizational policies and their relationship to the 
personnel and industrial relations function. Business ethics in the industrial 
relations function. 

316. Labor Organization Industrial Relations. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Introduction to 
dynamics (adversary/cooperative) of industrial relations from a union viewpoint. 
Topics include conflict resolution, union government, alternatives to economic 
conflict bargaining, interaction, the state of industrial relations and work society. 

330. Compensation Issues. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Seminar in compensation designed to 
develop further understanding of compensation theory and practice. Topic areas 
will include labor supply, wage theory, legal constraints, motivation, equity 
theory, organizational development as well as compensation structure and 
administration. 

332. American Trade Unionism. 3 hr. PR: ILR 262 or 316 or consent. Examines the rise 
of American unionism and traces historical factors shaping its philosophy. Topics 
include economic conditions and union history, comparisons of AFL and CIO 
structures and the AFL-CIO as a government. 

333. Seminar: Quality of Work Life. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of current trends and 
approaches in "quality of work life improvement" with special attention to 
developments in participative management, job enrichment and gain sharing. 
Results of current research are featured. 

334. Work Group Dynamics and Leadership. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Small group or 
individual research on topics related to leadership and group dynamics in the 
work environment including training and other human relations programs. 

337. Practicum in Industrial Interviewing. 3 hr. PR: I.R. 312 and consent. Experiential 
learning of industrial interviewing techniques covering legal and technical 
aspects of employment interviewing and other types of interviewing. 

340. Arbitration Theory and Practice. 3 hr. PR: ILR 262 and consent. Study of the 
purpose of arbitration, trends, principles of contract construction, hearing 
procedure evidence, remedies, training and education of arbitrators, training of 
advocates, and decision writing. Students will arbitrate mock cases. 

342. Advanced Collective Bargaining. 3 hr. PR: ILR 262 orconsent. Development of the 
economic theory, empirical analysis and policy implications of the impact of 
collective bargaining on wages, employment, market structure, and prices. 

BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 113 



344. Benefits. 3 hr. Considers employee benefits from the perspective of the industrial 
relations specialist who is responsible for articulating and administering a 
corporate program. Includes study of all benefits covered by major federal 
legislation. 

345. Equal Employment Opportunity Problems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. A series of lectures 
by specialists in equal employment opportunity affairs. Lecturers will include 
attorneys, directors of state and national EEO agencies, and representatives of 
business and industry and the labor movement. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. 

Management (Manag.) 

201. Business Information Systems. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 101 and 105 or consent. Use of 
EDP for management control and decision making with emphasis on application 
in the functions of finance, marketing, personnel, accounting, and operations 
management. 3 hr. lee. 

206. Organizational Theory and Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 105 or consent. Influences 
of structure on the behavior and dynamics of the business organization. Attention 
on how to be an effective manager. 

211. Advanced Production Management. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 111. Integration of quantita- 
tive techniques and their application to production problems. Utilizes cases and 
projects. 

212. Management Science. I. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 105. The study and application of 
quantitative methods to business problems in which deterministic conditions 
prevail. 

216. Personnel Management. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 105. Fundamental principles and 
practices related to the procurement, development, maintenance and utilization of 
human resources. Focus on areas such as human resource planning, selection, 
training, performance appraising, compensation, safety and health, and labor 
relations. 

217. Personnel and Compensation. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 216 or consent. Designing and 
implementing total compensation systems in both private and public sectors. The 
emerging elements of total compensation systems are included providing insights 
into problems and opportunities for personnel. 

222. Management Science. II. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 212 or consent. The study and 
application of quantitative methods to business problems in which probabilistic 
conditions prevail. 

230. Entrepreneurship. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The role of the entrepreneur in business and 
society; includes an analysis of the individual entrepreneur, and investigates the 
nature and problems of establishing a new business enterprise. 

260. Practicum in Small Business. 3 hr. PR: Consent. A practical training ground in the 
identification and solution of small business problems. Through interaction with 
the business community, students are exposed to the opportunities and difficulties 
of small business entrepreneurship. 

301. Organizational Behavior and Ethics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Interpersonal relationships 
through which administration becomes effective. Emphasis on human factors, but 
influences of economic and technological factors also are considered. Focus on 
ethics and importance of harmony between individual needs and organization 
goals. 

303. Introduction to Management Science. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Study of management 
science models and techniques with applications in business decision making 
problems. Coverage includes mathematical programming models, decision theory, 
simulation, network models, and other current management science topics. 

114 BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 



311. Management Information Systems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Examines computer 
technology, applications, information systems, and performance. Computer 
system planning, selection and implementation. Computer impact upon manage- 
ment, organization, and society from a managerial viewpoint. 

321. Operations Management/Applied Quantitative Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
Review of concepts, techniques, and models encountered in manufacturing and 
service operations. Modeling approach and computer applications in operations 
management and management science are emphasized. 

325. Seminar in Organizational Processes. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Examination of the 
dynamics of the successful organization. Emphasis on the organization as an 
institution and the role of the manager in the organization. Implications of 
international competition will be addressed. 

349. Seminar in Management. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. In depth study of important 
management issues 

351. Policy and Strategy. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Capstone course. Integrates functional 
knowledge with strategy formulation and strategy implementation concepts. 
Cases of organizations varying in size, national affiliation, and profit orientation 
are analyzed with special emphasis on ethics and social responsibility. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. 

Marketing (Mrktg.) 

203. Sales Management. 3 hr. PR: Mrktg. 114 or consent. Concentrates on the 
managerial responsibilities of sales managers for directing, motivating, and 
controlling a sales force plus the techniques of selling including handling 
objections and closing. 

205. Consumer Behavior. 3 hr. PR: Mrktg. Ill or consent. The consumer decision 
process in a marketing framework. Emphasis on psychological and sociological 
concepts which influence the decision process. 

207. Business Logistics Management. 3 hr. PR: Mrktg. 115 or consent. Examination of 
transportation, warehousing, materials handling, containerization, inventory 
control, purchasing, and warehouse location. Significant use made of problem 
solving with analytical tools. 

210. Industrial Marketing. 3 hr. PR: Mrktg. Ill or consent. A study of marketing to 
three classes of customers: the industrial market, the institutional market, and 
governmental agencies. 

311. Marketing Management. 2 hr. Introduction to marketing management with 
specific emphasis on consumer behavior and market segmentation, product 
planning, promotion, distribution, and pricing. 

321. Marketing Strategy. 3 hr. PR: Mrktg. 311. Emphasis on formulating a marketing 
strategy and developing analytical and decision-making capabilities. Cases will 
be used to illustrate specific business situations. 

349. Seminar in Marketing. 3 hr. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. 



BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 115 



CHEMICAL ENGINEERING 

E. V. Cilento, Chairperson 

425 Engineering Sciences Building 

Degrees Offered: Master of Science in Chemical Engineering 

Chemical Engineering Areas of Emphasis available for: 

Master of Science in Engineering, Doctor of Philosophy 
Graduate Faculty: Members Bailie, Cilento, Dadyburjor, Kono, Kugler, Shaeiwitz, 
Stiller, Turton, Whiting, Yang, and Zondlo. 

The Department of Chemical Engineering, with 11 faculty members, 75 
undergraduates, and over 30 graduate students, has one of the oldest doctoral- 
granting programs in the University. From the initial doctoral degree in 1932, 
the graduate course program has been based on advanced chemical engineering 
fundamentals, while the research program has reflected a balance of funda- 
mental research areas and their application to relevant technological areas 
such as coal conversion. 

Chemical engineering faculty are presently involved in the following 
research areas: biochemical engineering, bioengineering, catalysis, fluid 
mechanics, heat transfer, mathematical modeling and simulation, reaction 
engineering, separation processes, solution chemistry, and thermodynamics. 
These fundamental areas are finding applications in biomass conversion 
technology, blood flow, coal gasification and liquefaction, in-situ combustion, 
and synthetic fuels. 

Faculty members possess a wide variety of industrial experience and are 
routinely in contact with their counterparts in industry. This contact with 
real engineering problems enables them to convey a practical experience to 
students while keeping in perspective many of the fundamental concepts 
involved in the graduate program. 

During the last ten years, the chemical engineering faculty have authored 
or co-authored seven books, published 240 journal articles, have been issued 
12 patents, made 205 presentations at professional meetings, and supervised 
the completion of 66 master's and 33 doctoral degrees. In addition, several 
faculty members have written textbooks and taught short courses throughout 
the United States. 

The department is authorized to admit students to the following degree 
programs: Master of Science in Chemical Engineering (M.S.Ch.E.), Master of 
Science in Engineering (M.S.E.), and College of Engineering interdisciplinary 
Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.). Students in these programs must comply with 
the rules and regulations as presented in the general requirements for 
graduate work in the College of Engineering and in the Department of 
Chemical Engineering. Students interested in pursuing work for a master's or 
doctoral degree in chemical engineering should contact the department for 
copies of the required guidelines. Students should refer to Part 2 of this 
catalog for a general description of the graduate programs in engineering. 

Master of Science in Chemical Engineering (M.S.Ch.E.) 
Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.) 

Admission Requirements. Admission to the M.S.Ch.E. program is re- 
stricted to those holding a baccalaureate degree in chemical engineering or its 
equivalent. The M.S.E. program is available to students holding baccalaureate 
degrees in other fields of engineering and the physical sciences who wish to 
pursue a broad interdisciplinary program relevant to the major graduate 
areas administered by the department. 

116 CHEMICAL ENGINEERING 



To be admitted as a regular graduate student, an applicant must have a 
B.S. degree and a sound record in previous college work with a minimum 
3.0/4.0 cumulative grade-point average. Applicants who cannot meet these conditions 
may be considered for admission in a conditional category (see Part 2 of this 
catalog). Students admitted with deficiencies in their undergraduate programs 
are required to take some chemical engineering courses as prerequisites for 
graduate courses. These requirements are stated as a condition for admission. 

M.S.Ch.E. candidates should expect to obtain their degree in about 18 
months. M.S.E. students typically require one to one-and-a-half years beyond 
completion of prerequisite courses. 

All M.S. degree candidates are required to perform research and will 
follow a planned program which conforms to either of the following outlines: 

1. A minimum of 30 semester credit hours, excluding seminar, not more 
than six of which are in research leading to an acceptable thesis. 

2. A minimum of 33 semester credit hours, excluding seminar, not more 
than three of which are in research leading to an acceptable problem report. 

The non-thesis M.S. degree option is not offered by the Department of 
Chemical Engineering. 

Courses. All students are required to take Ch.E. 301, 344, and 345, and all 
full-time students are required to take one credit of journal club/seminar 
(Ch.E. 400) for each semester enrolled. The research adviser, in conjunction 
with an advisory and examining committee (AEC) to be designated by each 
student, will be responsible for following departmental guidelines to determine 
the plan of study appropriate to the student's program. 

Research Proposal. A written research proposal and oral presentation of 
this proposal is required of all M.S. students. This oral defense is administered 
by the student's AEC and must be completed by the end of the second semester 
of the first year for M.S.Ch.E. candidates, and as soon as possible but not later 
than the end of the second semester of the second year for M.S.E. candidates. 

Final Examination. All students are required to pass a final oral 
examination, administered by their AEC, covering both the thesis or problem 
report (depending on the program selected) and related course material. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

A candidate for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in the Ph.D. program 
must comply with the rules and regulations as outlined in the general 
requirements for graduate work in engineering and the specific requirements 
stated in the departmental guidelines. Students who are interested in 
pursuing a Ph.D. degree in the Department of Chemical Engineering should 
contact the department for specific information about the interdisciplinary 
Ph.D. degree program. (See also Part 2 of this catalog.) A program with a 
major in chemical engineering, designed to meet the needs and objectives of 
each student, will be developed in consultation with the student's research 
adviser and advisory and examining committee (AEC). It should be emphasized 
that the Ph.D. degree is primarily a research degree and therefore the research 
work for a doctoral dissertation should show a high order of originality on the 
part of the student and must offer an original contribution to the field of 
engineering science. 

Admission Requirements. Admission to the Ph.D. program is open to 
students who qualify as regular graduate students (see Part 2 of this catalog) 
and who have obtained a B.S. or M.S. degree in science or engineering. 
Students admitted must have demonstrated an excellent academic record in 
previously completed college course work with a minimum cumulative grade- 

CHEMICAL ENGINEERING 117 



point average of 3.0/4.0. Three letters of recommendation are required, and 
GRE scores may be requested by the department. Students who enter the 
Ph.D. program should complete the requirements in two to four years. 

Course Requirements. All B.S. students entering the Ph.D. program are 
required to take Ch.E. 301, 344, and 345, while M.S. students entering the 
program must demonstrate equivalent courses taken for graduate credit in 
their previous work. In addition, all full-time students must take one credit of 
seminar/journal club (Ch.E. 400) each semester. For a student admitted 
directly after the B.S. degree, the Ph.D. program consists of a minimum of 36 
course credit hours, excluding research (Ch.E. 497) and seminar/journal club 
(Ch.E. 400). If the student has a M.S. in chemical engineering from WVU, the 
program consists of a minimum of 12 course credit hours (excluding Ch.E. 497 
and Ch.E. 400). If the student has a M.S. in chemical engineering from another 
institution, the program consists of a minimum of 18 course credit hours 
(excluding Ch.E. 497 and Ch.E. 400). Students must complete a minor, 
consisting of a minimum of nine semester hours of a coherent set of courses 
taken outside the department. These courses may be related to the major 
research area. Non-technical courses would be considered only under excep- 
tional circumstances. Courses at the 200-level may be acceptable. All courses 
must be approved by the AEC and the academic adviser. Students must 
complete graduate courses with an overall course work average of 3.0 or 
better (exclusive of research credits) and complete all Ch.E. courses with an 
overall grade-point average of 3.0 (exclusive of research credits). A minimum 
of 24 graduate credits in dissertation research is required. Also, two 
semesters of full-time attendance at West Virginia University, Morgantown 
campus, is required to complete the residency requirement. 

Qualifying Examination. All students must pass the Ph.D. qualifying 
examination given in their first summer at WVU. This examination is 
designed to assess the basic competency of students in the chemical 
engineering field to determine if they have sufficient knowledge to undertake 
independent research. 

Original Research Proposition. Within six months of passing the qualifying 
examination or of entering the Ph.D. program, whichever is later, the student 
must successfully defend an original research proposition in an oral examina- 
tion. The written proposition, developed by the student alone, remains the 
intellectual property of the student and must be on a topic unrelated to the 
student's own research work for the dissertation. 

Dissertation Research Proposal. A student must receive acceptance of a 
written dissertation research proposal and must also successfully defend this 
proposal to the student's AEC. This requirement must be completed within 
six months of passing the qualifying examination or of entering the Ph.D. 
program, whichever is later. The research work for the doctoral dissertation 
should show a high order of originality on the part of the student and must 
offer an original contribution to the field of engineering science. 

Candidacy. A student who has successfully completed all course work, 
passed the qualifying examination, and successfully defended the original 
research proposition and research proposal is defined as one who is a 
candidate for the Ph.D. degree. 

Final Examination. In order to complete the Ph.D. requirements, a student 
must pass a final oral examination on the results embodied in the dissertation. 
This examination is open to the public, and in order to evaluate critically the 
student's competency, may include testing on material in related fields, as 
deemed necessary by the AEC. In addition, since the Ph.D. degree is primarily 

118 CHEMICAL ENGINEERING 



a research degree that embodies the results of an original research proposal 
and represents a significant contribution to the scientific literature, the 
student must submit a manuscript on this research to the AEC. 

Chemical Engineering (Ch. E.) 

212. Biochemical Separations. 3 hr. PR: Ch.E. 112 or consent. Modeling and design of 
separation processes applicable to recovery of biological products. Topics include 
filtration, centrifugation, extraction, adsorption, chromatography, electrophoresis, 
membranes, crystallization, examples from industry. 3 hr. lee. 

224. Process Development. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 134, 144; Ch. E. Ill, 145, or consent. Coal 
conversion process systems from the modified unit operations-unit process 
concept. Thermodynamics and kinetics in evaluation of system requirements and 
performance. 3 hr. rec. 

258. Polymers and Polymer Processing. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 134, Ch. E. 110. Polymers and 
their handling. Properties of macromolecules as influenced by molecular weight, 
polymerization methods, plastics technology, polymer engineering, polymerization 
kinetics, polymer characterization, commercial production processes, injection 
molding processes, blow molding and composites. 3 hr. lee. 

265. lnterfacial Phenomena. 3 hr. PR: Ch.E. 145, Chem. 246 or consent. Processes 
occurring at fluid/fluid and fluid/solid interfaces. lnterfacial tension, contact 
angle, wetting, transport phenomena near interfaces, properties and stability of 
colloids, colloid transport phenomena, surfactants, micelles and emulsions. 3 hr. 
lee. 

272. Biochemical Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Ch.E. 172 or consent. Kinetics of enzymatic and 
microbial reactions, interactions between biochemical reactions and transport 
phenomena, analysis and design of bioreactors, enzyme technology, cell cultures, 
bioprocess engineering. 3 hr. lee. 

280. Chemicai Engineering Problems. 1-6 hr. For juniors, seniors, and graduate 
students. May be used to correct deficiencies preparatory to or following courses 
such asCh. E. 182 and 183, or for other students desiring to take only a portion of a 
course. 

301. Transport Phenomena. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Introduction to equations of change 
(heat, mass and momentum transfer) with a differential balance approach. Use in 
Newtonian flow, turbulent flow, mass and energy transfer, radiation, convection. 
Estimation of transport coefficients. 3 hr. rec. 

330. Process Dynamics and Control. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Dynamic response of processes 
and control instruments. Use of Laplace transforms and frequency response 
methods in analysis of control systems. Application of control systems in 
chemical reactors, distillation, and heat transfer operations. Introduction to 
nonlinear systems. 3 hr. rec. 

331. Mathematical Methods in Chemical Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18 and consent. 
Classification and solution of mathematical problems important in chemical 
engineering. Treatment and interpretation of engineering data. Analytical methods 
for ordinary and partial differential equations including orthogonal functions and 
integral transforms. Vector calculus. 

338. Advanced Numerical Methods. 3 hr. PR: Ch.E. 38 or consent. Methods for 
nonlinear algebraic equations, methods for initial and boundary value ordinary 
differential equations, methods for parabolic, hyperbolic, and elliptic partial 
differential equations, numerical stability and methods for stiff equations, curve 
fitting techniques, optimization techniques. 3 hr. lee. 

CHEMICAL ENGINEERING 119 



344. Thermodynamics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Logical development of thermodynamic 
principles. These are applied to selected topics including development and 
application of the phase rule, physical and chemical equilibria in complex 
systems, and nonideal solutions. Introduction to nonequilibrium thermodynamics. 
3 hr. rec. 

345. Chemical Reaction Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Homogeneous reactions, batch 
and flow reactors, ideal reactors, macro and micro mixing, nonideal flow reactors, 
heterogeneous reaction systems, catalytic and noncatalytic reactions, reactor 
stability analysis, reactor optimization. 3 hr. rec. 

351. Fluidization Engineering. PR: Consent. Fundamentals of fluidization, two-phase 
flow theory and powder characteristics, structure and property of the emulsion 
phase and bubbles, mass- and heat-transfer in fluidized beds with and without 
chemical reaction. 

352. Powder Technology. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Characterization of powders, structure of 
powders, powders in two phase flow, measurement techniques, static and 
dynamic behavior of powders, grinding and agglomeration, chemistry of powders. 
(3 hr. lee.) 

371. Advanced Separation Processes. 3 hr. PR: Ch. E. 301 or consent. Design and 
selection of separation processes including crystallization, leaching, extraction, 
distillation, absorption, filtration, membrane, and diffusional separation pro- 
cesses. Similarities between separation processes based on mode of operation are 
emphasized. 

391. Advanced Topics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of topics not covered in 
regularly scheduled courses. 

400. Chemical Engineering Seminar. 1 hr. Seminars on current research by visitors and 
graduate students. 

402. Advanced Fluid Dynamics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of flow of fluids and 
transport of momentum and mechanical energy. Differential equations of fluid 
flow; potential flow, flow in porous media, laminar boundary layer theory, and 
non-Newtonian fluids. 3 hr. rec. 

404. Advanced Heat Transfer. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Theory of transport of thermal energy 
in solids and fluids as well as radiative transfer. Steady and transient conduction; 
heat transfer to flowing fluids; evaporation; boiling and condensation; packed and 
fluid bed heat transfer. 3 hr. rec. 

406. Advanced Mass Transfer. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Theory of diffusion, interphase mass 
transfer theory, turbulent transport, simultaneous mass and heat transfer, mass 
transfer with chemical reaction, high mass transfer rates, multicomponent 
macroscopic balances. 3 hr. rec. 

432. Optimization of Chemical Engineering Systems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Optimization 
in engineering design, unconstrained optimization and differential calculus 
equality constraints optimization, search technique, maximum principles, geo- 
metric and dynamic programming, linear and nonlinear programming, calculus of 
variations. 3 hr. rec. 

444. Applied Statistical and Molecular Thermodynamics. 3 hr. PR: Ch.E. 344 and 
consent. The connection between macroscopic phenomena (thermodynamics) and 
microscopic phenomena (statistical and quantum mechanics). Thermodynamics 
modeling for process analysis. Equations of state, perturbation theories, mixing 
rules, computer simulation, group contribution models, physical property predic- 
tion. 

120 CHEMICAL ENGINEERING 



446. Catalysis. 3 hr. PR: Ch. E. 345 or consent. Physical and chemical properties of 
catalytic solids, nature and theories of absorption, thermodynamics of catalysis, 
theories of mass and energy transport, theoretical and experimental reaction 
rates, reactor design and optimization. 3 hr. rec. 

447. Non-Catalytic Solid-Fluid Reactions. 3 hr. PR: Ch. E. 345 or consent. Reaction 
models, pseudo-steady approximation, effectiveness factor, transport and chemical 
reaction properties, geometric, thermal and transitional instabilities, simultaneous 
multiple reactions, selectivities in fixed, moving and fluidized bed reactor design. 
3 hr. rec. 

480. Advanced Independent Study. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Designed to increase the depth 
of study in a specialized area of chemical engineering. 

491. Speciai Topics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of advanced topics not covered in 
regularly-scheduled courses. Recent topics have included: Biochemical Engi- 
neering, Fluidization, Mathematical Methods, Numerical Methods, PowderTech- 
nology, and Surfaces and Colloids. 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. 

CHEMISTRY 

Anthony Winston, Chairperson of the Department 
222 Clark Hall or 471 Chemistry Research Laboratory 
Degrees Offered: Master of Science 

Doctor of Philosophy 
Graduate Faculty: Members Dalai, Finklea, Fodor, Gibson, Jaffe, Jagodzinski, Lovett, 

MacDowell, Magriotis, Nakon, Penn, Petersen, Showalter, Smart, Stolzenberg, 

Wang, and Winston. Associate members Moore and Muth. 

The Department of Chemistry offers graduate studies leading to the 
degrees of Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy with research 
concentration in the areas of analytical, inorganic, organic, physical, and 
theoretical chemistry. The Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy 
degrees require completion of a research project that represents the principal 
components of the graduate program. 

Applicants for graduate studies in chemistry must have a bachelor's 
degree as a minimum requirement. Applicants must have a major or 
concentration in chemistry and an appropriate background in physics and 
mathematics. All entering graduate students in chemistry are required to take 
departmental guidance examinations in the major areas of chemistry. These 
examinations, on the undergraduate level, are administered before registration 
and serve to guide the faculty in recommending a course program for the 
beginning graduate student. Deficiencies revealed on the departmental 
guidance examinations need to be corrected in a manner prescribed by the 
faculty. All graduate students pursuing M.S. and Ph.D. degrees in chemistry 
are required to teach in the instructional laboratories for a minimum of two 
semesters. 

The WVU general requirements for the Master of Science degree are 
outlined in Part 5 of this catalog. Graduate students in the M.S. program in 
chemistry are required to submit a research thesis. They may apply up to six 
hours of research credit toward the 30-hour requirement. The remaining 24 
hours of credit must be earned in the basic graduate courses that reflect a 
diversified exposure to chemistry; no more than nine hours of 200-level 
chemistry courses may be included; no more than ten hours may be elected 
outside the department; and course work taken at the 300 to 400-level must 
include at least three, three credit-hour courses distributed in two of the three 

CHEMISTRY 121 



areas of chemistry outside the student's major area of research. A final oral 
examination is administered after completion and submission of the thesis. 

The program for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy reflects a flexible, 
research-oriented approach geared to develop the interests, capability, and 
potential of students. A program of courses is recommended to suit individual 
needs based on background and ability. These courses are classified as basic 
graduate courses, which present the essentials of a given discipline on an 
advanced level, and specialized graduate courses that take one to the frontiers 
in a specific area of research. The course offerings are designed to provide 
guidelines from which students can launch their independent studies in 
preparation for candidacy examinations. Students are required to enroll in 
the departmental seminar program and are expected to attend special lectures 
and seminars offered by visiting scientists. 

Graduate students in the Ph.D. program are required to complete 
satisfactorily a minimum of three courses (three credits each) at the 300-400- 
course level, offered by the Department of Chemistry and distributed in two 
areas outside their major area of research. In addition, each major area in 
chemistry requires students in that area to enroll in basic graduate courses 
presenting the essentials of that discipline on an advanced level. 

Candidacy examinations contain written and oral portions. The written 
examinations are of the cumulative type, and are offered eight times a year. 
The oral examination is based on a proposition for a research problem not 
intimately related to the student's own project, or any particular research 
project being actively pursued at WVU. This proposition is presented in 
writing to the student's research committee and defended before that group 
and any other interested faculty members. 

Each candidate for the Ph.D. must satisfy a departmental language 
requirement in a language approved by the student's research committee. 

Research, which is the major theme of graduate studies, may be initiated 
as early as the student and faculty feel it is appropriate. Normally, a student 
will begin research no later than the second semester of residence. Upon 
successful completion of an original piece of research, the candidate will 
present results in a Ph.D. dissertation and at the appropriate time defend the 
work in a final oral examination. 

Chemistry (Chem.) 

Note: A charge is made for breakage and supplies in laboratory courses and for failure to 
check out of the laboratory. 

201. Chemical Literature. I. 1 hr. PR: Chem. 134 and Chem. 141 or 246. Study of 
techniques of locating, utilizing, and compiling information needed by the 
research worker in chemistry. 1 hr. lee. 

202. Selected Topics. I, II. 1-3 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Written consent, 
with at least a 2.0 grade-point average in chemistry courses. Individual instruction 
under supervision of an instructor. 

210. Instrumental Analysis. II. 2 hr. PR: Chem. 115 and physical chemistry. Lectures 
and demonstrations. Basic electronics, electrochemistry, spectroscopy, mass 
spectrometry and gas chromatography. 2 hr. lee, 1 hr. demonstration. 

211. Intermediate Analytical Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 115 and physical chemistry. 
Principles of analytical procedures and separations at an intermediate level. 3 hr. 
lee. 

122 CHEMISTRY 



212. Environmental Chemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 115, 134, and physical chemistry. 
Study of the nature, reactions, transport, and fates of chemical species in the 
environment. 

213. Instrumental Analysis Laboratory. I. 1 hr. PR: Chem. 210. Experiments using 
modern chemical instrumentation. 3 hr. lab. 

214. Computer Interfacing Laboratory. I. 1 hr. PR: Chem. 210; Cone: Chem. 213. 
Computer interfacing of chemical instruments. 

222. Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds. I. 3 hr. PR: Physical chemistry. Correlation of 
reactions and properties of elements and compounds based on modern theories of 
chemical bonding and structure. Acid-base theory, non-aqueous solvents, ligand 
field theory, and stereochemistry. 3 hr. lee. 

235. Methods of Structure Determination. I. 4 hr. PR: Chem. 134 and 136. Use of 
chemical methods and uv, ir, nmr, esr, Raman and mass spectroscopy to elucidate 
structures of organic compounds. For students in chemistry and related fields who 
may need these methods in research and applied science. 2 hr. lee, two 3-hr. lab. 

237. Polymer Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 134 and physical chemistry. Methods, 
mechanisms, and underlying theory of polymerization. Structure and stereochem- 
istry of polymers in relation to chemical, physical, and mechanical properties. 3 
hr. lee. 

239. Organic Syntheses. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 134, 136. Modern synthetic methods of 
organic chemistry. One 1-hr. lee, two 3-hr. lab. 

241. Crystallography. II. 3 hr. PR orConc: Physical chemistry orconsent. Applications 
of X-ray diffraction of crystals to the study of crystal and molecular structure. 
Includes theories of diffraction and crystallographic methods of analysis. 3 hr. lee. 
(Not offered in 1990-91.} 

243. Introduction to Radiochemistry and Radiation Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR or Cone: 
Physical chemistry. Fundamentals of radiochemistry and the use of tracer 
techniques. An introduction to radiation chemistry and how ionizing radiation 
interacts with matter. 2 hr. lee, 3 hr. lab. {Not offered in 1990-91.) 

244. Colloid and Surface Chemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Physical chemistry. Selected topics in 
the properties and physical chemistry of systems involving macromolecules, 
lyophobic colloids, and surfaces. 3 hr. lee (Not offered in 1990-91.} 

246. Physical Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 134, Math. 16, and Phys. 12. A first course in 
physical chemistry. Topics include a study of thermodynamics and chemical 
equilibria. 3 hr. lee (Students may not receive credit for Chem. 246 and for Chem. 
141.) 

247. Physical Chemistry Laboratory. II. 1 hr. PR: Chem. 18 or 115 and Chem. 246. 
Experimentation illustrating the principles of physical chemistry and offering 
experience with chemical instrumentation. One 3-hr. lab. 

248. Physical Chemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 246 and Math. 17. Continuation of Chem. 
246. Chemical dynamics and the structure of matter. 3 hr. lee (Students may not 
receive credit for Chem. 248 and for Chem. 141.) 

249. Physical Chemistry Laboratory. I. 2 hr. PR: Chem. 246, 247, 248. Continuation of 
Chem. 247. Two 3-hr. lab. 

250. Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 248. Introduction to 
the quantum theory of chemical bonding. Atomic structure, theoretical spectro- 
scopy, predictions of molecular structures and bond properties. 3 hr. lee 

CHEMISTRY 123 



315. Chemical Separations. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 115, 133, and physical chemistry. Modern 
methods of chromatography from a theoretical and practical standpoint. General 
principles of separation stressing the practical implementation of these principles 
with particular emphasis on high performance liquid chromatography and gas 
chromatography. 3 hr. lee. [Offered Spring 1990 and every third semester.) 

331. Advanced Organic Chemistry 1. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 134. Structural concepts, 
bonding, tautomerism, static and dynamic stereochemistry, mechanistic classifi- 
cations of reagents, and reactions including some applications. 3 hr. lee. 

332. Advaced Organic Chemistry 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 331. Continuation of Chem. 331 
with emphasis upon synthetic methods and reaction mechanisms. 3 hr. lee. 

341. Chemical Thermodynamics. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 248. Principles of classical and 
statistical thermodynamics and their application to chemical problems. 3 hr. lee. 

411, 412. Seminar in Analytical Chemistry. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. Current literature and 
research. 

413. Electrochemistry and Instrumentation. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 210. Electronic instru- 
mentation applied to study of mass transfer kinetics of electrode reactions, 
voltammetry, and high-frequency methods. 3 hr. lee. (Offered Spring 1991.) 

414. Spectroscopic Methods. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 213. Problems in design of instruments 
for each of the various spectral regions. 3 hr. lee. [Offered Fall 1990.) 

417, 418. Advanced Topics in Analytical Chemistry. I, II. 1-3 hr. per sem. Recent 
advances and topics of current interest. 

421, 422. Seminar in Inorganic Chemistry. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. Current literature and 
research. 

423. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 222. Bonding theories, 
stereochemistry, nonaqueous solvent systems, physical methods and current 
topics. 3 hr. lee. 

424. Coordination Chemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 222. Ligand field theory, spectral 
interpretations, stability considerations, synthetic methods, unusual oxidation 
states, organometallic compounds, other topics of current interest. 3 hr. lee. 
(Offered Spring 1991.) 

425. Inorganic Reactions and Mechanisms. I. 2 hr. PR: Chem. 222 and 443. Substitution, 
isomerization, racemization, and oxidation-reduction reactions. 2 hr. lee. (Offered 
Fall 1990.) Register for Chem. 427—1 hr. 

427, 428. Advanced Topics in Inorganic Chemistry. I, II. 1-3 hr. per sem. Recent 
advances and topics of current interest. 

431, 432. Seminar in Organic Chemistry. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. Current literature and 
research. 

433. Physical Organic Chemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 331. Theoretical considerations of 
organic molecules, kinetics and other methods used in the study of organic 
structure and reaction mechanisms, linear free energy relationship and other 
related topics. 3 hr. lee. 

436. Heterocyclic Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 331. Major heterocyclic systems and 
discussion of selected natural products containing heterocycles. 3 hr. lee. (Offered 
on demand.) 

124 CHEMISTRY 



437, 438. Advanced Topics in Organic Chemistry. I, II. 1-3 hr. per sem. Recent 
advances and topics of current interest. 

441, 442. Seminar in Physical Chemistry. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. Current literature and 
research. 

443. Chemical Kinetics. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 248. Theories and applications of kinetics in 
gaseous state and in solution. 3 hr. lee. 

444. Statistical Mechanics. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 446. Theory and application of 
statistical mechanics to chemical systems. 3 hr. lee. {Offered on demand.] 

445. Theoretical Chemistry 1. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Differential equations. Theoretical 
background for quantum mechanics. 3 hr. lee. 

446. Theoretical Chemistry 2. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 445. Theories and applications of 
quantum mechanics in chemistry. 3 hr. lee. (Offered on demand.} 

447. MoiecuJar Spectroscopy and Structure. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 250. Advanced 
applications of spectral methods to a study of molecular structure. 3 hr. lee. 

448. 449. Advanced Topics in Physical Chemistry. I, II. 1-3 hr. per sem. Recent 
advances and topics of current interest. [Offered on demand.) 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects 
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent 
or through specially scheduled lectures. 

492. Research Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Graduate student in chemistry. Research 
seminars by visiting lecturers. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not 
seeking course work credit but who wish to meet residence requirements, use the 
University's facilities, and participate in academic and cultural programs. 

CIVIL ENGINEERING 

Sam A. Kiger, Chairperson 

623 Engineering Sciences Building 

Degree Offered: Master of Science in Civil Engineering 

Civil Engineering Area of Emphasis available for 

Master of Science in Engineering, Doctor of Philosophy 
Graduate Faculty: Members Bowders, Chen, Davalos, Dean, Eck, Eli, GangaRao, 

Gidley, Gray, Head, Hota, Jenkins, Kiger, Luttrell, Moulton, Neumann, Sack, 

Siriwardane, and Spyrakos. 

The Department of Civil Engineering offers the Master of Science in Civil 
Engineering in conjunction with the College of Engineering. The Master of 
Science in Engineering and the Doctor of Philosophy degrees are available 
with emphases in civil engineering. 

The Department of Civil Engineering has a full-time faculty of 21, who are 
active in teaching, research, and service. There are four major areas of interest 
of the faculty and graduate studies: 

1. Environmental engineering and hydrotechnology, which include air 
pollution, occupational health, solid-hazardous waste management, water 
supply and pollution, groundwater hydraulics, and hydrology. 

2. Geotechnical and materials engineering, which covers soil mechanics, 
foundations engineering, soil-structure interaction, groundwater and seepage, 

CIVIL ENGINEERING 125 



and earthwork design, as well as construction materials and waste product 
utilization. 

3. Transportation engineering, which includes transportation systems 
principles, design, and planning. 

4. Structural engineering, which involves work and study in advanced 
structural analysis, bridge engineering, and building design. 

5. Through its Transportation System Rehabilitation and Maintenance 
Institute, the department also offers areas of emphais in materials, diagnositcs 
and nondestructive testing, composite materials, and structure rehabilitation. 

With few exceptions, the members of the faculty are registered professional 
engineers in one or more states and are involved in state, regional, and 
national professional organizations, serving on numerous technical commit- 
tees. They are successful researchers and have published extensively in 
various technical journals. The civil engineering faculty is concerned with the 
development of a professional engineer, able to assume the roles of a problem 
solver, decision maker, and technical leader, and with the educational 
background to undergird the continuing development required during an 
engineer's professional career. 

Each graduate student can tailor a program of study to satisfy the 
student's own special interest. Opportunities abound within the master's and 
doctoral tracks for a research experience which provides a chance for a 
student to tackle an engineering problem individually, with guidance from a 
faculty adviser. The graduate program in civil engineering has been established 
with the philosophy of developing in the student the ability to use today's 
contemporary methods of engineering analysis and design so that they can 
solve tomorrow's engineering problems. 

Master of Science in Civil Engineering (M.S.C.E.) 
Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.) 

Students must comply with rules and regulations as outlined in the 
general requirements for graduate work. Each candidate will, with the 
approval and at the discretion of the graduate committee, follow a planned 
program which must conform to one of the following outlines: 

1. A minimum of 30 semester credit hours, not more than six of which are 
in research leading to an acceptable thesis. 

2. A minimum of 33 semester credit hours, not more than three of which 
are in research leading to an acceptable problem report. 

3. A minimum of 36 semester credit hours, with no thesis or problem 
report required. 

Courses: No rigid curricula are prescribed for the degrees of Master of 
Science in Civil Engineering and Master of Science in Engineering. Graduate- 
level work in mathematics, mechanics, or other appropriate areas of science is 
customary; however, at least 15 semester hours of credit should normally be 
selected from graduate civil engineering courses. 

Thesis or Problem Report. A thesis or problem is normally required of all 
candidates. While required credit in research (C.E. 497) is devoted to the 
thesis or report preparation, the thesis or problem report is not automatically 
approved after the required number of semester hours of research work have 
been completed. The thesis or problem report must conform with the general 
WVU requirements for graduate study and with any additional requirements 
established by the Department of Civil Engineering. 

Final Examination. A candidate shall be required to pass an examination 
which may be written, oral, or both, to be administered by the student's 

126 CIVIL ENGINEERING 



Approval for the M.S.C.E. degree is restricted to those holding a 
baccalaureate degree in civil engineering. 

Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.) 

The Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.) program is available to 
students approved for the graduate program who possess a baccalaureate 
degree in a technical area other than civil engineering. Students entering this 
graduate program must complete appropriate undergraduate work as specified 
by departmental regulations. This degree program is administered by the 
College of Engineering; the program may emphasize civil engineering. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

The Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) degree is administered through the 
College of Engineering Interdisciplinary Program; it may have civil engineering 
as an option. A candidate for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy must comply 
with the rules and regulations outlined in the general requirements. The 
research work for the doctoral dissertation must show a high degree of 
originality on the part of the student and must constitute an original 
contribution to the art and science of civil engineering. 

Civil Engineering (C.E.) 

201. Principles of Boundary Surveying. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 101 or consent. A study of the 
retracement requirements for metes and bounds survey systems. The study will 
include interpretation and writing of the property descriptions, legal principles 
related to boundary establishment, and analytical approaches to boundary 
location. 3 hr. rec. 

208. Control Surveying. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 101. A study of the measurement and 
computation techniques used to locate positions on the surface of the earth. 2 hr. 
rec, 3 hr. lab. 

212. Concrete and Aggregates. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 110 or consent. Considerations and 
methods for the design of concrete mixes. Properties of portland cement and 
aggregates and their influence on the design and performance of concrete 
mixtures. Testing of concrete and aggregate and the significance of these tests. 2 
hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

213. Construction Methods. 3 hr. PR: Junior or senior standing in civil engineering. 
Study of construction methods, equipment, and administration with particular 
emphasis on the influence of new developments in technology. 3 hr. rec. 

220. Computational Fluid Mechanics. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 120, E. 2 or consent. Use of the 
computer in elementary hydraulics, open channel flow, potential flow, and 
boundary layer flow, numerical techniques for solution of algebraic equations, 
ordinary differential equations, and partial differential equations. 3 hr. rec. 

231. Highway Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 132, 181. Highway administration, economics 
and finance; planning and design; subgrade soils and drainage; construction and 
maintenance. Design of a highway. Center-line and grade-line projections, 
earthwork and cost estimate. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

233. Urban Transportation Planning and Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 132 or consent. 
Principles of planning and physical design of transportation systems for different 
parts of the urban area. Land use, social, economic, and environmental compatibil- 
ities are emphasized. Evaluation and impact assessment. 

235. Railway Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 101. Development and importance of the 
railroad industry. Location, construction, operation, and maintenance. 3 hr. rec. 

CIVIL ENGINEERING 127 



240. Applied Hydrology. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The hydrologic cycle with emphasis on 
precipitation and runoff as related to design of hydraulic structures, soil and 
water conservation, and flood control. 3 hr. rec. 

245. Properties of Air Pollutants. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Physical, chemical, and biological 
behavioral properties of dusts, droplets, and gases in the atmosphere. Air 
pollutant sampling and analysis. Planning and operating air pollution surveys. 2 
hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

251. Public Health Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Engineering aspects involved in 
control of the environment for protection of health and promotion of comfort of 
humans. Communicable disease control, milk and food sanitation, air pollution, 
refuse disposal, industrial hygiene, and radiological health hazards. 3 hr. rec. 

252. Water Resources Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 146. Application of hydrologic and 
hydraulic principles in the design and analysis of water resources systems. Topics 
include hydraulic structures, economics and water law irrigation, hydroelectric 
power, navigation, flood-drainage litigation, and water-resources planning. 3 hr. 
rec. 

260. Structural Analysis 2. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 160. Fundamental theory of statically 
indeterminate structures. Analysis of indeterminate beams, frames and trusses 
by stiffness and flexibility methods; computer-aided structural analysis by 
standard computer codes; study of influence lines for beams, frames, and trusses. 
3 hr. rec. 

270. Reinforced Concrete Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 110, 160; PR or Cone: C.E. 260. Behavior 
and design of reinforced concrete members. Material properties; design methods 
and safety considerations; flexure; shear; bond and anchorage; combined flexure 
and axial load; footings; introduction to torsion, slender columns, and prestressed 
concrete. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

271. Steel Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 110, 160; PR or Cone: C.E. 260. Design of steel bridge 
and building systems with emphasis on connections, beams, columns, plastic 
design, and cost estimates. 3 hr. rec. 

274. Timber Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 110, 160; PR or Cone: C.E. 260. Fundamentals of 
modern timber design and analysis. Topics include wood properties, design of 
beams, columns, trusses and pole structures using dimension lumber, glue- 
laminated products, and plywood. 3 hr. rec. 

281. Foundations Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 181. The practice of geotechnical 
engineering, subsurface explorations, geotechnical analysis and design of shallow 
and deep foundations, retaining structures, stability of earth slopes, soil and site 
improvement. 3 hr. rec. 

283. Earthwork Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 181. Use of soil mechanics principles in the 
analysis, design, and construction of earth structures. Principles of compaction 
and compaction control; an introduction to slope stability analysis and landslides, 
earth reinforcement systems, and ground improvement techniques. 3 hr. rec. 

290. Civil Engineering Problems. 1-6 hr. PR: Junior or senior standing. Special topics in 
various aspects of civil engineering analysis, design, and construction. 

291. Comprehensive Project for Civil Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing in civil 
engineering. Application of civil engineering principles, through group studies, to 
develop a solution for a comprehensive engineering problem. Consideration given 
to a problem involving all aspects of civil engineering. 1 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

293. Basic Finite Element Methods. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing or consent. Simplified 
treatment of theoretical basis of finite element method, background theory, 
formulation and applications: stress analysis in axial columns, one-dimensional 
heat and fluid flow, consolidation, beam-column analysis, mass transport, and 
overland flow. 

128 CIVIL ENGINEERING 



296. Civil Engineering Studies. 1-3 hr. (Only 3 hr. credit may be applied toward the 
B.S.C.E. degree.} PR: Consent. Supervised internships and field experience in civil 
engineering analysis, design, and construction. 

307. Photogrammetry. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 101. Camera calibration, stereoscopy, parallax, 
geometry of vertical and oblique photographs, theory and techniques of orientation, 
stereoscopic plotting instruments and analytical methods. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

311. Pavement Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 281 orconsent. Effects of traffic, soil, environment, 
and loads on the design and behavior of pavement systems. Design of pavement 
systems. Consideration of drainage and climate. Pavement performance and 
performance surveys. 3 hr. rec. 

320. Groundwater Dynamics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Introduction to groundwater, formula- 
tion of equations for saturated and unsaturated flow, analytical solutions for 
steady and transient cases, transport of pollutants and numerical techniques. 3 hr. 
rec. 

321. Environmental Fluid Mechanics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Equations of motion including 
buoyancy and Coriolis force, mechanics of jets and plumes, diffusion, dispersion 
and mixing in rivers, lakes, reservoirs, and estuaries. 3 hr. rec. 

332. Airport Planning and Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 132 or consent. Financing, air travel 
demand modeling, aircraft trends, traffic control, site selection, ground access, 
noise control, geometric design, pavement design, terminal facilities. 3 hr. rec. 

333. Geometric Design of Highways. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The theory and practice of 
geometric design of modern highways. Horizontal and vertical alignment, cross- 
slope, design speed, sight distances, interchanges, and intersections. Critical 
analysis of design specifications. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

334. Introduction to Traffic Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 132 or consent. The purpose, 
scope, and methods of traffic engineering. Emphasis on the three basic elements of 
each element and interactions between the elements. Laboratory devoted to 
conducting simple traffic studies, solving practical problems, and designing 
traffic facilities. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

336. Highway Planning. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Theory and practice of highway investment 
decision-making with emphasis on quantitative techniques of traffic assignment 
and travel demand forecasting, system evaluation, establishing priorities and 
programming. Both rural and urban highway systems are considered. 3 hr. rec. 

337. Public Transportation Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Design of rail and highway 
modes for urban and rural areas. Consideration of vehicle technology, facility and 
route design, conventional and paratransit services, and related marketing, 
finance and coordination issues. 3 hr. rec. 

338. Highway Safety Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 231 or consent. Relationship between 
human, vehicular, and roadway factors which impact safety; functional require- 
ments of highway safety features; legal aspects; accident analysis; evaluation of 
highway safety projects. 3 hr. rec. 

339. Traffic Engineering Operations. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 334. Theory and practice of 
application of traffic engineering regulations; traffic control concepts for urban 
street systems and freeways; freeway surveillance and incident management; 
driver information systems; traffic control system technology and management. 3 
hr. rec. 

349. Solid Waste Disposal. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Patterns and problems of solid waste 
storage, transport, and disposal. Examinations of various engineering alternatives 
with appropriate consideration for air and water pollution control and land 
reclamation. Analytical approaches to recovery and reuse of materials. 2 hr. rec, 3 
hr. lab. 

CIVIL ENGINEERING 129 



350. Sanitary Chemistry and Biology. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 147 or consent. Study of physical 
and chemical properties of water. Theory and methods of chemical analysis of 
water, sewage, and industrial wastes. Biological aspects of stream pollution 
problems. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

353. Hazardous Waste Control Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Definition of hazards; 
unit processes for hazardous waste treatment; secure land disposal of hazardous 
wastes; cleanup of hazardous material spills and abandoned waste dumps; and 
related topics. 3 hr. rec. 

356. Principles of Biological Waste Treatment. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 350 or consent. Examination 
of biological treatment systems related to microbiology and function. Models used 
to describe system behavior and kinetics are developed. Laboratory and field 
experiments are performed to understand the relation between operation and 
design. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

361. Statically Indeterminate Structures. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 260 or consent. Force and 
displacement methods of analysis; energy principles and their application to 
trusses, frames, and grids; effects of axial forces; influence lines for frames, 
arches, and trusses; secondary stress analysis. 3 hr. rec. 

363. Introduction to Structural Dynamics. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 361 or 460. General theory for 
dynamic response of systems having one or several degrees of freedom. Emphasis 
on the application of dynamic response theory to structural design. 3 hr. rec. 

373. Prestressed Concrete. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 260, 270 or consent. Behavior and design of 
prestressed concrete members. Materials, bending, shear, torsion, methods of 
prestressing, prestress losses, deflections, compression members, composite 
members, indeterminate structures. 3 hr. rec. 

380. Soil Properties and Behavior. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 281 or consent. Soil mineralogy and the 
physico-chemical properties of soils and their application to an understanding of 
permeability, consolidation, shear strength, and compaction. Prediction of engi- 
neering behavior of soils in light of physico-chemical concepts. 3 hr. rec. 

381. Soil Testing. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 181 or consent. Experimental evaluation of soil 
properties and behavior. Emphasis is placed on the proper interpretation of 
experimental results and application of such results to practical problems. 1 hr. 
rec, 6 hr. lab. 

385. Airphoto Interpretation. 3 hr. Study of techniques for obtaining qualitative 
information concerning type and engineering characteristics of surficial materials. 
Use of airphoto interpretation for evaluation of engineering problems encountered 
in design and location of engineering facilities. 3 hr. rec. 

393. Advanced Finite Element Methods. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 293 or consent. Formulation 
procedures and applications of finite element methods to two- and three- 
dimensional problems, techniques for nonlinear analysis computer implementa- 
tion; applications in field problems, flow, and dynamics. 

432. Transportation Systems Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Systematic examination of 
the interaction between transport technology, activity systems, and traffic flows. 
Quantitative analysis of the relationship among vehicle cycles, networks, conges- 
tion, choice behavior, cost functions, and resulting travel-market equilibration. 3 
hr. rec. 

440. Deterministic Hydrology. 3 hr. PR: Consent. An in-depth treatment of the 
dynamics of the accumulation of runoff, including the formulation of the unsteady 
surface flow equations and the unsteady saturated-unsaturated subsurface flow 
equations. Both analytical and numerical solutions are presented with applications. 
3 hr. rec. 



130 CIVIL ENGINEERING 



441. Stochastic Hydrology. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The use of probabilistic and random 
processes techniques in the study of hydrologic problems, including multivariate 
time series and frequency-domain analyses of hydrologic data, and stochastic 
modeling of multidimensional hydrologic processes. 3 hr. rec. 

450. Environmental Systems Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 252 or consent. Mathematical 
and computer modelling of environmental systems with emphasis on decision- 
making; applications will be selected from some or all of the following areas: 
water quality, water resources planning, solid waste management, waste treat- 
ment. 3 hr. rec. 

452. Water Treatment Theory. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 350. Theory of various procedures and 
techniques utilized in treatment of water for municipal and industrial use. Review 
of water quality criteria. Design of water purification facilities. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

454. Industrial and Advanced Waste Treatment. 3 hr. PR or Cone: C.E. 350 or consent. 
Basic physical and chemical unit operations used in industrial and advanced 
waste treatment; applications for waste water reclamation and reuse; study of 
industrial wastes from standpoint of process, source, and treatment. 2 hr. rec, 3 
hr. lab. 

457. Hydraulics of Sanitary Engineering Works. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 120. Hydraulics of 
sanitary sewers, storm sewers, and water distribution systems; design of special 
structures including pumping stations, siphons and retention basins; analysis of 
flow sources including sewer infiltration studies, material selection, and construc- 
tion methods. 3 hr. rec. 

458. Design of Sanitary Works. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 120. Water supply and waste water 
disposal problems. Design of treatment facilities. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

460. Finite Element Methods in Structural Analysis. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 361 or consent. 
Relationships of elasticity theory; definitions and basic element operations; direct 
and variational methods of triangular and rectangular elements related to plane 
stress, plane strain, and flat plates in bending; variational principles in global 
analysis. 3 hr. rec. 

461. Bridge Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 361 or consent. Statically indeterminate trusses, 
continuous trussels; steel and concrete arches; long-span and suspension bridges; 
secondary stresses. 3 hr. rec. 

462. Numerical Analysis of Engineering Systems. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 361 or consent. 
Numerical methods for the solution of equilibrium, eigenvalue and propagation 
problems of discrete and continuous structural systems with special emphasis on 
weighted residual techniques. 3 hr. rec. 

470. Behavior of Steel Members. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 271 or consent. Elastic behavior of steel 
members subjected to axial load, bending, and torsion. Elastic and inelastic 
response of beams, columns, and beam-columns to load and the resulting design 
implications. Comparison with standard steel codes and specifications. 3 hr. rec. 

471. Light Gage Metal Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 260, 271, or consent. Analysis and design of 
light gage material systems; flexural and compression members design; investiga- 
tions into post buckling strength and optimum weight systems. 3 hr. rec. 

473. Structural Design for Dynamic Loads. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 363 or consent. Nature of 
dynamic loading caused by earthquakes and nuclear weapons blasts; nature of 
dynamic resistance of structural elements and structural systems; criteria for 
design of blast-resistant and earthquake resistant structures; simplified and 
approximate design methods. 3 hr. rec. 

475. Analysis and Design of Multistory Structures. 3 hr. (May be repeated once.) PR: 
C.E. 363, and C.E. 270 or 271. Introduction; service, structural and construction 
systems; analysis and design for lateral and gravity forces; structural modeling; 
computer applications; approximate methods; connections; foundations; review 
of standard building codes; special topics. 3 hr. rec. 

CIVIL ENGINEERING 131 



476. Behavior of Reinforced Concrete Members. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 270 or consent. Studies of 
actual member behavior; members in flexure, combined flexure, shear, and 
torsion; bond and anchorage; combined axial load and flexure; slender columns; 
deep beams; derivation of current code provisions. 3 hr. rec. 

477. Behavior of Reinforced Concrete Structures. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 476. Continuation of 
C.E. 476. Limit state design; continuous beams and frames; moment redistribution; 
flat plates and flat slabs; two-way slabs; yield line theory; comparison of theory 
with standard practice; results of recent research; special topics. 3 hr. rec. 

481. Advanced Mechanics of Soils. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 181, 381, M.A.E. 318 or consent. Stress 
invariants, stress history and stress path, elastic and quasi-elastic models for 
soils; soil plasticity, failure theories for soils; critical state soil mechanics, and 
determination of construction parameters. 3 hr. rec. 

482. Advanced Foundation Analysis. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 281 or consent. Study of soil- 
structure interaction. Applications of principles of soil mechanics and numerical 
methods for analysis and design of geotechnical structures: strip footings, axially 
and laterally loaded piles, braced excavations, sheet pile walls, tunnel lining, and 
buried pipes and culverts. 3 hr. rec. 

483. Advanced Earthwork Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 283 or consent. Application of the 
principles of theoretical soil mechanics to the design of embankments of earth and 
rock. In-depth study of compaction theory, stability of natural and man-made 
slopes by limit equilibrium and deformation considerations. 3 hr. rec. 

484. Groundwater and Seepage. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Flow of groundwater through soils 
and its application to the design of highways and dams and to construction 
operations. Emphasis is placed on both the analytical and classical flow net 
techniques for solving seepage problems. 3 hr. rec. 

485. Geotechnical Risk Assessment. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 281, 283 or consent. Application of 
probabilistic and statistical principles to geotechnical analysis and design. 
Random and spatial variability of soil properties; decision under uncertainty; 
reliablity of geotechnical structures. 3 hr. rec. 

486. Soil Dynamics. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 380 and consent. Consideration of the simple damped 
oscillator, wave propagation in elastic media, dynamic field and laboratory tests, 
dynamic soil properties, and foundation vibrations. Introduction to geotechnical 
aspects of earthquake engineering. 3 hr. rec. 

487. Design of Earth Dams. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 283 and 484, or consent. Application of the 
principles of geotechnical engineering to the analysis, design and construction of 
earth and earth-rock embankment dams. 3 hr. rec. 

488. Geotechnical Case Histories. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 281 and 283 or consent. Application of 
principles of geotechnical engineering to professional practice as taught through 
the case histories approach. Study of actual problems in geotechnical engineering 
and their solutions. 3 hr. rec. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects which 
are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent or 
through specially scheduled lectures. 

495. Seminar. 1-2 hr. PR: Consent. Studies and group discussion of structural, fluid 
mechanics, surveying, transportation, soil mechanics and foundations, and 
sanitary problems. 

496. Graduate Seminar. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Each graduate student will present at least 
one seminar to the assembled faculty and graduate student body of the student's 
program. 

132 CIVIL ENGINEERING 



497. Research. 1-15 hr. 

498. Thesis. 2-4 hr. PR: Consent. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not seeking 
course-work credit but who wish to meet residence requirements, use the 
University's facilities, and participate in its academic and cultural programs. 

COMMUNICATION STUDIES 

James C. McCroskey, Chairperson of the Department 

130 Armstrong Hall 

Degree Offered: Master of Arts 

Graduate Faculty: Members M. Booth-Butterfield, Gorham, Klopf. McCroskey, 

Richmond, Wheeless, and Zakahi. Associate members: S. Booth-Butterfield and 

Roach. 

Master of Arts (M.A.) 

The Department of Communication Studies offers work leading to the 
degree of masterof arts (M.A.), with a concentration in communication theory 
and research. Persons who possess a bachelor's degree from an accredited 
college or university may be admitted to the program. Qualified graduate 
students from a variety of disciplines are admitted to the program. The master 
of arts degree program is intended to qualify the student to: 

1. Assume a variety of professional roles in educational, industrial, 
governmental, or media institutions. 

2. Teach the subject matter in high school and/or college. 

3. Undertake advanced training toward a doctorate in the behavioral 
sciences. 

In addition to the general WVU requirements, the graduate student in 
communication studies must meet departmental requirements. These include 
successful completion of the minimum number of required graduate hours as 
set forth in program A, B, or C, below with a grade of B or above in each class 
and the maintenance of a minimum grade-point average of 3.0. 

Applicants for admission must specify the program they wish to pursue, 
program A is open only to full-time resident students. Programs B and C are 
open to both part-time and full-time students. 

Program A — Thesis Program 

All students planning to continue graduate study past the M.A. level are 
encouraged to enter this program. The following are required: 

1. At least 36 hours of graduate credit, 30 of which must be in the 
Department of Communication Studies. A maximum of 6 hours of thesis 
credit will be allowed. 

2. Completion of Comm. 401 and 420. 

3. A thesis. 

4. An oral examination on the thesis. 

Program B— Non-Thesis Program 

All students planning a professional career in a field other than education 
are encouraged to enter this program. This is normally a terminal degree 
program in communication studies. The following are required: 

1. A minimum of 36 hours of course work with at least 30 hours in the 
Department of Communication Studies. 

2. Completion of Comm. 401 and 420. 

COMMUNICATION STUDIES 133 



3. Successful completion of written and oral comprehensive examinations. 
The oral examination may be waived with the approval of the student's 
examination committee and the departmental coordinator of graduate studies. 

Program C — Non-Thesis Program 

All students planning a professional career in elementary or secondary 
education are encouraged to enter this program. This is normally a terminal 
degree program in communication studies. Students may complete this 
program through off-campus study, on-campus study, or a combination. The 
following are required: 

1. A minimum of 33 hours of course work with at least 24 hours in the 
Department of Communication Studies including Comm. 361, 362, 363, and 
491. 

2. Successful completion of written and oral comprehensive examinations. 
The oral examination may be waived with the approval of the student's 
examination committee and the departmental Coordinator of Graduate 
Studies. 

Communication Studies (Comm.) 

201. Principles of Communication Education. I. 3 hr. PR: 15 hr. communication studies. 
Literature, principles, and current practices of communication education in public 
schools with directed application. Intended for teachers in communication and 
language arts. 

206. Advanced Study in Nonverbal Communication. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 106. Functions 
of nonverbal communication including status, power, immediacy, relationship 
development, regulation, turn-taking, leakage and deception, intuition, person 
perception, and emotional expressions. 

221. Persuasion. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 11. Theory and research in persuasion, 
emphasizing a critical understanding and working knowledge of the effects of 
social communication on attitudes, beliefs, and behavior. 

230. Survey of Rhetorical-Communication Theory. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 11. A survey of 
theory in the rhetorical communication context with emphasis upon periods 
preceding the twentieth century. 

231. Communication and Symbol Analysis. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 131. Advanced study of 
language in communication. Specific attention to conversational analysis. 

361. Communication in the Classroom. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Teaching experience or consent. 
Role of interpersonal communication in classroom environment, with particular 
emphasis on communication between students and teachers. Recommended for 
elementary, secondary, and college teachers in all fields. 

362. Nonverbal Communication in the Classroom. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 361. Impact of 
nonverbal communication behaviors of students and teachers on teacher-student 
interaction and student learning. Recommended for elementary, secondary, and 
college teachers in all fields. 

363. Communication in the Educational Organization. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 361. 
Problems of communication within educational organizations with emphasis on 
elements that impact educational change, conflict management, and interpersonal 
influence. Recommended for elementary, secondary, and college teachers in all 
fields. 

134 COMMUNICATION STUDIES 



364. Communication Problems of Children. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 11. (Primarily for 
elementary and secondary school teachers and language arts supervisors.) 
Normal maturational development of listening and speaking skills, their relation- 
ships to language acquisition, and influence upon achievement. 

365. Media in Communication and Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. Use of the media in 
educational and other communication environments with emphasis on communi- 
cation processes and principles relevant to television and film. 

370. Interpersonal Communication: Theory and Research. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
Survey of the theory and research in dyadic interpersonal communication. 
Attention to accuracy, coordination, and congruency models with emphasis upon 
relational communication and intimate communication in interpersonal relation- 
ships. 

371. Theory and Research in Language. II. 3 hr. Syntactics, semantics, and pragmatics 
of language behavior. Analyses of contemporary linguistic theories. 

372. Theory and Research in Mass Communication. I, II. 3 hr. Mass communication 
from a consumer's viewpoint. Use of consumer-oriented mass media research also 
stressed. 

373. Theory and Research in Persuasion. I, II, S. 3 hr. Various theories and principles of 
persuasion with emphasis on contemporary research literature. 

374. Intercultural Communication: Theory and Research. 3 hr. Advanced seminar in 
communication of various cultures. Special emphasis on research in diffusion of 
innovations. 

375. Communication Apprehension and Avoidance. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. 
Theory and research related to individuals' predispositional and situational 
tendencies to approach or avoid communication. Emphasis on work in the areas of 
willingness to communicate, communication apprehension, reticence, and shyness. 

376. Theory and Research in Organizational Communication. I, II. 3 hr. Contemporary 
research linking communication variables and networks to organizational change, 
effectiveness, leadership, power, and management practices. Analysis of commu- 
nication problems within a variety of organizations. 

377. Small Group Theory and Practice. I, II, S. 3 hr. Specific research areas in 
interpersonal communication with intensive emphasis on small groups. 

401. Introduction to Graduate Study in Human Communication. I. 3 hr. Major 
emphasis on designing and conducting experimental and laboratory research in 
human communication. Computer applications to social science research also 
given consideration. Should be taken the first semester of graduate study. 

402. Advanced Seminar in Research Methods. II. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 401. Research 
techniques necessary to conduct original communication research. Emphasis on 
advanced statistical techniques. 

420. Survey of Human Communication Theory. I. 3 hr. Broad overview of contemporary 
theories in human communication. Should be taken the first semester of graduate 
study. 

433. Special Topics. I, II, S. 3-12 hr. PR: Consent. Thorough study of special topics in 
human communication including interpersonal and small group, language, inter- 
cultural, organizational, persuasion, and mass communication, nonverbal com- 
munication, and communication education. 

475. Independent Study. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Open to graduate students 
pursuing independent study in communication. 

COMMUNICATION STUDIES 135 



490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. (Open only to graduate assistants in 
the Department of Speech Communication.) Supervised experience in classroom 
teaching. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 3 hr. Advanced study in a variety of areas in human 
communication. 

496. Seminar in Human Communication. I, II, S. 3-9 hr. Current problems and research 
in human communication. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 
499. Thesis. I, II, S. 3-6 hr. 

COMMUNITY HEALTH EDUCATION 

J. William Douglas, Dean, School of Physical Education 

Carl P. Bahneman, Chairperson, Department of Health, Physical Fitness, and 

Athletic Training. 
256 Coliseum 

Degrees Offered: Master of Science 
Graduate Faculty: Associate Members J. Cavendish and K. Douglas. 

The Master of Science in Community Health Education and the Master of 
Arts Degree in Secondary Education through the Department of Education 
with an emphasis in school health are available. These programs involve a 
core of courses in health education combined with other courses designed to 
satisfy individual needs and professional objectives. All applicants must 
comply with the WVU requirements for graduate study and the requirements 
of the Department of Community Health Education. 

Community Health Education (M.S.) 

To be admitted to the M.S. program in community health education, an 
applicant must have sufficient background in the area of specialization to 
qualify for admission to graduate courses in community health education. 
Students with inadequate backgrounds may be required to take additional 
course work which may not apply to the program. 

Health Education (HI. Ed.) 

220. Drug and Alcohol Abuse Prevention. 3 hr. Experiences designed to prevent the 
development of abusive drug-taking relationships by focusing on psychological 
variables such as self-esteem, coping skills, and development of support networks. 

290. Women and Health. 3 hr. Examination of theories, myths, and practices surrounding 
women's physical and mental health from both historical and present-day 
perspectives. Exploration of specific health issues and controversies and the rise 
of the women's health movement. 

301. Advanced School Health. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Analysis of 
problems in school health services, healthful school living, nature of health 
education, and scope of health instruction which confronts teachers and adminis- 
trators. 

305. Philosophy of Health Education. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. 
Analysis of the scientific bases, purposes, procedures, and content, with implica- 
tions for school and public health education. 

306. Community Health. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Health problems 
requiring community action, basic public health activities, community organiza- 
tions for health protection, voluntary health agencies, school health programs, 
and the role of state and federal agencies in the community health program. 

136 COMMUNITY HEALTH EDUCATION 



307. Community Health: Human Sexuality. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of sex-related 
issues including parenting, sex education, sexual sanctions, pornography, sexual 
dysfunction, and sexual variance. Designed for teachers, health professionals, 
and interested laypeople. 

308. Community Health: Death Education. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Surveys death/dying 
from humanistic viewpoint. Examines philosophical, psychological, legal, and 
sociological aspects of death, grief, and mourning. Appropriate for teachers, 
health professionals, and others desiring understanding of death as a part of 
living. 

309. Community Health: Drug Education. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Designed to help students 
learn appropriate components of a drug education program, gain an understanding 
of drug taking in this society, and acquire insights into dependent behaviors. 

320. Roles and Functions of Health Educators. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. 
An investigation of the roles and functions of the health educator in a variety of 
community settings including hospitals, clinics, voluntary agencies, etc. 

330. Health Education and Behavioral Science. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Integrates the 
concepts of health education and behavioral science to facilitate changes in health 
behavior of individuals and groups. 

373. Professional Development. 1-6 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Departmental 
consent. Specially designed experiences for those interested in advancing profes- 
sional skills in a particular specialty. (Not for degree credit in programs in the 
College of Human Resources and Education.) 

376. Evaluation of Health Education Research. 3hr. PR: Ed. P. 311 or consent. Study of 
published research to determine basic scientific accuracy and value. 

385. Practicum (Field). 1-15 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Under the 
guidance of faculty and counselors, students may assume major responsibility 
during a semester in a community-wide program. (Required of all students in the 
M.S. program.] 

391. Advanced Topics. 1-6 hr. 

397. Master's Degree Thesis. 1-15 hr. 

401. Health Care Organization and Management. 3 hr. PR: Consent. To provide future 
managers, present practitioners, and interested students with organizational and 
managerial concepts and theories to help analyze and resolve administrative 
problems in planning and delivering health services in the community. 

402. Designing Public Health Education Programs. 3 hr. PR: HI. Ed. 306 and/or HI. Ed. 
and consent. Theory and practice of developing health education programs for 
community health agencies. Students will work in task groups as consultants to 
local agencies and design comprehensive programs consistent with theory. 

482. Supervised Applied Health Education Project. 1 hr. PR: Advanced graduate 
standing or consent. Doctoral students only. Plan and conduct a health education 
intervention in other than a classroom setting, i.e., a defined community. 

483. Supervised Health Education Research Report. 1 hr. PR: Advanced graduate 
standing and consent. Doctoral students only. A written report of empirical 
research of either a survey or an experiment. 

490. Teaching Practicum. 1-3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Supervised 
practices in college teaching of health-related learning experiences. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Investigation in 
advanced subjects which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study 
may be independent or through specially scheduled lectures. 

COMMUNITY HEALTH EDUCATION 137 



496. Graduate Seminar. 1 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Graduate students 
will present at least one seminar to the assembled faculty and graduate student 
body of this program. 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. 

498. Thesis. 2-4 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. 2-4 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. 

COMPUTER SCIENCE 

Donald F. Butcher, Chairperson of Department of Statistics and Computer Science 

Stanley Wearden, Director of Computer Science Graduate Programs 

319 Knapp Hall 

Degrees Available: Master of Science, Doctor of Philosophy 

Areas of emphasis: Computer science and Computer and information sciences 

Graduate Faculty: Members Atkins, Butcher, Dodrill, Dowdy, Gunel, Harner, Henry, 
Hiergeist, Hobbs, Lane, Mooney, Muth, S. Reddy, Y.V. Reddy, Thayne, Townsend, 
Trapp, Van Scoy, and Wearden. Associate Members Chilko, Cleetus, Eichmann, 
Morley, Nassif, O'Brien, Oren, and Petersen. 

Master of Science 

The masters degree is intended to qualify the student to assume a 
professional role in an educational, industrial, or governmental research 
project, teach in a junior or senior college, or undertake advanced training 
toward a doctorate in computer science. Because many students receive 
baccalaureate degrees from colleges which do not offer undergraduate 
programs in computer science, a student with an outstanding undergraduate 
record does not need a degree in computer science to enter the master's 
program. 

Applications from students not eligible for admission as regular graduate 
students and from foreign students are normally evaluated during January for 
admission to the summer session. Scores of the Graduate Record Examination 
are required for admission into the master's program. 

Students are expected to know the material contained in the following 
courses upon admission to the program. Otherwise, the deficiencies must be 
removed as early as possible in the student's degree program. 

1. One year of calculus (Math. 15, 16, or equiv.). 

2. Thorough knowledge of a structured, higher level programming 
language such as Ada, C, Modula-2, PL/1 or Pascal (C.S. 1, 2, or equiv.). 

3. Assembler language and computer organization (C.S. 50). 

4. Data structures and file processing methods (C.S. 51). 

5. Discrete mathematics (C.S. 120). 

6. Probability and statistics (Stat. 201 or equiv.). 

Two options are available for students seeking a master of science. The 
problem report option requies 36 hours of course work including three hours 
of credit for a problem report. The thesis option requires 30 hours of course 
work including six hours of credit for a thesis. Students with a B.S. in 
Computer Science or equivalent should pursue this option. 

Minimum required courses for either option are: 

(a) Three courses from C.S. 320 (or 325 in lieu of 320), 330, 340, 350, 360, 
370, 380. 

(b) Two additional 300-level computer science courses. 

(c) Three additional 200- or 300-level courses in statistics, computer 
science, mathematics, industrial engineering, or electrical and computer 
engineering approved by the student's graduate committee. 

138 COMPUTER SCIENCE 



All students must pass a final oral examination based upon the problem 
report/thesis and course work. 

No more than one course in which a grade of C is received may be counted 
toward meeting degree requirements. 

Doctor of Philosophy 

The Ph.D. is a research degree rather than a course work degree. Doctoral 
students are required to complete a number of advanced courses but more 
time is spent in original research in close association with an experienced 
researcher. The Ph.D. degree is intended to prepare a student for teaching and 
research in computer and information science for business, industry, and 
educational institutions. 

Applicants are expected to have a master of science equivalent to that 
offered by the Department of Statistics and Computer Science at West 
Virginia University, including the requirement for a formal thesis or research 
report. Applicants must have achieved a minimum 3.0 GPA on a 4.0 scale in 
studies for the M.S. Minimum requirement for GRE scores are 500 verbal, 600 
quantitative, and 550 analytical, with acceptable performance on the subject 
matter on the advanced GRE. 

Applicants satisfying all of the above criteria are considered for admission 
as regular graduate students by the departmental graduate admissions 
committee, who make final admission decisions. Superior applicants whose 
credentials do not warrant regular admission directly into the Ph.D. program 
may be admitted to the M.S. program or they may be admitted provisionally, 
with a time limit of three semesters in which to correct all deficiencies in 
preparation. 

Application deadlines: 

Fall semester March 1 

Spring semester October 1 

Summer session January 1 

Applications are accepted at any time; however, no guarantee of admission 
can be made for a specific semester if the deadline has not been met. If 
applicants cannot enroll at the designated semester after a favorable admission 
decision, no guarantee is given that they will be permitted to enroll at a later 
time. 

Course Work. The Ph.D. requires a minimum of 18 hours of course work 
beyond the master's. Therefore, entering doctoral students will be full-time 
students for their first academic year. Additional course work may be 
required, but it may be taken on a part-time basis. 

Language Skills. All doctoral students must demonstrate reading compe- 
tency in scientific literature written in a language other than a student's 
native tongue. The choice of language must be approved by the student's 
doctoral committee. 

Qualifying Examinations. When all course work and language require- 
ments have been met, a doctoral student is permitted to stand for the 
qualifying examinations, which are prepared, administered, and evaluated by 
the student's dissertation committee. The examinations are taken within a 
period of two weeks. 

Prospectus. After the qualifying examinations are completed, the doctoral 
student prepares a prospectus, (a statement of his/her chosen research 
problem, a review of pertinent scientific literature, and a description of 
proposed research methods) and presents the prospectus to the dissertation 
committee. After the committee has questioned the student about the 

COMPUTER SCIENCE 139 



prospectus and approved it as a topic for doctoral research, the student 
receives candidacy status. 

Residence. Doctoral candidates are expected to spend a minimum of one 
year in residence for research in addition to the first year in residence for 
course work. 

Dissertation. The final degree requirement is the preparation of a 
dissertation, presenting the completed research to the dissertation committee, 
and a public, formal defense of the dissertation. If the dissertation committee 
believes that the research outlined in the prospectus has been successfully 
completed and defended, the degree is awarded. 

More information concerning graduate studies may be found in "Graduate 
Programs in Computer Science" available from the department. 

(For statistics courses of instruction, see "Statistics.") 

Computer Science (C.s.) 

220. Numerical Analysis 1. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 17 or C.S. 120 and a programming 
language. Computer arithmetic, roots of equations, interpolation, Gaussian 
Elimination, numerical integration and differentiation. Numerical solution of 
initial value problems for ordinary differential equations. Least square approxi- 
mations. (Equiv. to Math. 220.) 

221. Numerical Analysis 2. I, II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 220 and Math. 241 or consent. Solutions 
of linear systems by direct and iterative methods. Calculation of eigenvalues, 
eigenvectors, and inverses of matrices. Applications to ordinary and partial 
differential equations. (Equiv. to Math. 221.) 

228. Discrete Mathematics 2. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 120 and Math. 16 or equiv. Applications 
of discrete mathematics to computer science. Methods of solving homogeneous 
and non-homogeneous recurrence relations using generating functions and 
characteristic equations; digraphs to analyze computer algorithms; graph theory 
and its ramifications to computer algorithms. (Equiv. to Math. 228.) 

230. Programming Languages. I, II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51. Formal definition of programming 
languages including specification of syntax and semantics. Structure of simple 
statements and algorithmic languages. List processing and string manipulation 
languages. 

235. Principles of Programming Languages. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51 or consent. Survey of 
several programming languages: historical, current, special-purpose, and experi- 
mental. Emphasis on comparison of languages features, implementation tech- 
niques, and selection of appropriate language for given application. 

240. Systems Programming. I, II. 4 hr. PR: C.S. 51. Software organization for the 
support of computer components. Addressing techniques, process and data 
modules, file system organization and management. Traffic control and communi- 
cation with peripheral devices. 

241. Systems Programming. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 240. Memory management; name 
management; file systems; segmentation; protection; resource allocation; pragmatic 
aspects in the design and analysis of operating systems. 

245. Microcomputer Programming and Interfacing. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51. Detailed study 
of a typical microcomputer system including its architecture, operating system, 
assembly language programming, data communication, computer networking and 
microcomputer applications (3 hr. lee, 1 2-hr. lab.). 

260. Information Analysis. I, II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51. Information analysis and logical 
design of a computer system. Exercises and case studies are used to give students 
proficiency in information analysis techniques. Projects are assigned to provide 
practical experience in systems development and implementation. 

140 COMPUTER SCIENCE 



270. System Design. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51. Underlying principles of system design and 
techniques. A theme to be carried throughout the course is the iterative nature of 
the analysis and design process. Implementation and conversion problems also 
are considered. Practical projects are assigned to give students experience in 
actual situations. 

275. Software Engineering. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Two 200-level computer science courses or 
equivalent. The study of software life cycle, programming methodologies, and 
project management, with emphasis on an engineering approach to the software 
development process. Relies on a project-based approach for applying software 
engineering principles. 

280. Introduction to Computer Graphics. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51, 120. Overview of computer 
graphics systems. Topics include software, algorithms for graphics primitives, 
two-dimensional viewing and transformations, segmentation, methods of input, 
and three-dimensional concepts. 

281. Introduction to Artifical Intelligence. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51 or consent. Introductory 
treatment of foundations of AI and the symbol manipulation language LISP. 
Survey of the field of AI, production systems, search strategies, game playing, 
knowledge engineering, weak methods. Applications of AI will be briefly studied. 

285. Computer Organization and Architecture. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 50 and 51. Architecture 
of current computers and their effects on software design. Von Neumann 
machines; gates and registers; instruction and address decoding; memory systems; 
input-output systems; micros, supercomputers, specialized systems. 

291. Topics in Computer Science. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51 or equiv. Advanced study of 
topics in computer science. 

301. Computers in Research. I. 3 hr. (Statistics and Computer Science majors should 
obtain their graduate committee approval before registering.) Use of computers in 
research. Algorithms and programming. Scientific and statistical programming 
packages. 

303. Microcomputers in Mathematics/Science. S. 3 hr. PR: Math. 3 or consent. An 
integrated course in computer science, statistics and mathematics for secondary 
educators. Focuses on programming techniques and uses problems from the areas 
of statistics and mathematics at the high school level as examples. 

311. Scientific Computing Applications. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51. Application of mathe- 
matical modelling and simulation methodology, languages, and systems. Discrete 
simulation using GPSS-V language. Linear programming. Finite difference 
methods using higher-level languages. 

320. Solution of Nonlinear Systems. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 220 or Math. 241 or consent. 
Solution of nonlinear systems of equations. Newton and Secant Methods. 
Unconstrained optimization. Nonlinear overtaxation techniques. Nonlinear 
least squares problems. (Equiv. to Math. 320.) 

325. Numerical Interpolation and Approximation. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 220 or consent. 
Interpolation and approximation using Chebychev polynomials, Pade approxima- 
tions, Chebychev economization of Taylor Series. Hermite interpolation, ortho- 
gonal polynomials and Gaussian Quadrature. 

330. Design of Language Processors. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 230. Study of the design and 
construction of automatic programming language processors. Investigation of the 
structure of scientific and business oriented compilers, list processors, and 
information processing languages. 

340. Theory of Operating Systems. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 240. Theoretical aspects of 
multiprogrammed and virtual operating systems. Topics include: concurrent 
processes, processor management, storage management, scheduling alogrithms, 
and resource protection. 

COMPUTER SCIENCE 141 



350. Software Engineering in Data Communications. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 240 or consent. 
Data communication principles, software design techniques or implementing data 
communications systems, testing and debugging techniques, networks and data 
link control, software design in a network environment. A "hands-on" project in 
data communications design is included. 

360. Design of Database Systems. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 260 or consent. Design, evaluation, 
implementation, and user interface of database systems. Topics include: storage 
structures, data languages, security, and relational, hierarchial and network 
implementation approaches. 

365. Distributed Database Management Systems. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 260. Reference 
architectures for distributed database management systems. Integration of local 
databases stored at different sites into a global database. Heterogeneity of data 
models. Query translation and optimization. Synchronization of concurrent 
access. Integrity and reliability. 

380. Interactive Computer Graphics. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 230 or 240 or 260 or consent. Data 
structures and list handling; picture structures and transformations; rendering of 
surfaces and solids; interaction handling; display processors and programming 
systems; and graphics system organization. 

390. Teaching Practicum. I and II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college 
teaching of computer science. 

391. Advanced Topics in Computer Science. I, II, S. 3-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation 
in advanced computer science subjects which are not covered in regularly 
scheduled courses. Study may be independent or through specially scheduled 
lectures. 

396. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. 

397. Research in Computer Science. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practice in college 
teaching of computer and information sciences. 

491. Advanced Study.I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects 
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent 
or through specially scheduled lectures. 

496. Graduate Seminar.I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. 

497. Research.I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. 

COUNSELING 

Jeffrey K. Messing, Division Director, Department Chairperson 

502 Allen Hall 

Degree Offered: Master of Arts, Area of Emphasis for Doctor of Education 

Graduate Faculty: Members L. S. Cormier, W. H. Cormier, Jacobs, Majumder, Marinelli, 

Masson, Moriarty, Srebalus, Tunick, and Yura. Associate Members DeLo, Greever, 

and Messing. 

Master of Arts in Counseling 

The Department of Counseling Psychology and Rehabilitation of the 
College of Human Resources and Education offers a master's program in 
counseling. Variations in the curricula allow emphasis in school counseling, 
community agency/mental health counseling, human resource development 
counseling for business, industrial, or health settings, and student personnel 
work in higher education. All candidates for the master of arts in counseling 
enroll for a common departmental core during the first semester of study. 

142 COUNSELING 



Selection of an area for concentration is made at the beginning of the second 
semester; this area governs the choice of courses for the balance of the 
graduate program. All applicants must comply with University requirements, 
the College of Human Resources and Education requirements, and depart- 
mental requirements. 

Students are encouraged to pursue their studies on a full-time basis; 
however, part-time students are accepted. 



NOTE: The counseling curriculum is being revised during the 1989-90 
year. The changes will go into effect for the fall 1990 term. Please check 
with the department for new degree requirements and course descriptions. 



Required Counseling Courses 

All students who are candidates for a master's in counseling are required 
to take the following core courses: 

Coun. 301 — Counseling Techniques 

Coun. 302— Human Relationships 

Coun. 303— Introduction to the Counseling Profession 

Coun. 305 — Theory and Practice of Human Appraisal 

Ed. Pysch.320 — Introduction to Educational Research 

Coun. 306— Counseling Theories 

Coun. 308— Organization of School Guidance Services* 

Coun. 320— Vocational Development and Occupational Choices 

Coun. 330/382— Counseling Children/Counseling Adults 

Coun. 331— Consultation Theory and Techniques 

Coun. 385 — Practicum 

Coun. 386 — Internship 

Electives (2) 

*Course required for school counselor certification only. A special school counselor certificate 
is available for individuals without a teaching background. The program includes an additional nine 
hours of course work. 

Please note: Doctoral level courses in counseling have the prefix "C. Psy.". 

Admission Requirements 

Applications for admission to the counseling program should be made to 
West Virginia University, Office of Admissions and Records. In addition to 
the admission requirements of the University and the College of Human 
Resources and Education, the Department of Counseling Psychology and 
Rehabilitation has the following admission requirements: 

• A baccalaureate degree with course work in appropriate areas; 

• A minimum undergraduate grade-point average of 2.8, based on a 4.0 
system; 

• Three letters of reference; 

• Completion of the application to the counseling program. 

The initial screening decision is based upon this information. Successful 
applicants are then interviewed by program faculty. Final decisions about 
admission are based on both the requirements and the interview process. Of 
the two steps in the process, the grade-point average and interpersonal skills 
demonstrated during the interview have the greatest input into the decision 
process. 

Counseling provides a broad opportunity to work with children at the 
elementary-school level, adolescents at the secondary-school level, young 
adults at the college level, and adults in business and industry and in 
community agencies. The school counselor is involved in personal counseling, 

COUNSELING 143 



career guidance, vocational and educational counseling, family counseling, 
and consultation on classroom problems with teachers and administrators. 
Counselors must be equipped to work with both individuals and groups. 
Much of the school counselor's work is carried out in classrooms with 
teachers and students. The school counselor also is active in working with 
community agencies. At the college level, the counselor may work extensively 
with the special educational services available for the benefit of the college 
student. Degree requirements include completion of the core curriculum, and 
additional required courses, required counseling course work, and six 
semester hours of pre-practicum under faculty direction. A minimum of 48 
hours of course work with a 3.0 grade-point average is required. 

In addition to completing all course work and the pre-practicum and 
internship satisfactorily, the candidate must demonstrate the ability to 
assume the responsibility required of a professional counselor and the 
personal characteristics and ethical standards essential to effective working 
relationships with others. 

These personal characteristics are assessed during the clinical course 
work components of the program and during the pre-practicum and field 
experience. Students who do not meet professional and clinical standards in 
these areas are provided feedback, and resources for remediation are 
recommended. In these cases, successful remediation is required as a 
prerequisite for successful program completion, with an additional nine 
hours of internship. Students who violate AACD ethical standards are 
dismissed from the program. 

Please contact the program for a listing of the additional required courses 
in this area. 

Areas of Specialization 

Community Counseling: In reviewing the curriculum available in coun- 
seling, the applicant will note that much of the course work provides the 
background applicable for employment in general community agency work. 
Some graduates who do not take employment directly in rehabilitation or 
school settings find a limited number of opportunities as general counselors in 
the fields of public welfare, mental health, drug and alcohol counseling, 
employment security, and corrections. 

Human Resource Development Counseling: A limited number of oppor- 
tunities exist to emphasize counseling and employee development training for 
application in business, industry, and health settings. This program prepares 
personnel to deal with employee assistance needs (i.e., substance abuse), 
organizational development and human relations training, employee career 
development, performance assessment, and productivity enhancement. An 
undergraduate program in business, management, or nursing is helpful but 
not required. Admission preference is given to persons currently employed in 
business and industry. 

Please contact the program for a listing of additional required courses in 
this area. 

All students enrolled in the master of arts in counseling program are 
expected to attend a minimum of eight different continuing education/profes- 
sional development training seminars. These seminars or workshops must be 
related to counseling. The counseling program will provide many of these 
activities. The student should check with the assigned adviser for a list of 
seminar options. 



144 COUNSELING 



Counseling programs are available for both full-time and part-time 
students. An active summer program is available for part-time students. 
Degree requirements may be completed in four consecutive summers. Since 
there is a limited number of summer sites, there can be no guarantee of 
summer practicum placement. 

Certification Requirements For School Counselors in West Virginia 

Certification requirements in school counseling are the same as for the 
Masters of Arts in counseling, except as noted below: 

1. A minimum grade-point average of 3.0. 

2. Recommendation of the faculty. 

3. A valid professional teaching certificate at the level for which 
counseling and guidance endorsement is desired, or the completion of a nine- 
hour block of professional education course work and competency assessment 
in addition to the 48-hour master's degree program. 

4. Completion of the required pattern of certification courses. (Contact 
the department for this list.) 

5. Specialization area examination. Satisfactory performance is required 
for certification eligibility. 

Counseling Option for C.A.S. 

Additional Admission Requirements 

All applicants must comply with the WVU requirements, requirements of 
the College of Human Resources and Education, and the Counseling Psychology 
and Rehabilitation Department. 

1. Completion of a master's degree in counseling or equivalent, comparable 
to the WVU master's degree in counseling with approved practicum experience. 

2. Minimum graduate grade-point average of 3.0. 

3. A total score of 1,000 on the Graduate Record Examination aptitude 
test. 

4. Personal interview with faculty members in counseling psychology. 

5. Demonstration of competency in counseling, measurement, statistics, 
and the guidance function in education as evidenced by letters of reference 
and appropriate examinations. 

6. Evidence of successful appropriate work experience. 

7. Written justification for choice in area of specialization. 

8. Three references for recommendation. 

9. Plan of study approved by adviser. 

Areas of Specialization 

Elementary-School Counseling 
Student Personnel Work 
Employment Counseling 
Pupil Personnel Services 
Secondary-School Counseling 

Requirements for Graduation 

1. Completion of 36 semester hours of approved graduate work. 

2. A minimum grade-point of 3.2 on all course work attempted under the 
Certificate of Advanced Study program. 

3. Demonstration of competencies as a specialist in the chosen area of 
specialization. 

4. Recommendation of the department. 

COUNSELING 145 



Program 

Counseling core equirements will change in 1990-91 consistent with 
overall curriculum modifications. Please check with the department chair. 

1. Twelve semester hours core from Counseling: 

Coun. 331— Consultation Theory and Techniques, 3 hr. 
Coun. 385— Practicum, 3 hr. 

Psych. 401— Advanced Counseling Techniques, 3 hr. 
Psych. 469 — Theory and Practice of Student Appraisal, 3 hr. 

2. Twelve semester hours elected with adviser's consent in specialty area 
of advanced courses either internal or external to the counseling prog.am. 

3. Six hours to achieve competence in consumption and production of 
field research. 

4. Six hours research problem in area of specialization. 

Residency (Minimum) 

1. One semester or two summers (12 hr.) on campus. 

2. Program completion of 12 hr. off-campus and transfer, or approved 
interuniversity cooperative program. 

Counseling Psychology Option for Ed.D. 

All applicants must comply with the graduate requirements of the 
College of Human Resources and Education and the program of counseling 
psychology. The program includes course work hours in addition to the 
College of Human Resources and Education requirements for the Ed.D. 
degree. 

The area of specialization for the doctoral degree is oriented primarily 
toward training practitioners who have a substantial background in the 
philosophy and methods of psychology as a comprehensive science. Students 
are expected to work closely with faculty in doing research and in supervised 
therapy practice. Successful completion of the program requires core course- 
work in counseling psychology, as well as in clinical psychology, statistics 
and research, and supervised practice. 

Additional Entrance Requirements 

The admission process is a two-stage procedure. Each spring, applications 
received by January 15th are reviewed for admission to the next academic 
year. 

Stage I 

Applicants are screened based on written information and credentials 
provided to the admissions committee, including the following: 

1. Completion of a master's degree in an area related to counseling 
pyschology. 

2. Graduate grade-point average of 3.5, vertified by official transcripts of 
graduate course work. 

3. Three letters of recommendation to support applicant's competency in 
counseling, testing, research, and personal qualities of readiness for comple- 
tion of a doctoral degree. 

4. A minimum total score of 1,000 on the Graduate Record Examination. 
At least two years of relevant work experience is desirable. 

Stage II 

Those persons who are successful in stage I are invited to campus for a 
personal interview with the program faculty. The personal interview is 

146 COUNSELING 



required for a final admission decision. The interview helps to determine the 
applicant's interpersonal and clinical skills, which are predictive of success in 
graduate study, internship, and post-degree placement. 

Announcements regarding admission are made on or before May 15. 
Materials received after January 15th are not reviewed until the following 
year, unless space is available. Students are accepted for study toward the 
Ed.D. degree upon admission into the department. Requirements for doctoral 
candidacy are the following: 

1. Completion of prerequisite doctoral course work with a 3.0 grade-point 
average; 

2. A written comprehensive examination of major areas in counseling 
psychology and research; 

3. Completion of an approved research prospectus. 

After admission to candidacy, students are eligible to enroll in internship. 
The internship is a full-time academic or calendar year in an off-campus 
training site approved by the internship committee. After successful comple- 
tion of the internship and the research dissertation, students take a final oral 
examination regarding their dissertation research. 

Counseling (Coun.) 

216. Behavior Problems and the School. II. 3 hr. A course primarily oriented toward 
assisting educators utilize current psychological principles related to classroom 
discipline, as well as academic and social adjustment. 

283. Workshop in Counseling and Guidance. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. To take care 
of credits for special workshops and short intensive limit courses on methods, 
supervision, and other special topics. 

301. Counseling Techniques. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Development and application of 
basic counseling skills including interviewing, clinical observation, and a general 
orientation to counseling settings. Evaluation will be based on strengths and 
deficits in intra and interpersonal skills and on demonstration of counseling skills 
in checkout situations. In-setting laboratory experience required. 

302. Human Relationships. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Experientially based learning 
model which focuses on group processes and procedures. Provides self-screening 
opportunities for prospective counselors. Evaluation is based on personal charac- 
teristics essential to effective working relations with others. 

303. Introduction to the Counseling Profession. I, II, S. 3 hr. An overview of the 
counseling profession, treating current practices and issues. 

305. Theory and Practice of Human Appraisal. I, II, S. 3 hr. An overview of 
standardized evaluation methods commonly utilized in educational and rehabilita- 
tion settings. Experience is provided in selection, administration, and interpreta- 
tion of selected instruments. 

306. Counseling Theories. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 301, 302, 303 and consent. A study of 
counseling approaches commonly used in public schools, colleges, and rehabilita- 
tion agencies. Application of theory emphasized. 

308. Organization/Development: School Guidance Services. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 303, 
305, 306, 320, and consent. Design and conduct of a school needs assessment, 
development of an annual guidance program, and review of current professional 
legal issues. 

309. Group Counseling Theory and Techniques. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 306 and consent. 
Theories of group counseling and demonstrations of specific group techniques. 
Evaluation will be based on expertise in group facilitation. 

COUNSELING 147 



310. Introduction to Student Personnel Work in Higher Education. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
A historical and topical study of the development of student personnel structure 
and functions in higher education. 

320. Lifespan Career Counseling. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 303, 305. Principles and methods 
involved in career counseling with diverse populations. Emphasis on theories of 
career development and life-style planning, career choices, and life-long work 
adjustment. 

330. Counseling Children. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Practical application of the principles 
of guidance to the elementary school. 

331. Consultation Theory and Techniques. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 306 and consent. A 
specialized multiple training experience covering advanced theory, techniques 
and practices, skill development in teacher, and parental consulting. 

382. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced standing and consent. Independent 
study and directed readings in specialized areas of counseling and guidance. 
(Some sections of Coun. 382 have prerequisite requirements. Check with the 
instructor.) 

385. Practicum. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Preregistration; liability insurance; cleared for 
internship at close of semester, or M.A. degree, and consent of department 
practicum evaluation committee. An intensive supervised practical experience in 
public schools or agencies, in counseling with individual critique and appropriate 
small-group experiences. Demonstration of high professional standards, coun- 
seling skills, and personal characteristics appropriate to the counseling relation- 
ship are essential. (Due to the limited number of summer sites, there can be no 
guarantee of summer practicum placement.) [Practicum is a prerequisite for 
internship placement. Internship is a one-semester, minimum four-day per week 
field experience following practicum. This two-semester sequence replaces the 
previous one-semester practicum.J 

391. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

395. Problem in Counseling and Guidance. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Study and 
research for master's degree in counseling and guidance. 

Counseling Psychology (CPsy) 

401. Advanced Counseling Psychology Techniques. I. 3 hr. PR: Advanced standing and 
consent. Comprehensive development of counseling psychology techniques related 
to generic and specific theoretical models. In-setting laboratory demonstration of 
therapy techniques required. 

409. Advanced Group Counseiing/Therapeutic Techniques. 3 hr. PR: Consent. An 
overview of the formation, leadership techniques, research and ethical issues 
associated with group counseling and psychotherapy in general and for specific 
populations. 3 hr. lee. 

431. Advanced Consultation Techniques. I. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 331 or equiv., or consent. 
Multiple training and experiences in theories and techniques of consultation and 
delivery of human services to educational and community personnel. Simulated 
classroom and laboratory experiences. 

460. Introduction to Counseling Psychology. 2 hr. PR: Consent. An overview of the 
history, current status and future trends associated with counseling psychology 
as a specialty area. 2 hr. lee. 

463. Advanced Theories of Counseling Psychology. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 385; admission 
to graduate study; and consent. A comprehensive study of the theoretical issues in 
contemporary counseling. 

148 COUNSELING 



464. Intellectual Assessment. II. 4 hr. PR: Advanced standing and preregistration with 
instructor (9 hr. psychology, and demonstration of proficiency in measurement 
needed for admission). Administering, scoring, and interpreting individual 
intelligence tests. 

466. Vocational Psychology. II. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 320 or equiv., advanced standing or 
consent. Advanced study of theory development and research in vocational 
psychology and counseling; emphasis on counseling psychology, women's issues 
and cross-cultural counseling. 

469. Personality Testing and Interpretation. I. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 305 and consent. 
Advanced study in the application of personality assessment procedures and 
consideration of alternative methods for measuring human behavior. 

470. Doctoral Practicum in Counseling Psychology. 1-9 hr. PR: Consent. Intensive 
clinical experience in which students under supervision see clients for individual 
and group counseling and psychotherapy. Practica is offered at a variety of 
approved field-based sites. 1-9 hr. practicum. 

472. Internship. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Written approval from the Department Internship 
Committee, satisfactory completion of written doctoral comprehensive exams and 
approval of research prospectus. Full-time supervised practice in an approved 
counseling psychology internship training program; minimum duration one 
academic year. 

480. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced standing and consent. Seminar in 
counseling psychology for students in certificate of advanced study and doctoral 
programs. 

482. Research Practicum in Counseling Psychology. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. The conduct 
of a descriptive or an experimental study. An overview of research design, 
statistical procedures, potential violations of ethical principles in the conduct of 
research. 1-6 hr. practicum. 

483. Counseling Psychology Supervision Models. I. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 401, advanced 
standing and consent. Overview of major assumptions and techniques of major 
counseling supervision models. Training activities include simulated and actual 
demonstrations of each of the supervision models and critique of their assumptions, 
advantages, and constraints. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Intended forgraduate students with 
college teaching responsibility in counseling psychology. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced areas of 
counseling psychology and rehabilitation counseling. 

492. Professional and Ethical Issues in Counseling Psychology. II. 3 hr. PR: Advanced 
standing and consent. Overview of current ethical, legal, and professional issues 
in counseling psychology. Readings, discussion, and a written literature review of 
a topic related to the practice of counseling psychology. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I. 3 hr. PR: Advanced standing and consent. Written and oral 
presentation of methodology and results of one's own research study with 
supervision and critique by the instructor and members of the seminar. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Dissertation. 

498. Thesis. I, II, S. 2-4 hr. PR: Consent. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not 
registered in regular course work but who have need to use University facilities 
for completion of their research or program. 

COUNSELING 149 



DENTAL HYGIENE 

Barbara K. Komives, Chairperson of the Department 

Christina B. DeBiase, Coordinator of the Graduate Program 

1073 Health Sciences Center North 

Degree Offered: Master of Science 

Graduate Faculty: Members DeBiase, Gladwin, Graves, Komives, and Mueller 

Areas of Specialization 

Office Management 

Special Patients 

Education/ Administration 

Basic Sciences 

The School of Dentistry and its Department of Dental Hygiene offer a 
program of advanced study and specialized training leading to the degree of 
master of science. This program requires a minimum of 36 semester hours 
through full-time or part-time enrollment in the School of Dentistry. It is 
designed to qualify dental hygienists for careers in teaching, administration, 
research and management. 

Inquiries concerning this program should be directed to the Office of the 
Associate Dean for Research and Graduate Affairs, School of Dentistry. 
Applications should be filed by July 1 for fall admission and by November 1 
for spring enrollment. 

Requirements for Admission to the Dental Hygiene Program 

1. A baccalaureate degree in dental hygiene from an accredited dental 
hygiene program or a baccalaureate degree in another field of study from an 
approved institution of higher education while holding a certificate or 
associate degree in dental hygiene from a program fully accredited by the 
American Dental Association, Commission on Dental Accreditation. 

2. Evidence of scholastic and clinical achievement to indicate the 
applicant's ability to progress in a program of this nature. Generally, a 
minimum grade-point average of 2.5 or above is required. 

3. Completion of one of these standardized tests: the Graduate Record 
Examination (GRE) general aptitude test with a score of 1,000 or above or the 
Miller's Analogy Test with a score of 50 or above. 

4. Submission of all information requested in the graduate application to 
the Office of the Associate Dean. 

Requirements for Degree of Master of Science 

1. Completion of a minimum of 36 semester credit hours: 18-24 required 
credit hours and 12-18 credit hours in an elective area(s) of specialization. 
The student may choose one or two from the four elective areas of specialization 
offered. These courses are taught by a number of schools within the 
University. An individualized program will be devised for each student 
which must conform to one of these options: 

a. Thesis: A minimum of 30 semester credit hours, plus a maximum of six 
hours in research leading to an acceptable thesis. Oral defense of the 
thesis is required. 

b. Non-thesis: At least 36 semester credit hours, with no thesis. 

2. Successful completion of a comprehensive examination for non-thesis 
students. The series of tests covers all areas specified in the plan of study. 



150 DENTAL HYGIENE 



This examination will be administered after the majority of the student's 
coursework has been completed. 

3. Achievement of a 3.0 GPA or an overall academic average of at least B 
in all work attempted in the master's program. A grade of C or below in two 
courses will require a faculty review of the student's progress. A third C will 
result in suspension from the program. 

4. Removal of all conditions, deficiencies and incomplete grades. Credit 
hours for courses with a grade lower than C do not count toward degree 
requirements. 

M.S.D.H. Curriculum 

Basic Requirements Credit Hours 

Educational Psychology 311— Statistics 3 

Educational Psychology 330— Test and Measurement 3 

Dental Hygiene 380— Critical Issues in Health Care 3 

Dental Hygiene 381— Expanded Functions 3 

Dental Hygiene 220— Personal Computing for the D.H 3 

Dental Hygiene 385— Research Methods for the D.H 3 

Dental Hygiene 397— Research (Thesis) (6) 

18-24 

Elective Area(s) of Dental Hygiene Specialization 

Dental Hygiene 391 and Dentistry 397 Courses 
Courses taught by the School of: 
Business and Economics 
Human Resources and Education 
Medicine 
Courses taught by the Department of Community Health 

Multidisciplinary Studies Courses 

12-18 
TOTAL 36 

Dental Hygiene (Dnt. Hy.) 

220. Microcomputing for Dental Hygienists. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Introduction to 
microcomputing with hands-on experiences in patient record keeping, accounting, 
insurance handling and word processing. 

380. Dental Hygiene Seminar and Practice 1.1.3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. 
Examination of the critical environmental issues affecting the future of health 
care; particular impact on oral health care trends will form major focus. Dental 
hygiene clinical practice is also included. 

381. Dental Hygiene Seminar and Practice 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Dnt. Hy. 380. Expanded 
services for the dental hygienist with emphasis on restorative and periodontal 
functions. 

385. Research Methods for the Dental Hygienist. II. 3 hr. PR: Ed. Psych. 311. Methods 
and techniques of research in dental hygiene. Major emphasis on planning and 
evaluating health programs, conducting oral health surveys, designing experiments 
and critically analyzing research results. 

397. Dental Hygiene Research. I, II, S. 3-6 hr. PR: Consent. Students will design a 
research protocol, conduct experimental research and prepare a thesis of original 
dental hygiene research. 



DENTAL HYGIENE 151 



ECONOMICS 

Jay H. Coats, Director of Graduate Programs 

333 Business and Economics Building 

Graduate Programs in Economics, College of Business and Economics, 

West Virginia University, P.O. Box 6025, Morgantown, WV 26506-6025 
Telephone: (304) 293-5408 
Degrees Offered: Master of Arts 
Doctor of Philosophy 
Graduate Faculty: Members Adams, Bhandari, Cushing, Hawley, Hwang, Isserman, 

Kymn, Mann, Mitchell and Witt. Associate Members: Britt, Hariharan, Rupert, 

Trumbull, and Wall. 

The Master of Arts and Doctor of Philosophy degrees in economics enable 
students to broaden and refine their knowledge of the concepts and methods 
of economic analysis. These programs are designed to prepare students for 
careers in business, government, and higher education. Student programs are 
planned with the assistance of a faculty adviser and approval of the Director 
of Graduate Programs. Additional information about the graduate programs 
in economics, and the regulations and requirements pertaining to them, may 
be obtained by securing a copy of "Graduate Programs in Economics" from the 
graduate director. Students are bound by these regulations and requirements, 
as well as those of the College of Business and Economics. 

Admission. To be admitted as a regular student, applicants must have a 
grade-point average of 2.75 or better for all undergraduate work completed 
and a minimum combined score of 1500 for the three parts of the general 
aptitude portion of the Graduate Record Examination. All students must 
submit their scores on the general aptitude portion of the Graduate Record 
Examination (GRE) and international students must also submit their scores 
on the TOEFL. In addition, it is required that all applicants will have 
completed at least one semester of each of the following courses: intermediate 
microeconomic theory, intermediate macroeconomic theory, calculus, and 
statistics. Applicants not meeting these entrance requirements may be 
admitted on a provisional and/or deficiency basis, subject to certain perfor- 
mance conditions during their first semester in residence. 

Financial Aid. A limited number of graduate assistantships and tuition 
scholarships are available on a competitive basis to full-time students. Major 
selection criteria include prior academic performance and GRE scores. 
Graduate assistants receive a cash stipend that is comparable in amount to 
that offered at other universities. Graduate assistants engage in research 
and/or teaching activities. The faculty of the Department of Economics also 
nominates outstanding applicants for University fellowships. Special scholar- 
ships are also available on a competitive basis to minority students. Further 
information and applications can be obtained from the Director of Graduate 
Programs. 

Academic Performance. To qualify for a graduate degree in economics, 
students must earn a cumulative grade-point average (GPA) of 3.0 or better for 
all courses completed as a graduate student at WVU. A regular graduate 
student in economics whose cumulative GPA falls below 3.0 (B) upon 
completion of the first nine hours of graduate study is not in good standing 
and will be placed on probation. A student in the program whose cumulative 
GPA falls below 3.0 will be placed on probation as of the close of the semester 
in which the GPA fell below 3.0. Such a student, placed on probation, who 
fails to raise his/her cumulative GPA to 3.0 by the end of the semester succeeding 



152 ECONOMICS 



that in which his/her GPA fell below 3.0 is subject to suspension from the 
program at the end of that probationary semester. 

Other academic reasons for suspension from the program include failing 
grades on more than 50 percent of the course work taken in any semester, a 
third failure on either a microeconomic theory or macroeconomic theory 
comprehensive examination, a fourth failure on comprehensive field examina- 
tions, or failure to complete all degree requirements within the specified time 
limits. 

Master of Arts (M.A.) 

The Master of Arts (M.A.) program requires a total of 36 hours of 
graduate credit, including 21 hours of economics. At least 24 hours of course 
work completed must be at the 300 level. To qualify for the M.A. degree, 
graduate students in economics must earn a grade of B- or better in Economics 
310 and 312, and a grade-point average of 3.0 in all courses attempted as a 
graduate student at WVU. The M.A. program contains a thesis and a 
nonthesis option. Specific course requirements include: 
Core Courses- 
Economics 220 — Introduction to Mathematical Economics, 3 hr. 

Economics 310— Advanced Microeconomic Theory 1, 3 hr. 

Economics 312— Advanced Macroeconomic Theory 1, 3 hr. 

Economics 316— History of Economic Doctrines and Analysis, 3 hr. 

(If the student has recently successfully completed Economics 216 

History of Economic Thought or its equivalent before entering the M.A. 

program, the Economics 316 requirement may be waived by approval of 

the graduate director.) 
Statistics Requirement — (six credit hours are required.) 

Option A: 

Statistics 231— Sampling Methods, 3 hr. 

Economics 226 — Applied Econometrics, 3 hr. 

Option B: For students who consider going into the Ph.D. Program. 

Economics 320— Mathematical Economics, 3 hr. (substitute for Eco- 
nomics 220 in the core) 

Statistics 262— Theory of Statistics, 3 hr. 

Economics 325— Econometrics, 3 hr. 
Thesis/Nonthesis Options— 

a. Thesis Option: An acceptable thesis, 6 hr. With the thesis option, 
the student must pass a final oral examination. 

b. Nonthesis Option: In lieu of a thesis, the requirements for the M.A. 
are met by: (1) completion of two 300-level courses in one field of 
concentration in economics; and (2) submission of a research paper that 
gives evidence of substantial ability to conduct scholarly research. 

M.A. Program Options 

The M.A. program in economics includes special options administered by 
the College of Business and Economics jointly with other units on campus. 
These options include business analysis, mathematical economics, public 
policy, and statistics and economics. To earn the M.A. in economics, students 
must complete the M.A. requirements (above) and fulfill other requirements 
pertaining to the particular option. The options are best viewed as coherent 
sample programs developed in conjunction with other units and are designed 
to prepare students for employment in a particular area or specialty of 
economics. 

ECONOMICS 153 



Business Analysis— Conducted in cooperation with other departments of 
the College of Business and Economics, this option is designed to prepare 
students for employment in the business analysis area. As part of their M.A. 
program in economics, students complete 13 hours of business courses: 
Financial Accounting, Managerial Finance, Corporate Financial Administra- 
tion, Organizational Behavior and Ethics, and Marketing Management. 

Mathematical Economics — This option is conducted in cooperation with 
the Department of Mathematics. Students entering this option must previously 
have taken 12 hours in mathematics, including a course in calculus equivalent 
to Math. 15. Courses include Advanced Micro Theory 2, Advanced Macro 
Theory 2, Econometrics, Mathematical Economics, Applied Linear Algebra, 
and Introduction to Real Analysis. 

Public Policy — This option is conducted in cooperation with the Depart- 
ment of Political Science and provides students with broad training in policy 
analysis skills and methods. Prior completion of at least six hours of political 
science coursework is required. Courses include Introduction to Policy 
Research, Public Policy Analysis, and Economic Analysis of Public Policies. 

Statistics and Economics — Conducted in cooperation with the Department 
of Statistics and Computer Science, this option is designed to prepare 
students for employment in the public or private sector which demands the 
use of quantitative skills. Courses include Statistics, Probability, Applied 
Regression Analysis, and Econometrics. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

Usually four years of full-time graduate work beyond the baccalaureate 
degree are required to complete the doctorate. A minimum of two consecutive 
semesters in actual residence as a full-time graduate student is required. To 
qualify for the Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) degree in economics, a student 
must earn a cumulative grade-point average of 3.0 in courses completed as a 
graduate student at WVU. 

The Ph.D. degree is not awarded for the mere accumulation of course 
credits nor for the completion of the specified residence requirements. All 
students are required to complete the graduate core curriculum, prepare 
themselves in three fields of concentration, and submit an acceptable 
dissertation. A minimum of 39 hours of graduate work in economics at the 300 
level is required for all candidates for the Ph.D. degree in economics. 
Core Courses (each, 3 hr.j: 

Economics 310 — Advanced Microeconomic Theory 1 
Economics 311 — Advanced Microeconomic Theory 2 
Economics 312 — Advanced Macroeconomic Theory 1 
Economics 313 — Advanced Macroeconomic Theory 2 
Economics 316 — History of Economic Doctrines and Analysis 
Economics 320 — Mathematical Economics 
Economics 325 — Econometrics 1 
Statistics 262— Theory of Statistics 
Fields of Concentration. Six semester hours (or the equivalent) must be 
taken in each of the student's three fields of concentration. Areas of 
concentration include: econometrics, monetary economics, public finance, 
regional and urban economics, labor economics, international economics, and 
mathematical economics. One of the fields of concentration may be in a 
outside area; selection must be approved by the graduate economics faculty. 
Comprehensive Examinations. Students must pass written comprehensive 
examinations in economic theory (microeconomics and macroeconomics) and 

154 ECONOMICS 



in three fields. For possible waiver of one field examination, and other 
detailed rules, see departmental "Graduate Programs in Economics" filed in 
the Office of Graduate Director. 

Candidacy and Dissertation. When an applicant has successfully passed 
the written comprehensive examinations, the applicant will be formally 
promoted to candidacy for the Ph.D. degree. The candidate must submit a 
dissertation pursued under the supervision of a member of the graduate 
faculty in economics on some problem in the area of the candidate's major 
interest. The dissertation must present the results of the candidate's individual 
investigation and must embody a definite contribution to knowledge. It must 
be approved by a committee of the graduate faculty in economics. After 
approval of the candidate's dissertation and satisfactory completion of other 
graduate requirements, a final oral examination on the dissertation is 
required. 

Each Ph.D. candidate is required to present a dissertation proposal to the 
Graduate Director subsequent to approval by at least three members of his or 
her dissertation committee including the chairperson. This proposal will 
include a statement of the problem (topic summary), a preliminary survey of 
the literature, a description of the research methodology, and other pertinent 
material. With the approval of the graduate director, the student is then 
required to present the proposal in a faculty-student seminar. 

Credit for dissertation research and writing is available under Economics 
497, but only if the student has a dissertation chairperson and the approval of 
the graduate director. 

Ph.D. Program Options 

The Ph.D. program includes special options conducted in cooperation 
with other units on campus. These are industrial and labor relations, and 
mathematical economics. The options specify certain concentrations of 
course work and comprehensive examinations. Acceptable dissertations are 
required of all students. 

Industrial and Labor Relations— Graduate work in industrial and labor 
relations typically is interdisciplinary in nature. The Ph.D. option retains the 
interdisciplinary orientation while providing students with a Ph.D. -level of 
understanding of economic theory and economic analysis. Students in the 
industrial and labor relations option take the eight core courses in the Ph.D. 
program and take comprehensive examinations in microeconomic and macro- 
economic theory. 

Students are required to complete three fields of concentration. One field 
must be Industrial and Labor relations, which consists of the following 
courses: 

Industrial and Labor Relations 334 — Leadership and Work Group 

Dynamics 
Industrial and Labor Relations 342 — Advanced Collective Bargaining 
Industrial and Labor Relations 491 A — Practicum in Research Methods 
Industrial and Labor Relations 491B — Research Theory 
Of the two remaining fields, each typically six credit hours, one must be from 
within the Department of Economics. Most commonly, this field is labor 
economics. The second field may be selected from economics, industrial 
psychology, public administration, statistics, human resources management, 
industrial engineering, or law, and ideally should complement the student's 
research interest. 



ECONOMICS 155 



Students must pass written comprehensive examinations in their three 
fields of concentrations. 

Mathematical Economics— The mathematical economics option is con- 
ducted in cooperation with the Department of Mathematics. To be admitted 
into this option, students must have completed a minimum of 12 hours in 
mathematics, including a course in calculus equivalent to Mathematics 15. In 
addition to the Economics Ph.D. core, students are required to take the 
following courses: 

Economics 326 — Econometrics 2 
Economics 328 — Advanced Mathematical Economics 
Economics 329 — Seminar in Econometrics 
Mathematics 241 — Applied Linear Algebra 
Mathematics 251, 252— Introduction to Real Analysis 

(Math. 251 and 252 may be replaced by Math. 317, 318.) 
Mathematics 357— Calculus of Variations 
Mathematics Elective— 3 hr. 
Students are required to successfully complete comprehensive examina- 
tions in microeconomic and macroeconomic theory, mathematical economics, 
econometrics, and one other field in economics. 

For further details, see "Graduate Programs in Economics" Appendix B, 
Ph.D. options, Mathematical Economics. 

Economics (Econ.) 
Specialized Courses 

200. Special Topics. 1-4 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55 or consent. Special topics relevant to 
economics. (Maximum of nine semester hours in any or all courses numbered 200 
offered by the College of Business and Economics may be applied toward 
bachelor's and master's degrees.] 

297. Internship. 1-12 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55 and departmental approval. Field 
experience in the analysis and solution of economic problems in the public and 
private sectors. 

317. Economic Decision Making. 2 hr. PR: Econ. 54 or consent. (Non-credit for Graduate 
students in Economics.) Analysis of the firm as an optimizing unit operating in the 
market place. Examination of product demand, production and costs, pricing 
theory and practice theory and practices, risk and capital budgeting. (Open only to 
MBA and MSLIR students.) 

318. Economic Policy. 2 hr. PR: Econ. 317 or consent. (Non-credit for Graduate students 
in Economics.] Microeconomic analysis of macroeconomic phenomena is con- 
sidered with particular attention paid to the reaction by firms to price and interest 
rate effects of fiscal and monetary policy. (Open only to MBA and MPA students.) 

319. Applied Business and Economics Statistics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Primary statistical 
methods used in business and economics research including hypothesis testing, 
estimation, linear regression, time series, and business forecasting. Statistical 
computer software is an integral part of the course. (Open only to MBA, MP A, and 
MSLIR students.) 

343. Economic Analysis of Public Policies. 3 hr. Application of economic analysis to 
questions of public policy. Consideration of problems of public goods and other 
market failures and usefulness of cost-benefit analysis to policy-making. (Equiv. 
to Pol. S. 331.) 



156 ECONOMICS 



Economic Theory 

211. Intermediate Microeconomic Theory. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 54. Consumer choice 
and demand; economics of time; price and output determination and resource 
allocation in the firm and market under a variety of competitive conditions; 
welfare economics, externalities, public goods, and market failure. 

212. Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Forces which 
determine the level of income, employment, and output. Particular attention to 
consumer behavior, investment determination, and government fiscal policy. 

216. History of Economic Thought. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51, 55. Economic ideas in perspective 
of historical development. 

310. Advanced Micro Theory 1. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 211 or 220 and graduate standing or 
consent. Theory of production and allocation, utility theory, theory of the firm, 
pricing in perfect and imperfect markets, models of firm's operations. 

311. Advanced Micro Theory 2. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310. General equilibrium analysis, 
distribution theory, welfare economics. 

312. Advanced Macro Theory 1. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 212 and 220 and graduate standing or 
consent. Classical, Keynesian, and Post-Keynesian theories. 

313. Advanced Macro Theory 2. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 312. Model of economic growth and 
fluctuations, and other advanced topics in macroeconomic theory. 

316. History of Economic Doctrines and Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate 
standing or consent. Writings of the major figures in the development of economic 
doctrines and analysis. 

Quantitative Economics 

220. Introduction to Mathematical Economics. 3 hr. PR: Math. 15 or 128, and Econ. 51 or 
55; or consent. Principal mathematical techniques including set operation, matrix 
albegra, differential and integral calculus employed in economic analysis. 
Particular attention given to static (or equilibrium) analysis, comparative-static 
analysis and optimization problems in economics. 

225. Applied Business and Economic Statistics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 125 or Stat. 101 or 
consent. Continuation of Econ. 125. Principal statistical methods used in applied 
business and economic research including multiple regression, index numbers, 
time series analysis, forecasting models and methods, and sampling design. 

226. Introductory Econometrics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 125 or consent. Statistical methods 
applied to the analysis of economic models and data. Emphasis placed on multiple 
regression, multicollinearity, seasonality, heteroscedasticity, autocorrelation, 
dummy variables, time series analysis, distributed lags and simultaneous 
equations with economics and computer applications. 

320. Mathematical Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 220 or consent. Linear programming, 
input-output analysis, complex numbers, linear difference and differential equa- 
tions, comparative-static and dynamic analysis and optimization techniques. 

325. Econometrics 1. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 262 or consent. Specification, estimation, and 
verification of single-equation models. Topics covered include multicollinearity, 
autocorrelation, heteroscedasticity, dummy variables, time series analyses and 
forecasting, functional form, and specification error analysis. Students should be 
familiar with matrix algebra. 

326. Econometrics 2. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 325 or consent. Identification and estimation of 
simultaneous equation models and their use in forecasting and simulation. Other 
advanced topics include distributed lags, autoregressive models, errors in 
variables models, aggregation problems, and pooled cross-section/time-series 
models. 

ECONOMICS 157 



328. Advanced Mathematical Economics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Mathematical properties 
of microeconomic models of general equilibrium and welfare, existence, unique- 
ness, and stability of equilibrium. Applications of Hamiltonian and maximum 
principles to growth models and economic control problems. Investigation of 
separability theorems. 

329. Seminar in Econometrics. 3 hr. 

Monetary Economics 

330. Monetary Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 312 or consent. Sources and determinants of 
supply of money; demand for money for transactions and speculative purposes; 
general equilibrium theory of money, interest, prices, and output; role of money in 
policy. 

334. Seminar in Monetary Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 312 or consent. 

Public Finance 

241. Public Finance. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Governmental fiscal organizations and 
policy; taxes and tax systems with particular emphasis on federal government 
and state of West Virginia. 

340. Theory of Public Finance. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate standing or consent. 
Economic role of government in a mixed economy with regard to resource 
allocation between public and private sectors, influence of government upon 
income distribution and economic stability and growth. 

344. Seminar in Public Finance. 3 hr. 

Public Regulation and Control 

245. Government and Business. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Market structure, conduct and 
performance: analysis of the antitrust laws — judicial interpretation and effect on 
the business sector. 

246. Transportation Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Economic and institutional 
analysis of the domestic transportation system of the United States. Topics 
include role of transportation, carrier characteristics and services, transportation 
rates and costs, regulation of transportation. 

345. Industrial Organization. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate standing or consent. 
Economic analysis of market structure, conduct, and performance: in-depth 
evaluation of markets and industries in the United States and the effect of 
government intervention on firm behavior. 

349. Public Regulation of Business. I or II. 3 hr. Economic analysis of regulation of 
specific industries such as public utilities. 

International Economics 

250. International Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Development of trade among 
nations; theories of trade, policies, physical factors, trends, and barriers in 
international economics. 

350. Advanced International Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 211 and 212. Contemporary 
theories of international economics; analysis of current problems in world trade 
and finance. 

354. Seminar in International Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 212. 

Regional Economics 

255. Regional Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Analysis of the regional economy's 
spatial dimension, emphasizing interregional capital and labor mobility, 
the role of cities, objectives and issues of regional policy, lagging regions and 
Appalachia, growth poles, and regional growth and income distribution. 

158 ECONOMICS 



257. Urban Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Analyzes the spatial dimensions of the 
urban economy, emphasizing both urban economic theory and urban policy. 
Issues include cities and income inequality, urban upgrading function, blight, 
economics of ghettos, the economics of urban size. 

355. Advanced Regional Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate standing or 
consent. Regional income and flow of funds estimation, regional cyclical behavior 
and multiplier analysis, industrial location and analysis, techniques of regional 
input-output measurement, impact of local government reorganization on regional 
public service and economic development. 

357. Advanced Urban Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate standing or consent. 
Analyzes the spatial dimensions of the urban economy, emphasizing urban 
theory, policy, and empirical research. Major subjects include urban income 
distribution, residential location theory, spatial structure, neighborhood change, 
blight, ghettos, segregation, renewal, and city size. 

359. Seminar in Regional Economics. 3 hr. 

Labor Economics 

360. Advanced Human Resource Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate standing 
or consent. Examination and analysis of our social and economic efforts to solve 
current manpower problems in the U.S., including structural unemployment and 
inflation. 

364. Seminar in Labor Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate standing or consent. 

Economic History 

270. Growth of the American Economy. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Central issues in 
development of the American economy. 

370. Economic History. 3 hr. Examination of the methods of research and issues in 
economic history of the United States. 

374. Seminar in Economic History. 3 hr. 

Economic Development 

213. Economic Development. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 54 and 55. The problems, changes, and 
principal policy issues faced by nonindustrialized countries. 

Energy and Environmental Economics 

380. Energy Economics. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Welfare analysis of 
supply interruptions and the foreign dependence question. Study of various 
energy resources in reference to policy alternatives under variant growth 
conditions and input-output models. Examination of coal industry and coal 
externalities. 

384. Environmental Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and Econ. 380 or M.E.R. 345 and 
graduate standing or consent. Examination of the theoretical and empirical 
literature dealing with externalities (pollution), the relationships between pollu- 
tion and social costs, the relationships between energy production and environ- 
mental quality, and the optimal strategies for pollution abatement. 

Other Economics Courses 

299. Independent Readings in Economics. 3-6 hr. Supervised readings for undergraduate 
and graduate students in special areas. 

390. Independent Reading in Economics. 3-6 hr. Supervised readings. For graduate 
students in special areas. 

491. Seminar in Applied Economic Analysis. 3 hr. PR: 12 hr. of graduate-level 
economics. 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. 

ECONOMICS 159 



EDUCATION 

Diane L. Reinhard, Dean of College of Human Resources and Education 
802 Allen Hall 

Degrees Offered: Certificate of Advanced Study, Doctor of Education 
(M.A. and M.S. programs are listed separately, by program major.) 
Graduate Faculty: Members Andes, Atkins, B. Bailey, Baker, Barksdale, Bilow.'Bonk, 
Bower, Childress, S. Cormier, W. Cormier, Deay, DeCosta, DeVore, Fraley, Gerlach, 
Gibbins, Goeres, Haas, Hartnett, Hazi, Hoffman, Holtan, Hursh, Ianonne, Jacobs, 
Koay, Lass, Leary, Lilley, Lombardi, Ludlow, Lundeen, McAvoy, McCrory, Majumder, 
Marinelli, Martin, Masson, Maughan, Meckley, Monahan, Moriarty, Moxley, A. 
Nardi, G. Nardi, Neal, Obenauf, Phillips, Pytlik, Reed, Reinhard, Rinehart, Ruscello, 
Saltz, Shea, Shuster, E. R. Smith, P. Smith, Srebalus, Stepp, St. Louis, Thomas, Tseng, 
Tunick, E. Vargas, J. Vargas, Vickers, Walls, Wienke, Woodford, Woodrum, Yeager, 
Young, and Yura. Associate Members N. Bailey, Bickel, Carline, Coombe, DeLo, 
Doherty, Freeman, Goodwin, Gordon, Greever, Hall, Hayes, Heitzenroder, Hobbs, 
Hunt, Lombardo, Meikamp, Messing, Murray, Paterson, Savage, Sawyer, Shuman, 
Sloane, Spatig, Stead, Sullivan, Toth, Wilkin, Wolf, and Wolfe. 

Certificate of Advanced Study (C.A.S.) 

This program is designed to prepare school and related personnel who 
wish professional training beyond the master's degree. Candidates for the 
certificate of advanced study in education may choose from among the 
following areas of study for their area(s) of concentration: administration and 
supervision, curriculum and instruction, counseling and guidance, educational 
psychology, reading, or special education. Persons interested in the certificate 
should consult with the chairpersons of the appropriate department or the 
Dean of the College of Human Resources and Education. 

Doctor of Education (Ed.D.) 

The program of study leading to the degree of doctor of education (Ed.D.) 
is planned with the student's graduate adviser and committee and is made 
available through the faculty and support services of the College of Human 
Resources and Education. It combines courses of instruction, seminars, 
supervised research, and ancillary experience intended to provide the 
candidate with a variety of educationally related competencies. Special 
requirements, such as tools of research, also may be specified by the student's 
committee. 

College facilities and faculty expertise make it possible for students 
wishing to do so to concentrate more heavily in such fields as curriculum 
development, counseling and guidance, education administration, rehabilita- 
tion services, special education, and technology education. 

Curriculum and Instruction 

Options in curriculum and instruction are available for the C.A.S., the 
Ed.D., and the various M.A. programs. Since the development of curricula and 
teaching methodology is central to all levels of education, specific tracks in 
curriculum and instruction have been designed for elementary, secondary, 
and reading options in the masters' programs offered by the Division of 
Education. In addition, discrete subject areas may also serve as the core of 
specialization within curriculum and instruction. 



160 EDUCATION 



Additional information about curriculum and instruction within the 
Division of Education may be obtained through writing to: 
W. Michael Reed 

Interim Chairperson of Graduate Programs 
Division of Education 
602 Allen Hall, P.O. Box 6122 
West Virginia University 
Morgantown, WV 26506-6122 

EDUCATION ADMINISTRATION 

Richard A. Hartnett, Chairperson 

606 Allen Hall 

Degrees Offered: Master of Arts, Area of Emphasis for Doctor of Education 

Graduate Faculty: Members Andes, Callebs, Childress, Gibbins, Goeres, Hartnett, 
Hazi, Leary, Lilley, Martin, Meckley, Monahan, Neal, Nitzschke, E. R. Smith, Stepp, 
Sullivan, and Wilkin. Associate Members N. Bailey, Goodwin, Gordon, Hall, Hayes, 
Hunt, Sloane, Toth, J. E. Yeager, and Young. 

The education administration program prepares individuals for leadership 
positions primarily in elementary, secondary, and postsecondary institutions. 
Although most students are pursuing administrative careers, some are 
training for research or staff positions. The unit offers graduate programs 
leading to the master of arts and for certification in principalship, supervision, 
and superintendency. Upon admission to the program, all students are 
assigned an academic adviser. All students should contact their adviser for 
specific program and certification requirements. 

At all degree levels, the program is dedicated to the preparation of 
outstanding individuals to administer and improve education. 

Graduates of education administration occupy such prominent positions 
as: 

1. Administrative posts in school systems as superintendents, super- 
visors, and principals. 

2. Administrative posts in colleges and universities, including general 
administration, academic affairs, financial affairs, student affairs, adult and 
continuing education, and institutional research and planning. 

3. Administrative posts in governmental and public service agencies, 
including the West Virginia Department of Education, regional educational 
service agencies, and vocational rehabilitation agencies. 

Applicants must comply with the WVU requirements, the requirements 
of the College of Human Resources and Education, and the education 
administration program. Admission to all programs is contingent on assess- 
ment of complete official transcripts of all higher-education work attempted 
and other evidence the faculty may deem necessary to judge probable success 
in the graduate program. 

Master of Arts (M.A.) 

Optional programs are available in public school administration and 
supervision, higher education administration, and extension and continuing 
education. A two-semester, field-based experience is required before perma- 
nent professional certification can be acquired in public school administration 
and supervision. In order to graduate, the student must earn at least a 3.25 
grade-point average on all program work attempted. Students seeking WV 



EDUCATION ADMINISTRATION 161 



certification must pass a West Virginia Department of Education content 
specialization examination upon completion of their academic program. 

Certificate of Advanced Study Concentrations 

Advanced work beyond the master's degree may be taken with emphasis 
in school district central office administration or in principalship. A research 
project or a six-hour planned field-based experience is required. In order to 
graduate, the student must defend the research project and earn at least a 3.25 
grade-point average on all program work attempted. 

Doctor of Education Concentrations 

The doctor of education degree is offered with tracks in public school 
administration, higher education, and related educational organizations 
(such as state departments of education). Consistent with the regulations of 
the University, the College of Human Resources and Education, and the 
program of education administration, each track is individually designed by 
the doctoral student, the student's adviser, and the doctoral committee to meet 
the student's career aspirations. 

Education Administration (Ed. A.) 

300. Public School Organization and Administration. I, II, S. 3 hr. Basic concepts 
through which administrators, supervisors, and teachers gain understanding of 
general problems related to operation of schools and school systems. 

318. School Business Administration. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Sound business 
administration for central office school administrators. 

320. Personnel Administration. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The determination of student, 
employee, and organizational personnel needs and the development of plans and 
programs to meet these needs. 

330. Principles of Education Leadership. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Problems of school 
leaders in the areas of administration, supervision, and instruction. 

331. Principles of Supervision. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Elementary, junior high, and 
senior high supervision. 

333. School Law. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Overview of the generally accepted legal 
principles which affect the student, teacher, and principal in a public school 
setting. 

334. College Student and the Courts. 3 hr. PR: Consent. A study of the major areas of 
higher education law from the perspective of the college student. A case study 
approach. 

335. Introduction to College Student Personnel. 3 hr. PR: Consent. A study of the 
organization and administrative functioning components, concepts, and models of 
student personnel administration systems using a historical and topical approach. 
Conceptual approach based upon the student development model. 

336. Funding Raising and Foundation Management. 3-6 hr. PR: Consent. (Fall, even 
years) Studies in fund raising, alumni relations, and foundation management. 
(Also listed as Journ. 312.) 

351. Administrative Procedures in Adult Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. (Offered 
off-campus only.) Theories and principles of administering adult education 
organizations as they relate to planning, organizing, staffing, initiating, delegating, 
integrating, motivating, decision making, communicating, establishing standards, 
financing, budget defense and control, and measuring results. 

162 EDUCATION ADMINISTRATION 



352. Professionalism in Extension Service. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. (Offered off-campus 
only.) Role of Extension Service professionals in social change, study community 
systems; professional relationships, accountability, ethics, obligations to clientele. 

353. Community Education: Administration and Organization. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
(Offered off-campus only.) Study of the rationale, methods, and procedures in 
administering and programming community education. Experiences in planning, 
adapting, and evaluating programs independently and in consort with school and 
community plans. 

373. Professional Development. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: 
Department consent. Specially designed experiences for those interested in 
advancing professional skills in a particular specialty. (Not for degree credit in 
programs in the College of Human Resources and Education.) 

380. Topics in Supervision. 3 hr. Special knowledge and skills for supervisors K-12 
including media, computers, reading, multicultural education, testing, and special 
education. 

385. Practicum. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. 

388. Research-Evaluation-Assessment. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Research, evaluation, 
and assessment procedures related to administrative decision making and 
problem solving to increase the general effectiveness of educational institutions. 

389. School-Community Relations. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. A study of the systems 
through which the school can be interpreted to its community. 

391. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

395. The Principalship. I, S. 3 hr. A study of the active role of principals in Early, 
Middle, and Adolescent schools. Specific emphasis is placed upon the areas of 
effective schools, instructional leadership, special services and facilities manage- 
ment. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Theory. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

402. Superintendency. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education administration, or equiv., or 
consent. Roles, relationships, behaviors, and competencies which characterize the 
school superintendent and staff. (Offered in Fall and Summer of even years.) 

403. Education Administration Theory. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education administra- 
tion, or equiv., or consent. Interdisciplinary study of the major concepts of 
education administration theory and the application to educational settings. 

404. Public Education Finance. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education administration, or 
equiv., or consent. Basic concepts. (Offered in Spring of even years.) 

405. Administration of Educational Facilities. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education 
administration, or equiv., or consent. The planning, evaluation, and management 
of current and future school facilities. (Offered in Spring of even years.) 

406. Public Education and the Law. S. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education administration or 
equiv., or consent. Legal permissives and limitations involved in setting policy for 
organization of, and administration of public schools. (Offered in Fall and 
Summer of even years.) 

407. Collective Bargaining in Public Education. II. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education 
administration, or equiv., or consent. This course is designed to inform school 
administrators about the concepts and principles of negotiating and implementing 
collective bargaining agreements. (Offered in Spring of even years.) 

408. Organizational Analysis. I. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education administration, or equiv., 
orconsent. An examination of alternative means for the analysis of organizational 
structures, interrelationships, and functions. A field analysis is required. 

EDUCATION ADMINISTRATION 163 



409. Politics of Education. II. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education administration, or equiv., or 
consent. An examination of the internal political nature of school systems, and of 
the external influence of legislative, judicial, and administrative bodies, and 
interest groups. 

410. Advanced Supervision. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Exploring theories, research and 
practice of preservice and inservice instructional supervision in the classrooms of 
novice and mature teachers. (Also listed as C & I 410.) 

456. Administration of Academic Affairs. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Management, leadership, 
and administrative roles of academic affairs offices in colleges and universities 
including academic personnel, program definition, research and teaching issues, 
and other functions of academic oversight. 

457. Governance of Higher Education. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Formulation and implementa- 
tion of state master plans and the roles of state governing bodies in public and 
private institutions. 

458. College Business Management. I. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education administration, or 
equiv., or consent. Covers knowledge of such areas as budgeting, grants and 
contracts preparation and administration, formula funding, management informa- 
tion systems, purchasing procedures and practices, and zero base budgeting. 
[Offered in Fall of odd years.) 

459. Adult and Continuing Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. Principles, concepts, and processes 
involved in programming for adults in a community setting. Nature of adult 
learning, subject matter, and learning environment. (Offered in Summer of even 
years.) 

460. Development of Administration in American Higher Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. The 
administrative development of American higher education from 1636 to the 
present, including internal trends and external forces. 

461. Higher Education Administration. I, II, S. 3 hr. Organization and administration of 
higher education institutions. 

462. Higher Education Law. I, II, S. 3 hr. Critical legal issues of higher education- 
public and private — using a case study approach. 

463. Higher Education Finance. I, II, S. 3 hr. Financial concerns in higher education 
with emphasis on taxation and legislative actions, sources of income, budgeting, 
and cost analysis. [Offered in Fall of even years.) 

465. Institutional Research and Planning. I, II, S. 3 hr. Accumulation, analysis, and 
interpretation of data relevant to decision making and the allocation of institutional 
resources. (Offered in Spring of even years.) 

466. The College Student. I, II, S. 3 hr. Review of research and literature on college 
students from freshman through graduate school. Emphasis on student subcultural 
patterns. (Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

467. Higher Education Collective Bargaining. I, II, S. 3 hr. The process and content of 
collective bargaining in higher education and its impact on institutional governance 
and academic jurisdictions. (Offered in Spring of even years.) 

468. Community and Junior Colleges. I, II, S. 3 hr. Development, role, functions, 
organization, and curriculum of community and junior colleges in the United 
States, with special emphasis on West Virginia. 

469. Education Administration Internship. 3-6 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: 
Consent. Practical experiences in the administration of an organizational unit 
under the supervision of an administrator within the unit. 

164 EDUCATION ADMINISTRATION 



470. Principal's Planned Field-Based Experience. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Three years of 
successful experience as a teacher and have a position as principal or assistant 
principal. Consists of problem-solving techniques and seminar activities as 
applied to explicit problems in the professional environment. (Required for 
permanent certification as a principal.) 

471. Supervisor's Planned Field-Based Experience. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Three years of 
teaching experience, 15 hours completed in a master's degree program, and be 
employed full-time as a supervisor. Consists of problem-solving techniques and 
seminar activities as applied to explicit problems in the professional environment. 
[Required for permanent certification as a supervisor.] 

472. Superintendent's Planned Field-Based Experience. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Five years of 
successful experience as a teacher or supervisor, and employed as a superintendent 
or assistant superintendent. Consists of problem-solving techniques and seminar 
activities as applied to explicit problems in the professional environment. 
(Required for permanent certification as a superintendent.} 

480. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

485. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced subjects which are not 
covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent or through 
specially scheduled lectures. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. 

EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 

Anne H. Nardi, Department Chairperson 

608 Allen Hall 

Degree Offered: Master of Arts, Area of Emphasis for Doctor of Education 

Graduate Faculty: Members B. Bailey, Baker, Bonk, Fraley, Grasso, Hursh, McAvoy, A. 

H. Nardi, Reinhard, M. Tseng, E. A. Vargas, J. S. Vargas, and Walls. Associate 

Members Paterson and Stead. 

The educational psychology program in the College of Human Resources 
and Education offers opportunities for graduate study and research leading to 
the master of arts. Professional preparation focuses on learning and develop- 
ment, instruction and research. Accordingly, students are expected to achieve 
competencies in these areas. 

Programs are planned jointly by the student, the student's adviser, and 
the student's committee to meet particular career needs. Minor fields of study 
are also planned for each student as appropriate. In addition to the general 
requirements of the University and the College of Human Resources and 
Education, the department requires a core of courses and supporting compe- 
tencies of all graduate students. 

Educational psychologists function in a variety of settings. The program 
prepares and places competent educational psychologists in educational 
settings at all levels, such as educational agencies at local, state, and federal 
levels; public and private human service centers; medical centers; and 
business and industrial settings. 

Admission Requirements 

All applicants must comply with the general requirements of the 
University and the College of Human Resources and Education. The applicant 
must have an undergraduate degree from an accredited institution and must 
submit official transcripts of the undergraduate work, the official scores for 

EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 165 



either the Graduate Record Examination (GRE) or the Miller Analogies Test 
(MAT), a 500-word, written goal statement, a personal vita, and three letters 
of reference. 

Master of Arts Requirements 

Each student is expected to complete the following core of courses as part 
of the master's plan of studies: 

Ed. P. 300— Advanced Educational Psychology 
Ed. P. 311— Statistical Methods 1 
Ed. P. 320— Introduction to Research 
Ed. P. 330 — Foundations of Educational Measurement 
The option requires a minimum of 30 hours of course work including the 
completion and successful defense of a thesis or the completion of 30 hours of 
course work including the completion of a problem. Those students who plan 
to pursue a doctorate are required to take the thesis option. 

Doctor of Education Option 

The credentials for all applicants are screened by a three member 
admissions committee of the department. The criteria used as guidelines for 
evaluating applicants are: 

1. Total GRE scores of 1,100 or higher or MAT score of 55 or higher; 
international students from a country in which English is not the native 
language must have a TOEFL score of at least 550 and a combined total score 
of at least 1000 on the GRE verbal and the TOEFL. 

2. An undergraduate GPA of at least 3.0. 

3. A graduate GPA of 3.25 or higher for graduate work completed to date. 

4. The extent to which the applicant's goals and objectives may be 
accomplished if admitted to the program. 

5. Favorable recommendations and appropriate background experiences. 
To remain in good standing, a student must have an average grade of B or 

better for all courses in the program and make satisfactory progress toward 
the completion of the program competencies (as described in the following 
section). 

Option Requirements 

The doctor of education option requires a minimum of 72 hours of 
graduate credit beyond a bachelor's degree or 42 hours beyond a master's 
degree. In addition, completion of a core of required courses, fulfillment of 
competency requirements, and an approved dissertation are mandatory. 

Each student is expected to complete the following core courses as part of 
the doctoral plan of studies: 

Ed. P. 301 — Introductory Behavior Analysis: Human Resources 

Ed.P. 419— Research in Education (PR: Ed.P. 311) 

Ed. P. 440 — Human Development and Behavior 

Ed.P. 451 — Principles of Instruction 

The student is also expected to enroll in a doctoral seminar, Ed.P. 496, for 
two semesters for in-depth coverage of specialized content issues in educa- 
tional psychology. 

There are three competency areas in the program: learning and develop- 
ment, instruction, and research. Students are expected to fulfill the program 
competency requirements by meeting the goals and objectives specified for 
the program. The learning and development competency product will take the 

166 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 



form of a theoretical paper, the instruction competency product will be a 
course or other type of instructional sequence of comparable magnitude, and 
the research competency product will be a data-based research paper of 
publishable quality. 

Application Information 

Inquiries should be addressed to the Chairperson of the Department of 
Educational Psychology, Allen Hall, College of Human Resources and 
Education, West Virginia University, P.O. Box 6122, Morgantown, WV 
26505-6122. 

Educational Psychology (Ed. P.) 

231. Sampling Methods. I. 3 hr. PR: An introductory course in statistics. Methods of 
sampling from finite and infinite populations, choice of sampling unit, sample 
survey design, estimation of confidence limits and optimum sample size, and 
single- and multi-stage sampling procedures. (Also listed as Stat. 231.) 

260. Media and Microcomputers in Instruction. I, II, S. 3 hr. The effective operation and 
educational uses of educational media including microcomputers. Hands-on 
experience with equipment, and in designing materials for an instructional unit 
incorporating media and/or microcomputers. 

269. Behavioral Technology for Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 105 recommended. 
Behavioral science applied to instructional systems. Complex systems; feedback 
loops; measuring relevant variables, collecting data. Applying schedules of 
reinforcement. Effective stimulus control for students and administrators. Rela- 
tionship between system and institution. Behavioral ethics. 

300. Advanced Educational Psychology. I, II, S. 3 hr. Design for beginning graduate 
students. Psychological principles of learning and development as they relate to 
processes of classroom instruction. 

301. Introductory Behavior Analysis: Human Resources. I, II, S. 3 hr. Introduction to 
behavior analysis in education and human resources. Basic practice in measuring 
and shaping human behavior. A comprehensive examination of relationships 
among human organisms, environment, and behavior. 

311. Statistical Methods 1. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Math. 3. Basic concepts of statistical 
models, distributions, probability, random, variables, tests of hypotheses, confi- 
dence, intervals, regressions, correlation, transformation, F and Xq distributions, 
analysis of variance and sample size. 

312. Statistical Methods 2. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 311. Extension of basic concepts of 
statistical models, design of experiments, multiway classification models, facto- 
rials, split plot design, simple covariance, orthogonal comparisons, multiple 
linear and nonlinear regression and correlation analysis, chi-square and nonpara- 
metric statistics. 

320. Introduction to Research. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 311. Basic concepts, strategies, 
methodologies, designs, and procedures of research in education. Major emphasis 
on integrating research designs, measurements, and statistics for initiating 
research projects, collecting and analyzing data, and interpreting and reporting 
findings. 

321. Design of Experiments. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 320 or 330 or equiv. Elements of 
experimental design and their implications for (including computer graph) setting 
up research, sampling methods, recording and display of data, interpretation of 
data, design and analysis of experiments over time, trend analysis statistics 
appropriate in individual and group designs. 

EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 167 



330. Foundations of Educational Measurement. I, II, S. 3 hr. An examination and 
application of norm-referenced and criterion-referenced principles and procedures 
to the measurement and prediction of pupil performance. 

333. Nonparametric Statistics. II. 3 hr. PR: Introductory course in statistics. Single 
sample tests; for related samples, two independent samples, K related samples, K 
independent samples, and measures of correlation. 

341. Multivariate Methods 1. I. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 311 or equiv. Basic matrix operations, 
multiple regression analysis, discriminant analysis for two groups, multivariate 
analysis of variance for one- and two-way designs, and analysis of covariance 
involving multiple covariates. Applying SAS Procedure Matrix for data analyses. 

342. Multivariate Methods 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 311 or equiv. Matrix operations, 
multivariate multiple regression analysis, canonical correlation analysis, discrim- 
inant analysis for multiple groups, qualitative discriminant analysis applying 
Bayes' theorem, principal component analysis, and fundamentals of common 
factor analysis. Data analyses with SAS Procedure Matrix. 

343. Statistical Analysis in Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 330 or consent. Review 
measures of central tendency, percentiles, and correlation. Emphasis placed on 
correlation, regression, testing hypothesis, non-parametric tests, and other 
measures in analysis and inference. 

350. Applied Behavior Analysis. I. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 301 or equiv. Application of 
reinforcement theory as an instructional technique in changing human behavior. 
Analysis of problems in terms of behavior and the design of instruction and 
treatment programs to produce desired change. 

359. Conceptual Foundations of Behavior Analysis. I. 3 hr. Comprehensive introduction 
to the basic science of human behavior and its philosophy. Provides a conceptual 
framework for a variety of applied fields. 

360. Behavior Analysis: Teaching/Training Systems. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analyzing 
behavior of teachers/trainers; behavior analytic designs for teaching arrangements 
that respect scientific principles of human behavior from perspectives of both 
teachers and students; comparative analysis of teaching systems; cybernetic 
teaching; practice designing instruction. 

361. Cybernetic Systems of Individualized Instruction. II. 3 hr. PR: Ed.P. 360. 
Advanced analysis of behavioral education systems. Principles of designing and 
developing behavioral teaching systems. Applied design. Instructional system 
projects will be undertaken either individually or in teams. 

362. Instructional Systems— Administration and Management. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 
361 or consent. The conduct of instructional operations within instructional 
systems; the administration and management of organizational arrangements to 
support system approaches to instruction. 

364. Precision Teaching. II. 3 hr. Design and adapt materials for precision teaching for 
educational decisions and for research. 

370. Programmatic Research. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. How to conduct programmatic 
research: how to phrase the question, select a measurement procedure, collect 
data, and use data to make experimental decisions as work progresses. 

371. Behavioral Measurement. I, II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. Analysis of the behavior of 
measuring. Measurements of the behavior of individuals and in groups in applied 
settings. The role of measures in contingencies governing the behavior of subjects 
and practitioner. Techniques for graphic analysis. 

385. Practicum. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. 
168 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 



391. Problems in Advanced Educational Psychology. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 
397. Master's Degree Research or Theory. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

400. Verbal Behavior 1.1.3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 350 or consent. Behavioral analysis of complex 
verbal behavior in person to person contacts in text materials, and in instructional 
systems. 

401. Verbal Behavior 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 400 or consent. Advanced concepts in the 
analysis of verbal behavior. Review of current theoretical and experimental 
literature. 

420. Seminar in Educational Research. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 311 and consent. 
Identification of research problems in education, consideration of alternative 
designs and methods of investigations, and development of a research proposal at 
the advanced graduate level. 

423. Designing Single Case/Group Research. I. 3 hr. Strategies and tactics for 
observation, measurement, and experimental investigation of functional relation- 
ships between the behavior of individuals and their environment are presented as 
a means for understanding what controls human behavior. 

440. Human Development and Behavior. I, II, S. 3 hr. Psychological theories of human 
development. Contemporary theories analyzed and compared with emphasis on 
their implication for classroom behavior and the educational process. 

450. Psychological Foundations of Learning. I, II, S. 3 hr. Psychological and philosophi- 
cal foundations of major learning theories and their implications for instructional 
procedures. 

451. Principles of Instruction. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Basic principles of teaching- 
learning process implied in major learning theories; study of factors in learning, 
variables in instructional program, and principles of instructional design. 

452. Stimulus Conditions in Learning. II. 3 hr. Stimulus conditions and stimulus 
control in human association learning, discrimination learning, sequence learning, 
concept learning, and problem solving. 

480. Seminar in Educational Psychology. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

481. Special Topics in Educational Psychology. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Intended for graduate students with 
college teaching responsibility. Provides a supervised experience for graduate 
students in a teaching situation. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced areas of 
educational psychology. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Designed to permit graduate students 
an opportunity to present research to the assembled faculty and the graduate 
student body. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Dissertation. 

498. Thesis. I, II, S. 2-4 hr. PR: Consent. 



EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 169 



ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 

Ronald L. Klein, Chairperson of the Department 

823 Engineering Sciences Building 

Degrees Offered: Master of Science in Electrical Engineering 

Electrical Engineering and Computer Engineering Areas of Emphasis available for: 

Master of Science in Engineering, Doctor of Philosophy 
Graduate Faculty: Members Alajajian, Choudhry, Cooley, Feliachi, Heidary, Jera- 

bek, Joseph, Klein, Klinkhachorn, Kumar, McConnell, Middleton, Noore, Nutter, and 

Sims. 

The Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, with 16 faculty 
members, 250 undergraduate students, and over 60 graduate students, offers 
excellent graduate areas of emphasis in: 

1. Digital systems design, including microprocessor applications, ad- 
vanced computer architecture, and computer engineering. 

2. Control systems, including classical and modern theory and applica- 
tions. 

3. Signal processing, including digital filtering and communications. 

4. Electric power systems, including stability, transients, real time 
control, protection and steady state analysis. 

5. Electromagnetics, including antennas and microwave systems. 

6. Electronics, including circuit analysis, integrated circuit devices, and 
VLSI design. 

The Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering is authorized to 
admit students to the degree programs of the Master of Science in Electrical 
Engineering (M.S.E.E.) and the Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.). It 
also participates in the College of Engineering interdisciplinary Ph.D. degree 
program, offering the Ph.D. with specialization in electrical engineering and 
in computer engineering. M.S. graduate students must comply with the rules 
for Master's degrees as set forth in the Guidelines for Masters Degree 
Programs Offered in the College of Engineering. Ph.D. students must comply 
with the rule set forth in the brochure. The College of Engineering Doctor of 
Philosophy Program Guidelines. 

Approximately seven M.S. and two Ph.D. degrees are awarded each year. 
These graduates are in great demand by industry. 

Digital Systems Design 

Digital computer and microprocessor systems design is the most techno- 
logically intensive component in the electrical and computer engineering 
curriculum. Integrated circuits with increasing capabilities are rapidly being 
developed. In turn, the demand for electrical engineers and computer 
engineers with strong educational backgrounds is rising very rapidly. The 
electrical and computer engineering curriculum offers a large selection of both 
required and elective graduate courses in computer systems. These cover 
such topics as digital logic, microprocessor applications, interfacing, computer 
architecture, computer arithmetic, computer networks, performance evalua- 
tion, VLSI testing techniques, and fault tolerant computing. In addition, the 
department cooperates closely with the University's computer science faculty 
so that E.E. graduate students are able to include computer science courses in 
real-time operating systems, data structures, digital communication software, 

*The department is authorized to award the B.S.Cp.E. degree (Computer Engineering). At this 
time the department is planning for the M.S.Cp.E. degree; however, it has not yet been authorized. 
The Ph.D. is awarded by the College of Engineering and is available with emphasis in electrical or 
computer engineering. 

170 ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 



artificial intellegence, and interactive graphics in their program. A number of 
research projects utilizing computers and/or design of computer systems 
have been completed or are being completed by faculty and graduate students 
in the department. Some examples are real-time monitoring of environmental 
conditions in a coal mine using digital communications and a minicomputer, a 
distributed microprocessor monitoring system, a study of the methodology 
whereby reliability of an environmental monitoring system can be established, 
and a knowledge based decision support system for mining. 

The Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering operates and 
maintains a number of dedicated computers running the UNIX operating 
system. These computers support both the instructional and research activities 
of the department. These systems are a VAX 11/780, several PDP ll's, a 
variety of stand-alone microcomputers, and SUN workstations. In addition 
the department is linked to two College of Engineering computers, a Harris 
HCX-9 and a VAX 11/785, and to the extensive computing facilities of 
WVNET by means of an ETHERNET system. Through this link and a 1.5 
megabit microwave link to the computers in the Department of Computer 
Science, the department has access to several additional VAX systems and to 
many computing networks via INTERNET as well as to the Pittsburgh 
Supercomputing Center. 

Control Systems 

The study of control systems is a highly mathematical topic with a broad 
range of applications. This subject area interests those who wish to apply 
technology to control dynamical systems. Signals from sensors, usually 
processed by a computer, are necessary for proper control of a system. 
Consequently, the student interested in control systems will also take course 
work in computer systems and in digital signal processing. 

The graduate curriculum in control and systems engineering consists of 
courses in both classical and modern control theory and applications. These 
include modeling techniques in both the frequency and time domains for 
continuous and discrete time systems, optimal control, digital control, and 
estimation theory. Classical techniques for control systems and design tools 
such as root locus, Nyquist, and Bode methods for linear time-variant systems 
are also included. Also offered are courses in adaptive control, large scale 
systems, and stochastic control. 

Currently, the faculty in the control area are actively involved in a 
number of research areas. These include both sponsored and unsponsored 
research activities with some projects related to a specific application and 
some being of a theoretical nature having a wide range of applications. 
Research projects in control and systems engineering include the following: 

1. Research in large scale systems. The primary emphasis is on designing 
fast estimate algorithms for distributed systems. 

2. Analysis and design of tracking systems. Signal processing algorithms 
are designed to improve the position estimates provided by a tracking radar. 
Kalman filtering is the principal algorithm used in this study. 

3. Reduced order systems design. The optimization of reduced-order 
models, filters, and controllers is considered in this investigation. Optimal 
control theory is applied to linear stochastic models to obtain designs having 
limited complexity but excellent performance. 

4. Deconvolution methods for seismic signal processing. Methods of 
deconvolution for nonstationary seismic signals are investigated. These 
include modified Wiener and Kalman filtering techniques. 

ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 171 



5. Fast algorithm design. Minimum mean-square-error signal processing 
algorithms are developed subject to a constraint on the allowable number of 
multiplications per iteration. 

6. Modeling of power-system load dynamics. The daily variations in an 
electric utility's power demand are quite significant. For operational control 
of generation to meet user's demands, a dynamic model of the variations is 
useful. When developed, this model can be used to forecast future demand 
values and schedule power generation accordingly. 

The faculty in the control area has research sponsored by the U.S. Office 
of Naval Research, the National Science Foundation, the state of West 
Virginia, and private organizations. In addition to the topics listed above, the 
control group is beginning to be involved with control research in the robotics 
and flexible manufacturing area. 

Signal Processing and Communications 

Signal processing and communications is an area of emphasis and 
strength in the department. Faculty and graduate students conduct basic and 
applied research covering a wide range of topics. Signal detection, and circuit 
and system designs for processing these signals, particularly those using 
digital hardware, have experienced dramatic evolution recently. Important 
areas of application of research results obtained in the department include: 
medical diagnosis, geophysical prospecting, speech and speaker recognition, 
echo cancellation in satellite communications, and noise cancellation in 
acoustic systems. The graduate program includes several courses to support 
ongoing research in adaptive systems, fundamentals of digital signal pro- 
cessing (DSP), applications of DSP, and advanced topics in DSP. Also the 
department has a well established and equipped DSP research laboratory. 
Specific examples of research in progress are: speech modeling and compres- 
sion, adaptive noise cancellation, and three-dimensional tomographic imaging. 

In the speech modeling area, several new techniques for representing 
speech signals that promise more accurate representation without increasing 
the data rate are under investigation. The noise cancellation research 
addresses the generation of optimum algorithms as well as their time and 
frequency domain implementations. Hardware realizations of these algorithms 
using DSP microprocessors for acoustic noise cancellation are in progress. 
The three-dimensional tomographic research under way explores nondestruc- 
tive methods which are attractive ecologically, technically, and economically 
and which identify the properties to characterize underground resources. 

Electrical communications have made dramatic impacts on human life. 
The department offers courses in the basics of communications as well as 
more contemporary new developments, such as digital communications, 
pulse code modulation, frequency shift keying, and spread spectrum systems. 
Examples of research projects in communications engineering being conducted 
by faculty and graduate students are: development of an improved communi- 
cation system for an urban transportation system, electronically program- 
mable active filters, and the use of spread spectrum techniques. 

Electric Power Systems 

Electric power systems historically have been an area of emphasis in the 
electrical engineering curriculum, and the graduate program in power 
systems at WVU is quite mature. Five graduate courses are offered in this area 
on a regular basis. In addition, there are four senior elective/graduate courses 

172 ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 



on such subjects as distribution, industrial power systems, power electronics, 
and advanced power systems analysis. Outside research funding for work on 
reliability, grounding, transmission, electric transportation, and optimal 
design provides excellent support for both graduate students and faculty 
research. Extensive cooperation with industry also provides ample opportu- 
nity for field study. 

Electromagnetics, Antennas, and Microwave Systems 

Electromagnetics encompasses the generation, radiation, propagation, 
scattering, interaction with matter, and reception of electromagnetic energy 
from radio to optical frequencies. The department offers senior/graduate 
courses in antennas, microwaves, and radar. In addition, graduate-level 
courses in advanced electromagnetics, wave propagation, antenna theory, 
and guided waves are offered on a regular basis. Research projects have been 
in the areas of three-dimensional scattering, Fourier transform inversion 
methods, scattering from dielectrics, coupling to transmission lines, reflection 
from imperfect ground, geometric theory of diffraction, and numerical 
techniques. 

Electronics, Circuit Analysis, Integrated Circuits and VLSI 

Electronics, circuit analysis, IC's and VLSI are all areas of emphasis in the 
department. Courses are offered in advanced circuit analysis, integrated 
circuits (both analog and digital), radio frequency electronics, noise and 
grounding and power electronics. Recent research efforts in electronics 
include the development of electronic systems for monitoring and control 
with applications in mining and agriculture, RF high voltage electronics, and 
power electronics. Work in power electronics applications includes the 
development of an arc reduction controller for mine transportation systems 
and the design of a power system stabilizer. 

A major new thrust in the department is in the area of VLSI systems 
design. Circuit fundamentals, device physics, and system principles are 
emphasized along with teaching the fundamentals of CAD/CAE tools. 
Structured design and testing is also an active area of research. 

Master of Science in Electrical Engineering (M.S.E.E.) 
Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.) 

Admission Requirements 

1. An applicant must have an excellent record in previous college work. 
To be admitted as a regular graduate student in electrical and computer 
engineering, a cumulative grade-point average of 3.0 (of 4.0), or its equivalent, 
is required. 

2. An applicant who cannot meet condition 1 may be considered for 
admission in one of several conditional categories (See "Classification of 
Graduate Students," Part 2.) 

3. Applicants who are not WVU graduates must submit scores of the 
Aptitude Test of the Graduate Record Examination. 

4. All international applicants whose native language is not English 
must submit Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) scores. A 
minimum of 550 is required for admission. 

ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 173 



Course Requirements. All M.S. degree candidates will be required to meet 
the following minimum requirements: 

1. E.E. 325 and at least one course selected from the following: E.E. 315, 
333, 340, 350 or 357, 364, and Cp.E. 370— six hours minimum. 

2. Selected courses offered outside the Department of Electrical and 
Computer Engineering to provide analytical techniques supporting the 
student's graduate program. (For example: mathematics, physics, computer 
science, etc.) — six hours minimum. 

Each graduate student will be required to make an oral presentation of 
his/her research program to a graduate seminar near the conclusion of the 
student's research but before scheduling the final examination. 

Entrance Interview. All students beginning graduate study in the 
department will be given an entrance interview. The interview determines if a 
student needs any course work in order to pursue a graduate degree program 
and aids the faculty in advising the student. As a result of the interview, the 
student and the committee will prepare a mutually acceptable preliminary 
plan of study. 

Students with deficiencies in their undergraduate programs may be 
required to take some engineering or other courses as prerequisites for 
graduate courses. These deficiencies are usually noted as a condition for 
admission. However, they may also be specified as a result of the entrance 
interview. 

Qualifying Examination. Each student pursuing graduate study leading 
to the M.S. or the Ph.D. degree must pass a written qualifying examination at 
the level of competence appropriate to the degree sought. Details regarding 
this examination are available from the departmental graduate academic 
adviser. 

Thesis. Normally, a thesis is required of all M.S. candidates in electrical 
engineering. Approval by the Advisory and Examining Committee is necessary 
before the thesis will be accepted. The thesis must be presented in a form that 
conforms to general requirements of the University. 

Final Examination. Each candidate for an M.S. degree shall pass a final 
examination administered by the student's Advisory and Examining Commit- 
tee. This examination is oral and shall cover the defense of the thesis, or 
report, when applicable. 

Students may be admitted to the M.S. E.E. program if they hold a 
baccalaureate degree in electrical engineering or its equivalent. Students who 
lack this requirement may either make up the necessary undergraduate 
course work or may apply for admission to the M.S.E. program with emphasis 
in electrical engineering. 

The M.S.E. program is available to students who are interested in 
graduate work in electrical engineering, but who hold a baccalaureate degree 
from another field of engineering or from another discipline. Students with a 
baccalaureate degree from another field of engineering, or from one of the 
sciences, should contact the department for further information. In general, a 
student in the M.S.E. program will be expected to either complete certain 
undergraduate prerequisite courses or attain equivalent competence but will 
not be required to complete all of the requirements equivalent to the B.S.E.E. 
degree. However, all graduate students will be required to meet the prerequi- 
sites for each course taken for credit. 



174 ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 



Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

Students interested in the graduate program in electrical and computer 
engineering and who wish to pursue the Ph.D. degree should contact the 
department for information about the interdisciplinary Ph.D. program in 
engineering. While it is possible for a student with only a B.S. degree to enroll 
directly in the Ph.D. program, it is usually advisable forthe student to earn an 
M.S. degree first. The reason for this is the fact that a student's performance in 
an M.S. degree program with thesis provides insight into the student's 
research ability whereas most B.S. degree programs do not. Students in the 
Ph.D. program must comply with the regulations set forth in the College of 
Engineering brochure describing the doctor of philosophy in engineering. 

A student already in possession of a master's degree may apply directly to 
the Ph.D. program. Admission requirements are substantially the same as for 
the M.S.E.E. program. 

A Typical Ph.D. Degree Program 

A typical Ph.D. program will take between three and four years beyond 
the baccalaureate degree. The courses chosen for a student's program are 
selected to develop the student's expertise in his/her area of interest and to 
strengthen knowledge of other areas that will support the student's research 
endeavors. A possible outline for a Ph.D. program: 
First Year— M.S. degree 
Second Year- 
fa) An approved plan of study consisting mainly of courses in the 
300 and 400 series. 

(b) A pass in the qualifying examination for a Ph.D. 

(c) Admission to candidacy for the Ph.D. degree. 

(1) Passes on written and oral comprehensive examinations. 

(2) Successful defense of research proposal. 

(3) Completion of all program requirements set by the student's 
advisory and examining committee. 

Third Year — 

(a) Completion of research and the dissertation. 

(b) Dissertation defense in the final examination. 

Research work for the doctoral dissertation is expected to represent a 
significant contribution to engineering. It may entail a fundamental investiga- 
tion into a specialized area or a broad and comprehensive system analysis or 
design. 

Computer Engineering (Cp.E.) 

272. Introduction to Computer Architecture. 3 hr. PR: Cp.E. 71. Basic digital systems 
and computer architecture. Definition of information storage concepts, central 
processor designs, and input/output concepts. Content addressable memories, 
microprogrammed control, addressing techniques, interrupts, and cycle stealing. 
3 hr. rec. 

274. Introduction to Microprocessor-Based Design. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 156, 157, Cp.E. 272 or 
consent. Coreq.: Cp.E. 276. Microprocessor terminology and system design. A 
systems approach is taken to individual student designs of microprocessor 
systems. A "hands-on" electronic development approach is taken using state-of- 
the-art computer technology. 3 hr. rec. 

ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 175 



276. Microprocessor Laboratory. 1 hr. Coreq.: Cp.E. 274. Laboratory to accompany 
Cp.E. 274. A microprocessor-based single board computer (SBC) is designed and 
built using wire wrap techniques. Once operational, the SBC is programmed in 
assembly language. A semester project is required. 2 hr. lab. 

291. Special Topics in Computer Engineering. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation 
of topics not covered in regularly scheduled courses. 

370. Switching Circuit Theory 1. 3 hr. PR: Cp.E. 71 or equiv. Course presumes an 
understanding of the elements of Boolean or switching algebra. Study of both 
combinational and sequential switching circuits with emphasis on sequential 
networks. Advanced manual design and computer-aided design techniques for 
single and multiple output combinational circuits. Analysis and design of 
sequential circuits. Detection and prevention of undesired transient outputs. 3 hr. 
rec. 

372. Advanced Computer Architecture. 3 hr. PR: Cp.E. 71 and 272 or consent. Formal 
tools for designing large digital systems are introduced; formal descriptive 
algebras such as ISP, PMS, AHPL, CDL, and others. An in-depth study of 
computer system designs including instruction design and data path design. 3 hr. 
rec. 

373. Design of Computer Arithmetic Circuits. 3 hr. PR: Cp.E. 71 or equiv. Study of logic 
networks usable in performing binary arithmetic. Emphasis is on design of high- 
speed, parallel arithmetic units using binary numbers. Consideration of systems 
for representation of negative numbers. Available arithmetic subsystems are 
studied. 3 hr. rec. 

391. Advanced Topics. I, II. S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of advanced topics not 
covered in regularly scheduled courses. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research 
activities leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent 
scholarly project. 

471. Switching Circuit Theory 2. 3 hr. PR: Cp.E. 370, Math. 236, or equiv. Switching 
circuit theory is used to model the operations of networks of logic gates and 
flip-flops. Networks of this type are one form of discrete parameter systems. 
Studies the use of linear sequential machine as a means of modeling the general 
class of discrete parameter information systems. Systems approach and the 
techniques of abstract algebra used throughout. 3 hr. rec. 

472. Digital Systems Design 2. 3 hr. PR: Cp.E. 372 or consent. Students will design a 
specific digital system, i.e., CPU control, interrupt structure, memory, or input/ 
output system. They will design and test a project oriented toward one specific 
objective. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects which 
are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent or 
through specially scheduled lectures. 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. 

Electrical Engineering (E.E.) 

208. Power Electronics. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 130 and E.E. 158, 159 (concurrently) or consent. 
Application of power semiconductor components and devices to power systems 
problems: power control, conditioning, processing, and switching. Course supple- 
mented by laboratory problems. 3 hr. rec. 

176 ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 



216. Fundamentals of Control Systems. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 124, 127. Introduction to classical 
and modern control; signal flow graphs; state-variable characterization; time- 
domain, root locus, and frequency techniques; stability criteria. 3 hr. rec. 

230. Electrical Power Distribution Systems. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 131, 136 or consent. General 
considerations; load characteristics; subtransmission and distribution substations; 
primary and secondary distribution; secondary network systems; distribution 
transformers; voltage regulation and application of capacitors; voltage fluctua- 
tions; protective device coordination. 3 hr. rec. 

231. Power Systems Analysis. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 131, 136 or consent. Incidence and network 
matrices, Y-Bus, symmetrical and unsymmetrical faults, load-flow and economic 
dispatch, MW-frequency and MVAR-voltage control. The power system simulator 
will be used for demonstrations. 3 hr. rec. 

244. Introduction to Antennas and Radiating Systems. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 141 or consent. 
Fundamentals, parameters, radiation integrals, linear antennas, far-field approxi- 
mations, loop antennas, arrays and continuous distributions, broadband dipoles 
and matching techniques, broadband antennas, frequency independent antennas, 
and aperture antennas. 3 hr. rec. 

245. Microwave Circuits and Devices. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 141. UHF transmission line theory, 
impedance matching techniques and charts, general circuit theory of one port and 
multiports for waveguiding systems, impedance and scattering matrices, wave- 
guide circuit elements, microwave energy sources. Course will be supplemented 
by laboratory problems. 3 hr. rec. 

246. Radar and RF Systems Engineering. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 126, 141, 156, 157, 158, 159. An 
introduction to radar system fundamentals and techniques, including a discussion 
of modulation and detection theory, RF amplifiers, mixers, antennas, and 
propagation effects. Application of probability and statistics to signal processing 
and detection in noise. 3 hr. rec. 

248. Fiber Optic Communications. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 126, 141, 151. Fundamentals of optics 
and light wave propagation, guided wave propagation and optical wave guides, 
light sources and light detectors, couplers, connections, and fiber networks, 
modulation, noise, and detection in communication systems. 3 hr. rec. 

251. Noise and Grounding of Electronic Systems. 1 hr. PR: E.E. 158, 159 or consent. 
Analysis of extrinsic and intrinsic noise in electronic circuits. Design techniques 
to reduce or eliminate noise. 1 hr. rec. 

252. Operational Amplifier Applications. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 158, 159. Linear integrated 
circuit building blocks applied to such functions as amplification, controlled 
frequency response, analog-digital conversion, sampling, and waveform genera- 
tion. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

257. Transistor Circuits. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 158, 159 or equiv. Analysis and design of 
subcircuits used in analog integrated circuit modules. Transistor models, low- 
frequency response of multistage amplifiers, current sources, output stages and 
active loads. 3 hr. rec. 

259. Solid State RF Engineering. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 126, 141, 156, 158 or corequisite. 
Analysis and design of electronic circuitry for RF telecommunications systems. 
Treatment of electrical noise, RF amplifiers, oscillators and mixers. Applications 
of AM/FM/TV. Receiver and transmitter technology for HF/VHF/UHF and 
satellite communication. 3 hr. rec. 



ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 177 



264. Introduction to Communication Systems. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 126. Introduction to the 
first principles of communication system design. Analysis and comparison of 
standard analog and pulse modulation techniques relative to band-width, noise, 
threshold, and hardware constraints. Communication systems are treated as 
opposed to individual circuits and components of the system. 3 hr. rec. 

268. Digital Signal Processing Fundamentals. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 126, 127, 156, 157. Theories, 
techniques, and procedure used in analysis, design, and implementation of digital 
and sampled data filters. Algorithms and computer programming for software 
realization. Digital and sampled data realizations, switched capacitor and charge- 
coupled device IC's. 3 hr. rec. 

281. Biomedical Electrical Measurements. 2 hr. PR: E.E. 158 and 159 or consent. 
Biomedical instrumentation for human subjects. Origin and characteristics of 
biological and electrical signals. Instrument design requirements and detailed 
analysis of cardiac support and intensive-care monitoring equipment. 2 hr. rec. 

291. Special Topics in Electrical Engineering. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation 
of topics not covered in regularly scheduled courses. 

314. Stochastic Systems Theory. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Probability distribution and 
density functions. Bayes rule and conditional probability. Stochastic process and 
linear systems. Gauss-Markov Process. Optimal linear estimation. Introduction 
to Wiener and Kalman filtering. Decision theory fundamentals. 3 hr. rec. 

315. State Variable Analysis of Systems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Matrix theory and linear 
transformations as applied to linear control systems. The state-space on time- 
domain study of stability, controllability, observability, etc. 3 hr. rec. 

316. Optimal Control. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Methods of direct synthesis and optimization 
of feedback systems; Wiener theory; Pontryagin's maximum principle; dynamic 
programming; adaptive feedback systems. 3 hr. rec. 

317. Introduction to Digital Control. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 216 or equiv. or consent. Sampling of 
continuous-time signals; transform analysis; analysis of discrete-time systems. 
Translation of analog design. Controllability and observability; State-space 
design methods; and introduction to optimal control for discrete systems. 3 hr. rec. 

325. Advanced Linear Circuit Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Systematic formulation of 
circuit equations. Use of operational techniques to find total solutions. Applica- 
tions and characteristics of the Laplace and Fourier transforms, matrix algebra, 
complex variable theory and state variables are made to circuit analysis and 
elementary ciruit synthesis. 3 hr. rec. 

330. Advanced Electrical Machinery. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 131, 136 or consent. Theory and 
modeling of synchronous, induction, and direct-current machines, and their 
steady-state and transient analysis. 3 hr. rec. 

331. Electrical Power Systems 2. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 231 or consent. Electrical transients on 
power systems including traveling waves due to lightning and switching. 
Principles of lightning protection. 3 hr. rec. 

333. Application of Digital Computers to Power System Analysis 1. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 231 or 
consent. Incidence and network matrices; algorithms for their formulation; three- 
phase networks; short-circuit calculations; load-flow studies. 3 hr. rec. 

334. Power System Control and Stability. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 131, 315. Review of stability 
theory, classical transient analysis, dynamical models of synchronous machines, 
power system stability under small and large perturbations, dynamic simulation 
of power systems. 3 hr. rec. 

178 ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 



340. Electromagnetic Fields and Guided Waves 1. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 141 or equiv. Plane 
waves in dielectrics, conducting, and anistropic media; polarization, radiation; 
duality; image theory; equivalence principle; Green's functions; integral equations; 
plane wave functions. 3 hr. rec. 

344. Advanced Antenna Theory. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 244 or equiv. Aperture antennas; 
geometrical theory of diffraction; horns; reflectors and lens antennas; antenna 
synthesis and continuous sources; moment method; Fourier transform methods; 
antenna measurements. 3 hr. rec. 

350. Electronic Circuits. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 158 and 159, or equiv. Analysis and design of 
electronic circuits; low-pass amplifiers, feedback, frequency response and stability 
of feedback amplifiers, nonlinear analog circuits. 3 hr. rec. 

357. Linear Integrated Circuits. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 158, 159 or equiv. (Primarily for students 
specializing in communication and electronics.] Techniques of integrated circuit 
design and fabrication. Development of models descriptive of linear and nonlinear 
transistor operation. Design and analysis of high-frequency turned, direct- 
current, and differential amplifiers. 3 hr. rec. 

358. Integrated Logic Circuits. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 156, 157 or equiv. or consent. (Intended for 
students specializing in digital circuits.] Techniques of integrated circuit design 
and fabrication. Development of transistor model for nonlinear operation. Design, 
analysis, and comparison of emitter-coupled direct-coupled, diode-transistor, and 
transistor-transistor integrated logic circuits. 3 hr. rec. 

364. Communication Theory. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 264 or consent. Detailed study of probability 
theory and its use in describing random variables and stochastic processes. 
Emphasis on applications to problems in communication system design. 3 hr. rec. 

366. Information Theory 1. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 364. Probability concepts; theory of discrete 
systems; encoding; theory of continuous systems; systems with memory; the 
fundamental theorem of information theory. 3 hr. rec. 

391. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of advanced topics not 
covered in regularly scheduled courses. 

397. Masters Degree Research or Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research 
activities leading to a thesis or problem report. 

411. Nonlinear Control System Analysis. PR: Consent. Application of Liapunov's and 
Popov's methods to nonlinear control systems, together with classical techniques. 
3 hr. rec. 

416. Stochastic Estimation and Control. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 316 or consent. Techniques of 
optimal estimation and control for linear systems. Balanced emphasis is placed on 
both continuous and discrete time systems. Some advance topics of interest will 
be considered. 3 hr. rec. 

430. Real-Time Control of Electrical Power Systems. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 231 or consent. 
Application of computers to modern control theory for reliable and economic 
real-time operation of integrated power systems. 3 hr. rec. 

432. Protection of Power Systems. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 231 or consent. Principles of relay 
protection for faults on transmission lines and other devices. Use of overcurrent, 
differential distance, and pilot relaying systems. Special relay applications. 
Determination of short-circuit currents and voltages from system studies. 3 hr. 
rec. 

440. Electromagnetic Fields and Guided Waves 2. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 340 or equiv. General 
theory of waveguides, cavity resonators, modes, losses, discontinuities, power 
considerations, scattering, perturbational and variational techniques. 3 hr. rec. 

466. Information Theory 2. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 366. Continuation of E.E. 366. 3 hr. rec. 

ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 179 



491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects which 
are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent or 
through specially scheduled lectures. 

496. Graduate Seminar. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Technical presentations by faculty members, 
outside speakers, and graduate students. Each student will give an oral presenta- 
tion describing the student's research before the student's final examination. This 
will typically be a 40-minute presentation before the faculty and graduate 
students. 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. 

ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 

W. Michael Reed, Interim Chairperson of Graduate Programs 

602 Allen Hall 

Degree Offered: Master of Arts 

Graduate Faculty: Members Barksdale, Bower, Deay, DeCosta, Haas, Hoffman, Holtan, 

Iannone, Moxley, Obenauf, Phillips, Reed, Rinehart, Saltz, P. Smith, and Thomas. 

Associate Members Carline and Hobbs. 

The Division of Education provides opportunities for graduate study and 
research leading to the degree of master of arts (M. A.) for educators and other 
professionals with educational responsibilities. The primary purpose of the 
masters program in elementary (early/middle) education is to provide 
increased knowledge, skill, and competence for teachers working with 
children in the elementary (early/middle) school setting. The graduate 
elementary (early/middle) teacher education program has three major areas 
of emphasis: general education, subject area curriculum and methods, and 
electives. 

These emphases are planned jointly by the student, the student's adviser, 
and the student's committee to meet the career needs of the student. In 
addition to the general requirements of the University and the College of 
Human Resources and Education, there is a core of courses or course areas and 
supporting competencies required of all graduate students in the department. 

The purpose of the program is to prepare master teachers who work with 
children from nursery through elementary school. The program provides the 
opportunity to specialize in early childhood, middle childhood, or a subject 
area. With adviser approval, electives may be selected that enhance the 
student's personal goals. While teacher certification is not a part of the 
master's program, students, through careful planning, may be able to 
complete some courses that are required for certification while working on a 
graduate degree. 

For further information on admission and program requirements, write 
Chairperson of Graduate Programs, Division of Education, College of Human 
Resources and Education, 602 Allen Hall, P.O. Box 6122, Morgantown, WV 
26506-6122. 

Master of Arts in Elementary Education 

All applicants must comply with the general requirements of the 
University, the College of Human Resources and Education, and the Division 
of Education. 



180 ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 



Ho 
B 


C 


3 


3 


3 


3 


3 


3 


3 


3 





3 


3 











3 


3 


3 





3 


3 


J3_ 


_3_ 


27 


24 


3 


12 



I. Required Courses Program A 

C&I 301 3 

C&I 330 3 

C&I 340 3 

C&I 350 3 

C&I 388 

C&I 391 

C&I 497 6 

Ed. F. 320 or 340 3 

Ed. P. 320 3 

Ed. P. 300 or 330 3 

Rdng. 321, or 323, or 327, or 330 _3_ 

Total Required Courses 30 

General Education Electives 

(All elective courses must be approved by the 

adviser before enrollment.) 

Total for Master's Degree 30 30 36 

Program A— Thesis required. 

Program B— Research problem required. 

Program C — 36-semester hour course work program. 

Master of Arts 

Emphasis: Early Childhood Education 

Hours 

I. Required Courses Program ABC 

C&I 312 3 3 3 

C&I 314 3 3 3 

C&I 316 3 3 3 

C&I 391 3 

C&I 497 6 

C&I 317 or Rdng. 323 3 3 3 

CDFS 341 3 3 3 

Ed. P. 320 3 3 

Ed. P. 330 _3_ J3_ 3_ 

Total Required Courses 27 24 18 

II. Approved Electives 

Restricted Electives in Early Childhood Education 3 3 3 

Supportive Electives in Education 15 

(All elective courses must be approved by the 

adviser before enrollment.) 

Total for Master's Degree 30 30 36 

Program A— Thesis required. 

Program B— Research problem required. 

Program C— 36-semester hour course work program. 



ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 181 



Curriculum and Instruction (C&i) 

205. The Junior High School. I, II, S. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Developing philosophy, 
program, and practices of the junior high school. 

210. Early Childhood Education 1. 1, II, S. 3 hr. PR: CDFS 216, Ed. P. 103 or 105. (A field 
experience with children 3-5 years of age is required.} Introduction to methods 
and materials in early childhood education for curriculum, instruction and 
program organization, development, and evaluation. The content of this course is 
applicable to field placement in a preschool, nursery school, day care, and/or child 
development center. 

211. Early Childhood Education 2. 1, II, S. 3 hr. PR: CDFS 216, Ed. P. 103 or 105. (A field 
of experience with children 3-5 years of age is required.) This course is designed 
for individuals who will be working within early childhood programs for children 
under 8 years of age. The various aspects of early childhood education are studied 
in relationship to organizational and administrative structures. This includes 
planning, budgeting, staffing, supervising, and evaluating comprehensive learning 
facilities for young children. 

212. Methods in Preschool Education. I. 3 hr. PR: Ed. F. 1 or C&I 7 or equiv. 
Development of an experiential model of teaching young children. Application of 
methods in basic needs areas of nursery-early childhood education consistent 
with an experiential model of teaching. Emphasis on safety, multicultural 
education, classroom management, working with special needs populations and 
mainstreaming, and cooking and nutrition. 

214. Creative Experiences in Early Childhood. II. 3 hr. PR: Ed. F. 1 or C&I 7 or equiv. 
Examination of creative experiences for young children and their relationship to 
child development. A special focus on play behavior as a learning medium with 
emphasis on program planning, curriculum development, and instructional 
strategies. 

216. Early Language and Communication Experiences. I. 3 hr. PR: Ed. F. 1 or C&I 7 or 
equiv. This course presents activities for developing language and communication 
skills in children 2-5 years of age. It covers a broad range of temporary and 
enduring forms of communication in visible and audible media. 

218. Management of Preschool Education. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Ed. F. 1 or C&I 
7 or equiv. (A field experience with children 2-5 years of age is required.} 
Planning, designing, and assessing programs for children ages 2-5 years with 
emphasis on management skills. 

224. Approaches to Teaching Language. II. 2 hr. PR: Lingu. 1 and Engl. 111. Designed for 
prospective teachers of English and language arts. Focus is upon planning and 
implementing methods of teaching English as a language. Materials and resources 
appropriate to public school instruction are analyzed and utilized. 

225. Approaches to Teaching Literature. II. 2 hr. PR: Junior standing. Designed for 
prospective teachers of English and language arts. Course focuses upon method- 
ologies for teaching literature in public schools. Workshop format will provide 
opportunities for peer teaching activities as students apply methods of teaching 
literature. 

267. The Music Education Program. S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Organization and administra- 
tion of the complete music education program for grades 1-12. 

280. Special Problems and Workshops. I, II, S. 2-4 hr. (Maximum of 8 semester hours 
may be applied toward the master's degree.] PR: 14 hr. in education. Credits for 
special workshops and short intensive unit courses on methods, supervision, and 
other special topics. 

287. Advanced Clinical Experience. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Clinical experience in 
teaching-learning situations at any level. 

182 ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 



300. U.S. Education for International Students. I. 3 hr. PR: International students with 
graduate status and developing oral and written English skills. To assist 
international students in understanding the U.S. system of education. Included: 
dominant U.S. values related to education; structure of U.S. education at all levels; 
models and strategies; field trips; international comparisons. 

301. The Elementary -School Curriculum. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 20 hr. of undergraduate credit 
in elementary education, or consent. Analysis of curriculum designs in elementary 
education with emphasis on methods and techniques of development. 

306. Curriculum for Middle Childhood. I, S. 3 hr. Survey course which includes: 
historical, social, and cultural influences on the curriculum; the learner character- 
istics; curriculum and instructional organization and their relationship to facilities 
available; evaluation and implementation of middle childhood curriculum. 

307. Curriculum Development. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: C&I 301 or 304 or C&I 312 and Ed. F. 320 
or consent. Basic foundation in the concepts underlying the school curriculum in 
American society. 

308. Introduction to Alternative Learning Environments. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. 
This course will provide opportunities for educators to explore and analyze the 
trends and issues in alternative learning environments in public education. 

309. Experiences in Alternative Learning Environments. S. (Alternate Years.) 6 hr. PR: 
C&I 308, Ed. F. 320, consent. This course helps teachers to learn and practice skills 
that are needed to be an effective teacher in an alternative teaching environment. 

312. EarJy Childhood Curriculum. I. 3 hr. PR: C&I 210. 211, or consent. Historical, 
theoretical perspectives in curriculum development for early childhood education 
including social, creative, cognitive, and physical goals. 

314. Early Childhood Instruction. II. 3 hr. PR: C&I 210, 211, or consent. Design of 
instruction for individualization and development of mastery in curriculum goals 
for early childhood. 

316. Early Childhood Program Development and Evaluation. I. 3 hr. PR: C&I 210, 211 or 
consent. Development and evaluation of facilities, programs, and support systems 
for early childhood education. 

317. Language Skills in Early Childhood. S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. An examination of 
language skills and the sequence in which they are learned in early childhood with 
special attention to the environment of instructional influences which could 
contribute to their acquisition. (Offered in alternate summers.) 

318. Storytelling in Early Childhood. I, II. 3 hr. This course will assist students in 
telling, reading, and creating stories for children. Techniques, methods, and 
research effective in the art of storytelling will be examined and applied as they 
relate to total child development. 

319. Behavior Modification: Early Childhood Education. S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Applica- 
tion of behavior modification to early childhood education with special attention 
to an examination of the methods and values involved. [Offered in alternate 
summers.) 

330. Mathematics in the Elementary School. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 20 hr. of undergraduate 
credit in elementary education or consent. Materials and methods of instruction 
for modern mathematics programs. 

333. Corrective Techniques in Mathematics Education. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
Materials and methods used in diagnosis and remediation of learning difficulties 
in mathematics. 

ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 183 



337. Mathematics in the Junior High School and Middle School. II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. college 
mathematics or consent. Study of teaching of mathematics in the junior high 
school and/or middle school; application of mathematics content to teaching; 
instructional techniques and materials. 

340. Science in the Elementary School. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 20 hr. of undergraduate credit in 
elementary education, or consent. Analysis of methods, curriculum patterns, and 
trends in elementary school science. Understanding and development of scientific 
attitudes appropriate at the elementary-school level. 

344. Science in the Secondary School. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Nature and function of science 
in secondary schools supported by current research and development; includes 
analysis of structure and practice of science curriculum and instruction issues. 3 
hr. lee. 

350. Social Studies in the Elementary School. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 20 hr. of undergraduate 
credit in elementary education, or consent. Comprehensive consideration of 
objectives, content, methods, including unit procedures; materials including 
objects, models, exhibits, and museum items, as well as textbooks, collateral 
reading, maps, and graphs; means of evaluating social growth and development. 

357. Principles of Economic Education. S. 3 hr. Workshop for principals, teachers, and 
supervisors with emphasis on the economic structure of our society and methods 
of integrating economics into the school program. (Sponsored jointly by College of 
Human Resources and Education and College of Business and Economics.) 

359. Classroom Simulation Techniques. II, S. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. To provide 
experience in the use of learning games and simulations as an instructional 
technique and the opportunity to develop — under supervision — simulated activi- 
ties and games to be used in a variety of learning environments. 

373. Professional Development. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: 
Department consent. Specially designed experiences for those interested in 
advancing professional skills in a particular specialty. (Not for degree credit in 
programs in the College of Human Resources and Education.) (Graded as S/U.) 

377. Children's Television: Problems and Potentials. S. 4 hr. PR: Consent. Provides 
parents and teachers with strategies for monitoring, evaluating, and directing 
television viewing habits of youth; pertinent research studies, school and 
community action programs, and home and school education programs are 
discussed and practiced. 

380. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

383. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

385. Supervision of Student Teachers. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. For persons working or 
intending to work with education students in field experiences. Course focuses on 
the development and application of supervisory skills involved in effective 
guidance of student teachers and education students. 

386. Teaching Strategies for Middle Childhood. II, S. 3 hr. Surveys instructional 
strategies appropriate for facilitating preadolescent learning. Includes the role of 
the teacher; how the teacher uses resources within and outside the classroom as 
they relate to instruction of the learner, age 10-14 years. 

387. Advanced Teaching Strategies. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. Deals with 
methods as one critical variable in teaching. Examines ways and means to 
describe, plan the use of, implement, and evaluate teaching methods. Analysis and 
implementation of teaching methods and component skills of teaching. 

184 ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 



388. Classroom Organization and Management. I, S. 3 hr. Discusses research identifying 
components of classroom organization and environment which influence learning; 
reviews teacher behaviors and learning activities which research indicates lead to 
more effective teaching. Stresses implementation strategies relevant to classroom 
settings. 

389. Education That Is Multicultural I, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or consent. 
Provides opportunities for educators to increase awareness of their own ethnic 
backgrounds, foster understanding of racial/ethnic diversity, and develop appro- 
priate teaching materials and methods for elementary and secondary curricula. 

391. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

395. Practicum. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. per sem. or session— aggregating not more than 12 hr. 
PR: 9 graduate hr. in Education. (Enrollment with permission of adviser or 
instructor in consultation.) Special individual and group projects. To provide 
appropriate residence credits for special workshops, prolonged systematic 
conference, or problems and projects in education. 

407. Instructional Models of Teaching. II. 3 hr. PR: Ed. F. 320 or consent. Concepts and 
processes involved in teaching and their relationship to the development of 
teacher education programs. 

408. Contemporary Determinants of Curriculum. II, S. 3 hr. PR: C&I 307 and Ed. F. 340 
or consent. Contemporary determinants of curriculum development. 

409. Curriculum Theories. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: C&I 408 or consent. Theories underlying 
curriculum from the past to the present and projected to the future. 

438. Survey of Major Issues in Mathematics Education. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
Individual and group research on selected topics in mathematics education. 

457. Social Studies Curriculum Development, K-12. 1. 3 hr. PR: C&I 301 or 304 and C&I 
350 or 354. Stresses the application of principles and procedures pertinent to the 
development of social studies programs in elementary and secondary schools. 
Strong emphasis will be placed on the analysis of current social studies 
curriculum materials. 

488. Higher Education Curriculum. II. 3 hr. Analysis and evaluation of post-secondary 
curriculum with emphasis on organizing, translating, and applying findings. 
Topics include curriculum shaping forces; institutional patterns; policy, compo- 
nents and change; and principles and techniques of development, experimentation, 
and evaluation. 

489. Teaching in Higher Education. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. A general methods 
course involving instructional concepts and strategies for present/prospective 
faculty in higher education. Comprehensive consideration of objectives, planning 
criteria and methods, teaching strategies, and evaluation in meeting the needs of 
adult learners. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Intended for graduate students 
with college teaching responsibility. Provides a supervised experience in a 
teaching situation. (Graded as S/U.J 

491. Advanced Study Project in Education. I, II, S. 3-6 hr. Research for the program 
leading to the Certificate of Advanced Study in Education (C.A.S.). 

496. Advanced Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Opportunity for the advanced graduate 
student to present the student's research to faculty and/or student groups. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

499. Colloquium in Curriculum and Instruction. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For 
graduate students not seeking course work credit, but who wish to participate in 
academic programs. 

ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 185 



ENDODONTICS 

Arthur E. Skidmore, Chairperson of the Department 

1067 Health Sciences Center 

Degree Offered: Master of Science 

Graduate Faculty: Members Biddington, Rice, and Skidmore. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

The School of Dentistry and its Department of Endodontics offer a 
program of advanced study and clinical training leading to the degree of 
master of science (M.S.). The program requires a minimum of 24 months (two 
academic years and two summer sessions) of full-time residency in the School 
of Dentistry and is designed to qualify dentists for careers in endodontic 
clinical practice, teaching, and research. 

Inquiries concerning this program should be directed to the Office of the 
Associate Dean for Postdoctoral Programs. Applicants will be processed in 
the School of Dentistry. Applicants approved for admission to the program 
will be notified soon after December 1. 

Requirements for Admission to the Endodontic Program 

1. Graduation from an accredited school of dentistry. 

2. Evidence of scholastic and clinical achievement that would indicate 
the applicant's ability to progress in a program of this nature. 

3. Each applicant must file with the Department of Endodontics all 
information requested in the departmental application form. 

Requirements for Master of Science Degree 

1. Fulfillment of general WVU graduate study requirements. 

2. Twenty-four months (two academic years and two summer sessions) 
of consecutive residency at the WVU School of Dentistry. 

3. An approved master's thesis based on original research completed 
during the period of residency in an area related to endodontics. 

4. Must satisfactorily pass a final oral examination. 

5. Must complete a minimum of 57 credit hours. These include 32 hours of 
endodontic courses, a minimum of 18 hours of selected basic sciences 

subjects, and a thesis (seven hours). 

6. Must have demonstrated satisfactory clinical competency in the 
student's field. 

7. Must have maintained a grade level commensurate with graduate 
education. 

Dentistry (Dent.) 

400. Advanced Oral Surgery. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced study of 
therapeutics, hospital protocol, and surgical aspects of oral surgery involving 
lectures, seminars, demonstrations, and clinical applications. 4 

Endodontics (Dent.) 

390. Clinical Endodontics. I, II, S. 1-5 hr. (May be repeated for credit.} PR: Graduate of 
an accredited dental school and admission to the Advanced Education Program in 
Endodontics or consent. Clinical endodontic practice in the areas of: ordinary 
endodontic cases, complex endodontic cases, hemisection, root amputation, 
replantation, transplantation, endodontic implantation, vital pulp therapy, apexi- 
fication, and bleaching. 

186 ENDODONTICS 



391. Endodontic Theory. I, II, S. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Provides seminar discussions in the 
topics of: basic endodontic techniques, advanced endodontic techniques, endodon- 
tic literature review, case presentation, and advanced endodontic theory. 

490. Endodontic Teaching. S. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Selected teaching experiences 
including lecture, clinical, and laboratory teaching of undergraduate endodontic 
courses. 

497. Endodontic Research. I, II, S. 2-3 hr. PR: Consent. Students will prepare a research 
protocol, conduct experimental research, and prepare a thesis of original endodon- 
tic research. 

Microbiology (M. Bio.) 

317. Special Problems in Microbiology. I, II, S. 1-7 hr. per sem. with a total of 24 hr. 
available. Pathogenic microorganisms, including immunology and antimicrobial 
agents. 

Pathology (Path.) 

382. Oral Histopathology. I, II. 1-2 hr. PR: Path. 338, 353, consent. Microscopic study of 
head and neck lesions. 

401. Special Studies in Oral Pathology. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced seminaror 
independent study of local and/or systemic disease processes affecting oral and 
facial structures. 

Pharmacology and Toxicology (Pcol.) 

360. Pharmacology. I. 4 hr. PR: Dental student standing or consent. Lecture and 
demonstrations on pharmacologic actions and therapeutic uses of drugs. 

Statistics (Stat.) 

311. Statistical Methods 1. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 3. Statistical models, distributions, 
probability, random variables, tests of hypotheses, confidence intervals, regres- 
sion, correlation, transformations, F and Chi-square distributions, analysis of 
variance and multiple comparisons. (Also listed as Ed. P. 311 and Psych. 311. J 

ENGLISH 

Rudolph P. Almasy, Chairperson of the Department 

Frank Scafella, Ph.D. Supervisor 

Timothy Adams, M.A. Supervisor 

Stansbury Hall 

Degrees Offered: Master of Arts, Doctor of Philosophy 

Graduate Faculty: Members Adams, Allen, Blaydes, Conner, Davis, Eaton, French, 
Gandolfo, Ginsberg, Miles, Nelson, O'Donnell, Oderman, Scafella, Stasny, Stitzel, 
Torsney, B. Ward, and H. Ward. Associate Members Almasy, Buck, Fuller, High, 
MacDonald, Madison, Peterson, Racin, Sailer, Sedley, and Thomas. 

Master of Arts (M.A.) 

Admission. To be admitted to the Department of English as prospective 
candidates for the degree of master of arts (M.A.), students are expected to 
have completed work comparable to the department's undergraduate require- 
ment for English majors (but with records distinctly above the average), and 
to present as part of their applications their scores on the Graduate Record 
Examination General Aptitude Test, and, if non-native speakers of English, 
their TOEFL scores. Past experience has shown that successful graduate 
students usually score at least at the 60th percentile in the verbal section of 
the GRE. 

ENGLISH 187 



The applicant may be admitted as a regular graduate student— one who is 
approved for a degree program; as a provisional graduate student — one who is 
accepted for study but at the time of acceptance does not meet all the 
requirements for regular admission; or as a non-degree graduate student. (The 
GRE and TOEFL scores are not required of non-degree graduate students.) 

Course Requirements. A candidate for the M.A. degree is expected to 
complete courses covering the major periods and the works of the major 
authors of English and American literature. The minimum requirement is 30 
hours of graduate work in English, 24 hours of which must be on the 300-400 
course levels. English 492, Introduction to Literary Research, is required of all 
master's degree candidates, and must be taken in the first year of graduate 
study. Two 400-level seminars are also required. (Neither English 490, 
required of all teaching assistants, nor English 492 may be substituted for the 
seminar requirements.) No more than six hours of course work outside the 
Department of English may apply towards the 30-hour requirement. Any 
hours outside the Department of English to be applied to the requirement must 
be relevant to the student's program and approved by the graduate supervisor 
before registration. Students should check with the English Department 
about the most current courses available. 

Thesis Option. A candidate for the M.A. degree has the option of taking 30 
hours of course credit, with the above requirements, or of taking 24 hours of 
course work and writing a thesis, for six hours credit, under the supervision of 
a thesis adviser. Information about the procedure for filing application for 
approval of projects, and about dates for the submission of theses, is available 
at the department office. The thesis may be a work of scholarship, of criticism, 
or of creative writing (original poetry, drama, or fiction). A candidate may 
register for up to 12 hours of thesis credit, but only six hours may be included 
in the 30 hours required for the degree. Thesis hours will be graded as S 
(Satisfactory) or U (Unsatisfactory) progress. 

Examinations. A student electing to write a thesis is expected to make an 
oral defense of the finished work before his/her thesis committee. All 
students, whether they elect the thesis option or the 30-hours' course work 
option, are required to take two three-hour comprehensive written examina- 
tions in English and American literature. Each student taking these examina- 
tions will have the option, elected and approved in advance of the examination 
date, of having part of the comprehensive examination restructured to 
provide that student the opportunity of being examined in a specialized area 
of expertise in literary, linguistic, or writing studies. The only question for 
which such a substitution may not be made is the analysis of a short poem: 
answering this question is required of all students taking the examinations. 

The student will normally take these examinations in the semester or 
session following that in which the student has established acceptable credit 
in 24 hours of graduate course work with a minimal average of 3.0. The 
examinations will be conducted not later than four weeks before the last day 
of classes of a semester, or three weeks before the end of a summer session. 
With the permission of the examining committee, an unsuccessful candidate 
may be reexamined. Success in the examinations admits the student to 
candidacy for a graduate degree. 

Foreign Language Requirement. A candidate for the degree of master of 
arts in English must demonstrate proficiency in one foreign language by 
passing the Graduate Reading Examination in that language. 

188 ENGLISH 



Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

Admission. An applicant for admission to the program will be judged on 
the bases of academic record, three recommendations from former teachers, a 
written statement outlining the applicant's academic and professional goals, 
and the Graduate Record Examination Advanced Test scores. If a non-native 
speaker of English, the applicant must also present the TOEFL scores 

Provisional admission to the program may be granted to students whose 
credentials, while not exhibiting the high standards of prior academic 
achievement the department expects of doctoral candidates, promise excel 
lence in the graduate study of English literature. Students admitted provi- 
sionally are expected to show high academic achievement during their first 
semester of doctoral study. All decisions on admission and status shall be 
made by the Ph.D. admissions committee. 

Course Requirements. The doctoral program will normally require three 
years of full-time study beyond the master's degree or its equivalent. Thirty 
hours of credits in courses of the 300 and 400 series are normally required; 
however, exceptionally well-prepared students may be granted permission to 
take fewer than 30 hours of course work, upon recommendation of the Ph.D. 
admissions committee, in consultation with the Ph.D. supervisor and the 
graduate program committee. Of the normally required 30 hours, nine must be 
taken in 400-level seminars. All doctoral candidates, unless they have 
previously had what the department recognizes as an equivalent course, must 
take English 492 (Introduction to Literary Research). Neither English 490 
(required of all teaching assistants) nor English 492 may be substituted for 
the seminar requirements. English 488, Current Directions in Literary Study, 
is also required of every doctoral student in the program. 

No credit will be given for courses in which the grade is C or less. A 
student who makes C or less in more than three courses will be dropped from 
the program. 

The writing of the doctoral dissertation will carry a value of 12 additional 
hours. 

Preliminary Qualifying Examinations. A doctoral student who did not 
receive the M.A. in English from WVU may be asked to take and pass the 
department's M.A. comprehensive examination. This must be done no later 
than the end of the student's first year of study. 

Examination for Formal Admission to Candidacy. When the student has 
completed the course work and has fulfilled the foreign language requirement, 
an examination committee will be appointed. The student and the examination 
committee will draw up a list of books on which the examination for formal 
admission to candidacy will be based. The reading list must be approved by 
the graduate program committee at least one semester before the examination 
is administered. The examination will be both written and oral. 

Ph.D. candidates will be questioned in three areas of special expertise: (1) 
the proposed dissertation project and immediately related critical readings; 
(2) the larger literary-historical period (e.g. the areas identified in the M.A. 
comprehensive examination) in which the project fits or out of which it grows; 
and (3) a major period or area— historical, theoretical, or generic— that may be 
related to the first two fields of questioning but should not overlap. 

The oral examination, approximately two hours in length, is meant to 
permit the examination committee to pursue issues raised by the written 
examination, and to permit the student to clarify, expand on, or to raise 
questions about the texts and issues on which the examination was based. 



ENGLISH 189 



Teaching Requirement. While in the program, the doctoral student must 
teach successfully in the department for two semesters, one semester devoted 
to composition, the other to literature. Concurrent with the teaching practicum, 
the student must take one 400-level course in the teaching of composition and 
one 400-level course in the teaching of literature (neither of which qualifies as 
a 400-level seminar). This requirement will be optional for those candidates 
who possess teaching experience approved by the department. 

Minor Subject. A student may, though need not, choose a minor, not to 
exceed 12 hours in 300- or 400-level courses, in a related subject offered by 
another department. Choice of the minor is subject to the approval of the Ph.D. 
Supervisor. 

Foreign Language Requirement. The student must demonstrate proficiency 
in a foreign language acceptable to the Department of English by passing a 
graduate reading examination in that language. 

Doctoral Dissertation. After completing course work, passing the exami- 
nations for formal candidacy, and fulfilling the language requirement and 
teaching requirements, the student shall submit a prospectus of the disserta 
tion, as specified by the department, to the adviser. On approval of the 
prospectus by the student's dissertation committee, the student may apply for 
admission to candidacy for the Ph.D. degree. 

The topic of the proposed dissertation should be such that a candidate can 
reasonably complete the project in one year of full-time work. It is the 
responsibility of the dissertation committee and adviser to see that the topic is 
sufficiently limited. 

Final Examination. When the dissertation has been accepted and approved 
by the candidate's adviser and the dissertation committee, the candidate will 
be given an oral examination by the committee. The examination will deal 
with the dissertation and the field it represents. 

English (Engl.) 

201. Creative Writing Workshop: Fiction. I, II. 3 hr. Advanced workshop in creative 
writing for students seriously engaged in writing fiction. 

202. Creative Writing Workshop: Poetry. I, II. 3 hr. Advanced workshop in creative 
writing for students seriously engaged in writing a major group of poems. 

208. Scientific and Technical Writing. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Engl. 1 and 2. Writing for scientific 
and technical professions. Descriptions of equipment and processes; reports and 
proposals; scientific experiments; interoffice communications; articles for trade 
and research journals. 

210. Structure of the English Language. I, II. 3 hr. Historical, comparative, and 
descriptive grammar, together with an introduction to English linguistics. 

211. History of the English Language. I, II. 3 hr. Study of the nature of the language; 
questions of origins, language families, development, relationships of English as 
one of the Indo-European languages. 

220. American Poetry. I, II. 3 hr. Major American poets of the nineteenth and twentieth 
centuries. 

223. Modern American Poetics. I, II. 3 hr. A close study of those poets who have shaped 
the aesthetics of contemporary American poetry. 

232. Literary Criticism. I, II. 3 hr. Literary criticism from Aristotle to modern times. 

235. American Drama. I, II. 3 hr. Representative American dramas and history of 
theatre in America. 

190 ENGLISH 



236. Tragedy. I, II. 3 hr. Masterpieces of tragedy from Greek times to modern, with 
consideration of changing concepts of tragedy and of ethical and ideological 
values reflected in works of major tragic authors. 

240. Folk Literature. I, II. 3 hr. The folk ballad, its origin, history, and literary 
significance, based on Child's collection and on American ballad collections. 

241. Foik Literature of the Southern Appalachian Region. I, II. 3 hr. Traditional 
literature of southern Appalachian region, including songs, prose, tales, languages, 
customs, based on material collected in the region — especially in West Virginia. 

245. Studies in Appalachian Literature. I, II, S. 3 hr. Studies of authors, genres, themes, 
or topics in Appalachian literature. 

250. Shakespeare's Art. I, II, S. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. Special studies in Shakespeare's 
tragedies, comedies, and/or history plays, with some attention given to his non- 
dramatic poetry. With emphases varying from year to year, studies may include 
textual, historical, critical, and dramaturgical-theatrical. 

255. Chaucer. I, II. 3 hr. Early poems, Troilus and Criseyde, and The Canterbury Tales. 
In addition to an understanding and appreciation of Chaucer's works, the student 
is expected to acquire an adequate knowledge of Chaucer's language. 

256. Milton. I, II. 3 hr. All of Milton's poems and a few selected prose works. 

261. Sixteenth Century Prose and Poetry. I, II. 3 hr. Studies from Caxton to Bacon, from 
Skelton to Shakespeare. 

262. Seventeenth Century Prose and Poetry. I, II. 3 hr. Studies from Donne to Dryden. 

263. Literature of the Eighteenth Century. I, II. 3 hr. Literature of the period 1660-1744 
in relation to social, political, and religious movements of the time. 

264. Literature of the Eighteenth Century. I, II. 3 hr. Continuation of Engl. 263, covering 
the latter half of the century. May be taken independently of Engl. 263. 

265. The Romantic Movement. I, II. 3 hr. A survey of the works of the major British 
Romantic writers along with an introduction to works of scholarship in British 
Romanticism. 

266. American Romanticism. 1,11.3 hr. Writings of Ralph Waldo Emerson, Henry David 
Thoreau, and Nathaniel Hawthorne. A study of relations of these men to history of 
their own time; their contributions to American thought and art. 

267. Victorian Poetry. I, II. 3 hr. The major Victorian poets— Tennyson, Browning, 
Arnold, Rossetti, Morris, Swinburne, Fitzgerald— and a few of the later Victorian 
poets. 

268. Modern British Poetry. I, II. 3 hr. British poetry from 1880 to present, including the 
Decadents, Counter-Decadents, Hopkins, Housman, Hardy, the Georgians, the 
Imagists, World War I poets, Yeats, Eliot, the Auden Group, and post-World War II 
poets. 

280. Southern Writers. I, II. 3 hr. Twentieth-century Southern essayists, poets, short- 
story writers, and novelists in relation to ideological background. 

283. Study of Selected Authors. I, II. 3 hr. Study of the works of one or more major 
authors. (May be repeated with a change in course content for a maximum of 9 
credit hours.] 

288. Women Writers in England and America. I, II. 3 hr. Syllabus may vary from year to 
year to include writers in a particular country, historical period, or genre; or 
writing on a particular theme. 

ENGLISH 191 



290. Independent Study. I, II. 1-3 hr. (With departmental consent, may be repeated for a 
maximum of 9 credit hours.) PR: Departmental consent. Individual study of 
literary, linguistic, and writing problems. 

293. Practicum in Teaching Composition. I. 1 hr. PR: Engl. 108, 295. Designed to give 
prospective English and language arts teachers supervised practical experiences 
in individual writing tutorials. 

294. Fiction for Adolescents. II. 3 hr. Designed for prospective teachers of English and 
language arts. Course focuses on recent fiction for adolescents as well as on 
traditional literature appropriate to the needs, interests, and abilities of youth. 
Evaluation criteria emphasized. 

310. Old English 1. I, II. 3 hr. Study of Anglo-Saxon with selected readings from the 
literature of the period. 

311. Old English 2. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Engl. 310. Beowulf and other texts in Old English. 

312. Medieval Literature. 3 hr. Readings in the literature of the Medieval Period; 
attention to major writers and genres; focus on literary theory. 3 hr. lee. 

313. Renaissance Literature. 3 hr. Readings in the literature of the English Renaissance; 
attention to major writers and genres; focus on literary history. 3 hr. lee. 

314. Restoration and Eighteenth-Century Literature. 3 hr. Readings in the literature of 
England during the Restoration and the Eighteenth Century; attention to major 
writers and genres; focus on literary history. 3 hr. lee. 

315. Romantic Literature. 3 hr. Readings in the literature of England during the 
Romantic Period; attention to major writers and genres; focus on literary history. 
3 hr. lee. 

316. Victorian Literature. 3 hr. Readings in the literature of England during the 
Victorian Period; attention to major writers and genres; focus on literary history. 3 
hr. lee. 

317. Twentieth-Century British Literature. 3 hr. Readings on the literature of England 
during the Twentieth-Century; attention to major writers and genres; focus on 
literary history. 3 hr. lee. 

320. Studies in Composition and Rhetoric. 3 hr. Integration of theory with pedagogy for 
effective instruction, composition and rhetoric. Historical development of compo- 
sition theory and current issues in rhetoric. 3 hr. lee. 

321. Studies in Drama. 3 hr. Advanced study in the genre of drama, with emphasis 
varying from year to year. Course may include textual, historical, critical, 
formalist, and/or theoretical study. Not restricted to any one period or century. 

322. Studies in Poetry. 3 hr. Advanced study in the genre of poetry, with emphasis 
varying from year to year. Course may include textual, historical, critical, 
formalist, and/or theoretical study. Not restricted to any one period or century. 

323 Studies in the Novel. 3 hr. Advanced study in the genre of the novel, with emphasis 
varying from year to year. Course may include textual, historical, critical, 
formalist, and/or theoretical study. Not restricted to any one period or century. 

324. Studies in Nonfiction Prose. 3 hr. Advanced study in the genre of non-fiction, with 
emphasis varying from year to year. Course may include textual, historical, 
critical, formalist, and/or theoretical study. Not restricted to any one period or 
century. 

325. Study of Selected Authors. 3 hr. Advanced study of one or more major authors. 
192 ENGLISH 



350. Shakespeare. I, II. 3 hr. Intensive study of selected plays. Special attention to 
textual problems and to language and poetic imagery, together with the history of 
Shakespearean criticism and scholarship. 

370. American Literature to 1865. 3 hr. Readings in the literature of America from its 
beginnings to 1865; attention to major writers and genres; focus on literary 
history. 

371. American Literature, 1865-1915. 3 hr. Readings in the literature of America from 
1865-1915; attention to major writers and genres; focus on literary history. 

372. American Literature, 1915-Present. 3 hr. Readings in the literature of America 
from 1915 to the present; attention to major writers and genres; focus on literary 
history. 

383. Recent Literary Criticism. I, II. 3 hr. Brief survey of theories of major schools of 
modern criticism and an application of these theories to selected literary works. 

392. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-9 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced study of special topics in 
language, literature, or writing. 

400. Thesis. I, II. 3 hr. 

401. Thesis. I, II. 3 hr. 

440. Seminar in Medievai Studies. I, II. 3 hr. Topics from English literature, 1100-1500. 

446. Seminar in Renaissance Studies, 1550-1660. I, II. 3 hr. Studies in major authors 
and special topics in the Renaissance. 

460. Seminar in Restoration and Eighteenth Century Studies. I, II. 3 hr. 

470. Seminar in British Romanticism. I, II. 3 hr. Studies in major authors and special 
topics in the field of British Romanticism. 

476. Seminar in Victorian Studies. I, II. 3 hr. Research and discussion in selected topics 
in the literature and history of the period. 

484. Seminar in American Studies. I, II. 3 hr. Seminar in principal authors and 
movements in American literature. 

485. Seminar in Twentieth-Century British Studies. 3 hr. Seminar in principal authors 
and movements in twentieth-century British literature. 

488. Current Directions in Literary Study. II. 3 hr. PR: Advanced graduate standing 
(English 383 recommended). Intensive study of one or more current approaches to 
literature and theories of criticism, with some emphasis on the interrelations of 
literary study with other disciplines. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 3-6 hr. I— Supervised practices in college teaching of 
expository writing. II — Supervised practices in college teaching of literature. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II. 3 hr. Specific topics approved by the instructor. 

492. Introduction to Literary Research. I, II. 3 hr. Bibliography; materials and tools of 
literary investigations; methods of research in various fields of literary history 
and interpretation; problem of editing. Practical guidance in the writing of theses. 

493. Folger Institute Seminar. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. (Enrollment is by 
special application only. Contact department chairperson for information.} 
Seminar conducted by distinguished scholars and held at the Folger Institute of 
Renaissance and Eighteenth Century Studies in Washington, D.C. Topics vary. 
(Aiso listed as Hist. 493.) 

494. Seminar. I, II. 3 hr. Specific authors to be approved by instructor. 

ENGLISH 193 



497. Research. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. 

498. Doctoral Thesis. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Credit for this course may not be 
applied toward satisfaction of the 30-hour degree requirements at either the 
master's or doctoral level. 

ENTOMOLOGY 

Linda Butler, Chairperson of the Entomology Graduate Program 
G-166 Agricultural Sciences Building 
Degree Offered: Master of Science 

Graduate Faculty: Members Amrine, Butler, Hogmire, and Weaver. Associate Member 
Baniecki. 

Entomology is the study of insects and their arthropod relatives. 
Students entering the M.S. program in entomology are expected to have an 
adequate background in biological and physical sciences. Admission require- 
ments are those of the College of Agriculture and Forestry. Additional 
undergraduate course work may be required to make up deficiencies or to 
meet the needs of the area of specialization of the student. 

Thesis problems in entomology may be selected in areas of pest manage- 
ment; entomology of crops, forests, or urban environments; apiculture; 
aquatic entomology; medical or veterinary entomology; acarology; araneology; 
or insect physiology, morphology, ecology, behavior, or systematics. The 
entomology curriculum is offered by the entomology faculty in the College of 
Agriculture and Forestry. 

Course work and thesis research in entomology are designed to prepare 
students for professional careers in entomology and closely related areas of 
agricultural, biological, and environmental sciences. Graduates of the ento- 
mology program are employed by state and federal agencies, private industry, 
educational institutions, or become self employed. 

Facilities for graduate research include experiment farms, greenhouses, 
laboratories, specialized equipment, and the WVU Arthropod Collection. 

Entomology students seeking to pursue a Ph.D. should apply for accep- 
tance into the Ph.D. program in Agricultural Sciences. 

Entomology (Ento.) 

201. Apiculture. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1 and 2, or consent. Development, physiology, and 
behavior of the honey bee with emphasis on colony management, pollination, 
diseases of bees; properties of honey and beeswax. 

202. Apiculture Laboratory. II. 1 hr. PR: Concurrent or previous enrollment in Ento. 
201. Identification and anatomy of honey bees, assembly and use of beekeeping 
equipment, field management of honey bees, examination for diseases and pests, 
production of queens and nuclei. 

204. Principles of Entomology. I. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1 and 2 or equiv. Basic course dealing 
with the anatomy, morphology, physiology, reproduction, systematics, ecology, 
and management of insects. 

210. Insect Pests in the Agroecosystem. I. 3 hr. PR: Ento. 204 or consent. Life cycle, 
damage, and economic impact of pestiferous insects in the agroecosystem. 
Included are insect pests of agricultural and ornamental plants, stored products, 
structures, and livestock. 2 lee, 1 lab. 

194 ENTOMOLOGY 



212. Pest Management. II. 3 hr. PR: Ento. 204 or consent. An in-depth look at current 
problems and solutions in controlling insect pests in an environmentally compat- 
ible manner. Management techniques include cultural, mechanical, physical, 
biological, regulatory, and chemical practices. 3 lee. 

390. Special Topics. I, II, S. 2-6 hr. PR: Ento. 204 or equiv., or consent. Each of the 
following courses is given every other year: Exopterygota; Endopterygota Part I, 
Part II; Larval Insects; Acarology; Araneology; Pesticides in the Environment; 
Insect Morphology; Insect Physiology; Medical Entomology. 

450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

Plant Science (PI. Sc.) 

200. Recognition and Diagnosis of Plant Disorders. I. 4 hr. PR: P. Pth. 201 and Ento. 204. 
Creates an ability for the student to use systematic inspection to determine cause 
or causes of a plant disorder. 

201. Principles and Methods of Plant Pest Control. II. 4 hr. PR: P. Pth. 201 and Ento. 204. 
Concepts of control and how they are implemented by exclusion, eradication, 
protection, and immunization. 

FAMILY RESOURCES (Home Economics) 

Beverly Hummel-Azzaro, Division Director 
Nancy Rodriguez, Graduate Program Coordinator 
702 Allen Hall 

Degree Offered: Master of Science 

Graduate Faculty: Members Albrink, Franz, Head, Liddell, Loyer-Carlson, MacDonald, 
Nomani, and Rodriguez. Associate Members Ladki and Warash 

The graduate program in the Division of Family Resources provides 
students the opportunity to study for a master of science degree. Three areas 
of specialization are offered: (1) child development/family studies; (2) home 
economics education; and (3) human nutrition. 

Child Development/Family Studies 

The child development and family studies program is structured to give 
students a basis from which to conduct research and to work with families 
and children in educational and clinical settings. In addition, the program 
prepares students for entering Ph.D. programs in child development and 
family studies, family life education, psychology, or counseling. 

Courses in child development and parenting strategies are supplemented 
with field experience in a variety of settings, such as the Child Development 
Laboratory, the hospital neonatal intensive care and pediatric units, and 
parenting education programs in the community. 

Individuals choosing an emphasis in child development and family 
studies may select from a wide variety of careers which include employment 
as child care specialists, early childhood teachers, developmental specialists, 
child life educators, parent educators, and extension specialists. 

Home Economics Education 

The master of science degree program in home economics education 
prepares home economists for teaching in vocational programs in both middle 
and secondary schools, grade 5-12. The teacher educator program at West 
Virginia University has been approved by the National Council for 

FAMILY RESOURCES 195 



Accreditation of Teacher Education (NCATE). Experienced educators focus a 
program of study on content updates and advanced course work in areas of 
specialization, including textiles and clothing, foods and nutrition, interior 
design, and child development. 

For students new to the field of education, candidates may select the 
option of combining a teaching certification program with a Master's degree 
program. For candidates interested in a broad array of subject matter, such as 
the extension or community service fields, a personalized program can be 
designed. 

Human Nutrition 

The human nutrition program offers students a variety of opportunities 
in clinical and applied nutrition as well as the potential for gaining full 
eligibility for the dietetics registration exam. In addition, the program 
prepares students for entering Ph.D. programs in nutrition, nutrition education, 
nutritional biochemistry, and food science. 

A variety of research opportunities with the human nutrition and foods 
faculty is offered to students as collaborative opportunities are available with 
the WVU Health Sciences Center, the Gerontology Center, the exercise 
physiology program, and with the West Virginia child nutrition programs. 

Background courses in nutrition, foods, general and organic chemistry, 
and the biological sciences are helpful to students selecting the human 
nutrition area for specialization. Individuals choosing an emphasis in human 
nutrition may select from a wide variety of careers, which include employment 
in hospitals, clinics, industrial and institutional food service organizations, 
fitness centers, and government-supported health programs. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

Admission: Admission requirements are those of the College of Agriculture 
and Forestry. In addition, students should have completed an undergraduate 
curriculum in the area of specialization for which they seek admission. A 
student whose undergraduate degree is in a different field will ordinarily be 
required to take supplemental undergraduate courses. 

Options: Students pursuing a master of science degree in Family 
Resources have a choice of two options: thesis or research report. The thesis 
option requires a minimum of 36 hours of coursework, which includes six 
hours of thesis credit. The research report option requires a minimum of 36 
hours of coursework, which includes three hours credit for the research 
report. 

For further information, contact the Graduate Program Coordinator, 
Division of Family Resources, 702 Allen Hall, P.O. Box 6124, West Virginia 
University, Morgantown, WV 26506-6124; (304) 293-3402. 

Courses of Instruction in Family Resources 
Child Development and Family Studies (CD&FS) 

211. Middle Childhood-Early Adolescent Development. I. 3 hr. PR: CD&FS 10. Analysis 
and investigation of developmental factors in middle childhood-early adolescence. 
Consideration and diagnosis of physical, emotional, social, familial, moral, and 
intellectual interactions affecting the child, age 6-14. (Offered in Fall of odd 
years.) 

212. Adolescent Development. I. 3 hr. PR: CD&FS 10. Adolescent in contemporary 
American culture, including normative physical, social, and personality develop- 
ment; relationships within various typical social settings (e.g., family, school, 
community, peer group). [Offered in Spring of even years.) 

196 FAMILY RESOURCES 



213. Contemporary Issues in Family Relations. II. 3 hr. Study of recent research 
findings in the major areas of family relationships. Topics include effects of 
divorce upon children, impact of employment upon the marital relationship, and 
spousal violence. 

214. Family Development. I. 3 hr. The contemporary family from formation of material 
unit to death of both spouses. Special attention to the use of the family life cycle 
and developmental tasks. 

215. Parenting Strategies. II. 3 hr. PR: Senior orgraduate standing or consent. Focus on 
the interactions between parent and child. Analysis of typical problems which 
occur in parenting. Deals solely with normal daily situations which often occur in 
the home. 

216. Child Development Practicum. I, II. 3-4 hr. Application of child development 
principles. Involves planning developmentally appropriate activities for 3- and 
4-year-old children at the University Child Development Laboratory. 

219. The Growing Years. II. 3 hr. A televised course offered primarily for off-campus 
students to become familiar with development of children during their growing 
years. How to recognize the diversity of approaches in child development research 
and theory. 

341. Cognitive Development of the Child. II. 3 hr. Piaget's basic theory, including his 
view of perceptual, symbolic, motor and logico-mathematical development, 
across the life span. 

345. Socio-Emotional Development of the Child. I. 3 hr. A study and examination of 
contemporary theory and research into various facets of the socialization process 
in infancy and childhood. {Offered in Fall of odd years.} 

348. Theories of Child Development. II. 3 hr. Examination of major theoretical 
conceptions of child development. Work of Werner, Piaget, Freid. Erikson, and the 
American learning theorists compared and contrasted. {Offered in Fall of even 
years.) 

Family Resources (FAM.R.) 

373. Professional Development. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: 
Departmental consent. Specially designed experiences for those interested in 
advancing professional skills in a particular specialty. {Not for degree credit in 
programs in the College of Human Resources and Education.) {Graded as S or U.) 

394. Practicum/Internship. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college 
teaching of home economics. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects 
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent 
or through specially scheduled lectures. 

494. Graduate Seminar. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Consent of graduate adviser. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. 

498. Thesis. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not 
seeking course work credit but who wish to meet residence requirements, use the 
University's facilities, and participate in its academic and cultural programs. 

FAMILY RESOURCES 197 



Home Economics Education (H.E. Ed.) 

219. Occupational Home Economics. II. 3 hr. Prepares teachers to implement occupa- 
tional home economics programs. Emphasis on organizing and administering 
programs, developing laboratory and work experiences, recruiting students, and 
evaluating progress. 

278. Vocational Home Economics. II. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing or consent. Develops an 
understanding of federal vocational legislation to enable an individual to develop 
and implement programs in vocational education. 

281. Contemporary Problems in Home Economics. I. 3 hr. Applies the broad-based 
philosophy of home economics to current individual family and community 
problems, e.g., societal impact on families, changing consumer market, changing 
roles, day care, diminishing energy resources, career education, etc. 

311. Home Economics Curricuium. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Experience in teaching home 
economics or consent. Theory and research in home economics curriculum. 
Change in existing programs and development of new programs. 

312. Supervision in Home Economics. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Teaching experience and 
consent. For home economics teachers preparing to serve as supervising teachers 
in off-campus training centers. 

313. Evaluation in Home Economics. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 30 hr. of family resources, 7 hr. of 
education or consent. Experience in devising, selecting, and using a variety of 
techniques for evaluating progress toward cognitive, affective, and psychomotor 
objectives in home economics. 

314. Adult Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Psychology of adult learning, 
philosophy, types of programs to include organization, methods and techniques, 
and leadership training in working with adult groups. 

Home Management and Family Economics (HMFE) 

261. Consumer Economics. II. 3 hr. Understanding the consumer's role in our economy. 
Study of research methods and techniques used to identify, understand, and solve 
consumer problems. 

363. Community Resources for Disabled Homemakers. I. 3 hr. Provides students with 
knowledge and skills needed to utilize other disciplines in the team approach to 
rehabilitating handicapped homemakers. Presentations by team members, such 
as physicians, nurses, counselors, therapists, social workers, etc. 

364. Home Management for Disabled Homemakers. II. 3 hr. PR: HMFE 262 or consent. 
Provides students with skills to teach home management concepts related to the 
disabled homemaker in performance of household tasks. Emphasis on work 
simplification, body mechanics, equipment selection, and adaptation to promote 
independent living. 

Human Nutrition and Foods (HN&F) 

254. Experimental Foods. II. 4 hr. PR: HN&F 55, organic chemistry or consent. Study of 
basic chemical processes that occur within food systems including the effects of 
storage, processing, and alterations in formulation on qualities of food products; 
introduction to laboratory methodology in foods research. 

257. Food, Labor, and Cost Control. II. 3 hr. PR: HN&F 153, Acctg. 51. Food systems 
accounting and cost control. Techniques for analyzing, managing, and controlling 
food and labor costs. [Offered in Spring of even years.) 

258. Food Systems Management Practicum. II. 4 hr. PR: HN&F 153 and consent. Ten 
weeks or 400 hours of practical experience in operations of the type in which the 
student is majoring. 

198 FAMILY RESOURCES 



260. Advanced Nutrition. I. 3 hr. PR: HN&F 71, physiology. Coreq.: Biochemistry. Role 
of food nutrients in physiological and biochemical processes of the body; 
nutritional needs of healthy individuals under ordinary conditions. 

261. Nutrition Laboratory Experimentation. I. 1 hr. Coreq.: HN&F 260 or consent. 
Nutrient analysis and introduction to nutrition experimentation. 

272. Community Nutrition 1. II. 2-3 hr. PR: HN&F 71. Beginning planning for 
community nutrition for individuals and families at various stages of the life 
cycle. Roles of agencies and professional groups. Clinical experience in community 
facilities for the third credit hour optional. 

274. Nutrition in Disease. 4 hr. PR: HN&F 71; physiology or consent; biochemistry 
required for dietetics majors. Nutritional care aspect of patients. Modification of 
diet to meet human nutrition needs in various clinical conditions. 

279. Dietetics As a Profession. 1. 1 hr. PR: Senior standing. Discussion of the profession 
of dietetics and the professional organization, American Dietetic Association 
(ADA). Completion of materials to meet ADA membership requirements. 

310. Human Nutrition. I. 3 hr. Principles of nutrition. Emphasizes current research on 
nutrient interactions and implications for diet across the life span. (Not for 
graduate students in Nutrition.) 

370. Human Nutrition Concepts and Application. II. 3 hr. PR: HN&F 260 or equiv., and 
consent. Critical study of the nutrient evaluation methods and the nutrient 
requirements of the human in health and disease, and scope of its application. 
(Offered Spring Semester of even years.] 

Interior Design and Housing (ID&H) 

233. Decorative Arts 1. I. 3 hr. PR: 9 hr. ID&H. The decorative arts— antiquity to 
American periods. 

234. Decorative Arts 2. II. 3 hr. PR: ID&H 233. The decorative arts— American periods 
to present. 

235. Contemporary Interior Design. I. 3 hr. PR: ID&H 234. Study of the history of 
interiors, 1900-present. 

238. Portfolio Design. II. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing. Development and preparation of a 
portfolio for interior design and National Council for Interior Design qualifications 
examination. 

239. Interior Design Field Experience. II. 3-9 hr.; max. 9 hr. PR: Written consent; senior 
standing. Opportunity to learn and work within a professional environment with 
practicing designers. 

Textiles and Clothing (Tx & CI) 

221. Socio/Psychological, Cultural Aspects of Dress. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 121 and senior 
standing or consent. Study of social, psychological, and cultural research and 
literature affecting clothing choices over time. Original research will be conducted 
by each student. 

222. Fashion Merchandising. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 121 and junior standing. Study of 
merchandising activities performed on the retail level including planning sales 
and assortments, selecting merchandise for resale, controlling inventories, and 
determining profit. Basic mathematical formulas involved in merchandising are 
practiced. 

224. Flat Pattern Design. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 27, 124, 126, or consent. Opportunity for 
creative expression and for understanding of pattern design through the flat 
pattern. Apparel designed and constructed by the student. 

FAMILY RESOURCES 199 



225. Tailoring. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 27, 124, 224 or consent. Comparison of traditional and 
contemporary tailoring techniques. Student will construct a coat or jacket and 
skirt or pants. 

226. Apparei Design and Illustration. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 224 or consent. Art principles 
and fashion terminology explored to analyzing apparel design. Examination of 
sources of design inspiration. Techniques of drawing using a live fashion model 
and various media for apparel design presentation. 

227. Advanced Textiles. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 27, 127. Comparative characteristics of all 
textile fibers. Physical and chemical properties are studied with reference to fiber 
morphology and/or manufacturing processes. 

228. Clothing for Special Needs. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 224 or consent. Physical, 
psychological, and sociological clothing needs of individuals with functional 
limitations. Historical developments, current research, and research needs. Each 
student conducts a pertinent individual research project. 

229. Fashion Merchandising Study Tour. 1 hr. PR: Senior standing in textiles and 
clothing. Study of the textiles and clothing industry through on-site visits to: 
historic costume and textile collections, apparel manufacturing plants, design 
showrooms, buying offices, pattern companies, and retail establishments. Readings 
included. 

FOREIGN LANGUAGES 

Robert J. Elkins, Chairperson of the Department 

205-B Chitwood Hall 

Degree Offered: Master of Arts 

Graduate Faculty: Members Claesges, Fakhri, Gonzalez, Hinckley, M. Lastinger, V. 
Lastinger, McNerney, Murphy, Reider, Renahan, Schlunk, Spleth, Taylor, and 
Whitley. Associate Members Bendena, Chang, Dixon, Dunbar, Elkins, Ferreras, 
Marechal, and Prentiss. 

The Department of Foreign Languages offers options for graduate study 
in French, German, Spanish (peninsular literature as well as Spanish- 
American literature), the teaching of English to speakers of other languages 
(TESOL), linguistics, and comparative literature. Graduate courses are also 
offered in classics, foreign literature in English translation, language teaching 
methods, and bibliography and research. Candidates for the master's degree 
are accepted in any of the option areas as long as they fulfill all requirements 
of the Master of Arts (MA.) listed below. 

The department chairperson is the official adviser for all departmental 
graduate students. The chairperson, or associate chairperson, serves as 
temporary adviser until the student requests, and has approved by the 
associate chairperson, a committee of three or more faculty members during 
his or her first semester of study. Students should inform themselves of 
faculty members' areas of expertise early in their first semester in order to 
facilitate committee selection. The student should request a meeting of his or 
her committee prior to pre-registration for the second semester to get 
acquainted and discuss his or her professional goals. The student should 
develop a close working relationship with the committee and feel free to 
request a committee meeting whenever necessary — for guidance or course 
selection, advice on professional advancement, examinations, possible thesis 
topics, etc. Students may also request a revision of the composition of their 
committees when professional interests change. 



200 FOREIGN LANGUAGES 



A student is expected to have an undergraduate major in the areas of 
interest or be required to make up any deficiencies. The student should 
normally show an average of at least 3.0 (B) in undergraduate foreign 
language courses. 

Requirements 

1. Minimum of 24 hours of course work in the department exclusive of 
391 and 397 courses. (A total of 36 hours is required.) 

2. Maximum of three hours of 397 credit unless a thesis is undertaken, in 
which case six hours of 397 credit can be applied to the 36 required 
hours. 

3. No more than three hours of 391 credit can be applied to the 36 hours. 
(An exception can be made only if used to allow a student to enroll in a 
200 course and student has already reached the maximum number of 
200 credits.) 

4. Selection of options in specific areas. 
Options: 

a. French 

Four French literature courses 
Linguistics 247— Structure of Modern French 
Linguistics 341— History of the French Language 
French 217 — French Culture or 

French 292 — French Civilization 
French 344— Explication de Textes 

b. German 

Four German literature courses 
Linguistics 257— Structure of German 
Linguistics 351— History of the German Language 
German 292 or 392— German Culture and Civilization 

c. Spanish (Two options) 

Option I: 

Four peninsular literature courses 

Spanish 223— Estudios de Estilo or 
Spanish 324— Explicacion de Textos 

Spanish 392— Spanish Culture 

Linguistics 217— Structure of Spanish 

Linguistics 311— History of the Spanish Language 
Option II: 

Four Spanish American literature courses 

Spanish 223— Estudios de Estilo or 
Spanish 324— Explicacion de Textos 

Spanish 292— Spanish American Culture 

Linguistics 217— Structure of Spanish 

Linguistics 311— History of the Spanish Language 



FOREIGN LANGUAGES 201 



d. TESOL 

Language 293— Methods ESL 
Language 392— Theory ESL 
Linguistics 392 — ESL Linguistics 
Language 421— Teaching FL in College 
Linguistics 202— Phonology 
EFL 391— American Culture 
Four courses from the following: 

English 211 — History of the English Language 

English 220 — American Poetry 

English 235 — American Drama 

English 340— The American Novel to 1915 

English 341 — The American Novel 1915 to Present 

English 369— American Literature to 1830 

English 370— American Literature, 1830-1865 

English 371— American Literature, 1865-1915 

English 372 — American Literature, 1915 to Present 

e. Linguistics 

Minimum of six linguistic courses including: 

Linguistics 202 — Phonology 

Linguistics 283— Transformational Grammar 

Linguistics 284— History of Linguistics 

Linguistics 287 — Psycholinguistics 

Linguistics 288— Sociolinguistics 

One culture course of a contrastive nature 
In lieu of four literature courses, two of the following can 
substitute for literature courses: (One may double count for the 
linguistics requirement for those students writing a thesis.) 
Language 341 — History of French 
Language 351 — History of German 
Language 311— History of Spanish 
English 211— History of English 
Linguistics 353 — Middle High German 
Linguistics 354— Middle High German 
Linguistics 313 — Old Spanish 
Linguistics 343 — Old French 
English 310— Old English 
English 311— Old English 

f. Comparative Literature 

Eight courses of literature (six of the eight must be in the 

Department of Foreign Languages) 

One culture course of a contrastive nature 

One of the following linguistics courses: 

Linguistics 311 — History of Spanish 

Linguistics 313 — Old Spanish 

Linguistics 341 — History of French 

Linguistics 343 — Old French 

Linguistics 351— History of German 

Linguistics 353— Middle High German 

Linguistics 361 — History of Russian Language 

English 211— History of the English Language 

English 310 or 311— Old English 



202 FOREIGN LANGUAGES 



g. Other students may petition for another option which falls within 
the general guidelines but is not listed in a-f. A detailed plan must 
be submitted and approved by a committee appointed by the 
department chairperson. 

5. All international students whose native language is not English must 
demonstrate proficiency in English. Proficiency may be demonstrated 
in either of the following ways: 

a. TOEFL of 550 and TSE of 230 

b. ACTFL oral proficiency rating of two and successful passing of a 
department English writing examination 

6. Students choosing options a, b, or c must demonstrate proficiency in 
that language by achieving a 2+ oral proficiency rating and success- 
fully passing the departmental writing examination in that language. 

7. Students who choose options d,e, and f and whose native language is 
English must demonstrate proficiency in a second language using the 
criteria in section 6 or present four semesters or the equivalent of two 
foreign languages with at least a B average. 

8. Students choosing option d whose native language is not English 
must demonstrate a higher level of English than that required in point 
five. English proficiency for those students may be demonstrated in 
one of the following ways: 

a. TOEFL of 600 and TSE of 250. 

b. ACTFL oral proficiency rating of 2+ and successful passing of the 
departmental advanced English writing examination. 

9. If required courses are not offered during the time the student is 
enrolled, he/she may request permission to make appropriate substi- 
tutions. Students must declare the option they intend to follow at the 
time of their initial registration. Change in option can be made at 
student's request prior to the semester in which students take the 
written examinations. 

10. A 3.00 GPA is required for graduation. 

11. Demonstration of ability to undertake research and to write clearly 
and succinctly. The five possible options for fulfilling this requirement 
are listed in the departmental graduate student handbook. 

12. Seven-hour written examination based upon the reading list. Student 
will have a reading list composed of seven sections. One may be 
drawn up by the student and the student's major adviser or selected 
from the master reading list. Candidates who write a thesis will have 
the number of sections (and hours of the examination) reduced to 
four. Five of the seven exams must be in the area of the student's 
option unless the student writes a thesis; in this case, three of the four 
must be in the option. 

13. A one- to two-hour oral examination based upon course work and/or 
thesis. 

All graduate assistants are required to complete Language Teaching 
Methods 421 as part of the work in the major fields unless they have had a 
similar course in their undergraduate study. The candidate's committee, 
together with the student, will determine the distribution of courses and the 
thesis requirement in the light of the student's aims and needs. The committee 
also will administer written and oral comprehensive examinations near the 
end of the candidate's course of study. Both oral and written examinations are 
normally given only twice a year, in November and in April. 



FOREIGN LANGUAGES 203 



Graduate assistants are required to enroll each semester in Lang. 490 and 
499, although these credits do not count toward the master's. 

Because of staff scheduling difficulties, students should not expect to 
have their committees available for the completion of work on their degrees 
for summer graduation. 

A thesis, if chosen, must be submitted to the student's committee 
chairperson at least one month before the end of the enrollment period in 
which the student expects to complete all requirements for graduation. If this 
requirement is not met, thesis acceptance may be withheld for one semester. 

An acceptable thesis proposal, including a problem statement, a thorough 
review of the literature, and an appropriate research design, is to be submitted 
to, and approved by, the student's committee before a thesis can be 
undertaken. Normally this proposal is submitted at least one semester before 
undertaking the writing of the thesis. 

The thesis defense will be approximately one hour in length and is given 
after successful completion of the written examinations on elective master's 
reading list sections and the oral examination on course work. 

One bound copy of the approved thesis is to be given to the Department of 
Foreign Languages upon completion of work for the degree. 

Normally, the master's program requires four full semesters of study. 
Graduate assistants in particular should take this fact into account when 
planning their programs. 

Special Courses of Study Abroad 

Courses in German have been offered in Germany and Austria during the 
summer, in Spanish in Spain and Colombia during the summer, and in French 
in Canada during the summer and in France during the fall, spring, and 
summer. Students participating in a fall or spring semester abroad enroll for 
15-18 semester hours of credit. 

The Department of Foreign Languages offers a spring and a summer 
session in France and a summer session in Austria and in Spain or Colombia- 
contingent upon funding and faculty availability. 

Bibliography and Research (Bibgy.) 

301. Introduction to Research. I. 1-3 hr. (For seminar credit, counts as 1 hour; for a 
specific project carried out during the course, counts as 3 hours.) PR: Graduate 
standing. Pro-seminar in graduate-level research in foreign languages, literature, 
and linguistics. 

365. Methods of Research. I. 3 hr. 

Classics (Class.) 

201. Roman Novelists. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Class. 109, 110, or consent. 

202. Roman Comedy. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Class. 109, 110, or consent. 
235. Roman Epic. I. 3 hr. PR: Class. 109, 110, or equiv. 

292. Pro-Seminar in Latin or Greek Literature. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics. 

392. Seminar in Latin or Greek Literature. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research activities 

leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent scholarly 

project. 

*Variable credit courses normally carry 3 hr. credit. Exceptions are made only in emergencies 
and must be approved by the department chairperson and the professor teaching the course. 

204 FOREIGN LANGUAGES 



Foreign Literature in Translation (FLIT) 

211. Chinese Literature in Translation. I. 3 hr. Survey of selected works of Chinese 
literature from ancient times through the eighteenth century. 

221. Japanese Literature in Translation. II. 3 hr. Survey of selected works of Japanese 
literature from ancient period to the mid-nineteenth century and an introduction 
to a few works of the modern period. 

292. Pro-Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.* PR: 6 hr. of upper-division literature courses or 
consent. Special topics. 

392. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.* PR: 6 hr. of upper-division literature courses or consent. 
Special topics. 

French (Frch.) 

203. Conversational French. I. 3 hr. PR: Frch. 110 or consent. Intensive spoken French. 
217. French Civilization. II. 3 hr. PR: 12 hr. of French. 

221. The Romantic Movement. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of French or consent. 

222. French Realism. II. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of French or consent. 

229. Literature of the Sixteenth Century. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of French or consent. 

231. Phonetics and Pronunciation. II. 3 hr. PR: 12 hr. of French or equiv. 

292. Pro-Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.* PR: 18 hr. of French or consent. Special topics. 

305. Fundamentals for Reading French. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate or upper-division 
standing. (Frch. 305 and 306 is intended for graduate students from other 
departments to teach them to read general and technical French.} 

306. Reading French. II. 3 hr. PR: 12 hr. of French or equiv. or Frch. 305. (Graduate 
students may meet a doctoral foreign language requirement by achieving a grade 
of B or better in this course.) 

326. Literary Criticism. II. 3 hr. PR: B.A. in French or consent. 

337. Moliere. II. 3 hr. PR: B.A. in French or consent. 

344. Explication de Textes. II. 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of French or equiv. 

371. The Modern Novel to 1930. I. 3 hr. PR: B.A. in French or consent. 

372. The Novel After 1930. II. 3 hr. PR: B.A. in French or consent. 
381. Medieval French Literature. II. 3 hr. PR: Lingu. 342 or consent. 

391. Advanced Topics. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of advanced topics not 
covered in regularly scheduled courses. 

392. Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research activities 
leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent scholarly 
project. 

•Variable credit courses normally carry 3 hr. credit. Exceptions are made only in emergencies 
and must be approved by the department chairperson and the professor teaching the course. 

FOREIGN LANGUAGES 205 



German (Ger.) 

243. Medieval German Literature. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German or consent. 

245. Classicism and Romanticism. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German or consent. Critical 
study of German literature from 1750 to 1830. 

246. The Liberal Age. II. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German or consent. Critical study of German 
literature from 1830 to 1880. 

247. The Age of Crisis. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German or consent. A critical study of 
German literature from 1880 to present. 

292. Pro-Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics. 

301. Independent Reading. PR: Consent. I. 3 hr. Supervised reading for students who 
wish to do intensive work. 

302. Independent Reading. II. 3 hr. PR: Ger. 301. Continuation of Ger. 301. 

305. Fundamentals for Reading German. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate or upper-division 
standing. (Ger. 305-306 is intended for graduate students from other departments 
to teach them to read general and technical German.] 

306. Reading German. II. 3 hr. PR: 12 hr. of German or equiv. or Ger. 305. (Graduate 
students may meet a doctoral foreign language requirement by achieving a grade 
of B or better in this course.) 

376. The Modern Novel. I, II. 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of German or consent. A study of 
representative modern novels from 1900 to 1945. 

391. Advanced Topics. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of advanced topics not 
covered in regularly scheduled courses. 

392. Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Graduate standing or consent. Special topics. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research activities 
leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent scholarly 
project. 

Language Teaching Methods (Lang.) 

221. The Teaching of Foreign Languages. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Required of all students 
who are prospective foreign language teachers on the secondary level. 

292. Pro-Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics. 

391. Advanced Topics. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of advanced topics not 
covered in regularly scheduled courses. 

392. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research activities 
leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent scholarly 
project. 

421. Teaching Foreign Language in College. I, II. 1-6 hr.* Methods and techniques of 
teaching a foreign language at the college level. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.* Required each semester of all graduate 
assistants in the Department of Foreign Languages. 

*Variable credit courses normally carry 3 hr. credit. Exceptions are made only in emergencies 
and must be approved by the department chairperson and the professor teaching the course. 

206 FOREIGN LANGUAGES 



Linguistics (Lingu.) 

202. Phonology. I. 3 r. PR: Lingu. 1, 111 or consent. Description of sounds and sound 
systems in language. Articulatory phonetics. Structural and generative approaches 
to phonetics. 

217. Structure of Spanish. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of Spanish and Lingu. Ill or consent. 
Description of the phonological or grammatical systems of Spanish, with 
emphasis on contrastive analysis (Spanish/English) and applied linguistics. 

247. Structure of Modern French. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of French and Lingu. Ill or consent. 
Study of phonology, morphology, and syntax of modern French together with a 
constrastive analysis of French and English. 

257. Structure of German. II. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German and Lingu. Ill or consent. 
Phonological, morphological, and syntactical structure of contemporary German 
language. 

267. Structure of Russian. II. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of Russian and Lingu. Ill or consent. 
Phonological, morphological, and syntactical structure of contemporary Russian. 

283. Transformational Grammar. S. 3 hr. PR: Lingu. Ill and consent. Emphasis on 
generative syntax in English, German, Romance, and Slavic languages. 

284. History of Linguistics. I. 3 hr. PR: Lingu. Ill or consent. Development of 
linguistics from Greeks and Romans to contemporary researchers with concentra- 
tion on major linguists and schools of the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. 

287. Psycholinguistics. I. 3 hr. PR: Lingu. Ill or consent. Provides an insight into the 
many areas of psycholinguistics study, including language acquisition, sentence 
processing, animal communication, dichotic listening, aphasia, and semantics. 

288. Sociolinguistics. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Lingu. 1 or 111 or consent. 
Linguistic study of geographical and social variation in languages; effects of 
regional background, social class, ethnic group, sex, and setting; outcomes of 
conflict between dialect and between languages. 

292. Pro-Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics. 

311. History of the Spanish Language. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of Spanish 
and Lingu. Ill or consent. Evolution of Castilian from Vulgar Latin to its modern 
standard form through a study of historical phonology, morphology, and syntax, 
together with the external factors which influenced the development of the 
language. 

313. Old Spanish. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 

341. History of the French Language. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of French and 
Lingu. Ill or consent. Evolution of French from Vulgar Latin into the Modern 
French standard through a study of historical phonology, morphology, and 
syntax, together with the external factors which influenced the development of 
the language. 

343. Old French. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Study of the oldest monuments of the French 
language including the Chanson de Roland and Aucassin et Nicolette in an effort 
to trace the evolution of Francien, Anglo-Norman, and Picard and Vulgar Latin. 

351. History of the German Language. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German 
and Lingu. Ill or consent. Historical development of standard German with 
emphasis on its relationship to the other German languages and dialects. 

*Variable credit courses normally carry three hours credit. Exceptions are made only in 
emergencies and must be approved by the department chairperson and the professor teaching the 
course. 

FOREIGN LANGUAGES 207 



353. Middle High German 1. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German and Lingu. Ill or consent. 
Study of the linguistic developments of Middle High German from the eleventh to 
the fifteenth centuries with illustrative readings from the Niebelungenlied. 

361. History of the Russian Language. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of Russian 
and Lingu. Ill or consent. Development of Russian from Indo-European to the 
present. 

391. Advanced Topics. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of advanced topics not 
covered in regularly scheduled courses. 

392. Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research activities 
leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent scholarly 
project. 

Russian (Russ.) 

292. Pro-Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: 18 hr. of Russian or equiv. 

Spanish (Span.) 

221. Golden Age Literature. II. 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of Spanish or consent. Consideration of 
Spanish literature of the Renaissance and the Counter Reformation with readings 
in the novel, the comedia, and lyric poetry. 

223. Estudios De Estilo. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of Spanish or equiv. 

224. Introduccion a la literatura. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. A study of basic genres, 
themes, and techniques. Intensive reading of selected texts from various periods. 
Emphasis on Peninsular and/or Spanish American literature. 

292. Pro-Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics. 

315. Lyric Poetry. I. 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of Spanish or equiv. 

324. Expiicacion De Textos. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of Spanish or equiv. 

325. The Picaresque Novel. I. 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of Spanish or equiv. 

391. Cervantes. II. 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of Spanish or consent. 

392. Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics. 

395. Sixteenth Century Literature. I. 3 hr. PR: B.A. in Spanish or consent. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research activities 
leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent scholarly 
project. 

*Variable credit courses normally carry 3 hr. credit. Exceptions are made only in emergencies 
and must be approved by the department chairperson and the professor teaching the course. 



208 FOREIGN LANGUAGES 



FOREST RESOURCES SCIENCES 

Jack E. Coster, Chairperson of Division of Forestry 

322-A Percival Hall 

Norman D. Jackson, Assistant Chairperson 

David E. Samuel, Coordinator of the Graduate Program 

Degree Offered: Doctor of Philosophy in Forest Resources Sciences 

Graduate Faculty: Members Armstrong, Brock, Brown, Hassler, Hicks, Margraf, 

Michael, Patterson, Perry, Samuel, Smith, Tajchman, White, Wiant, and Whitmore. 

Associate Members Coster, Jackson, Kidd, and Yandle. 

Doctor of Philosophy in Forest Resources Sciences 

A candidate for the doctor of philosophy degree in forest resources 
science in the College of Agriculture and Forestry may choose as the major 
field of study forest science, wood science, or wildlife management. Within 
these major fields of study, specialization is limited only by the range of 
competencies in the graduate faculty. 

Curriculum requirements of all candidates include a block of graduate 
courses in the major field which will constitute a comprehensive review of the 
significant knowledge in that field, and a block of graduate courses in a minor 
area of study. A minimum of 60 semester hours beyond the bachelor's degree 
and exclusive of the dissertation will be required. 

The research work for the doctoral dissertation must show a high degree 
of scholarship and must present an original contribution to the field of forest 
resources science. In addition to course work and the dissertation, the 
candidate is required to pass a qualifying examination and a final examination. 

Admission requirements include a minimum grade-point average of 3.0 
during the last years of undergraduate studies, a master's degree, a minimum 
total score of 1,200 on the verbal and quantitative portions of the Graduate 
Record Examination, three letters of recommendation, submission of copies of 
previous publications, at least a 600-word composition indicating the student's 
purpose and objective in undertaking graduate studies as related to major 
issues in that area, and an acceptable TOEFL score if a foreign student. 

Forest Management (F. Man.) 

411. Advanced Forest Ecology. I. 3 hr. PR: F. Man. 12 or equiv.; F. Man. 211. Ecological 
relationships in forests with emphasis on biogeochemical cycles. 

412. Silviculture! Practices for Hardwood Forest Types. II. 3 hr. PR: F. Man. 211. 
Designing proper silvicultural systems for managing Appalachian hardwood 
stands; reconstructing stand histories, recognizing problems, and prescribing 
appropriate silvicultural treatment. 

Wood Science (Wd. Sc.) 

473. Seminar in Wood Utilization. II. 1 hr. per sem.; max. credit, 4 hr. PR: Consent. 
Reports and discussions of recent research in fundamental and applied phases of 
wood utilization. 



FOREST RESOURCES SCIENCE 209 



FORESTRY 

Jack E. Coster, Chairperson of Division of Forestry 

322-A Percival Hall 

Norman D. Jackson, Assistant Chairperson 

David E. Samuel, Coordinator of the Graduate Program 

Degree Offered: Master of Science in Forestry 

Graduate Faculty: Members Armstrong, Brock, Brown, Hassler, Hicks, Margraf, 

Michael, Patterson, Perry, Samuel, Smith, Tajchman, White, Wiant, and Whitmore. 

Associate Members Coster, Jackson, Kidd, and Yandle. 

Master of Science in Forestry (M.S.F.) 

Admission requirements are those of the College of Agriculture and 
Forestry. Additionally, students seeking admission for the degree of master of 
science in forestry (M.S.F.) should have completed an undergraduate curricu- 
lum in forestry. A student whose undergraduate degree is in a field other than 
forestry will ordinarily be required to take supplemental undergraduate 
courses. Candidates for the degree may major in forest biometry, forest 
ecology, forest economics, forest genetics, forest meterology, forest manage- 
ment, silviculture, or wood industry. The candidate must complete 30 hours of 
approved study, 6 hours of which shall constitute a thesis. The program 
ordinarily requires two years of residence. 

Forestry (For.) 

220. Forest Policy and Administration. I and II. 3 hr. PR: Upperclass forestry major or 
consent. Forest policy in the United States; important federal and state laws; 
administration of public and private forests; problems in multiple-use forestry. 

226. Remote Sensing of Environment. II. 2 hr. PR: Math. 3, 4. Measurement and 
interpretation of natural resources and environment from photography, radar, 
infrared, and microwave imagery. 

233. Principles of Industrial Forestry. I. 3 hr. PR: Forestry senior or consent. Analysis 
and case studies of problems pertinent to the integration of wood conversion 
technology with principles of production, marketing, and management. 

310. Biometeorology. II.4hr. PR: Consent. A description of the physical environment of 
plants and its effect on growth, its modification for increasing yield and for plant 
protection against extreme atmospheric conditions. 

410. Biophysical Ecology. I. 3 hr. PR: For. 310 or consent. An analysis of interactions of 
plants and animals with their environment based on principles of environmental 
physics. Energy and mass exchange between plants and animals, and their 
environment; environmental variables and organism parameters. [Offered in Fall 
of even years.) 

419. Microclimatology. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. A description and quantitative treatment 
of climate near the ground in terms of physiological processes of energy and mass 
exchange. 

470. Special Topics in Forestry, Wood Science, Wildlife, or Recreation. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

480. Principles of Research. I. 2 hr. The specific method as applied in the formal, 
concrete, and normative sciences, with special emphasis on forestry-related 
research plans and reports. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college 
teaching of forest resources management, wood science, wildlife management 
resources, and recreation and parks. 

210 FORESTRY 



491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects 
which are not covered in regularly scheduled classes. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

498. Thesis. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not 
seeking course work credit but who wish to meet resident requirements, use the 
University's facilities, and participate in its academic and cultural programs. 

Forest Hydrology (F. Hyd.) 

243. Forest Water Quality. I. 3 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent. (This course will not 
substitute for F. Hyd. 244.) Influences of natural forest cover, forest land uses, and 
harvesting practices on selected water quality parameters that can be detected in 
simple field and laboratory tests. 

244. Watershed Management. II. 3 hr. PR: F. Man. 12, 211. (Primarily for forest 
management majors.) Influences of silvicultural practices and forest management 
activities on the hydrology of forested catchments. 

Forest Management (F. Man.) 

200. Forest Measurement, Interpretation, Wildlife Management. S. 5 hr. PR: Biol. 51; 
C.E. 5; F. Man. 122. (Course wiJi be taught during four consecutive 6-day weeks. J 
Application and study of forest resources practice with emphasis on field 
problems. 

201. Forest Resources Management Southern Trip. S. 1 hr. PR: F. Man. 200 or consent. 
One-week trip to the Southern Pine Region to observe forest management 
practices on private and public lands. 

211. Silvicultural Systems. I. 4 hr. PR: Forestry majororconsent; F. Man. 12. Principles 
of regeneration cuttings, intermediate cuttings, and cultural operations, with their 
application to forest stands. 

213. Regional Silviculture. I. 2 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent. F. Man. 12; PR or 
Cone: F.Man. 211. Major forest types of the United States: their composition, 
management, problems, and silvicultural treatment. 

215. Principles of Artificial Forestation. II. 3 hr. PR: Forestry majororconsent; F. Man. 
12. Seeding and planting nursery practice; phases of artificial regeneration. 

216. Forest Genetics and Tree Improvement. II. 3 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent; 
Gen. 272 or equiv., or consent. Forest genetic principles and their application to 
forest tree improvement, including crossing methods, selection systems, and other 
techniques. 

222. Advanced Forest Mensuration. II. 3 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent; F. Man. 122. 
Measurement of growth and yield; statistical methods applied to forest measure- 
ment problems. 

230. Principles of Forestry Economics. II. 4 hr. PR: Econ. 54 and 55 or equiv. Production, 
distribution, and use of forest goods and services. Emphasis on analytical 
methods and problem solving techniques in the economic aspects of forestry. 

233. Forest Management. I. 4 hr. PR: Summer Camp; PR or Cone: Forestry major or 
consent; F. Man. 211. Principles of sustained yield forest management. Organiza- 
tion of forest areas, selection of management objectives, application of silvicultural 
systems, and regulation of cut. Forest management plan. 

234. Forest Resources Management Planning. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent; 
senior standing. Analysis and planning for management of forest resources. 
Development of a management plan for an actual forest tract. 

330. Advanced Principles of Forestry Economics. II. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51, 52 or equiv.; F. 
Man. 230 or equiv. Intensive study of both micro- and macroeconomics of forestry. 

FORESTRY 211 



Wood Science (Wd. Sc.) 

200. Forest Measurement Field Practice. S. 3 hr. PR: Wood Industry major, Biol. 51, C.E. 
1, F. Man. 122. Application of surveying and mensurational practices with 
emphasis on field problems. 

201. Wood Industries Field Trip. S. 1 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 134. A one-week trip to observe 
manufacturing methods and techniques of commercial wood industry plants. 
Plants visited include furniture, plywood, veneer, hardboard, particle board, pulp 
and paper, sawmilling, and preservation. 

213. Wood Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Wood Industry major or consent; Chem. 131 or 133. 
Chemical composition of wood including cellulose, hemicellulose lignin and 
extractives. Chemical processing of wood. 

230. Wood Machining. I. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Introduction to basic concepts of wood 
machining with emphasis on production equipment and furniture manufacturing. 

234. Statistical Quality Control. I. 3 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent; Wd. Sc. 134. 
Methods used to control quality of manufactured wood products. Control charts 
of variables and attributes. Acceptance sampling techniques. 

235. Light-Frame Wood Construction. I. 2 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent. Use of 
wood in light-frame construction. Basic design procedures and construction 
methods. 

237. Wood Adhesion and Finishing. II. 3 hr. PR: Wood Industry major or consent; Wd. 
Sci. 123 and 141. Fundamentals of the bonding and finishing of wood including 
preparation, processing, and evaluation of adhesive and finishing systems. 

240. Wood Moisture Relationships. II. 3 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 123. Principles involved in the 
relation between wood and moisture, and purposes, effects, and methods of 
seasoning. 

251. Forest Products Protection. II. 3 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 123, 134. Biological organisms 
responsible for deterioration of wood products, their control by preservative 
methods, and study of fire retarding methods. 

260. Plant Layout for Wood Industries. II. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing. Relates knowledge 
of wood to industrial wood product processes to optimize production. Study of 
proper arrangement of machines, and work and storage areas. 

262. Forest Products Decision-Making. I. 3 hr. PR: Junior standing in Forestry. 
Decision-making tools and techniques used by the forest products industry such 
as simulation linear programming, network analysis, forecasting, game theory. 

320. Wood Microstructure. I. 3 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 123; senior standing. Detailed 
examination of wood microstructure as it relates to processing, behavior, and 
identification. 

340. Advanced Physical Behavior of Wood. I. 3 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 240 or equiv. or consent. 
Physical relationships of water and wood; fluid flow through wood; thermal, 
electrical, and acoustical behavior of wood. Theories of wood drying and their 
application. 

362. Forest Products Operations Research Models. II. 3 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 262 and 
demonstrated knowledge of Fortran and Basic, or consent. Analysis of operations 
research models currently used by the forest products industry. Students will 
develop new models. [Offered in Spring of even years.) 

473. Seminar in Wood Utilization. II. 1 hr. per sem.; max. credit, 4 hr. PR: Consent. 
Reports and discussions of recent research in fundamental and applied phases of 
wood utilization. 

212 FORESTRY 



GENETICS AND DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY 

Joginder Nath, Chairperson of the Interdisciplinary Faculty 

1120 Agricultural Sciences Building 

Degrees Offered: Master of Science, Doctor of Philosophy 

Graduate Faculty: Members Blaydes, R. L. Butcher, L. Butler, Caterson, Charon, 
Gallagher, Garbutt, Gerencser, Kaczmarczyk, Katula, Keller, Klandorf, Kotarski, 
Leonard, McGraw, Mengoli, Miller, Nath, Ong, Overman, Pore, Quinlan, Reyer, 
Sheil, Strobl, Thayne, Tryfiates, Van Dyke, Vrana, Wearden, Williams, and Yelton. 
Associate Members D. F. Butcher, Hall, Kirk, Montiegel, and Ulrich. 

The M.S. and Ph.D. degrees are offered in genetics and developmental 
biology, an interdisciplinary program involving the faculty and facilities of a 
number of departments in the various colleges and schools of the University. 
A student may concentrate in genetics or developmental biology. The areas in 
which specialization is offered are as follows: 

Genetics — Biochemical and molecular genetics, cytogenetics, develop- 
mental genetics, immunogenetics, mutagenesis, toxicology, human genetics, 
plant genetics, population and quantitative genetics, and animal breeding; 

Developmental Biology— Molecular aspects of development, experimental 
morphogenesis, teratology, regeneration, oncology, descriptive embryology, 
and life cycles of animals and plants. 

The student may also minor in one or more other scientific ields. Students 
are expected to maintain at least a 3.0 (B) average in all work offered in 
fulfillment of the degree program. For a more complete statement of require- 
ments, the student is referred to the program's Guideiines for Graduate 
Students in the Genetics and Developmental Biology Program. The chairperson 
for the genetics and developmental biology program is housed in the College 
of Agriculture and Forestry. 

The objective of this program is an increased level of understanding of 
modern concepts and methodologies employed in genetic and developmental 
biological work and to prepare a student to pursue a career in teaching and/or 
research. Responsibility for a student's program is vested in a graduate 
committee charged with arranging the student's course work, conducting 
examinations, and supervising the research. 

To be considered for admission in the program the student must possess a 
baccalaureate degree from an accredited college or university, must have a 
grade-point average of at least a 2.75 (on a 4.0 scale), or an average of 3.0 or 
higher for the last 60 credit hours or an average of 3.0 or higher in all courses in 
sciences and mathematics. 

The student must submit the scores of the Graduate Record Examination 
(GRE), or the New Medical College Admission Test (New MCAT). The 
student must provide three letters of reference from persons acquainted with 
the applicants' professional work, experiences, or academic work and submit 
a written statement of 500 words or more indicating the applicants' goals and 
objectives relative to receiving a graduate degree. 

Basic training in mathematics, physics, chemistry, and biology is required 
for admission. Students lacking prerequisites may be accepted in a provisional 
status but must fulfill them before graduation. Applications for graduate 
study should be sent in as early in the year as possible, but not later than April 
1 for entry the following August. However, applications are accepted year- 
round for admission to the program in the following semester. Official 
transcripts of baccalaureate and/or master's degrees must be sent directly to 
the WVU Office of Admissions and Records. Application forms can be 
received from the WVU Office of Admissions and Records, P.O. Box 6009, 

GENETICS AND DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY 213 



Morgantown, WV 26506-6009. For further information, write to the Chair- 
person. 

Genetics (Gen.) 

290. Crop Breeding. II. 3 hr. PR: Gen. 171 or 321. Methods and basic scientific principles 
involved in improvement of leading crops through hybridization, selection, and 1. 
Control of phenotype by genetic material. Gene action and coding of genetic 
material. 

325. Human Genetics. II. 3 hr. PR: Gen. 171 or 321 or consent. Study of genetic system 
responsible for development of phenotype in man. (Offered in Spring of odd 
years.) 

335. Population Genetics. II. 3 hr. PR: Gen. 171 or 321 or consent. Relationship of gene 
and genotype frequencies in populations of diploid organisms, and the effects of 
mutation, migration, selection, assortive mating, and inbreeding in relation to 
single gene pairs. Application of these concepts to multigenic inheritance of 
quantitative traits. [Offered in Spring of even years.) 

370. Medical Genetics. II. 2-4 hr. PR: Second-year medical student standing; graduate 
student in Genetics and Developmental Biology; others by consent. Introduction 
to clinical genetics including molecular, biochemical, and cytogenetic aspects of 
human biology. Application of genetic principles to human health and disease. 
(Also listed as CC MD 370, Med. 370, Pedia. 370.) 

424. Cytogenetics. II. 4 hr. PR: Gen. 171 or 321, and Biol. 215 or consent. Emphasis on 
macromolecules that carry information of the chromosomes, cell division, and the 
cytological and molecular basis of genetics. Special attention given to visible 
manisfestation of genes, human cytogenetics, cytogenetics of genomes and 
chromosome morphology, and their evolution. [Offered in Spring of odd years.) 

426. Advanced Biochemical Genetics. II. 3 hr. PR: Gen. 171 or 321 and organic 
chemistry. Physiological and biophysical concepts of genetic material. Structure 
and arrangement of genetic units. Nucleic acids as carriers of genetic information. 
Gene action and amino acid coding. Biochemical evolution of genetic material. 
Genetic control mechanisms. Biochemistry of mutation. (Offered in Spring of even 
years.) 

427. Genetic Mechanisms of Evolution. I. 3 hr. PR: Gen. 171 or equiv. Molecular genetic 
mechanisms which result in evolutionary change. Origin of life, origin and 
organization of genetic variability, differentiation of populations, isolation and 
speciation, role of hybridization and polploidy, and origin of man. (Offered in Fall 
of odd years.) 

450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. Recent literature pertaining to biochemical, classical, 
human, molecular, and cytological genetics. 

497. Research. I, II. 1-15 hr. 

Developmental Biology 

The following courses in the Departments of Anatomy, Biochemistry, and 
Biology may be applied toward the requirements for a major in developmental 
biology: Anatomy 402— Advanced Developmental Anatomy, Anatomy 405— 
Experimental Embryology, Biochemistry 491— Advanced Study in Nucleic 
Acids, Biology 214 — Molecular Basis of Cellular Growth, Biology 309 — 
Molecular Biology of the Gene, Biology 362— Developmental Biology, and 
Biology 364— Advanced Plant Physiology. 



214 GENETICS AND DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY 



GEOGRAPHY 

Robert Hanham, Assistant Chairperson of Department of Geology and Geography 
406 White Hall 

Degree Offered: Master of Arts 

Graduate Faculty: Members Calzonetti, Elmes, Hanham, T. Harris, Kite, Martis, 
Pickles, and Pyle. 

The graduate program in geography at WVU provides students with the 
opportunity to study for an M. A. degree in one of three areas of specialization: 
(1) regional development and planning; (2) energy and environmental re- 
sources; (3) geographic information systems and cartographic analysis. 
Students who are interested in pursuing research in an area other than these 
may do so provided the research area matches the interests of a faculty 
member in the department who agrees to supervise the student's program. 
Students who wish to focus their research on a particular region are 
encouraged to do so. Faculty in the geography program currently have 
research interests in Appalachia, North America, Africa, Europe, the Middle 
East, and the Pacific. 

The award of an M.A. in Geography requires: (1) 30 hours of graduate 
credit with a minimum grade-point average of 3.0; (2) satisfactory completion 
of Geography 300 (Geography Research Colloquium, four credits), Geography 
301 (Geographic Theory and Practice, three credits), Geography 302 (Research 
Design, three credits), Geography 399 (Geostatistics and Quantitative Meth- 
ods, three credits), and four credit hours of Geography 496 (Graduate Research 
Seminar); (3) satisfactory completion of at least 21 graduate credit hours in 
geography, of which the 17 listed in (2) immediately above may be included; 

(4) a successful oral examination of the student's knowledge of the literature in 
the student's field of specialization and in the philosophy of geography; and 

(5) completion and successful oral defense of a research thesis. 

Prospective students should have an overall undergraduate grade-point 
average of 2.75, and 3.0 GPA for geography courses. Students with degrees in 
other disciplines are encouraged to apply, but they may be asked to make up 
deficiencies in geography during their first year in the program. Incoming 
geography students may also be asked to make up deficiencies if such are 
found to exist during the students' entry interview with faculty immediately 
prior to the first semester of their program. Applicants for the program should 
submit GRE scores, orequivalent qualification, and three letters of reference, 
and official transcripts. 

Each incoming student is interviewed prior to the first semester of his or 
her program. The purpose of this meeting is threefold: to introduce the student 
to the faculty; to ascertain the student's interests; and to assess whether the 
student has deficiencies that should be rectified. Students with well-defined 
interests are assigned an adviser at this time. Other students are supervised 
by the Director of the Graduate Program until the student develops a more 
clearly defined research interest, which should be no later than the end of the 
student's first year in the program. At the end of this year, at least two further 
faculty will be assigned to each student to form the student's program 
committee. At least one of these must be a geography faculty member at WVU. 
Students may change advisers or committee members after consultation with 
the adviser, the Director of the Graduate Program, and the Director of the 
Geography program. 

Students are expected to choose an area of specialization within the first 
semester of their program of study. This choice will determine which courses 
the student shall take. In each area, the student is encouraged to take courses 



GEOGRAPHY 215 



both in geography as well as outside the discipline. In general it is expected 
that a student's program will have the following format: 

First Semester, First Year 

• Geog. 300— Geography Research Colloquium (1 hr.) 

• Geog. 301— Geographic Theory and Practice (3 hr.) 

• Geog. 496— Graduate Seminar in Geography (2 1-hr. modules) 

• Three credit hours of directed readings or graduate course. 

Second Semester, First Year 

• Geog. 300— Geography Research Colloquium (1 hr.) 

• Geog. 302— Geographic Research Design (3 hr.) 

• Geog. 399— Quantitative Methods in Geo-Sciences (3 hr.) 

• Geog. 496— Graduate Seminar in Geography (2 1-hr. modules) 

First Semester, Second Year 

• Geog. 300— Geography Research Colloquium (1 hr.) 

• Eight credit hours of directed readings or graduate courses 

Second Semester, Second Year 

• Geog. 300— Geography Research Colloquium (1 hr.) 

• Two or more credit hours of thesis research. 

All students shall be examined no later than the end of their third 
semester on their knowledge of the literature in their area of specialization 
and in the philosophy of geography. The examination shall be oral and it will 
be conducted by the student's committee. The student shall pass the 
examination if at least two-thirds of the committee vote in favor of a pass. 
Should the student fail the examination, either the student shall be required to 
undertake some remedial study, such as a course or directed readings which 
must be completed with at least a B grade, or the student will be required to 
retake the examination. No student may retake the examination more than 
once. 

The thesis will represent the outcome of independent research undertaken 
by the student. It must be regarded by the student's program committee as a 
contribution to the discipline of geography. The thesis must also reflect the 
student's knowledge of the literature pertaining to the subject matter of the 
thesis. A student may substitute a thesis of a special nature with the approval 
of the faculty; e.g. policy document, film, and so on. A full proposal regarding 
the thesis research will be presented to the faculty in an oral presentation no 
later than the end of the third semester of the student's program of study. The 
student's committee will determine the proposal's acceptability. If it is 
deemed unacceptable, a further presentation may be required. The proposal 
must be typed and copied and submitted to the committee at least two weeks 
prior to the presentation. The defense of the thesis will take place when the 
student and his/her committee agree that a defensible copy of the thesis is 
complete. For full-time students this shall be no more than three years after 
entry into the program. The examination is graded on a pass/provisional- 
pass/fail basis by a majority vote of the committee. A student who fails may 
submit another thesis or a revised version of the existing one upon the 
approval of the student's committee. No student shall be re-examined more 
than once. A student who is given a provisional pass will generally be 
required to make minor revisions or corrections to the thesis. 

It is expected that full-time students shall not need more than two years 
to satisfy all program requirements. In many cases these can be fulfilled in 
less time than that. 

216 GEOGRAPHY 



Research and teaching assistantships are awarded on an annual basis 
and for no more than two years. Awards for the second year are based on 
performance in the first year with respect to both assistantship duties and 
academic progress. Assistantships include a full tuition waiver. 

The graduate program in geography at WVU has strong liaison with the 
University's Geology Program, the Regional Research Institute, the Depart- 
ment of Mineral Resource Economics, Water Research Institute, International 
Studies Program, West Virginia Geological and Economic Survey, and with 
several other units in the University. Contemporary high-speed computing 
facilities are centered on a DEC cluster for geographic information systems 
and analysis. The system has three gigabytes of on-line storage, tape drives 
and supports Tektronix graphic workstations, digitizers and plotters for 
cartographic output. Major hardware upgrades are scheduled for 1989-1990. 
ARC-INFO geographic information system operates in a multi-user environ- 
ment. ERDAS image-processing/GIS and GRASS are installed on personal 
computers, 286, 386 and MACIIs, also run cartographical and statistical 
applications. The department computer system is linked to WVNET mainframe 
installations for access to all major software and to electronic networks. 

Geography (Geog.) 

200. Geography Data Analysis. I. 3 hr. Quantitative techniques for collection, classifi- 
cation, and spatial analysis of geographical data with emphasis on map analysis 
and application of spatial analysis. 

201. Geography of West Virginia and Appalachia. II. 3 hr. PR: Geog. 8. Analysis of 
changing patterns of human use of the physical environment in West Virginia and 
Appalachia. 

202. Political Geography. II. 3 hr. Examines the interrelationship between politics and 
the environment, human territoriality, the political organization of space, geopolit- 
ical aspects of the nation-state and international problems. 

205. Environmentahsm in the United States. II. 3 hr. Surveys natural resource 
exploitation and environmental alteration in the United States from the beginning 
of European settlement, with consideration of changing natural resources, 
conservation, and environmental perceptions and policies. 

209. Industrial Location. II. 3 hr. PR: Geog. 109 or consent. Applied theoretical aspects 
of location decisions in primary, secondary, and tertiary activities. Emphasis will 
be on the understanding of location patterns and the impact of industries on other 
characteristics of communities. 

210. Global Issues: Inequality and Interdependence. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 
Geog. 1 or 2 or 8. Themes of spatial equity and justice in an increasingly 
interdependent world system. Contemporary issues concerning location, place, 
movement, and region. 

211. Regional Development. 3 hr. PR: Geog. 109 or consent. Examination of growth and 
decline of regions in developed countries, with emphasis on the United States. 
Practical implementation of regional development policies. 3 hr. lee. 

219. Problems in Geography. I, II. 1-9 hr. PR: Consent. Independent study or special 
topics. 

220. Seminar in Geography. I, II. 1-9 hr. per sem.; max. 15 hr. PR: Consent. Includes 
separate seminars in urban, economic, physical, behavioral, social, Appalachian, 
transportation, census, planning, resource, international studies, geographic 
model building, rural problems, cartography, aging and environment, and energy. 

221. Geomorphology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1 or 5. (Optional field trip at student's expense.] 
An examination of the physical processes which shape the surface of the earth, 
with emphasis on fluvial processes and environmental geomorphology. (Also 
listed as Geol. 221.) 

GEOGRAPHY 217 



225. Urban and Regional Planning. II. 3 hr. PR: Geog. 110 or Pol. S. 121 or consent. 
Explores concepts, techniques, and processes of physical and socio-economic 
planning and their application to urban and regional problems. 

230. Rural Land Use. I. 3 hr. PR: Geog. 8. Analysis of the geographic distribution of 
various land uses in rural areas. 

235. Place and Behavior. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Geog. 8. Changing experience of 
geographical space over the life cycle as reflected in activity patterns, territoriality, 
and environmental images; traces environmental design of schools, nursing 
homes, parks, and shopping malls. 

251. Geographic Informational Systems Technical Issues. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 
Geog. 151 and Geog. 200. Operational and management issues in planning 
management analysis, locational decision making and design and implementation 
of GIS. Lab project emphasizes student's specialization. (2 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab.) 

252. Geographical Informational Systems Applications. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 
Geog. 151 and Geog. 200. Operational and management issues in planning 
management analysis, locational decision making and design and implementation 
of GIS. Lab project emphasizes student's specialization. (2 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab.) 

261. Cartography. I, II. 3 hr. An introduction to mapping, including historical 
developments, coordinate systems, projections, generalization, symbolization, 
map design, computer-assisted cartography, landform representation, and data 
manipulation for dot, graduate symbol, chloropleth, and isarithmic mpas. 

262. Cartographic Techniques. II. 3 hr. PR: Geog. 261 or consent. Advanced map 
construction including positive and negative artwork, darkroom techniques, color 
and color proofing, and map reproduction. 

285. Methods of Geographic Research. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
Geographic analysis as problem-solving activity. Practical experience in field 
techniques, library research, hypothesis formation and testing, and report 
preparation and presentation. Students will acquire skills in literary and 
numerical approaches to geographic data analysis. 

290. Geographical Perspectives on Energy. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. A survey of the 
distribution of finite, renewable, and continuous energy resources and an 
investigation of the geographical patterns of energy consumption and energy 
flows. The policy implications of an unequal distribution of energy are evaluated. 

295. Internship. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Junior standing and consent. A working internship 
with an agency or company designed to give the student experience in the 
practical application of geographic training to specific problems. 

299. Honors Thesis. I, II, S. 3-6 hr. PR: Departmental consent. Thesis proposal, writing, 
and defense for students admitted to the Honors Program. 

300. Geography Research Colloquium. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Lectures and presentations 
on recent and current research by resident and visiting scholars. 

301. Theory and Philosophy of Geography. 3 hr. PR: Geog. 285 or consent. Development 
and significance of concepts and theories in geographical traditions; introduction 
to current research interests and specialties of the program. 

302. Geographic Research-Design. II. 3 hr. PR: Geog. 200 and Geog. 301. Choosing, 
preparing, and developing research problems of geographic interest. Emphasizes 
proposal writing and research design alternatives. 

310. U.S. Regions in World-Economy. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Geog. 8 and 109, or 
consent. An examination of the growth and decline of regions in the United States, 
with particular emphasis on the regional impact of the United States' changing 
involvement in the world economy. 

311. Advanced Regional Development. 3 hr. PR: Geog. 211 or consent. Review of 
geographic theories in developed countries; comparison of development policies 
in capitalist and socialist countries. 3 hr. lee. 

218 GEOGRAPHY 



315. Underdeveloped Regions. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Geog. 8 and 109, or 
consent. Underdevelopment of various regions throughout the world, including a 
critical assessment of recent national and international development policies. 

329. Problems in Geomorphology. I, II. 1-4 hr. (Also listed as Geo]. 329.) 

399. Advanced Research Methods. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 311, Geog. 200 or consent. Brief 
review and introduction to multivariate quantitative techniques as applied to 
geology and geography. (Aiso listed as Geol. 399.) 

489. Geography Graduate Student Internship. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Internship in 
the private or public sector designed for practical application of geographic 
training. 

491. Advanced Study in Geography. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Investigation of topics not covered 
in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent or through scheduled 
meetings. 

496. Graduate Seminar in Geography. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Research seminars in energy 
studies, regional science, regional development and planning, water resource and 
environmental management, geomorphology, area studies, advanced geostatistics, 
and computer analysis. 

497. Research in Geography. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. 

GEOLOGY 

Alan C. Donaldson, Chairperson of Department of Geology and Geography 
425 White Hall 

Degrees Offered: Master of Science, Doctor of Philosophy 

Graduate Faculty: Members Donaldson, Gillespie, R. Harris, Heald, Kammer, Lang, 
Rauch, Renton, Shumaker, Smosna, and Wilson. Associate Member Behling. 

The Department of Geology and Geography offers work leading to the 
degrees of master of science (M.S.) and doctor of philosophy (Ph.D.) in 
geology. 

Applicants for graduate studies in geology must have as a minimum 
requirement a bachelor's degree and an overall grade-point average of at least 
2.75. Acceptance by the Department of Geology and Geography is necessary 
before admission of any prospective student to the program. All candidates 
for a graduate degree in geology must submit scores in the general aptitude 
test of the Graduate Record Examination. 

Before being admitted to programs leading to the M.S. or the Ph.D., a 
student must pass an entrance examination covering physical, historical and 
structural geology, sedimentation-stratigraphy and mineralogy. The examina- 
tion is given from 7:00-9:30 p.m. on the second day of classes each semester. 

Students seeking admission to the master's program or the Ph.D. program 
must complete the equivalents of all science and mathematics courses 
required for the B.S. in geology at WVU before being admitted to these 
programs. 

In the descriptions that follow, "formal course" means a lecture or 
seminar course and not a directed, but independent, exercise in the solution of 
a specific problem and the presentation of results. 

A minimum grade-point average of 3.0 must be maintained in required 
formal courses in geology and cognate fields for the masters degree and 3.3 for 
the Ph.D. Credit will not be allowed for courses in which grades below "B" are 
attained, but these courses will be included in the grade-point average. Loads 
of 9-12 hours are required and no withdrawals are permitted after the first 
two weeks of a semester. A student who fails to maintain the required average 
at the completion of any semester during the graduate program will be 
allowed one academic year (two semesters) to attain the required average. 

GEOLOGY 219 



Failure to attain this average by the end of the probationary period will 
permanently eliminate the student as a candidate for a graduate degree in this 
department. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

No later than the beginning of the second semester in residence, the 
prospective candidate must choose one of the options leading to the master of 
science (M.S.] degree in geology. 

Option One: Master of Science in Geology (M.S.) — Research 

This has been the "traditional" option for the master of science in geology. 
Students considering continued studies (doctor of philosophy) should choose 
this option. 

A minimum of 24 formal-course hours with grades of A or B and six 
research hours are required for graduation. A thesis based on original 
research also is required. With consent of the candidate's advisory committee, 
the field work need not be done while in residence at WVU. 

Required to Graduate: 30 hours, including certain required courses 
specified by the adviser. 

Option Two: Master of Science in Geology (M.S.) — Professional Studies 

This option is designed specifically for students seeking experience in 
preparing and presenting professional problems. Students choosing this 
option would be seeking employment in technical fields rather than continuing 
studies for a higher degree. 

A minimum of 34 formal-course hours with grades of A or B and eight 
problems hours (Geol. 492) are required for graduation. The problems hours 
are in lieu of a thesis and are designed to simulate the work of professional 
geologists as they seek solutions to open-ended problems. Experience in 
presentation of problems and solutions is an integral part of the program. 

Problems credits may be earned in conjunction with off-campus experi- 
ences by consent of the candidate's advisory committee. 

Required to Graduate: 42 hours, including certain required courses 
specified by the adviser. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

The candidate for the doctor of philosophy (Ph.D.) must complete a 
program of courses outlined by the candidate's doctoral committee. Reading 
competence in a foreign language is required. Written and oral comprehensive 
examinations must be successfully completed. Work on original research is to 
be presented in a dissertation and defended in an oral examination. 

Research 

Close cooperation between the West Virginia Geological and Economic 
Survey, located on Cheat Lake near Morgantown, and the Department of 
Geology and Geography makes a large amount of material available for 
laboratory investigation. This includes the fossil collections of the department 
and the survey. A large number of samples of drill cuttings from deep wells in 
West Virginia and adjoining states are housed in the survey. Complete 
analytical geochemical equipment is available through a University analytical 
laboratory available to the department. The department also has a number of 
cooperative projects with the Morgantown Energy Technology Center of the 
U.S. Department of Energy. Morgantown is conveniently situated for detailed 
studies of Mississippian, Pennsylvanian, and Permian formations. Mineral 

220 GEOLOGY 



products of the region near Morgantown include coal, petroleum, natural gas, 
and limestone. The occurrence and utilization of these materials can be 
studied by graduate students interested in economic geology. Department 
geophysical equipment includes a Geometries magnetometer, a Worden 
gravimeter, an engineering seismograph, and a three-component short period 
seismograph. A permanent summer field camp (Camp Wood) is located in the 
Folded Appalachians at Alvon, Greenbrier County. The coastal geology 
program includes an annual trip to the Florida Keys, and the Virginia shore. 
Other summer field courses are carbonate sedimentation in the Florida Keys, 
glacial geology in Maine, and a biennial European geology at different sites. 
Additional oceanography courses and research are available at the Marine 
Science Consortium at Wallops Island, Virginia, with which WVU is affiliated. 
The Department computer facility operates in a clustered microVAX 
environment, consisting of a VAX 11/750, five VAX 2000/3100 workstations 
and a VAX 3500 workstation with an attached Sky Warrior array processor. 
Seismic modeling software includes GeoQuest International Incorporated's 
interactive AIMS III (advanced interpretive modeling system), and Oklahoma 
Seismic Corporation's MIRA interactive seismic modeling software are 
available. Forward and inverse algorithms are available in Interpex Ltd. for 
model studies of gravity, magnetic resistivity, and electromagnetic data. The 
Kansas Geological Survey's SURFACEII well log data contouring and 
statistical analysis package is also available for use on VAX workstations 
along with Scientific Computer Application Inc.'s MCS mapping and con- 
touring system which operates on a PC. An interactive database management 
system has been developed and interfaced with SURFACEII to facilitate 
updating, sorting and plotting of selected data. Additional software include: 
VAX/VMS Fortran 77, SAS statistical package, NTSYS numerical taxonomy 
system, DECnet networking, JCDPS Powder diffraction search/match, 
INFORMAP CAD/AM/FM, EMIS GIS, and IEMIS GIS. Departmental word 
processing is available for graduate students. ARC-INFO geographic informa- 
tion system operates in a multi-user within the department. 

Geology (Ceol.) 

201. Physical Geology for Teachers. I, II. 3 hr. {Credit cannot be obtained for both 
Geol. 201 and Geol. 1 or 5.) PR: High school teaching certificate and consent. 
Composition and structure of earth and the geologic processes which shape its 
surface. 

221. Geomorphology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1 or 5. (Optional field trip at student's expense.) 
An examination of the physical processes which shape the surface of the earth, 
with emphasis on fluvial processes and environmental geomorphology. (Also 
listed as Geog. 221.) (Offered in Spring of odd years.} 

222. Glacial Geology. I. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1 or 5. (Optional field trip(s) at student's 
expense.) Introduction to glaciology and glacial geology, with emphasis on 
topographic form and the nature of glacial deposits. The Quaternary history of 
North America is stressed. 

228. Photogeology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 127, 152, or consent. Instruction in basic and 
advanced techniques of air-photo interpretation. 

231. Invertebrate Paleontology. I. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 3, 4, 184, Stat. 101, or consent. 
(Weekend field trip required at student's expense.) Invertebrate fossils: biologic 
classification, evolutionary development, ecology, and use in correlation of strata. 

235. Introductory Paleobotany. I. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 3. (Required Saturday field trips at 
student's expense.) Resume of development of principal plant groups through the 
ages, present distribution, mode of occurrence and index species, methods of 
collection. 

GEOLOGY 221 



235. Introductory Paleobotany. I. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 3. (Required Saturday field trips at 
student's expense.) Resume of development of principal plant groups through the 
ages, present distribution, mode of occurrence and index species, methods of 
collection. 

251. Advanced Topics in Structural Geology . II. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 152 and 261 or consent; 
Math. 15; undergraduates need consent. (Two two-day field trips required. Basic 
field equipment and field trip at student's expense.) Studies into the development 
of structures emphasizing both theoretical and experimental approaches. (Offered 
in Spring of odd years.) 

261. Stratigraphy and Sedimentation. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 3, 4, 152, 185, or consent. 
(Two-day field trip required. Basic field equipment and field trips at student's 
expense.) Study of sediments and sedimentary rocks. Field techniques stressed as 
data gathered and interpreted from rocks of Pennsylvanian age in the Morgantown 
vicinity. 

266. Appalachian Geology Field Camp. S. 6 hr. PR: Geol. 152, 185, 261, and consent. 
(Living expense in addition to tuition must be paid at time of registration.) 
Practical experience in detailed geological field procedures and mapping. 

270. Mineral Resources. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1, 184. Description, mode of occurrence, and 
principles governing the formation of ore deposits. 

272. Petroleum Geology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 152. Origin, geologic distribution, methods 
of exploration and exploitation, uses and future reserves of petroleum and natural 
gas in the world. 

273. Petroleum Geology Laboratory. II. 1 hr. PR or Cone: Geol. 152. Well sample 
description, correlation, and interpretation. Construction and interpretation of 
subsurface maps used in exploration for hydrocarbons. 

274. Coal Geology. I. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 152 or consent. Introduction to the origin, 
composition, geologic distribution, and exploration of coals. 

287. Igneous and Metamorphic Petrology. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 185, and 385 or consent. 
Review of current theories for generation and evolution of magmas, and techniques 
of determining metamorphic conditions from mineral assemblage. Study of 
igneous and metamorphic rocks in thin section. (Weekend field trip at student's 
expense.) 3 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab. 

290. Geologic Problems. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (12 hr. max.). PR: Consent. (Also includes field 
trips such as Florida Bay carbonate trip.) Special problems for senior and 
graduate students. 

294. Introduction to Geochemistry. II. 4 hr. PR: Chem. 16. Basic review of physical and 
aqueous chemistry, discussion of the basic geochemical processes; calcium 
carbonate chemistry, diagenetic processes, weathering, the silicate and iron 
systems. 

315. Environmental Geoscience. I. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 221 or concurrent registration or 
consent for nongeology majors. (Field trips and independent field project 
required.) Principles, practice, and case histories in application of earth science to 
environmental problems. Includes: water quality; landslides; subsidence; waste 
disposal; legal aspects; and geologic aspects of land-use planning. 

329. Problems in Geomorphology. I, II. 1-4 hr. (Also listed as Geog. 329.) 

332. Paleoecology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 231 and 261 or consent. Methods of paleoecologic 
analysis in sedimentary geology. Topics include trace fossil analysis, shell 
biogeochemistry, community paleoecology, biofacies analysis of basins, and 
Precambrian paleoecology. 

222 GEOLOGY 



341. Carbonate Sedimentology. II. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 231, 261. Origin and distribution of 
modern marine carbonate sediments as models for interpretation of ancient 
limestone and dolomite facies complexes. Laboratory experience in thin section 
petrography of skeletal and nonskeletal carbonate grains, and rock compositions 
and fabrics. 

346. Advanced Sedimentation. I. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 261 or consent. (Required field trips at 
student's expense.) Origin of sedimentary rocks; principles involved in interpreta- 
tion of ancient geography, climates, animals, and plants. Emphasis on detrital 
sediments and rocks. 

351. Tectonics. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 152 and 261 orconsent; Math. 15; undergraduates need 
consent. Theories of large-scale deformational processes operating within the 
earth's crust and mantile emphasizing regional structural geology outside the 
Appalachians. (Offered in Spring of even years.) 

352. Exploration Geophysics 1. 1. 4 hr. PR: Math. 15, Geol. 152, 261, or equiv. Studies in 
applied geophysics with particular emphasis on techniques in reflection and 
refraction seismology, and gravity, and their application to energy resource 
exploration. (3 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab.) 

353. Exploration Geophysics 2. II. 4 hr. PR: Math. 15. Geol. 152, 261 or equiv. Geologic 
interpretation of geophysical data with emphasis placed on structural and 
stratigraphic interpretation of seismic records in explorations for hydrocarbon 
deposits. 

357. Basin Structures. I. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 152, 261, orequiv. The origin, development, and 
distribution of basins and the structure found within basins throughout the world 
are studied. The distribution of energy-related minerals related to basins and 
structural accumulations are emphasized. 

363. Groundwater Hydrology. I. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1 or consent. Study of the principles of 
groundwater hydrology; occurrence, development, uses, and conservation of 
groundwater. 

364. Advanced Groundwater Hydrology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1, 2, 363 or consent. Review 
of groundwater exploration, flow, and quality in various geologic terrains. 
Groundwater pollution and other environmental effects are covered, along with 
well pumping tests and modeling of groundwater flow. 

376. Coal Petrology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 274 or consent. Microscopic examination and 
determination of optical properties of coals, environment of deposition, diagenesis, 
and metamorphism of coals; coal chemistry and petrography. 

385. Optical Mineralogy and Sedimentary Petrology. I. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 185 and one year 
of physics. Principles and practice in use of the petrographic microscope in 
identification of minerals by the immersion method and thin section; emphasis on 
sedimentary petrology. 

394. Physical Geochemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1, 184, 185; Chem. 16. Phase diagrams, 
metamorphic facies, origin of the elements, chemical properties of ions, crystal 
chemistry of minerals, element distributions and geochemical cycles. (Offered in 
Fall of even years.) 

395. Aqueous Geochemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1, Chem. 16, orconsent. Review of basic 
chemical principles as they apply to aqueous geologic environments. Properties of 
water and the types, sources, and controls of the common and environmentally 
significant chemical species dissolved in water. 

399. Quantitative Methods in Geo-Sciences. II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 212 or 311, Geog. 200 or 
consent. Brief review and introduction to multivariate quantitative techniques as 
applied to geology and geography. (Also listed as Geog. 399.) 

GEOLOGY 223 



420. Advanced Topics. I, II. 1-12 hr. Includes separate courses in karst, advanced 
hydrology, instrumentation, paleoecology, regional geology, paleobiogeography, 
advanced coal petrology, and advanced paleontology. 

432. MicropaJeontology. 1. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 231. dentification of Foraminifera, Ostracoda, 
andconodonts; emphasis on classification, nomenclature, and use of paleontolog- 
ical literature. (Offered in Fall of even years.) 

492. Non-Thesis Research. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised non-thesis 
research for M.S. Options 2, 3, and 4. Report required by arranged deadline. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1-6 hr. 

497. Research. I, II. 1-15 hr. 

HISTORY 

Ronald L. Lewis, Chairperson of the Department 

202 Woodburn Hall 

Degrees Offered: Master of Arts, Doctor of Philosophy 

Graduate Faculty: Members Bagby, Blobaum, Good, Hammersmith, Howe, Hudson, 

Jakobson, Kemp, Lewis, Lustig, Maxon, Maxwell, McCluskey, McKivigan, and 

Super. Associate Members Arnett, O'Brien, and Parkinson. 

The Department of History offers graduate courses in the history of the 
United States, Europe, Africa, Asia, Latin America, and science and tech- 
nology. Courses are designed to prepare students in historiography, research 
methods, and interpretation. Students can select concentrations leading to 
preparation for careers in teaching and scholarship and as specialists for 
various branches of government, business, and service. Students in the 
program are normally expected to pursue the degrees of master of arts, the 
master of arts option in public history, or the doctor of philosophy. 

Master of Arts (M.A.) 

Admission. Students seeking admission to the M.A. program should have 
the equivalent of a bachelor's degree in history. Application requirements 
include transcripts (a minimum of a 3.0 average in history courses is 
expected), three letters of recommendation, and scores on the Graduate 
Record Examination General Aptitude Test. 

Requirements. Completion of a minimum of 30 hours of course work with 
at least a B grade, and achievement of a reading proficiency in one foreign 
language. All 30 hours may be in history, or students may select up to six 
hours outside of the department. The history course work shall include a 
well-defined core area (selected from the fields listed for comprehensive examinations 
or approved by the graduate studies committee) of at least 12 hours. In 
addition, students are expected to enroll continuously in Hist. 499 — Depart- 
ment Colloquium. Credit for this course does not count towards the degree. Students 
are also required to complete a master's thesis. A maximum of six hours of 
credit for Hist. 497, Research, can be taken for writing the thesis and for 
fulfilling the 30-hour M.A. requirement. Candidates for the M.A. are required 
to pass a final oral examination on their core area of study and thesis. 

M.A. Option in Public History 

The department offers an M.A. option in public history. This option is 
intended to provide enhanced employment opportunities to graduate students 
interested in using their education in history in a profession other than 
teaching. Extensive resources of the state are used for interpretation and 

224 HISTORY 



preservation. This is the only full public history graduate curriculum in West 
Virginia. 

The public history option is open to selected students in the M.A. 
program. Students apply for admission as they would for the regular M.A. 
program, and should indicate on their application that they are interested in 
public history. In addition, students should submit a two-page letter of 
application, which should indicate the student's background in history or 
public history and why the student wants to be admitted to the option; this 
letter should be addressed to the Chairperson of the Department of History. 
Students may be admitted to the option who do not have a major in history by 
making up deficiencies in their course work for undergraduate credit; these 
courses may be taken while the students are enrolled for graduate classes or 
students may be able to test out of some courses. 

The public history option consists of 15 hours of public history courses 
(introduction to public history, two of three methods courses in historical 
editing, archival management, historic site intepretation and preservation, 
and a six-hour supervised internship). Special topics courses are occasionally 
offered in historic preservation and may be taken in lieu of courses outside the 
Department of History. Students are required to take a 300-400 level 
readings/research seminar sequence in one subject area in the Department of 
History outside public history. Course descriptions, syllabi, policies and 
procedures, and a list of internship possibilities are available at the Department 
of History on request by contacting the coordinator of the public history 
option. 

History of Science and Technology 

The Department of History offers a special field in the history of science 
and technology as part of the regular M.A. and Ph.D. programs. This field is 
also suitable as an outside field for graduate students in engineering, the 
sciences, or education. Its purpose is to stimulate the development of a more 
comprehensive and integrated approach to liberal education and to encourage 
the wider use of the intellectual and technical resources of the University. 

Students are expected to take introductory colloquia in the history of 
science and technology and to draw up individualized plans of study designed 
to give them a deeper understanding of those subject areas in which they have 
a particular interest. The department has close ties to the Institute for the 
History of Technology and Industrial Archeology, and students in this field 
have the opportunity to learn the direct application of knowledge by working 
on projects undertaken by the Institute. 

Requirements for admission are the same as those for other students in 
the department. However, interested students with backgrounds in the 
sciences or engineering rather than history are encouraged to contact the 
director of graduate studies for further information. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

Admission. Students seeking admission to the Ph.D. program should 
have the equivalent of a M.A. in history. Application requirements include a 
transcript (a minimum of a 3.0 average in graduate history courses is 
required), three letters of recommendation, and scores on the Graduate 
Record Examination General Aptitude Test. Students should also include a 
statement of purpose and an example of their written work as a part of the 
application. 

HISTORY 225 



Requirements. Requirements for the Ph.D. degree in history include the 
general WVU requirements; a reading knowledge of two foreign languages; 
completion of two readings/seminar sequences beyond those offered for the 
M.A.; completion of one graduate-level historiography course; continuous 
enrollment in Hist. 499— Department Colloquium; passing the Ph.D. compre- 
hensive examination of two parts (oral and written) administered by a 
committee of faculty members (normally at the end of a full-time student's 
second year of study); preparation of an acceptable dissertation based on 
original investigation, and successful defense of the dissertation in a final 
examination. 

A candidate must offer a program of study in four fields, at least three of 
which must be in history; the other may be in a related field approved by the 
department. The department does not accept courses toward a degree with a 
grade lower than a B. Fields available in the department include ancient- 
medieval, Europe: 1350-1815, Europe since 1789, United States to 1865, 
United States since 1865, Africa, Asia, Latin America, history of science, and 
Britain. 

Dissertation work normally should be in modern America, Appalachian/re- 
gional history, science and technology, modern Europe or modern Africa. 

Students working in these areas, either at the M.A. or Ph.D. level, have 
the opportunity to study with adjunct professors and faculty from other 
departments and universities. 

History (Hist.) 

200. Greece and Rome. 3 hr. Covers the Minoan and Mycenaean civilizations, Archaic 
and Classical Greece, Alexander the Great and the Hellenistic Age, the Roman 
Republic, and Etruscan and Carthaginian states, and the rise of the Roman 
Empire. 

201. Social and Economic History of the Middle Ages, 300-1000. 3 hr. (Hist. 103 is 
recommended as preparation.) Topics include the social-economic crisis of the 
late Roman and German institutions, the Merovingian and Carolingian economics, 
Pierenne Thesis, and transition to feudal society. 

204. Ancient and Medieval Science. I. 3 hr. Examination of scientific achievements 
from ancient myths to medieval philosophies of nature. Stresses the internal 
coherence of the approaches to nature taken by various cultures. No scientific 
background is assumed. 

205. The Renaissance. 3 hr. The underlying political, economic, and social structure of 
fourteenth and fifteenth century Italy with concentration on the significant 
intellectual and cultural trends which characterized the age. Some consideration 
given to the problem of the impact of the early Reformation movement upon 
Renaissance culture. 

206. The Reformation. 3 hr. Distinguishing theological characteristics of the major 
Reformation movements with concentration on the effect of religious-intellectual 
crisis on the political and social structure of the sixteenth century. 

207. Early European Science and Culture. 3 hr. Examination of European intellectual 
history from the Renaissance to the early eighteenth century with particular 
attention being paid to contribution of Copernicus, Bacon, Descartes, Kepler, 
Galileo, and Newton. 

208. Science and Society, 1750-1914. 3 hr. Historical examination of the relationship 
between science and technology with particular attention being paid to the 
doctrines of Positivism, Darwinism, and Scientific Socialism. 



226 HISTORY 



209. Brazil: Colony to World Power. 3 hr. Examines the transition of Brazil from a 
colony to a world power, with special emphasis on recent economic developments, 
regional diversity, political patterns, foreign affairs, and race relations. 

210. Modern Spain. 3 hr. Survey of the Moslem, Hapsburg, and Bourbon periods 
followed by an examination of modern political and social forces, the Civil War, 
and the rule of Franco. 

211. Technology in the Industrial Revolution. I. 3 hr. Technological and social change in 
Great Britain and United States. Case studies illustrating the nature of techno- 
logical development and providing an understanding of the ways in which 
technology has shaped human experience. 

212. Introduction to Public History. 3 hr. Introduction to a wide range of career 
possibilities for historians in areas such as archives, historical societies, editing 
projects, museums, business, libraries, and historic preservation. Lectures, guest 
speakers, field trips, individual projects. 

213. Bourbon France. 3 hr. French history from the reign of Henry IV to the reign of 
Louis XVI. Special attention given to the reigns of Louis XIII and Louis XIV. 
Political, cultural, and intellectual history emphasized. 

214. The Revolutionary-Napoleonic Era. 3 hr. French history from mid-eighteenth 
century to 1815. Special attention given to the background of the French 
Revolution of 1789, to the political and social history of the revolution, and to 
Napoleon's nonmilitary achievements. 

215. European Diplomatic History, 1815 to 1919. 3 hr. Develops an understanding of the 
forces, men, and events which determined diplomatic relations between the major 
powers. 

216. European Diplomatic History, 1919 to Present. 3 hr. Scope similar to Hist. 215. 

219. Revolutionary Russia, 1905-1939. 3 hr. Detailed study of the revolutionary era of 
Russian/Soviet history with emphasis on the origins of Russian radicalism, the 
upheavals of 1905 and 1917, and Stalin's "revolution from above." 

220. The U.S.S.R., 1939 to Present. 3 hr. Detailed study of the recent social and political 
history of the Soviet Union. The Soviet experience in World War II, Stalin's last 
years, and the conflict between reformism and conservatism since Stalin's death. 

222. Twentieth-Century Germany from Weimar to Bonn. 3 hr. The Weimar Republic, 
the Third Reich, and the two German states created after World War II. 

225. History of Modern China. 3 hr. Introduction to modern China (since 1839) with 
attention to China's Confucian heritage; examines in detail the Chinese effort to 
modernize in the face of Western diplomatic and economic pressure; specific 
attention to China's Nationalist and Communist revolutionary traditions. 

226. History of Modern Japan. 3 hr. Modern Japan (since 1868) with attention to the 
development of Japanese institutions and ideas in earlier periods, especially the 
Tokugawa Era (1600-1868); examines the rapid pace of economic change in the 
nineteenth and twentieth centuries along with the important social, political, and 
diplomatic implications of this change. 

227. East Africa to 1895. 3 hr. East Africa from earliest times to beginning of European 
control. Population movement and interaction, development of varying types of 
polity, revolutionary changes, and the European scramble for East Africa form the 
major focus. 

228. East Africa Since 1895. 3 hr. History of colonial rule and movement to independence 
in East Africa. Political, economic, and social changes will be examined with 
particular emphasis on the rise and triumph of African nationalism. 



HISTORY 227 



229. History of Africa: Pre-Colonial. 3 hr. History of Africa from earliest times to the 
middle of the nineteenth century. Particular emphasis on population movement 
and interaction, state formation, and the development of trade in sub-Saharan 
Africa as well as the impact of such external influences as Christianity and Islam. 

230. History of Africa: European Dominance to Independence. 3 hr. History of Africa 
from the middle of the nineteenth century to the 1960s. Political and economic 
trends will form major focus. 

231. Seventeenth Century Britain, 1603-1715. 3 hr. The more significant political, 
social, economic, religious, and intellectual developments of Britain during a 
century of revolution and of the men and women who interacted with those 
movements. 

232. Eighteenth Century Britain, 1715-1832. 3 hr. The Age of Aristocracy, the political, 
social, religious, economic, and intellectual forces which produced it, and the 
reasons for its decline under the combined impact of the Industrial, Agricultural, 
American, and French revolutions. 

245. History of American Women. 3 hr. Examination of the history of American women 
from 1607 to the present, with emphasis on working conditions, women's rights, 
development of feminism, women's role in wartime, and women in the family. 

246. History of European Women. 3 hr. A survey of the history of European women 
from antiquity to the present, with emphasis on the philosophic, economic, and 
societal sources of women's oppression and on women's role in work, the family, 
and feminist movements. 

251. History of Black People in America to 1900. 3 hr. Slave trade and evolution of 
slavery in the New World, the attack upon slavery and its destruction, the South 
and the blacks during Reconstruction, and the age of Reaction and Racism, 
1875-1900. 

252. Afro-American History Since 1865. 3 hr. Reconstruction, the age reaction and 
racism, black migration, black nationalism, blacks in the world wars, and 
desegregation. 

253. Civil War and Reconstruction. 3 hr. Causes as well as the constitutional and 
diplomatic aspects of the Civil War; the role of the American black in slavery, in 
war, and in freedom; and the economic and political aspects of Congressional 
Reconstruction. 

257. The United States From McKinley to the New Deal, 1896 to 1933. 3 hr. American 
national history from William McKinley to Franklin D. Roosevelt. Particular 
attention is given to the great changes in American life after 1896; national, 
political, economic, social, and cultural development; the Progressive Era in 
American politics; and alterations in American foreign relations resulting from 
the Spanish-American War and World War I. 

259. Recent American History, 1933 to Present. 3 hr. Detailed study of American 
national history from the inauguration of Franklin D. Roosevelt to the present. 
Emphasis on the New Deal; on Roosevelt's foreign policies and their impact on 
American social, technological, and cultural developments; and United States 
domestic problems and foreign relations since 1945. 

263. American Diplomacy to 1918. 3 hr. (Assumes some knowledge of the period such 
as that obtained in Hist. 52 and 53.) American foreign policy and diplomacy from 
the adoption of the Constitution to the end of World War I. 

264. American Foreign Policy and Diplomacy, 1918 to the Present. 3 hr. (Assumes some 
knowledge of the period such as that obtained in Hist. 2, 53, or 161.) America's 
foreign policy and growing involvement in international relations including the 
U.S. role in World War II, the Korean War, and Vietnam. 

228 HISTORY 



266. American Economic History to 1865. 3 hr. Origins and development of American 
business, agricultural, and labor institutions; problems, and policies, from 1600 to 
1865; influence of economic factors upon American history during this period. 

267. American Economic History Since 1865. 3 hr. Scope similar to that stated for Hist. 
266. 

268. The Old South. 3 hr. (For advanced undergraduate and graduate students.) 
History of the South— exploring peculiar differences that led to an attempt to 
establish a separate nation. The geographical limitation permits a detailed study 
of economic and social forces within the context of the larger national history. 

269. The New South. 3 hr. Integration of the South into the nation after the Civil War. 
Emphasis on southern attitudes toward industrialization, commercial agriculture, 
organized labor, and the black. Special attention to the southern literary 
renaissance and conservative and progressive politics of the southern people. 

273. Appalachian Regional History. 3 hr. Historical survey of Central Appalachia's 
three phases of development: traditional society of the nineteenth century, the 
transformation of a mountain society by industrialization at the turn of the 
twentieth century, and contemporary Appalachia. 

274. The City in American History. 3 hr. A survey of urban history in the United States, 
including the Colonial period, with emphasis on the nineteenth and twentieth 
centuries, focusing on physical development of cities (planning, transportation, 
architecture, suburbanization) and social history. 

290. Introduction to Historical Research. 3 hr. (Required for History majors; non- 
majors by consent.} Introduction to research techniques useful for history. 
Instruction in locating sources, taking notes, and writing research papers. 

301. Readings in Medieval History. 3-6 hr. Crusades and intellectual history are the 
focus. Readings in preparation for the medieval field may be selected by 
graduates. Hist. 103 is urged strongly for undergraduates; also a reading 
knowledge of Latin, French or German is recommended for all students. 

305. Readings in English History. 3-6 hr. Directed readings of scholarly books and 
articles, primarily in the history of England from about 1450 to about 1625 but 
with some opportunity for the student to fill gaps in the student's knowledge of 
other periods of English history. 

309. Readings in Central European History. 3-6 hr. All students will read and discuss 
selected works illustrating outstanding scholarship or interpretative problems 
related to fifteenth, sixteenth, and early seveneteenth century history. In addition, 
opportunity will be provided for each student to pursue an independent reading 
project tailored to the student's special interests. 

310. Historic Site Interpretation and Preservation. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 212. Introduction to 
historic site interpretation and preservation, including establishing criteria, site 
inventory, and recording techniques using the "case study" method. Lectures, 
films, discussions, and field projects will introduce students to the rapidly 
growing area, including environmental impact work. 

311. Archival Management. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 212. Principles and practices of archival 
work within a laboratory context. Includes lectures and selected readings 
illustrated by holdings and policies of West Virginia and Regional History 
Collection of the WVU Library. 

312. Practicum in Historical Editing. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 212. Principles and practices of 
historical editing in a laboratory context. Includes lectures and readings with 
illustrations from ongoing editing projects. Student prepares materials from the 
West Virginia Collection of the WVU Library for publication. 

HISTORY 229 



313. Readings in Eastern European History. 3-6 hr. Intensive readings on specific 
topics in Russian, Soviet or East European history. Students should normally 
have had History 117 and 118, or their equivalents. Primarily designed for 
graduate students and selected undergraduates. 

317. Readings in Western European History. 3-6 hr. This course, primarily for graduate 
students and selected undergraduates, is designed for an intensive reading 
program on special problems in western European history. 

321. Readings in Asian History. 3-6 hr. Intensive readings in the history of East Asia 
(especially China and Japan) since the nineteenth century; students should 
normally have had Hist. 225 and 226, or their equivalents; reviews, as well as 
bibliographical and historiographical essays, required. 

325. Readings in African History. 3-6 hr. This course will normally focus on readings 
and discussion on problems in the history of pre-colonial Africa, the major works 
in African history, and recent interpretations in the field. 

330. Readings in Latin American History. 3 hr. PR: Graduate status. Critical examination 
of selected sources and topics for understanding and interpreting Latin American 
history. 

355. Readings in American History, 1763-1865. 3-6 hr. A course of supervised reading 
and reports designed to prepare students for intensive study in a seminar or for 
field examinations in the early national period. Students are expected to acquire 
comprehensive and detailed bibliographical knowledge. 

359. Readings in American History, 1850-1898. 3-6 hr. A survey of the narrative and 
interpretative literature of the Civil War, Reconstruction, and the Gilded Age. 
Students will be expected to make weekly or biweekly reports on assigned 
readings and also to prepare a critical essay on some aspect of American 
historiography for this period. 

363. Readings in American History, 1898 to Present. 3-6 hr. Readings and class-led 
discussion of one paperback book per week, and preparation of a paper based on 
these books and the class discussion of them. Usually concentrates on post-World 
War II foreign relations. 

373. Readings in Local and Regional History. 3-6 hr. A course for graduate students and 
seniors in the history of West Virginia and neighboring states, which form what is 
known as the Trans-Allegheny or Upper Ohio region. 

375. Readings in Science and Technology. 3-6 hr. Directed reading of scholarly books 
and articles dealing with selected topics in the history of science and technology. 

381. Intellectual and Social History of the United States to 1876. 3 hr. The objective of 
the course is to establish for graduate students usable frames of reference for 
intellectual and social history. The basic premises of various historians are 
examined as they have been applied to the history of the United States before 
1876. 

382. Intellectual and Social History of the United States Since 1876. 3 hr. A 
continuation of Hist. 381, with the same objective of establishing usable frames of 
reference for intellectual and social history, with the focus on the history of the 
United States since 1876. Special attention is devoted to the problems of very 
recent or contemporary history. 

391. Readings in American Labor History. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Readings seminar 
designed to provide a broad knowledge of American labor and working class 
history by focusing on conceptual issues and methods of research that have 
shaped the development of this field. 



230 HISTORY 



392. History of American Agriculture. 3 hr. A readings course to acquaint students 
with the origins and evolution of American agriculture, with particular emphasis 
upon scientific, technological, and economic development; to familiarize them 
with some public and private agricultural organizations; and to give them an 
historical understanding of contemporary agricultural problems and policies. 

402. Seminar in Medieval History. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 301 and reading knowledge of Latin 
plus French or German or Italian. Crusades and intellectual history of Europe in 
the Middle Ages with emphasis on the period from 1000 to 1300. 

410. Seminar in Central European History. 3 hr. An intensive survey of the bibliographi- 
cal aids and printed source materials available in the field of Reformation history. 
A research paper and a bibliographical essay will be presented by each student. 
Reading knowledge of German and French strongly recommended. 

411. Internship in Public History. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 212 and two of following: Hist. 310, 
311, 312. A professional internship at an agency involved in a relevant area of 
public history. Supervision will be exercised by both the Department of History 
and the host agency. Research report or finished professional project required. 

414. Seminar in Eastern European History. 3-6 hr. PR: Hist. 117, 118orequiv. Research 
seminar on selected topics in Russian, Soviet or East European history. One major 
paper and extensive reading based on available source materials is required. 

418. Seminar in Western European History. 3 hr. A research seminar in selected topics 
in western European history. Requirements: examinations, problem papers, 
research papers, and extensive reading. A reading knowledge of the appropriate 
languages is required. 

422. Seminar in Asian History. 3 hr. Advanced readings and research in East Asian 
history; specific emphasis on research tools and techniques; research paper based 
on English-language sources required; students should normally have had Hist. 
225 and 226 or their equivalents. 

426. Seminar in African History. 3 hr. The seminar will normally focus on Eastern 
Africa in the colonial period. Location and use of source materials will be 
emphasized as well as economic and political developments. Students will spend 
considerable time in research and writing on selected aspects of Eastern African 
history. 

441. Seminar in Latin American History. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Survey of Latin American 
historiography, location and use of primary source materials, discussion of 
research techniques, and the writing of a research paper. Reading knowledge of 
Spanish, Portuguese, or French will be helpful. 

456. Seminar in American History, 1763-1865. 3 hr. Students work together and with 
the instructor on historical materials of the era, confronting the problems and 
learning the techniques for using different kinds of original materials. Periodic 
progress reports are required at each meeting and one major paper, derived 
primarily from the original materials being used. 

460. Seminar in American History, 1850-1898. 3 hr. Directed research in recent 
American history including guidance in method of research and manuscript 
preparation. 

464. Seminar in American History, 1898 to Present. 3 hr. Directed research in recent 
American history including guidance in method of research and manuscript 
preparation. 

474. Seminar in Local and Regional History. 3 hr. A seminar for graduate students in 
the history of West Virginia and neighboring states, which form what is known as 
the Trans-Allegheny or Upper Ohio region. 

HISTORY 231 



475. Seminar in Science and Technology. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 375. Directed research in 
selected topics in the history of science and technology. 

477. American Historiography. 3 hr. A review of the major American historians and 
biographers and their interpretative studies. The nationalism, imperial, frontier, 
sectional, social and intellectual schools of history are studied as well as those 
historians who have concerned themselves with the problems of writing history. 

478. European Historiography. 3 hr. Readings of selected works representative of each 
of the following historical periods: Ancient, Medieval, Renaissance-Reformation, 
Early Modern, and Modern. Reports required with attention to style, purpose, 
philosophy, and methodology of the historians selected. Attention to trends, 
major breakthroughs, and classics in the writing of European history. Reading 
knowledge of Greek, Latin, French, German, or Italian an asset. 

481, 482. Special Problems. 1-3 hr. ea. 

490. Teaching Practicum. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college teaching 
of history. [Note: This course is intended to insure that graduate assistants are 
adequately prepared and supervised when they are given college teaching 
responsibilities.) 

493. Folger Institute Seminar. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. (Enrollment is by special 
application only. Contact department chairperson for information.) Seminar 
conducted by distinguished scholars and held at the Folger Institute of Renaissance 
and Eighteenth Century Studies in Washington, D.C. Topics vary. (Also listed as 
Engl. 493.) 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. 

HORTICULTURE 

Suman Singha, In Charge of Graduate Program in Horticulture 
2086 Agricultural Sciences Building 
Degree Offered: Master of Science 

Graduate Faculty: Members Baugher, Ingle, Popenoe, and Singha. Associate Members 
Bearce and Young. 

The College of Agriculture and Forestry offers a master of science degree 
in horticulture based upon the biological and physiological sciences. Students 
entering the program must have an adequate background in agriculture, 
biology, and chemistry. Deficiencies in these areas must be corrected early in 
a student's program by enrollment in specified courses. Admission require- 
ments are those of the College of Agriculture and Forestry. 

The following courses must be completed with a passing grade before 
admittance to regular graduate student status: Hort. 107, one semester of 
organic chemistry, Biol. 169, and Agron. 2. 

The following courses must be completed with a passing grade before the 
master of science in horticulture can be conferred: Hort. 204, Ento. 204, and PL 
Path. 201. The credit hours from these may be counted toward the master of 
science degree in horticulture if they are taken as part of the last ten hours of 
undergraduate course work with prior permission or if they are taken during 
graduate work. 

Faculty and facilities are available for thesis research in plant propagation, 
greenhouse management, ornamental production, tree and small fruit produc- 
tion, and fruit physiology and storage. A thesis is required. Graduates are 
employed by private industry, governmental agencies, and educational 
institutions, or become self employed. Horticulture students interested in 

232 HORTICULTURE 



studying for the Ph.D. degree should apply for admission into the Plant and 
Soil Science option of the Ph.D. degree program in Agricultural Sciences. 

Horticulture (Hort.) 

204. Plant Propagation. II. 3 hr. PR: PI. Sc. 52 or consent. Study of practices of plant 
propagation and factors involved in reproduction in plants. 

242. Small-Fruits. I. 3 hr. PR: PI. Sc. 52, Hort. 107, or consent. (One 2-day field trip 
required.) Taxonomic, physiological, and ecological principles involved in produc- 
tion and handling of small-fruits. 2 lee, 1 lab. (Offered in Fall of odd years.) 

243. Vegetable Crops. I. 3 hr. PR: PI. Sc. 52 or consent. (One 3-day field trip required.) 
Botanical and ecological characteristics influencing the production of vegetable 
crops. 2 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab. (Offered in Fall of even years.) 

244. Handling and Storage of Horticultural Crops. I. 3 hr. PR: PI. Sc. 52; Chem. 16. 
Characteristics of perishable crops. Methods and materials used to maintain 
quality. 2 lee, 1 lab. (Offered in Fall of odd years.) 

245. Greenhouse Management. II. 3 hr. PR: Two semesters of Inorganic Chemistry and 
Hort. 107 or consent. Greenhouse as a controlled plant environment. How to 
regulate factors influencing plant growth and development within specialized 
environments of greenhouses. 

246. Tree Fruits. I. 3 hr. PR: PI. Sc. 52 or consent. Principles and practices involved in 
production of tree fruits. 2 lee, 1 lab. (Offered in Fall of even years.) 

301. Post-Harvest Physiology. II. 3 hr. Physiology and biochemistry of harvested 
crops. 1 lee, 2 labs. (Offered in Spring of odd years. J 

Plant Science (PI. Sc.) 

420. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Special study in agricultural microbiology, crop 
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 

450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. Graduate seminar in agricultural microbiology, crop science, 
horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Graduate research in agricultural microbiology, crop 
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science. 

INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 

Ralph W. Plummer, Chairperson 

727 Engineering Sciences Building 

Degree Offered: Master of Science in Industrial Engineering 

Industrial Engineering Areas of Emphasis available for: 

Master of Science in Engineering 

Master of Science 

Doctor of Philosophy 
Graduate Faculty: Members Ahluwalia, Byrd, Creese, Gopalakrishnan, Iskander, 
Jaraiedi, Moore, Myers, Plummer, Stobbe, and Tompkins. Associate Member Fowler. 

Graduate programs in industrial engineering are designed to give 
students experience in developing innovative solutions to real problems. 
Innovation in this case implies the implementation of creative ideas, in 
contrast to pure research, which is conducted without an intended potential 
use. In this context, graduate students in the department are actively involved 
with the people and organizations that need creative solutions to real 
problems. Graduate students can expect to develop their creative abilities to 

INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 233 



be effective in innovative environments while developing their abilities to 
communicate and working with individuals to implement new ideas. 

Master of Science in Industrial Engineering (M.S.I.E.) 
Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.) 
Master of Science (M.S.) 

Three degrees are offered at the master's level: M.S.I.E., M.S.E., and an 
M.S. with an emphasis in occupational health and safety engineering. The 
M.S.I.E. degree program is appropriate for students with a B.S. in Industrial 
Engineering, whereas the M.S.E. degree program is designed for students 
having a baccalaureate degree in a technical field other than industrial 
engineering who wish to pursue a broader, more interdisciplinary program of 
graduate studies. In both the M.S.I.E. and the M.S.E. degree programs, 
students will select courses in decision sciences and production systems, 
manufacturing systems, or the ergonomics areas. A description and listing of 
requirements for the M.S. in occupational health and safety engineering, 
which is administered by the Department of Industrial Engineering, are 
presented elsewhere in Part 2 of this catalog. 

An undergraduate degree in either another engineering field or the basic 
sciences is required for admission to both the M.S.E. and M.S. programs. 
Students trained in the areas of mathematics, statistics, physics, and 
computer science are generally well prepared for graduate study with an 
emphasis in decision sciences/operations research techniques, or production 
systems, while many chemistry and biology majors will find excellent career 
opportunities in the field of occupational health and safety. The M.S. program 
is designed specifically for this latter group of students. 

Students must comply with the rules and regulations as outlined in Part 5 
of this catalog for graduate work in the College of Engineering. Each master's 
candidate must follow a planned program of study which contains a minimum 
of 30 semester credit hours, including a thesis of not more than six hours of 
research or 36 credit hours, including a problem report of not more than three 
hours of credit. 

Required courses for the M.S.I.E. and the M.S.E. are determined by the 
emphasis area of the student (i.e., decision sciences, manufacturing systems, 
or applied ergonomics) and can be obtained by writing to the department. 
M.S. in occupational health and safety engineering course requirements are 
listed elsewhere in Part 2 of this catalog. Specific requirements may be 
obtained by writing to the department. 

As a general rule, each student must satisfy the listed prerequisites for 
each course included in his/her graduate plan of study. Prerequisite deficien- 
cies are usually made up by taking the necessary prerequisite courses, which 
will be included in the plan of study, but normally are not counted for credit 
toward the master's degree. However, certain prerequisite courses can be 
taken by examination. 

While required credit in research (I.E. 497) is devoted to a problem report 
or thesis preparation, neither is automatically approved after the required 
number of semester hours of research work have been completed. The thesis 
or problem report must conform with the general requirements of the 
University and with the written requirements of the Department of Industrial 
Engineering. 

Final Examination. A candidate will be required to pass an oral examina- 
tion on course work and the thesis or problem report. 

234 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 



Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

A candidate for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) must comply 
with the rules and regulations of the College of Engineering and the 
University. A program with a major in industrial engineering, designed to 
meet the needs and objectives of each student, will be developed in consultation 
with the student's adviser and the student's Advisory and Examining 
Committee. Early in the doctoral program the student must pass an examina- 
tion to demonstrate master's-level proficiency in industrial engineering 
subject matter. Upon completion of the course work, the student must pass an 
examination to be admitted to candidacy. An acceptable dissertation must be 
written. 

Industrial Engineering (I.E.) 

201. Principles of Solidification. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 200 or consent. Material and energy 
balances, solidification of metals, riserandgating systems forcastings, fluidity of 
metal, casting design, and molding processes. 

202. Manufacturing Processes. 2 hr. PR: Ch.E. 105, M.A.E. 43. Lectures and demonstra- 
tions relating to materials, properties, parameters, design, equipment, economics 
and computer control of processing systems emphasizing casting, machining, 
joining and forming operations. 

203. Manufacturing Processes Laboratory. 1 hr. Coreq.: I.E. 202. Laboratory experiments 
and demonstrations of the basic manufacturing operations of casting, machining 
and joining. Process parameter measurement, inspection techniques and CNC 
programming are performed and laboratory report writing is emphasized. 

205. Design for Manufacturability. 2 hr. PR: I.E. 202 and I.E. 203. Aspects of design, 
manufacturing and materials; emphasis on design for manufacturability and 
assembly, including material selection and manufacturing processes on product 
cost. 2 hr. lee. 

206. Design for Manufacturability Laboratory. 1 hr. PR: I.E. 202 and I.E. 203. 
Laboratory tasks dealing with manufacturing and materials; process selection, 
and cost estimation for component and subassembly design; emphasis on utilizing 
design for manufacturability and assembly software. 1 hr. lab. 

214. Analysis of Engineering Data. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113. Introduction to linear statistical 
models. Design and analysis of simpler experimental configurations occurring 
frequently in engineering studies. Similarities and differences between regression 
and experimental design models emphasized in a vector-matrix setting. 

215. Statistical Decision Making. 3 hr. PR or Cone: I.E. 113. Basic concepts of 
probability theory. Discrete and continuous distributions, joint and derived 
distributions, with application to industrial and research problems. Introduction 
to generating functions and Markov chains. 

216. Industrial Quality Control. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113. Principles and methods for 
controlling the quality of manufactured products, with emphasis on both 
economic and statistical aspects of product acceptance and process control. 

222. Job Evaluation and Wage Incentives. 3 hr. Principles used in evaluating jobs, rates 
of pay, characteristics and objectives of wage incentive plans; incentive formulae 
and curves. 

240. Labor and Productivity. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The work force as a critical element of 
productivity. Topics include industrial engineering involvement in collective 
bargaining, labor relations, and work practices. 

INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 235 



242. Production Planning and Control. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 140; Cone: I.E. 214. Principles and 
problems in forecasting, aggregate planning, material management, scheduling, 
routing, and line balancing. 

243. Facility Planning and Design. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 242, 250. Problems of facility and 
equipment location. Long-range planning of industrial facilities. Block and 
detailed layout of manufacturing plants and general offices. Space utilization and 
allied topics in facility design. 

249. Design of Dynamic Materials Systems. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 140 or consent. Application of 
industrial engineering theory and practice to selection of material systems and 
equipment including efficient handling of materials from first movement of raw 
materials to final movement of finished product. Present quantitative design 
techniques. 

250. Introduction to Operations Research. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113, 281. Basic tools and 
philosophies of operations research. Tools include: linear programming, Markov 
chains, queueing theory, and simulation. Other operations research techniques 
are presented as they relate to the overall systems philosophy. 

251. Analytical Techniques of Operations Research. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113 or consent. 
Nonlinear optimization techniques useful in operations research and industrial 
engineering studies. Classical optimization techniques, quadratic, geometric, and 
dynamic programming, branch and bound and gradient techniques. 

260. Human Factors Engineering. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113 and I.E. 140 or equiv. Includes the 
study of ambient environment, human capabilities, and equipment design. 
Systems design for the man-machine environment interfaces will be studied with 
emphasis on health, safety, and productivity. 

261. System Safety Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The concepts of hazard recognition, 
evaluation analysis, and the application of engineering design principles to the 
control of industrial hazards. 

277. Engineering Economy. 3 hr. Basic concepts of financial analysis investment 
planning and cost controls as they apply to management technology investment in 
manufacturing; financial planning and budgeting as applied to an engineering 
function. 

280. Industrial Engineering Problems. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Special problems. 

281. Computer Applications in Industrial Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Engr. 2, I.E. 140. 
Introduction to computer applications in manufacturing. Emphasis on system 
design and analysis and the role of computers in productivity improvement. 

284. Simulation by Digital Methods. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113, 281, or consent. Introduction to 
Monte Carlo simulation methods and their application to decision problems. 
Student identifies constraints on problems, collects data for modeling, and 
develops computer programs to simulate and analyze practical situations. 
Interpretation of results emphasized. 

291. Design of Production Systems 1. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing in industrial engineering. 
The integration of industrial engineering principles in the design of productive 
systems. Emphasis will be on the analysis of different systems for productivity 
improvement. 

292. Design of Productive Systems 2. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing in industrial engineering. 
Continuation of I.E. 291. 

300. Special Topics in Manufacturing Processes and Automation. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 200 or 
equiv. Special topics concerning manufacturing processes and automation with 
special emphasis on manufacturing management. 

236 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 



302. Advanced Manufacturing Processes. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 200. Metal cutting economic 
models, solidification processes, bulk deformation, sheet metal and drawing, 
joining design and economics. Overall view of manufacturing systems. Introduc- 
tion to numerical control programming and projects on numerical control 
equipment. 

304. Materials and Processing Systems Design. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 200. The engineering 
design process, material design properties and selection systems, decision making 
and problem analysis techniques for materials and processing. Economic and cost 
systems, expert systems, failure analysis and quality systems for materials and 
process selection. 

305. Computer Integrated Manufacturing. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. Several aspects 
of computerized manufacturing systems will be covered. Emphasis will be placed 
on computer fundamentals, computer aided design and manufacturing, numerically 
controlled (NC) machine tools, part programming, system devices, and direct 
digital control. 2 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab. 

307. Robotics and Flexible Automation. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. This course will 
provide an understanding of the principles, capabilities and limitations of 
industrial robots and other flexible automation tools. Emphasis will be placed on 
kinematic analysis, trajectory planning, machine vision, and manufacturing 
automation. 2 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab. 

308. Advanced Problems in Manufacturing Engineering. 1-3 hr. PR: I.E. 300 or 302; 
graduate standing. Special problems relating to one of the areas of manufacturing 
engineering, such as manufacturing processes, robotics, CAD/CAM, group tech- 
nology, and manufacturing systems engineering. 

309. Computational Methods for Manufacturing Engineers. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate 
standing. Computational techniques applicable to manufacturing systems engi- 
neering problems; emphasis on use of personal computers. 2 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab. 

314. Design of Industrial Experiments. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 214 or consent. Continuation of I.E. 
214. More complex experimental design especially useful to engineering and 
industrial researchers, including factorials and optimum-seeking design. Emphasis 
on use of existing digital computer routines and interpretation of results. 

325. Engineering Management. 3 hr. Unique problems of engineering organizations 
including project planning, managing creativity, coordinating design and develop- 
ment, and other topics relevant to engineering organizations. 

338. Technology Forecasting. 3 hr. Various procedures used in forecasting technical 
developments. 

340. Work Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of industrial engineering's involvement 
in analyzing work situations. Particular emphasis will be given to the use of 
industrial engineering as a change agent in improving work practices. 

342. Advanced Production Control. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250. Different mathematical models 
useful in the design of effective production control systems. The various models 
include: static production control models under risk and uncertainty; dynamic 
models under certainty, under uncertainty, and under risk. 

353. Applied Linear Programming. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250 or consent. Application of the 
assignment, transportation, and simplex algorithms to typical industrial problems. 
The methods and computational efficiencies of the revised simplex and other 
algorithms are also studied. 

355. Scheduling and Sequencing Methods. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250. Theory and applications of 
analytical models used in the scheduling of operations. Topics include: single 
machine scheduling models; flow shop models; job shop models; and assembly 
line balancing methods. 

INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 237 



358. Special Topics in Systems Analysis and Operations Research. 3-6 hr. PR: Consent. 
Special topics from recent developments in operations research and related fields. 
Special emphasis will be placed on interests of current graduate students. 

359. Operations Research for Public Administrators. 3 hr. Examination of role of 
quantitative analysis in public administration and decision-making. 

360. Human Factors System Design. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 260 or consent. Theoretical aspects 
and practical applications of man/machine relationships as they influence future 
system design. The student will examine human limitations with respect to 
acceptance of information, decision making, and ability to transmit the result of 
such decisions to controlled equipment systems to obtain design optimization. 2 
hr. rec, 3 hr. lab. 

361. Industrial Hygiene Engineering. 3 hr. Introductory course in industrial hygiene 
legal standards, historical context, and development. Topics include respiratory 
physiology, particle size and deposition, ionizing and nonionizing radiation, 
physical stress, solvents, metals, pesticides, painting, welding, and degreasing. 

362. Systems Safety Engineering. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 261 or consent. Analysis of manufac- 
turing methods, processes, and properties of materials from a system safety 
engineering viewpoint. Emphasis will be on hazard analysis techniques (fault 
tree, MORT, failure modes and effects) and machine guarding methods. 

364. Industrial Ergonomics. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 260 or consent. Practical experience in the 
application of ergonomic principles to industrial problems. Safety and production 
implications of work physiology, industrial biomechanics, and circardian rhythms, 
as well as current interest topics. 

368. Advanced Problems in Human Factors. 1-3 hr. PR: I.E. 260 or 360 and graduate 
standing. Special problems relating to one of the areas of human factors, such as 
simulation, controls, vigilance, safety, and occupational health. 

377. Advanced Engineering Economy. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Special emphasis on deprecia- 
tion, engineering and economic aspects of selection and replacement of equipment; 
relationship of technical economy to income taxation; effect of borrowed capital 
and pricing model. 

381. Integrated Data Processing. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 281 and consent. Advanced work in 
electronic data-processing systems and procedures design. Case studies of 
integrated data-processing systems. Course projects will include individual use of 
a computer in management data-processing analysis problems. 

451. Nonlinear Programming. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250 or consent. Advanced study of the 
techniques of nonlinear programming and their applications. Topics include 
steepest descent, Newton's method, Fletcher-Powell, conjugate gradients, Powell's 
method, and penalty function methods. 

452. Queueing Theory. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113 and 250 or consent. Analytical modeling of 
waiting line systems with emphasis on determining the best operating conditions 
for those systems. Single-channel and multi-channel models. Computational 
methods (including Monte Carlo techniques) are examined. Applications to 
problems such as maintenance and inventory control. 

453. Theory of Linear Programming. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250 or consent. Study of procedures 
available for solving large-scale problems using linear programming. Topics 
include decomposition techniques, multiple pricing, cycling, inverse generation 
and storage, ranging procedures, and upper bound algorithms. 

454. Inventory Theory. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113 and 250 or consent. Techniques used in 
optimization of inventory systems. Elements of static, deterministic inventory 
models, and static, stochastic inventory models. Dynamic inventory models. 
Selected topics related to inventory analysis. 

238 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 



455. Probability Theory for Engineers. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113 or consent. Probability theory 
and its application to industrial systems with particular emphasis on inventory, 
queueing, maintenance, reliability, and quality control systems. Markov processes 
are covered. 

456. Applied Stochastic Processes. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 455. Stochastic systems with emphasis 
on application to inventory and queueing theory. Conditional probability, Poisson 
processes, counting processes, renewal processes, Markov chains with discrete 
and continuous parameters. 

457. Dynamic Programming. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250 or consent. Introduction to basic 
structure and computational aspects of dynamic programming and applications 
including sequential decision problems, deterministic and probabilistic models 
over finite and infinite planning horizons, and Markovian decision processes. 

458. Integer Programming and Applied Networks. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250 or consent. 
Introduction to application of integer programming and maximum flow networks 
to engineering and operations research problems. Emphasis on problem formula- 
tion and solution. 

480. Seminar. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Discussion of research in industrial engineering and 
special problems. 

484. Advanced Digital Simulation. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 284 or consent. Analysis and 
comparison of special purpose digital simulation languages such as GPSS, SLAM, 
SIMAN, SIMSCRIPT, CSMP, DYANOMO, and JOB SHOP simulation. 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. 

INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS 

Jay H. Coats, Director of Graduate Programs 
333 Business and Economics Building 

Office of Graduate Programs, College of Business and Economics, 
West Virginia University, P.O. Box 6025, Morgantown, WV 26506-6025 
Telephone: (304) 293-5408 
Degrees Offered: Master of Science 
Industrial and Labor Relations Areas of Emphasis available for: 

Doctor of Philosophy 
Graduate Faculty: Members Elkin, Schaupp, and Zeller. Associate Members Brown, 
Bucklew, Decker, Grasso, Humphreys, Miller, Remington, Smith, and Tapper. 

The Department of Industrial and Labor Relations offers a master of 
science in industrial and labor relations (ILR). The AACSB-accredited 
program of study prepares students for professional positions in human 
resources (employee relations) and labor relations. Course work can be 
structured to prepare students for doctoral studies in industrial and labor 
relations, economics, management, or law. 

The department operates, in conjunction with the Department of Econom- 
ics, an industrial and labor relations Ph.D. option. M.S. students who plan to 
pursue the industrial relations option in the Ph.D. program in economics 
should align their master's work with the degree requirements. 

Entry-level professional opportunities for ILR graduates include such 
positions as employee relations associate, assistant personnel manager, 
human resources administrator, labor relations representative, professional 
research analyst, compensation analyst and benefits administrator. Other 
positions include staff representative with organized labor, apprentice 
arbitrator, labor-management consultant, National Labor Relations Board 
field examiner, government employee relations representative, and employ- 

1NDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS 239 



ment analyst. Most graduates are employed by Fortune 500 companies. Some 
find positions with organized labor, all levels of government, and advocacy 
organizations. The department, in conjunction with the WVU Career Services 
Center, makes a concerted effort to place graduates in positions that fulfill 
student job objectives. 

The curriculum is a blend of theory, analysis, and pragmatism. Core 
course work serves two purposes: to provide in-depth knowledge and skills 
pertaining to the human resource and labor relations functions of organiza- 
tions, and to acquaint students with the operation of the other organizational 
business functions. A substantial number of elective courses allows the 
student to tailor the curriculum to meet particular career goals and interests. 
More than 50 faculty members in a dozen departments offer course work 
and/or conduct research in the human resources and ILR areas. 

Students are encouraged to participate in academic-related extra-curri- 
cular activities. Many are co-sponsored by the Industrial Relations Student 
Association: the ILR Newsletter, resume mailings, social events, and honors 
banquets. Outstanding academic achievement is recognized by membership 
in the Industrial Relations Honor Society. The faculty makes Outstanding ILR 
Student awards yearly to two persons selected on the basis of scholarship, 
informal leadership and extracurricular activities. 

Financial aid. A limited number of graduate assistantships and tuition 
scholarships are available on a competitive basis. Major selection criteria 
include the applicant's grade-point average in prior academic work and the 
GMAT or GRE score. Graduate assistants are paid a cash stipend during the 
regular semesters that is competitive in amount with that offered by other 
universities; they are assigned to faculty members to assist in research, 
teaching and other academic endeavors. Additional scholarships are available 
on a competitive basis to minority students. Additional information and 
application forms can be obtained from the Director of Graduate Programs. 

GOALS. Graduate Opportunities for Advanced Level Study (GOALS) is 
the minority recruiting program of a national consortium of ILR schools. 
Minority students admitted to WVU's ILR program are eligible to compete for 
full fellowships offered by GOALS. 

Academic Common Market. The master of science program in industrial 
and labor relations is an Academic Common Market program. Residents of 
Alabama, Arkansas, Florida, Georgia, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maryland, Mis- 
sissippi, South Carolina, Tennessee, Texas, or Virginia who are admitted to 
the M.S. ILR program can pay tuition at West Virginia University's in-state 
(resident) rates. 

Admission. The master of science in industrial and labor relations is 
interdisciplinary in nature and no specific undergraduate major is required. 
Course work in computer science, labor economics, statistics, and business 
disciplines is helpful. Admission is competitive and on a space-available 
basis. 

To gain admission into the program, an applicant must have a bachelor's 
degree (in any field) from an accredited college or university and a grade- 
point average of at least 3.0 (either overall or on the last 60 credit-hours of 
undergraduate and/or graduate work completed). In addition, the applicant 
must have a Graduate Management Admission Test (GMAT) score of at least 
500. Applicants with a GPA below 3.0 (or a GMAT below 500) must show a 
correspondingly higher GMAT (or GPA) achievement. Equivalent scores on 
the Graduate Record Exam (GRE) are also acceptable. International students 
must also submit a satisfactory TOEFL score. 

240 INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS 



Although not required, applicants may wish to send additional supportive 
material, including letters in support of their application, reference letters, a 
resume of work experience, and an example of written work. 

Students may enter the graduate program in any semester/session. Appli- 
cation deadlines are one month before the start of classes in the term for which 
admission is sought. Later applications, while acceptable, may diminish the 
chances for admission due to the graduate class being filled. Since no admis- 
sion decision can be made without the applicant's GMAT or GRE score being 
submitted, applicants should keep in mind the GMAT or GRE test schedule. 

Institute of Industrial and Labor Relations 

The mission of the Institute of Industrial and Labor Relations (IILR) is to 
coordinate instruction, research, and public service activities, which embrace 
a study of the elements of human resources development uniquely identified 
with the economy of West Virginia. Membership is open to faculty who have 
an interest in the mission of the IILR. 

The IILR serves as a means of rational response to economic trends based 
on an amalgamation of the three University functions: faculty/student 
research on a continuing basis in search of human resource development 
possibilities; use of research results in credit instruction to produce a growing 
cadre of graduates aware of and trained to be able to contribute to the state's 
economic goals; and, using both of the former, extension and public service 
efforts designed to place the state's human resource development and use 
activities on their most economically rational courses. 

Master of Science in Industrial and Labor Relations 

The master of science in industrial and labor relations has a two-part 
core. The total length of the program will not be greater than 47 semester 
hours nor less than 42 hours. Program length depends upon the composition of 
course work taken as an undergraduate. 

ILR Core 

The required ILR core classes are designed to provide a solid, multidisci- 
plinary foundation of ILR theory and practice. ILR 314 presents an overview 
of ILR theory, practice, and issues from a management perspective. Its 
counterpart is ILR 316, which covers the same subjects from the perspective 
of organized labor. In ILR 312 the concepts of industrial psychology are 
applied to ILR. An eclectic view of collective bargaining and labor relations 
complete the sequence (ILR 262). 

The 12 hours of required ILR core are: 

Hr. 

ILR 262— Collective Bargaining and Labor Relations 3 

ILR 312— Organizational Theory, 

Behavior and Communication 3 

ILR 314— Industrial Relations Strategy and Policy 3 

ILR 316— Labor Organization Industrial Relations 3 

Common Body of Knowledge (CBK) Core 

Industrial and labor relations functions are not separate from other 
organizational activities. Firms, labor organizations, and government units 
integrate ILR with their management, business law, economics, accounting, 
finance, and marketing activities. The common body of knowledge (CBK) core 
is designed to provide ILR students with the common body of knowledge 

INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS 241 



necessary to these functions. They also include skills classes in computer 
hardware and software, management information systems, and integrative 
policy formulation. Students who have acquired equivalent knowledge of 
these areas as undergraduates may waive up to 5 hours of this functional core. 
If equivalent undergraduate course work exceeds 5 hours, ILR elective course 
work will be substituted for CBK core hours. 

Program length may vary between 42 and 47 semester hours. Students 
who have no CBK background will complete a 47 credit-hour program. Those 
with equivalent course work may waive up to 5 hours of graduate require- 
ments, resulting in a 42 credit-hour program. The CBK core is as follows: 

Hr. 

Acctg. 311 — Financial Accounting for Decision Making 3 

B. Law 311 — Legal and Regulatory Environment 2 

Econ. 317— Economic Decision Making 2 

Fin. 311— Managerial Finance 2 

Manag. 301— Organization Behavior and Ethics 3 

Manag. 311— Management Information Systems 3 

Manag. 321— Operations Management/ 

Applied Quantitative Analysis 3 

Manag. 351 — Policy and Strategy 3 

Mrktg. 311 — Marketing Management 2 

The remaining hours will be chosen from the following courses after 
consultation with the adviser. While the listed courses are preferred, 
considerable latitude may be given the student by the adviser to choose other 
courses which are particularly appropriate to the student's background and 
interest. Approval must be obtained in advance. No more than three elective 
hours may be taken at the 200 level. Electives may be chosen from the 
following: 

Industrial and Labor Relations Hr. 

301 — Industrial Relations Analytical Techniques 1 3 

302 — Industrial Relations Analytical Techniques 2 3 

330 — Compensation Issues 3 

332— American Trade Unionism 3 

333— Seminar: Quality of Work Life 3 

334 — Work Group Dynamics and Leadership 3 

337 — Practicum in Industrial Interviewing 3 

340 — Arbitration Theory and Practice 3 

342— Advanced Collective Bargaining 3 

344— Benefits 3 

345 — Equal Employment Opportunity Problems 3 

491A— Advanced Study 1-6 

491B— Advanced Study: Practicum in ILR 3 

Management 

217 — Personnel and Compensation 3 

218 — Focal Points in Management 1-3 

325— Organizational Design 3 

349 — Seminar in Management 3 

Business Law 

211 — Personnel Relations and the Law 3 

311— Legal and Regulatory Environment 3 

Sociology and Anthropology 

204 — Complex Organizations 3 

233— Sociology of Work and Work Places 3 

375 — Fundamentals of Gerontology 3 

242 INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS 



Ht. 

Economics 

211— Micro Economic Analysis 3 

212— Macro Economic Analysis 3 

310— Advanced Micro Theory 1 3 

312— Advanced Macro Theory 1 3 

318— Economic Policy 3 

340— Public Finance 3 

360— Advanced Human Resource Economics 3 

364— Seminar in Labor Economics 3 

Public Administration 

341— Administrative Organization and Management 3 

343— Public Personnel Administration 3 

348— Legal/Political Foundation of Public Administration 3 

443— Public Sector Labor Relations 3 

448— Legal Environment 3 

Industrial Engineering 

222— Job Evaluation and Wage Incentives 3 

260— Human Factors Engineering 3 

261— System Safety Engineering 3 

361— Industrial Hygiene Engineering 3 

362— Systems Safety Engineering 3 

Law 

360— Compensation Law 3 

391— Arbitration 3 

391— Public Sector Labor Law 3 

391— OSHA 3 

391— Civil Rights 3 

391— Labor Law 1 4 

391— Labor Law 2 2 

Counseling 

301— Fundamentals of Counseling 3 

320— Vocational Development and Occupational Choices 3 

Rehabilitation Counseling 

312— Psychological Aspects of Disability 3 

320— Vocational Development and Occupational Choices 3 

Computer Science 

301— Computers in Research 3 

The industrial relations program requires that the student maintain a 
grade-point average of at least 3.0 on all work taken as a graduate student 
while enrolled in the College of Business and Economics. In addition, the 
student must maintain a 3.0 average in all work counting toward the graduate 
degree. A student whose cumulative grade-point average falls below 2.75 will 
be placed on probation. If the student's average is not brought up to 2.75 by the 
end of the following semester, the student will be suspended from the 
program. A grade below C in any course taken while enrolled as a graduate 
student will result in suspension from the program. 

Industrial Relations Ph.D. Option 

Graduate work in industrial relations typically is interdisciplinary in 
nature. The Ph.D. option retains this orientation while providing students 
with a Ph.D. level of understanding of economic theory and economic 
analysis. Students in the industrial relations option take the eight core 
courses in the Ph.D. in economics program, take comprehensive examinations 

INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS 243 



in microeconomic theory and macroeconomic theory, and follow the rules and 
requirements for obtaining the economics Ph.D. 

Students are required to complete three fields of concentration. One field 
must be industrial and labor relations, which consists of the following 
courses: 

ILR 334— Leadership and Work Group Dynamics 

ILR 342— Advanced Collective Bargaining 

ILR 491A— Practicum in Research Methods 

ILR 491B— Research Theory 

Of the two remaining fields, each typically 6 credit hours, one must be 
from within the Department of Economics. Most commonly, this field is labor 
economics. The other field may be selected from economics, industrial 
psychology, public administration, statistics, human resources management, 
industrial engineering, or law, and ideally should complement the student's 
research interest. 

Students must pass written comprehensive examinations in their three 
fields of concentration. 

Industrial and Labor Relations (ILR) 

262. Collective Bargaining and Labor Relations. 3 hr. Examination of the theory and 
practice of collective bargaining. Topics include economics and historical environ- 
ment, labor law, unionization, contract negotiation, patterns in contract content, 
conflict resolution, grievance handling, and an introduction to arbitration. 

301. Industrial Relations Analytical Techniques 1. 3 hr. PR: Admission to the ILR 
graduate program and C.S. 5 or equiv. Introduction to the software and hardware 
appropriate for use in human resource applications, emphasizing efficient and 
effective use of previously developed software. Introduction to quantitative 
analytical decision-making techniques. 

302. Industrial Relations Analytical Techniques 2. 3 hr. PR: Admission to the ILR 
graduate program. Further development of the quantitative analytical techniques 
and of business information systems used in the human resources field. Emphasis 
on quantitative decision-making and information systems in an industrial 
relations setting. 

311. Management Information Systems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Examines computer 
technology, applications, information systems, and performance. Computer 
system planning, selection and implementation. Computer impact upon manage- 
ment, organization and society from a managerial viewpoint. 

310. Human Resources Economics. 3 hr. PR: Admission to the ILR graduate program. 
Consideration of the conditions of employment and unemployment at both macro 
and micro levels under varying degrees of competition, including the process of 
labor force preparation, labor market data and policy. 

312. Organizational Theory, Behavior, and Communication. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Emphasis 
on the communication processes involved in problem resolution including 
organizational decision making. Problems include organizational evaluation 
methods, training and leadership development, staffing, evaluation of proficiency 
of individuals, systems, and procedures. 

314. Industrial Relations Strategy and Policy. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Explores the 
integrative dimensions of organizational policies and their relationship to the 
personnel and industrial relations function. Business ethics in the industrial 
relations function. 



244 INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS 



316. Labor Organization Industrial Relations. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Introduction to 
dynamics (adversary/cooperative) of industrial relations from a union viewpoint. 
Topics include conflict resolution, union government, alternatives to economic 
conflict bargaining, interaction, the state of industrial relations and work society. 

330. Compensation Issues. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Seminar in compensation designed to 
develop further understanding of compensation theory and practice. Topic areas 
will include labor supply, wage theory, legal constraints, motivation, equity 
theory, organizational development as well as compensation structure and 
administration. 

332. American Trade Unionism. 3 hr. PR: ILR 262 or 316 or consent. Examines the rise 
of American unionism and traces historical factors shaping its philosophy. Topics 
include economic conditions and union history, comparisons of AFL and CIO 
structures and the AFL-CIO as a government. 

333. Seminar: Quality of Work Life. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of current trends and 
approaches in "quality of work life improvement" with special attention to 
developments in participative management, job enrichment and gain sharing. 
Results of current research are featured. 

334. Work Group Dynamics and Leadership. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Small group or 
individual research on topics related to leadership and group dynamics in the 
work environment including training and other human relations programs. 

337. Practicum in Industrial Interviewing. 3 hr. PR: I.R. 312 and consent. Experiential 
learning of industrial interviewing techniques covering legal and technical 
aspects of employment interviewing and other types of interviewing. 

340. Arbitration Theory and Practice. 3 hr. PR: ILR 262 and consent. Study of the 
purpose of arbitration, trends, principles of contract construction, hearing 
procedure evidence, remedies, training and education of arbitrators, training of 
advocates, and decision writing. Students will arbitrate mock cases. 

342. Advanced Collective Bargaining. 3 hr. PR: ILR 262 orconsent. Development of the 
economic theory, empirical analysis and policy implications of the impact of 
collective bargaining on wages, employment, market structure, and prices. 

344. Benefits. 3 hr. Considers employee benefits from the perspective of the industrial 
relations specialist who is responsible for articulating and administering a 
corporate program. Includes study of all benefits covered by major federal 
legislation. 

345. Equai Employment Opportunity Problems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. A series of lectures 
by specialists in equal employment opportunity affairs. Lecturers will include 
attorneys, directors of state and national EEO agencies, and representatives of 
business and industry and the labor movement. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. 

CBK Core Courses 
Acctg. 

311. Financial Accounting for Decision Making. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Basic accounting 
assumptions and standards underlying financial statements, the significance of 
financial statement measurements, and the relevance of such data for planning 
and control. Emphasis on financial statement and cash-flow analysis. 

B. Law 

311. Legal and Regulatory Environment. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Examination of the legal 
environment in which business decisions are made and the response of the legal 
environment to change. Familiarization with the role of administrative agencies in 
the regulatory process. 

INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS 245 



Econ. 

317. Economic Decision Making. 2 hr. PR: Econ. 54 or consent. Analysis of the firm as 
an optimizing unit operating in the market place. Examination of product demand, 
production and costs, pricing theory and practices, risk, and capital budgeting. 

Fin. 

311. Fundamentals of Finance. 2 hr. PR or Coreq: Acctg. 311 or consent. Covers the 
basics of standard financial activities of the firm including: financial planning, the 
structure of financing, and asset selection. 

Manag. 

301. Organization Behavior and Ethics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Interpersonal relationships 
through which administration becomes effective. Emphasis on human factors, but 
influences of economic and technological factors also are considered. Focus on 
ethics and importance of harmony between individual needs and organization 
goals. 

311. Management Information Systems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Examines computer 
technology, applications, information systems, and performance. Computer 
system planning, selection, and implementation. Computer impact upon manage- 
ment, organization, and society from a managerial point of view. 

321. Operations Management/ Applied Quantitative Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
Review of concepts, techniques, and models encountered in manufacturing and 
service operations. Modeling approach and computer applications in operations 
management and management science are emphasized. 

351. Policy and Strategy. 3 hr. PR: Consent. M.B.A. capstone course. Integrates 
functional knowledge with strategy formulation and strategy implementation 
concepts. Cases of organizations varying in size, national affiliation, and profit 
orientation are analyzed with special emphasis on ethics and social responsibility. 

Mrktg. 

311. Marketing Management. 2 hr. Introduction to marketing management with 
specific emphasis on consumer behavior and market segmentation, product 
planning, promotion, distribution, and pricing. 

JOURNALISM 

John H. Boyer, Director of Graduate Studies in Journalism 
306 Martin Hall 

Degree Offered: Master of Science in Journalism 

Graduate Faculty: Members Boyer, Cremer, Ours, Paty, Sasser, Schreiber, and 
Seymour. Associate Members Findley, Pinnell, and Yagle. 

The Master of Science in Journalism (M.S.J.) program in the Perley Isaac 
Reed School of Journalism has granted more than 160 degrees since its first, in 
1962. The program is designed to help persons involved in the various aspects 
of mass communication better understand and cope not only with the 
increased complexity of their own field, but also with fields outside mass 
communication. 

The program, designed to help each student reach full potential as a 
practitioner, teacher, or scholar in mass communication, helps prepare a 
student not only for a first job — although students who obtain the M.S.J, 
degree should excel in the skills of the profession— but also for long-term and 
productive career development through the study of mass communication and 
related fields. 

The M.S.J, program is intended to afford the liberal arts graduate an 
opportunity to concentrate advanced study in mass communication; provide 
intensive study for persons who have undergraduate journalism training, but 

246 JOURNALISM 



who wish to pool their journalistic skills with extensive knowledge in another 
substantive area or areas (e.g., political science, economics, science); and give 
persons who have had considerable professional experience an opportunity to 
broaden their academic bases through carefully selected advanced studies. 

Admissions and Advising 

Admission to the M.S.J, program is limited to holders of baccalaureate or 
equivalent degrees from institutions of higher learning. Applicants should 
have combined verbal and quantitative scores on the Graduate Record 
Examination (GRE) aptitude test of at least 1000 and overall grade-point 
averages (GPA) of at least 3.0 on a 4.0 scale. Each applicant also should 
submit to the director of graduate studies in the School of Journalism a 
detailed essay explaining why the student wants to undertake graduate study 
in journalism, what the student hopes to get from the graduate journalism 
program, what the long-term goals are, and how graduate education in 
journalism can help achieve those goals. 

An applicant who doesn't meet the minimum GRE and/or GPA require- 
ments) may be accepted only if the low GPA or GRE scores are offset by other 
factors. Excellent recommendations, unusual grading patterns (e.g., a steady 
rise of grades), an outstanding statement of purpose, or examples of profes- 
sional accomplishment sometimes can offset low GRE scores or a low GPA. 

Students applying for admission to the M.S.J, program are encouraged to 
send nonreturnable supporting material to the director of graduate studies in 
the School of Journalism. Examples of published or unpublished writing, 
research, or photography, a detailed listing of professional media experience 
or other relevant job experience, and other supporting materials will be 
considered by the admissions committee. All other materials (e.g., transcripts, 
GRE scores, application forms) should be sent to the Office of Admissions and 
Records. 

A student who does not have a bachelor's degree in journalism or 
extensive professional experience must meet these additional requirements: 

1. Must have completed a core of journalism courses, with subjects and 
grades acceptable to the School of Journalism, or 

2. Must complete undergraduate journalism and other courses to be 
prescribed by the School of Journalism, or 

3. Must demonstrate knowledge and competence in a number of jour- 
nalism topics to be prescribed by the School of Journalism, or 

4. Must meet a combination of the foregoing requirements. 

All applications for admission are considered by the director of graduate 
studies and one other member of the graduate studies committee (GSC). The 
entire GSC considers special cases and appeals. 

The director of graduate studies advises all students about general 
problems and concerns, courses to take, projects to undertake, special 
training to obtain, and appropriate outside areas for study. 

Early in the student's program, usually by the completion of 6-9 credit 
hours of graduate course work, the student and the adviser draw up a plan of 
study to show the direction of the student's course work. The plan may also 
indicate a general time frame anticipated for the completion of this work and 
may contain the direction and outline of the research problem to be 
undertaken. This plan of study becomes a part of the student's record, and 
constitutes, with some degree of specificity, the terms and conditions that the 
student must meet for completing the degree requirements. Subsequent 
changes in the plan of study must be approved by the student and the adviser, 

JOURNALISM 247 



and no graduate student may take a course S/U or Pass-Fail without written 
permission of the graduate director. 

Graduate Assistantships and Internships 

Approximately nine assistantships and internships are available in and 
through the School of Journalism each year. Graduate assistants teach 
laboratories and assist professors with their courses. Interns work in mass 
communication-related jobs on campus to obtain solid professional experience. 

Students receive stipends for the academic year and may apply for tuition 
remission for the entire year. Although sometimes renewed for a second year, 
assistantships and internships are granted for one academic year. Graduate 
assistants and interns work an average of 15 hours per week during the 
academic year. 

Persons who want to be considered for assistantships or internships 
should have their applications on file with the director of graduate studies in 
the School of Journalism before March 1. 

Program Requirements 

The School of Journalism offers two tracks— the teaching-research track 
and the professional track — within the M.S.J, program. 

The teaching-research track is generally a program for persons who want 
to go on for a Ph.D. degree, teach in a community college, or conduct research 
in some areas of mass communication. Persons in the track normally take 
research and theory courses both inside and outside the School of Journalism, 
statistics, and social science courses. The program culminates in a thesis, 
which is a scholarly study of an important aspect of mass communication. 

The professional track is designed primarily for persons who wish to 
become excellent practitioners in some field of mass communication and who 
have little desire to teach or become mass communication researchers. 
Persons in the professional track normally take communication and outside 
area courses that will help them become better practitioners. The program 
culminates in a professional project, which helps a student extend his or her 
knowledge about a given aspect of mass communication but which should be 
the sort of nonroutine project on which the student might work as a 
professional. 

Students must complete all requirements for their degrees, including 
either a thesis or professional project within four years of the start of the first 
course work in their programs. 

Course Work 

For the master's degree in journalism, the student must meet the 
following requirements: 

Teaching-Research Program. A minimum of 30 semester hours of accept- 
able graduate credit, including a thesis for 6 hours of credit. 

(a) As part of the 30 hours, a minimum of 18 hours, including the thesis, 
in School of Journalism courses. 

(b) Included in the 30 hours, a minimum of 9 hours in a minor conducted 
outside the School of Journalism. 

Professional Program. A minimum of 30 semester hours of acceptable 
graduate credit, including a professional project for 6 hours of credit. 

(a) As part of the 30 hours, a minimum of 18 hours, including the 
professional project, in School of Journalism courses. 

(b) Included in the 30 hours, a minimum of 9 hours in a minor conducted 
outside the School of Journalism. 

248 JOURNALISM 



In either program, the candidate is allowed to take more than the 
minimum required number of hours. 

The following courses are required for all Journalism graduate students: 
Journ. 300— Introduction to Graduate Studies (no credit); Journ. 304— Mass 
Media and Society (3 hr.); Journ. 320— Advanced Journalistic Writing and 
Research (3 hr.); and Journ. 401— Research Methods (3 hr.). 

Upper-Level Courses Required. In both programs, 60 percent of the 
graduate credits submitted for the degree must be in courses numbered 300 or 
above. 

Grades. Course work must be completed with a minimum grade-point 
average of 3.0. The thesis and professional project are graded as S or U 
(Satisfactory or Unsatisfactory). 

Except for thesis, professional project, and internship courses, no student 
will be permitted to take a course on a Pass-Fail or Satisfactory-Unsatisfactory 
grade basis without prior approval of the Director of Graduate Studies. 

Examination. The candidate for the master's degree will pass an oral 
examination on the thesis or professional project. In addition, the thesis or 
professional project will be evaluated as a test of the candidate's writing skill. 

The kinds of courses taken in the M.S.J, program largely depend on each 
student's background and interests. The program is intended to accommodate 
students of differing academic and professional backgrounds and interests. 

A student typically will take all outside courses in one area (e.g., biology, 
political science, history), although the student may decide after consultation 
with the adviser to take courses in two or more outside areas. Courses outside 
the School of Journalism are selected by students in consultation with their 
advisers; outside courses selected are subject to the availability of space and 
prerequisite requirements in the offering departments. 

Thesis/Professional Project 

Each student must complete a thesis or professional project involving 
original work in the student's area of interest. The student should have a 
thesis or professional project proposal written by the end of the semester in 
which the first 12 hours of course work are completed. 

Each student is responsible for developing ideas for the thesis or project. 
Through consultations with members of the journalism faculty, the student 
determines faculty interests and areas of expertise, and ideas are refined to 
the point where the student has a significant and feasible idea in mind. 

The student, with the approval of the Graduate Studies Committee, 
selects the journalism faculty member who would be best able to chair the 
advisory committee, subject to the agreement of the faculty member. If 
questions arise about a faculty member's interest or knowledge, the student 
directly asks the faculty member or consults the academic adviser or other 
members of the Graduate Studies Committee. 

With the chairperson, the student further refines the idea to a "preliminary 
proposal" stage, in which ideas and appropriate methodology are on paper, 
but not necessarily in formal proposal form. 

After the student has written a preliminary proposal and selected a 
faculty chairperson, the student should select other members of the advisory 
committee, subject to their willingness to serve. The advisory committee must 
consist of not fewer than four members, one from outside the School of 
Journalism; two persons must be members of the WVU graduate faculty. 

At this point, students in the professional track must submit their 
proposals to the Graduate Studies Committee, which must approve all 

JOURNALISM 249 



professional project topics (but not research methods, specific research 
questions, or hypotheses, etc.). Students may attend the meetings at which 
their proposals are discussed. After securing Graduate Studies Committee 
approval, students in the professional track schedule hearings with their 
guidance committees. Hearings with the guidance committees are required of 
all students (including those in the teaching research track). 

Working under the guidance of the advisory committee, the student 
prepares a complete thesis or project proposal, extended from the preliminary 
proposal. Guidance for preparing a proposal is available from the director of 
graduate studies. 

The student then has a consultative meeting, during which final revisions 
of and refinements in the proposal are discussed with the members of the 
advisory committee. Notices of the public meeting (to which students are 
invited) must be placed in the boxes of all members of the School of 
Journalism faculty and posted outside the dean's office at least two weeks 
before the meeting. One copy of the thesis or project proposal must be placed 
on reserve in the journalism reading room. 

After the consultation, the committee votes to accept or reject the 
proposal. The student whose proposal is approved works closely with the 
committee in the completion of the thesis or project. All committee members 
should be kept informed and consulted for advice (as needed and as desired by 
them) as the thesis or project develops. 

After each member of the advisory committee is satisfied with the work, a 
public oral examination is scheduled. Two weeks' notice must be given to all 
faculty of the School of Journalism (notices should be placed in all faculty 
boxes and posted outside the dean's office). One copy of the final thesis or 
project must be placed on reserve in the journalism reading room. Students 
also should make certain their shuttle sheets are filed with the Director of 
Graduate Studies in Journalism two weeks before the date of the oral defense. 

Only committee members may vote on acceptance or rejection of a thesis 
or project. A majority vote is sufficient to approve the thesis or project, 
although a dissenting vote may be recorded. Furthermore, at least three 
signatures (two of which must be signatures of graduate faculty members) 
must be on the approval sheet. If one committee member is outvoted and feels 
he/she cannot sign the approval sheet, he/she may resign from the committee. 
Such action may force a reconstitution of the committee and repetition of 
earlier mentioned steps leading to the oral examination. 

The chairperson of the advisory committee will decide whether final 
corrections (after the oral examination) have been made properly, and he/she 
will check the style and form of the final typed version. The MLA Stylesheet 
or other approved stylebook should be carefully followed during preparation 
of a thesis or professional project. 

Four copies of the final thesis or two copies of a project should be 
delivered to the School of Journalism. 

Maintenance of Scholarship 

All students are expected to maintain satisfactory progress toward the 
degree. A student's graduate record begins with the first course credited to the 
degree and includes all subsequent courses. All students must maintain a 
grade-point average of at least 3.0 and complete all requirements within four 
years. Students who fail to meet this standard will be dropped from the 
program permanently. 



250 JOURNALISM 



Each student working toward the M.S.J, degree must register for at least 
one semester hour each regular (Fall and Spring) semester. This enrollment 
may be in course work or in Journ. 497. 

Foreign Students 

Believing that mutual benefit is derived when students from other 
countries study in the WVU School of Journalism, the school welcomes 
foreign students. At the same time, the school recognizes that journalism, 
more than many other fields, requires language skill. To profit by journalism 
study, foreign students must have a ready understanding of English. They 
will be called on to follow rapid speech in interviews, press conferences, 
public addresses, and in the classroom, as well as to deal with abstract ideas 
communicated in English. Award of the master's degree in journalism attests 
to the student's facility in English. Foreign students must maintain the same 
3.0 grade-point average required of other students. 

Recognizing the language difficulty, the School of Journalism offers 
foreign students a transition semester. Unless students obviously are fluent 
in English and pass a test in which they demonstrate comprehensive 
knowledge of English fundamentals (grammar, punctuation, syntax, spelling), 
they will be offered a semester of undergraduate study (not for graduate 
credit), which will enable them to sharpen language skills. Such a transitional 
semester also will permit foreign students to study other selected courses in 
preparation for graduate study. These courses will help them adapt to the 
American system of journalism and to the new cultural environment. 

Journalism (Journ.) 

221. Mass Communications Research Methods. 3 hr. PR: Journ. 1, 15; and Journ. 18, or 
PR 111, or Adv. 113 or BN 117. A broad study of scientific and critical research 
methods as they apply to mass media practices; review of relevant sources for 
historical data gathering, readership and audience analysis; evaluation of mar- 
keting and public opinion research. 2 hr. lee, 1 hr. field work. 

231. Color Photography. II. 3 hr. PR: Journ. 120 and 130 or consent. The theory of color 
slides and prints, including slide development, as applied to multi-media 
presentations. (Supplies will cost $50.00-70.00) 

241. Internship. 3 hr. PR: Foundation courses in one of the sequences. Student must 
have a signed contract detailing terms of the learning experience. Full-time 
employment for a minimum of 10 weeks. (Graded on Pass/Fail basis.) 

242. Practicum. Journalism majors only. 1-2 hr. PR: Foundation courses in one of the 
sequences. Student must have a signed contract detailing terms of the learning 
experience. 8-20 hours per week for minimum of 10 weeks, while taking other 
courses. (Graded on Pass/Fail basis.) (1-2 hr. work experience.) 

299. Contemporary Media Issues and Ethics. I, II. 2 hr. (Required of all senior 
journalism majors.) In-depth study of contemporary media issues such as right of 
access to media, morality in news and advertising, new FTC and FCC regulations, 
media responsibility to society, and social responsibility of media professionals. 
Individual research papers on issues with ethical considerations. 

300. Introduction to Graduate Studies. I. (No Credit.) (Required of all graduate 
journalism students.) Designed to orient students to graduate study. (Class meets 
once a week.) 

JOURNALISM 251 



304. Mass Media and Society. II. 3 hr. (Required of all graduate journalism students.) 
Study of mass media and their role in and influence on society; includes analysis 
of the social, political, and economic determinants of media content and character. 

312. Fund Raising and Foundation Management. I. 3-6 hr. (Open to graduate journalism 
students and to seniors with a 3.0 grade-point average; consent.) Seminar. Studies 
in fund raising, alumni relations, and foundation management. 

320. Advanced Journalistic Writing and Research. I, S. 3 hr. (Required of all graduate 
journalism students.) Study of advanced journalistic writing and research 
techniques. Students will practice the writing and research techniques on topics 
of their own choosing. Academic or popular topics may be selected. 

340. Corporate Communications. I. 3 hr. Conferences to examine the synergistic effects 
of advertising, journalism, and public relations for different kinds of corporations. 
Team projects and presentations. 

341. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Student proposes idea for substantial reading, 
research, writing in area of interest; requirements may include conventional term 
paper, series of articles, slide presentation, oral presentations, etc. Student works 
independently of classroom setting. 

380. Thesis. I, II, S. 2-6 hr. PR: Approved thesis proposal. 

390. Professional Project. I, II, S. 2-6 hr. PR: Approved professional project proposal. 
Non-thesis professional project for students preparing for some field in mass 
communication. 

401. Research Methods. I. 3 hr. (Required of all graduate journalism students.) Study of 
quantitative methods common to research in communications. An introduction to 
sampling, measurement, analytic procedures, and data. 

402. Seminar in Research Problems. II. 3 hr. Advanced study of methodological 
techniques. Research project chosen from area of student's major interest. A 
written report of the study undertaken is required. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects 
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent 
or through specially scheduled lectures. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. For graduate students not seeking course work credit but 
who wish to meet residence requirements, use the University's facilities, and 
participate in its academic and cultural programs. 

Advertising (Adv.) 

201. Retail Advertising. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Adv. 115, 203, and admission to the School or 
consent. Strategic advertising planning for retail merchants. Writing ads to meet 
objectives. Sales management and sales of local advertising time and space. 
Exercises in newspaper, radio, TV, direct marketing, outdoor advertising, 
specialty advertising, etc. 

203. Advertising Media Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Adv. 113 or consent. Survey of local and 
national advertising media. Identification and use of standard media resources. 
Creating media plans based on advertisers' strategic plans. Introduction to 
computer media planning. 

210. Graphic Design. II. 3 hr. PR: Adv. 110 or consent. Design layouts for print media. 
Includes buying, supervising, and scheduling of art, typography, and print 
material. 2 hr. lee, 2 hr. lab. 



252 JOURNALISM 



239. Seminar in Advertising Management Problems. I, II. 2 hr. PR: Senior standing and 
major or minor in advertising. Application of the study of advertising research, 
law, and theory in the preparation of a national advertising campaign. Aspects of 
the campaign to cover marketing, research, creative, media, sales promotion, and 
presentation. 

251. Direct Marketing. II. 3 hr. PR: Adv. 113 and 114 or consent. Mailing, marketing, 
and creation of direct-mail letters, brochures, involvement pieces, and reply 
cards. Postal regulations, direct mail law, and printing procedures. 

259. Advertising Campaigns. 3 hr. PR: Adv. 203, senior standing or consent. Students 
work in teams to build complete advertising campaigns. Campaigns may include 
simulated local stores and major national businesses. Evaluations will be based 
on the professionalism of all facets of the campaigns. 

Broadcast News (BN) 

285. Special Topics in Broadcast Journalism. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: BN 186 and consent. 
Directed investigation of selected topics in broadcast journalism. 

287. Broadcast Journalism 2. I, II. 3 hr. PR: BN 186 and consent. Continuation of Journ. 
185, with course content oriented to television news, including electronic news 
gathering (ENG). 

News-Editorial (N-E) 

220. Writing for Magazines. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Upper-division or graduate standing; 
Journ. 15 or equivalent preparation in grammar, punctuation, and spelling. 
Professional approach: magazine analysis, query letters, writing, rewriting; 
submitting manuscripts for publication. 

225. High School Publications Advising. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Journ. 18, 19, 
Adv. 113. (For students seeking Journalism certification.] Emphasizes writing 
styles, newspaper/yearbook layout, rights and responsibilities of the teacher, 
students, and school system. Enrollees will construct instructional portfolios 
based on research and classroom discussion concepts. 

227. History of Journalism. I. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 52 and 53 or consent. (Open to all 
University students.] Impact of the American press on the nation; development of 
today's media from the beginnings in seventeenth-century England and in the 
American colonies; great names in journalism; freedom of press and its current 
implications. 

228. Law of the News Media. II. 3 hr. (For seniors and graduate students.] The law as it 
affects the mass media. Considered are such areas as libel, public records, 
criminal pre-trial publicity, freedom of information, obscenity. 

230. Editorial and Critical Writing. I. 3 hr. (Open to all University students.] The 
student will analyze and write editorials and commentaries; study typical 
editorial pages and the ethics governingtions Case Studies. II. 3 hr. PR: PR 124. 
Seminar based on in-depth studies of public relations programs developed and 
applied in support of our institutions. Primary emphasis on successful campaigns, 
but unsuccessful efforts also will be examined for causes of failures. 



JOURNALISM 253 



LIBERAL STUDIES 

Marilyn Bendena, Director 

317A Chitwood Hall 

Degree Offered: Master of Arts in Liberal Studies 

This interdisciplinary program provides an opportunity for highly 
motivated students to continue their studies beyond the baccalaureate under 
a coherent program but without the exclusive concentration in one discipline. 

Each student, in conjunction with a graduate adviser, will put together a 
personalized curriculum centered around some topic or interdisciplinary area 
of special interest to the student. Topics might include area studies (e.g., 
Appalachian studies, women's studies, American studies), period studies 
(e.g., the history, literature, art, and philosophy of the eighteenth century), or 
some other special interest that will tie together studies in several different 
disciplines. The central theme is essential to the degree program to provide 
coherence and structure; a degree will not be awarded for an unrelated 
collection of courses. The focus provided by a central topic will ensure that 
studies are pursued in depth and justify the granting of a graduate degree. 

Program Faculty 

There are more than 750 graduate faculty members at WVU who can be 
called upon to assist students in their individual plans of study. The program 
is administered by the Master of Arts in Liberal Studies Committee, which is 
appointed by the Dean of Arts and Sciences and is responsible for admitting 
candidates to the program, approving study contracts, overseeing the final 
evaluation, and determining whether degree requirements have been met. 
This committee serves roughly the same administrative function for the 
Master of Arts in Liberal Studies (M.A.L.S.) as an academic department 
serves for more traditional degree programs. 

Admission Requirements 

Requirements for admission to the M.A.L.S. program: 

1. Baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution. 

2. Minimum undergraduate grade-point average of 3.0. Probationary 
status may be granted for those who do not meet this standard. 

3. An essay of at least 1,000 words including: (a) a description of the 
student's relevant professional experiences, current orientation, and future 
goals, and an indication of how these goals will be served by the M.A.L.S. 
program, and (b) an outline of the course of study to be pursued, including the 
central focus of the study and a preliminary identification of course work to 
be taken, as well as an indication of how the courses are related to this central 
topic. The essay is an important admission criterion; it should demonstrate 
motivation and direction as well as mastery of essential writing skills. It also 
helps to determine which faculty member would be the most appropriate 
adviser. 

Study Contract 

Upon admission to the program, the student is assigned an adviser. With 
the assistance of the adviser, the student works out a detailed study contract, 
including a list of all course work to be taken, a description of the final project, 
and an indication of the relevance of the course work to the central topic of the 
degree proposal. The contract must be approved by the M.A.L.S. before the 
applicant is admitted to the program. A master's committee will then be 

254 LIBERAL STUDIES 



drawn from the appropriate graduate faculty to assist the student in the 
course of study. 

Degree Requirements 

Besides the general requirements listed in the graduate catalog for all 
graduate programs at WVU, the M.A.L.S. program has the following specific 
requirements: 

1. A minimum of 36 semester hours of approved course work, subject to 
the following restrictions: a. Ordinarily no more than 12 hours will be 
approved for graduate course work taken before admission to the program; b. 
Because the degree is intended to be interdisciplinary no more than 18 hours 
can be taken in one departmental discipline; c. No more than 12 hours of 
independent study will be approved; d. The final 12 hours must consist of 
WVU course work; e. The program must include at least three hours of course 
work in research methodology. 

2. A minimum 3.25 grade-point average for all course work in the degree 
program. 

3. Fulfillment of all requirements of the study contract. 

4. Successful completion of a final project (e.g., a comprehensive exami- 
nation, project paper, performance or research project). When the student's 
final project does not include a comprehensive examination, a written 
document summarizing and synthesizing the student's graduate experiences 
in relation to the chosen topic must be submitted to the student's master's 
committee. 

MATHEMATICS 

James Lightbourne, Chairperson of the Department 

208 Eiesland Hall 

Degree Offered: Master of Science, Doctor of Philosophy 

Graduate Faculty: Members Christie, Ciesielski, Diamond, Ganser, Gingold, Goldwas- 
ser, Goodykoontz, Gould, Hattori, Irwin, Johnson, Kim, Lai, Li, Mays, Moseley, 
Nadler, and Zhang. Associate Members Dowdy, Karwowski, Lightbourne, Mayes, 
Miller, Randolph, and Simons 

The Department of Mathematics offers the master of science (M.S.) and 
doctor of philosophy (Ph.D.) degrees. Programs are available for students to 
study applied mathematics, pure mathematics, mathematics combined with 
another discipline, or mathematics for secondary education. Career opportu- 
nities are wide-ranging and include positions in education, industry, and 
government. 

Students entering the M.S. program should have the equivalent of the 
mathematics requirements for an undergraduate major at WVU. Deficiencies 
may be remedied by the completion of recommended undergraduate courses 
or by examination. Such remedial work cannot be used to meet the degree 
requirements. Between 30 and 33 hours of approved coursework and either a 
thesis, project, or a comprehensive final examination are required. Students 
are expected to maintain at least a 3.0 average in mathematics courses and in 
work offered in fulfillment of the degree program. 

To enter the Ph.D. program, the equivalent of an M.S. from WVU is 
necessary. Students must pass entrance exams in mathematics within the 
first year of study. Following the entrance exams, 30 hours of course work is 
required, consisting of 12 hours in a major area, six hours in each of two minor 
areas, and six hours of graduate seminar. Oral and written qualifying 

MATHEMATICS 255 



examinations are taken in the major and minor areas of study. Upon 
successful completion of the course work, a thesis must be written based upon 
the student's original research in an area of mathematics. 

For a more complete statement of the requirements of each degree, the 
student is referred to the department's graduate student handbooks. 

Mathematics (Math.) 

213. Partial Differential Equations. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18 or consent. Introduces 
students in mathematics, engineering, and the sciences to methods of applied 
mathematics. First and second order equations, canonical forms, wave, heat and 
Laplace's equations, representation of solutions. 

215. Applied Modern Algebra. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Finite fields, algebraic coding 
theory, Boolean algebras, monoids, finite state, and Turing machines. 

217. Applied Mathematical Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18. The algebra and differential 
calculus of vectors, solution of the partial differential equations of mathematical 
physics, and application of functions of a complex variable. 

219. Seminar in Applied Mathematics. I, II. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Selected topics in 
applied mathematics. Topics previously offered include vector calculus and 
stochastic processes. 

220. Numerical Analysis 1. 1, II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 17 (or both Math. 16 and C.S. 120) and a 
programming language. Computer arithmetic, roots of equations, interpolation, 
Gaussian elimination, numerical integration and differentiation. Numerical 
solution of initial value problems for ordinary differential equations. Least square 
approximations. (Equiv. to C.S. 220.) 

221. Numerical Analysis 2. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 220 or Math. 241 or consent. Solutions of 
linear systems by direct and iterative methods. Calculation of eigenvalues, 
eigenvectors, and inverses of matrices. Applications to ordinary and partial 
differential equations. (Equiv. to C.S. 221.) 

224. Mathematics of Compound Interest. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 16 or 128. A problem- 
solving course focusing on the measurement of interest, annuities, amortization 
schedules, and sinking funds, and the valuation of bonds and other securities. 

226. Mathematical Statistics. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 16 or consent. (Designed for 
mathematics teachers.] Frequency distributions, averages, probability, popula- 
tions, samples, probability distributions, estimations, hypothesis testing. Although 
no previous knowledge of computer language is assumed, the computer will be 
used in this course. 

228. Discrete Mathematics 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 16 and 120 or equiv. Applications of 
discrete mathematics to computer science. Methods of solving homogeneous and 
non-homogeneous recurrence relations using generating functions and character- 
istic equations; digraphs to analyze computer algorithms; graph theory and its 
ramifications to computer algorithms. (Equiv. to C.S. 228.) 

231, 232. Introduction to Mathematics for the Elementary Teacher. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. 
PR: Math. 34 or consent. (Not open to students who have credit for Math. 131.) (For 
in-service elementary mathematics teachers.) Systems of numeration; sets, 
relations, binary operations, the algebraic structure of various number systems; 
the notions of length, area, and volume; coordinate geometry. 

241. Applied Linear Algebra. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Math. 17; Math. 18 or consent. Matrix 
algebra with emphasis on algorithmic techniques and applications of physical 
models. Topics include solution of large systems of equations, orthogonal 
projections and least squares, and eigenvalue problems. 

256 MATHEMATICS 



251, 252. Introduction o Real Analysis. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 163 or consent. A 
study of sequences, convergence, limits, continuity, definite integral, the deriva- 
tive, differentials, functional dependence, multiple integrals, sequences and series 
of functions. 

255. Advanced Real Calculus. S. 3 hr. Math. 18 or consent. Limits, series, metric spaces, 
uniformity, integrals. 

256. Complex Variables. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18. Complex numbers, functions of a 
complex variable; analytic functions; the logarithm and related functions; power 
series; Laurent series and residues; conformal mapping and applications. 

269. Advanced Topics in Mathematics. I, II, S. 3-9 hr. PR: Consent. An independent but 
directed study program, the content of which is to be mutually agreed upon by the 
individual student and instructor. 

301, 302. Combinatorial Analysis. 1, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: One year of calculus. 
Permutations, combinations, generating functions, principle of inclusion and 
exclusion, distributions, partitions, compositions, trees and networks. 

305, 306. Theory of Numbers. I, II. 3 hr. PR: One year of calculus. Introduction to 
classical number theory covering such topics as divisibility, the Euclidean 
algorithm, Diophantine equations, congruences, primitive roots, quadratic resi- 
dues, number-theoretic functions, distribution of primes, irrationals, and combi- 
natorial methods. Special numbers such as those of Bernoulli, Euler, and Stirling. 

313. Intermediate Differential Equations. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 17, 18. A rigorous study of 
ordinary differential equations including linear and nonlinear systems, self- 
adjoint eigenvalue problems, non-self-adjoint boundary-value problems, pertur- 
bation theory of autonomous systems, Poincare-theorem. 

317, 318. Advanced Calculus. I, II. 3 hr. persem. PR: Math. 18. Primarily for engineers 
and scientists. Functions of several variables, partial differentiation, implicit 
functions, transformations; line surface and volume integrals; point set theory, 
continuity, integration, infinite series and convergence, power series, and improper 
integrals. 

319. Seminar in Applied Mathematics. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Selected topics in applied 
mathematics. Topics previously offered include applied linear algebra, computa- 
tional fluid dynamics, numerical partial differential equations, ordinary differen- 
tial equations, perturbation methods, and stochastic processes. 

320. Solution of Nonlinear Systems. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 220 or Math. 241 or consent. 
Solution of nonlinear systems of equations. Newton and Secant Methods. 
Unconstrained optimization. Nonlinear overtaxation techniques. Nonlinear 
least squares problems. (Equiv. to C.S. 320.) 

330. Introduction to Applied Mathematics. S. 1-6 hr. PR: Calculus or consent. 
(Designed especially for secondary-school mathematics teachers: others admitted 
with departmental approval obtained before registration.) Problem solving and 
construction of mathematical models in the social, life, and physical sciences. 
Examples illustrating the origins and use of secondary school mathematics in 
solving real world problems. 

333. Modern Algebra for Teachers. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Calculus or consent. (Designed 
especially for secondary-school mathematics teachers. Others admitted with 
departmental approval obtained prior to registration.) Introduction to algebraic 
structures: groups, rings, integral domains and fields. Development and properties 
of the rational and real number systems. 



MATHEMATICS 257 



334. Modern Algebra for Teachers. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Math. 141 or 333 or consent. Further 
investigation of algebraic structures begun in Math. 333. (Emphasis on topics 
helpful to secondary-school mathematics teachers.) Topics include Sylow theory, 
Jordan-Holder Theorem, rings and quotients, field extensions, Galois theory and 
solution by radicals. 

335. Foundations of Geometry. S. 3 hr. PR: Calculus or consent. (Designed especially 
for secondary mathematics teachers; others admitted with departmental approval 
obtained before registration.} Incidence geometries with models; order for lines 
and planes; separation by angles and by triangles; congruence; introduction to 
Euclidean geometry. 

336. Transformation Geometry. S. 3 hr. PR: Math. 141 or 333 or consent. (Designed 
especially for secondary-school mathematics teachers; others admitted with 
departmental approval obtained before registration.) A modern approach to 
geometry based on transformations in a vector space setting. The course unifies 
the development of geometry with the methods of modern algebra. 

337. Foundations of Probability and Statistics. S. 3 hr. PR: Calculus or consent. 
(Designed especially for secondary -school mathematics teachers; other admitted 
with departmental approval obtained before registration.) Introduction to proba- 
bility and statistics with emphasis on topics helpful to secondary-school mathe- 
matics teachers. Topics include: density and distribution functions, probability 
distributions, sampling, confidence intervals, point estimation, hypothesis testing, 
student's t-distribution. Chi-square distribution. 

339. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. 

341, 342. Modern Algebra. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 141 or consent. Concepts from 
set theory and the equivalence of the Axiom of Choice. Zorn's Lemma and the 
Well-Ordering Theorem; a study of the strucutre of groups, rings, fields, and 
vector spaces; elementary factorization theory; extensions of ring and fields; 
modules and ideals; and lattices. 

343. Linear Algebra. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Math. 241 or consent. Review of theory of groups 
and fields; linear vector spaces including the theory of duality; full linear group; 
bilinear and quadratic forms; and theory of isotropic and totally isotropic spaces. 

351, 352. Theory of Functions of Real Variables. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 181, 252. 
A development of the Lebesgue integral, function spaces and Banach spaces, 
differentiation, complex measures, the Lebesgue-Radon-Nikodym theorem. 

355, 356. Theory of Functions of Complex Variables. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 252. 
Number systems, the complex plane and its geometry. Holomorphic functions, 
power series, elementary functions, complex integration, representation theorems, 
the calculus of residues, analytic continuation and analytic function, Elliptic 
functions, Holomorphic functions of several complex variables. 

357. Calculus of Variations. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18, 252, (or 318). Necessary conditions 
and sufficient conditions for weak and strong relative minimums of an integral, 
Euler-Lagrange equation. Legendre condition, field construction, Weierstrass 
excess function, and the Jacobi equation. 

381, 382. Topology. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 252 or consent. A detailed treatment 
of topological spaces covering the topics of continuity, convergence, compactness, 
and connectivity; product and identification space, function spaces, and the 
topology in Euclidean spaces. 

385, 386. Rings of Continuous Functions. I, II, S. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 341 and 381, 
or consent. A study of the algebraic structure of the ring of all continuous real- 
valued functions on a topological space and its relation to the topological 
properties of the space. 



258 MATHEMATICS 



400. Seminar in Number Theory. I, II. 1-12 hr. 

402. Special Functions. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18, 252. Operational techniques, 
generalized hypergeometric functions, classical polynomials of Bell, Hermite, 
Legendre, Noerlund, etc. Introduction to recent polynomial systems. Current 
research topics. 

405, 406. Analytic Number Theory. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 306, 356. Selected 
topics in analytic number theory such as the prime number theorem, primes in an 
arithmetical progression, the Zeta function, the Goldbach conjecture. 

441, 442. Group Theory. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 141 or consent. Elementary group 
theory; Sylow theory, extended Sylow theory in solvable groups, Burnsides 
theorem on normal complements, transfer homomorphism. Representation theory. 
Emphasis throughout on finite groups. 

443, 444. Algebraic Theory of Semigroups. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 342 or equiv. 
Ideal theory, matrix representation of semigroups, decompositions and extensions, 
simple semigroups, inverse semigroups, congruence relations, recent research. 

451, 452. Functional Analysis. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 181, 241, 252. A study of 
Banach and Hilbert spaces; the Hahn-Banach theorem, uniform boundedness 
principle, and the open mapping theorem; dual spaces and the Riesz representation 
theorem; Banach algebras; and special theory. 

457, 458. Theory of Partial Differential Equations. I. II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 252. 
Cauchy-Kowalewski theorem, Cauchy's problem, the Dirichlet and Neumann 
problems, Dirichlet's principle, potential theory, integral equations, eigenvalue 
problems, numerical methods. 

460. Thesis. I, II. 1-6 hr. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college 
teaching of mathematics. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects 
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent 
or through specially scheduled lectures. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Each graduate student will present at 
least one seminar to the assembled faculty and graduate student body of the 
student's program. 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not 
seeking course work credit but who wish to meet residence requirements, use the 
University's facilities, and participate in its academic and cultural programs. 

MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 

Donald W. Lyons, Chairperson 
323 Engineering Sciences Building 

Degrees Offered: Master of Science in Mechanical Engineering 
Master of Science in Aerospace Engineering 
Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering Areas of Emphasis for: 
Master of Science in Engineering 
Doctor of Philosophy 
Graduate Faculty: Members Bajura, Banta, Barbero, Celik, Clark, Dean, Dwivedi, 
Flemmer, Gautam, Johnson, Jurewicz, Kang, Kuhlman, Long, Loth, Lyell, Lyons, 
Means, Morris, Mucino, Napolitano, Norman, Palmer, Prucz, Shahnam, Sharan, 
Sivaneri, Smith, Sneckenberger, Squire, Stanley, Steinhardt, Upadhyay, and Venable 

Faculty members in the department have extensive industrial and 
teaching experience and have published widely in the technical literature, a 
combination which assists students in selecting relevant courses and research 

MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 259 



topics to meet their educational goals. The department has laboratory space 
on two floors in the Engineering Sciences Building and provides support for 
both instructional and research activities through the services of three shop 
facilities, the wind tunnel laboratory, and the flight test hangar at the 
Morgantown Municipal Airport (Hart Field). Funded research allows the 
department to maintain up-to-date instrumentation, equipment, and facilities, 
including computer-controlled data acquisition systems for laboratory use. 

Graduate Programs 

The objectives of the departmental graduate-level programs are: (1) To 
provide master's level education for students in or entering the engineering 
profession, and/or (2) To provide an advanced graduate educational experience 
for students pursuing the doctoral degree. Two separate master's degrees are 
offered in the department. They are the Master of Science in Aerospace 
Engineering (M.S.A.E.) and the Master of Science in Mechanical Engineering 
(M.S.M.E.). Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.) and the Doctor of 
Philosophy (Ph.D.) degree, an undesignated degree, is offered by the College 
of Engineering and is interdisciplinary in nature. 

Graduate Degree Requirements 

Course Work and Grade-Point Requirements 

All of the degree programs require the student to attain an overall grade- 
point average of 3.0 or higher in order to meet graduation requirements. The 
grade-point average is calculated on the basis of courses and excludes credit 
for research, which is graded on an S/U basis. Some of the course work can be 
at the 200-level, dependent upon the program desired by the student and the 
agreement of his/her advisory committee. Students are generally advised to 
select a minimum number of 200-level courses for their programs of study and 
concentrate upon developing proficiency in course material offered at the 
300-and 400-levels, which are designated as graduate-level courses by WVU. 

Only courses with grades of C or higher may be acceptable for graduate 
credit, although all course work taken will be counted in establishing the 
student's average. No more than 9 hours of 200-level credit can be counted 
toward meeting the course work requirements for the M.S. degree. All 
doctoral options must include a minimum of 18 semester hours of course work 
taken at WVU. No more than 20 percent of the course work for a doctoral 
degree can be at the 200 level. A minimum of 24 semester hours of research 
credit is required for dissertation requirements. Two semesters of full-time 
attendance at the WVU Morgantown campus are necessary to meet residency 
requirements in the Ph.D. program. 

The Department of Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering requires six 
hours of advanced mathematics for M.S. programs of study and a minimum of 
six additional hours of mathematics for the Ph.D. option. Although these 
courses need not be taken explicitly from the Department of Mathematics, the 
general thrust of the courses must be equivalent to the 300-400 level of effort 
required for the major portion of a plan of study. 

Maximum Time tor Completion 

Master's: All requirements for a master's degree must be completed 
within eight years preceding the student's graduation. Students should 
petition for admission to candidacy for the degree during the first semester of 
residency by filing a plan of study approved by his/her advisory committee. A 
minimum of 30 hours of course work (including research) is required for the 

260 MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 



degree. Students must pass a final examination administered by their 
advisory committee before being certified for the degree. 

Doctorate: The doctorate is a research or performance degree and does not 
depend on the accumulation of credit hours. The requirements for the degree 
are admission to candidacy, residency, completion and defense of a research 
dissertation, and satisfactory compliance with the Interdisciplinary Ph.D. 
requirements of the College of Engineering. Two members of the Graduate 
Faculty from outside the department are required to serve on the advisory and 
examining committee. 

The Ph.D. degree signifies that the holder has the competence to function 
independently at the highest level of endeavor in the chosen field. Hence, the 
number of years involved in attaining or retaining competency cannot be 
readily specified nor can an exact program of study be defined. Students 
seeking admission to the Ph.D. program must show the potential for 
conducting independent research at the level required to make a contribution 
to the advancement of knowledge in the field of study. The course work taken 
should be sufficient to broaden the student's background in at least one other 
area of the department in addition to the major area of study. A minimum of 
two minor areas is recommended in addition to the required proficiency in 
mathematics. 

Ph.D. Qualifying/Candidacy Examination— The Ph.D. qualfying/candi- 
dacy examination is the method of assessing whether the student has attained 
sufficient knowledge of the discipline and supporting fields in order to 
undertake independent research or practice. Students are required to pass a 
qualifying examination administered by the department which tests for a 
minimum level of proficiency expected of all students in a given area. It is 
expected that students will take the qualifying exam during their first 
semester of enrollment in the Ph.D. program, however it is required that 
full-time students complete the qualifying examination no later than the end 
of their second semester past the master's degree. The advisory and examining 
committee of the student is charged with evaluating the student's competency 
in the specific area of study through the evaluation of a dissertation proposal 
for the research to be completed and the evaluation of the student's plan of 
study and associated course work. After these requirements are completed, 
the student is formally admitted to candidacy for the Ph.D. degree. Only at 
this point can a student be called a doctoral candidate; admission to the 
graduate program for the purpose of pursuing the Ph.D. is not equivalent to 
becoming a Ph.D. candidate. Doctoral candidates are allowed no more than 
five years to complete the remaining degree requirements after admission to 
candidacy. An extension of time can be obtained only by repeating the 
qualifying examination and meeting any other requirements specified by the 
student's committee. 

Graduate Degree Programs 

Master of Science in Aerospace Engineering (M.S.A.E.) 

Students wishing to pursue a program leading to an M.S.A.E. degree are 
required to have a B.S.A.E. or B.S.M.E. from an accredited ABET curriculum, 
or their equivalent. Students with an engineering background other than 
aerospace or mechanical engineering normally will be required to strengthen 
their background. Programs of study must comply with the rules and 
regulations as outlined in the general requirements for graduate work in the 
College of Engineering. The student's program of study is formulated jointly 

MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 261 



by the student and his/her advisory committee. Normally, a thesis is required 
of all candidates for the degree of Master of Science in Aerospace Engineering. 
Programs of study for the M.S.A.E. degree must include six semester 
hours of advanced mathematics beyond a first course in differential equations 
and at least 12 semester hours of aerospace engineering courses taken from 
any two areas of the department. The remainder of the course work may 
consist of other courses from Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering, other 
departments in the College of Engineering, or advanced course work in 
mathematics, chemistry, and physics. A maximum of six hours of credit is 
counted toward degree requirements for thesis work. Students not completing 
a thesis will be required to include three hours of methods courses in their 
programs of study. 

Master of Science in Mechanical Engineering (M.S.M.E.) 

Students wishing to pursue a program leading to an M.S.M.E. degree are 
required to have a B.S.M.E. or B.S.A.E. from an accredited ABET curriculum, 
or its equivalent. Students with an engineering background other than 
mechanical or aerospace engineering normally will be required to strengthen 
their background. 

The program of study must include at least six hours of advanced 
mathematics beyond a first course in differential equations, and 12 total 
hours of courses from at least two areas of study in mechanical engineering. 
Students are normally required to write either a thesis or problem report 
unless they can present compelling evidence of equivalent experience. A 
maximum of six hours of research credit is counted toward meeting degree 
requirements for the thesis option; a maximum of three hours of research 
credit is counted for the problem report option. The student's plan of study is 
formulated jointly with his/her advisory committee based upon the interests 
and educational goals of the student. Students not completing a thesis or 
problem report will be required to include three hours of methods courses in 
their programs of study. Programs of study must comply with the rules and 
regulations as outlined in the general requirements for graduate work in the 
College of Engineering. 

Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.) 

The M.S.E. program administered by the College of Engineering is 
generally intended for students who desire to do graduate work in areas other 
than their baccalaureate major. Students desiring to pursue such a program in 
the department must meet similar general requirements as for the M.S.A.E. 
and M.S.M.E. degree programs, although their overall program may be more 
flexible. 

Each plan of study in the M.S.E. program must include six hours of 
advanced mathematics and nine hours from any two academic areas in the 
department. The plan of study may follow thesis or problem report programs 
applicable to the designated master's programs. Students not completing a 
thesis or problem report will be required to include three hours of methods 
courses in their programs of study. Programs of study must comply with the 
rules and regulations as outlined in the general requirements for graduate 
work in the College of Engineering. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

Students intending to pursue a doctoral program in the College of 
Engineering with an emphasis in mechanical or aerospace engineering should 

262 MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 



have earned a B.S. or an M.S. degree in some discipline of engineering. While it 
is possible for a student with a B.S. degree to nroll directly in the Ph.D. 
program, it is advisable to earn a master's degree first. 

As with the department's master's programs, the doctoral courses of 
study are selected to fit the individual interests and objectives of the student, 
with proper attention given to broadening related areas of study. 

The research work for the doctoral dissertation may entail a fundamental 
investigation into a specialized area or a broad and comprehensive program of 
study. Programs of study must comply with the rules and regulations as 
outlined in the general requirements for graduate work in the College of 
Engineering. 

Academic Areas in Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering 

Courses in the department are organized under the four academic areas: 
aerodynamics and fluids engineering; solid mechanics, materials and struc- 
tures; system control and design; and thermal sciences and engineering. In 
addition, students may pursue studies leading to a specialization in bioengi- 
neering. 

Aerodynamics and Fluids Engineering 

Students may pursue an advanced degree with specialization in aerody- 
namics and fluids engineering in either the aerospace engineering or the 
mechanical engineering program. A variety of courses and facilities support 
graduate research in these areas. Laboratories are located in the Engineering 
Sciences Building, with separate wind tunnel and wind turbine facilities in 
adjoining buildings and remote sites. Flow facilities include instrumented 
subsonic and supersonic wind tunnels, shock tubes, and several flow loops 
mainly used for research in gas-solid and density stratified flows. Available 
instrumentation includes eight channels of hot wire/film anemometry, two 
single-component and one three-component laser doppler velocimeter (LDV) 
systems. A hydraulic facility is also available for flow metering studies and 
includes a calibration system and pressure transmitters. The department 
owns well-instrumented V/STOL and Cessna U-206 flight test aircraft 
housed in hangar facilities at Hart Field. A complete library of full-length 
films and film loops developed by the National Committee for Fluid Mechanics 
Films is available for student use. A significant portion of the current activity 
involves numerical solutions to flow problems and is supported by a 
computing facility dedicated to graduate research. 

Although the faculty background and interests are broad, recent research 
has been concentrated on problems in multiphase and density-stratified 
flows, low-speed aerodynamics, shock phenomena in two-phase systems, 
boundary layer control and high-speed aerodynamics. These research areas 
include topics such as fluidized bed combustion, aerosol sampling, flow 
metering, flow distribution systems, numerical solutions to gas-solid flows, 
and fluid-particle turbulence interactions, including deposition on solid 
surfaces. The low-speed aerodynamics work is related to the design of 
vertical axis wind turbines and STOL airfoils. The research in high-speed 
aerodynamics deals with viscous-inviscid interactions in transonic, super- 
sonic, and hypersonic flow. 

The faculty has a wide range of experience and expertise in aerodynamics 
and fluids engineering. Their professional service activities include flight 
instruction and ham radio operation, service on local A. I. A. A. and A.S.M.E. 

MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 263 



section programs, and service at the national level in organizing and chairing 
technical meetings and symposia. 

Solid Mechanics, Materials and Structures 

Students wishing to pursue graduate studies in the academic area of solid 
mechanics, materials, and structures (SMMS) may do so within the department 
under the M.S. E., M.S.A.E., M.S.M.E., or the Ph.D. program. This area 
encompasses the theoretical, numerical, and experimental study of solid 
bodies, from concentration on local behavior of deformable bodies to the 
global response of structural elements or the motion of rigid bodies. Hence, 
SMMS students may explore the mechanical behavior of materials in the 
neighborhood of micro-scale defects such as cracks or investigate the 
behavior of large-scale bodies such as aerospace structures. 

The SMMS faculty carries out basic and applied research related to 
problems in engineering using state-of-the-art computational and experimental 
techniques. The areas of research include aeroelasticity, fracture mechanics, 
nonlinear dynamics and vibrations, composite materials, biomechanics, 
computational methods such as finite-element and boundary-element, and 
experimental techniques including optical methods. Furthermore, in coopera- 
tion with the Department of Civil Engineering, SMMS students may pursue 
studies related to civil engineering. Access to a large array of research 
facilities enables students and faculty to pursue their interests. These 
facilities include laboratories (materials, structures, vibrations, photome- 
chanics, biomechanics, fracture mechanics, and computer aided engineering), 
computers (IBM and VAX mainframes, work stations, personal computers, 
supercomputers), and shop facilties. 

Regardless of the chosen specialty, the SMMS student is required to take 
six hours of courses from a core group consisting of M.A.E. 311, M.A. E. 320, 
and C.E. 462. This requirement may be waived for students who can 
demonstrate, based on their transcripts, that they possess equivalent knowl- 
edge. These courses, combined with the entire plan of study which includes 
research credits, prepares the SMMS student to apply mechanics to modern 
engineering challenges. 

System Control and Design 

The system control and design academic area offers instructional and 
research opportunities for qualified students who are personally challenged 
to attain the expertise required to design or control the behavior of a system in 
a dynamic environment. Instructional offerings furnish students with a 
foundation for developing prototype systems and for improving the perfor- 
mance of existing systems. These offerings provide such emphasis as 
elastodynamic analysis, computerized design, and active control in automated 
machines. 

The research endeavors of its faculty reflect a close association with 
current industrial-type situations. These endeavors have achieved improve- 
ments for such applications as lung system modeling, acid control in streams 
or rivers, railroad yard retarder design, noise control in industrial nozzles, 
coal feeder system design, engine acoustic impedance modeling, and the 
control of energy systems in buildings. 

The system control and design faculty has active relations with other 
engineering colleagues, having interests in process control, microprocessor 
applications, and computer-aided manufacturing. The expertise of the faculty 

264 MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 



includes the successful completion of programs for governmental agencies 
(NASA, U.S. Forest Service, West Virginia Department of Natural Resources, 
Department of Energy, Department of Health and Human Services), and 
industrial firms. One of the faculty is a member of the Examining Board for 
Professional Engineers in West Virginia. 

Recent activity in the department has centered on programs in robotics 
and artificial intelligence. A Rhino robot system has been acquired for 
teaching and research. A computer aided design (CAD) laboratory has been 
developed along with appropriate course work and research activity. 

Thermal Sciences and Engineering 

The thermal sciences and engineering academic area encompasses the 
fields of thermodynamics, combustion, heat transfer, and power and energy 
systems. The faculty has a substantial amount of service in industries 
involving fossil and nuclear power generation, propulsion, and combustion 
problems. Graduate course offerings cover a wide range of topics in this area 
with applications both to aerospace and mechanical engineering problems. 
Recent research efforts include topics such as the analysis of fluidized bed 
combustion, energy analysis of buildings, oscillating jet combustion, alterna- 
tive fuels testing, internal combustion engine performance and emissions, 
heat transfer, numerical analysis of thermal systems, deposition on turbine 
blades, and reactor design. 

Research facilities include a high-altitude simulation chamber for ablation 
and wear studies; a fluidized bed combustion experimental system; a thermal 
analyzer; an electrically-heated, natural convection water facility; schlieren 
systems for flows with varying density; a 48-channel recording thermocouple 
data-acquisition system; a water reservoir for thermal stratification studies; 
and high-temperature thermocouple calibration equipment. 

Bioengineering Program 

The M. A. E. department, in conjunction with other departments in both 
the College of Engineering and the Health Sciences Center, offers a program in 
bioengineering culminating in Master's (M.S.E., M.S. M.E., or M.S.A.E.) and 
Ph.D. degrees. The plan of study for a master's degree requires a minimum of 
30 credit hours. This includes at least six hours of bioengineering or medical 
courses. Students are encouraged to continue toward a Ph.D. by following a 
plan of study tailored specifically to their research interests. Students whose 
B.S. degrees are in disciplines other than engineering may be required to 
complete prerequisite courses. 

Areas of research specialization include respiratory and diseased tissue 
mechanics, orthopedic mechanics, bone growth and fracture, and the applica- 
tion of computer-aided design and microprocessor-based instrumentation to 
rehabilitation. Research facilities include an aerosol inhalation exposure 
system, laser-based holographic and moire interferometric equipment, a lung 
acoustic impedance measurement system, and modern orthopedic, rehabilita- 
tion, and computer research laboratories. 

Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering (M.A.E.) 

200. Advanced Mechanics of Materials 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 43 or consent. Advanced 
topics in applied stress analysis: stress concentrations, strain energy, beams, 
thick-walled cylinders, torsional warping, fracture. 3 hr. lee. 



MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 265 



210. Kinematics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 130 and Math. 18 or consent. Geometry of constrained 
motion, kinematics synthesis and design, special linkage. Coupler curves, inflection 
ircle, Euler-Savary equation, cubic of stationary curvature and finite displacement 
techniques. 3 hr. lee. 

215. Experimental Fluid Dynamics 2.3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 115. Continuation of M.A.E. 115 
with increased emphasis on dynamic measurements. Shock tube/tunnel and 
subsonic and supersonic measurements. Experiments include optical techniques, 
heat transfer to models, and viscous flow measurements. Error analysis of test 
data. 2 hr. lee, 3 hr. lab. 

216. Applied Aerodynamics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 116. Chordwise and spanwise airload 
distribution for plain wings, wings with aerodynamic and geometric twist, wings 
with deflected flaps, and wings with ailerons deflected. Section induced drag 
characteristics. 3 hr. lee. 

220. Guided Missile Systems. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 117 and/or Cone: M.A.E. 150. Design 
philosophy according to mission requirements. Preliminary configuration and 
design concepts. Aerodynamic effects on missiles during launch and flight. 
Ballistic missile trajectories. Stability determination by analog simulation. 
Performance determination by digital and analog simulation. Control, guidance, 
and propulsion systems. Operational and reliability considerations. 3 hr. lee. 

226. Mechanics of Composite Materials. 3 hr. PR: Math. 17, M.A.E. 43. Fundamental 
methods for structural analysis of fiber reinforced composites-lamination theory 
and micromechanics. Particularities of composite applications in design and 
manufacturing of structural components-performance tailoring, failure criteria, 
environmental effects, joining and processing. 

236. Systems Analysis of Space Satellites. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing. Introduction to 
engineering principles associated with analysis and design of space satellites. 
Emphasis on the interdisciplinary nature of satellite systems analysis. 3 hr. lee. 

240. Problems in Thermodynamics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 141 or consent. Thermodynamic 
systems with special emphasis on actual processes. Problems presented are 
designed to strengthen the background of the student in the application of the 
fundamental thermodynamic concepts. 3 hr. lee. 

241. Flight Mechanics 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 146. Fundamental concepts of feedback 
control system analysis and design. Automatic flight controls, and human pilot 
plus airframe considered as a closed loop system. Stability augmentation. 3 hr. lee. 

242. Flight Testing. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 146. Applied flight test techniques and instrumen- 
tation, calibration methods, determination of static performance characteristics, 
and introduction to stability and control testing based on flight test of Cessna 
Super Skywagon airplane. Flight test data analysis and report preparation. 1 hr. 
lee, 6 hr. lab. 

243. Bioengineering. 3 hr. PR M.A.E. 43, Phys. 201 or consent. Introduction to human 
anatomy and physiology using an engineering systems approach. Gives the 
engineering student a basic understanding of the human system so that the 
student may include it as an integral part of the design. 3 hr. lee. 

244. Introduction to Gas Dynamics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 144 or consent. Fundamentals of 
gas dynamics, one-dimensional gas dynamics and wave motion, measurement, 
effect of viscosity and conductivity, and concepts from gas kinetics. 3 hr. lee. 

249. Space Mechanics. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18, M.A.E. 42. Flight in and beyond the earth's 
atmosphere by space vehicles. Laws of Kepler and Orbital theory. Energy 
requirements for satellite and interplanetary travel. Exit from and entry into an 
atmosphere. 3 hr. lee. 

266 MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 



254. Applications in Heat Transfer. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 158. Application of basic heat 
transfer theory and digital computation techniques to problems involving heat 
exchangers, power plants, electronic cooling, manufacturing processes, and 
environmental problems. 3 hr. lee. 

262. Internal Combustion Engines. 3hr. PR: M.A.E. 101 or 141. Thermodynamics of the 
internal combustion engine; Otto cycle; Diesel cycle, gas turbine cycle, two- and 
four-cycle engines, fuels, carburetion and fuel injection; combustion; engine 
performance, supercharging. 3 hr. lee. 

264. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 141 or consent. 
Methods and systems of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning of various types 
of buildings; types of controls and their application. 3 hr. lee. 

265. Aeroelasticity. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 160. Vibrating systems of single degree and 
multiple degrees of freedom, flutter theory and modes of vibration, torsional 
divergence, and control reversal. 3 hr. lee. 

270. Microprocessor Applications in Mechanical Engineering. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 181. 
Fundamentals of programming and interfacing a microprocessor. Hands-on, 
hardware oriented. Assembly language and BASIC programming. RAM, EPROM, 
analog to digital and digital to analog converters, stepper motors, encoders, AC 
devices. Interfacing project required. 3 hr. lee. 

275. Computer-Aided Design: Applications. II. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 132 or 161; Coreq.: 
M.A.E. 250. CAD fundamentals. User-computer interface and interactive pro- 
gramming for rational design. Computational tools, finite elements and modeling 
techniques. Interactive graphics, pre-post processor applications. Case studies: 
conceptual-preliminary-detail iterative design and analysis. 

280. Aerospace ProbJems. 1-6 hr. PR: Upper-division and graduate standing. 

282. Engineering Acoustics. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18 or consent. Theory of sound propagation 
and transmission. Important industrial noise sources and sound measurement 
equipment. Noise criteria and control methods. Assessment of noise abatement 
technology. Laboratory studies and case histories. 

284. Applied Feedback Control. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 122 or consent. Application of 
automatic control theory. Transfer functions and block diagrams for linear 
physical systems. Proportional, integral, and derivative controllers. Transient 
and frequency response using Laplace transformation. 3 hr. lee. 

285. Thesis. 2-6 hr. PR: Senior standing and consent. 

286. Design of Robotic Systems. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 113 or consent. Mechanical 
automation design associated with robotic systems, including economic justifica- 
tion and ethics. Geometric choices and controller specifications for programmable 
manipulators. Workstation strategies such as CNC and CIM for computer-based 
flexible manufacturing. 

290. Seminar. 1-6 hr. PR: Junior, senior, or graduate standing, and consent. 

291. Introduction to Research. 1-3 hr. PR: Senior standing and consent. Methods of 
organizing theoretical and experimental research. Formulation of problems, 
project planning, and research proposal preparation. 

292. Research Problems. 2-6 hr. PR: M.A.E. 291 or consent. Performance of the research 
project as proposed in M.A.E. 291. Project results are given in written technical 
reports with conclusions and recommendations. 

294. Special Topics. 1-6 hr. PR: Junior, senior, or graduate standing, and consent. 

299. Special Problems. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. 

MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 267 



300. Seminar. Credit. Attendance required of all aerospace graduate students at 
scheduled seminars. 

301. Advanced Engineering Acoustics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 282 or consent. Study of 
complex sound generation and the propagation, transmission, reflection, and 
absorption of airborne and structure-borne sound. Coupling of sound and 
vibration in structures. Acoustical behavior and characteristics of materials, 
aeroacoustics, and acoustics of combustion systems. 

305. Analytical Methods in Engineering 1. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Index notation for 
determinants, matrices, and quadratic forms; linear vector spaces, linear operators 
including differential operators; calculus of variations, eigenvalue problems, and 
boundary value problems. 

306. Analytical Methods in Engineering 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 305 or at least two 
semesters of advanced calculus. Intended for advanced graduate students 
interested in modern analysis for engineering applications. 

307. Nonlinear Analysis in Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Special topics in nonlinear 
analysis of various types of engineering systems. Various numerical, approximate, 
and analytical techniques chosen to suit the needs and interests of advanced 
graduate students. 

310. Advanced Mechanics of Materials 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 320 or consent. Mechanics of 
composite materials: anisotropic stress-strain relations and property characteri- 
zation, lamina behavior, general laminate analysis, environmental effects. 3 hr. 
lee. 

311. Advanced Mechanics of Materials. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Shear flow and shear center; 
curved beams; unsymmetric bending, energy methods in structural analysis; 
theories of failure; instability of structures; beams on elastic foundation. 

312. Inelastic Behavior of Engineering Materials. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 41, 42, 43, and 
consent. Characterization and modeling of typical engineering materials, elastic, 
viscoelastic, and plastic materials, design considerations. 

315. Fluid Flow Measurements. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 117 or consent. Principles and 
measurements of static and dynamic pressures and temperatures, velocity, and 
Mach number and forces. Optical techniques and photography. Design of 
experiments. Review of selected papers from the literature. 2 hr. lee, 3 hr. lab. 

316. Energy Methods in Applied Mechanics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Variational principles 
of mechanics and applications to engineering problems; principles of virtual dis- 
placements, minimum potential energy, and complementary energy. Castigliano's 
theorem. Hamilton's principle. Applications to theory of plates, shells, and 
stability. 3 hr. lee. 

318. Continuum Mechanics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 41, 42, 43. Basic laws of physical behavior 
of continuous media. Analysis of stress; equations of motion and boundary 
conditions; kinematic analysis; rates of strain, dilation and rotation; bulk time, 
rates of change; constitutive equations with special attention to elastic bodies and 
ideal fluids; energy equations and the first law of thermodynamics. 3 hr. lee. 

320. Theory of Elasticity 1. 3 hr. Cartesian tensors; equations of classical elasticity, 
energy, minimum, and uniqueness theorems for the first and second boundary 
value problems; St. Venant principle; extension, torsion, and bending problems. 3 
hr. lee. 

322. Advanced Vibrations 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 122 or consent. Dynamic analysis of 
multiple degree of freedom discrete vibrating systems. Lagrangian formulation, 
matrix and numerical methods, impact and mechanical transients. 3 hr. lab. 

325. Experimental Stress Analysis. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 43. Classical photoelasticity, 
brittle lacquers, birefrigent coatings, strain gage techniques and instrumentation, 
as applied to problems involving static stress distributions. 2 hr. lee, 3 hr. lab. 

268 MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 



330. Instrumentation in Engineering 1. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Theory of measuring 
systems, emphasizing measurement of rapidly changing force, pressure, strain, 
temperature, vibration, etc. Available instruments, methods of noise elimination, 
types of recording studied. Of special value to students in experimental research. 
2 hr. lee, 3 hr. lab. 

333. Advanced Machine Design. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 135 or consent. Design for extreme 
environments, material selection, lubrication and wear, dynamic loads on cams, 
gears, and bearings, balancing of multiengines and rotors, electromechanical 
components. 

335. Advanced Kinematics of Mechanisms. 3 hr. PR: MAE 210 or consent. Analytical 
synthesis of mechanisms with up to five accuracy points; Burmester curve theory 
and path curvature theory; force and moment balancing of mechanisms; com- 
puter-aided dynamic analysis of mechanisms and inverse dynamic analysis. 

340. Advanced Thermodynamics I. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 141 or consent. First and second 
laws of thermodynamics with emphasis on the concept of entropy production. 
Application to a variety of nonsteady open systems, thermodynamics of multi- 
phase, multicomponent and reacting systems. Criteria for equilibrium and 
stability. 

342. Advanced Thermodynamics 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 340 or consent. Continuation of 
topics related to reactive systems. Adiabatic flame temperatures, reaction 
kinetics, conservation of species equations, flame propagation and detonation. 

344. Statistical Thermodynamics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 340 or consent. Microscopic 
thermodynamics for Boltzmann, Bose-Einstein, and Fermi-Dirac statistics. 
Schrodinger wave equation, partition functions for gases and solids. 

348. Heat Transfer. 3 hr. PR: Undergraduate course in heat transfer or consent. 
(Primarily for mechanical and aerospace engineering students.} Topics include 
one-, two-, and three-dimensional thermal conduction involved in mechanical 
processes both for constant and time varying temperature fields, free and forced 
convection in heat exchangers, heat power equipment and aircraft and radiative 
heat transfer between surfaces and absorbing media as found in furnaces, 
industrial processes, and aerospace applications. 

350. Conduction Heat Transfer. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 158 or consent. Analytical, numerical, 
graphical, and analog solutions of steady and non-steady heat conduction 
problems in isotropic solids. Thermal properties, extended surfaces, thermal 
stress, interphase conduction with moving interface, socalized and distributed 
sources. 

352. Intermediate Dynamics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 42. Newtonian and Lagrangian mechanics. 
Dynamics of discrete systems and rigid bodies analyzed utilizing Newtonian and 
Lagrangian formulations. 

353. Advanced Dynamics 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 352 or consent. Analytical mechanics. 
Stability of autonomous and nonautonomous systems considered and analytical 
solutions by perturbation techniques introduced. Hamilton-Jacobi equations 
developed. Problems involving spacecraft, gyroscopes, and celestial mechanics 
studied. 

354. Convection Heat Transfer. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 158 or consent. Laminar and turbulent 
flows. Analytical, numerical, and analogical solution. Selected study of current 
research. 

355. Radiation Heat Transfer. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 158 or consent. Classical derivation of 
black body radiation laws; gray body and non-gray analysis; radiant properties of 
materials, radiant transport analysis, specular-diffuse networks, gas radiation, 
thermal radiation measurements; analytical, numerical solutions, and study of 
selected publications. 3 hr. lee. 

MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 269 



360. Fluid Mechanics 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 144 or equiv. Advanced dynamics and 
thermodynamics of fluids. Basic laws of conservation of mass and momentum in 
differential, vector, and integral forms. Application to internal flows, fluid 
machinery, and structures. 

364. Turbomachinery. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 140 or consent. Flow problems encountered in 
design of water, gas, and steam turbines, centrifugal and axial flow pumps and 
compressors, design parameters. 

380. Special Problems. 2-4 hr. Consent of department chairperson. For graduate 
students in the non-research program. The student will select a specialized field 
and follow a course of study in that field under the supervision of a counselor. 

384. Feedback Control in Mechanical Engineering. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 284 or consent. 
Control analysis of hydraulic and pneumatic closed-loop systems including spool 
valves, flapper valves, pumps, servomotors, and electrohydraulic servomecha- 
nisms. Investigation of nonlinearities by phase plane, Liapunov, and describing 
function techniques. Programming for analog and digital computer simulation. 
Introduction to fluidic elements and logic circuits. 

386. Robot Mechanics and Control. 3 hr. Kinematic and dynamic behavior of industrial 
robot manipulators; formulation of equations of motion for link joint space and 
endeffector cartesian space; path planning and trajectory motion control schemes. 

394. Special Topics. 1-6 hr. PR: Senior or graduate standing. 

399. Special Problems. 1-6 hr. PR: Senior or graduate standing. 

411. Dynamics of Viscous Fiuids. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Exact solutions of the Navier- 
Stokes equations. Laminar incompressible and compressible boundary layer 
theory, similarity solutions, and integral methods. 3 hr. lee. 

412. Fundamentals of Turbulent Flow. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 411 or consent. Basic 
experimental data. Application of semi-empirical theories to pipe, jet and 
boundary layer flow. Turbulent heat and mass transfer. Statistical theory of 
turbulence and recent applications. 3 hr. lee. 

413. Dynamics of Real Gases. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 411 or consent. Fundamentals of 
multicomponent, chemically reacting, gas flows; thermodynamic properties of 
equilibrium mixtures from satistical mechanics; chemical kinetics; effects of the 
chemical model on high-temperature, high-speed flow properties. 

414. Theory of Elastic Stability. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Stability of discrete mechanical 
systems, energy theorems, buckling of beams, beam columns, and frames, 
torsional buckling, buckling of plates and shells, special topics. 

419. Topics in Fluids and Solids. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Finite elasticity and viscoelasticity, 
non-Newtonian fluids, nonlinear constitutive theories, special topics in solids and 
fluids. 

421. Theory of Elasticity 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 320 (or M.A.E. 310 and consent]. Complex 
variable methods, stress couples, nonlinear elasticity, numerical methods, potential 
methods, boundary value problems, various special topics. 3 hr. lee. 

422. Advanced Vibrations 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 222, M.A.E. 322 or consent. Dynamic 
analysis of continuous media. Vibration and wave motion analysis of strings, 
elastic bars, beams, plates and fluid columns. Earthquake wave propagation. 

424. Theory of Plates and Shells. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 310. Cylindrical bending, theory of 
rectangular and circular plates, membrane shells of revolution, shells with 
bending stiffness, dynamic response of plates and shells, numerical applications. 

425. Perfect Fluid Theory. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Conformal mapping including Schwarz- 
Christoffel and Joukowski transformations. Inviscid flows over airfoils, spheres, 
cones, wedges, and bodies of revolution. 3 hr. lee. 

270 MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 



428. Photomechanics. 3 hr. PR: M. A.E. 200, 325. Theory of optics, birefringence, stress- 
optic law, polariscope, compensation. Techniques of model making, photography, 
polariscope use. Photoelastic coating methods and use of various reflective 
polariscopes. Data interpretation by various methods including principal stress 
separation by shear difference, oblique incidence and graphical integration. 2 hr. 
rec, 3 hr. lab. 

431. Instrumentation in Engineering 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 330. Continuation of M. A.E. 330 
with emphasis on transducers for static and dynamic measurement and their use 
in practical measuring systems. 3 hr. rec. 

435. Gas Dynamics 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 112 or consent. Nonsteady gas dynamics and 
shock tube theory. Shock tubes in aerospace research. Compressible flow theory 
in subsonic, transonic, and supersonic regimes. 3 hr. lee. 

440. Irreversible Thermodynamics 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 340 or consent. Phenomenological 
treatment of the laws of dynamics and thermodynamics for irreversible processes 
in continuous media. Linear laws for combined irreversible phenomena including 
viscous dissipation, heat conduction, diffusion, chemical reactions and electric 
and magnetic effects, are developed taking into account Curie's principle and the 
Onsager relations. The principle of the minimum rate of creation of entropy is 
extended to establish criteria for the stability of stationary states. Tensor and 
variational methods are employed. 

441. Irreversible Thermodynamics 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 440. Continuation of M.A.E. 440 
with emphasis on selected topics from such applications as thermoelectricity, 
anistropic heat conduction, stability of fluid motion, thermal diffusion and 
separation, viscochemical drag, electrochemical cells, and other coupled phenom- 
ena of physical or biological interests. 

442. Advanced Flight Mechanics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 112, 142. Dynamic stability. 
Obtaining flight characteristics of the vehicle from dynamic flight test techniques 
such as frequency response, and transient response methods. Problems of 
automatic control. 3 hr. lee. 

445. Hydrodynamic Stability Theory. 3 hr. PR: MAE 411 or MAE 425 or consent. 
Response of flowfield to disturbances; classical instability mechanisms; inviscid 
centrifugal instabilities; inviscid parallel shear flow stability; viscous boundary 
layer stability, the Orr-Sommerfield equation; Rayleigh-Benard flow; introduction 
to nonlinear stability theory. 

450. Fundamentals of Combustion. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 112 or consent. Kinetic theory, 
transport phenomena, chemical equilibrium and reaction kinetics. Flames, their 
gross properties, structure and gas dynamics. Solid and liquid propellant 
combustion. 3 hr. lee. 

454. Advanced Dynamics 2. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced study in dynamics. Topics 
covered are either nonlinear vibration, advanced control theory, or stability 
theory depending on student demand. 

461. Fluid Mechanics 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 360 or equiv. Statistical nature of turbulence, 
correlation functions, and Fourier representations. Kinematics of isotropic and 
nonisotropic turbulent flows. Experimental methods. Application to dynamic 
loading on structures, diffusion and dispersion of contaminants by turbulent 
fields and heat and mass transfer. 

491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced study in areas not covered by 
formal courses. 

492. Seminar: Engineering Education. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Studies and group discussion 
of selected problems in engineering education. Emphasis on application of 
educational principles to specific areas in engineering education. 



MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 271 



493. Seminar: Bioengineering. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. An exposition of contemporary 
topics in bioengineering. Topics include advancements in biomedical instrumenta- 
tion, prosthetics, cardiovascular research, biological controls, biomechanics, 
neurophysiological research, human factors and anthropometrics. 

494. Seminar. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Discussion, library readings, and individual study 
reports in the mechanical and aerospace engineering fields. 

497. Research. 1-15 hr. PR: Graduate standing. Ph.D. dissertation research. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not seeking 
course work credit but who wish to meet residence requirements, use University 
facilities, and participate in its academic and cultural programs. 

MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY 

Jean D. Holter, Director of the Program 
2138 Health Sciences North 
Degree Offered: Master of Science 

Graduate Faculty: Members Holter, Iammarino, S. Jagannathan, Mengoli, and 

Rodman. 

The WVU Medical Technology graduate program prepares graduate 
medical technologists for positions either as administrators and teachers in 
medical technology educational programs or as supervisors in special areas of 
the clinical laboratory. The primary objective is to assist in development of 
knowledge in an area in administration, in education, or a special area of 
interest selected by the student which may be a special medical laboratory 
science as the specific area applies to laboratory medicine. Specializations 
include clinical chemistry, clinical microbiology, hematology, and immuno- 
hematology. The specific course work requirements for the master of science 
degree rests with the graduate adviser in the student's specific area of 
interest. 

Graduate Committee: J. Holter, R. Iammarino, S. Jagannathan, H. Mengoli, 
and N. Rodman. 

Admission 

Applicants must have a baccalaureate degree in medical technology from 
an accredited institution or a baccalaureate degree in an allied field and be a 
certified medical technologist with an acceptable certifying agency. 

Information concerning the medical technology undergraduate program 
may be found in the WVU Health Sciences [Medical Center) Catalog. 

The area of concentration in medical technology desired by the student is 
considered in the evaluation of the undergraduate as follows: 

1. Individuals who desire to do special study in clinical chemistry, 
hematology, or immunohematology must have completed eight hours of 
physics, three hours of mathematics, four hours of organic chemistry, and 
four hours of analytical chemistry on the college level. 

2. Individuals who desire to do special study in microbiology must have 
completed four hours of organic chemistry and 16 hours of biological sciences. 

3. A minimum of one year's experience in a clinical laboratory is required 
for admission. 

Students will be required to make up deficiencies in the above, as well as 
other deficiencies deemed necessary by the adviser. 

Applicants must have a minimum undergraduate grade-point average of 
2.5 (based on A=4.0 grade points) for admission. 

272 MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY 



All applicants are required to take the general aptitude part of the 
Graduate Record Examination. Results should be sent to the WVU Medical 
Technology Programs Office, Morgantown, WV 26506. 

Two letters of reference must be on file in the Medical Technology Office. 
One letter should be from the major adviser in the undergraduate college and 
another from the immediate supervisor of the applicant's present position. An 
interview will be requested for all applicants who meet the requirements for 
admission. 

Applicants are selected for admission on the basis of scholastic standing, 
recommendations, and interest in the field of medical technology. The number 
of applicants accepted is necessarily limited by the available facilities; and in 
general, applicants with the most experience are considered first. 

Application Procedure 

A preliminary application is filed in the Medical Technology Programs 
Office. 

Letters of recommendation are sent to the Medical Technology Programs 
Office. 

After approval of the preliminary application, the admission procedure is 
the same as for other WVU graduate programs. 

A personal interview is required before final admission to the program. 
This interview will give the graduate student an opportunity to evaluate the 
program and to determine if the program will offer the educational opportuni- 
ties which the student desires. 

Course of Study 

It is expected that students entering the graduate program in medical 
technology will have a goal in mind and a special field of interest. A minimum 
of 36 semester hours of credit, including a research problem, is required. The 
student selects a major area of concentration from either education, supervi- 
sion, or administration, and a minor area from clinical microbiology, clinical 
chemistry, clinical hematology, or immunohematology. A minimum of 15 
semester hours of course work from the following courses is required 
dependent upon concentration: 
Required: 

Ed. P. 320— Introduction to Research 
Education: 

HI. Ed. 320— Roles and Functions of Health Education 

Ed. A. 320— Personnel Administration 

Ed. A. 351— Administrative Procedures in Adult Education 

Ed. A. 462— Higher Education Law 

Ed. A. 463— Higher Education Finance 

Ed. F. 320 — Philosophic Systems and Education 
Supervision/ Administration: 

Ed. A. 320 — Personnel Administration 

Ed. A. 462— Higher Education Law 

Ed. A. 463— Higher Education Finance 

Pub. A. 341— Administrative Organization and Management 

Pub. A. 344 — Public Personnel Administration 

Pub. A. 345 — Public Administration and Policy Development 
Either Major: 

Ed. P. 231— Sampling Methods 

Ed. P. 321— Design of Experiments 

Ed. P. 343— Statistical Analysis in Education 

MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY 273 



Ed. P. 260— Medical and Microcomputers in Instruction 
Ed. P. 301 — Introductory Behavior Analysis: Human Resources 
Ed. P. 364— Precision Teaching 
Ed. P. 370 — Programmatic Research 
HI. Ed. 308— Community Health: Death Education 
HI. Ed. 309— Community Health: Drug Education 
Recommended: 
Ed. P. 311— Statistical Methods 
Stat. 311— Statistical Methods 
C. Med. 311— Biostatistics 

Other courses to complete 36 semester hours are selected by the student 
and the adviser in the area of concentration selected by the student. Students 
may select courses in departments in schools other than the School of Medicine. 
All students must complete a minimum of 18 semester hours in a science 
related to medical technology including seminar (three hours) and problem 
study (six hours). 

In addition, at the discretion of the student's adviser, other requirements 
in teaching, supervision, and administration may be necessary. 

The adviser formulates with the student a plan of study for the entire 
program. This plan is usually made at the end of the first semester of graduate 
study. A copy of this "plan of study" is signed by the adviser and student and 
sent to the Medical Technology Office to be put in the student's file. 

Examinations 

A final written comprehensive examination in the major and minor 
interest areas is given approximately one month before the oral defense. 

An oral defense of the problem is given about one month after submission 
of the Problem Study in its final form to the student's Graduate Committee. 

Requirements for Degree 

All requirements for the master of science degree, as outlined in this 
catalog, must be fulfilled. These requirements can be fulfilled in three 
semesters of full-time work, but ordinarily at least four semesters are 
required for completion of the degree requirements. 

Degree candidates must have a 3.0 grade-point average and must have 
removed all incomplete grades and deficiencies. 

All students must complete a problem study (see M. Tec. 497). 

Medical Technology (M. Tec.) 

300. Seminar. I, II, S. 1 hr. Seminars include topics in laboratory management and 
education in medical technology, and timely topics. Minimum of 3 semester hours 
to include all three topics is required of all graduate students in the medical 
technology program. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects 
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent 
or through specially scheduled lectures. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Student is required to pursue study on a problem in the 
student's area of concentration. This study is reported in a thesis-style manuscript. 
For this study and report, the student registers in M. Tec. 497. Total number of 
hours earned in M. Tec. 497 is determined by the student's adviser. As many as 9 
semester hours may be taken during one semester or, by arrangement with the 
adviser, credit hours may be taken over several semesters. In the final compilation 
for degree requirements, only 6 semester hours in M. Tec. 497 will be counted 
toward fulfillment of the 36 required semester hours for the degree even though 
the student may have registered for as many as 15 hours in M. Tec. 497. 

274 MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY 



MICROBIOLOGY and IMMUNOLOGY 

Irvin S. Snyder, Chairperson of the Department 

2095-B Health Sciences North 

Degrees Offered: Master of Science, Doctor of Philosophy 

Graduate Faculty: Members Burrell, Charon, Gerencser, Landreth, Lewis, Olenchock, 

Pore, Sheil, Snyder, Sorenson, Thompson, Yelton, and Young. Associate Members 

Hall and Mengoli. 

The Department of Microbiology and Immunology offers programs of 
study leading to the degrees of Master of Science (M.S.) and Doctor of 
Philosophy (Ph.D.) in microbiology and immunology. Students with an 
undergraduate degree can apply to either the M.S. or Ph.D. program. The 
major purpose of graduate education in microbiology and immunology is 
research training. The basic philosophy of the department is that the students 
have a strong foundation in basic concepts of microbiology and immunology, 
and flexibility in choosing advanced course work in their specific areas of 
interest. A major emphasis of the graduate program is extensive laboratory 
research training in microbiology and immunology. Each student will 
complete an original, in-depth research investigation. The overall aim of the 
program is to produce students capable of designing and completing indepen- 
dent research and teaching. 

Admission Requirements 

Applicants to either the Ph.D. or M.S. graduate programs in microbiology 
and immunology must have at least four upper level courses in the biological 
sciences, two semesters of organic chemistry, two semesters of physics, and a 
strong background in mathematics-including calculus-in order to be consid- 
ered for admission. Applicants must submit a departmental application form, 
three letters of recommendation, and Graduate Record Examination (GRE) 
scores — both aptitude and advanced — to the Chairperson, Admissions and 
Scholarship Committee, Department of Microbiology and Immunology. In 
addition, transcripts and an official application for admission must be sent 
directly to the WVU Office of Admissions and Records, P.O. Box 6009, 
Morgantown, WV 26506-6009. Applicants for admission to a degree program 
should have a grade-point average of 3.0 or better, and a score of 600 or above 
on each of the GRE examinations. International students must have a TOEFL 
score of 550. Early application is encouraged. Applicants desiring financial 
aid should complete their application before January 1. All applications must 
be completed by June for fall admission. Applications for admission in the 
spring semester must be completed by November 1. 

Program Requirements 

Master of Science 

Every student must take the following courses or demonstrate proficiency 
by examination in each of the following areas: Microbiology (M.Bio) 301 
Medical Microbiology and Immunology, M.Bio 310 Structure and Activities 
of Microorganisms, M.Bio 491 (a three hour course in immunology) and M.Bio 
391 Advanced Topics (laboratory rotation). Two semesters of biochemistry 
are required. The remainder of the course work is selected by the student and 
the advisory committee from the following courses: M.Bio 327 and any of the 
topics covered in M. Bio 491 Microbiology and Immunology Advanced Study. 
Enrollment in M.Bio 496 Seminar is required each semesterthat the student is 
in residence. All full-time students in the Department of Microbiology and 

MICROBIOLOGY AND IMMUNOLOGY 275 



Immunology are required to participate in teaching at least one semester a 
year. 

The Master of Science program requires 30 hours of course work, of 
which at least 20 hours must be in microbiology and immunology. Six hours 
must be in research (M. Bio. 397 Master's Degree Research and Thesis). A 
thesis representing original research and a final oral examination are 
required. A grade-point average of at least 3.0 must be maintained. In general, 
two years are needed to complete the M.S. program. 

Doctor of Philosophy 

Students with either a bachelor's or master's degree can apply to the Ph. 
D. program. Those with a bachelor's degree must complete the basic course 
requirements expected of an M.S. candidate. The doctoral candidate with an 
M.S. degree from another department must have had course work or 
demonstate knowledge in microbiology, immunology, and biochemistry 
equivalent to that of a master's student in the department. In addition, the 
doctoral student will take additional course work as determined by the 
student's graduate research advisory committee. A minimum of nine hours in 
Microbiology 491 courses or selected advanced courses from other departments 
is required. Where appropriate, course work in related subjects such as 
computer science, cell biology, biochemistry, physical chemistry, and statistics 
will be required. M.Bio 496 Seminar is a required course each semester that 
the student is in residence. The student will maintain a grade point average of 
3.0. The Doctor of Philosophy program requires a dissertation representing 
the results of an original research investigation and the passing of a written 
qualifying and a final oral examination. The qualifying examination is given 
at the end of the first year of study. The final oral examination is given after 
completion of research and an acceptable dissertation. All full-time students 
are required to participate in teaching at least one semester a year. Three 
years are usually needed to complete the Ph.D. program. 

Additional Information 

The Department of Microbiology and Immunology has informal journal 
clubs in immunology and in microbiology. These are designed to help the 
students develop skills in reading, interpreting and discussing current 
research articles. All students are expected to participate in one or more. 

For application materials, a description of faculty research interests, 
guidelines for graduate students in the Department of Microbiology and 
Immunology, write to the Chairperson, Admissions and Scholarship Commit- 
tee, Department of Microbiology and Immunology, WVU Health Sciences 
Center, Morgantown, WV 26506. 

Research and Instruction 

Pathogenic Bacteriology: mode of action of microbial products in patho- 
genicity; identification and classification of anaerobic microorganisms in- 
cluding filamentous bacteria; oral microbiology; ecology of the oral cavity. 

Mycology: pathobiology of medical mycoses; environmental health impli- 
cations of fungal and algal toxicoses. 

Physiology: nutrition and metabolism of a variety of pathogenic micro- 
organisms, growth and protein synthesis in obligate intracellular bacteria. 

Genetics: basic studies in the mechanisms of genetics including transfer 
of genetic information; recombinant DNA studies. 



276 MICROBIOLOGY AND IMMUNOLOGY 



Virology: Cytomegalovirus molecular genetics; glycoproteins in cyto- 
megalovirus infection, papilloma virus diseases; bacteriophage-host interac- 
tions. 

Parasitology: host-parasite relationships between helminth parasites 
and insects and vertebrate hosts; endosymbionts in protozoa. 

Immunology: immunopathology of pulmonary disease; inflammatory 
response to inhaled organisms; developmental aspects of immunity, mecha- 
nisms of T-cell function. 

Otherprograms: detection of environmental pollutants; effect of environ- 
mental agents on host resistance. 

Microbiology (M. Bio.) 

220. Microbiology. (For pharmacy students.) II. 4 hr. PR or Cone: Biochemistry. 
Pathogenic microorganisms, including immunology and antimicrobial agents. 

223. Microbiology. (For medical technology students; other students with consent.) II. 
5 hr. PR or Cone: Organic chemistry. Basic microbiology. Emphasis on immuno- 
logy, pathogenic microorganisms, and clinical laboratory techniques. 

224. Parasitology. (For medical technology students; other students with consent.) II. 4 
hr. Study of animal parasites and disease vectors with emphasis on disease 
manifestations, parasite biology and laboratory diagnosis. 

301. Microbiology. (For medical students and a limited number of graduate students in 
health science basic science departments.) I. 5-7 hr. PR: Organic chemistry, 
biochemistry. Detailed study of pathogenic microorganisms and immunology. 
Emphasis on use of microbiology in solving clinical problems. 

302. Microbiology. (For dental students only.) I. 5 hr. PR: Organic chemistry. Detailed 
study of pathogenic microorganisms. Emphasis on oral flora. 

310. Structure and Activities of Microorganisms. II. 3 hr. PR or Cone: Biochemistry, 
consent. Molecular biology of E. Coli and other selected organisms. 

317. Special Problems in Microbiology. I, II, S. 1-7 hr. per semester. 

A. Special Problems in Basic Immunology. I. 2 hr. PR: Consent. 

B. Special Problems in Microbiology. I, II, S. VR. PR: Consent. 

C. Special Problems in Post Graduate Dental Microbiology. II. 4 hr. PR: Consent. 

327. Parasitology. (For graduate students.) II. 4 hr. PR: Consent. Study of animal 
parasites and disease vectors with emphasis on disease manifestations, parasite 
biology, laboratory diagnosis, and current concepts in parasitological research. 

391. Advanced Topics. 

A. Laboratory Rotation. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent; Forgraduate students in Microbiology 
and Immunology. Assigned study to develop research laboratory techniques. 
(Graded as S or V.} 

B. Immunology. I, II, S. VR. PR: Consent. Independent study in immunology. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Graduate students in 
Microbiology and Immunology. Students may enroll more than once. (Graded S or 
U.) 

490. Teaching Practicum. I and II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in teaching 
of microbiology. (Graded as S or U.j 



MICROBIOLOGY AND IMMUNOLOGY 277 



491. Advanced Study. 

Pathogenic Bacteriology. I. 2 hr. PR: M. Bio. 301, 310 or equiv. Consent. Pathogenic 
bacteriology with an emphasis on the mechanisms of pathogenesis. Topics include 
microbial adherence, toxin production and mechanisms, and normal flora and 
disease. 

Clinical Labratory Bacteriology. II. VR. PR: M. Bio. 301, 310, or equiv. Consent. 
Lectures on the identification of pathogenic microorganisms with an emphasis on 
bacteria. The laboratory includes a rotation through the hospital clinical micro- 
biology laboratory. Limited enrollment. Graded as S or U.) 

Molecular Genetics. I. 3 hr. PR: M. Bio. 310 or equiv. Consent. Molecular aspects of 
mutation, gene transfer mechanisms, genetic mapping, and genetic control using 
bacteria and bacteriophage systems as models. 

Microbial Metabolism. II. 2 hr. PR: M. Bio. 310, or equiv., biochemistry, consent. 
Physiology, metabolism, and regulation of representative microbial groups. 

Microbial Metabolism Laboratory. II. 1 hr. PR: Open to departmental graduate 
students only. Research techniques in metabolic regulation. 

Medical Mycology. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced study of fungi of medical 
importance, including the pathobiology of mycoses and toxicoses. 

Molecular Virology. I. 3 hr. PR: M. Bio. 310, 301, or equiv., consent. Molecular 
biology of viruses that are of importance or important both biological and 
medically. Includes a basic introduction to replication and genetics as well as 
current topics in molecular virology. 

Developmental Immunology. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Examines the development of 
the lymphoid components of the immune system (B and T lymphocytes) and inter 
actions leading to effective immune responses. 

Cellular and Genetic Basis of the Immune Response. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Emphasis 
is on contemporary issues in understanding the genetic and cellular elements that 
impact immune responses. 

Contemporary Topics in Immunobiology II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Detailed coverage 
of major issues of contemporary research in immunobiology. 

Systems Immunology II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. An integrative systems approach to 
immunology stressing how immunologic recognition is translated into biologic 
consequences. Advanced treatment of different aspects ofthe efferent arm of 
immune responses. 

496. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Graduate students in Microbiology and Immunology. 
(Graded as S or U.) 

497. Ph.D. Research or Dissertation. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Students may enroll more than 
once. (Graded as S or U.) 



278 MICROBIOLOGY 



MINERAL AND ENERGY RESOURCES 

Syd S. Peng, Acting Chairperson, Department of Mineral Processing Engineering 

365A COMER Building 

Graduate Faculty: Members Cho and Muter. 

Thomas F. Torries, Acting Chairperson, Department of Mineral Resource Economics 

341A COMER Building 

Graduate Faculty: Members Collins, Colyer, Fletcher, Labys, Miernyk, Norton, Phipps, 

Rose, and Torries. 
Degrees Offered: Master of Science, Doctor of Philosophy 

Mineral and Energy Resources Option 

Mineral Resource Economics Option 

Master of Science 

The Departments of Mineral Resource Economics and of Mineral Pro- 
cessing Engineering in the College of Mineral and Energy Resources offer 
programs leading to the master of science. The Department of Mineral 
Resource Economics offers a Ph.D. in mineral and energy resources. Within 
these programs, several options and areas of emphasis or specialization are 
available. To apply for admission to any one of these programs, an applicant 
must first apply to the Office of Admissions and Records for admission to the 
University as agraduate student. If an applicant's credentials meet University 
criteria for admission, the office forwards the application to the faculty of the 
College of Mineral and Energy Resources for admission to the program. 

A master's degree from the Department of Mineral Resource Economics or 
from the Department of Mineral Processing Engineering requires a total of 24 
credit hours, a thesis for an additional six credit hours, and the maintenance 
of an overall 3.0 average. No course with an earned grade of less than C counts 
toward the 24 credit hour total. At least 60 per cent of course work must be in 
300 or 400 level courses; 40 per cent may be from 200 level courses. 

Faculty in mineral and energy resource economics cooperate with faculty 
in agricultural economics to offer coursework appropriate for students in 
both programs. Faculty also conduct joint research projects. Graduate 
students may select faculty in either program to serve on their thesis 
committee. Such cooperation strengthens the teaching and research of both 
programs and offers graduate students a wider range of selection in course 
work and thesis research issues. The programs also offer opportunities for 
interactions among graduate students and provides for broadened peer 
experience in study groups and in research discussions and seminars. 

When students are accepted for graduate study, they meet with the 
program director so that individual graduate committees may be formed with 
the students' consent and input. A graduate committee, made up of three 
faculty members, meets with its student to plan a graduate program that will 
include the student's particular interest and career plans. After completion of 
a minimum of 12 credit hours of study with a minimum grade-point average of 
3.0, the student may make formal application for candidacy for a degree. 
Faculty approval of this application makes the student eligible for the degree. 

Academic Requirements 

Each student will, with the approval of the student's graduate commit- 
tee — appointed with the consent of the student within the first semester of 
registration — follow a planned program. The program contains a minimum of 
24 hours of course work and six hours of independent and original study in the 



MINERAL AND ENERGY RESOURCES 279 



minerals field leading to a master's thesis. At least 60 percent (18 hours) of the 
course credits must be from 300-level or 400-level courses while the 
remainder can be made up of 200-level courses. 

Approval for candidacy for a graduate degree by faculty action is 
required to establish eligibility for a degree. A graduate student may request 
approval by formal application after completing a minimum of 12 semester 
hours of graduate courses with a grade-point average of at least 3.0 (B), based 
on all graduate courses in residence for which final grades have been 
recorded. 

No credits are acceptable toward an advanced degree which are reported 
with a grade lower than C. To qualify for an advanced degree, a graduate 
student must have a grade-point average of at least 3.0 based on all courses 
completed in residence for graduate credit. Each candidate for a degree must 
select a major subject and submit a thesis showing independent, original 
study in the minerals field. 

Doctor of Philosophy 

The primary objective of the Ph.D. program offered by the Department of 
Mineral Resource Economics is to educate men and women so that they are 
fully capable of meeting the demands of the highest levels of their professions. 
The mineral resource economics concentration leads to a Ph.D. in mineral and 
energy resources. 

The Ph.D. program in mineral and energy resources accepts applicants 
with either baccalaureate or masters degrees in engineering, earth sciences, or 
physical sciences. Students completing the program are qualified for careers 
with research institutes, industry, governmental agencies concerned with 
mineral and energy resource use, technical management of mining, petroleum, 
and natural gas firms, and for leadership roles in the field of mineral 
economics. 

Mineral and Energy Resources (M.E.R.) 

for the Mineral Resource Economics Option 

245/345. Energy Economics. I, II. 3 hr. Analysis of the energy sector and its relationship 
to the rest of the economy. Emphasis on current policy issues: OPEC, energy 
security, deregulation, hard vs. soft paths, impediments to coal use. (May not be 
taken for both undergraduate and graduate credit.) 

260/360. Resource Appraisai and Exploration Decisions. I. 3 hr. Appraisal techniques 
for mineral resources including deposit, project, and regional evaluation. Explora- 
tion decisions and Bayesian analysis. (May not be taken for both undergraduate 
and graduate credit.) 

303. Economic Analysis of Mineral Markets. I. 3 hr. Microeconomic theory applied to 
mineral demand, supply, prices, trade, and industrial organization. Forecasting 
techniques incorporating risk and uncertainty developed to analyze mineral 
markets. 

307. Mineral Policy Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: M.E.R. 360 or 365. Economics of mineral 
resources and public policy decisions; problems and effects of regulation and 
taxation; forms of government taxation and participation; mineral rents. 

309. Quantitative Methods in Mineral Economics. I. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 101 or Econ. 125. 
Probability and statistical techniques for mineral economics. The development 
and application of computer programs; mineral market models, time-series 
forecasting techniques, input-output analysis, geostatistical methods, project 
analysis. 2 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab. 

280 MINERAL AND ENERGY RESOURCES 



331. Minerals Technology Assessment. II. 3 hr. Methods of studying the effects of 
modifications in technology on the production or utilization of minerals, and the 
effects on mineral demand, supply, substitution, and markets. 

341. Economics of the Metal Industries. II. 3 hr. Supply, demand, structure, production, 
technology, costs, prices, and problems of the metals industry. 

342. Economics of Industrial Mineral Industries. I. 3 hr. Supply, demand, structure, 
technology, costs, prices, and problems of the industrial mineral industries. 

365. Mineral Finance. II. 3 hr. Methods, risks, and problems of financing mineral 
projects. Large foreign-project financing, concerns of host governments, multina- 
tional mining concerns, and financial institutions. 

394. Special Topics in Mineral Economics. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Selected economic 
problems in petroleum and natural gas engineering and the mineral industries. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research 
activities leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent 
scholarly project. 

403. Theory of Resource Economics. II. 3 hr. Allocation and distribution of natural 
resources in static and dynamic contexts. Welfare economics, cost-benefit 
analysis, and optimal control approaches. Applications to resource valuation, 
exhaustion, taxation, and regulation in theory and practice. 

435. Resources and Development Planning. I, II. 3 hr. Role of natural resources in the 
economic development of the U.S. and lesser developed countries. Input-output 
and programming models and their linkage to econometric and computable 
general equilibrium models. 

438. Models of Mineral Commodity Markets. II. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 325, 326. Applies 
advanced econometric methods to specification, estimation and simulation of 
dynamic models of domestic and international fuel and non-fuel mineral markets 
and industries. Programming and forecasting techniques. 

447. Oil and Gas Industry Economics. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of the various 
stages of the oil and gas industries. Combines geology, engineering, and economic 
theory to evaluate industry structure and performance. 

448. Economics of the Coal Industry. I, II. 3 hr. Supply, demand, structure, production, 
technology costs, prices and problems of the coal industry. Includes environmental, 
productivity, and transportation issues. 

453. Resources in Trade and Development. I. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 211, 212; Econ. 250 
recommended. Causes and consequences of international mineral trade and 
investment. Commodity market structures, trade expansion, stabilization, and 
host government-foreign investor relations. Impact of resource production, 
processing and exports on macroeconomic development. 

457. Energy and Regional Development. I, II. 3 hr. Role of energy resources in regional 
development. Role of energy in the West Virginia economy and various regions of 
the U.S. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects 
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent 
or through specially scheduled lectures. 

495. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1-4 hr. PR: Consent. 

497. Graduate Research. I, II. 1-4 hr. PR: Consent. 



MINERAL AND ENERGY RESOURCES 281 



M.E.R. for Mineral Processing Engineering 

310. Advanced Hydrometahurgy. I. 3 hr. PR: M.P.E. 221 or consent. Advanced concepts 
of hydrometallurgy. Recent technology of leaching, concentration, recovery of 
metal and mineral values, various mechanisms of leaching of minerals. Techniques 
such as continuous ion exchange, thermal precipitation, and current electrolytic 
technology. 

317. Advanced Coal Preparation. II. 3 hr. PR: M.P.E. 217 or consent. The origin and 
distribution of mineral matter in coal including specific gravity distributions. 
Fine grinding and beneficiation by flotation technology. Coke blending, solid 
waste disposal, and advanced plant design. 

318. Advanced Mineral Processing. II. 3 hr. PR: M.P.E. 219, 220, or consent. Advanced 
surface phenomena techniques including rigorous treatment of electrokinetic 
measurements and applications. Advanced concepts of collector adsorption on 
minerals and flotation response. 

320. Modeling of Mineral Extraction Processes. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Theory of particle 
size distribution functions and population balance models, size reduction kinetics 
and interphase transfer kinetics and application to the separation of dissimilar 
solids by physical and chemical methods. 

324. Advanced Special Topics. I and II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Special advanced problems 
in mineral process engineering including choices among topics related to coal 
preparation, conversion, and process metallurgy. 

Mineral Processing Engineering (M.P.E.) 

217. Coal Preparation. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 16, Chem. 16. Formation of coal, rank 
classification of coal, coal petrography, principles of preparing and beneficiating 
coal for market with laboratory devoted to sampling, screen analysis, float and 
sink separation, and use of various types of coal cleaning equipment. 2 hr. lee, 3 
hr. lab. 

218. Mineral Processing. II. 4 hr. PR: Math. 17 or consent. Application of particle 
characterization, particle behavior in fluids, industrial sizing, size reduction and 
fluid-solid separations are discussed. Introduction to froth flotation, and magnetic 
and electrostatic separation for the concentration of minerals is described. 3 hr. 
lee, 1 hr. lab. 

219. Surface and Interfaces. I. 3 hr. PR: M.P.E. 218. Surface tension phenomena, surface 
thermodynamics, electrical double layer, polarized and nonpolarized electrodes, 
insoluble monolayers, adsorption phenomena, colloidal foams, and emulsion 
consideration as applied to mineral surfaces. 

220. Mineral Flotation. II. 4 hr. PR or Cone: M.P.E. 219. The application of surface 
phenomena for the beneficiation of minerals, including naturally hydrophobic, 
insoluble oxides, and semi-soluble and soluble minerals. Activation and depression 
of sulfide minerals. Engineering and design of flotation circuits. 3 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab. 

221. Hydrometallurgy. II. 4 hr. PR: Chem. 141, 142; Cone: M.A.E. 101. Electrochemical 
aspects and rates of solid-liquid reactions as applied to leaching, concentration, 
and recovery of minerals. Solvent extraction, ion exchange, electrowinning, and 
other current industrial processes. 

222. Rate Phenomena in Extractive Metallurgy. I. 3 hr. PR or Cone: M.A.E. 114; Chem. 
141, 142. Momentum, heat and mass transfer phenomena theory; concepts of 
boundary layers and techniques of process analysis as applied to metallurgical 
reaction systems. 3 hr. lee 



282 MINERAL AND ENERGY RESOURCES 



224. Mineral Problems. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Senior or graduate standing or consent. Special 
problems considered in minerals beneficiation and processing, including choices 
among design and research projects in coal preparation, coal conversion, hydro- 
and extractive metallurgy or mineral economies. 

250. Control Systems in Mineral Processing. II. 3 hr. PR: Junior standing in mineral 
processing engineering. Instrumentation and automatic control systems used in 
today's mineral processing technology are studied including data recording and 
control and process optimization. 3 hr. lee. 

270. Design and Synthesis. I, II. 3 hr. PR: M.P.E. 217, 219; M. 281. The logic and 
quantitative tools required for synthesizing mineral processing systems are used 
on a realistic problem by students working independently. Specific attention is 
given to economic and environmental implications. 3 hr. lee. 

Minerals (M.) 

281. Applied Mineral Computer Methods. I, II. 3 hr. PR: M. 2; Math. 16. Problem solving 
in mineral processing, mineral resources, mining, and petroleum and natural gas 
engineering. Emphasis on applications using various computing technologies. 

MINING ENGINEERING 

Syd S. Peng, Chairperson of the Department 

365A COMER Building 

Degrees Offered: Master of Science in Engineering of Mines 

Doctor of Philosophy 
Graduate Faculty: Members Adler, Grayson, Khair, Peng, Rollins, and Wang. 

Master of Science in Engineering in Mines (M.S.E.M.) 

A student desiring to take courses for graduate credit at the master's level 
in the College of Mineral and Energy Resources must first apply for admission 
and state the major field. 

An applicant with a baccalaureate degree in mining engineering will be 
admitted on the same basis as graduates of WVU. Lacking these qualifica- 
tions, the applicant must first fulfill the requirements of the Department of 
Mining Engineering. 

Academic Standards. Each student will, with the approval of the 
student's graduate committee — appointed with the consent of the student 
within the first semester of registration — follow a planned program. The 
program contains a minimum of 24 hours of course work and 6 hours of 
independent and original study in mining engineering leading to a master's 
thesis. At least 60 percent of the course credits must be from 300-level or 
400-level courses while the remainder can be made up of 200-level courses. 

Approval for candidacy for a graduate degree by faculty action is 
required to establish eligibility for a degree. A graduate student may request 
approval by formal application after completing a minimum of 12 semester 
hours of graduate courses with a grade-point average of at least 3.0 (B), based 
on all graduate courses in residence for which final grades have been 
recorded. 

No credits are acceptable toward an advanced degree which are reported 
with a grade lower than C. To qualify for an advanced degree, a graduate 
student must have a grade-point average of at least 3.0, based on all courses 
completed in residence for graduate credit. Each candidate for a degree must 
select a major subject and submit a thesis showing independent, 
original study in mining engineering. 

MINING ENGINEERING 283 



Doctor of Philosophy in Mineral Engineering (Ph.D.) 

The principal objective of the Ph.D. program in mineral engineering is the 
education and training of men and women so that they are capable of attaining 
the highest levels of the mineral engineering profession and performing the 
professional roles of developing or improving the efficient extraction of solid 
mineral resources. The two areas of specialization are mine systems, and rock 
mechanics and ground control. 

All applicants must have earned a M.S. degree in mining engineering with 
a grade-point average (GPA) of 3.5 or higher. The Graduate Record Examina- 
tion (GRE) is required, and the applicant must have scored in the 75th 
percentile or higher for quantitative and analytical analysis. For all foreign 
applicants whose native language is not English, a TOEFL test score of 550 or 
better is required. In addition, each applicant is required to submit at least 
three letters of recommendation, one of which must be from the applicant's 
previous thesis adviser or an academic equivalent. All letters of recommenda- 
tion should evaluate the student's potential for performing independent 
doctoral-level research. 

The Ph.D. program in mineral engineering consists of 54 hours of course 
work and 36 hours of independent research beyond a bachelor's degree in 
mining engineering. The successful completion of a qualifying examination 
and an approved dissertation are also required. 

Engineering of Mines (E.M.) 

204. Mining Methods for Vein Deposits. I. 3 hr. PR: M. 2, Geol. 151, Math. 16. Methods 
and systems of mining other than flat seams. Emphasis on selection of methods in 
relation to cohesive strength of ore bodies and their enclosing wall rocks. Mining 
of anthracite included. 

206. Mining Exploration. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 103, 104, Phys. 12, Math. 16. All phases of 
mineral exploration. Geological and geophysical methods, exploration drilling, 
data reduction and interpretation, preliminary feasibility studies and evaluation. 

207. Longwail Mining. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 104. Elements of longwall mining including 
panel layout and design considerations, strata mechanics, powered supports, coal 
cutting by shearer or plow, conveyor transportation, and face move. 

211. Ground Control. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 103, 104, M.A.E. 41, 43, Geol. 151. Rock 
properties and behavior, in situ stress field, mine layout and geological effects; 
designs of entry and pillar and roof bolting, convergence of openings and surface 
subsidence engineering. 

214. Rock Mechanics. I. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 43 or consent. Elastic and plastic properties of 
rock, Mohr's criteria of failure, elastic theory, stress distributions around 
underground openings, open pit and underground stability, rock testing techniques. 

224. Special Subjects for Mining Engineering. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Senior or graduate 
standing or consent. Special problems in mining engineering, including choices 
among operations research, mine systems analysis, coal and mineral preparation, 
and coal science and technology. 

225. Mine Equipment Design. II. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 101, E.M. 104, Chem. 16, M.A.E. 43; junior 
standing. Analysis of equipment requirements for mining functions; design of 
specific equipment components and operations; and optimization of equipment 
and layout choices. Course will focus on equipment. 

226. Mine Machinery. I. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 101, E.M. 103, 104, M.A.E. 43, junior standing. 
Design and control of fixed and integrated excavating and bulk handling 
machinery. Analysis includes components, operation, production, and possible 
failure modes. Studied are conveyors, hoists, hydraulic transport, boring machines, 
longwalls, bucket wheel excavators, and dredges. 

284 MINING ENGINEERING 



231. Mine Ventilation. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 104, M.A.E. 114. Engineering principles, 
purposes, methods, and equipment applied to the ventilation of mines. 

242. Mine Health and Safety. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 103, 104. The nature of the federal and 
state laws pertaining to coal mine health and safety; emphasis will be placed on 
achieving compliance through effective mine planning, design, and mine health 
and safety management. 

243. Industrial Safety Engineering. I. 3 hr. PR: Junior standing or consent. Problems of 
industrial safety and accident prevention, laws pertaining to industrial safety and 
health, compensation plans and laws, and industrial property protection. 

251. Explosive Engineering. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 16, Phys. 12, M.A.E. 42. Theory and 
application of explosives, composition, properties and characteristics of explo- 
sives, blasting design fundamentals, legal and safety considerations. 

271. Mine Management. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 103, 104. Economic, governmental, social, and 
cost and labor aspects of mining as related to the management of a mining 
enterprise. 

276. Mine and Mineral Reserve Valuation. I. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing. Methods used to 
value mineral properties; factors affecting value of mineral properties. 

286. Fire Control Engineering. II. 3-4 hr. PR: Senior standing. Aspects involved in the 
control from fire, explosion, and other related hazards. Protective considerations 
in building design and construction. Fire and explosive protection organization 
including fire detection and control. Lectures (3) and/or 3 hr. lab. 

287. Applied Geophysics for Mining Engineers. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 103, 104, Phys. 12, 
Geol. 151 or consent. Origin of the universe and the planets, heat and age of the 
earth. Application of the science of geophysics in the location and analysis of 
earthquakes and in prospecting for oil and minerals. 

291. Mine Plant Design. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 225, 226; senior standing. Layout, analysis, 
and detailing of the major mine installations and support facilities. Locations 
include: the surface plant, shaft and slope stations, section centers. Systems dealt 
with are bulk handling, power, ventilation, supplies, water, and personnel. 

295. Mine Systems Design. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 103, 104, consent. Each student selects and 
designs a mine subsystem under specified conditions, including extraction, 
transportation, ventilation, roof control, exploration, plant design, surface facili- 
ties, etc. 2 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab. 

296. Mine Design. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 206, 211, 225, 226, 231, 242, 271. Comprehensive 
design problem involving underground mining developments or surface plant or 
both, as elected by the student in consultation with instructor. Preparation of a 
complete report on the problem required, including drawings, specifications, and 
cost analysis. 

311. Advanced Ground Control— Coal Mines. I, II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 211 or consent. 
Ground and strata control for underground and surface coal mining, including 
slope stability and subsidence. 

312. Surface Subsidence Engineering. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 211. Elements of surface 
subsidence engineering due to underground mining: theories of surface subsidence, 
characteristics and prediction of surface movements, and effects of surface 
movements. 

316. Advanced Rock Mechanics. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 214 or consent. Testing techniques 
and interpretation, strength and fracture, classification, anisotropy, friction, 
jointed rock, fluid pressure, fragmentation, and excavation. 

MINING ENGINEERING 285 



320. Mobile Excavating and Materials Handling. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and 
consent. Mobile mining equipment will be systematically analyzed as to functional, 
production, failure, and operational aspects. Included will be routine and 
innovative methods, and surface and underground applications, such as the 
hydraulic shovel and impactors. 

321. Integrated Excavating and Materials Handling. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and 
consent. Integrated mining equipment will be systematically analyzed as to 
functional, production, failure, and operational aspects. Included will be routine 
and innovative methods, and surface and underground applications, such as the 
longwalls and monorails. 

331. Mine Ventilation Network Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 231, M. 281, or consent. 
Theory and computational techniques for mine ventilation network problems 
with emphasis on computer-aided analysis of complex mine ventilation systems. 

332. Advanced Mine Ventilation. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 231. Advanced topics in mine 
atmospheric control including control of methane, dust, humidity, and heat. Also 
covers leakage characteristics, fan selection, analysis of ventilation networks, 
and planning of mine ventilation system. 

342. Advanced Mine Health and Safety. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 242 or graduate standing. 
Special emphasis will be placed on mine rescue, mine disaster prevention and 
organization, and mine property and equipment loss prevention. 

351. Explosive Engineering Design. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 251 or consent. Rock drilling, total 
blast systems simulation, experimental studies in blast design, rock fracturing, 
chemical thermodynamics, kinetics, and reaction rates. 

365. Deterministic Methods for Mineral Engineers. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or 
consent. Analysis and solution of mineral engineering problems which require use 
of deterministic models. Application of deterministic methods to mineral transpor- 
tation, mineral resource allocation and extraction problems, and mine planning 
and equipment utilization problems. 

366. Stochastic Methods for Mineral Engineers. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or 
consent. Application of stochastic methods to mineral engineering problems in 
equipment selection, renewal processes, mine ventilation, mine production, and 
mineral extraction. 

391. Advanced Mine Design. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Graduate standing or consent. Advanced 
detail design and layout of coal mine plant, particularly incorporating new ideas 
of machines and mining methods. 

394. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or consent. Selected field of 
study in mining engineering. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research 
activities leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent 
scholarly project. 

398. Advanced Mine Design 1. 1-6 hr. PR: E.M. 296. Detailed design of the components 
of coal mine subsystems including ground control, excavation and handling, and 
life support subsystems. 1-6 hr. lee. 

399. Advanced Mine Design 2. 1-6 hr. PR: E.M. 296. Examination of the broad aspects of 
mine design for non-coal deposits. Consideration of deposits of various shapes, 
materials and qualities including country rock. Comparison of principles estab- 
lished for coal mine design. 1-6 hr. lee. 

411. Theories of Surface Subsidence. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 312. Theories of surface subsidence 
due to underground coal mining including empirical, profile function, theoretical 
and physical modeling methods, and time factors. 3 hr. lee. 

286 MINING ENGINEERING 



416. Theory of Rock Failure. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 214 or consent. Friction, elasticity, 
strength of rock, mechanism of brittle failure, factors affecting failure process, 
theories of failure, fracture propagation in rock, fracture toughness of rock and 
coal, fluid pressure, size, stress gradient, and time-dependent effects. 

417. Laboratory and Field Instrumentation. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 211, 214, or consent. 
Principles and applications of strain gages and photoelasticity for stress analysis 
in rock/coal; displacement/velocity gages and accelerometer for ground motion; 
holography and acoustic emission for non-destructive tests. 

418. Rock Mechanics in Mine Design. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 211, 214, or consent. Design 
process in mining engineering; design approaches for excavations in rock; input 
parameters for design; empirical, observational, and analytical methods of design; 
integrated designs. 1 hr. lee, 2 hr. lab. 

451. Theory of High Explosives. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 351 or consent. The application of 
chemical thermodynamics and the hydrodynamic theory to determine properties 
of high explosives, chemical equilibria and calculation of detonation and explo- 
sion-state variables. 

491. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced graduate standing, consent. 
Selected field of study in mining engineering. 

492. Directed Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced graduate standing or consent. 
Directed study, reading, and/or research. 

493. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced graduate standing or consent. 
Contemporary topics selected from recent developments in mining engineering. 

494. Special Seminars. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced graduate standing or consent. 
Special seminars for advanced graduate students. 

495. Independent Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced graduate standing or consent. 
Faculty supervised study of topics not available through regular course offerings. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. It is anticipated that each graduate 
student will present at least one seminar to the assembled faculty and graduate 
student body of the student's program. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not 
seeking course work credit but who wish to meet residence requirements, use the 
University's facilities, and participate in its academic and cultural programs. 

Minerals (M.) 

281. Applied Mineral Computer Methods. I, II. 3 hr. PR: M. 2; Math. 16. Problem solving 
in mineral processing, mineral resources, mining, and petroleum and natural gas 
engineering. Emphasis on applications using various computing technologies. 

MUSIC 

Cecil B. Wilson, Chairperson of the Division of Music 
Degrees Offered: Master of Music 

Doctor of Musical Arts 
Doctor of Philosophy 
Graduate Faculty: Members Amstutz, Beall, Brown, Faini, Godes, Haller, Hudson, 
Lefkoff, Miltenberger, Paglialunga, Powell, Skidmore, Taylor, Trythall, Wilcox, and 
Wilkinson. Associate Members Catalfano, Coeyman, Crotty, Kefferstan, Peri, Thieme, 
Weigand, Winkler, and Wilson. 

The Division of Music is an accredited institutional member of the 
National Association of Schools of Music, the only nationally recognized 

MUSIC 287 



accrediting agency for professional music instruction. All programs comply 
with objectives and guidelines as required by this organization. 

Prospective graduate students in music are required to complete the 
appropriate curriculum of undergraduate study in music at WVU, or its 
equivalent at another institution of recognized standing. For acceptance into a 
degree program the applicant must submit the following to the Director of 
Graduate Studies, Division of Music, P.O. Box 6111, Morgantown, WV 
26506-6111. 

1. For the Master of Music degree, a transcript showing an average of at 
least 2.75 on all undergraduate study is required for regular admission; for the 
Ph.D. and D.M.A., a transcript showing an average of at least 3.0 on the 
master's degree or equivalent is expected; 

2. Results of the Graduate Record Examination (not required of perfor- 
mance M.M. applicants); 

3. Three letters of recommendation from individuals qualified to judge 
the applicant's potential success as a graduate student in music; the writers 
should submit the letters directly to the Director of Graduate Studies. 

Applicants in performance and for the recital option in music education 
are also required to demonstrate, by audition or tape recording, a level of 
attainment in the principal performance area which is prerequisite to the 
curriculum sought. The evaluation of performance proficiency is based on 
technical ability, repertoire, and musicianship. A listing of representative 
material for each performance area, graded by proficiency level, is available 
upon request. 

The audition for acceptance, when required, is assessed for general 
admission purposes. The estimated proficiency level must be confirmed by a 
jury examination at the end of the first semester of applied study. Credit in 
performance at the 400 level will count toward degree requirements only 
when the proficiency level prerequisite has been reached. 

Applicants seeking acceptance as composition majors must submit 
representative compositions for evaluation and approval. Evidence of previous 
teaching or professional experience is desirable in the consideration of 
doctoral applicants. Admission to the Ph.D. program with a specialization in 
music education is contingent upon the receipt of evidence that the applicant 
has been a successful music teacher for at least three years. Such evidence 
may be in the form of a letter of recommendation from a school official. 

Applicants accepted for degree study must take tests in theory and music 
history, and audition on piano. In addition, voice students take diagnostic 
tests in vocal literature, diction, and pedagogy. The results of these might 
indicate the need for remedial study, which must be completed before 
admission to candidacy. Applicants for the areas of theory and composition 
will be tested more specifically in counterpoint (both sixteenth and eighteenth 
century), form, instrumentation, and orchestration. Applicants seeking accep- 
tance as composition majors also must submit representative compositions 
for evaluation and approval. 

Applicants whose averages and test scores do not meet the qualifications 
outlined above may be considered for acceptance as provisional or non-degree 
students. If, upon completion of up to 12 semester hours of graduate study 
they have achieved a B (3.0) average, and after any previous undergraduate 
deficiencies or other conditions have been removed, such students may be 
accepted as degree students. 

If a tape recording is submitted, it must be of a high quality and have 
clearly indicated the student's name, titles and composers of works performed, 

288 MUSIC 



and recording date. Even the best recordings leave much to be desired, and a 
personal audition is encouraged. The auditions are normally administered at 
individually scheduled appointments, occurring at least six weeks before 
registration. 

Master of Music (M.M.) 

Candidates must establish an overall grade-point average of 3.0 within a 
maximum of 30 or 36 hours, depending upon the requirements of the chosen 
curriculum. Applicants are considered for candidacy upon the completion of 
12 semester hours of graduate study. No student is admitted to candidacy 
before removal of all undergraduate deficiencies. A 3.0 average in all students 
work must be maintained. 

Candidates for the Master of Music degree may major in one of five fields: 
music education, performance, theory, composition, or history of music. The 
latter four require a minimum of 30 hours. 

Students majoring in music education are allowed one of four options, to 
be determined in consultation with the program consultant: (1) thesis option; 
(2) recital option (if the candidate demonstrates proficiency level 8 in the 
major performance area within the first 12 hours of enrollment); (3) thirty-six 
course-work hour option; and (4) certification option (intended for persons 
possessing a bachelor's degree with a major in music other than music 
education), leading to eligibility for certification for teaching grades K-12 in 
the public schools of West Virginia. For the first three options the following 
requirements apply: 

1. Thirty graduate hours for thesis and recital options, 36 graduate hours 
otherwise, with an average of 3.0. 

2. For the thesis or 36-hour options, four hours of performance, either 
Music 400 (principal performance area) or Music 310 (secondary performance 
area.) 

3. Demonstration of the ability to integrate music history, music theory, 
and music education by passing comprehensive written and oral examinations. 

4. Successful completion of a four credit thesis or two credit recital for 
the thesis and recital options, respectively. 

For the certification option, a combination of graduate and undergraduate 
courses are selected to satisfy certification requirements. The 36 graduate 
hours are include 12 hours of graduate music education courses and electives 
chosen to provide a good background for teaching. Undergraduate courses 
may be necessary to make up deficiencies, especially in areas of performance 
or conducting. A descriptive leaflet is available upon request. 

History of Music Hr. 

(PR: Level 7 in the major performance area; Level 4 on piano; four semesters of 
a foreign language; seven hours upper-division theory; 15 undergraduate 
hours in music history.) 

Music 430— Introduction to Music Bibliography 3 

Music History, chosen from Music 221-225 6 

Music 491— Special Topics 6 

Theory Elective 3 

Music 497— Research (Thesis) 4 

Electives (at least four credits in music)* 8 

Total 30 

*Students in the Thesis option must include Music 446. 

MUSIC 289 



Music Education Hr. 

(PR: Level 2 in piano.) 

Music Education courses at the 300 or 400 level* 12 

One Theory course and one Music History course 5-6 

For Thesis Option: 

Music 400 or 310— Performance 4 

Music.497— Research (Thesis) 4 

Electives 4-5 

For Recital Option: 

Music 398— Master's Recital 2 

Music 400— Applied Music (major performance area) 6 

Electives 4-5 

For 36-hour Option 

Music 400 or 310— Applied Music 4 

Electives 14-15 

Totals 30 or 36 

*Students in the Thesis option must include Music 446. 

Performance Hr. 

(PR: Level 10 in the major performance area, and Level 3 in piano; for 
organists, Level 5 in piano; for pianists in the piano pedagogy option, Level 9 
in piano and one year of piano pedagogy/group or equivalent teaching 
experience; for voice majors, the same language requirements as those for the 
B.M. degree.) 

Music 400 — Performance (major area) 8 

Music 430 — Introduction to Music Bibliography 3 

For Performance Option: 

Music 398— Master's Recital 4 

One of the following 2 

Music 398 — Master's Recital 

Music 431— Research Problems for Performers 

One theory course and one music history course 5-6 

Music electives 

(no more than four hours in major performance area) 7-8 

Total 30 

For Piano Pedagogy Option: 

Music 398— Master's Recital 2 

Music 312 — Studies in Keyboard Performance and Pedagogy 6 

Music 392 — Guided Studies (Teacher Internship) 4 

One theory course or one music history course 2-3 

Music electives 4-5 

Total 30 



290 MUSIC 



Composition Hr. 

(PR: Level 8 in the major performance area; Level 4 in piano; evaluation of 
previously completed compositions at a graduate major level.) 

Music 430— Introduction to Music Bibliography 3 

Music 460— Composition 6 

Music 468— Compositional Techniques in Contemporary Music 3 

Music 475— Pedagogy of Theory 3 

Music 483— Theory Topics 3 

Music 497— Research (Thesis) 4 

Music electives (must include one of the following: 

Music 460— Electronic Music Composition 

Music 467— Analytical Techniques 

Music 470— Transcription and Arranging) 8 

Total 30 

Theory Hr. 

(PR: Level 8 in the major performances area; Level 4 in piano.) 

Music 430— Introduction to Music Bibliography 3 

Graduate music history 3 

Music 467— Analytical Techniques 3 

Music 468— Compositional Techniques in Contemporary Music 3 

Music 475— Pedagogy of Theory 3 

Music 483— Theory Topics 3 

Music 497— Research (Thesis) 4 

Electives (at least four credits in music) 8 

Total 30 

*To be eligible for graduation, the candidate must demonstrate attainment of Level 8 on the 
major instrument. 

A representative public recital is required of candidates majoring in 
Applied Music. Composition majors must submit as a thesis a composition in 
a large form. 

All candidates for the Master of Music degree are required to participate 
for credit for two semesters (or summer sessions) in a performing group 
which meets at least two clock hours per week and which is selected with the 
adviser's approval. 

A general comprehensive oral examination must be passed by all 
candidates or the Master of Music degree. Unsuccessful candidates may 
repeat this examination after a three-month period. The results of the second 
oral examination will normally be considered final. The examining committee 
will decide immediately after an unsuccessful second attempt whether a 
petition for a third attempt will be granted. 

Time Limitation. Students must complete their programs in eight calendar 
years. Failure to do so will result in the loss of credit for courses taken at the 
outset of the program. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

Admission. Acceptance to the doctoral program is competitive; admissions 
decisions are made each year in the spring for entrance the following fall. 
Applicants to the program leading to the degree of Doctor of Philosophy must 
present necessary credentials for evaluation of previous training and experi- 

MUSIC 291 



ence to the Division of Music. These include a score on the Graduate Record 
Examination General Aptitude Test, submitted through the WVU Office of 
Admissions and Records, and evidence that the applicant has completed a 
minimum of 28 hours in liberal arts studies. Before admission to the program 
the Division may, at its discretion, require the applicant to take entrance tests 
in various fields of music, or it may require the applicant to be present for a 
personal interview. Under normal circumstances, the applicant must have 
maintained a minimum average grade of B in courses taken for the master's 
degree. However, if sufficient professional experience should warrant, the 
Division may waive the requirement of a B average or may grant an applicant 
conditional admittance subject to the satisfactory completion of certain 
specified courses or the attainment of a specified grade-point average within a 
semester's work. 

Curriculum. The exact amount and nature of course work undertaken will 
be determined by the adviser with the approval of the student's doctoral 
committee in light of previous preparation and field of specialization. The 
student is expected to take Music 494— Doctoral Seminar— as required by the 
field of specialization. Whatever preparatory courses (languages, statistics, 
bibliography, etc.) are needed must necessarily be taken early in the course of 
study. A paradigm of recommended courses and other requirements in each 
field of specialization is available upon request. 

Candidacy. Upon completion of the requirements of the Division of Music 
and the general WVU graduate studies requirements, the student will be 
recommended for admission to candidacy for the degree. These requirements 
are (in order or occurrence): 

1. Demonstrate the ability to read German and French. For applicants in 
music education, either French or German 305-306, or Statistics 311-312 must 
be completed satisfactorily. Upon recommendation of the adviser, a different 
romance language may be substituted for French. 

2. Pass written qualifying examinations satisfactorily to show: 

a. Broad knowledge in theory and music history and literature. 

b. Appropriate knowledge in the minor field. 

c. Knowledge in depth in the field of specialization. 

3. Pass satisfactorily a comprehensive oral qualifying examination. 

4. Present and have accepted an outline and prospectus of the dissertation. 
The requirement for doctoral seminars must be completed before the presenta- 
tion of the prospectus. 

Graduate students who have met these requirements and who have 
maintained an average of B in courses completed shall be admitted to 
candidacy. The qualifying examinations, administered after satisfaction of 
the language requirement, shall be considered as one integral examination 
consisting of the written and oral parts. If the first attempt is unsuccessful, 
the student is allowed to try the entire examination a second time. The second 
attempt is considered final. However, the applicant's committee may elect to 
discourage a second attempt if the first does not indicate probable success 
upon repetition. 

Residence. Completion of the requirements for this degree normally 
requires at least three years of full-time graduate work. A minimum of two 
semesters must be spent in residence in full-time graduate study at WVU 
beyond the master's degree or its equivalent. 

Dissertation. The candidate must submit a dissertation produced at WVU 
under the direction of a major professor which demonstrates a high order of 



292 MUSIC 



independent scholarship, originality, and competence in research, and which 
makes an original contribution to the field of specialization. 

Final Examination. When the dissertation is approved and all other 
requirements have been fulfilled, the candidate's doctoral committee will 
administer the final oral examination. However, a final examination will not 
be given in the same semester as the qualifying examination. At the option of 
the student's committee, a final written examination may also be required. 
The final examination(s) shall be concerned with the dissertation, its 
contribution to knowledge, its relation to other fields, and the candidate's 
grasp of the field of specialization. 

Time Limitation. Following admission to candidacy, doctoral students 
are allowed five years to complete all remaining degree requirements. An 
extension of time may be permitted only upon repetition of the qualifying 
examination and completion of any other requirements specified by the 
student's doctoral committee. 

Doctor of Musical Arts 

Program Objectives. The primary objective is professional competence at 
the highest level. Historical and theoretical knowledge sufficient to support 
individualized interpretations for performers and original creative work for 
composers is also expected. Writing and speaking skills needed to communicate 
clearly and effectively are required. To assist the student in achieving these 
objectives, the course of study includes requirements in performance or 
composition, academic course work, and research. 

Admission. Acceptance into doctoral programs is competitive; admissions 
decisions are made each year in the spring for entrance the following fall. 
Applicants to the program leading to the degree of Doctor of Musical Arts 
(D.M.A.) must present necessary credentials for evaluation of previous 
training and experience. These include a score on the Graduate Record 
Examination General Aptitude Test, submitted through the WVU Office of 
Admissions and Records, and evidence that the applicant has a minimum of 
28 hours in liberal arts studies. Before admission to the program the Division 
may, at its discretion, require the applicant to take entrance tests in various 
fields of music, or it may require the applicant to be present for a personal 
interview. Under normal circumstances the applicant must have maintained a 
minimum average grade of B in courses taken for the master's degree. 
However, if sufficient professional experience should warrant, the Division 
may waive the requirement of a B average or may grant an applicant 
conditional admittance subject to the satisfactory completion of certain 
specified courses or the attainment of a specified grade-point average within a 
semester's work. 

Applicants in performance should submit copies of programs of recent 
major recitals. The applicant must be approved for the program by an 
audition committee by giving evidence of superior performance, artistic 
maturity, and extensive repertoire as specified under Graduate Applied 
Music Requirements. The audition committee will include the Chair of the 
Division of Music, the Director of Graduate Studies, the graduate program 
adviser in applied music, and the major professors involved with the area of 
specialization. 

Applicants in composition must be approved for the program after 
evaluation by the composition faculty of scores of the applicant's works, 
accompanied by recordings if possible. These should show successful 



MUSIC 293 



handling of various forms and media and indicate the applicant's capacity to 
attain professional standing in the field. 

Fields of Specialization. The degree of Doctor of Musical Arts may be 
taken in performance and literature (with specialization in piano, voice, or 
organ), or in composition. 

Curriculum. The exact amount and nature of course work undertaken will 
be determined by the student's adviser with the approval of the doctoral 
committee in light of previous preparation and field of specialization. A 
paradigm detailing recommended courses and other requirements is available 
upon request. 

Candidacy. Upon completion of the requirements of the Division of Music 
and the general WVU graduate studies requirements, the student will be 
recommended for admission to candidacy for the degree. These requirements 
are (in order of occurrence): 

1. Demonstrate reading proficiency in a foreign language by successful 
completion either of an examination administered by the Division of Music or 
the equivalent of the fourth semester of recent language study with a 
minimum grade of B. Ordinarily, the language is French or German; exceptions 
may be allowed depending upon the needs of the student. 

2. Pass written qualifying examinations satisfactorily to show: 

a. Broad knowledge in Theory and Music History and Literature. 

b. Knowledge in depth of the literature of the field of specialization or 
of the craft of composition. 

3. Pass satisfactorily a comprehensive oral qualifying examination. 

4. Present a public recital (performance specialization only). 
Graduate students who have met these requirements and who have 

maintained an average of B in courses completed shall be admitted to 
candidacy. The qualifying examinations, administered after satisfaction of 
the language requirement, shall be considered one integral examination 
consisting of written and oral parts. If the first attempt is unsuccessful, the 
student is allowed to try the entire examination a second time. The second 
attempt is considered final. However, the applicant's committee may elect to 
discourage a second attempt if the first does not indicate probable success 
upon repetition. 

Residence. Completion of the requirements for this degree normally 
requires at least three years of full-time graduate work. A minimum of two 
semesters must be spent in residence in full-time graduate study at WVU 
beyond the master's degree or its equivalent. 

Performance requirements (for performance majors) include private 
lessons, master classes in applied repertory, and public performance of at 
least two solo recitals and other types of presentations appropriate for the 
preparation of an artist-teacher, such as chamber music programs, concerto 
performances, major roles in opera or oratorio, or major accompaniments. 
Credit for each public performance is established in advance by the student's 
committee. 

Composition requirements (for composition majors) include private 
lessons and the creation of a composition portfolio. Credit for each composition 
is established by the student's committee prior to its completion; it will be 
subsequently evaluated on a pass-fail basis. Ten credits of the composition 
portfolio must be completed before admission to candidacy. Work on the 
major project must commence only after admission to candidacy. 

294 MUSIC 



Academic course requirements include courses in music history and 
theory, and, for performers, an appropriate course in the literature of the 
major performance area. 

Research requirements are intended to develop theoretical and historical 
investigative techniques sufficient to enable the performer to develop valid 
individualized interpretations and to assist the composer in developing an 
original style. These requirements consist of the course "Introduction to 
Music Bibliography" (Music 430), demonstration of reading proficiency in 
either French or German, for composers a doctoral seminar, and for all 
students a research project culminating in an extended written study related 
to the student's area, although not necessarily constituting original research. 
This project will be supervised by a Regular Graduate Faculty member who is 
a member of the student's doctoral committee in consultation with the entire 
doctoral committee. 

Final Examination [performance specialization only}. The final examina- 
tion will consist of a major solo recital (which will be regarded as the 
equivalent of the Ph.D. dissertation defense]. Immediately following the 
public performance the candidate's committee will meet to evaluate the 
performance as evidence of mature musicianship and finished technique. 
Such a final examination recital will not be given in the same semester as the 
qualifying examination. 

Final Examination (composition specialization only]. When all composi- 
tions and the major project are approved and all other requirements have been 
fulfilled, the candidate's doctoral committee will administer the final oral 
examination. At the option of the committee, a written examination may also 
be required. The final examination(s) shall be concerned with the compositions, 
the major project, and the candidate's grasp of the field of specialization and 
its relation to other fields. The final examination will not be given in the same 
semester as the qualifying examination. 

Time Limitation. Following admission to candidacy, doctoral students 
are allowed five years to complete all remaining degree requirements. An 
extension of time may be permitted only upon repetition of the qualifying 
examination and completion of any other requirements specified by the 
student's doctoral committee. 

MUSIC (Music) 

200. Directed Music Studies. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. [May be repeated for credit.) PR: Consent. 
Studies in applied music, music education, music theory, music history, composi- 
tion; includes directed or independent study in special topics. 

210. Piano Class Methods and Materials. I. 3 hr. Methods, materials, and pedagogical 
techniques, including presentation of keyboard theory as used in functional piano. 
Practical organization of piano classes. Laboratory: observation of experienced 
class teacher and student teaching. (Not offered in 1990-91.) 

212. History of Keyboard Pedagogy and Technic. II. 3 hr. Study of keyboard development 
and technique, including pedagogical works of the eighteenth through twentieth 
centuries and application to specific teaching problems. Laboratory: student 
teaching and observation, emphasizing analysis and solution of technical problems. 
(Not offered in 1990-91.) 

213. Introduction to jazz Improvisation. I. 2 hr. PR: Music 63, 64, and Proficiency Level 
4. Development of improvisatory skills in the jazz idiom using melodic, harmonic, 
and rhythmic motives and patterns, and the application of knowledge of tonal 
centers, chord progressions, and functions. 

MUSIC 295 



214. Advanced Jazz Improvisation. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 213 or consent. Continuation of 
Music 213. Analysis of chord progressions with emphasis on chord substitutions, 
turnbacks, and scales. Development of jazz repertoire through performance. 

218. Repertoire. I. 0-2 hr. 

219. Repertoire. II. 0-2 hr. 

221. Music Before 1500. I, II, or S. 3 hr. PR: Music 33-34 or consent. A study of sacred 
and secular monophony, Notre Dame organa, thirteenth-century motet and 
conductus, and fourteenth- and fifteenth-century polyphony in France and Italy. 

222. Music of the Sixteenth and Seventeenth Centuries. I, II, or S. 3 hr. PR: Music 33-34 
or consent. A study of styles and forms from the High Renaissance to the Late 
Baroque. 

223. Music of the Eighteenth Century. I, II, or S. 3 hr. PR: Music 33-34 or consent. A 
study of styles and forms of the Late Baroque through the Classic period. 

224. Music of the Nineteenth Century. I, II, or S. 3 hr. PR: Music 33-34 or consent. A 
study of styles, forms, and theoretical concepts illustrative of nineteenth-century 
music. 

225. Music of the Twentieth Century. I, II, or S. 3 hr. PR: Music 33-34 or consent. A 
study of stylistic trends during the twentieth century, (spring 1990.) 

226. History of Jazz. I. 3 hr. History and repertory of jazz from its Afro-American 
origins to c.1975 with attention to its major exponents (including Joplin, 
Armstrong, B. Smith, Morton, Ellington, Gillespie, Parker, Davis, Coltrane) and 
its evolving style. 

230. Music of Africa. S. 3 hr. Traditional music of selected areas of Africa south of the 
Sahara with particular reference to East Africa. The diverse musical cultures with 
emphasis on historical background, instruments, ensembles, forms, and styles, 
and music in its social context. 

239. Collegium Musicum. I, II. 1-2 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Consent. Study 
of outstanding musical works not in the standard repertory. Performance of vocal 
and instrumental music, investigation of performance practices, preparation of 
editions, and direction of rehearsals under supervision. 

240. Clinic Chorus, Band, and Orchestra. I, II. 1 hr. Experience in selection, preparation, 
and class performance of music appropriate for high school choral and instrumental 
groups. [Not offered in 1990-91.) 

243. Music Workshops. I, II, S. 1-2 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) 

245. Marching Band Techniques. I. 2 hr. PR: One semester college marching band 
experience or consent. Study and practical application of techniques of planning 
and preparation of school marching band performances. 

248. Music Arranging for Public School Groups. I, II. 2 hr. PR: Music 66. Practical 
experience in techniques of making simple, workable arrangements of music for 
public school choral and instrumental performance groups. 

260. Upper-Division Composition. I, II. 2 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Two 
semesters Music 160, or consent based on scores submitted. Creative writing with 
emphasis on practical composition for performance. 

263. Counterpoint. I. 2 hr. PR: Music 68 or consent. Sixteenth-century counterpoint. 

264. Counterpoint. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 68 or consent. Eighteenth-century counterpoint. 

265. Analysis of Musical Form. II. 3 hr. PR: Music 68 or consent. Detailed study of the 
structure of music. 

296 MUSIC 



267. Electronic Music. I. 2 hr. PR: Music 68 and consent. Technology of producing 
electronic music. Methods of producing electronic compositions, relationship 
between sound signal and sound perceived, ear training, analysis of examples 
from electronic music literature, and composition of electronic music. 

268. Electronic Music. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 267. Continuation of Music 267. 

273. Arranging for Small Jazz Ensemble. I. 2 hr. PR: Music 171, and Music 173 or 
consent. Scoring, voicing, and arranging in various jazz styles, with emphasis on 
small ensembles comprising three to nine players. 

274. Arranging for Large Jazz Ensemble. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 273 or consent. Continuation 
of Music 273, with emphasis on arranging for big band and studio jazz ensemble. 

310. Secondary Applied Music. I, II, S. 1 hr. [May be repeated for credit.) Group or 
individual instruction in performance on a minor instrument (or voice), with 
emphasis on methods and materials for school music teachers. 

312. Keyboard Performance and Pedagogy. I, II. 1-3 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) 
(Offered in one credit modules of which students may take one or more each 
semester.) Pedagogy, repertoire, interpretation, and other topics which will 
enhance preparation of private piano teachers. 

335. Survey of VocaJ Music. I. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. upper-division music history. Survey of 
masses, oratorios, cantatas and operas from late Renaissance to the twentieth 
century. Solo repertoire will not be included. 

336. Instrumental Music. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. upper-division music history or consent. 
Survey and analysis of orchestral and band music from the late Baroque to the 
present. 

341. Music in the Elementary School. II. 3 hr. PR: Music 30,41, 42,orequiv. (Not open to 
music majors.) Development of skills, procedures, techniques, and materials used 
by the general classroom teacher of music in grades K-8. (Not offered in 1990-91.) 

342. Teaching of Music Appreciation. I. 3 hr. PR: Music 30, 41, 42, or equiv. (Not open to 
music majors.) Review of information, materials, sources, and techniques involved 
in teaching appreciation of music in public schools. (Not offered in 1990-91.) 

343. Contemporary Techniques in Classroom Music. 3 hr. PR: Music 152 or consent. 
Principles and practice of contemporary techniques in elementary and junior high 
school classroom music, including those of Orff and Kodaly. 

344. Appalachian Music for the Classroom. I. 3 hr. Lecture, demonstration, and 
practical experience in performance of Appalachian vocal and instrumental music 
and in use of this music in public school classrooms. May involve field trips and 
construction of inexpensive instruments. 

346. Musicmaking in Middleschool/Junior High. II. 3 hr. PR: Music 151, 152, equiv., or 
consent. Identification and sequencing of appropriate concepts and skills for 
general music class students. Selection and use of materials including pepular 
music. Emphasis on student music-making activities. Evaluation procedures 
included. 

347. Music in Early Childhood. S. 3 hr. PR: Music 151, 152, or equiv., or concent. 
Musical experiences for children three through ten years. Emphasis on intellectual, 
physical and social/emotional needs and characteristics of children. Materials 
and activities for developing music concepts, skills, and positive response. 
(Offered summer 1990.) 

392. Guided Studies in Music. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. 
Intensive individualized reading reported in group discussions. Course may be 
repeated as many times as necessary, in as many areas as needed; different 
sections (i.e. areas) may be pursued simultaneously. 

MUSIC 297 



398. Master's Recital. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Music 299 (Senior Recital) or consent. Master's 
Applied students shall be permitted to give a recital only after they pass a 
qualifying audition before a designated faculty committee in a semester previous 
to that in which the recital is to be given. 

400. Applied Music. I, II. 1-4 hr. (Open to qualified students in any field in Applied 
Music. May be repeated.) Normally offered for two credits (one 30-minute lesson 
per week) or four credits (one 60-minute) lesson per week. A student must 
demonstrate ability of grade-level 4 on an instrument to receive credit in Music 
400 on that instrument. 

409. Master Class in Applied Repertoire. I, II. 2 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: 
Consent. Designed to give coverage through performance of the literature of a 
specific D.M.A. Applied Music field. 

410. Conducting. S. 3 hr. PR: Music 53 or equiv. Instrumental and choral conducting. 
Major works are prepared and conducted through the use of recordings and music 
organizations. 

419. Opera Theatre. I, II. 0-4 hr. PR: Music 19 or consent. Continuation of Music 19. 
Performance of major roles and advanced production techniques. Qualified 
students will undertake production-direction projects under supervision. 

423. Keyboard Literature. S. 3 hr.PR: Music 218, 219. Intensive study of the literature 
for keyboard instruments and the history of the literature. (Not offered in 
1990-91.) 

424. Song Literature. S. 1-3 hr. PR: Music 218, 219. Intensive study of the Art Song and 
the Lied and the history of their development. [Not offered in 1990-91.) 

428. Aesthetics of Music. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 33, 34 or consent. Examination of the main 
classical and contemporary aesthetic theories and their applications to music. 
[Not offered in 1990-91.) 

429. Survey of Sacred Music. S. 4 hr. PR: Music 33, 34 or equiv. Study of music suitable 
to the liturgical year, including the historical background of the Jewish, Catholic, 
and Protestant liturgies. (Not offered in 1990-91.) 

430. Introduction to Musical Bibliography. I. 3 hr. PR: Music 33 and 34 or equiv. Survey 
of musical bibliography with appropriate research assignments. 

431. Research Problems for Performers. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 430. Discussion of problems 
of music literature, performance practice, history, and instruments; preparation 
of a research paper under individual supervision. [Not offered in 1990-91.) 

438. History of Notation. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. Detailed study in transcribing 
the musical manuscripts of the Middle Ages. (Not offered in 1990-91.) 

439. History of Notation. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. Continuation of Music 438 
covering the Renaissance period. (Not offered in 1990-91.) 

440. Choral Techniques. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 151, 152 or equiv. Advanced techniques and 
procedures involved in development of choral ensembles. 

442. Instrumental Techniques. I. 2 hr. PR: Music 151, 152, or equiv. Advanced 
techniques and procedures involved in individual performance and instruction 
through lecture-demonstrations by applied music faculty. 

443. Historical Foundations of Music Education. 3 hr. Examination of the history of 
music education from classical antiquity to the present, with particular emphasis 
on practices in the United States; examination and application of historical 
research methods. 3 hr. lee. 

444. Music Education. II. 3 hr. PR: Music 151, 152 or equiv. Survey and critical study of 
the total music education program. 

298 MUSIC 



445. Supervision of Music. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 151 or 152, or equiv. Concepts, 
responsibilities, duties and techniques that the supervisor needs to effectively 
exercise leadership in developing, coordinating, and refining the complete Music 
Education program in public schools from kindergarten through twelfth grade. 
(Not offered in 1990-91.) 

446. Introduction to Research in Music Education. I. 3 hr. PR: Music 151, 152, or equiv. 
Methods and measures necessary for conduct and understanding of research in 
music education. 

448. Psychology of Music Learning. 3 hr. Application of learning theory to music 
learning; nature of musical talent; music talent testing. 

449. Psychology of Music. II. 3 hr. Introductory study of musical acoustics and 
psychology of perception of music. 

460. Composition. I, II. 3 hr. (May be repeated for credit.} PR: Consent. Primarily for 
candidates for graduate degrees in theory or composition. 

467. Analytical Techniques. I, II, or S. 3 hr. Analytical techniques and their application 
to scholarship and performance, with emphasis on pre-twentieth century styles. 
(Offered fall 1991-92.) 

468. Compositional Techniques in Contemporary Music. I, II, or S. 3 hr. Analysis of 
twentieth-century music with emphasis upon music composed since 1950. 
(Offered in spring 1991-92.) 

470. Transcription and Arranging. I, II. 2 hr. (May be repeated once for credit.) PR: 
Music 172 or equiv. Major projects in scoring for orchestra, band, or wind 
ensemble. 

475. Pedagogy of Theory. I, II, or S. 3 hr. PR: Music 68 or consent. Consideration of 
various approaches to the teaching of theory. (Offered fall 1990-91, summer 1991.) 

483. Theory Topics. I, II, or S. 3 hr. (May be repeated for max. 8 hr. credit.) Various 
types of analytical and theoretical problems and approaches to their solutions. 
(Offered spring 1991-92, summer 1992.) 

491. Special Topics. I, II. 1-3 hr. 

492. Advanced Studies in Music. I, II. 1-8 hr. PR: Consent, which in some cases may be 
contingent upon doctoral foreign language examination or a course in statistics. 
Intensive individualized reading reported in group discussions. Course may be 
repeated as many times as necessary, in as many areas as needed; several different 
sections (i.e., areas) may be pursued simultaneously. 

494. Doctoral Seminar. I, II. 2 hr. (May be repeated for max. 8 hr. credit.) PR: Consent. 
Intensive individual investigation and preparation of research papers. Presented 
by the combined doctoral staff in music. 

496. Lecture Recital. I, II. 2 hr. PR: Music 430. 

497. Research. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Music 430 or consent. 

498. Doctoral Recital. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Music 398 (Master's Recital) or consent. 
Master's Applied students shall be permitted to give a recital only after they pass 
a qualifying audition before a committee of at least three specialists in the area in a 
semester previous to that in which the recital is to be given. Acceptance of the 
recital will be at the discretion of the student's doctoral committee. 



MUSIC 299 



NURSING 

Lorita D. Jenab, Dean of School of Nursing 
1144 Health Sciences Center 
Degree Offered: Master of Science in Nursing 

Graduate Faculty: Members M. Counts, M. J. Smith, and J. Wang. Associate Members P. 
Deiriggi, Jenab, L. Ostrow, T. Schaal, P. Simoni, and J. Stemple 

Master of Science in Nursing 

The School of Nursing offers a program of study leading to the master of 
science in nursing (M.S.N.) degree to prepare the professional nurse for the 
role of nurse clinician in the advanced practice of nursing in primary health 
care. The program, which is administered by the graduate academic unit, is 
offered at the University main campus in Morgantown and at selected 
extension sites. 

The MSN program has as its purpose the preparation of professional 
nurses to: assume advanced roles in the delivery of health care; contribute to 
nursing science; and build a foundation for post-master's study. Upon 
completion of the program, the graduate is expected to: 

1. Practice nursing based on the conceptual model of the health of human 
systems dynamically interacting with the environment. 

2. Synthesize theory, practice, and research in developing the professional 
role of advanced nurse clinician. 

3. Demonstrate accountability for health maintenance and promotion to 
self, the discipline, and society. 

4. Utilize systematic inquiry to guide decision-making related to critical 
issues impacting clients, the profession, and society. 

Designed in an integrative fashion, this non-traditional graduate program 
offers a curriculum model which allows students to enroll on a part-time or 
full-time basis. Throughout the curriculum, students are guided in self- 
development aimed at pursuing excellence in scholarly and professional 
endeavors. Flexibility within the basic curricular structure is offered through 
the individualization of learning experiences, electives, and the opportunity 
to investigate an area of interest in advanced study. 

The individual student study plan is determined in consultation with a 
faculty adviser and is based upon the student's background and goals. The 
program can be completed in four semesters of full-time study at the 
Morgantown campus, averaging a load of 9-12 credit hours per semester. 

The program is accredited by the National League for Nursing. 

Admission Requirements 

The applicant must: 

1. Meet the admission requirements of graduate education at West 
Virginia University. 

2. Have completed a baccalaureate program in nursing which is accredited 
by the National League for Nursing (NLN). Applicants with a baccalaureate 
degree from nursing programs without NLN accreditation are required to take 
the NLN Comprehensive Achievement Test for Baccalaureate Nursing Stu- 
dents, Form 3113, and are considered on an individual basis. 

3. Have completed a course in introductory statistics (three credit 
hours). 



300 NURSING 



4. Provide the following: 

a. Statement of philosophy of nursing and professional goals. 

b. Letter of recommendation from each of the following: head of 
undergraduate nursing program, employer, and a colleague. 

c. Evidence of a current professional nursing license in at least one 
state. 

5. Have an interview with a Graduate Academic Unit faculty member. 
Three parameters are used for review of applicants: academic achievement, 

career goals, and recommendations. Once admitted, the student is assigned a 
faculty adviser who guides the student in curricular and academic matters. 
Enrollment in nursing courses is based upon readiness, availability of space 
and other essential resources. 

The application process must be completed by January 1 for summer 
(May) enrollment; March 1 and August 1 for fall and spring enrollment, 
respectively. Class sizes are limited, based on available faculty resources and 
space. 

Application Process 

Applicants need to complete two application forms as indicated and 
return to the appropriate offices to avoid unnecessary delay in the review 
process. 

a. Application for admission to graduate studies — To be returned with a 
$20.00 nonrefundable service fee to: Office of Admissions and Records, 
West Virginia University, P.O. Box 6009, Morgantown, WV 26506-6009. 

b. Application for admission to the master of science in nursing pro- 
gram—To be returned to: Chairperson, Graduate Academic Unit, 
WVU School of Nursing, Morgantown, WV 26506. 

1. Request an official transcript of records from each college or university 
reviously attended. Transcripts and records should be sent directly to the 
WVU Office of Admissions and Records. 

2. Send three recommendation letters directly to the chairperson of the 
School of Nursing graduate academic unit. 

3. Participate in an interview with a faculty member teaching in the 
graduate program. The purpose of the interview is to verify application 
materials, review admission criteria, identify deficiencies and transferable 
credits and, where possible, project a tentative plan of study. 

Degree Requirements 

1. Completion of 42 semester credit hours, including 30 hours (master's 
paper option) to 33 hours (thesis option) in nursing and nine hours of non- 
nursing electives. The required non-nursing electives are restricted to three 
hours in computer utilization and six hours of humanities and/or social 
sciences. Students opting for a master's paper must complete an additional 
three hours of electives by advisement. 

2. Completion of a thesis (six hours) or a master's paper (three hours). 

3. Achievement of an overall academic average of at least B in all work 
attempted in the master's program. The grade C in two nursing courses will 
require a faculty review of the student's program progression. 

4. Removal of all conditions, deficiencies, and incomplete grades. Credit 
hours for courses in which the grade is lower than C will not count toward 
satisfying graduate degree requirements. 



NURSING 301 



Required courses must be taken for letter grades (A, B, C). Electives may 
be opted for satisfactory (S) or unsatisfactory (U) grades — subject to the 
approval of the adviser. 

M.S.N. Curriculum 
Nursing Theory, Practice, and Research [30-33 hours) Hr. 

Nsg. 300— Advanced Nursing: Primary Health Care 1 3 

Nsg. 301— Advanced Nursing: Primary Health Care 2 3 

Nsg. 302— Advanced Nursing: Primary Health Care 3 3 

Nsg. 310— Advanced Nursing Practice 1 3 

Nsg. 311— Advanced Nursing Practice 2 3 

Nsg. 312— Advanced Nursing Practice 3 3 

Nsg. 370 — Theories in Nursing 3 

Nsg. 373 — Research Process and Methods in Nursing 3 

Nsg. 400 — Advanced Nursing Practice 4 3 

Nsg. 497 — Research (master's paper/thesis)* 3-6 

30-33 

*Students electing the master's paper option are required to take only three hours of Nursing 497. 

Electives [9-12 hours) 

Masters paper option: 

Cognates (Non-Nursing) 9 

Electives by Advisement 3 

Thesis option: 
Cognates (Non-Nursing) 9 

TOTAL 42-45 

Sample Progression Plan (Full-time Study) 

Semester I Hr. Semester 11 Hr. Semester III Hr. Semester IV Hr. 

Nsg. 300 3 Nsg. 301 3 Nsg. 302 3 Nsg. 400 3 

Nsg. 310 3 Nsg. 311 3 Nsg. 312 3 Nsg. 497 3 

Nsg. 370 3 Nsg. 373 3 Nsg. 497 3 Elective 3 

Elective 3 Elective 3 

9 12 12 9 

Nursing (Nsg.) 

300. Advanced Nursing: Primary Health Care 1. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR or Cone: Nsg. 370. 
Analysis and synthesis of concepts in nursing and related sciences relevant to the 
development of a conceptual framework for nursing in primary health care. 
(Emphasis on individual system.) 

301. Advanced Nursing: Primary Health Care 2. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Nsg. 310; PR or Cone: 
Nsg. 373. Development of a conceptual model for nursing with emphasis on 
developing strategies to promote client health. (Emphasis on family system.) 

302. Advanced Nursing: Primary Health Care 3. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Nsg. 311. Further 
development and or refinement of a conceptual model for nursing with specific 
emphasis on planned change strategies and how these strategies impact health. 
(Emphasis on community system.) 

310. Advanced Nursing Practice 1. I. 3 hr. Cone: Nsg. 300. Advanced nursing practice 
focusing on applicability of concepts in students' developing conceptual frame- 
work. (Emphasis on individual system.) 

302 NURSING 



311. Advanced Nursing Practice 2. II. 3 hr. Cone: sg. 301. Advanced nursing practice 
focusing on development and application of nursing strategies within the context 
of students' conceptual model. (Emphasis on family system.) 

312. Advanced Nursing Practice 3. I, S. 3 hr. Cone: Nsg. 302. Advanced nursing 
practice focusing on application and testing of students' conceptual model, 
identification of a health problem area within the practice setting, and preparation 
of a planned change strategy. (Emphasis on community system.] 

370. Theories in Nursing. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing; consent. Introduction to the 
structure and function of extant theories in nursing as a basis for developing a 
conceptual framework for nursing. 

373. Research Process and Methods in Nursing. II. 3 hr. PR: Nsg. 310, 370. Study of the 
research process and methods for incorporation into students' conceptual model, 
practice and research in nursing. 

400. Advanced Nursing Practice 4. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Nsg. 312. Collaborative practice 
focusing on the evaluation and modification of students' conceptual model for 
nursing and implementation of a planned change strategy. (Emphasis on role 
synthesis.) 

491. Advanced Study. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Graduate standing; consent. In-depth study of 
topics related to current issues in primary health care. Study may be independent 
or through specially scheduled seminars. 

497. A. Research. 3 hr. PR: Nsg. 373; PR or Cone: Nsg. 312; consent. Refinement and 
implementation of research proposal to meet requirements for the master's thesis, 
or completion of the master's paper. 

497. B. Research. 1-3 hr. PR: Nsg. 497. Completion of master's thesis. 

OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH 
AND SAFETY ENGINEERING 

Terrence J. Stobbe, Coordinator of the Program 

Warren Myers, Assistant Coordinator 529 Engineering Sciences Building 

Degree Offered: Master of Science 

Graduate Faculty: Members Myers, Plummer and Stobbe. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

This program provides master-level students the opportunity to study 
industrial hygiene and systems safety. This degree is designed for students 
who are interested in pursuing a career in occupational safety and health. 

Students are admitted as regular graduate students for work leading to 
the Master of Science (M.S.) degree, provided they hold a baccalaureate 
degree from an approved institution of higher education in the areas of 
biology, chemistry, engineering, mathematics, or physics, have a minimum 
2.5 undergraduate grade-point average, and satisfy prerequisites in the 
courses for which they register. In order to receive the degree, the student 
must have a minimum 3.0 grade-point average in all course work leading to 
the degree and satisfy all general WVU graduate requirements. 

The following courses are prerequisite or corequisite, depending on the 
applicant's academic and professional experience: statistics (Stat. 311, I.E. 
113 or equivalent); chemistry (Chem. 15 and 16 or equivalent); computer 
programming (C.S. 5 or equivalent); physics (Phys. 11 and 12 or equivalent); 
mathematics (Math. 15 and 16 or equivalent). Pre- and corequisite coursework 
decisions are made on a case-by-case basis by the program admissions 

OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY ENGINEERING 303 



committee; the student is informed about his/her requirements at the time of 
acceptance into the program. 

Admission to candidacy for the M.S. degree is required before obtaining 
the degree. A graduate student may apply for admission to candidacy by 
formal application after completing a minimum of 12 hours of graduate 
courses within the program with a grade-point average of at least 3.0 based on 
all graduate courses taken in residence, for which the student has received a 
grade at the time of application. Admission must be gained before completion 
of 18 hours. 

A minimum of 36 hours is required for the Master of Science degree. 

A writing requirement is an integral part of the master's program. This 
requirement can be satisfied with either a three credit-hour problem report, 
which is based on some research, or a six credit-hour thesis. 

Course credit for all of the above is applicable against the 36-hour 
requirement. 

Program of Study 

FALL 

I.E. 260— Human Factors Engineering* 

I.E. 261— Systems Safety Engineering* 

I.E. 361— Industrial Hygiene Engineering* 

I.E. 480 — Seminar — Fire Protection Engineering* 

C.E. 245 — Properties of Air Pollutants** 

Seminar (required) 

*Required courses for both industrial hygiene and systems safety students. 
**Required course for industrial hygiene students only. 

SPRING 

OHSE 321— Epidemiology: Principles and Practices* 

OHSE 325— Industrial Hygiene Sampling and Analysis* 

I.E. 362— Systems Safety Engineering 2*** 

Pcol. 362— Occupational Toxicology* 

I.E. 364— Industrial Ergonomics* 

Seminar (required) 

SUMMER 

OHSE 328— Noise and Ventilation Control Technology* 

OHSE 326— Safety and Health Measurement and Instrumentation* 

*Required courses for both industrial hygiene and systems safety students. 
**Required course for industrial hygiene students only. 
***Required course for systems safety. 

Eiectives 

Industrial hygiene and systems safety have a minimum of 4 elective hours each. 

Occupational Health and Safety Engineering 

Ch.E. 290, 390, 391. 

Chem. 210. 

C.E. 251, 349, 350, 359, several additional 400-level courses qualify if students possess 

prerequisites. 
E.M. 201, 213, 216, 247. 
I.E. 214, 249, 314, 325, 341, 360, 368. 
Manag. 216. 
M.A.E. 242, 282, 330. 
Phys. 201. 

Psych. 225, 232, 301. 
Saf. S. 301, 334, 418. 
Stat. 312. 

304 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY ENGINEERING 



Occupational Health and Safety Engineering (OHSE) 

320. Foundations of Environmental Health Practice. I, II, S. 4 hr. PR: Consent. Designed 
to enable the environmentalist to recognize and identify environmental stresses 
and the effect of these stresses on man. Topics include occupational health, 
physical stress, safety, and basic and broad principles of toxicology. 

321. Epidemiology: Principles and Practices. I, II, S. 2 hr. PR: Stat. 311 or equiv. 
Principles and methods of epidemiology with emphasis on descriptive and 
analytical epidemiological methods. 

325. Industrial Hygiene Sampling and Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 361 and consent. 
Calibration and use of sampling and analytical equipment used by industrial 
hygienists to evaluate the work environment. Advantages and disadvantages of 
different equipment under various conditions. Biological monitoring as an 
evaluation tool. 

326. Safety and Health Measurement and Instrumentation. S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. 
Practical experience in setting up industrial hygiene field studies, air sampling, 
and analysis. Practical experience with safety equipment and instrumentation 
used in the field and in research. Field trips and case studies exposing students to a 
variety of industrial processes. 

328. Noise and Ventilation Control Technology. S. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 361 or consent. The 
course will demonstrate techniques for the recognition, evaluation, and control of 
noise and ventilation problems. Students will use monitoring equipment to 
evaluate situations and perform several design projects. 

380. Internship. I, II, S. 3-6 hr. (May be repeated.) PR: Consent of committee 
chairperson and department chairperson. Professional internship providing on- 
the-job training under supervision of a previously approved environmentalist in 
settings appropriate to professional objectives. 

ORTHODONTICS 

Harry L. Legan, Chairperson of the Department 

1077 Health Sciences Center North 

Degree Offered: Master of Science 

Graduate Faculty: Members Legan, McCutcheon, Overman, Paonaskar, and Staggers. 

Master of Science 

The School of Dentistry and its Department of Orthodontics offer a 
program of advanced study and clinical training leading to the degree of 
master of science (M.S.). The program requires a minimum of 34 months 
(three academic years and two summers) of full-time residency in the School 
of Dentistry, and is designed to qualify dentists for careers in orthodontic 
clinical practice, teaching, and research. 

Inquiries concerning this program should be directed to the Office of the 
Associate Dean for Postdoctoral Programs. Those applicants approved for 
admission to the program will be notified soon after December 1. 

Requirements for Admission to the Orthodontic Program 

1. Graduation from an accredited dental school. 

2. Evidence of scholastic and clinical achievement that would indicate 
the applicant's ability to progress in a program of this nature. Generally, a 
minimum grade-point average of 3.00 is required for admission. 

3. Each applicant must file with the department all information requested 
in the department application form. 

ORTHODONTICS 305 



Requirements for Master of Science Degree 

1. Fulfillment of WVU general requirements for graduate study. 

2. Thirty-four months (three academic years and two summers) of 
consecutive residency at the School of Dentistry. 

3. An approved master's thesis based on original research completed 
during the period of residency in an area related to orthodontics. 

4. Must satisfactorily pass a final oral examination. 

5. Must complete a minimum of 60 credit hours. These include 35 hours of 
orthodontic courses, a minimum of nine hours of selected basic sciences 
subjects, a minimum of six hours of elective allied subjects, and a thesis (six 
hours). 

6. Must have demonstrated satisfactory clinical competence in the 
student's field. 

7. Must have maintained a grade level commensurate with graduate 
education. 

Anatomy (Anat.) 

315. Advanced Applied Anatomy. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced descriptive and 
functional anatomy of the head and neck, especially as it relates to orthodontics. 
The course stresses the oral-facial region, the skullbase, and the architecture of 
the skull in relation to masticatory forces. 

316. Craniofacial Growth and Maturation. II. 3 hr. PR: Anat. 315 or consent. The 
current concepts of craniofacial growth and maturation are presented 
and integrated for application to clinical problems. 

Orthodontics (Dent.) 

416. Biomechanics. I, II, S. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Design and function of the teeth and their 
surrounding structures, and response of these tissues to orthodontic procedures. 

417. Orthodontic Technique. I, II, S. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Laboratory course in techniques 
related to fabrication and manipulation of orthodontic appliances. 

418. Orthodontic Materials. I, II, S. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Physical properties of materials 
used in orthodontic appliances. 

419. Orthodontic Diagnosis. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Seminar-type class on 
technique of patient examination, acquiring diagnostic records, and analyzing 
and correlating this information to the treatment of clinical problems. 

420. Cephalometrics. S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Use of radiographic cephalometry in 
studying growth of the human face, analysis of dentofacial malformations, and 
evaluation of orthodontic treatment. 

421. Orthodontic Mechanics. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Dent. 416, 417. Seminar and laboratory 
course on basic orthodontic mechanical properties. 

422. Advanced Orthodontic Mechanics. I, II, S. 1 hr. PR: Dent. 421. Continuation of 
Dent. 421 involving more difficult type cases and introducing more sophisticated 
appliance therapy. 

423. Growth and Development. II. 1-5 hr. PR: Consent. Seminar-type course on normal 
and abnormal growth of the human head and its application to orthodontics. 

425. Orthodontic Seminar. I, II, S. 1-8 hr. PR: Consent. Discussions involving all 
branches of dental science, with special emphasis on the orthodontic interest. 
Assigned topics and articles in the literature discussed. 

426. Orthodontic Clinic. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Dent. 416, 417. Clinical treatment of 
selected patients. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 
306 ORTHODONTICS 



Pathology (Path.) 

397. Pediatric Oral Pathology. I. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Lecture and seminar course on 
inherited diseases and other pathologic situations of oral cavity and face specific 
for pediatric age group. 

Statistics (Stat.) 

311. Statistical Methods 1. 1, II. 3 hr. PR: Math 3. Statistical models, distributions, 
probability, random variables, tests of hypotheses, confidence intervals, regres- 
sion, correlation, transformations, F and Chi-square distributions, analysis of 
variance and multiple comparisons. (Equiv. to Ed. P. 311 and Psych. 311.) 

PETROLEUM ENGINEERING 

Samuel Ameri, Chairperson of the Department 

347A COMER Building 

Degree Offered: Master of Science in Petroleum Engineering 

Graduate Faculty: Members Ameri, Aminian, Wasson, and Yu. 

Master of Science in Petroleum Engineering (M.S.Pet.E.) 

A student desiring to take courses forgraduate credit at the master's level 
in the College of Mineral and Energy Resources must first apply for admission 
and state the major field. 

An applicant with a baccalaureate degree, or its equivalent in petroleum 
or natural gas engineering, will be admitted on the same basis as graduates of 
WVU. Lacking these qualifications, the applicant must first fulfill the College 
of Mineral and Energy Resources requirements of the Department of Petroleum 
and Natural Gas Engineering. 

Academic Standards. Each student will, with the approval of the 
student's graduate committee— appointed with the consent of the student 
within the first semester of registration— follow a planned program. The 
program contains a minimum of 24 hours of course work and six hours of 
independent and original study in the petroleum and natural gas engineering 
field leading to a master's thesis or 30 hours of course work and three hours of 
independent study leading to a comprehensive problem report. At least 60 
percent of the course credits must be from 300-level or400-level courses while 
the remainder can be made up of 200-level courses. 

Approval for candidacy for a graduate degree by faculty action is 
required to establish eligibility for a degree. A graduate student may request 
approval by formal application after completing a minimum of 12 semester 
hours of graduate courses with a grade-point average of at least 3.0 (B), based 
on all graduate courses in residence for which final grades have been 
recorded. 

No credits are acceptable toward an advanced degree which are reported 
with a grade lower than C. To qualify for an advanced degree, a graduate 
student must have a grade-point average of at least 3.0 based on all courses 
completed in residence for graduate credit. Each candidate for a degree must 
select a major subject and submit a thesis showing independent, original 
study in petroleum engineering. 

Each degree candidate is required to take Pet.E. 496. 

Petroleum Engineering (Pet.E.) 

207. Natural Gas Engineering. 1. 4 hr. PR: Pet.E. 233, M.A.E. 101, 114, Math. 18. Natural 
gas properties, compression, transmission, processing, and application of reservoir 
engineering principles to predict the performance and design of gas, gas- 
condensate, and storage reservoirs. Includes a laboratory devoted to gas measure- 
ments. 3 hr. lee; 3 hr. lab. 

PETROLEUM ENGINEERING 307 



208. Natural Gas Production and Storage. II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 207, 234 or consent. 
Development of gas and gas-condensate reservoirs; design and development of 
gas storage fields in depleted gas, gas-condensate, oil reservoirs and aquifers; 
design of natural gas production and processing equipment. 

210. Drilling Engineering. II. 4 hr. PR or Cone: Geol. 1, M.A.E. 114. Rock properties, 
functions and design considerations of rotating system, hoisting system, and 
circulation system; drilling fluids calculations and selections; hydraulic programs; 
drilling optimization; casing and casing string design; cementing programs; and 
pressure control. 

211. Production Engineering. I. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 210. Well completion, performance of 
productive formation, drill stem tests, completion of wells, flowing wells, gas lift 
methods and equipment, pumping installation design, well stimulation, emulsion, 
treating, gathering and storage of oil and gas, field automation. 3 hr lee. 

212. Drilling Fluids Laboratory. I, II. 1 hr. PR or Cone: Pet.E. 210, Chem. 141, M.A.E. 
114. Topics include clay hydration, viscosity of water-based fluids, mud weight 
control, filtration studies, thinning agents, chemical contaminants, lime muds, 
polymer muds, rheological models, and liquid and solid determination. 

215. Transport Phenomena in Petroleum Engineering. II. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 41. Introduc- 
tion to fluid flow in pipes, two-phase flow, rotary drilling hydraulics, primary 
cementing jobs, flow calculations, flow measuring devices, fluid machinery, 
dimensional analysis, and heat transfer. 

216. Petroleum Engineering Design. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 234 or consent. Comprehensive 
problems in design involving systems in oil and gas production, field processing, 
transportation, and storage. Three 3-hr. labs. 

224. Petroleum Engineering Problems. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing. Investigation 
and detailed report on a special problem in petroleum engineering. Supervised by 
a member of the Petroleum Engineering faculty. A final oral examination is 
required. 

233. Elements of Petroleum Reservoir Engineering. II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 236 or consent. 
Basic properties of petroleum reservoir rocks. Fluid flow through porous materials. 
Evaluation of oil and gas reserves. 3 hr. lee. 

234. Applied Petroleum Reservoir Engineering. I. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 233 or consent. 
Application of reservoir engineering data to calculation of recovery potentials and 
to analysis, simulation, and prediction of reservoir performance under a variety of 
production methods to effect maximum conservation. 3 hr. lee. 

235. Formation Evaluation. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 210 or consent. Various well logging 
methods and related calculations with exercises in interpretation of data from 
actual well logs. 3 hr. lee. 

236. Petroleum Properties and Phase Behavior. I, II. 3 hr. PR or Cone: Chem. 141. 
Theoretical and applied phase behavior of hydrocarbon systems and hydrocarbon 
fluid properties. Applications to petroleum reservoir and production engineering 
design. 2 hr. lee, 3 hr. lab. 

241. Oil and Gas Property Evaluation. I. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 235; Coreq. Pet.E. 211 and 234, 
or consent. Reserve estimation, decline analysis, petroleum properties evaluation 
including interest calculations, costs estimation, and taxes evaluation. Overview 
investment decision analysis and computer applications in properties evaluation. 

244. Petroleum Reservoir Engineering Laboratory. I, II. 1 hr. PR or Cone: Pet.E. 233. 
Laboratory evaluation of basic and special petroleum reservoir rock properties. 3 
hr. lab. 

262. introduction to Reservoir Simulation. I. 3 hr. PR: M. 281, Pet.E. 234 or consent. Par- 
tial differential equations for fluid flow in porous media and the use of finite-dif- 
ference equations in solving reservoir flow problems for various boundary condi- 
tions. Study of individual well pressures and fundamentals of history matching. 

308 PETROLEUM ENGINEERING 



299. Well Stimulation Design. II. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 43, Pet.E. 210, 233, 235. [Field trips 
required.] Fundamentals of well stimulation, treatment design and their applica- 
tions to low permeability formations. 

302. Fluid Flow in Porous Media. I. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 234, Math. 18 or consent. Theoretical 
and practical aspects of the physical principles of hydrodynamics in porous 
media. 3 hr. lee. 

340. Secondary Recovery of Oil by Water Flooding. I. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 233. Theory of 
immiscible fluid displacement mechanism, evaluation and economics of water 
flood projects, and oil field flooding techniques. 3 hr. lee. 

343. Advanced Secondary Recovery. II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 340. Secondary recovery of oil 
by gas flooding, miscible fluid injection, in situ combustion, and heat injection. 3 
hr. lee. 

362. Reservoir Simulation and Modeling. II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 262 or consent. Application 
of finite-difference equations to multi-phase fluid flow in porous media in two or 
three dimensions with gravity and capillary pressure effects. Simulation of 
water-flood performance and enhanced recovery techniques. 

384. Pressure Transient Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 234 or consent. Methods of 
analysis of pressure transient data obtained from well testing for the purpose of 
determining in-situ reservoir conditions including porosity, lateral extent, average 
reservoir pressure, and formation permeability. 

394. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Selected fields of study in petroleum 
and natural gas engineering. 

397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research 
activities leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent 
scholarly project. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Individual study and oral presentation of 
selected topics in petroleum engineering. Current petroleum literature and 
research are discussed. 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.4 

General Minerals Program (M.) 

281. Applied Mineral Computer Methods. I, II. 3 hr. PR: M. 2; Math. 16. Problem solving 
in mineral processing, mineral resources, mining, and petroleum and natural gas 
engineering. Emphasis on applications using various computing technologies. 

PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES 

James K. Lim, Interim Coordinator of Graduate Pharmaceutical Sciences Studies 

1136 Health Sciences Center 

Degrees Offered: Master of Science, Doctor of Philosophy 

Graduate Faculty: Members Abate, Brister, Brushwood, Elliott, Gannett, Glover, 
Griffith, Higa, Howard, Jacknowitz, Khoury, Kirsch, Lalka, Lim, Ma, Mad- 
havan, Makela, Malanga, Nematollahi, Noonan, O'Connell, O'Donnell, Ponte, Riley, 
Rojanasakul, Rosenbluth, Shah, Stevenson, Stout, and Wedin. 

The School of Pharmacy offers graduate programs in the basic pharma- 
ceutical sciences and in administrative pharmacy, leading to the degrees of 
Master of Science (M.S.) and Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) These research- 
oriented curricula and programs are sufficiently flexible to accommodate 
individual interests, capabilities, and potential of the student for maximum 
academic development in becoming competent researchers and teachers. 

PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES 309 



For general admission, applicants must satisfy the requirements for all 
graduate students entering WVU. For admission with regular student status, 
the applicant must possess a baccalaureate degree from a suitable area of 
study, an overall grade-point average of at least 2.75, and an aptitude and 
interest for graduate work in the pharmaceutical sciences. Applicants not 
admitted with regular student status may be considered for alternate 
admission status, as explained in Part 2 of this catalog. Graduate Record 
Examination scores in the verbal, quantitative, and analytical portions of the 
examination are required of all students, and TOEFL, or similar scores, are 
additionally required of international applicants. For applicants in the area of 
behavioral and administrative pharmacy, test scores on the Graduate 
Management Admissions Test (GMAT) are acceptable, although GRE scores 
are preferred. 

Academic Standards 

No course credits with a grade of less than C may be counted toward 
fulfilling credit-hour requirements for a graduate degree. Furthermore, a 
cumulative grade-point average of no less than 3.0 in all graduate courses 
must be obtained by the student to qualify for an advanced degree. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

Students admitted for the Master of Science (M.S.) may specialize in 
pharmacy administration, pharmacology and toxicology, pharmacognosy, 
pharmaceutical chemistry, industrial pharmacy, medicinal chemistry, phar- 
maceutics, biopharmaceutics, and pharmacokinetics. 

Requirements for M.S. Degree 

To be eligible for the M.S. degree, students must complete a minimum of 
30 hours of graduate credit, of which no more than six hours may be for 
research and thesis. 

Upon completion of course work and research requirements, and after 
submission of the thesis, an oral examination for the thesis defense will be 
administered by the student's advisory committee. 

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 

Students admitted for the Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) degree program 
may choose among several specialty areas, which include medicinal chemistry, 
pharmaceutics/biopharmaceutics/pharmacokinetics, and behavioral and ad- 
ministrative pharmacy. 

Requirements for Ph.D. Degree 

The student's first semester is usually occupied with course work while 
under the guidance of an interim advisory committee. During this period, a 
student will confer with faculty members in the student's area of interest 
concerning a possible research project, and a major professor should be 
chosen by the end of the first semester of graduate study. The student's 
research committee (minimum of five for Ph.D., or three for M.S.) should be 
formed by the end of the second semester of graduate study, occurring usually 
at the completion of 18-20 hours of graduate course work. Any interest to 
pursue the M.S. degree en route to the Ph.D. should also be stated at this time. 
Students must complete all requirements for the M.S. degree except the 
preparation and defense of the thesis in order to advance in the Ph.D. program. 

310 PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES 



The student, however, may with committee advice, elect to prepare and 
defend a thesis for first obtaining the M.S. before the Ph.D. 

A formal study and research plan must be submitted by the student upon 
completion of 35 credit-hours (or 24 credit-hours for the M.S.) of formal 
graduate course work. With guidance form the research advisory committee 
and by the end of the second year in the program, the student should have 
completed the language/research tool requirements. 

To be admitted for candidacy of the Ph.D. degree, the student must satisfy 
the above requirements and pass oral and written qualifying examinations. 
After admission to candidacy for the Ph.D., a student normally devotes 
substantial time to work on an original research project, which culminates in 
a dissertation. The dissertation must be satisfactorily completed and defended 
at an oral examination before the recommendation for the awarding of the 
Ph.D. degree. 

Pharmaceutical Chemistry (Ph. Ch.) 

375. Advanced Pharmaceutical Analysis. I or II. 3 hr. Spectroscopic methods of 
analysis with emphasis on their applications in pharmaceutical problems and in 
biological sciences. 

376. Advanced Pharmaceutical Analysis. I or II. 3 hr. Continuation of Ph. Ch. 375, with 
emphasis on electro-analytical methods and preparation of samples from pharma- 
ceutical dosage forms and from biological materials. 

377. Advanced Pharmaceutical Analysis. I or II. 3 hr. Physical-chemical principles 
involved in methods development. A special problem is assigned as an integral 
part of the course. 

Pharmacognosy (Pcog.) 

340. Organic Plant Constituents. I or II. 3 hr. Occurrence, properties, biogenesis, etc. of 
a number of classes of organic compounds derived from plants. Emphasis on 
secondary metabolites which contain products of pharmaceutical or medicinal 
interest. 

341. Isolation of Plant Constituents. I or II. 3-5 hr. Acquaints the student with 
techniques used in extraction, separation, and isolation of plant constituents. 

Pharmacy (Phar.) 

300. Industrial Pharmacy. I. 4 hr. Major aspects and principles of dosage form 
development and manufacture. Structure of industry and government influences. 
Laboratory experiences in manufacturing and development techniques. 

301. Advanced Biopharmaceutics. I or II. 3 hr. Concepts of biopharmaceutics and 
pharmacokinetics in relation to the design and evaluation of dosage forms and 
determination of rational dosage regimens in health and disease. 

314. Cosmetic Formulation. II. 3 hr. PR: Phar. 203. Introduction to principles and basic 
considerations of cosmetic formulations, including review of anatomy/physiology 
of skin. Laboratory exposes students to practical aspects of processing the more 
popular cosmetic products. 

315. Physical Pharmacy. I or II. 3 hr. Designed to illustrate the special application of 
physicochemical properties of materials to pharmaceutical and physiological 
systems. Especially useful in delineating formulation considerations impinging 
upon the stability of complex systems. 

PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES 311 



370. The Synthesis of Drugs. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 332 and consent. A survey of the 
approaches employed in the synthesis of a variety of examples of pharmacologi- 
cally useful agents. Emphasis is placed on retrosynthetic analysis of target 
molecules and the application of synthetic procedures to multi-step synthesis. 

390. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. 

391. Seminar in Pharmaceutical Sciences. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. A multidisciplinary 
weekly presentation and discussion of special topics and research in the 
pharmaceutical sciences. [Weekly attendance is required and grading is on an S/U 
basis only.) 

396. Special Problems in Pharmaceutical Sciences. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. Where special 
interest is shown by the student in an area other than of the student's thesis 
research, a faculty member will supervise individual study and research. 

484. Speciai Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. For use by disciplines in the pharmaceutical 
sciences wishing to have graduate students and faculty participate in seminars 
and group discussion on specialized or technical topics at the advanced level. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Supervised 
practices in college teaching of pharmacy. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects 
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent 
or through specially scheduled lectures. 

496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Formal presentation by graduate 
students to assembled graduate faculty and students of research or special topics 
approved by adviser. Title to be presented at start of semester. Required at least 
once annually. (Grading is S/U.) 

497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

498. Thesis. I, II, S. 2-4 hr. PR: Consent. 

Pharmacy Administration (Phar. Ad.) 

320. Drug Regulation and Control. I or II. 3 hr. Legislation affecting the development, 
introduction, control, and utilization of drugs in the American economy. 

321. Drug Distribution Systems. I or II. 3 hr. Detailed study and analysis of drug 
distribution in institutional environments. 

323. Economics of the Pharmaceutical Industry. I or II. 3 hr. History, background, and 
formation of major drug industries, Oligopolistic practices, mergers, combines, 
costs of research, and production. 

Pharmaceutics (Pceut.) 

302. Advanced Pharmaceutics. I or II. 3 hr. Physiochemical and biopharmaceutical 
principles involved in disperse systems (liquid, semi-solid, and solid) which 
function as dosage forms. Considerations of properties of solid dispersions, 
micromeritics, diffusion of liquid dispersions, interfacial phenomena, emulsifica- 
tion, suspensions, prolonged action medication, etc. 



312 PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES 



PHARMACOLOGY AND TOXICOLOGY 

William W. Fleming, Chairperson of the Department 

3151 Health Sciences North 

Degrees Offered: Master of Science, Doctor of Philosophy 

Graduate Faculty: Members Azzaro, Birkle, Colasanti, Craig, Davis, Fedan, Fleming, 

Houser, Mawhinney, Reasor, Smith, Stitzel, Strobl, Taylor, Van Dyke, Weber, and 

Worley. 

Pharmacology and toxicology involve all aspects of the action of drugs on 
living systems and their constituent parts. These range from the chemical 
reactions taking place within cells to the evaluation of a drug in the treatment 
of human disease. The Department of Pharmacology and Toxicology offers 
graduate studies leading to the degrees of Master of Science and Doctor of 
Philosophy, with research concentrations in such areas as autonomic pharma- 
cology, biochemical pharmacology, neuropharmacology, molecular pharma- 
cology, cardiovascular pharmacology, endocrine pharmacology, malarial 
chemotherapy, and molecular, renal, hepatic, and pulmonary toxicology. 

Admission Requirements 

Regular applicants for the graduate program in pharmacology and 
toxicology should present, as a minimum, the following undergraduate 
courses: one semester of biology; two semesters of physics; one semester of 
calculus; four semesters of chemistry including two semesters of organic 
chemistry. Two letters of recommendation from science professors, an official 
transcript, and the results of the Graduate Record Examination are also 
required. The prospective student should have a minimum 3.0 overall grade- 
point average at the undergraduate level. 

In general, students requesting financial support should have all creden- 
tials forwarded by February 1. For additional information write to the 
Director of Graduate Studies, Department of Pharmacology and Toxicology, 
WVU Health Sciences Center, Morgantown, WV 26506. 

Master of Science 

Ordinarily the department does not accept graduate students solely into a 
master's program. However, the master's degree is offered and is available as 
an intermediate degree en route to the Ph.D. Its primary function, as viewed 
by the faculty, is as an aid to the student new to research for the formulation, 
conduct, and writing of an abbreviated, but complete, independent research 
project. The course work requirements for the M.S. in pharmacology and 
toxicology usually consist of Physiology 344 and 345, Biochemistry 231, 
Statistics 311, Pharmacology and Toxicology 361, 364, 461, 462, and 497. Most 
students, with the faculty's concurrence, choose to proceed directly with their 
doctoral research without a master's degree. These students must submit a 
comprehensive progress report on their research in lieu of a thesis. 

Doctor of Philosophy 

Before official admission to candidacy for the doctorate, the student must 
satisfactorily complete a grant-writing exercise, an acceptable progress 
report, and an oral comprehensive qualifying examination. 

A doctoral examining committee will be formed at the time of submission 
of the grant proposal (at the beginning of the third year in the program). The 
committee will generally consist of at least three members from within the 



PHARMACOLOGY AND TOXICOLOGY 313 



Department of Pharmacology and Toxicology and two from outside the 
department. Before any doctoral committee is appointed, its membership 
must be approved by the department faculty. The committee will then meet 
with the student to approve the grant-writing exercise and to discuss the 
details of the proposed dissertation research. Regardless of whether the 
student takes an M.S. or elects to do a progress report, he/she and the 
committee must agree on the final plan for the dissertation research. The 
committee is to be informed if major changes in the plan are contemplated and 
will meet periodically with the student to discuss his/her progress. Three or 
four months before the completion of the research project, the committee will 
again meet with the student to decide specific details of the dissertation 
preparation. 

The oral preliminary examination will be held in early January of the 
student's third year in the program. The scheduling of the preliminary 
examination is contingent upon successful completion of all work to that date, 
including a satisfactory grant application. The student's doctoral committee 
will constitute the oral examining body. 

If the student successfully passes the oral examination, a progress report 
should be submitted to his/her dissertation committee on or about March 1 of 
the third year. 

If a student is not successful in the oral preliminary examination, the 
committee may recommend a second attempt to take place not less than one 
nor more than three months later. Alternatively, the committee may recom- 
mend to the entire faculty that the student should write a master's thesis. 

A progress report is expected to be written by each student in the 
program, except those students who are receiving an M.S. degree. M.S. 
students will write a master's thesis. The progress report should be written in 
the style of a dissertation and should be presented in an acceptable form to the 
dissertation committee on or about March 1 of the student's third year in the 
program. The student will defend the progress report before the dissertation 
committee. 

Dissertation 

Upon admission to candidacy for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy, the 
candidate must select a topic for the dissertation under the direction of the 
candidate's adviser, complete a dissertation which makes a contribution to 
knowledge in the candidate's area of concentration, and pass an oral 
examination based primarily upon the dissertation. After successful comple- 
tion of the oral examination and submission of the final copy of the 
dissertation, the candidate will be recommended for the degree. 

Research and Instruction 

Autonomic pharmacology: autonomic regulation of the cardiovascular 
system and of smooth muscle; sensitivity to autonomic drugs; electrophysio- 
logic studies of cardiac and smooth muscle. 

Chemotherapy: antimalarial agents, anticancer agents, effects of pharma- 
cological agents on single-cell organisms. 

Biochemical pharmacology: drug metabolism, effects of drugs on lipid 
and nucleic acid metabolism. 

Molecular pharmacology: interaction of drugs and hormones with nucleic 
acids. 

314 PHARMACOLOGY AND TOXICOLOGY 



Endocrine pharmacology: mechanism of action of steroids, metabolism of 
sex accessory tissues, relationship of hormones to tumor growth and 
development. 

Neuropharmacology: biochemical basis of epilepsy, mechanism of action 
of anticonvulsant drugs, neuromediators in the central nervous system. 

Toxicology: metabolism of toxic agents, pulmonary toxicology, renal 
toxicology, immunotoxicology, environmental toxicology, and perinatal phar- 
macology and toxicology. 

Pharmacology and Toxicology (Pcol.) 

243. Pharmacology for Pharmacy Students. I. 4 hr. PR: Completion of first year in 
Pharmacy; approval of course director. Principles, pharmacodynamic actions, 
and therapeutic applications of clinically useful drugs. 

360. Pharmacology and Therapeutics. (For dental and graduate students.) I. 4 hr. PR: 
Dental student standing or consent. Lecture and demonstrations on pharmacologi- 
cal actions and therapeutic uses of drugs. 

361. Pharmacology. (For medical students and a limited number of regular, full-time 
graduate students in basic medical science departments.) II. 6 hr. PR: Consent of 
department chairperson. Lecture-conference-laboratory on principles, pharmaco- 
dynamic actions, and therapeutic applications of clinically useful drugs. 

362. Occupational Toxicology. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. General principles of toxicology 
with special emphasis on occupational health. Classes of chemicals which pose 
problems in the workplace will be emphasized. 

363. Toxicology. I. 3-4 hr. (Variable credit; majors enroll for4 hr., non-majors for 3 hr.) 
PR: Consent. Theoretical concepts and general principles of toxicology with 
special emphasis on molecular mechanisms of toxicity. 3-4 hr. lee. (Offered 
alternate even years.} 

364. Advanced Pharmacology. 1-6 hr. PR: Pcol. 361 or consent. Advanced lectures and 
discussion in three parts: 1. Advanced Basic Principles of Pharmacology, 2. 
Advanced Cellular Pharmacology, and 3. Advanced Toxicology. (Offered every 
second year.] 

367. Advanced Neuropharmacology. 1-6 hr. PR: Pcol. 361 or consent. Advanced 
lectures and discussion in three parts: 1. Receptors and Signal Transduction, 2. 
Neurochemistry-Neurotrasmitters, and 3. Advanced Neurosystems. (Offered 
every second year.) 

461. Seminar in Pharmacology. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. PR: Pcol. 361 or graduate status in 
basic medical sciences. 

462. Literature Survey. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. PR: Graduate status in pharmacology and 
toxicology. Current literature pertinent to pharmacology and toxicology including 
journals of allied biological sciences. 

490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. per sem. PR: Pcol. 361 and consent. (For advanced 
graduate students.) Critical evaluation of preparation and delivery of lectures in 
specified areas of pharmacology and toxicology. 

491. Advanced Study. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent of chairperson. 
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. per sem. 



PHARMACOLOGY AND TOXICOLOGY 315 



PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

J. William Douglas, Dean, School of Physical Education 

258 Coliseum 

Carl P. Bahneman, Chairperson, Department of Health, Physical Education, and 

Athletic Training 

256 Coliseum 

William L. Alsop, Chairperson, Department of Sport and Exercise Studies 

265 Coliseum 

Degrees Offered: Master of Science 

Physical Education Areas of Emphasis for: 

Certificate of Advanced Study (Education) 

Doctor of Education (Education) 
Graduate Faculty: Members Bahneman, Branch, Brooks, J. W. Douglas, Hawkins, 
Morton, Ostrow, Ullrich, Wiegand, and Yeater. Associate Members Carson, Etzel, 
Kurucz, McPherson, Maxwell, and Ott. 

Graduate students in the School of Physical Education pursue courses 
and scholarly tasks which may lead to the Master of Science in Physical 
Education or the Doctor of Education, with concentrations in professional 
physical education or sport and exercise studies. Admission deadlines vary 
across program areas. Students who seek a graduate assistantship should 
apply by March 1. 

Master of Science (M.S.) 

Professional Physical Education Department Admission Standards 

Students are admitted to the Department of Professional Physical 
Education for work leading to the master of science degree if they hold a 
baccalaureate degree from an approved institution of higher education, have a 
2.75 undergraduate grade-point average, and satisfy prerequisites in the 
courses for which they register. 

Students who do not meet the 2.75 grade-point average requirement are 
admitted as provisional graduate students and are required to attain a 3.0 
grade-point average in the first 12 hours of prescribed course work in order to 
be reclassified as a regular graduate student. Courses taken in off-campus 
education are accepted for degree purposes if the student has had prior 
approval from the student's adviser. In order to receive the degree, the student 
must have a minimum average of 3.0 in all course work leading toward the 
degree and satisfy all department and University requirements. 

Professional Physical Education Department Programs 

The Department of Professional Physical Education offers the master of 
science degree with the following options. Specific course requirements are 
available upon request. 

A. Motor Development/Master Teacher Program— (1) Internship Option: 
This option is designed to develop a master teacher for the public school 
population. Mainstreaming and individualized instructional skills are em- 
phasized together with a developmental focus; (2) Research Option: This 
option is very similar to the master teacher option. However, more emphasis 
is placed on the development of research skills, with a thesis being required. 

B. Athletic Training— This option is designed to develop the skills 
necessary to be an athletic trainer. West Virginia State certification in athletic 
training is awarded upon completion. Students who cannot attend classes 
during the regular school year can complete this option in three consecutive 
summers. 

316 PHYSICAL EDUCATION 



Sport and Exercise Studies Department Admission Standards 

Students are admitted to the Department of Sport and Exercise Studies 
for work leading to the master of science degree if they hold a baccalaureate 
degree from an approved institution of higher education and satisfy other 
admission criteria designated by the program specialization area (available 
upon request). Admission to the sport and exercise studies program areas is 
highly competitive and limited to 15 students per program emphasis; 
applications should be submitted by March 1. In order to receive the degree, 
the student must have a minimum 3.0 average in all course work leading 
toward the degree and satisfy all department and University requirements. 

Sport and Exercise Studies Department Programs 

The Department of Sport and Exercise Studies offers the master of 
science degree with the following areas of specialization. Specific course 
requirements are available upon request. 

A. Sport Studies— (1) Sport Behavior: This specialization concentrates 
on the psycho/social dimensions of sport. A thesis is required. (2) Sport 
Management: The emphasis is on management and administration of sport 
related agencies and enterprises. 

B. Exercise Studies— (1) Fitness Assessment, Evaluation and Prescrip- 
tion: The emphasis concentrates on assessment and evaluation of fitness 
parameters of all age groups involved in physical activity. Thesis or 
Internship option. 

Doctor of Education (Ed.D.) 

Professional Physical Education and Sport and Exercise Studies Departments 

Options leading to the Doctor of Education (Ed.D.) degree in the 
Department of Professional Physical Education include motor development 
(with emphasis in pedagogy and special populations) and administration of 
sport and physical education. Options leading to the Doctor of Education 
degree in the Department of Sport and Exercise Studies include sport 
behavior and sport physiology. 

Admission to the Program 

Regular Graduate Student Status— The following are minimum admission 
criteria for students to be admitted with regular status to the options in motor 
development, administration of physical education, and sport behavior. 
Students interested in sport physiology should consult the latest department 
guidelines: 

• Undergraduate grade-point average of 3.0 from an approved institution; 

• Master's degree grade-point average of 3.5 from an approved institution; 

• Graduate Record Examination score of 1050 (verbal/quantitative) or 
Miller Analogies Test score of 55; 

• TOEFL score of 550 (international applicants); and 

• Three letters of reference. 

All materials and procedures must be completed by March 1 of the year in 
which the applicant intends to begin a doctoral program. Upon completion of 
the above procedures, the student's credentials are reviewed by an appropriate 
screening committee. Acceptance as an advanced graduate student with 
regular status is contingent upon the screening committee's decision regarding 
the applicant's potential for scholarly productivity as judged by Graduate 
Record Examination and/or Miller Analogies Test scores, past performance in 
course work, letters of recommendation, a personal interview, and adviser/ 
program availability. 

PHYSICAL EDUCATION 317 



Provisional Graduate Student Status— Applicants who have incomplete 
credentials, deficiencies to make up, or a less than minimum required test 
score or grade-point average but who show scholarly promise may be 
admitted as advanced graduate students with provisional status. During the 
semester in which the advanced graduate student with provisional status 
completes the twelfth hour of prescribed course work, the student shall 
request, through the office of the chairperson of the appropriate doctoral 
program, admission to the program with regular graduate status. Advanced 
graduate students with provisional status cannot register for course work 
beyond the twelfth hour without having been admitted to the program as a 
student with regular graduate status. 

Program Requirements— Once the student is admitted to the program, the 
student — in concert with the adviser — selects a doctoral committee. It is this 
committee's responsibility to aid the student in planning the total program. 
During the process of completing a program, the student is expected to fulfill a 
residency requirement specified by the committee. 

Admission to Candidacy Requirements— As the student nears the termi- 
nation of the course work, application may be made to complete the final 
comprehensive examination. This examination shall consist of scholarly 
tasks designed to function as a comprehensive learning experience. The 
examination will be constructed by the student's doctoral committee. Students 
who do not successfully complete this examination may be permitted to 
attempt the examination one more time pending an appeal and subsequent 
sanction of the student's doctoral committee. There must be a time period of at 
least six months between the first and second examination periods. 

Upon successful completion of the final comprehensive examination, the 
student may present to the doctoral committee a prospectus of the dissertation. 
If the opinion of the committee is such that the student may proceed with the 
dissertation, the student is admitted to candidacy. 

Final Requirements— Upon the completion of the dissertation, the candi- 
date will appear before the doctoral committee for purposes of orally 
defending the study. Successful defense of the dissertation results in the 
awarding of the degree. All requirements must be completed within five years 
after the comprehensive examination is completed successfully. 

Professional Physical Education (P.p.e.) 

219. Gross Anatomy. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Designed to provide an overview of body 
systems and gross anatomy of the trunk and extremities. 

220. Advanced Athletic Training 1. S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 121, S.E.S. 164, 165, Saf. S. 70 or 
consent. Designed to provide an in-depth analysis of life-threatening situations in 
athletics, athletic conditioning, and general rehabilitation concepts. 

221. Advanced Athletic Training 2. 1, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 121, 219, S.E.S. 164, 165, Saf. S. 
70 or consent. Designed to investigate tissue repair, physiology of hot and cold 
treatment, therapeutic modalities and pharmacology relevant to athletic injury 
management. 

222. Advanced Athletic Training 3. II, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 219, 220, 221 or consent. 
Designed to provide in-depth analysis of athletic injury mechanisms, injury 
evaluation techniques and rehabilitation; and muscle isolation techniques. 

223. Athletic Training Practicum 1. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Practical application of 
athletic training techniques related to general rehabilitation concepts. 

224. Athletic Training Practicum 2. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Practical application of athletic 
training techniques. 

318 PHYSICAL EDUCATION 



225. Program Planning of Recreational Sport. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. An in-depth 
study of recreational sport programs, including philosophy, objectives, program 
development, management concepts, and evaluation. 

300. Workshop in Physical Education. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. 

305. Professional Issues in Physical Education. S. 3 hr. PR: Completion of 24 graduate 
hours or consent. Designed to examine current